Contents

1 Organisation of the Body........................................................................ 1

2 Cells and Tissues ..................................................................................... 7
2.1 Cells and Tissues ........................................................................... 7
2.2 Cell Cycle (Mitosis and Protein Synthesis) ................................... 27
3 Measurement, Errors and Data ............................................................. 35
4 Chemistry for Physiology ....................................................................... 43
4.1 Atoms and Molecules .................................................................... 43
4.2 Solutions ........................................................................................ 52
4.3 Diffusion and Osmosis................................................................... 61
4.4 Tonicity, Moles and Osmoles......................................................... 69
4.5 Acids, Bases and Buffers ............................................................... 79
4.6 Organic Chemistry and Macromolecules ...................................... 93
5 Integument............................................................................................... 105
6 Homeostasis ............................................................................................. 119
7 Skeleton and Joints ................................................................................. 125
8 Muscles..................................................................................................... 143
9 Gastro-Intestinal System ........................................................................ 161
10 Endocrine System.................................................................................... 191
11 Renal System ........................................................................................... 211
12 Cardiovascular System ........................................................................... 237
12.1 Blood.............................................................................................. 237
12.2 Heart .............................................................................................. 250
12.3 Blood Vessels................................................................................. 262
12.4 Pressure: The Physics of Pressure ................................................. 274

ix

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
x Contents

12.5 Pressure Applied to the Cardiovascular System................................286

12.6 Blood Pressure and Its Control..........................................................297
13 Respiratory System....................................................................................315
13.1 Anatomy and Physiology..................................................................315
13.2 Pressure Applied to the Respiratory System.....................................335
14 Nervous System...........................................................................................347
14.1 Cells and Action Potential.................................................................347
14.2 Brain and Spinal Cord Anatomy.......................................................360
14.3 Autonomic System, Neurotransmitters, Reflexes.............................377
14.4 Special Senses (Eye & Ear)...............................................................389
14.4.1 Eye.......................................................................................389
14.4.2 Ear.......................................................................................397
15 Reproductive System..................................................................................405
16 Waves, Light Waves, Sound Waves, Ultrasound
(The Physics Of)..........................................................................................419
16.1 Waves................................................................................................419
16.2 Light Waves......................................................................................424
16.3 Sound.................................................................................................429
16.4 Ultrasound.........................................................................................432
17 Ionising Radiation......................................................................................437
17.1 Medical Imaging with X-Radiation...................................................437
17.2 Radioactivity, Radiotherapy, Nuclear Medicine,
Radiation Safety................................................................................445
18 Electricity....................................................................................................465
19 Biomechanics...............................................................................................475
20 Energy and Heat.........................................................................................493

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
Chapter 1
Organisation of the Body

A large part of beginning the study of anatomy and physiology is learning the spe-
cialised words that are used. This new terminology may seem daunting but the
chal- lenge lies in its unfamiliarity rather than its difficulty of comprehension. You
must expect to encounter a lot of new words and be prepared to learn them over
the course of your study. Many of the words contain information as the words are
con- structed with a prefix and a suffix or a stem that identifies the word as
referring to a specific part of anatomy or physiology. This sometimes makes the
words rather long or unusual.
You should know what the anatomical position of the body is and in what
direc- tion the transverse, sagittal & coronal planes of the body lie. Directional
terms such as: proximal/distal; deep/superficial; superior/inferior; lateral/medial;
anterior/pos- terior; caudal/cephalic allow the location of one anatomical feature to
be placed relative to another. The dorsal and ventral body cavities are located on
different sides of the body and contain different organs. For ease of
communication, the abdomen is divided into nine regions: right hypochondriac,
epigastric, left hypo- chondriac, right lumbar, umbilical, left lumbar, right
inguinal, hypogastric (or pubic), left inguinal regions. You should know the
difference between physiology and anatomy and the definitions of metabolism,
anabolism and catabolism.

Name: __________________________________ Date: __________

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
1.
Which of the listed terms is described by: “All the chemical processes that take
place in the organelles and cytoplasm the cells of the body”?
A. Metabolism
B. Cellular respiration
C. Homeostasis
D. Physiology
Answer is A: The quoted statement is a definition of metabolism

2. Which major organ lies deep to the right hypochondriac region?

A. The stomach
B. The spleen
C. The liver
D. The duodenum
Answer is C: hypochondriac = below the rib cartilage; liver is located mostly
on the right side.
3. Which plane of the body divides it into dorsal and ventral regions?
A. Transverse
B. Axial
C. Coronal
D. Sagittal
Answer is C: dorsal and ventral = front and back – a coronal section so
divides the body into these sections.
4. To which of the following does the “tissue level” of structural organisation
refer?
A. atoms, ions, molecules and electrolytes
B. mitochondria, ribosomes, nucleus, endoplasmic reticulum
C. nephron, alveolus, villus, lobule
D. muscle, nervous, connective, epithelial
Answer is D: the listed structures are the four major tissue types.
5. The directional term “superior” in anatomy means which of the following?
A. cephalic
B. ventral
C. caudal
D. dorsal
Answer is A: cephalic refers to the head region. While superior refers to being
closer to the head than is the other anatomical structure in question.
6. Which of the following is the best definition of physiology?
A. The microscopic study of tissues and cells
B. The study of how the body works.
C. All the chemical processes that take place in the organelles of the body’s

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
 cells.
D. The body’s automatic tendency to maintain a relatively constant internal
environment.
Answer is B: physiology is indeed the study of how the (healthy) body
functions.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
1 Organisation of the Body 3

7. The “anatomical position” could be described as which of the following?

A. Lying down prone
B. Lying down supine
C. Standing displaying the ventral surface of the body
D. Standing with arms and legs abducted
Answer is C: this is the best answer. Standing is required, as is having the
arms hanging parallel to the sides, with palms facing forward.
8. Which choice best describes the location of the majority of the musculo-
skeletal system?
A. It is in the dorsal cavity
B. It is in the ventral cavity
C. It is in the abdomino-pelvic cavity
D. It is not located in a body cavity
Answer is D: the musculo-skeletal system is located in the arms and legs, and
surrounding, but outside of the abdomino-pelvic, thoracic and the dorsal
cavities.
9. Which of the following is/are the contents of the ventral cavity?
A. heart and lungs
B. brain and spinal cord
C. viscera
D. gut, kidneys, liver, pancreas, spleen, bladder, internal reproductive organs.
Answer is C: this is the best answer. It is a collective term for all organs in the
thoracic and abdomino-pelvic cavities.
10. Which of the stated relationships is correct?
A. the heart is inferior to the clavicle
B. the shoulder is distal to the carpals
C. the phalanges are proximal to the metacarpals
D. the eye is medial to the eyebrows
Answer is A: The heart is indeed below (inferior) to the clavicle. All other
choices are wrong.
11. Which of the following is/are the contents of the dorsal body cavity?
A. heart and lungs
B. brain and spinal cord
C. viscera
D. gut, kidneys, liver, pancreas, spleen, bladder, internal reproductive organs.
Answer is B: dorsal refers to the back, the cavity enclosed by the skull and
vertebrae.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4 1 Organisation of the Body

12. Which of the stated relationships is correct?

A. the heart is superior to the large intestine
B. the shoulder is distal to the metacarpals
C. the phalanges are proximal to the carpals
D. the eye is medial to the nose
Answer is A: the heart is indeed above (superior) to the intestine. All other
answers are wrong.
13. What is the study of how body parts function called?
A. histology
B. physiology
C. homeostasis
D. metabolism
Answer is B: physiology refers to function
14. Which of the following correctly describes the two named body parts?
A. the elbow is proximal to the shoulder
B. the phalanges are distal to the carpals
C. the ribs are proximal to the sternum
D. the elbow is distal to the knee
Answer is B: phalanges (finger bones) are indeed further from the trunk along
the arm, than are the carpals (wrist bones)
15. Which one of the following statements is correct?
A. the diaphragm separates the brain and spinal cord
B. the ventral cavity contains the male and female reproductive system
C. the abdomino-pelvic cavity contains the spinal cord.
D. the dorsal cavity contains the brain and spinal cord
Answer is D: dorsal means back and that is the cavity with spinal cord and
brain. B is incorrect as the genitalia are outside the ventral cavity.
16. Complete the sentence correctly: “Cervical vertebrae are……
A. superior to the rib cage.
B. inferior to the thoracic vertebrae.
C. located between the thoracic and sacral vertebrae.
D. fused into a single bone called the sacrum.
Answer is A: cervix refers to “neck”. The cervical vertebrae are in the neck
hence are above (superior) to the rib cage.
17. The dorsal body cavity contains which of the following organs?
A. The brain.
B. The brain and spinal cord.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
1 Organisation of the Body 5

C. The brain, spinal cord and heart.

D. The brain, spinal cord, heart and kidneys.
Answer is B: Dorsal refers to the back and is opposite to ventral. Only the
brain and spinal cord occupy the dorsal cavity. All other answers are
incorrect.
18. What does the process known as anabolism refer to?
A. the use of energy for producing chemical substances.
B. the breaking down phase of metabolism.
C. all the chemical process that take place in the organelles of the cells.
D. the supply of nutrients to the body’s cells.
Answer is A: anabolism refers to the process of constructing/building mole-
cules (think anabolic steroids). B refers to catabolism. C refers to metabolism.
19. To what does the term “hypochondriac” refer?
A. A condition of having too few chondria.
B. The region of abdomen inferior to the ribs.
C. A person who often complains of an ailment.
D. Having insufficient cartilage in the knees.
Answer is B: In this case “hypo-” means below, while “-chondr” refers to the
cartilage joining the ribs to the sternum (the costal cartilages). The regions of
the abdomen immediately inferior to these rib cartilages (on the left and right
sides of the body) is what is being referred to
20. If a medical image displays internal anatomy in mid-sagittal section, which of
the following describes the section?
A. A vertical section through the nose and umbilicus that divides the body
into right and left halves.
B. A cross-section through the midriff at about the level of the liver.
C. A cross-section through the upper chest at about the level of the shoulders.
D. A vertical section through the midpoint of the clavicle and through either
the right or left thigh.
Answer is A: A Sagittal section divides the body into left and right portions.
A mid sagittal section means that the dividing line is in the vertical mid line of
the body so that the halves are equal.
21. Which of the following best describes the “anatomical position”?
A. Standing vertically, arms held horizontally, legs apart so that the tips of
the head, hands and feet lie on an imaginary circle, drawn around the
body.
B. Standing “to attention”, with hands held so that thumbs are ventral while
the fifth digit is dorsal.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
6 1 Organisation of the Body

C. Standing “at ease” with hands clasped behind your back while adjacent
and dorsal to the sacrum.
D. Standing vertically, arms parallel and lateral to the ribs with hands inferior
to the elbows and supinated.
Answer is D: The anatomical position is achieved when standing with feet
comfortably apart while displaying the ventral surface of the head, body and
forearms to the same direction (forwards).
22. Which term describes the location of the adrenal glands with reference to the
kidneys?
A. proximal
B. distal
C. superior
D. inferior
Answer is C: The adrenal glands are on the cephalic side of the kidneys.
Being closer to the head, they are termed “superior to the kidneys”.
23. Which of the following terms is NOT used to identify a region of the
abdomen?
A. left hypochondriac
B. hypogastric
C. epigastric
D. right sacral
Answer is D: Right sacral is not a region on the anterior surface of the
abdomen.
24. What structure separates the thoracic cavity from the abdominal cavity?
A. The mediastinum
B. The diaphragm
C. The peritoneum
D. The pylorus
Answer is B: The muscular diaphragm physically separates these two ventral
cavities.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
2 1 Organisation of the Body

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
Chapter 2
Cells and Tissues

2.1 Cells and Tissues

Cells are composed of their cytoplasm, which includes the cytosol and organelles;
the nucleus and the surrounding plasma membrane. You should know that the
plasma membrane is a double layer of phospholipid molecules and that these mol-
ecules have a hydrophilic end and a hydrophobic end. The plasma membrane con-
tains proteins including the ATPase (the sodium-potassium pump) which moves
sodium ions out of the cell while moving potassium ions into the cell. You should
know the names and function of some of the organelles. For example you should
know that mitochondria produce ATP and that ribosomes synthesise proteins from
amino acids.
You will become familiar with the names of many cells. Often a word can be
recognised as the name of a cell because it ends in “-cyte” or, if it is an immature
cell, by ending in “-blast”. Four major types of tissue are identified in the body:
epithelial, connective, muscle and neural tissues. Of course there are many sub-
types within these categories. For example epithelial tissue may be squamous,
cuboidal, columnar or glandular. Muscle may be skeletal, smooth or cardiac.
Connective tissue is quite varied and you should be aware of the many different
examples of tissue that are categorised as “connective”. For example, blood, bone,
dermis, cartilage and tendon are all connective tissue.
1. Which structure within the cell produces ATP (adenosine triphosphate)?
A. the mitochondria
B. the nucleus
C. peripheral proteins
D. the endoplasmic reticulum
Answer is A: This is a basic function of mitochondria. All other answers are
wrong.

© Springer Science+Business Media Singapore 2016 7

M. Caon, Examination Questions and Answers in Basic Anatomy and
Physiology, DOI 10.1007/978-981-10-2332-3_2

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
8 2 Cells and Tissues

2. Which of the following is NOT a component of the cell plasma membrane?

A. cholesterol
B. proteins
C. microfilaments
D. phospholipids
Answer is C: microfilaments occur inside the cell.
3. Which list below contains the four types of tissue?
A. extracellular fluid, skeletal tissue, glandular tissue, connective tissue.
B. extracellular fluid, muscle tissue, glandular tissue, cartilaginous tissue.
C. neural tissue, skeletal tissue, epithelial tissue, cartilaginous tissue.
D. Neural tissue, muscle tissue, epithelial tissue, connective tissue.
Answer is D: These are the four types. Extracellular fluid is not a tissue.
Cartilage is a type of connective tissue.
4. Except for one, the following are types of cells. Which one is NOT a type of
cell?
A. platelets
B. leucocytes
C. macrophages
D. osteoblasts
Answer is A: Platelets are fragments of a cell (a megakaryocyte) bound by a
membrane.
5. In which part of a cell does the process of making ATP from oxygen and glu-
cose take place?
A. lysosomes
B. ribosomes
C. mitochondria
D. golgi apparatus
Answer is C: ATP production is the function of mitochondria.
6. Which of the following is a function of membrane proteins?
A. to process lipids and proteins for secretion through the plasma membrane
B. to act as receptors for hormones
C. to synthesise proteins from amino acids
D. to act as a cytoskeleton to support and shape the cell
Answer is B: One function of membrane proteins is to receive (amino acid
based) hormones that cannot pass through the plasma membrane.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
2.1 Cells and Tissues 9

7. What is the difference between simple squamous cells and simple columnar
cells?
A. squamous cells are flattened while columnar cells are taller than they are
wide.
B. simple squamous cells are one layer thick while simple columnar cells are
several layers thick.
C. simple squamous cells are epithelial tissue while simple columnar cells are
connective tissue.
D. squamous cells are flattened while columnar cells are cuboidal.
Answer is A: The names of the cells contains a description of their shape:
either flat, or like columns. Simple refers to a single layer of cells
8. Which of the following is NOT an example of a cell?
A. macrophages
B. lysosomes
C. plasmocytes
D. chondroblasts
Answer is B: the suffix “–some” refers to an organelle within a cell. The other
suffixes all indicate a type of cell.
9. Which cell organelles contain an acidic environment capable of digesting a
wide variety of molecules?
A. Lysosomes
B. Ribosomes
C. Centrosomes
D. Golgi complex
Answer is A: the prefix “lyso-” refers to the ability to dissolve or destroy mol-
ecules or cells.
10. Which form of transport through the plasma membrane requires the expendi-
ture of energy by the cell?
A. Facilitated diffusion
B. Osmosis
C. Active transport
D. Diffusion
Answer is C: The term “active” implies using energy (in the form of ATP) to
move a molecule against its concentration gradient, while the other processes
are all passive.
11. Which of the tissue types below consists of a single layer of cells?
A. stratified squamous epithelial tissue
B. glandular epithelium

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
10 2 Cells and Tissues

C. areolar connective tissue

D. simple columnar epithelial tissue
Answer is D: the word “simple” indicates a single layer of cells. Stratified
means several layers (or strata) of cells.
12. One of the following is NOT a serous membrane. Which one?
A. pleura
B. peritoneum
C. mucosa
D. pericardium
Answer is C: mucosa is a mucus membrane (& secretes mucus)
13. Which of the following is NOT made predominantly from epithelial tissue?
A. In the dermis
B. In exocrine glands
C. In endocrine glands
D. In the endothelium of blood vessels
Answer is A: The dermis contains connective tissue, nervous tissue & muscle
as well as epithelial tissue.
14. What are tendons and ligaments composed of?
A. Dense connective tissue
B. Liquid connective tissue
C. Muscular tissue
D. Epithelial tissue
Answer is A: tendons & ligaments are dense CT. This is strong as there is a
high proportion of fibres.
15. What is the composition of the intercellular matrix in connective tissue?
A. Cells and fibres
B. Serous and mucus membranes and lamina propria
C. Protein fibres and ground substance
D. Interstitial fluid
Answer is C: “intercellular” means between cells. So matrix is fibres & ground
substance (but no cells).
16. Which statement about the plasma membrane is INCORRECT?
A. It is selectively permeable.
B. It is composed of two layers of glycoprotein molecules.
C. It contains receptors for specific signalling molecules.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
2.1 Cells and Tissues 11

D. The plasma membranes of adjacent cells are held together by

desmosomes.
Answer is B: The PM is indeed made of two layers, but they are phospholipid
(not glycoprotein) molecules.
17. Which of the following is NOT epithelial tissue?
A. the epidermis
B. glandular tissue
C. the internal lining of blood vessels
D. the dermis
Answer is D: The dermis contains some of all four types of tissue.
18. Which of the following is NOT a cell found in connective tissue?
A. adipocytes
B. chondroblasts
C. keratinocytes
D. osteoblasts
Answer is C: Keratinocytes are in the epidermis which is epithelial tissue. The
other cell types occur in fat, cartilage and bone.
19. What tissue has cells that are closely packed and that have one surface
attached to a basement membrane and the other free to a space?
A. epithelial tissue
B. muscle tissue
C. connective tissue
D. nervous tissue
Answer is A: This is a definition of epithelial tissue.
20. What is the name of the mechanism that ensures that there is a higher concen-
tration of sodium ions in the extracellular fluid than in the intracellular fluid?
A. Facilitated diffusion
B. The sodium-potassium pump
C. Secondary active transport
D. Osmosis
Answer is B: The “pump” (or ATPase) transports Na+ out and K+ into the cell.
21. What are lysosomes, centrosomes and ribosomes example of?
A. stem cells
B. organelles within a cell
C. sensory receptors in the dermis
D. exocrine glands
Answer is B: the suffix “–some” refers to small body or organelle within a cell.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12 2 Cells and Tissues

22. What does simple columnar epithelial tissue refer to? Tissue with
A. a single layer of cells longer than they are wide.
B. a single layer of cells whose length, breadth and depth are about the same size.
C. several layers of cells, all of the same type.
D. several layers of cells but without a basement membrane.
Answer is A: simple = one layer. Columnar means oblong or shaped like a
column.
23. Which of the following is NOT an example of connective tissue?
A. blood
B. bone
C. tendon
D. epidermis
Answer is D: the epidermis (on top of the dermis) is epithelial tissue.
24. What is the function of phospholipids in the plasma membrane?
A. to maintain the intracellular fluid at a similar composition to that of the
interstitial fluid.
B. to form channels to selectively allow passage of small molecules.
C. to act as receptors for signalling chemicals.
D. to present a barrier to the passage of water-soluble molecules.
Answer is D: molecules that are soluble in water cannot pass through lipid
(fat). So the phospholipids are a barrier. The functions described by B. & C.
are per- formed by other molecules in the plasma membrane.
25. Which one of the following cell types is found in epithelial tissue?
A. plasma cells
B. leucocytes
C. keratinocytes
D. chondroblasts
Answer is C: keratinocytes produce keratin, the protein of the epidermis,
which is epithelial tissue.
26. Which of the following is NOT part of the plasma membrane of a cell?
A. integral proteins
B. glycoproteins
C. plasma proteins
D. peripheral proteins
Answer is C: as the name implies, plasma proteins are found in the blood
plasma. Not to be confused with the plasma membrane.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
2.1 Cells and Tissues 13

27. A major role for mitochondria is to

A. transcribe the information in DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid)
B. produce ATP (adenosine triphosphate)
C. synthesise proteins from amino acids
D. use enzymes to lyse molecules
Answer is B: ATP is only produced within the mitochondria.
28. Choose the tissue below that is one of the four primary types of body tissue.
A. epidermal tissue
B. epithelial tissue
C. interstitial tissue
D. osseous tissue
Answer is B: epithelial is a major tissue type (as is muscle, nervous &
connective)
29. What are the primary types of tissue in the body?
A. Muscle, nervous, connective and epithelial
B. Muscle, nervous, connective, osseous and epithelial
C. Muscle, nervous, connective, osseous, blood and epithelial
D. Muscle, nervous, connective, glandular and epithelial
Answer is A: There are 4 major types (not 5 or 6). Osseous & blood are also
connective, while glandular tissue is also epithelial.
30. What is the name of the membrane that surrounds the lungs?
A. visceral peritoneum
B. parietal peritoneum
C. visceral pleura
D. dura mater
Answer is C: Pleura is around the lung, while visceral refers to the layer of the
pleura that is attached to the lung surface.
31. What is a role performed by mitochondria?
A. contain enzymes capable of digesting molecules
B. produce ATP
C. synthesise proteins
D. synthesise fatty acids, phospholipids & cholesterol
Answer is B: mitochondria produce ATP. The other tasks are performed by
lysosomes, ribosomes and endoplasmic reticulum respectively.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14 2 Cells and Tissues

32. Which of the following is NOT found in the plasma membrane?

A. proteins
B. cholesterol
C. endoplasmic reticulum
D. phospholipids
Answer is C: endoplasmic reticulum is an organelle and found within the cell.
33. Which one of the following cell types is found in epithelial tissue?
A. mast cells
B. adipocytes
C. chondroblasts
D. keratinocytes
Answer is D: These cells produce keratin, the protein of the stratum corneum
34. Which of the following is NOT part of the plasma membrane of a cell?
A. phospholipid
B. glycoprotein
C. chromatin
D. cholesterol
Answer is C: chromatin makes up chromosomes.
35. A major role for mitochondria is to
A. synthesise fatty acids, phospholipids & steroids
B. deliver lipids and proteins to plasma membrane for secretion
C. synthesise proteins from amino acids
D. produce ATP (adenosine triphosphate)
Answer is D: mitochondria produce ATP from glucose
36. Choose the tissue below that is NOT one of the four primary types of body
tissue.
A. connective tissue
B. muscular tissue
C. nervous tissue
D. osseous tissue
Answer is D: osseous tissue (or bone) is a connective tissue
37. What is the purpose of mitochondria?
A. to store the nucleolus and chromatin
B. to produce adenosine triphosphate

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
2.1 Cells and Tissues 15

C. to support and shape the cell.

D. they produce enzymes to break down molecules
Answer is B: Mitochondria are the site of ATP
production
38. The plasma membrane of a cell contains molecules that have a hydrophobic
end and a hydrophilic end What are they called?
A. phospholipids
B. cholesterol
C. integral proteins
D. glycoproteins
Answer is A: the phosphate end is hydrophilic (water soluble) while the lipid
end is hydrophobic (insoluble in water).
39. Adipocytes are found in which type of tissue?
A. muscle tissue
B. epithelial tissue
C. nervous tissue
D. connective tissue
Answer is D: adipocytes are found in fat (adipose tissue) which is a type of
connective tissue.
40. What is the role of mitochondria? To:
A. function in cell division
B. synthesise proteins
C. form part of the plasma membrane
D. synthesise fatty acids, phospholipids and steroids.
Answer is C: mitochondria produce ATP
41. Which one of the following cell types is found in epithelial tissue?
A. mast cells
B. adipocytes
C. chondroblasts
D. melanocytes
Answer is D: melanocytes produce melanin to protect the skin from
ultraviolet radiation and it results in tanning of the skin.
42. What is the difference between “loose” connective tissue (CT) and “dense”
connective tissue?
A. Fibres occupy most of the volume in dense CT
B. Dense CT includes cartilage, loose CT does not.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
16 2 Cells and Tissues

C. Loose CT has a good blood supply while dense CT does not.

D. Loose CT has no fibres (and dense CT does).
Answer is A: the preponderance of fibres is what makes the CT “dense”.
Cartilage is classified as supportive CT.
43. Facilitated diffusion refers to the process of
A. movement along a concentration gradient assisted by protein carrier
molecules.
B. movement of ions and molecules along a concentration gradient.
C. transport of molecules and ions against their concentration gradient.
D. water movement through a semi-permeable membrane
Answer is A: facilitated refers to the role of the protein carriers. The other
choices refer to diffusion, active transport and osmosis respectively
44. What do fibroblasts, chondroblasts, osteoblasts and haemocytoblasts have in
common?
A. they are all types of white blood cell.
B. they are all macrophages.
C. they are all immature cells.
D. they are all types of epithelial cell.
Answer is C: the suffix “-blast” implies that these cells have not yet finished
their differentiation. That is are immature.
45. Which is NOT true of connective tissue (CT)?
A. the cells are closely packed
B. the tissue contains protein fibres and ground substance.
C. types include loose CT, dense CT and liquid CT.
D. CT contains white blood cells.
Answer is A: being close packed in a property of epithelial tissue. In CT the
cells are widely spaced, being separated by the ground substance.
46. Active transport across the plasma membrane may be described by which
statement?
A. active transport requires energy from ATP.
B. active transport is also known as endocytosis.
C. active transport moves molecules along their concentration gradient.
D. active transport is the movement of lipid-soluble molecules through the
plasma membrane.
Answer is A: this is the only correct answer. The others are not true.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
2.1 Cells and Tissues 17

47. Which of the following cell types denotes an immature cell?

A. macrophages
B. monocytes
C. osteoblasts
D. ribosomes
Answer is C: The suffix “-blast” indicates that the cell is immature.
48. Choose the membrane that is NOT a serous membrane.
A. pleura
B. peritoneum
C. pericardium
D. lamina propria
Answer is D: the lamina propria is a “basement membrane” attached to
epithe- lial tissue. The others are serous membranes.
49. Which organelle is the site of ATP production?
A. the nucleus
B. endoplasmic reticulum
C. mitochondria
D. golgi apparatus
Answer is C: the mitochondria is where ATP is produced.
50. Which of the following is ONE major function of epithelial cells?
A. movement
B. secretion
C. support of other cell types
D. transmit electrical signals
Answer is B: glandular tissue are one type of epithelial tissue and their
function is to produce material to secrete.
51. What are the major types of tissue in the body?
A. nervous, muscle, epithelial, connective.
B. squamous, cuboidal, columnar, transitional.
C. osteocytes, chondrocytes, leucocytes, adipocytes.
D. protein, adipose, cartilage, osseous.
Answer is A: choice C refers to cell types; B is a list of epithelial tissue.
Protein is applied to molecules.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
18 2 Cells and Tissues

52. Which of the following is NOT one of the organelles within a cell?
A. desmosome
B. endoplasmic reticulum
C. mitochondrion
D. golgi apparatus
Answer is A: desmosome (despite having the suffix “-some”) are not within
the cell. They are structures that join adjacent plasma membranes to each
other.
53. Which list contains the main body tissue types?
A. glandular, connective, osseous, nervous
B. epithelial, nervous, connective, muscle.
C. endothelial, connective, muscle, cartilaginous
D. epithelial, cartilaginous, muscle, glandular
Answer is B: the terms osseous, glandular and cartilaginous disqualify the
other choices.
54. The process of “diffusion” through a membrane may be described by which
of the following?
A. the movement of ions and molecules away from regions where they are in
high concentration towards regions where they are in lower concentration.
B. the use of energy from ATP to move ions and small molecules into
regions where they are in lower concentration.
C. the plasma membrane engulfs the substance and moves it through the
membrane.
D. the use of energy from ATP to move water molecules against their
concen- tration gradient.
Answer is A: the choices with ATP are nonsense. While choice C refers to
endocytosis.
55. The process of “active transport” through a membrane may be described by
which of the following?
A. the movement of ions and small molecules away from regions where they
are in high concentration.
B. the use of energy from ATP to move ions and small molecules into
regions where they are in lower concentration.
C. the plasma membrane engulfs the substance and moves it through the
membrane.
D. the use of energy from ATP to move ions and small molecules against
their concentration gradient.
Answer is D: energy (ATP) is required to force molecules against their
concen- tration gradient.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
2.1 Cells and Tissues 19

56. Which of the following is the smallest living structural unit of the body?
A. atom
B. molecule
C. organelle
D cell
Answer is D: the cell is smallest structural unit that is deemed to be alive.
57. Which of the following enables ions such as sodium to cross a plasma
membrane?
A. phospholipid bilayer
B. peripheral proteins
C. integral proteins
D. desmosomes
Answer is C: one function of integral protein in the PM is to form channels to
allow for the passage of ions.
58. Cell membranes can maintain a difference in electrical charge between the
inte- rior of the cell and the extracellular fluid. What is this charge difference
called?
A. excitability
B. the membrane potential
C. the action potential
D. the sodium-potassium pump
Answer is B: the inside of a cell is negative while the exterior side of the
mem- brane is positive. This difference in charge constitutes a difference in
electrical potential (or voltage), known as the resting membrane potential. An
action potential is generated when the membrane is stimulated and the
potential reversed.
59. The resting membrane potential of a cell is the consequence of which of the
following concentrations of ions?
A. High K+ and Cl− outside the cell and high Na+ and large anions inside the
cell.
B. High K+ and Na+ outside the cell and high Cl− and large anions inside the
cell.
C. High Cl− and Na+ outside the cell and high K+ and large cations inside the
cell.
D. High Ca2+ and Na+ outside the cell and high K+ and large cations inside the
cell.
Answer is C: These ionic species are largely responsible for the membrane
potential (cations are negative ions). While there is a higher concentration of
Ca outside the cell than inside, there are fewer Ca than Cl ions.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
20 2 Cells and Tissues

60. What is one function of mitochondria? To

A. produce enzymes to break down molecules
B. produce molecules of ATP
C. hold adjacent cells together
D. allow passage of molecules through the plasma membrane
Answer is B: Mitochondria are organelles within which ATP is made.
61. Membrane proteins perform the following functions EXCEPT one. Which
One?
A. form the glycocalyx
B. act as receptor proteins
C. form pores to allow the passage of small solutes
D. behave as enzymes.
Answer is A: the glycocalyx refers to molecules in the plasma membrane that
have a carbohydrate chain attached (prefix “glyco-”).
62. Facilitated diffusion differs from active transport because facilitated diffusion:
A. requires energy from ATP
B. moves molecules from where they are in lower concentration to higher
concentration
C. moves molecules from where they are in higher concentration to lower
concentration.
D. involves ions & molecules that pass through membrane channels.
Answer is C: diffusion always refers to movement from high to low
concentra- tion (without energy expenditure). Facilitated refers to the
assistance provided by a transport molecule that is designed for the purpose.
63. Which of the following is NOT a connective tissue?
A. blood
B. mesothelium
C. fat
D. tendon
Answer is B: mesothelium is simple squamous epithelium that is found in
serous membranes.
64. The cells that are found in tendons are called:
A. osteocytes
B. adipocytes
C. haemocytoblasts
D. fibroblasts

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
2.1 Cells and Tissues 21

Answer is D: Simple Squamous. A single layer of flat (squashed) cells so

diffu- sion through the layer takes place easily. Lines heart, lymph & blood
vessels (known as endothelium). Called mesothelium when in serous
membranes.
65. Which one of the following terms best describes the structure of the cell
membrane:
A. fluid mosaic model
B. static mosaic model
C. quaternary structure
D. multilayered structure
Answer is A: “fluid” implies the structure can move and change (not like a
brick wall); mosaic refers to the presence of proteins scattered among the
glycolipids.
66. Which one of the following terms best describes a phospholipid. It consists of
a:
A. polar head and polar tail
B. non-polar head and a polar tail
C. polar head and non-polar tail
D. non-polar head and a non-polar tail
Answer is C: polar = hydrophilic head of phosphate (which can dissolve in
the aqueous extracellular solution because water molecules are polar); non-
polar = hydrophobic tails of lipid, which being non-polar, cannot dissolve in
aqueous solutions.
67. One of the functions of integral proteins in cell membranes is to:
A. maintain the rigid structure of the cell
B. support mechanically the phospholipids
C. interact with the cytoplasm
D. form channels for transport functions
Answer is D: some proteins form channels which allow molecules and ions to
enter the cell.
68. Which one of the following best describes what a cell membrane consists of?
A. lipids, proteins, ribosomes
B. lipids, cholesterol, proteins
C. cholesterol, proteins, cytoplasm
D. lipids, proteins, cytoplasm
Answer is B: these are the three major constituents. Ribosomes and cytoplasm
are found inside the cell.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
22 2 Cells and Tissues

69. Which one of the following organelles is considered as the “energy

producing” centre of the cell?
A. rough endoplasmic reticulum
B. Golgi apparatus
C. mitochondria
D. ribosomes
Answer is C: mitochondria are where ATP molecules are produced from
glucose.
70. What is the major function of lysosomes? They:
A. package proteins
B. detoxify toxic substances
C. catalyse lipid metabolism
D. digest unwanted particles within the cell
Answer is D: the prefix “lys-” refers to the ability to alter molecules by
dividing them into smaller pieces.
71. What is the purpose of the “sodium/potassium pump”
A. to perform endocytosis.
B. to move sodium and potassium by facilitated diffusion.
C. to perform bulk transport through the plasma membrane.
D. To produce a concentration gradient for sodium ions
Answer is D: a concentration gradient is set up by the use of energy to move
Na ions to where they are in greater concentration. This requirement for
energy means choice B is wrong.
72. Which of the following is NOT a type of cell?
A. ribosome
B. haemocytoblast
C. neutrophil
D. phagocyte
Answer is A: a ribosome is a cell organelle, not a cell type
73. What is the name of the mechanism that ensures that there is a higher concen-
tration of sodium ions in the extracellular fluid than in the intracellular fluid?
A. Facilitated diffusion
B. The sodium-potassium pump
C. Secondary active transport
D. Osmosis
Answer is B: the “pump” exchanges Na for K and uses energy from ATP to
function.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
2.1 Cells and Tissues 23

74. What is the name given to the type of transport where glucose or an amino
acid binds to a receptor protein on the plasma membrane, which then moves
the molecule into the cell without the expenditure of energy?
A. facilitated diffusion
B. bulk transport
C. secondary active transport
D. active transport
Answer is A: the membrane protein facilitates the entry into the cell. No
energy is expended so it is not active transport.
75. What is the name given to the movement of glucose or amino acids from the
gut into the cells lining the gut, when they bind to a transport protein that has
also bound a sodium ion. The sodium ion is entering the cell along its
concentration gradient.
A. facilitated diffusion
B. the sodium potassium pump
C. active transport
D. secondary active transport
Answer is D: the sodium ion was transported out of the cell with the use of
energy in order to set up the sodium concentration gradient. This gradient
then allows other molecules to enter the cell along with sodium’s re-entry.
This is active (because energy used), but secondary as it occurs as a result of
the previ- ous active transport event.
76. Mitochondria produce which of the following?
A. ATP
B. DNA
C. RNA
D. proteins
Answer is A: adenosine triphosphate (ATP)
77. Why does the plasma membrane of a cell present a barrier to the movement of
electrolytes through it?
A. There are no channels in the membrane for the passage of electrolytes.
B. Electrolytes are not soluble in the lipid of the membrane.
C. Electrolytes are too large to pass through membrane channels.
D. Membrane proteins electrically repel charged particles.
Answer is B: electrolytes, being charged particles are not able to dissolve
their way through the lipid plasma membrane (which is non-polar). Hence it
is a bar- rier to them.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
24 2 Cells and Tissues

78. Which of the following statements about “leak channels” in the plasma mem-
brane is correct?
A. Proteins that form these channels bind to solutes to allow them to pass into
the cell.
B. They are passageways formed by proteins to allow water and ions to move
passively through the membrane.
C. They allow small ions and molecules to move between adjacent cells.
D. They are formed by glycoprotein and proteoglycans to allow hormones to
enter cells.
Answer is B: this is the definition of leak channels. They may be “gated”
which means shut until stimulated to open. J refers to facilitated diffusion.
79. What are the primary types of body tissue?
A. connective tissue, blood, muscle tissue, nervous tissue, epithelial tissue.
B. muscle tissue, osseous tissue, epithelial tissue, nervous tissue, blood, con-
nective tissue.
C. nervous tissue, epithelial tissue, muscle tissue, connective tissue
D. epithelial tissue, connective tissue, adipose tissue, muscle tissue, nervous
tissue.
Answer is C: These are the four primary types. Blood is not a “type’ of tissue.
80. Epithelial and connective tissue differ from each other in which of the follow-
ing characteristics?
A. epithelial tissue contains fibres but connective tissue does not.
B. connective tissue is avascular but epithelial tissue is well-vascularised.
C. cells in epithelial tissue are closely packed, whereas in connective tissue
they are not.
D. connective tissue includes tissue that makes up glands, but epithelial tissue
does not occur in glands.
Answer is C: The other choices are not correct.
81. Which of the following is a component of the plasma membrane of a cell?
A. plasma
B. glycolipid
C. plasma proteins
D. cholesterol
Answer is D: despite the term “plasma” A & C are wrong. And it is phospho-
lipids, not glycolipids that occur in the membrane.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
2.1 Cells and Tissues 25

82. What term is used to describe the movement of dissolved particles along (or
down) their concentration gradient?
A. endocytosis
B. active transport
C. osmosis
D. diffusion
Answer is D: Following the concentration gradient is a passive process.
Choice C applies only to water molecules.
83. Which of the following molecules cannot pass through the plasma membrane?
A. water molecules
B. non-polar molecules
C. amino acid based hormones
D. fat-soluble molecules
Answer is C: These hormones are not lipid soluble and too large to pass
through channels.
84. Which of the following is a connective tissue?
A. pancreas
B. spinal cord
C. muscle
D. blood
Answer is D: blood contains cells separated by a liquid matrix. Choices A &
B are epithelial and nervous tissues.
85. Which of the following is an epithelial tissue?
A. adipose tissue
B. the adrenal gland
C. the heart
D. blood
Answer is B: the adrenal gland is glandular epithelial tissue.
86. What is the major component of the plasma membrane of a cell?
A. phospholipid
B. glycolipid
C. integral protein
D. cholesterol
Answer is A: cholesterol and proteins are also present in the plasma
membrane but as more minor components.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
26 2 Cells and Tissues

87. Which one of the following is NOT a function of membrane proteins?

A. they form a structure called a glycocalyx
B. they attach cells to each other
C. they form passageways to allow solutes to pass through the membrane
D. they from receptors which can bind messenger molecules
Answer is A: the glycocalyx is thought of as membrane carbohydrates.
88. Facilitated diffusion through a membrane involves which of the following
scenarios?
A. the diffusion of water through a selectively permeable membrane along its
concentration gradient.
B. the movement of a molecule against its concentration gradient with the
expenditure of energy
C. the plasma membrane surrounding (engulfing) the molecule & the
molecule moving into the cell.
D. a molecule binding to a receptor which moves the molecule through the
membrane without the expenditure of energy
Answer is D: facilitation is by binding to a membrane protein.
89. The diffusion of water through a membrane is referred to as
A. secondary active transport
B. bulk transport
C. osmosis
D. endocytosis
Answer is C: osmosis is a word that is reserved for the movement of water
through a membrane.
90. What is the tissue that covers the body surface and lines internal tubes called?
A. epithelial tissue
B. connective tissue
C. glandular epithelium
D. muscle tissue
Answer is A: epithelial tissue has one surface “open” to the exterior or to the
contents of the tube.
91. Which of the following is true for connective tissue?
A. it consists of cells, a basement membrane and intercellular matrix
B. its cells are closely packed and held together by protein fibres.
C. it has a high rate of cell division and no blood supply
D. it is made of cells, protein fibres and ground substance
Answer is D: Connective tissue includes fibres and cells which are not closely
packed.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
2.2 Cell Cycle (Mitosis and Protein Synthesis) 27

92. The cell membrane’s resting potential (about −70 mV inside with respect to
the outside) is due mainly to which of the following mechanisms?
A. The sodium potassium pump.
B. The diffusion of cations and anions through the membrane along their
con- centration gradients.
C. The diffusion of sodium and potassium across the cell membrane.
D. The presence inside the cell of anions too large to passively cross the cell
membrane.
Answer is A: The ATPase pump shifts 3 Na + out of the cell and 2 K + into the
cell. This disparity in positive charge is the major influence on the resting
potential.

2.2 Cell Cycle (Mitosis and Protein Synthesis)

The cell nucleus contains chromosomes which are composed of molecules of

DNA. DNA is composed of units called nucleotides which consist of a sugar
(deoxy- ribose) attached to a phosphoric acid group (PO3OH) and one of
four bases. Chromosomes contain the code for the sequence of amino acids used
to construct different proteins. Each amino acid is coded for by a particular
sequence of three of the four bases (adenine, guanine, cytosine & thymine). This
sequence is called a “codon”. mRNA “transcribes” this code then moves from the
nucleus to a ribosome in the cytoplasm where it is “translated” and the protein is
assembled by joining the required amino acids in the appropriate sequence.
Mitosis is the process by which a somatic cell divides to produce two cells with
identical DNA. In this way an organism can grow. Before mitosis, the DNA must
be duplicated. Hence the chromosomes (consisting of one strand or “chromatid”)
dou- ble up by becoming two chromatids. Then during mitosis the two chromatids
sepa- rate and move into the two daughter cells.
Meiosis occurs only in the gonads. This process results in four daughter cells.
Human cells have two copies of each of 23 chromosomes, one copy being
inherited from the father and the other copy from the mother. The gametes need to
have only one copy of each of the 23 chromosomes, so that when the sperm fuses
with the ovum, the “diploid” number of 46 (two copies of each chromosome) is
restored. Meiosis is the process by which cells reduce their number of
chromosomes from 46 to 23 different chromosomes. Of the 23 chromosomes in a
sperm (or ovum), some (between 0 and 23) will have come from the sperm
owner’s mother and the rest from the sperm owner’s father. The same can be said
of the 23 chromosomes in the ovum. In this way the resulting children will be
genetically different from each of their parents (and siblings) as each sperm/ovum
will have a different assortment of the 23 available chromosomes.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
28 2 Cells and Tissues

1. The term “chromatin” would be used in reference to which of the following?

A. genetic substance
B. cellular energy
C. membrane support
D. nuclear membrane
Answer is A: Chromatin is DNA & the associated proteins so pertains to
genetic material.
2. In protein synthesis, where dose translation occur? In the:
A. cytoplasm between ribosomes, tRNA and mRNA
B. nucleus between ribosomes, tRNA and mRNA
C. nucleus between DNA and mRNA
D. cytoplasm between DNA and mRNA
Answer is A: translation occurs in the cytoplasm (transcription occurs in the
nucleus). DNA does not exist in the cytoplasm.
3. If the DNA strand sequence of bases is CTT AGA CTA ATA, what would
the tRNA read?
A. GAA TCT GAT TAT
B. CUU AGA CUA AUA
C. GAA UCU GAU UAU
D. GUU ACA GUA AUA
Answer is C: guanine (G) must be matched to cytosine (C) and vice versa.
Adenine (A) must match with thymine (T). In RNA, uracil (U) replaces thy-
mine, while both bind to adenine. Hence U must be matched to A.
4. Which one of the following statements best describes DNA?
A. single stranded, deoxyribonucleic acid
B. single stranded, ribonucleic acid
C. double stranded, deoxyribonucleic acid
D. double stranded, ribonucleic acid
Answer is C: DNA is double stranded, while the “D” refers to “deoxy-”.
5. In which phase of mitosis would chromosomes line up at the centre of the
spindle:
A. anaphase
B. interphase
C. prophase
D. metaphase
Answer is D: Remember the metaphase plate occupies the middle of the cell.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
2.2 Cell Cycle (Mitosis and Protein Synthesis) 29

6. In a cell cycle which phase takes the longest time to complete:

A. anaphase
B. interphase
C. prophase
D. telophase
Answer is B: interphase is the time when the cell is performing its normal
func- tion and not dividing.
7. What is the purpose of meiosis? To produce:
A. DNA
B. somatic cells
C. diploid cells
D. haploid cells
Answer is D: meiosis produces sperm or egg so these must have half the com-
plement of chromosomes (be haploid) to allow for the full complement to be
present (and not more!) when sperm combines with egg.
8. What results from the events that occur during metaphase of mitosis?
A. The nuclear membranes form around two nuclei.
B. The chromosomes are aligned on a plane in the centre of the cell.
C. The chromosomes become visible and attach to the spindle fibres.
D. The chromatids from each chromosome separate and move to opposite
sides of the cell.
Answer is B: during metaphase, chromosomes are arranged on a plane (the
metaphase plate) in the middle of the cell, attached to microtubules of the
spindle.
9. What is the name of the process of division of a somatic cell’s nucleus into
two daughter nuclei?
A. prophase
B. cytokinesis
C. mitosis
D. meiosis
Answer is C: mitosis involves somatic cells. Meiosis refers to the production
of the sex cells.
10. In a strand of DNA, what is the combination of deoxyribose and phosphate
and base known as?
A. A ribosome
B. A chromatid

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
30 2 Cells and Tissues

C. A codon
D. A nucleotide
Answer is D: three nucleotides form a codon and many codons form a
chromatid.
11. What happens during anaphase of mitosis?
A. spindle fibres pull each chromatid to opposite sides of the cell
B. the sense and non-sense strands “unzip” along their hydrogen bonds
C. RNA polymerase forms a complementary strand by reading the sense strand
D. the cell cytoplasm divides into two cells
Answer is A: separation of the two chromatids of a chromosome occurs at
ana- phase. Choice D is cytokinesis and begins in late anaphase and continues
into telophase.
12. The process by which information is read from DNA, encoded and
transported outside the nucleus is known as:
A. translation
B. transcription
C. encoding
D. catalysis
Answer is B: to “transcribe” is to record the information from a source and to
record it at another place (onto mRNA). Then messenger RNA moves out of
the nucleus
13. How many nucleotides are required to code for a single amino acid?
A. twenty
B. five
C. three
D. one
Answer is C: A sequence of three nucleotides constitute a codon. Each codon
is specific for one of the 20 amino acids.
14. The combination of a sugar, a base and at least one phosphate group is given
the general term of:
A. nucleoside
B. amino acid
C. polypeptide
D. nucleotide
Answer is D: a nucleoside is a nucleotide without a phosphate group.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
2.2 Cell Cycle (Mitosis and Protein Synthesis) 31

15. The nucleus of the cell contains the master nucleic acid:
A. DNA
B. RNA
C. mRNA
D. tRNA
Answer is A: DNA exists in the nucleus. The other three are ribonucleic acids.
16. Which of the following is the correct combination of the components for the
nucleic acid DNA?
A. Phosphate, Ribose, Uracil
B. Phosphate, Deoxyribose, Proline
C. Phosphate, Ribose, Thymine
D. Phosphate, Deoxyribose, Adenine
Answer is D: DNA has the sugar deoxyribose, proline is an amino acid that
does not occur in DNA.
17. In the ribosome of a cell, the mRNA is read to produce the particular amino
acid sequence for the formation of a protein. What is this process called?
A. Translation
B. Transcription
C. Transportation
D. Transmutation
Answer is A: translation occurs in the cytoplasm of a cell with a ribosome. It
is when the information in mRNA is read to produce the sequence of amino
acids needed to form a protein.
18. Which of the base pairings in DNA would be correct?
A. A–T pair
B. A–G pair
C. C–T pair
D. C–A pair
Answer is A: A pairs with T, while C pairs with G.
19. The combination of a sugar and a base is given the general term of:
A. nucleoside
B. amino acid
C. polypeptide
D. nucleotide
Answer is A: a nucleotide is formed from a nucleoside and a phosphate group.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
32 2 Cells and Tissues

20. The nucleic acid which carries the information for protein synthesis from the
cell nucleus to the ribosomes is:
A. DNA
B. RNA
C. mRNA
D. tRNA
Answer is C: “messenger” RNA carries the data (the message) from the chro-
mosomes in the nucleus to the ribosomes in the cytoplasm.
21. Which of the following is the correct combination of the components for the
nucleic acid RNA?
A. Phosphate, Ribose, Uracil
B. Phosphate, Deoxyribose, Proline
C. Phosphate, Ribose, Thymine
D. Phosphate, Deoxyribose, Adenine
Answer is A: RNA must have the sugar ribose. Thymine exists in DNA but
not RNA, where it is replaced with uracil.
22. In the nucleus of the cell DNA is used as a template to form mRNA. What is
the process called?
A. Translation
B. Transcription
C. Transportation
D. Transmutation
Answer is B: transcription refers to the conversion of information on DNA
into the form of mRNA.
23. Which statement is true of the 23 chromosomes within a sperm?
A. 23 chromosomes is the diploid number
B. 11 chromosomes came from the father, 11 chromosomes came from the
mother, while one of either the Y or the X came from the father or mother
respectively.
C. Some of the 23 came from the father and the rest came from the mother.
D. 11 chromosomes and the Y came from the father, while 11 chromosomes
came from the mother.
Answer is C: A sperm has 23 chromosomes which is the haploid number. The
male that produced the sperm has 46 chromosomes (23 pairs) in their somatic

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
2.2 Cell Cycle (Mitosis and Protein Synthesis) 33

cells – 23 each from the man’s father and mother. When sperm are produced,
the 46 chromosome assemble and pair up. The man’s X and Y chromosomes
pair up. Each pair of chromosomes then separates so that only one of each
pair moves into a new sperm. Which one of the pair ends up in which sperm
is a random process. It is possible that an individual sperm has any number of
chro- mosomes between 0 and 23 that originated from the father.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
Chapter 3
Measurement, Errors and Data

All measurements involve a number, a unit and a level of uncertainty. The number
is usually expressed in scientific notation (with a power of 10) while the units
should be metric units, and be part of the standard international system of units.
These units will have standard prefixes (kilo, milli etc.) to denote known multiples
of the stan- dard unit. No measurement of a continuous variable is known with
absolute accu- racy so its level of uncertainty is usually stated. Uncertainty is
sometimes stated as the “error” but this does not imply that a mistake has been
made.
Large amounts of data are handled by using a statistic (a number) to summarise
the data. Many biological data are “normally distributed”. That is, are symmetri-
cally distributed with most data clustered about a central value with progressively
fewer data points the further you move away from the centre. For such data, the
“mean” (or average) is an indication of where the middle value of the group of
data lies, while the “standard deviation” describes how closely around the mean
value the data are clustered.
1. Say that someone’s body temperature is measured by four different devices
and the resulting four measurements are given below. Which reading has an
abso- lute error of ± 0.05 °C?
A. 38 °C
B. 37.8 °C
C. 37.85 °C
D. 37.855 °C
Answer is B: absolute error is plus or minus half the smallest scale interval.
Two times 0.05 = 0.1, so the smallest scale interval is 0.1 of a degree which
applies to the 37.8 °C value.

© Springer Science+Business Media Singapore 2016 35

M. Caon, Examination Questions and Answers in Basic Anatomy and
Physiology, DOI 10.1007/978-981-10-2332-3_3
ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
36 3 Measurement, Errors and Data

2. What can be correctly said of data that are “normally distributed”?

A. The upper and lower values of the distribution describe the healthy range
of physiological values.
B. The standard deviation characterises the dispersion of data and the
variance characterises the central tendency of the data.
C. The mean and range are statistics that are strictly only applicable to nor-
mally distributed data.
D. Sixty eight percent of all data values will be within one standard deviation
from the mean.
Answer is D: normally distributed data have this predicable relationship
between their mean and the spread of values around the mean.
3. If someone’s height is measured while the person is wearing shoes, the height
will be overestimated. This type of error is known as which of the following?
A. Absolute error
B. Parallax error
C. Calibration error
D. Zeroing error
Answer is D: zeroing error because in this example, the object being
measured is not aligned with the start of the measuring scale.
4. Which of the following metric prefixes is used to denote one thousandth of a
gram?
A. micro
B. milli
C. centi
D. kilo
Answer is B: “milli” refers to thousandth or 10−3 (nothing to do with
million!).
5. What is the standard deviation used for?
A. as a measure of central tendency
B. as a measure of dispersion
C. as a measure of spread of data that are normally distributed
D. as a measure of the error of the mean value
Answer is C: B is also correct but is not as good an answer as choice C.
6. A bathroom scales displays a mass reading of 68.4 kg. Which one of the
follow- ing could NOT be the true mass of the person standing on the scales?
A. 68.40 kg
B. 68.44 kg
C. 68.47 kg

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
3 Measurement, Errors and Data 37

D. 68.37 kg
Answer is C: A reading of 68.4 (that is, stated to the nearest 0.1 kg) means
that the actual value is between 68.35 and 68.44, so only 68.47 (which is
closer to 68.5) is outside this range.
7. Which of the following g does NOT describe a milligram?
A. 1 × 103 gram
B. 1 × 10−3 gram
C. one thousandth of a gram
D. 0.001 gram
Answer is A: This (1 × 103 gram) is one thousand grams = 1 kilogram.
8. Look at the figure of a thermometer. What is the temperature reading?
A. 15 °C
B. 15.4 °C
C. 17 °C
D. 20 °C
Answer is C: every 5 scale intervals is labelled with a number, and each
interval corresponds to 1 degree. As the reading is two intervals above 15: 15
+ 2 = 17.

9. Look again at the figure of a thermometer. What is the absolute error of the
tem- perature reading?
A. ± 0.05 °C
B. ± 0.5 °C

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
38 3 Measurement, Errors and Data

C. ± 1.0 °C
D. ± 5.0 °C
Answer is B: absolute error is plus or minus half of the smallest scale interval
(which is 1 degree), half of one is 0.5.
10. What information does the “standard deviation” of a mean value tell us?
A. It gives us the healthy range of values for the measured physiological
quantity.
B. It is the range within which 68 % of measured values are found.
C. It tells us that the measured values are normally distributed.
D. It tells us the number of values that were used to calculate the
mean. Answer is B: C is also correct but choice B is the better answer.
11. On a clinical thermometer where the smallest scale interval is 0.1 °C, a
person’s temperature is measured to be 37.7 °C. Which of the listed
temperatures could NOT be the person’s true temperature?
A. 37.72 °C
B. 37.76 °C
C. 37.67 °C
D. 37.685 °C
Answer is B: an actual value of 37.76 °C would be seen on a scale that has 0.1
as its smallest interval, as 37.8. All other values are closer to 37.7 than they
are to 37.8 or to 37.6.
12. How many micrograms are there in 5
milligram? A. 0.005
B. 0.5
C. 500
D. 5000
Answer is D: one milligram is one thousand micrograms, so 5 mg = 5000 μg.
13. What does the standard deviation of the mean represent? For values that are
normally distributed, it represents:
A. the value above and below the mean that includes 68 % of all data values
B. the difference between the highest data value and the lowest data value
C. the average of the difference between each data value and the mean value.
D. the spread of the normal distribution.
Answer is A: The term “standard” in standard deviation of a distribution of
measured values, means that it may be relied upon to encompass 68 % of all
measured values.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
3 Measurement, Errors and Data 39

14. Given that a milligram 1 × 10−3 gram, what is a microgram?

A. 1 × 103 gram
B. One thousand milligram
C. 1 × 10−6 gram
D. 0.001 gram
Answer is C: a microgram is one millionth (0.000 001 or 10-6) of a gram.
A = 1 kg; B = 1 g; D = 1 milligram.
15. How many micrograms are there in one
milligram? A. 0.001
B. 0.1
C. 100
D. 1000
Answer is D: 1 μg = 10−3 × 1 mg, so one thousand micrograms is the same as
one milligram.
16. How many milligrams are there in one
microgram? A. 0.001
B. 1000
C. 0.1
D. 1,000,000
Answer is A: 1 mg = 103 × 1 μg, so one thousandth of a milligram is the same
as one microgram.
17. What is meant when a person’s mass is stated as 73.6 kg? That
A. the mass is closer to 73.6 than it is to 73.7 or 73.5
B. the mass is closer to 73.6 than to any other value
C. the mass is between 73.5 and 73.7
D. the mass is 73.6 ± 0.1 kg
Answer is A: because the mass is stated to one decimal place, the absolute
error is ± 0.05.
18. Which of the following statements applies to the statistic known as the “stan-
dard deviation”?
A. It is a measure of central tendency.
B. It is only applicable to qualitative measurements.
C. Standard deviation is also known as the “variance”.
D. 95 % of all data lie within two standard deviations of the mean.
Answer is D: This is the only true statement for normally distrusted data.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
40 3 Measurement, Errors and Data

19. Which of the following units is NOT part of the Australian metric system of
units?
A. mmHg for measuring blood pressure
B. degree Celsius for measuring temperature
C. Pascal for measuring pressure
D. second for measuring time
Answer is A: Pascal (Pa) is the SI unit for pressure.
20. In the Australian Metric System of units, what does the prefix micro stand for?
A. one thousand
B. one thousandth
C. one million
D. one millionth
Answer is D: one millionth = 10−6
21. Which of the following measurements is a semi-quantitative one?
A. a blood pressure of 120/80 mmHg
B. a blood glucose level of + + +
C. a state of anxiety measure of “calm”
D. the patient’s name is Tim Cruise
Answer is B: the number of “+” signs indicates a level of magnitude that is
semi-quantitative, but there is no unit of magnitude. C is “qualitative”, while
D is “nominal’.
22. A baby’s mass measurement is 3.8 kg ± 0.05 kg. What is the absolute error in
the measurement?
A. ± 0.05 ÷ 3.8
B. ± (0.05 ÷ 3.8) × 100 %
C. ± 0.05 kg
D. 0.05 kg
Answer is C: by definition, absolute error is half the smallest scale interval
(0.1 in this case) above and below the measured value.
23. 1 ml of water has a mass of 1.00 g. Which of the following sets of 3 measure-
ments of the mass of 1 ml of water is the most precise set?
A. 0.98 g, 1.00 g, 1.02 g
B. 0.99 g, 0.99 g, 0.99 g
C. 1.00 g, 1.01 g, 1.02 g
D. 0.99 g, 0.99 g, 1.00 g
Answer is B: precision refers to the repeatability of the measurement. In
choice B, all measurements are the same so are precise.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
3 Measurement, Errors and Data 41

24. Systematic errors arise from some inadequacy of equipment or technique.

Which of the following is NOT an example of systematic error?
A. parallax error
B. calibration error
C. random error
D. zeroing error
Answer is C: as the words suggest, random error is not systematic as it is
unpredictable.
25. The median is a measure of central tendency. It may be defined as:
A. the value that has half the values greater than it and half less than it
B. the value that occurs most often
C. the distribution of values that has the mode, mean and average equal to
each other
D. the sum of all values divided by the number of values.
Answer is A: median is the mid-point of the number of measured values. The
value that appears most often in a set of data is called the mode.
26. What is 3400 square centimetres converted to square
metres? A. 0.0034 m2
B. 0.34 m2
C. 3.4 m2
D. 34 m2
Answer is B: A square metre has sides that are 100 cm long, so 100 × 100 =
10,000 cm2 in a square metre. So 3400÷10,000 = 0.34.
27. What is the number 0.028 when correctly expressed in scientific
notation? A. 28 × 102
B. 2.8 × 102
C. 2.8 × 10−2
D. 28 × 10−2
Answer is C: scientific notation requires one number to the right of the
decimal point (choices B & C). The decimal point must be shifted 2 places to
achieve this. As 0.028 is less than one, the power of ten is negative.
28. Which of the following numbers has four significant
figures? A. 3300.0
B. 37.60
C. 0.008
D. 0.0540
Answer is B: any zero to the left of the first non-zero digit – when approached
from the left – are not significant (zeros on the right are).

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
42 3 Measurement, Errors and Data

29. Which of the following statements involves a nominal measurement?

A. James has a height of 170 cm.
B. Barry’s blood pressure is elevated.
C. Gino was born in Italy.
D. More than 5 % of Australians receive a pension.
Answer is C: Gino’s birthplace is “named” so the information is nominal, but
no other information is available.
30. In the Australian Metric System of measurement what does the prefix “milli”
stand for?
A. one thousandth
B. one thousand
C. one millionth
D. one million
Answer is A: milli = one thousandth = 10−3
31. The millimetre of mercury is a unit commonly used for the measurement of
blood pressure. Which of the following statements about this unit is true?
A. It is part of the Australian Metric System but not part of the SI system.
B. It is part of the SI system but not part of the Australian Metric System.
C. It belongs to both the SI system and the Australian Metric System.
D. It does not belong to either the SI system or the Australian Metric System.
Answer is D: both the SI system and the Australian Metric System are
“metric”, the mmHg is not (despite having millimetre in its name).

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
Chapter 4
Chemistry for Physiology

4.1 Atoms and Molecules

There are 90 naturally occurring simplest substances called chemical “elements”.

The smallest particle of an element is called an atom of that element. The names
of these elements are shortened to one or two-letter symbols that are displayed on
the “periodic table”. Metal elements (e.g. Na, Ca, K) appear on the left while non-
metal elements (e.g. Cl, O, N) appear on the right hand side of this table. A metal
element may react with a non-metal element to form a new substance which will be a
type of “ionic” compound. A non-metal element may react with another non-metal
element to form a new sub- stance which will be a type of “covalent” compound.
Ionic compounds in solid form, are continuous lattice structures, which when they
dissolve, allow the particles move about separately as positive ions if they have lost an
electron(s) or negative ions if they gained electron(s). Covalent compounds exist as
groups of atoms (known as molecules), with a fixed ratio of different atoms. The
atoms in these molecules stay together. Examples are H2O (water), C6H2O6
(glucose), CO2 (carbon dioxide), CH3COOH (acetic acid). Ions and small molecules
such as these, and amino acids and lipid molecules are able to move into and out of
cells through the plasma membrane during normal cell functioning.
On a macroscopic scale, humans are a skinful of solids and liquids with no
spaces (molecules and ions are “shoulder to shoulder”). However on the sub
atomic scale, atoms are mostly empty space! If the central nucleus (which consists
of 2 types of particle called protons and neutrons) of an atom was the size of a
tennis ball, the whole atom would have a diameter of about 600 m with just a few
electrons occupy- ing the mostly empty space which surrounds the “tennis-ball-
sized” nucleus. Therefore humans are mostly empty space surrounding the nuclei
of our atoms.
1. The chemical formula C6H12O6 contains much information. However, what
information is NOT provided by the formula?
A. the number of atoms in a molecule
B. the name of the substance

© Springer Science+Business Media Singapore 2016 43

M. Caon, Examination Questions and Answers in Basic Anatomy and
ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
Physiology, DOI 10.1007/978-981-10-2332-3_4

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
44 4 Chemistry for Physiology

C. the elements that make up the substance

D. whether the substance is covalent or ionic
Answer is B: the name may be guessed at, but it is possible for two substances
to have the same formula but a different structure.
2. Which of the particles listed below is the smallest?
A. an atom
B. a proton
C. an ion
D. a molecule
Answer is B: a proton is a sub-atomic particle so is smaller than all of the
others
3. The chemical name for sodium is which of the following?
A. Na
B. So
C. K
D. Si
Answer is A: Na is short for Natrium which is the Latin name for sodium.
4. A molecular compound may be defined by which of the following?
A. atoms from non-metal elements covalently bonded.
B. atoms from metal elements covalently bonded
C. atoms from metal elements and non-metal elements covalently bonded
D. atoms from non-metal elements ironically bonded
Answer is A: only non-metal elements are involved in covalent (molecular)
bonding.
5. Many drugs are neutralised to form salts and administered in this form. What
is the main advantage of administering the salt form of the drug? It is usually:
A. less toxic
B. more soluble in water
C. more pleasant to taste
D. more soluble in lipid
Answer is B: salts, having particles that are electrically charged, are more
likely to be soluble in water.
6. One of the following is INCORRECT. Which one?
A. metal atoms will form compounds with non-metal atoms.
B. metal atoms will form compounds with metal atoms.
C. non-metal atoms will form compounds with non-metal atoms.
D. metal atoms will not form compounds with metal atoms.
Answer is B: metal atoms can only form (ionic non-molecular) compounds
with non-metal atoms.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.1 Atoms and Molecules 45

7. Choose the correct statement about hydrogen bonds. They

A. are stronger than covalent bonds.
B. act between the H in one –OH or –NH group, and the O or N in another.
C. operate within molecules.
D. act between the H in one –OH or –NH group, and the H in another.
Answer is B: the slightly positive H atom in one molecule is attracted to the
adjacent slightly negative O (or N).
8. Given that the atomic mass of nitrogen is 14 and of hydrogen is 1, what is the
mass in grams of one mole of ammonia (NH3)?
A. 15
B. 16
C. 17
D. 18
Answer is C: from the formula, there is one N and three H atoms. So
(1 × 14) + (3 × 1) = 17.
9. Choose the ending that will correctly complete the sentence: When atoms of a
metal element and atoms of a non-metal element react, the result is
A. a covalent compound consisting of molecules
B. a covalent compound consisting of ions
C. an ionic compound consisting of ions in a lattice
D. an ionic compound consisting of molecules in a lattice
Answer is C: atoms of a metal element react with atoms of a non-metal
element to form an ionic compound (ions held within a lattice when in solid
form).
10. In a water molecule, the bond between oxygen (O) and hydrogen (H) is
A. a covalent bond and a polar bond
B. an ionic bond
C. a covalent bond
D. an ionic bond and forms an electrolyte
Answer is A: as both atoms are non-metals, the bonding is covalent. As the
atoms differ in their attraction for the bonding electrons, the bond is polar (the
electrons are more closely attracted to O).
11. Some atoms of potassium, K contain 19 protons and 20 neutrons in their
nuclei. What is the correct symbol for these atoms?
20
A. 19
K
19
B. 20
K
39
C. 19 K
20
D. 39
K
Answer is C: the number of protons (the atomic number) is written as a sub-
script. The sum of the number of protons and neutrons (the mass number) is
written as a superscript.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
46 4 Chemistry for Physiology

12. The chemical elements can be divided into metal elements and non-metal ele-
ments. Which of the statements about metals and non-metals is correct?
A. metals lose electrons to become charged particles called cations
B. most of the elements are non-metals.
C. non-metals are located at the left hand side of the periodic table
D. metals have low melting points and are good conductors of heat
Answer is A: metal ions are positively charged (having lost an electron/s),
con- sequently they are attracted to a cathode (a negatively charged electrode).
13. 24 of the chemical elements are essential to the human body. Four bulk ele-
ments, 7 are macrominerals and 13 are trace elements. Which are the four
bulk elements?
A. calcium, carbon, hydrogen & oxygen
B. nitrogen, carbon, hydrogen & oxygen
C. calcium, nitrogen, carbon & oxygen
D. carbon, oxygen, phosphorus & iron
Answer is B: these elements make up the bulk of proteins, carbohydrates and
lipids.
14. Most non-molecular compounds form by the chemical combination of:
A. molecules with molecules
B. non-metals with non-metals
C. metals with metals
D. metals with non-metals
Answer is D: ionic compounds are formed when metal atoms react with non-
metal atoms. The structures the form are not molecular.
15. Molecules are relatively easy to separate from one another. This means that
the bonds between them are:
A. ionic
B. covalent
C. relatively weak
D. relatively strong
Answer is C: ease of separation implies relatively weak bonds. Both ionic and
covalent bonds are strong.
16. What happens when a sodium atom reacts to form a compound? The atom will
A. gain one electron
B. lose one electron
C. gain two electrons
D. lose two electrons
Answer is B: sodium is a metal so will lose an electron. As it occurs in period
IA of the periodic table we know it loses a single electron.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.1 Atoms and Molecules 47

17. When nitrogen combines with hydrogen to form a compound, its formula will
be:
A. NH3
B. N3H
C. NH4
D. NH
Answer is A: N requires 3 electrons to complete its outer shell (it occurs in
column VA of the periodic table), while H requires one. Hence three H must
attach to a single N.
18. Which of the following type of bond between atoms is the weakest?
A. ionic bond
B. polar bond
C. covalent bond
D. hydrogen bond
Answer is D: the hydrogen bond is the weakest. Almost all covalent bonds are
polar bonds.
19. Ionic, non-molecular compounds are likely to have which of the following
sets of properties?
A. high melting point, often soluble in organic liquids, in pure form do not
conduct electricity.
B. low melting point, no strong odour, soluble in water, electrical
conductivity in solution.
C. high melting point, electrical conductivity in solution, no strong odour,
often soluble in water
D. low melting point, strong odour, soluble in organic liquids, in pure form
do not conduct electricity.
Answer is C: high melting points and electrical conductivity are indicative of
ionic compounds.
20. Which of the following best describes a molecule?
A. The simplest structure in an ionic compound.
B. One thousandth of a mole.
C. The particles of which covalent compounds are composed.
D. The smallest particle of an element.
Answer is C: molecules are the particles of covalent compounds.
21. Which of the following is true of metal elements?
A. The four most common metal elements in the body have the symbols: C,
H, O and N.
B. They form compounds with non-metals.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
48 4 Chemistry for Physiology

C. When they form compounds, they gain electrons.

D. In the body, ions of metal atoms have a negative
charge. Answer is B: all other choices are wrong.
22. Which of the following symbols represents a chemical element?
A. O
B. CO
C. CO2
D. H3O+
Answer is A: O symbolises oxygen, element number 16.
23. What is the name given to the particles that make up a covalent compound?
A. ions
B. molecules
C. anions and cations
D. metal atoms
Answer is B: this is a definition of molecules.
24. Compounds may be described by which of the following sentences?
A. Pure substances that contain two or more elements.
B. Materials that are composed of particles called molecules.
C. Materials composed of more than one part, and the parts may be present in
any proportion.
D. Substances that appear on the right hand side of the periodic table.
Answer is A: choice B refers only to covalent compounds.
25. The symbol for potassium is which of the following?
A. PO4
B. Po
C. P
D. K
Answer is B: K is from Kalium which is the Latin word for potassium.
26. “Covalent” is the term applied to which of the following bonds?
A. Those between an ion and all the surrounding oppositely charged ions.
B. The bond between an electrolyte and the surrounding water molecules in a
solution.
C. Those between non-metal atoms.
D. Those between atoms on the left hand side of the periodic table.
Answer is C: non-metals share electrons when they react with each other
(rather than losing or gaining), hence the prefix “co-”.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.1 Atoms and Molecules 49

27. Given that one mole is 6 × 1023 particles, how much is a millimole?
A. 6 × 1020 particles
B. 106 mole
C. 10-6 mole
D. 6 × 10-3 particles
Answer is A: a millimole is one thousandth of a mole, so 1 mmol = 10−3 × 6
× 1023 = 6 × 1020 particles
28. Which of the following is a definition of a molecule? The particle that
composes:
A. covalent compounds
B. non-metal elements
C. electrolytes
D. ionic compounds
Answer is A: This is one definition of a molecule.
29. What is the smallest particle of a non-metal element known as?
A. a molecule
B. an atom
C. an ion
D. a neutron
Answer is B: an atom is the smallest particle of any element – not just
non-metals!
30. What is the difference between ions and molecules?
A. ions have an electrical charge whereas molecules do not.
B. ions are from metal elements only whereas molecules contain only non-
metal elements
C. ions arise from compounds between non-metal elements, whereas mole-
cules arise from metal and non-metal elements
D. an ion may be formed from a single atom but molecules always involve
more than one atom
Answer is D: This is the only correct choice. However molecules may also
form ions – polyatomic ions.
31. Of the four different types of matter listed below which is not an example of
an element?
A. hydrogen
B. oxygen
C. water
D. gold
Answer is C: water is a compound of H and O.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
50 4 Chemistry for Physiology

32. A certain pure substance, A, when heated is changed into two quite different
pure substances, C and D. Which of the following statements must be true?
A. A is a compound.
B. C and D are not elements.
C. A, C and D are all compounds.
D. C and D are elements.
Answer is A: only this choice must be true. The others are just possible.
33. Which of the following statements about atoms is FALSE?
A. They are mostly empty space.
B. Nearly all their mass is concentrated in the nucleus.
C. In a neutral atom protons and electrons are equal in number.
D. The nucleus contains equal numbers of protons and neutrons.
Answer is D: for the elements with smaller atoms, usually this is true, but for
heavier elements it is not.
34. In which of the following sequences are particles listed in order of increasing
size from left to right?
A. electron, atom, proton, molecule
B. molecule, atom, proton, electron
C. atom, proton, electron, molecule
D. electron, proton, atom, molecule
Answer is D: an electron so far is immeasurably small, while a molecule must
have at least two atoms and the proton is a sub-atomic particle.
35. Which of the following is the name of a subatomic particle?
A. anion
B. cation
C. molecule
D. neutron
Answer is D: a neutron is one of the constituents of the atomic nucleus.
36. Two atoms have the same mass number but different atomic numbers. Which
of the following statements concerning these atoms is TRUE?
A. Each has the same number of neutrons in its nucleus.
B. They are isotopes.
C. They are atoms of different elements.
D. Each has the same number of protons in its nucleus.
Answer is C: different atomic numbers means different numbers of protons
and hence different elements.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.1 Atoms and Molecules 51

37. What is the atomic number of the element occupying Group VA and Period 4
of the Periodic Table?
A. 33
B. 34
C. 51
D. 52
Answer is C: This is Arsenic (As) – you may need to consult a periodic table
to answer this.
38. Some atoms of iodine, I, contain 53 protons and 78 neutrons in their nuclei. A
correct symbol for these atoms would be:

A. 53
131
I
78
B. 53 I
C. 78
131
I
53
D. 78 I
Answer is A: the convention is: the number of protons is the subscript; the
sum of the number of protons and neutrons (131) is the superscript.
39. Which of the following atoms normally forms ions having a single, positive
charge?
A. Mg
B. S
C. Cl
D. K
Answer is D: This is because potassium is a metal and from group IA of the
periodic table.
40. Which of the following statements concerning isotopes is FALSE?
A. They contain the same number of protons in their atoms.
B. They contain the same number of electrons in their atoms.
C. They contain the same number of neutrons in their atoms.
D. They have very similar chemical properties.
Answer is C: having a different number of neutrons (while having the same
number of protons) is what defines them to be isotopes
41. The element nitrogen exists as molecules, N2. Which of the following
represen- tations of the bonding in a molecule of nitrogen is correct?
A. N+ N-
B. N–N
C. N=N
D. N≡N
Answer is D: Nitrogen is placed in period VA of the periodic table and so
needs to share three electrons. That is, needs to form three covalent bonds.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
52 4 Chemistry for Physiology

42. Which of the following properties is least likely to be possessed by a covalent,

molecular substance?
A. strong odour
B. high solubility in water
C. melting point above 400 °C
D. low electrical conductivity
Answer is C: A high melting point is characteristic of ionic substances. Some
covalent compounds are soluble in water.
43. The diagrams below display the covalent bonds present in a series of simple
molecules. In which case is the number of bonds surrounding an atom in the
diagrams below INCORRECT?
A. Carbon dioxide, O – C – O
CI

CI CI CI

B. carbon tetrachloride, CI

H N H

C. ammonia, H
D. water, H – O – H
Answer is A: carbon must form four bonds (not two). It is from group IV A in
the periodic table

4.2 Solutions

Water is a very good solvent and the substances that are dissolved in a sample of
water are known as the solutes. The combination of solvent with the dissolved sol-
utes is known as the solution. The term “% concentration” is a statement about
how much solute is dissolved in a known volume of solvent. Hence a solution of
concen- tration ×% has × grams of solute dissolved per 100 ml of solution.
Solution concen- tration may also be expressed as: specific gravity; molarity in
mmol/L; osmolarity in mosmol/L and osmotic pressure.
Solids that dissolve in water to produce ions are known as “electrolytes”.
However, many books refer to the dissolved ions themselves as electrolytes. If the
concentration of a particular ion in the body’s plasma is too low the prefix “-hypo”

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.2 Solutions 53

is used. For example: hyponatremia. If the concentration of a particular ion in the

plasma is too high the prefix “-hyper” is used. For example: hyperkalemia.
1. Which item from the following list is an electrolyte?
A. Ca++
B. oxygen gas (O2) dissolved in water
C. table salt (solid form of Na+Cl-)
D. glucose (solid form of the sugar)
Answer is C: “An electrolyte is a substance that when dissolved in water, will
produce ions in solution.”
2. Given that one mole of Na+Cl− has a mass of 58.5 g, how many grams of
Na+Cl− are dissolved in a solution of 0.1 mole per litre?
A. 0.585 g
B. 5.85 g
C. 58.5 g
D. 0.1 g
Answer is B: 0.1 mole = 1/10 of 58.5 g = 5.85 g
3. How many grams of sodium chloride are there in (0.9 %) normal saline?
A. 0.09 g per 100 ml
B. 0.09 g per litre
C. 9 g per 100 ml
D. 9 g per litre
Answer is D: 0.9 % means 0.9 g per 100 ml of solution = 9 g per 1000 ml
(i.e. per litre)
4. How many grams of sodium chloride are there in a one litre bag of 0.9 %
saline? A. 0.09 g
B. 0.9 g
C. 9 g
D. 90 g
Answer is C: 0.9 % means 0.9 g per 100 ml of solution = 9 g per 1000 ml
(i.e. per litre)
5. What is the percentage concentration of glucose if 80 gram of glucose is dis-
solved in one litre of solution?
A. 0.8 %
B. 5 %
C. 8 %
D. 80 %
Answer is C: 80 g per 1000 ml = 8 g per 100 ml = 8 %

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
54 4 Chemistry for Physiology

6. Given that the concentration of hydronium ions in a solution with pH of 2 is

0.19 %, what would be the concentration of hydronium ions in a solution
with pH of 3?
A. 0.13 %
B. 0.29 %
C. 0.019 %
D. 1.9 %
Answer is C: a pH change of one corresponds to a change in hydronium ion
concentration by a factor of 10. As the pH has risen, the acidity has decreased,
so there are fewer hydronium ions. That is 1/10 of 0.19 % = 0.019 %
7. What does the term “electrolyte” refer to?
A. an uncharged dissolved particle.
B. the smallest particle of an element.
C. a substance that will conduct electricity when dissolved in water.
D. negatively charged sub-atomic particles.
Answer is C: this is the definition of an
electrolyte
8. What is meant by referring to a solution concentration of 0.18 %?
A. 0.18 g of solute in 100 ml of solution.
B. 1.8 g of solute in 100 ml of solution.
C. 0.18 g of solute in one litre of solution.
D. 0.18 mole of solute in 100 ml of solution.
Answer is A: 0.18 per cent means 0.18 g per 100 ml of solution.
9. Which of the following is NOT an electrolyte (or does not contain
electrolytes)?
A. Cl−
B. acetic acid
C. glucose
D. a 0.9 % solution of sodium chloride
Answer is C: glucose will dissolve in water, but no ions are produced.
10. If the concentration of a solution is 5 %, which of the following is true?
A. There is 0.5 g of solute per 100 ml of solution
B. There is 5 g of solute per 100 ml of solution
C. There is 5 g of solute per 1000 ml of solution
D. There is 50 g of solute per 100 ml of solution
Answer is B: 5 % = 5 per cent = 5 per hundred = 5 g per 100 ml of solution.
11. What does the term “electrolyte” refer to?
A. the minor component of a solution.
B. a substance that will conduct electricity when dissolved in water.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.2 Solutions 55

C. the smallest particle of an element.

D. negatively charged sub-atomic particles.
Answer is B: this is a definition of
electrolyte.
12. The solution concentration 0.9 % means that there are
A. 0.9 g of solute in 100 ml of solution.
B. 9.0 g of solute in 100 ml of solution.
C. 0.9 g of solute in one litre of solution.
D. 0.9 mole of solute in 100 ml of solution.
Answer is A: 0.9 % = 0.9 per cent = 0.9 per hundred = 0.9 g per 100 ml
of solution.
13. Which of the following is NOT an electrolyte (or does not contain
electrolytes)?
A. K+
B. nitrate ions
C. haemoglobin
D. a 1 % solution of sodium chloride
Answer is C: haemoglobin is an uncharged protein found within red blood cells.
14. Which is the best definition of an electrolyte?
A. an atom that dissociates into ions.
B. a substance that will conduct electricity when it is dissolved in water.
C. molecules of solid, liquid or gas that will conduct electricity in solution.
D. a substance that will conduct electricity.
Answer is B: this is a definition of electrolyte. Choice C is restricted to mole-
cules; and there must be a solution involved, so D is wrong.
15. What is the condition known as hyperkalemia characterised by? A
A. higher than normal concentration of potassium in the blood.
B. lower than normal concentration of potassium in the blood.
C. serum sodium concentration greater than 150 mmol/l.
D. serum sodium concentration greater than 5 mmol/l.
Answer is A: kalemia refers to potassium. “hyper-” refers to more or an excess.
16. A solution of 5 % glucose is used for an infusion. Over a 2 hour period, 300
ml of the solution were used. How much glucose in grams was infused?
A. 5 gm
B. 12.5 gm
C. 15.0 gm
D. 50 gm
Answer is C: 5 % means 5 g per 100 ml. So in 300 ml there would be 3 × 5 g
= 15 g infused.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
56 4 Chemistry for Physiology

17. A solution of glucose is used for an infusion. Over a 3 hour period 250 ml of
solution is used containing a total of 5 g of glucose. What is the concentration
of the glucose solution used?
A. 2 %
B. 20 %
C. 0.2 %
D. 5 %
Answer is A: 5 g per 250 ml = 20 g per 1000 ml (multiply by 4) = 2 g per
100 ml = 2%.
18. A sudden and severe loss of potassium due to diuretic abuse is likely to result
in:
A. hypothermia
B. hyponatremia
C. hypokalemia
D. hypoventilation
Answer is C: kalium means potassium, the prefix “hypo-” means a lack or
decrease in.
19. Which of the following statements relating to a patient with severe loss of
potassium due to diuretic abuse is TRUE?
A. the serum levels of potassium are > 3 mmol/L
B. an ECG is probably not warranted
C. the condition may be treated by administering oral glucose and potassium
D. one course of action is to decrease the intake of potassium and to undergo
ion-exchange resin treatment
Answer is C: a loss of potassium may be treated by administering potassium.
Hypokalemia refers to a blood concentration of <3 mmol/L, and such a level
could affect the heart so an ECG IS warranted.
20. Which strategy would be most effective in dealing with a severe case of
dehydration?
A. Oral administration of a hypertonic solution.
B. Intravenous administration of distilled water.
C. Intravenous administration of isotonic glucose.
D. Intravenous administration of hypotonic sodium chloride.
Answer is C: IV solutions should be isotonic (oral solutions should be hypo-
tonic). Glucose would be absorbed by cells leaving the water behind in the
blood which would reduce blood osmolarity. Hence water would redistribute
itself by osmosis through the body.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.2 Solutions 57

21. A common IV solution is the combination 0.18 % sodium chloride and 4 %

glucose (also called “4 % and a fifth”). How many grams of each solute will be
in a one litre bag?
A. 0.18 g of sodium chloride and 4 g of glucose.
B. 0.9 g of sodium chloride and 5 g of glucose
C. 1.8 g of sodium chloride and 40 g of glucose
D. 18 g of sodium chloride and 40 g of glucose
Answer is C: 0.18 % sodium chloride and 4 % glucose means 0.18 g of
sodium chloride per 100 ml and 4 g of glucose per 100 ml. So in one litre
there would be 1.8 g and 40 g respectively.
22. The “extra-cellular” fluid compartment of the body includes which of the
following?
A. interstitial, trans-cellular and connective tissue fluids
B. vascular, connective tissue and interstitial fluids
C. intra-cellular and transcellular fluid
D. vascular and connective tissue fluid
Answer is B: extracellular must include the blood (vascular) and the fluid
between cells (interstitial).
23. Fluid and electrolyte balance in the body is maintained by which of the
following?
A. the hormone aldosterone
B. keeping accurate account of the patient’s fluid balance chart
C. the nephron of the kidney
D. the hypothalamus of the brain
Answer is C: the nephron is the functional unit of the kidney that does this job.
24. Which general description of the components of a solution is correct?
A. solvent and solute
B. solvent and liquid
C. solute and solder
D. liquid and solid
Answer is A: the solvent dissolves (e.g. water), the solute (e.g. salt) is dissolved
25. Which term below is NOT suitable to describe the concentration of a solution?
A. 5 g/litre
B. 5%
C. 2 Molar
D. 0.5 moles
Answer is D: This states an amount of substance only, without reference to
the volume of solvent involved.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
58 4 Chemistry for Physiology

26. Given that the healthy range of sodium ion concentration in the blood is 137–
145 mmol/L, if the measured concentration of a blood sample was 130
mmol/L, what would the condition be called?
A. hyperkalemia
B. hypokalemia
C. hypernatremia
D. hyponatremia
Answer is D: natrium is sodium. As 130 is less than 137, the prefix “hypo-” is
the correct one.
27. Extracellular fluid includes which of the following liquids?
A. blood plasma
B. blood plasma and interstitial fluid
C. blood plasma and interstitial fluid and connective tissue fluid
D. blood plasma and interstitial fluid and connective tissue fluid and liquid
inside cells
Answer is C: This choice includes more than choices A & B. D is wrong as
liquid inside cells is not extracellular.
28. What can be said about a solution that conducts electricity?
A. the solute is a polar molecule
B. the solvent is a non-polar liquid
C. the solution contains dissolved ions
D. the solution contains dissolved molecules
Answer is C: dissolved ions must be present for electrical conduction to occur.
29. Which of the body’s fluid compartments does the vascular compartment form
part of?
A. interstitial fluid
B. extracellular fluid
C. intracellular fluid
D. transcellular fluid
Answer is B: vascular = blood which is almost synonymous with extracellular.
30. To what condition does the term “hypokalemia” refer?
A. too little phosphorus in the blood
B. too much sodium in the blood
C. too little potassium in the blood
D. too little sodium in the blood
Answer is C: hypo- refers to too little and Kalium is the Latin word for
potassium.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.2 Solutions 59

31. Which of the following is correct for intra-cellular fluid (ICF) and extra-
cellular fluid (ECF)?
A. the ECF is part of the ICF
B. the majority of the body’s water is in the ECF
C. the ICF contains more sodium than the ECF
D. the ICF contains more potassium than the ECF
Answer is D: there is more K within cells than outside cells (the reverse is
true for sodium). Most body water is inside the cells.
32. A one litre IV bag contains 0.18 % sodium chloride and 4 % glucose.
What mass of solutes would be dissolved in 100 ml of the solution?
A. 0.18 g of sodium chloride and 4 g of glucose
B. 1.8 g of sodium chloride and 4 g of glucose
C. 1.8 g of sodium chloride and 40 g of glucose
D. 18 g of sodium chloride and 40 g of glucose
Answer is A: 0.18 % sodium chloride and 4 % glucose means 0.18 g of
sodium chloride per 100 ml and 4 g of glucose per 100 ml.
33. In the context of fluid (water) balance, the body is said to have “two compart-
ments”. What are they?
A. the vascular and the interstitial compartments
B. the intracellular and the interstitial compartments
C. the lymph and the vascular compartments
D. the extracellular and the intracellular compartments
Answer is D: outside the cells and inside the cells includes everything.
34. What is an insufficient concentration of potassium in the blood known as?
A. hypokalemia
B. hyponatremia
C. hypopotassemia
D. hypocalcemia
Answer is A: the Latin word for potassium is kalium. The prefix “-hypo” refers
to too little. Arguably, choice C is not wrong, but this expression is not used.
35. If a solution is shown to be able to conduct electricity, then what is true?
A. A: the solution is free of impurities
B. B: the solution contains a dissolved electrolyte
C. C: the solution contains dissolved molecules
D. D: the solution is an aqueous solution
Answer is B: a dissolved electrolyte will ensure that ions are in solution and
the solution will conduct electricity as these ions are free to move through the
solution.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
60 4 Chemistry for Physiology

36. How many grams of sodium chloride are there in a one litre bag of 4 %
glucose and 0.18 % sodium chloride solution?
A. 0.18
B. 1.8
C. 18
D. 41.8
Answer is B: 0.18 % = 0.18 g per 100 ml, so in 1000 ml there would
be 10 × 0.18 = 1.8 g.
37. In the vascular compartment of the body, what is the solvent?
A. blood
B. plasma
C. serum
D. water
Answer is D: All these things are in the vascular compartment, but water is
the solvent.
38. The extracellular fluid compartment consists of which of the following?
A. vascular and transcellular
B. interstitial, vascular and connective tissue fluid
C. intra-cellular and transcellular
D. trans-cellular, intra-cellular and connective tissue fluid
Answer is B: Vascular and interstitial liquids must be included.
39. Electrolyte balance is achieved largely by:
A. the kidneys and aldosterone
B. drinking sufficient water
C. anti-diuretic hormone and isotonic fluids
D. ensuring that daily water intake is the same as daily water output
Answer is A: The kidneys have the ability to reabsorb and secrete ions and
water as required. Aldosterone causes the kidney tubules to reabsorb sodium
ions while promoting the secretion of potassium ions.
40. What may hyponatremia be described as?
A. insufficient potassium in the blood
B. insufficient iron in the blood
C. insufficient sodium in the blood
D. excess sodium in the blood
Answer is C: the prefix “hypo-” refers to too little, and natrium is a Latin
word that means sodium.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.3 Diffusion and Osmosis 61

41. Which of the following ways of expressing a solution’s concentration is

written as a number without units?
A. % concentration
B. Molarity
C. Osmotic pressure
D. Specific gravity
Answer is D: Specific gravity of a solution is the ratio of the density of the
solu- tion to the density of water (which is 1.0). Consequently the density
units “can- cel out”.
42. A solution of 5 % glucose is infused over a period of three hours. If 250 ml
of solution was used, how many grams of glucose was infused?
A. 5g
B. 12.5 g
C. 15.0 g
D. 50 g
Answer is B: 5 % glucose means 5 g per 100 ml of solution. 250 ml was used,
therefore 2.5 × 5 = 12.5 g
43. A solution is prepared by dissolving 10 g of glucose in 250 ml of water. What
will be the concentration of this solution expressed as a percentage?
A. 4
B. 6
C. 25
D. 40
Answer is A: % concentration states how many grams of solute are in 100 ml
of solution. 10 g per 250 ml is the same as 10 ÷ 2.5 per 100 ml. This is 4 %

4.3 Diffusion and Osmosis

Ions and molecules in a solution are continually bumping into each other and mov-
ing independently in random directions. This continual motion results in the solute
particles and solvent molecules being evenly distributed. Because if there is a
greater concentration of one type of molecule in one place compared to elsewhere,
the random motion will result in more molecules moving away from that place
than are moving towards the place. Diffusion is the name given to this random
motion of molecules and ions. If water is the molecule that is moving and it is
passing through a semi-permeable membrane from one solution to the solution on
the other side, the movement is called “osmosis”. If it is a solute molecule or ion
that is passing through a semi-permeable membrane, the movement is called
“dialysis”. The result of osmosis is that the more concentrated solution becomes
more dilute.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
62 4 Chemistry for Physiology

Another way to describe the concentration of a solution is to state its “osmotic

pressure” (in pressure units). The osmotic pressure of blood is about 7.3 atmo-
spheres (740 kPa). Osmotic pressure is described as the tendency of water to move
into a solution via osmosis. The higher the solution’s concentration, the higher is
its osmotic pressure. Osmotic pressure may be measured by determining the
amount of pressure that must be applied to a solution to prevent water from
entering the solu- tion by osmosis.
1. Consider two aqueous solutions of different concentration separated by a
semi- permeable membrane. In this situation, osmosis results in:
A. water molecules moving to the side where the solution concentration is
lower.
B. the more concentrated solution becoming even more concentrated.
C. the more dilute solution becoming even more dilute.
D. the more concentrated solution becoming more dilute.
Answer is D: The result of osmosis is that the more concentrated solution
becomes more dilute.
2. Osmosis may be defined as which of the following?
A. The diffusion of water molecules across a semi-permeable membrane
from the solution with higher water concentration into the solution of
lower water concentration.
B. The movement of water molecules across a semi-permeable membrane
from the solution of higher concentration into the solution of lower
concentration.
C. The diffusion of solute particles across a semi-permeable membrane from
the solution of higher concentration into the solution of lower
concentration.
D. The movement of water molecules across a semi-permeable membrane
from the solution of lower concentration into the solution of higher
concentration.
Answer is D: The definition should include: “water”; movement through an
SP membrane; direction of water flow from more dilute solution into the
solution of higher concentration.
3. What is the movement of water molecules across a plasma membrane from
the side where the solution concentration is more dilute to the side where the
solu- tion is more concentrated called?
A. osmosis
B. reverse osmosis
C. diffusion
D. hydration
Answer is A: Osmosis is the diffusion of WATER molecules through a mem-
brane, from where there is a higher concentration of water molecules to where

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.3 Diffusion and Osmosis 63

there is a lower concentration of water molecules (i.e. into the more concen-
trated solution).
4. The movement of water molecules through a plasma membrane from the side
where there is a higher concentration water molecules to the side where there
are fewer, is best known as:
A. diffusion
B. osmosis
C. pinocytosis
D. hydrolysis
Answer is B: osmosis is the diffusion of water molecules through a
membrane, down their concentration gradient.
5. The diffusion of water molecules across a cell membrane from the side where
the solution concentration is more dilute to the side where it is greater, is
known as which of the following?
A. osmosis
B. filtration
C. hydrolysis
D. buffer action
Answer is A: This is a definition of osmosis.
6. If a semi-permeable membrane separates two aqueous solutions with different
osmotic pressures, what will be the direction of water flow between solutions?
From:
A. higher osmotic pressure to the solution of lower osmotic pressure.
B. lower osmotic pressure to the solution of higher osmotic pressure.
C. higher concentration to the solution of lower concentration.
D. higher hydrostatic pressure to the solution of lower hydrostatic pressure.
Answer is B: lower osmotic pressure means a lower solution concentration
(and a higher concentration of water molecules). Water moves from the dilute
solu- tion into the more concentrated one.
7. During dialysis, what moves across a semi-permeable membrane (and how)?
A. Water molecules by diffusion from the region of high solute concentration
to the region of low solute concentration.
B. Water molecules by filtration from the region of high hydrostatic pressure
to the region of low hydrostatic pressure.
C. Solutes by diffusion from the region of high solute concentration to the
region of low solute concentration.
D. Solutes by filtration from the region of low hydrostatic pressure to the
region of high hydrostatic pressure.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
64 4 Chemistry for Physiology

Answer is C: dialysis refers to movement of solutes (not water). Choice D is

wrong as filtration refers to movement due to hydrostatic pressure difference
from the solution under higher pressure to low pressure.
8. A suitable definition of osmosis would be movement:
A. of solute particles through a plasma membrane from the side where their
concentration is greatest to the side where it is lower.
B. of water molecules through a plasma membrane from the side where their
concentration is greatest to the side where it is lower.
C. of a substance from a region where it is in high concentration to where its
concentration is lower
D. caused by a hydrostatic pressure difference.
Answer is B: osmosis refers to movement of water molecules (not other mole-
cules), by diffusion.
9. The difference between dialysis and diffusion is that
A. dialysis involves the movement of water molecules.
B. diffusion involves movement against the concentration gradient.
C. dialysis involves passive movement through a cell membrane.
D. diffusion is caused by a hydrostatic pressure difference.
Answer is C: diffusion is passive and occurs in the direction of the concentra-
tion gradient. Diffusion can occur within a solution or across a membrane.
Dialysis on the other hand, requires a membrane and is a term applied to sol-
utes, not water molecules.
10. Osmosis involves the movement of:
A. water molecules through a membrane from a region of higher
concentration of water molecules to a region of lower water molecule
concentration.
B. solute particles from a region of higher solution concentration to a region
of lower solution concentration.
C. water molecules from a region of lower concentration of water to a region
of higher water molecule concentration.
D. solute particles through a membrane from a region of lower solute concen-
tration to a region of higher solute concentration.
Answer is A: osmosis involves water molecules (not solutes) moving down
their concentration gradient into a solution of lower concentration of water
molecules.
11. What does “osmosis” refer to?
A. the constant random motion of ions and molecules.
B. the movement of ions and molecules from regions of high concentration to
regions of low concentration.
C. the movement of water molecules through a semi-permeable membrane.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.3 Diffusion and Osmosis 65

D. the movement of water molecules through a semi-permeable membrane

from the side with higher water concentration to the side with lower water
concentration.
Answer is D: the definition must include water molecules; crossing a SP
mem- brane; a correct direction of movement.
12. What is the difference between filtration and diffusion?
A. Diffusion can occur through a biological membrane whereas filtration cannot.
B. Filtration can occur through a biological membrane whereas diffusion cannot.
C. Filtration is the movement of molecules caused by a pressure difference
but diffusion does not involve a difference in pressure.
D. Diffusion is the movement of molecules caused by a pressure difference
but filtration does not involve a difference in pressure.
Answer is C: filtration requires a pressure difference, diffusion does not. Both
diffusion and filtration can occur through a membrane.
13. What is the difference between osmosis and dialysis?
A. Dialysis involves the movement of solute molecules whereas osmosis
refers to water molecules.
B. Osmosis involves the movement of solute molecules whereas dialysis
refers to water molecules.
C. Osmosis involves movement of molecules across a membrane but dialysis
does not involve a membrane.
D. Dialysis involves movement of molecules across a membrane but osmosis
does not involve a membrane.
Answer is A: osmosis refers to the movement of water molecules (only)
through a membrane. Only choice A is consistent with this.
14. Which one of the following processes that describe movement of the particles
in a solution does NOT require passing through a membrane?
A. diffusion
B. filtration
C. dialysis
D. osmosis
Answer is A: While diffusion can occur through a membrane, its presence is
not required in order to define diffusion.
15. Which statement about the osmotic pressure of an aqueous solution is correct?
Osmotic pressure:
A. is an indication of the force with which pure water moves into that
solution.
B. is a measure of the tendency of water to move into the solution.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
66 4 Chemistry for Physiology

C. is the drawing power of water and depends on the number of molecules in

the solution.
D. of a solution is called its osmolarity in mosmol/kg.
Answer is B: solutions with high “osmotic pressure” are concentrated
solutions and so water will diffuse into such solutions from solutions of lower
concentra- tion – a process known as osmosis. The other answers are
nonsense.
16. Diffusion is the term given to the process where:
A. molecules move along their concentration gradient from high
concentration to low concentration.
B. water moves along its concentration gradient from low concentration to
high concentration.
C. ATP is used to move ions along their concentration gradient.
D. a membrane protein, by changing shape after binding to a molecule,
moves the molecule across the plasma membrane.
Answer is A: This is the only correct definition of diffusion.
17. By what name is the movement of solute particles through a selectively
perme- able membrane, in the direction of their concentration gradient
known?
A. diffusion
B. dialysis
C. osmosis
D. filtration
Answer is B: while the solute particles are indeed diffusing through the mem-
brane, the presence of a membrane makes dialysis the appropriate term to use.
Diffusion is also applied to the movement of particles within a solution even
when they do not cross a membrane.
18. Blood has a slightly higher osmotic pressure than the interstitial fluid that sur-
rounds capillaries. What is the effect of this?
A. Water will tend to move from the interstitial fluid into the capillaries.
B. The solution concentration of blood is less than the solution concentration
of interstitial fluid.
C. Water will tend to move from the capillaries into the interstitial fluid.
D. Capillaries will expand in diameter.
Answer is A: water will move through a membrane into a solution of higher
osmotic pressure (the blood) from a solution of lower osmotic pressure.
19. Consider a patient undergoing kidney dialysis, whose blood has bicarbonate at
a concentration of 14 mmol/L and urea at 23 mmol/L. The dialysing liquid has
bicarbonate at 32 mmol/L and urea at 0 mmol/L. In which direction will these
substances flow?

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.3 Diffusion and Osmosis 67

A. bicarbonate will flow from patient’s blood to dialysing liquid, urea will
flow from patient’s blood into dialysing liquid.
B. bicarbonate will flow from dialysing liquid to patient’s blood, urea will
flow from dialysing liquid into patient’s blood.
C. bicarbonate will flow from dialysing liquid to patient’s blood, urea will
flow from patient’s blood into dialysing liquid.
D. bicarbonate will flow from patient’s blood to dialysing liquid, urea will
flow from dialysing liquid to patient’s blood.
Answer is C: molecules will flow from areas of high concentration towards
areas of low concentration. Hence bicarbonate will flow from the dialysing
liquid at 32 to blood at 14 mmol/L, while urea will flow from blood at 23 mmol/L
to the dialysing liquid at 0 mmol/L.
20. Which is the best description for the osmotic pressure of a solution?
A. A: the pressure that needs to be applied to the solution while it is separated
from pure water by a membrane, to prevent a net flow of water through
the membrane into the solution.
B. B: the force with which pure water moves through a membrane into that
solution as a result of its solute concentration.
C. C: the movement of particles through a membrane, where the movement is
caused by a hydrostatic pressure.
D. D: it is the force of attraction for water by undissolved particles in the
solution.
Answer is A: the application of a hydrostatic pressure to a solution in order to
oppose and prevent the osmotic flow of water into that liquid is the basis for
assigning a value to that solution for its “osmotic pressure”. Osmotic pressure
is the value of this externally applied hydrostatic pressure. Choice C describes
filtration. Choices B & D are nonsense.
21. In which of the following situations would the osmotic pressure of blood be
the greatest?
A. in a patient whose blood osmolarity is 290 mosmol/L
B. in a patient whose blood osmolarity is 280 mosmol/L and whose urine
spe- cific gravity is 1.002
C. in a patient with hyperthermia
D. in a patient who is dehydrated
Answer is D: the healthy range for blood osmolarity is 280–300 mosmol/L. a
dehydrated person would have a blood osmolarity approaching or exceeding
300 mosmol/L.
22. Osmosis involves movement of water from where the:
A. water concentration is lower to where it is higher
B. solute concentration is higher to where it is lower

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
68 4 Chemistry for Physiology

C. solution is more concentrated to where it is less concentrated

D. water concentration is higher to where it is lower
Answer is D: in osmosis water molecules flow down their concentration
gradi- ent (and from weaker solutions to more concentrated ones).
23. What is “osmotic pressure”?
A. the pressure exerted by a solution due to its concentration
B. a measure of solution concentration expressed in the units of pressure
C. the pressure exerted by the blood colloidal plasma proteins
D. the pressure that drives water movement out of the arterial end of
capillaries
Answer is B: Osmotic pressure is a way of expressing solution concentration.
The word pressure in the term “osmotic pressure” makes it tempting to
errone- ously think of the solution exerting some type of pressure due to its
solutes.
24. If a red blood cell (rbc) is placed in a solution that has a greater concentration
than that inside the rbc, what will happen?
A. the rbc will crenate
B. the rbc will haemolyse
C. there will be a net movement of water out of the rbc into the solution
D. there will be no net movement of water out of the rbc
Answer is C: water will flow by osmosis from the rbc into the surrounding
solu- tion. If the difference in concentration is large enough, the outflow of
water will be large, and the rbc will also shrivel (crenate) as a result of this
outflow.
25. One of the following is an example of osmosis. Which one?
A. water moving from the glomerulus of a nephron into the Bowman’s
capsule
B. water leaving a blood capillary from close to its arteriole end, to enter the
interstitial fluid
C. water entering a red blood cell that is in a 0.8% sodium chloride solution,
by passing through its plasma membrane
D. water evaporating from perspiration on the skin
Answer is C: Osmosis refers to the movement of water through a membrane
in the direction of its concentration gradient. A 0.8 % solution is hypotonic to
the contents of the rbc, so water would enter the cell. In both choice A & C,
the water is moving due to a hydrostatic pressure difference.
26. The Na+/K+ ATPase pump in the plasma membrane moves Na out of the cell
and K into the cell against their concentration gradient. Then Na reenters the
cell and K leaks out of the cell, along their concentration gradients through
their membrane channels. What is the movement of Na and K along their
concentra- tion gradients called?

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.4 Tonicity, Moles and Osmoles 69

A. Active transport
B. Diffusion
C. Facilitated diffusion
D. Osmosis
Answer is B: The movement of these ions down their concentration gradient
is diffusion. The concentration gradient is produced by the active transport of
the Na+/K+ ATPase pump.
27. Which of the following statements is FALSE?
A. Filtration is movement of water caused by a difference in hydrostatic pres-
sure, while diffusion results from a difference in concentration.
B. Both diffusion and filtration will tend to continue till there is an equal
amount on both sides of the membrane.
C. Any hypertonic solution has a concentration lower than that of blood
while a hypotonic solution has a concentration greater than the blood.
D. Water moves into a red blood cell resulting in haemolysis, and out of a
cell by a process called plasmolysis.
Answer is C: Hypertonic solutions have a concentration greater than blood.
Plasmolysis is the process in which cells lose water in a hypertonic solution.

4.4 Tonicity, Moles and Osmoles

The “mole” is the standard international unit for amount of substance (or number
of particles). Just as dozen is the word for 12 things, the mole is the word for 6.02
× 1023 things. The things are atoms or molecules. The concentration of a solution
can be expressed as the number of moles per litre. For example 5 % glucose
contains 50 g of glucose dissolved in a litre of solution. Fifty grams of glucose is
0.278 moles of glucose, so 5 % glucose = 50 g/L = 0.278 mol/L = 278 mmol/L.
A glucose solution with this concentration is said to be “isotonic” with blood.
That is, will not cause a net flow of water into or out of red blood cells. A
hypotonic solution would cause net inflow, while a hypertonic solution would
cause a net outflow from rbc.
The mass of glucose that contains one mole of glucose molecules (180 g) is
determined from its formula (C6H12O6) and the relative atomic masses of the atoms
(12, 1 & 16 respectively). The same can be done for Na +Cl− so that one mole of
sodium chloride has a mass of 58.5 g. However sodium chloride is an ionic sub-
stance, so when it dissolves in water the Na + ions and Cl− ions separate and move
independently. This means that one mole of solid sodium chloride produces 2
moles of particles (ions) when it dissolves – one mole of Na + ions and one mole of
Cl− ions. We use the term “osmoles” to refer to the number of ions (particles) in
solution when an ionic substance dissolves. Hence one mole of the ionic substance
sodium chloride produces 2 osmoles of dissolved ions.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
70 4 Chemistry for Physiology

1. What information does the molarity of a solution provide?

A. the density of a solution
B. the number of dissolved particles per litre of solution
C. the mass of a mole of the substance
D. the tonicity of the solution
Answer is B: if molarity is 1.2 mmol/L = 1.2 × 10−3 × (6.02 × 1023) particles
per litre
2. What term is applied to an intravenous solution that would cause a net move-
ment of water out of red blood cells?
A. hypertonic
B. supertonic
C. epitonic
D. hypotonic
Answer is A: “hyper-” refers to greater (tonicity) than inside an rbc. Hence
water would move from the less concentrated solution (within the rbc) to the
exterior.
3. What is a definition of an osmole? The amount of substance that:
A. must be dissolved to produce 6 × 1023 solute particles.
B. must be dissolved to produce an osmotic pressure of 1.0 mmHg.
C. must be dissolved to produce an isotonic solution.
D. contains 6 × 1023 particles.
Answer is A: Ionic substances (e.g. Na +Cl−) separate into ions when
dissolved. Hence a mole of NaCl would produce two osmoles of ions (one
mole of Na ions and one mole of Cl ions). Hence half of a mole of NaCl,
when dissolved, would result in one osmole of dissolved particles (ions).
4. Choose the solution below that has the lowest concentration of dissolved
particles.
A. 0.9 % NaCl
B. isotonic powerade
C. 5 % glucose
D. hypotonic saline
Answer is D: choices A, B & C are all isotonic solutions. “hypo” refers to a
solution concentration that is less than that of human blood.
5. What can be correctly said of an isotonic intravenous solution? An isotonic
solution:
A. causes water to move out of red blood cells.
B. causes no net movement of water into or out of red blood cells.
C. has the same solutes in the same solution concentration as blood plasma

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.4 Tonicity, Moles and Osmoles 71

D. causes water to move into red blood cells.

Answer is B: isotonic means that the IV solution has the same concentration
of particles (albeit the particles themselves may be different) as in rbc, hence
there is no net osmotic flow.
6. What would be the concentration of a solution that causes red blood cells
placed in it to swell?
A. hypotonic
B. isotonic
C. hypertonic
D. iso-osmotic
Answer is A: If the rbc swell, that means water is entering the cells, hence the
surrounding liquid is at a lower concentration (i.e. hypotonic) to the liquid
inside rbc.
7. The unit milliosmoles per litre (mosmol/L) refers to which of the following?
A. the number of particles in solution, in multiples of 6 × 1020 per litre.
B. 103 times the number of moles of particles in a litre of solution.
C. the number of molecules per litre of solution.
D. the number of moles per millilitre of solution.
Answer is A: A milliosmole (mosmol) is 10−3 × (6 × 1023) particles which
is 6 × 1020. Choice B means 1000× the correct answer. Choice D means
1/1000 × the correct answer.
8. A hypertonic solution is one which
A. has an osmotic pressure that is different to that inside red blood cells
B. has an osmolarity less than that of red blood cells
C. causes no net movement of water through the membrane of red blood cells
D. has an osmolarity greater than that of red blood cells
Answer is D: “Hyper” means greater than the tonicity (or osmolarity) inside
an rbc.
9. Given that one mole of Na+Cl− has a mass of 58.5 g, what would be the
concen- tration of particles when 0.9 g of Na+Cl− is dissolved in 100 ml of
water?
A. 117 mmol/L
B. 150 mmol/L
C. 150 mosmol/L
D. 300 mosmol/L
Ans:=D: the number of moles in 0.9 g = 0.9 g/58.5 g/mol = 0.0154 mole of
Na+Cl−. However NaCl separates into ions when dissolved, so that there will
be 0.0154 mol of Na and 0.0154 mol of Cl, hence 0.0308 osmol of parti-
cles = 30.8 mosmol per 100 ml. In one litre, the number of moles would be
ten times greater, so 300 mosmol/L (is closest).

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
72 4 Chemistry for Physiology

10. The unit millimoles per litre (mmol/L) refers to which of the following?
A. the number of particles in solution, in multiples of 6 × 1020 per litre.
B. 103 times the number of moles of particles in a litre of solution.
C. the number of molecules per litre of solution.
D. the number of moles per millilitre of solution.
Answer is A: A mole = 6 × 1023 particles, a millimole (mmol) = 6 × 1020
particles. When dissolved, whether the particles are ions or molecules makes
no difference.
11. An isotonic solution is one which
A. has an osmotic pressure that is different to red blood cells
B. has an osmolarity less than that of red blood cells
C. causes no net movement of water between the solution and red blood cells
D. has an osmolarity greater than that of red blood cells
Answer is C: “iso” means “the same”. When the concentration of the
surround- ing liquid is the same as that inside a rbc, then no net water
movement occurs.
12. A hypotonic solution may be characterised by which of the following?
A. a solution whose osmolarity is greater than that of blood.
B. one that causes red blood cells to crenate.
C. a solution within the range 280–300 mosmol/L
D. one that causes a net water movement into red blood cells.
Answer is D: “hypo” means less concentrated than the solution inside a rbc.
This in turn means that the concentration of water molecules is greater outside
the cell than inside. So there will be a net water flow by osmosis into the rbc.
13. Which of the following statements could be applied to a hypertonic solution?
A. it causes red blood cells to shrink and crenate.
B. it causes red blood cells to swell and perhaps lyse.
C. it is a solution with an osmolarity less than that of blood.
D. it causes movement of water into red blood cells.
Answer is A: rbc placed in a hypertonic solution would lose water to the solu-
tion, so their volume would decrease (they would shrink). This would cause
their membrane to become wrinkled (to crenate).
14. To what does the term “mole” refer?
A. the smallest particle of a molecular compound.
B. the amount of solute that must be dissolved in water to make an isotonic
solution.
C. an amount of substance that contains 6.02 × 1023 particles.
D. a group of 2 or more atoms bonded together.
Answer is C: mole is the SI unit for “amount of substance”. Choice C is the
correct number.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.4 Tonicity, Moles and Osmoles 73

15. What do solutions of 5 % glucose, 9.5 % sucrose and 0.9 % sodium chloride
have in common? They:
A. all have the same concentration
B. are all hypotonic to plasma
C. all contain the same number of dissolved particles per unit volume.
D. are all hypertonic to plasma

Answer is C: the three solutions are isotonic to blood. Choice A is incorrect

they have different (weight/volume) concentrations.
16. An intravenous fluid that is hypertonic to blood would have what effect on
the red blood cells?
A. it would have no effect.
B. the number of red blood cells would increase
C. red blood cells would lyse.
D. it would cause red blood cells to crenate.
Answer is D: rbc in contact with a hypertonic solution would lose water to the
solution and shrink. This would cause their plasma membrane to crenate
(wrinkle).
17. An intravenous fluid that is isotonic to blood would have what effect on the
red blood cells?
A. it would have no effect.
B. it would cause red blood cells to crenate.
C. red blood cells would lyse.
D. the blood volume would increase.
Answer is A: rbc would be unaffected by an isotonic solution as there will be
no net flow of water into or out of the cells.
18. What may be said of isotonic solutions? They have:
A. had added the same number of moles of solid substance per volume of
solution.
B. the same number of grams of solute per volume of solution.
C. the same percent concentration.
D. the same number of dissolved particles per volume of solution.
Answer is D: Choice A is incorrect as a mole of an ionic substance will result
in 2 or 3 osmoles of dissolved particles. (Choices B & C are incorrect).
19. Fructose is a sugar with a molecular formula C 6H12O6. Given that the atomic
weights are: C = 12, H = 1 and O = 16, how many moles of fructose are there
in 36 grams?
A. 0.01 moles
B. 0.10 moles

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
74 4 Chemistry for Physiology

C. 0.20 moles
D. 0.50 moles
Answer is C: Mass of one mole of fructose = (6 × 12) + (12 × 1) + (6 × 16) =
72 + 12 + 96 = 180 g. 36 g is less than one mole. Number of moles = 36
g/180 g per mol = 0.2 moles
20. Ribose is a sugar with molecular formula C 5H10O5. Given that the atomic
weights are: C = 12, H = 1 and O = 16, how many moles of ribose are there in
3 grams?
A. 0.01 moles
B. 0.02 moles
C. 0.05 moles
D. 0.10 moles
Answer is B: Mass of one mole of ribose = (5 × 12) + (10 × 1) + (5 × 16) =
60 + 1 0 + 80 = 150 g. 3 g is less than one mole. Number of moles = 3 g/150 g
per mol = 0.02 moles
21. A solution is prepared containing 2 % sodium chloride (Na+Cl−). Which of the
following best describes the osmolarity of this solution? (Note : Na = 23,
Cl = 35.5)
A. 340 mosmol/L
B. 680 mosmol/L
C. 340 osmol/L
D. 680 osmol/L
Answer is B: 2 % = 2 g/100 ml = 20g/l. Mass of 1 mol of Na+Cl− = 23 + 35.5
= 58.5 g. number of moles of Na+Cl− required for one litre of 2 % solution =
20 g/58.5 g per mol = 0.34 mol. Sodium chloride is an ionic substance so
dissociates into ions when dissolved. This would produce 0.34 mol of Na
and 0.34 mol of Cl = 0.68 osmoles of dissolved particles in the one litre.
0.68 osmol/L = 680 mosmol/L
22. The isotonic concentration for sodium chloride is 0.9 %, and for glucose is 5
%. Which of the following solutions is isotonic with the above solutions? A
solu- tion containing:
A. 5 % glucose and 0.25 % sodium chloride
B. 0.9 % sodium chloride and 0.5 % glucose
C. 2.5 % sodium chloride and 2.5 % glucose
D. 4 % glucose and 0.18 % sodium chloride
Answer is D: Choices A & B are both hypertonic. 4 % glucose contains 4/5 of
the concentration of dissolved particles that are in (isotonic) 5 %
glucose.
0.18 % sodium chloride contains 1/5 of the concentration of dissolved
particles that are in 0.9 % sodium chloride (0.18/0.9 = 0.2). One fifth plus four
fifths add to five fifths of the number of particles that are required for an
isotonic solution.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.4 Tonicity, Moles and Osmoles 75

23. Given that one mole of glucose has a mass of 180 g, how many millimole of
glucose does 40 g of glucose contain?
A. 0.222
B. 180
C. 222
D. 278
Answer is C: Number of mole of glucose = 40/180 = 0.222 mole. Number of
millimole = 222
24. Which of the following statements about an “osmole” is correct? An osmole is
the:
A. same as a mole for ionic substances.
B. formula weight of a substance expressed in grams.
C. number of moles multiplied by the number of molecules in the chemical
formula.
D. amount of substance that must be dissolved in order to produce 1.6 ×
1023 dissolved particles.
Answer is D: an osmole refers to the number of solute particles (ions or mole-
cules) that exist in solution, after a substance has dissolved.
25. Glucose is a sugar with a molecular formula C6H12O6. Given that the atomic
weights are: C = 12, H = 1 and O = 16, what is the mass of 1 mole of glucose?
A. 1.8 g
B. 18 g
C. 180 g
D. 1800 g
Answer is C: Mass of one mole of glucose = (6 × 12) + (12 × 1) + (6 × 16) =
72 + 12 + 96 = 180 g.
26. Lactose is a sugar with a molecular formula C12H22O11. Given that the atomic
weights are: C = 12, H = 1 and O = 16, what is the weight of 1 mole of
lactose?
A. 3.42 g
B. 34.2 g
C. 342 g
D. 3420 g
Answer is C: Mass of one mole of lactose = (12 × 12) + (22 ×1) + (11 ×16) = 144
+ 22 + 176 = 342 g.
27. Red blood cells are added to a hypotonic solution of glucose. Which of the
fol- lowing best describes what you would observe?
A. The cells would most likely sink to the bottom unaffected
B. The cells would shrink due to water loss.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
76 4 Chemistry for Physiology

C. The cells would coagulate.

D. The cells would swell and burst due to intake of water
Answer is D: A hypotonic solution would result in an inflow of water to rbc.
This would stretch their plasma membrane and eventually it would break
(burst).
28. A solution that is said to be isotonic to blood has the same:
A. percent concentration as blood.
B. number of moles of dissolved particles as blood.
C. number of osmoles per litre of dissolved particles as blood.
D. number of dissolved particles as blood.
Answer is C: Isotonic means the same number of solute particles per litre.
Choice B would also be correct if “moles” was replaced with “moles per
litre”.
29. If the following amounts of the given substances were dissolved in water,
which would result in four osmoles of dissolved particles?
A. 2 moles of C6H12O6
B. 2 moles of Na+Cl−
C. 2 moles of C12H22O11
D. 2 moles of (Na+)2SO42−
Answer is B: Osmole is a term used when the solute particles came from an
ionic substance. Osmoles = moles × number of ions in formula. There are two
ions in the formula for sodium chloride, hence 4 osmoles. There are three ions
in the formula for sodium sulphate, hence 6 osmoles.
30. What is the difference between “molarity” and “osmolarity”?
A. molarity applies only to covalent compounds while osmolarity applies
only to ionic compounds.
B. osmolarity is molarity multiplied by two.
C. the molarity and osmolarity of a solution is the same for dissolved ionic
compounds, but are different for dissolved covalent compounds.
D. osmolarity refers to the concentration of dissolved particles in a solution
which may not be the same as the number of moles of substance that was
dissolved per litre of solution.
Answer is D: Choice D is better than choice A as molarity can also be applied
to ionic compounds.
31. Human blood has an osmolarity that lies within the range 280–
300 mosmol/L. Which of the following statements is correct?
A. an isotonic solution has osmolarity that is either less than 280 or greater
than 300 mosmol/L
B. a hypotonic solution has osmolarity between 280 and 300 mosmol/L

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.4 Tonicity, Moles and Osmoles 77

C. a hypertonic solution has osmolarity between 280 and 300 mosmol/L

D. an isotonic solution has osmolarity between 280 and 300 mosmol/L
Answer is D: An isotonic solution has the same osmolarity as blood.
32. What distinguishes an osmole from a mole?
A. In a sample of substance, the number of osmoles is twice the number of
moles
B. Both mole and osmole may be used in reference to ionic compounds,
while covalent compounds are described by mole alone.
C. the mass of a mole is the sum of the relative atomic masses (RAM) of the
atoms in the formula stated as grams. An osmole is half of this mass.
D. an osmole applies only to covalent molecular substances, whereas a mole
is validly applied to both covalent and ionic substances.
Answer is B: Both mole and osmole may be used in reference to ionic com-
pounds (because the atoms of ionic compounds separate into their constituent
ions when dissolved), while the atoms within covalent compounds remain as
molecules even when dissolved.
33. Which of the four IV solutions below is hypotonic?
A. 0.18 % sodium chloride and 4 % glucose
B. 0.3 % sodium chloride and 3.3 % glucose
C. 0.45 % sodium chloride
D. 0.9 % sodium chloride
Answer is C: As 0.9 % NaCl is isotonic, and 0.45 % is less than 0.9 %, it must
be hypotonic (and there is only one best correct answer!). A is “4 % and a fifth”
while B is “3.3 % and a third”.
34. Which of the following solutions is the most hypertonic?
A. 0.3 % sodium chloride and 3.3 % glucose
B. 0.45 % sodium chloride and 2.5 % glucose
C. 0.45 % sodium chloride
D. 10 % glucose
Answer is D: 5 % glucose is isotonic, so 10 % must be hypertonic. Choices A
& B are isotonic, while choice C is hypotonic.
35. Given that a mole is 6 × 1023 particles, what is a millimole?
A. 6 × 1020 particles
B. one thousand moles
C. 6 × 1026 particles
D. 0.0001 moles
Answer is A: a millimole is one thousandth (or 0.001) of a mole.1 milli-
mole = 10−3 × (6 × 1023) = 6 × 1020 particles.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
78 4 Chemistry for Physiology

36. A solution that is isotonic to blood plasma is one which

A. contains 0.5 % glucose
B. must contain the same solutes as blood and in the same concentration as in
blood
C. has an osmolarity between 280 and 300 mosmol/L
D. causes no net movement of water into or out of cells
Answer is D: The concept of tonicity involves reference to a membrane (in
this case the plasma membrane of a rbc). Osmolarity is a property of the
solution (and of how much solute is dissolved in it) and exists whether a semi-
perme- able membrane is present or not.
37. Which of the following quantities of substance would, when dissolved in one
litre of water, produce a solution with the highest osmolarity?
A. 1 mole of glucose molecules (C6H12O6)
B. 1 mole of Na+Cl− (sodium chloride)
C. 1 mole of haemoglobin molecules
D. 1 osmole of K+ (potassium ions)
Answer is B: Sodium chloride is an ionic substance, so when it dissolves,1
mole of it would separate into 1 mole of individual Na + ions and 1 mole of Cl−
ions giving a total of 2 osmoles of separate particles (ions) per litre.
38. Given the concentration of Na+ inside the cell is about 10 mmol/L while it is
140 mmol/L in the extracellular fluid. The values for K+ are 140 mmol/L
inside the cell and 4 mmol/L extracellularly. In what directions would these
ions diffuse?
A. Na+ would diffuse into the cell while K+ would diffuse out.
B. K+ would diffuse into the cell while Na + would diffuse out.
C. Both Na+ and K+ would diffuse out of the cell.
D. Both Na+ and K+ would diffuse into of the cell.
Answer is A: Na would diffuse form 140 mmol/L to 10 – the direction of its
concentration gradient which is from outside to inside. K would diffuse from
140 mmol/L to 4, that is from inside to outside.
39. Which of the following statements best describes what all isotonic solutions
have in common? They:
A. contain the same concentration of glucose molecules
B. contain the same total concentration of particles
C. contain the same concentration of sodium chloride
D. have the same specific gravity
Answer is B: While “iso-” refers to the same, it is the concentration of all the
dissolved particles be they ions or molecules of any substance that determines
tonicity.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.5 Acids, Bases and Buffers 79

4.5 Acids, Bases and Buffers

An acid is a substance that reacts with water to produce hydronium ions in

solution. A base is a substance that reacts with water to produce hydroxide ions in
solution. Water has equal concentrations of hydronium and of hydroxide ions so is
said to be “neutral”. That is, water is neither acid nor basic. The level of acidity of
a solution is denoted by its pH value (puissance of Hydrogen). Acidic solutions
have pH <7.0, while basic solutions have pH > 7.0. pH is the (negative) logarithm
of the hydrogen ion concentration which means that while the “pH value” changes
by one unit, the concentration of hydronium ions changes by a factor of 10. Being
negative means that as the acidity of a solution increases, the pH value decreases.
Thus if the hydro- nium ion concentration of two solutions are 10 −6 mol/L and 10−5
mol/L, their pH is 6 and 5 respectively. Note that the pH 5 solution has 10 times
the concentration of hydronium ions that are in the pH 6 solution (and a pH 4
solution would have 100 times the hydronium ion concentration of a pH 6
solution).
Normally the pH of a solution will fall to less than 2 when a strong acid is
added to it, while if instead, a strong base is added, its pH will rise to above 10. A
buffered solution is one whose pH changes only very slightly if an acid or a base
is added to it. This resistance to change of pH occurs because a buffered solution
has two com- ponents in it (such as HPO42− and H2PO4−) one of which (HPO42−) is
able to destroy any acid that is added to the solution while the other component
(H2PO4−) is able to destroy any added base. The human body has three major
buffer systems: the mono- hydrogen phosphate/dihydrogen phosphate buffer
(above); the bicarbonate ion/car- bonic acid buffer and the protein buffer. These
act to maintain the blood’s pH within the very narrow range of 7.35–7.45. Blood
pH above this range is termed alkalosis, while blood pH below this range is
termed acidosis.
An acid will react with a base to form their “salt” and water (this is a neutralisa-
tion reaction). Often the salt, being ionised, is more soluble in water than the acid
or base and this is medically useful. For example aspirin is an acid and when
reacted with NaOH produces its soluble salt sodium acetylsalicylate (soluble
aspirin). Morphine is a base. When reacted with sulphuric acid it forms soluble
morphine sulphate which can be given intravenously for rapid pain relief.
1. Which of the following statements is CORRECT?
A. An acid is an electron donor and a base is an electron acceptor.
B. An acidic solution has a pH less than 7 and a basic solution has a pH
greater than 7.
C. Neutralization of a strong acid by a strong base gives only water.
D. The pH of saliva is normally in the range of 8.5–9.5
Answer is B: All students should know that pH <7 indicates acidity. Salivary
pH is about 6.0–7.4.
2. Which statement about buffers below is most correct?

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
80 4 Chemistry for Physiology

A. A buffer is any acid and base which together control the concentration of
pH in the blood.
B. A buffer is the solution which allows CO2 to be lost from the lungs in
order to control the pH of the lungs.
C. A buffer is a weak base and its acid salt or a weak acid and its basic salt.
The ratio of the two components helps maintain blood pH levels.
D. A buffer is a mixture of two acids which together help to maintain blood pH
Answer is C: A buffer has two conjugate components, one dealing with acid
while the other destroys base. Their ratio determines the pH of the solution
they are in.
3. Which of the following statements is FALSE?
A. An acid is a proton donor and a base is a proton acceptor.
B. An acidic solution has a pH greater than 7 and a basic solution has a pH
less than 7.
C. Neutralization of an acid by a base gives a solution of salt in water.
D. The pH of the stomach is normally in the range of 1.6–1.8

Answer is B: The opposite of this statement is the truth.

4. Neutralization of an acid by a base can be represented by the following
equation:

H3 O+ + OH− → 2H2 O

This means that the pH of the solution after the neutralization is approximately:
A. 6
B. 7
C. 8
D. 9
Answer is B: The solution resulting from a neutralisation reactions should
have pH = 7 (should be neutral) – provided that it is properly titrated.
5. A buffer solution consisting of citric acid and citrate in a ratio of 5:1
maintains the pH at 7.4. What would be the ratio of the two components if the
pH were to become 6.4
A. 6:1
B. 10:1
C. 50:1
D. 1:10
Answer is C: As the ratio of the two components changes, so does the pH of
the solution. As pH is a logarithmic scale, a pH value change by 1.0 requires a
change of one of the components by a factor of 10. This is achieved if the
ratio changes from 5 to 1, to 50 to 1. Furthermore, as the citric acid
component has been increased, the pH decreases to be more acidic.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.5 Acids, Bases and Buffers 81

6. Which of the following statements is closest to a correct definition of an acid?

A. a substance that ionises in a solution to produce hydronium and hydroxide
ions.
B. a substance that reacts with water to produce hydroxide ions.
C. a substance that dissociates in water to produce a solution with pH greater
than 7.0.
D. a substance that reacts partly with water to produce a low concentration of
hydronium ions.
Answer is D: An acid produces hydronium ions (H3O+) when added to water.
If the concentration of hydronium ions produced is low, then the acid is a
weak acid.
7. The pH of a buffered solution depends on:
A. the ratio of the components of the buffer solution.
B. the amount of acid added to the buffer solution.
C. the amount of base added to the buffer solution.
D. the amount of acid and of base added to the solution.
Answer is A: The pH of the buffered solution will change very little when
either acid or base is added.
8. The long term acid-base balance in the body is controlled by
A. the phosphate and carbonic acid/bicarbonate buffers in the blood
B. the kidneys and the lungs
C. the phosphate, carbonic acid/bicarbonate, and protein buffers in the blood
and cells.
D. the kidneys
Answer is B: Buffers temporarily manage the pH in the body’s liquids. It is
from both the lungs and kidneys that acid is excreted (or not) from the body.
9. You have a bottle of a strong acid and you add 100 ml of this to one litre of
water. What would the pH of this final solution most likely be?
A. pH = 1
B. pH = 5
C. pH = 7
D. pH = 11
Answer is A: Strong acid produces a high concentration of hydronium ions in
aqueous solution, so the pH would be low.
10. What is the approximate range of pH of gastric juice in the stomach?
A. 1.6–1.8
B. 6.2–7.4

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
82 4 Chemistry for Physiology

C. 7.3–7.5
D. 7.8–8.6
Answer is A: The stomach has the lowest pH in the body due to the secretion
of hydrochloric acid (a strong acid) into it.
11. A buffer solution consisting of acetic acid and acetate ions (base) in a ratio of
acid to base of 1:20 maintains the pH at 7.4. What is the ratio of the two com-
ponents if the pH were to become 8.4 after addition of more of the basic
component.
A. 1:200
B. 1:21
C. 1:30
D. 1:40
Answer is A: As pH is a logarithmic scale, a rise in pH value by 1.0 (from 7.4
to 8.4) requires a change in the concentration of the basic component by a fac-
tor of 10. This is achieved if the ratio becomes 1 to 200.
12. Acidity is stated as a pH value. If the pH of urine sample “A” is 6 and the pH
of urine sample “B” is 7, then which of the following is true?
A. the most acidic sample is sample B.
B. sample A has 10 times the hydroxide ion concentration of sample B.
C. the B sample has 10 times the hydrogen ion concentration of sample A.
D. sample A has 10 times the hydrogen ion concentration of sample B.
Answer is D: The solution with higher hydrogen ion (=hydronium ion)
concen- tration has the lower pH.
13. One form of acid base imbalance in the body is called acidosis. In this
situation, which of the following is true?
A. the blood is less alkaline than it should be.
B. the blood’s pH is less than 7.0
C. the blood is less acidic than it should be.
D. the concentration of hydrogen ions in the blood is less than it should be.
Answer is A: Acidosis = blood pH <7.35. Blood pH less than 7.0 is extremely
rare and presages imminent death.
14. One of the buffer systems in the blood is the carbonic acid/bicarbonate buffer.
It helps to maintain the body’s acid-base balance by destroying any excess:
A. hydrogen ions in the blood.
B. acid or base in the blood.
C. hydroxide ions formed in the blood.
D. bicarbonate ions formed in the blood.
Answer is B: A buffer has the ability to destroy either acid or base.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.5 Acids, Bases and Buffers 83

15. The major buffer system in the extracellular compartment is the:

A. the protein buffer
B. carbonic acid/bicarbonate buffer
C. ammonia buffer
D. phosphate buffer
Answer is B: “Extracellular compartment” is almost synonymous with blood.
The protein buffer is important within cells. The ammonia buffer is important
in the kidney’s filtrate.
16. If a patient was suffering from “acidosis”, what would this mean?
A. blood pH is not sufficiently alkaline.
B. blood pH is acidic.
C. there is too little hydronium ion in the plasma.
D. blood pH is too acidic.
Answer is A: Healthy blood is slightly alkaline. Acidosis is applied to blood
with pH below the normal range of 7.35–7.45. If blood has pH <7.35, it is not
sufficiently alkaline.
17. What happens when an acid is added to a buffered solution?
A. the solution becomes acidic
B. the pH of the solution decreases significantly
C. the pH of the solution decreases very slightly
D. the pH of the solution increases slightly
Answer is C: A buffer will resist change to its pH. But pH does alter very
slightly as the basic component destroys the added acid, and in the process
becomes its cognate partner. This changes the ratio of the two components of
the buffer slightly, and hence the pH.
18. Which of the statements below is correct?
A. The dihydrogen phosphate component of the phosphate buffer releases
hydrogen ions into the lungs for excretion, and in the process, reverts to
monohydrogen phosphate.
B. Haemoglobin as it passes through the lungs, releases hydronium ions,
which are breathed out.
C. Carbon dioxide that is dissolved in blood diffuses into the alveoli and is
breathed out.
D. Hydronium ions react with bicarbonate ions to form carbonic acid which
moves into the lungs for exhalation.
Answer is C: Carbon dioxide that we breathe out enters the alveoli after
diffus- ing there from the blood plasma. No other gas is excreted.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
84 4 Chemistry for Physiology

19. When aspirin (an acid) is in the stomach (an acidic environment), what may
be said of the aspirin molecules?
A. Most molecules will be un-ionised and therefore able to be pass through
the stomach mucosa.
B. Most molecules will be ionised and therefore able to be pass through the
stomach mucosa.
C. Most molecules will be un-ionised and therefore NOT able to be pass
through the stomach mucosa.
D. Aspirin will be in the form of its salt and therefore able to be pass through
the stomach mucosa.
Answer is A: Aspirin in an acidic environment will be in its molecular form
(and un-ionised). This makes it soluble in non-polar media like the plasma
membrane (which is lipid). Being soluble in lipid, molecular aspirin is able to
be absorbed from the stomach.
20. Which statement below best describes an acid solution? The pH is less than:
A. 5
B. 6
C. 7
D. 8
Answer is C: An acidic solution has a pH of less than 7.0
21. If a patient has blood pH that is 7.3 (which is below the healthy range of
blood pH values), which of the following is a correct statement?
A. the patient has alkalosis
B. the patient has excessive alkali
C. the patient has acidosis
D. the patient has insufficient acid
Answer is C: A pH lower than the healthy blood pH range is called acidosis.
22. Which of the following mechanisms results in acid being excreted from the
body?
A. breathing out H2PO4- (dihydrogen-phosphate) from the lungs
B. excreting HCO3- in the urine
C. excreting NH3 (ammonia) in the urine
D. breathing out CO2 from the lungs
Answer is D: As CO2 exhaled from the lungs, carbonic acid in the blood con-
verts into carbon dioxide and water. So as carbon dioxide is exhaled, the
amount of carbonic acid within the body decreases.
23. If the pH of a patient’s blood is 7.4, then it can be said that the patient has:
A. acidic blood
B. alkaline blood

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.5 Acids, Bases and Buffers 85

C. neutral blood
D. alkalosis
Answer is B: pH above 7.0 indicates an alkaline solution. However 7.4 is
within the healthy range, so there is no alkalosis.
24. Which of the following would happen when hydrochloric acid is added to
water?
A. the acid would react with water to from a low concentration of hydronium
ions.
B. the acid would react with water to from a high concentration of hydroxide
ions.
C. the acid would react with water to from a high concentration of hydronium
ions.
D. the acid would react with water to from a high concentration of
bicarbonate ions.
Answer is C: HCl is a strong acid. Hence a high concentration of hydronium
ions would be produced.
25. If the pH of the stomach contents changed from 3 to 2, which of the following
is true?
A. at pH 2, the concentration of hydronium ions is two thirds of the
concentra- tion at pH 3.
B. at pH 3, the concentration of hydronium ions is 50 % more than the
concen- tration at pH 2.
C. at pH 2, the concentration of hydronium ions is ten times the concentration
at pH 3.
D. at pH 3, the concentration of hydronium ions is ten times the concentration
at pH 2.
Answer is C: When pH decreases from 3 to 2, this indicates an increase in
hydronium ion concentration by a factor of 10. Remember pH is a logarithmic
scale.
26. The carbonic acid and bicarbonate buffer system is one if the buffers that help
to maintain the blood’s pH within the healthy range by doing which of the
following?
A. carbonic acid destroys excess base in the blood while bicarbonate destroys
excess acid.
B. carbonic acid destroys excess acid in the blood while bicarbonate destroys
excess base.
C. carbonic acid and bicarbonate destroy excess acid.
D. carbonic acid and bicarbonate destroy excess base.
Answer is A: A buffer has two components. One is capable of destroying acid
while the other is capable of destroying base.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
86 4 Chemistry for Physiology

27. In a solution like blood that is buffered to minimise changes in pH, what
deter- mines the pH of the solution?
A. the concentration of the hydronium ions
B. the logarithm of the concentration of the hydronium ions
C. the ratio of the concentration of hydronium ions to hydroxide ions.
D. the ratio of the concentrations of the two components of the buffer.
Answer is D: Any hydronium and hydroxide ions present will react with one
of the two components of the buffer. So the amount of buffer component (viz
their ratio) governs the concentration of these ions and hence the pH of the
solution.
28. When in solution, an acidic drug also exists as its salt. What feature does the
salt of a drug have that may not be shared by the acid form of the drug?
A. The salt of the drug does not carry an electrical charge but the acid form
does.
B. The salt of the drug may be more soluble in lipid than the acid form of the
drug.
C. The acid form of the drug is ionised whereas the salt is not.
D. The salt of the drug may be more soluble in water than the acid form of
the drug.
Answer is D: The salt of the drug, being ionised, is more soluble in water (a
polar liquid) than is the drug molecule.
29. Which one of the following best defines an acid?
A. an aqueous solution with a pH of less than 7.0
B. a substance that reacts with water to produce hydrogen ions
C. a substance that reacts with water to produce hydroxide ions
D. a substance that reacts with water to produce hydronium ions
Answer is D: A “hydrogen ion” H+ is a bare proton which, if it freely exists,
would attach to a water molecule to form the hydronium ion (H3O+). So
choice D is a better answer than Choice B.
30. Which one of the following acids is not normally found in the body?
A. hydrochloric acid
B. carbonic acid
C. nucleic acid
D. acetylsalicylic acid
Answer is D: Acetylsalicylic acid is the medicine known as aspirin.
31. If a sample of blood has a pH of 7.25, which of the following is true?
A. it is in the healthy range
B. it is neutral

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.5 Acids, Bases and Buffers 87

C. it is acidic
D. it is basic
Answer is D: pH above 7.0 indicates basic. 7.25 is below the healthy range.
32. If a blood sample has a pH of 7.25, which of the following is NOT true?
A. the blood is acidic
B. the person may be suffering from metabolic acidosis
C. the person may be suffering from respiratory acidosis
D. the blood is alkaline
Answer is A: pH must be less than 7.0 for acidic to be true. The condition cer-
tainly is an acidosis.
33. Why does drinking acidic solutions such as orange juice NOT make the blood
acidic?
A. Blood is alkaline and alkaline solutions react with ingested acids to
neutral- ise them.
B. The volume of water in the body is great enough that the effect of ingested
acidic food and drink on pH is negligible.
C. The blood has buffers whose components are able to resist changes to
blood pH.
D. The kidney is able to rapidly filter acidic components from blood to avoid
pH changes.
Answer is C: The blood has the ability to buffer normal intakes of acidic or
basic substances. So excursions of blood pH outside the healthy range are
prevented.
34. Which statement about the phosphate buffer is correct?
A. H2PO42− destroys acid and HPO4− destroys base
B. H2PO42− destroys base and HPO4− destroys acid
C. H2PO42− is basic and HPO4− is acidic
D. the ratio of H2PO42− : HPO4− decreases following the addition of acid.
Answer is B: Di-hydrogen phosphate is able to destroy base by donating one
of its hydrogen atoms (and in the process it becomes mono-hydrogen
phosphate). Choice D is wrong as addition of acid would decrease the
proportion of mono- hydrogen phosphate while increasing di-hydrogen
phosphate. This would make the ratio increase, that is the “fraction” would be
larger.
35. If the pH of a sample of blood was 7.4, which term below would be applied to
it?
A. acidotic
B. acidic

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
88 4 Chemistry for Physiology

C. alkalotic
D. alkaline
Answer is D: 7.4 is in the healthy range for blood. Being greater than 7.0,
indi- cates alkaline.
36. Three of the solutions below have the SAME level of acidity (or alkalinity),
the other is different. Which is the different one?
A. blood
B. a neutral solution
C. a solution with pH = 7
D. a solution with a hydrogen ion concentration of 10-7 mol/L
Answer is A: Blood has pH in the range 7.35–7.45. The other choices all have
pH = 7.0
37. Which of the following statements is a definition of a buffer solution?
A. one where the number of osmoles of solute equals the number of moles.
B. one where the concentration of hydronium ions equals the concentration
of hydroxide ions.
C. a solution that resists change to its pH.
D. a solution that reacts partly with water to produce a relatively low concen-
tration of hydronium ions.
Answer is C: This is a definition of a buffer solution. Choice B indicates a
neu- tral solution, while choice D alludes to a weak acid.
38. Which of the following solutions is the most acidic?
A. blood plasma
B. gastric juice
C. a solution with pH = 7
D. a solution with hydronium ions at a concentration of 10-5 moles/L
Answer is B: gastric juice has a pH of about 1.5. The solution in choice D has
a pH of 5 (= negative log of 10−5).
39. Pure water contains small but equal amounts of hydronium (H3O+) ions and
hydroxide (OH−) ions. This means that water is:
A. acidic
B. basic
C. acidic and basic
D. neither acidic nor basic
Answer is D: When the concentrations of hydronium and hydroxide ions is
the same, their effects are cancelled and the solution is neutral.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.5 Acids, Bases and Buffers 89

40. What do we call a substance that when added to water, reacts with water to
produce hydronium ions?
A. an ionic compound
B. a base
C. an electrolyte
D. an acid
Answer is D: This is a definition of an acid.
41. How does the blood’s phosphate buffer behave when an hydronium ion is
encountered?
A. HPO42− destroys the hydronium ion and becomes H2PO4- – and blood pH
decreases very slightly
B. H2PO4- destroys the hydronium ion and becomes HPO42− and blood pH
decreases very slightly
C. HPO42− destroys the hydronium ion and becomes H2PO4- and blood pH
increases very slightly
D. H2PO4- destroys the hydronium ion and becomes HPO42− and blood pH
increases very slightly
Answer is A: Mono-hydrogen phosphate is the species that destroys acid (by
accepting a hydrogen ion from the acid). Blood pH would decrease very
slightly as the concentration of mono-hydrogen phosphate decreases slightly
and the concentration of di-hydrogen phosphate increases slightly.
42. One of the statements below about buffers is correct. Which one?
A. a buffer consists of an acid and a base.
B. a buffer will react with water to produce hydronium ions.
C. a solution that is neither acidic nor basic is called a buffer.
D. the components of a buffer are conjugate pairs.
Answer is D: A buffer has two components. Each component converts to the
other as it destroys acid (or base). Choice A is incorrect as a buffer is a weak
acid and its slightly basic salt (or vice versa).
43. An acid may be defined as a substance that:
A. reacts completely with water producing a high concentration of
hydronium ions
B. reacts with water to produce hydroxide ions
C. produces a pH of more than 7 when in solution
D. reacts with water to produce hydronium ions
Answer is D: An acid produces hydronium ions. Choice A defines a strong
acid (but not a weak one).

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
90 4 Chemistry for Physiology

44. One of the statements below about buffers is WRONG. Which one?
A. a buffer consists of a weak acid and its slightly basic salt.
B. a buffer will react with water to produce hydronium ions.
C. a solution that resists change to its pH is called a buffer.
D. the components of a buffer are conjugate pairs.
Answer is B: The ability to produce hydronium ions with water defines an
acid, not a buffer.
45. An acid may be defined by which one of the following statements?
A. a substance with equal concentrations of hydronium and hydroxide ions.
B. a substance that reacts partly with water to produce hydronium ions
C. a substance that maintains the pH of the solution it is in.
D. a substance that reacts with water producing hydroxide ions.
Answer is B: This is a definition of an acid.
46. Which of the following defines an acid?
A. when in solution, resists change to pH
B. reacts with water to produce hydronium ions
C. reacts with a buffer to produce water
D. has a pH of more than 7.
Answer is B: This is a definition of an acid. All other choices are wrong
statements.
47. Which of the following is NOT an acid?
A. a solution having a pH of 3.
B. a substance which reacts with water to produce hydronium ions.
C. carbonic acid.
D. a solution that resists change to its pH
Answer is D: Such a solution is a buffer.
48. What effect would a base have when added to the following solutions?
A. Tap water: – it would react to produce hydronium ions.
B. Tap water: – it would react to produce hydroxide ions.
C. Buffered water: – it would raise the pH of the solution.
D. Un-buffered water: – it would lower the pH of the solution.
Answer is B: A base has the ability to produce hydroxide ions when added to
water.
49. What effect would an acid have when added to the following solutions?
A. Tap water: – it would react to produce hydronium ions.
B. Tap water: – it would react to produce hydroxide ions.
C. Buffered water: – it would lower the pH of the solution.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.5 Acids, Bases and Buffers 91

D. Un-buffered water: it would raise the pH of the solution.

Answer is A: An acid has the ability to produce hydronium ions when added
to water.
50. A fresh sample of blood (a buffered solution) is withdrawn from the body and
its pH measured at 7.4. A small quantity of strong acid (as an isotonic
solution) is added to it. Which of the following values is most likely to be the
pH of the resulting blood solution?
A. 3.0
B. 7.3
C. 7.4
D. 7.5
Answer is C: Blood is buffered so very little pH change will result from the
addition of acid. Certainly not enough to change the pH by 0.1.
51. Blood in the body is different to a buffered solution held in a beaker. This is
because hydronium (hydrogen) ions can be removed from solution in blood
almost immediately by:
A. filtration in the kidney from where it is eliminated from the body in urine.
B. combining with hydroxide ions to form water which is eliminated as urine.
C. combining with bicarbonate to form carbonic acid which disassociates to
water and carbon dioxide which is breathed out.
D. reacting with mono-hydrogen phosphate to form di-hydrogen phosphate.
Answer is C: This is the best answer as it describes the buffer action and the
continuous nature of exhalation means that there is no delay in excreting
carbon dioxide. Choice A is also correct, but the elimination of acid via
kidneys is not immediate.
52. The definition of an acid is a substance that reacts:
A. completely with water to produce a large concentration of hydronium ions.
B. with water to produce hydroxide ions.
C. with a base to produce a neutral salt.
D. with water to produce hydronium ions.
Answer is D: This is the best answer. Choice A is true of a strong acid only.
Choice C is incorrect as the salt produced may also be basic or acidic.
53. Choose the INCORRECT statement about buffer solutions.
A. the pH of a buffer does not change on addition of acid or base.
B. a buffer has two components which may be a weak acid and its salt.
C. a buffer has two components which may be a weak base and its salt.
D. pH of a buffer depends only on the ratio of its components.
Answer is A: The pH of a buffer does change, albeit very slightly, on addition
of acid or base.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
92 4 Chemistry for Physiology

54. In the condition known as acidosis, the blood pH would be

A. greater than 7.45.
B. less than 7.45.
C. less than 7.35.
D. less than 7.00.
Answer is C: The healthy pH range for blood is 7.35–7.45. A pH value below
this, while still alkaline, indicates insufficient alkalinity (or too much acidity)
and is termed acidosis.
55. As the blood becomes more acidic, hydrogen (hydronium) ions combine with
bicarbonate ions to form carbonic acid which in turn dissociates into carbon
dioxide (to be breathed out by the lungs) and water. Which is the equation
describing this reaction?
A. CO
2
+ H2 O←H 2 CO3 ←H + + HCO3 −
B. CO + H O→H CO →H + + HCO −
C. CO 2 2 2 3 3

2
+ H2
O←H +
+ HCO3
−
←H 2
CO 3
D. H+ + HCO − ← CO + H O←H CO
3 2 2 2 3

Answer is A: Choice B is going in the wrong direction, while choices C & D

are scrambled.
56. A buffer solution consisting of H 2PO4− (acid) and HPO42− (base), in a ratio of
1:4, maintains the pH at 7.4. What is the ratio of these two components if the
pH were to become 8.4 after the addition of more of the basic component of
the buffer?
A. 1:5
B. 2:4
C. 1:8
D. 1:40
Answer is D: The pH of a buffer is determined by the ratio of its two compo-
nents. pH is a logarithmic scale of the hydronium ion concentration of a solu-
tion. Hence the ratio must change by a factor of 10 in order for the pH to
change by one (i.e. change from 7.4 to 8.4).
57. Which of the following pH values would you expect to a dilute solution of a
weak base to have?
A. 2.4
B. 6.2
C. 8.2
D. 12.4
Answer is C: A base has a pH greater than 7.0. A weak base will have a value
that is not much greater than 7.0
58. A buffer solution having a pH of 8.5 has a small amount of strong acid added
to it. What is its pH value likely to be closest to?

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.6 Organic Chemistry and Macromolecules 93

A. 5.0
B. 8.4
C. 8.6
D. 12.4
Answer is B: A buffer solution resists change to its pH. This means that its pH
will change very little, but it will change slightly. As acid has been added, its
pH will drop by a small amount.
59. Which of the following statements about the role of the kidneys or lungs in
the maintenance of acid-base balance within the body is FALSE?
A. The kidneys are able to affect several buffer systems but the lungs affect
only one.
B. The lungs exert their influence on the carbonic acid/bicarbonate buffer
system.
C. Neither the lungs nor the kidneys have much influence over the protein
buffer.
D. The kidneys are able to respond more rapidly than the lungs to changes in
acid-base balance.
Answer is D: The lungs with each breath are able to excrete acid, by exhaling
CO2. So the lungs are able to respond more rapidly than the kidneys.

4.6 Organic Chemistry and Macromolecules

In the context of anatomy and physiology I refer to organic chemistry (or carbon
chemistry) as the chemistry of carbohydrates, proteins and lipids. These are very
large molecules, so are called macromolecules, are polymers and contain the ele-
ments: C, H, O and (in the case of proteins) N. Carbohydrates, which are many
monosaccharide units linked together, may have between 24 atoms (for glucose)
up to 500,000 atoms for glycogen. Proteins consist of amino acid units linked
together. They can have between several thousand and several million atoms in
their mole- cule. Lipids may have 73 atoms (for cholesterol) to about 150 for a
triglyceride. Triglycerides consist of a glycerol molecule, to which are attached
three fatty acid molecules.
The carbon atom always forms 4 chemical bonds and can bond to itself to form
long chains. Two fatty acids with 18 C in their molecular chain are “essential” as
they cannot be made in the body. If a fatty acid has a double bond between
adjacent C atoms, it is termed “unsaturated” – or “polyunsaturated” if there is
more than one double bond. Nine of the 20 amino acids found in humans are
essential – the others can be manufactured within the body. The order in which
particular amino acids are placed in “the line” is referred to as the primary
structure of the protein. If the pro- tein molecule has a repeating pattern of some
amino acids in some sections of the protein chain, this is referred to as the
secondary structure. The large protein mole- cule can fold and bend as different
parts of the molecule interact with each other to

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
94 4 Chemistry for Physiology

give it its characteristic shape – this is the tertiary structure. If several polypeptide
chains (each with their own primary, secondary and tertiary structure) interact to
form the protein – as is the case for haemoglobin – this is called their quaternary
structure. Carbohydrates (such as starch, glycogen, cellulose) are composed of
monosaccharides (such as glucose, fructose, galactose, ribose). Two monosaccha-
rides can join to form a 12 carbon atom disaccharide such as sucrose, lactose or
maltose.
1. Denaturation of proteins involves disruption of the
A. primary structure
B. secondary structure
C. tertiary structure
D. covalent bonding
Answer is C: Protein “tertiary structure” is held together by the relatively
weak attraction between different parts of the protein molecule known as
“hydrogen bonding”. This structure is the most easily disrupted.
2. One of the following is NOT a function of lipids in the body. Which one?
A. function as co-enzymes.
B. used in phospholipids.
C. used to make prostaglandins.
D. steroids are produced from them.
Answer is A: co-enzymes are proteins (not lipids)
3. Amino acids are the building blocks of all proteins. As more amino acids are
added the protein chain tends to fold upon itself in a characteristic way. This
characteristic of a protein is called the:
A. primary structure
B. secondary structure
C. tertiary structure
D. quaternary structure
Answer is C: The shape produced by folding is the tertiary structure. Primary
structure is the sequence in which the amino acids are joined. Secondary
struc- ture is any repetition of the primary structure. Quaternary structure does
not exist.
4. Which of the following is the correct combination for the nucleic acid DNA?
A. Phosphate, Ribose, Uracil
B. Phosphate, Deoxyribose, Uracil
C. Phosphate, Ribose, Adenine
D. Phosphate, Deoxyribose, Adenine
Answer is D: “Deoxyribose” supplies the “D” in DNA. The base uracil occurs
in RNA (not DNA) where it substitutes for the thymine that occurs in DNA.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.6 Organic Chemistry and Macromolecules 95

5. To which of the following class of biological compounds do all enzymes

belong?
A. Hormones
B. Proteins
C. Carbohydrates
D. Lipids
Answer is B: All enzymes are proteins
6. The twisting of a polypeptide chain into a characteristic shape such as a helix
is an example of which of the following?
A. Primary structure
B. Secondary structure
C. Tertiary structure
D. Quaternary structure
Answer is C: Shape of the protein molecule is the tertiary structure of the
protein.
7. Which one of the following is NOT a steroid compound?
A. stearic acid
B. oestrogen
C. cholesterol
D. testosterone
Answer is A: Stearic acid is a fatty acid. The sex hormones oestrogen and tes-
tosterone are derived from cholesterol.
8. Which of the following carbohydrates are able to pass through the plasma
membrane?
A. disaccharides
B. sucrose
C. glycogen
D. monosaccharides
Answer is D: For example glucose maybe absorbed from the gut by passing
thought the plasma membrane of the cells lining the gut. Glucose is also
absorbed by cells for respiration inside mitochondria.
9. Which of the following foods when catabolised in the body produces the
high- est yield of energy?
A. 100 gram of fat
B. 100 gram of chocolate
C. 100 gram of carbohydrate
D. 100 gram of protein

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
96 4 Chemistry for Physiology

Answer is A: Fat is higher in energy (kilojoules) than either protein or

carbohy- drate. Chocolate has sugar (carbohydrate) as well as fat as an
ingredient.
10. Fructose is a simple sugar or carbohydrate. What is it an example of? A:
A. monosaccharide
B. disaccharide
C. polysaccharide
D. oligosaccharide
Answer is A: Fructose is a simple sugar or monosaccharide – it cannot be con-
verted to a simpler sugar by hydrolysis.
11. Cells use glucose as an energy source, but store it as glycogen. When needed
the glycogen is broken down by a process called:
A. glycolysis
B. glycogenesis
C. gluconeogenesis
D. glycogenolysis
Answer is D: Glycogen – o – lysis refers to the lysis (splitting) of glycogen
into smaller glucose units.
12. A lipid such as oleic acid contains a number of double bonds in the carbon
chain. Because of this, what term is applied to it?
A. monounsaturated
B. diunsaturated
C. polyunsaturated
D. saturated
Answer is C: “Unsaturated” because addition hydrogen atoms may be
attached to the carbon bonds if the double bond was replaced by a single
bond. “Poly-” because there is more than one instance of a double bond
between adjacent carbon atoms.
13. What are the structural components of proteins?
A. Amino acids
B. Fatty acids
C. Peptides
D. Monosaccharides
Answer is A: Peptides is used for several amino acids joined together.
14. Which of the following chemical formulae represents a typical
carbohydrate? A. Ca10(PO4)6(OH)2
B. N2C5H12O4
C. C120H240O120

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.6 Organic Chemistry and Macromolecules 97

D. C57H110O6
Answer is C: A carbohydrate is composed of carbon, hydrogen and oxygen
atoms. Usually there are twice as many H atoms as C atoms. Choice D,
having relatively few O atoms, is typical of a lipid.
15. Proteins perform a wide range of functions in the body including which one of
the following?
A. They are our major source of energy
B. They act as enzymes
C. They are used to make sex hormones
D. They are necessary for the absorption of vitamins A, D, E and K
Answer is B: All enzymes are proteins. Carbohydrates should be the major
energy source. Choice D lists the fat soluble vitamins.
16. Which of the following refers to a carbohydrate?
A. diglycerol
B. adenosine diphosphate
C. disaccharide
D. dipeptide
Answer is C: A disaccharide is a sugar (hence a carbohydrate) that can be
sim- plified into simpler sugars.
17. What are the bonds that maintain the secondary and tertiary structure of
proteins?
A. hydrogen bonds
B. covalent bonds
C. ionic bonds
D. peptide bonds
Answer is A: Hydrogen bonds acting between N and H. Covalent bonds act
between the atoms of an amino acid, while peptide bonds (=covalent bond) is
the term used for the bond between one amino acid to the adjacent one.
18. Which of the following formulae would be most likely to represent a lipid?
A. C2936H4624N786O889S41
B. C57H110O6
C. C6H12O6
D. Ca10(PO4)6(OH)2
Answer is B: Lipids consist of carbon, hydrogen and oxygen, with relatively
few O compared to C. Choice C is a monosaccharide, Choice A is a protein
(note the nitrogen). No-one should have chosen D (=calcium hydroxyapatite).
19. What are the four most common elements found in proteins?

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
98 4 Chemistry for Physiology

A. C, H, N, Ca
B. C, O, N, Fe
C. C, H, N, O
D. N, C, H, Na
Answer is C: Nitrogen must be present. Choice B is wrong as H is absent.
20. To what type of fatty acids is the term “saturated” applied?
A. Those with four single bonds around each carbon atom.
B. Those with at least one double bond between carbon atoms.
C. Those that are not implicated in coronary heart disease.
D. Those which are essential in our diet.
Answer is A: Saturated refers to the number of single bonds around carbon
atoms. The maximum is four if there are no double bonds.
21. Which of the following is a polysaccharide?
A. glucuronidase
B. glucagon
C. glucose
D. glycogen
Answer is D: Choice A is an enzyme (“-ase”), B is a hormone, C is a
monosaccharide.
22. What holds the primary structure of a protein together?
A. hydrogen bonds
B. covalent bonds
C. peptide bonds
D. ionic bonds
Answer is C: Protein primary structure refers to the sequence of the linked
amino acids. The link between adjacent amino acids is called a “peptide bond”
– a special term reserved for the covalent bond between the C of one amino
acid and the N of the adjacent amino acid.
23. Which of the following are NOT proteins?
A. glycolipids
B. enzymes
C. haemoglobin
D. albumin
Answer is A: Glycolipids are lipids not proteins.
24. What is a “saturated fat”?
A. one that contains cholesterol
B. a triglyceride that has three fatty acids
C. one where the carbon atoms that are connected by single bonds

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.6 Organic Chemistry and Macromolecules 99

D. one that must be included in our diet

Answer is C: Saturated means each carbon atom is directly bonded to four
other atoms.
25. What is a function of carbohydrates in the body?
A. to act as enzymes
B. to provide energy
C. function as local hormones
D. to provide the building blocks for proteins
Answer is B: Dietary carbohydrates are converted to simple sugars which are
disassembled in mitochondria to produce ATP.
26. Which of the following is a typical formula for a polypeptide?
A. C57H110O6
B. C18H29O2
C. C21H41O5N8
D. C6H12O6
Answer is C: A polypeptide is several amino acids joined together. Hence the
element nitrogen must be present.
27. In what form is most of the lipid component of our food in?
A. triglycerols
B. polysaccharides
C. complex carbohydrates
D. polypeptides
Answer is A: Our dietary lipids are in the form of triglycerols (a glycerol mol-
ecule and three fatty acids).
28. In organic compounds, How many bonds do carbon atoms always form?
A. four single bonds
B. four covalent bonds
C. two double bonds
D. four ionic bonds
Answer is B: Carbon has four valence electrons and “would like” a share of
four more to fill its outer shell. This is achieved by four covalent bonds, where
a double bond counts as two covalent bonds.
29. A molecule of an organic compound can be thought of as having two
portions: a radical with an attached functional group. What is the correct
definition of a functional group?
A. it consists of carbon atoms and hydrogen atoms
B. it is responsible for most of the properties of the molecule.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
100 4 Chemistry for Physiology

C. it has a modest influence on the properties of the molecule.

D. it consists of a ring of carbon atoms.
Answer is B: As organic molecules all contain C, H and O atoms in similar
bonding situations, the differences in their chemical behaviour (function) is
largely governed by the differences in structure of small groups of atoms that
are bonded differently or contain atoms other than C, H & O. These groups of
atoms are known as the functional group.
30. The one medicine may have many names. What is the “generic name” of a
medicine?
A. the name that describes the effect of the drug on the body.
B. the systematic name of the chemical involved.
C. the name given to the product by a manufacturer of the drug.
D. the name proposed by the inventor and approved by a government agency.
Answer is D: A medicine has only one “generic” name but each manufacturer
will give it their own “trade” name. Choice A refers to the naming of a class
of drugs each of which may be a different molecule.
31. When a protein is denatured, which aspect of its structure is affected the
LEAST?
A. primary structure
B. secondary structure
C. tertiary structure
D. quaternary structure
Answer is A: Denaturation does not affect primary structure. That is, the
sequence of amino acids within the polypeptide chain.
32. What chemical symbol for the element/atom occurs in an amino acid but not
in fats and carbohydrates?
A. N
B. H
C. O
D. C
Answer is A: Amino acids contain an “amine” group – a nitrogen atom
bonded to a hydrogen atom. Nitrogen atoms do not occur in fats or
carbohydrates.
33. The element carbon is said to be tetravalent. This means it always has the fol-
lowing number of covalent bonds in neutral compounds.
A. one
B. two
C. three
D. four
Answer is D: carbon forms four covalent bonds. “Tetra” refers to four.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.6 Organic Chemistry and Macromolecules 101

34. Which of the following structures represents a molecule belonging to the

alco- hol family?
A. CH3 – COOH
B. CH3 – OH
C. CH3 – O – CH3
D. CH3 – CO – CH3
Answer is B: An “alcohol” has an oxygen bonded to a hydrogen (-OH) atom
as a functional group. Choice A has a carboxylic acid (-COOH) functional
group.
35. Which statement describing the chemical reactivity of organic molecules is
FALSE?
A. Reactivity depends on the nature of the functional group.
B. Reactivity is independent of the number and nature of the carbon rings
C. Reactivity is dependent on the nature and size of the radical group.
D. Reactivity in the body may depend on the internal body factors such as
temperature and pH.
Answer is B: Reactivity IS in fact influenced by the number and nature of the
carbon rings. So the statement B is false.
36. Which of the following structures represents molecules belonging to the amide
family?
A. CH3 – SH
B. CH3 – NH2
C. CH3 – CO – NH2
D. CH3 – OH
Answer is C: the “amide” functional group consists of a carbon, oxygen and a
nitrogen atom. The carbon atom is double bonded to an oxygen atom while
also being single bonded to a nitrogen atom.
37. A hydrocarbon is a type of compound that contains:
A. Only carbon atoms
B. Carbon and Hydrogen atoms
C. Carbon, Hydrogen and Oxygen atoms
D. Water and carbon atoms
Answer is B: Hydrocarbon means hydrogen combine with carbon.
38. A hydrocarbon molecule which contains at least one double bond could be an
example of which type of compound:
A. Alkane
B. Alkene

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
102 4 Chemistry for Physiology

C. Alkyne
D. Alcapone
Answer is B: Alkenes contain at least one double bond between carbon atoms.
Alkanes have only single bonds, while alkynes have at least one triple bond
between carbon atoms.
39. Which of the following structures represents a molecule belonging to the
ketone family?
A. CH3–CO–NH2
B. CH3–NH2
C. CH3 – O – CH3
D. CH3 – CO – CH3
Answer is D: A ketone has a “carbonyl” functional group (C double bonded to
O) while the carbon atom of the carbonyl group is also bonded to two other
carbon atoms (that is, is attached to two radicals). Choice C is incorrect as the
O is single bonded to the carbon(s). Choice A is incorrect as the NH group is
not a radical.
40. Only one of the following patterns of bond is ever displayed by carbon atoms
in organic compounds. (each line represents a bond) Which is it?
|
A. ─C≡
ǁ
—C─
B. |
|
C. ─C═
—C≡
D. |

Answer is C: Carbon always forms four bonds, never more or less.

41. Certain components of food are often referred to as being saturated. This term
refers to the bonding of carbon atoms present in molecules of the food. Which
of the following bonding arrangements is a saturated environment?
A. ─ C ≡ C ─
|
B. ═ C ═ C ─
| |
—C─C─
C. | |
—C ═ C─
D. | |

Answer is C: In this case each carbon atom has four single bonds. A double
bond would indicate an unsaturated compound.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
4.6 Organic Chemistry and Macromolecules 103

42. What is the sequence of amino acids in a protein known as?

A. primary structure
B. secondary structure
C. tertiary structure
D. quaternary structure
Answer is A: Primary structure refers to the order in which amino acids are
attached to each other.
43. Which one of the following structure represents a saturated organic
compound?
O
ǁ
A. CH3CH2 C─OH
B. CH3CH2OH
C. CH3CHCHCH3
D. CH … CH
Answer is B: A saturated compound must have each carbon atom directly
bonded to four other atoms. Only the arrangement in choice B can satisfy this
requirement. In choices C & D, the arrangement CH means that there must be
a double bond between two C atoms.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
Chapter 5
Integument

The skin covers the body with the superficial epidermis, made of epithelial tissue,
and the deeper dermis, containing much connective tissue. Under the dermis is the
superficial fascia (also called the hypodermis despite NOT being part of the skin).
The most superficial layer of the epidermis is the waterproof stratum corneum. It
is not comprised of living cells, hence affords the body great protection against
dehy- dration and from bacteria in the same way that the peel of (say) an apple
protects its contents. The deepest layer of the epidermis is the stratum
germinativum. Here keratinocytes are actively dividing (and producing keratin and
previtamin D3). Melanocytes also inhabit this layer and produce melanin.
Dendrocytes migrate to the skin from the bone marrow and become macrophages
there. Merkel cells are one of the many sensory receptors found in the skin.
The dermis contains blood capillaries, hair roots, and several types of sensory
receptors which may be free nerve endings or encapsulated. The dermis also con-
tains sudiferous (sweat) and sebaceous (oil) glands – these are “exocrine” glands.
The papillary dermal layer overlies the deeper reticular dermal layer. The former
rises up to push papillae into the epidermis and forms troughs to receive epidermal
ridges, hence has a wavy boundary with the epidermis. Both layers of the dermis
are connective tissue, the deeper layer containing collagen and elastic fibres.
1. Which statement below is correct?
A. dendrites are produced by dendrocytes
B. glycolipids are produced by lipocytes
C. keratin is produced by keratinocytes
D. melanin is produced by merkel cells
Answer is C: Keratin is the horny protein that gives the epidermis its
protective qualities and is produced by keratinocytes.

© Springer Science+Business Media Singapore 2016

105
M. Caon, Examination Questions and Answers in Basic Anatomy and
Physiology, DOI 10.1007/978-981-10-2332-3_5

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
106 5 Integument

2. Where are sebaceous glands found?

A. In the digestive system
B. In the hypodermis
C. In the dermis
D. In the stratum corneum
Answer is C: Sebaceous glands produce sebum (oil) and are located in the
dermis.
3. When a medicine is delivered via a patch attached to the skin, it is said to be
delivered:
A. transdermally
B. subcutaneously
C. topically
D. intramuscularly
Answer is A: Some medicines can be absorbed through the skin to enter the
bloodstream. Choice C applies to ointments that act on the skin hey are
applied to. Choices B & D are delivered by a penetrating injection to locations
deep to the skin.
4. Full thickness burns to more than 20 % of the skin surface is a life-threatening
situation. Why is this?
A. The synthesis of vitamin D (calcitriol) is severely compromised.
B. The loss of skin sensation prevents access to environmental information.
C. The body is not able to prevent water loss from the burnt area.
D. Soft internal tissues are abraded by the external environment.
Answer is C: The body is not able to prevent water loss from the exposed tis-
sues. (Also, but not part of the provided choices, the loss of skin means that
the body is unprotected from infectious agents)
5. Which is a notable feature of the stratum corneum layer of the integument? It:
A. is where melanocytes and keratinocytes are rapidly dividing.
B. is richly supplied with blood capillaries.
C. consists of keratin filled cells with glycolipid in between cells.
D. has protruding epidermal ridges that push the overlying epidermis into
“fingerprints”.
Answer is C: This property makes the skin a barrier between the internal body
and the environment.
6. When a pharmaceutical is administered hypodermically, it is
A. wiped onto the skin.
B. applied via a patch that adheres to the skin.
C. injected into the dermis.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
5 Integument 107

D. injected into subcutaneous fat.

Answer is D: “Hypo” means below, in this case, the dermis. Subcutaneous fat
(superficial fascia) lies beneath the dermis.
7. Which of the following is NOT a sensory receptor of the skin?
A. a Meissner corpuscle
B. an apocrine gland
C. a root hair plexus
D. a nociceptor
Answer is B: This is a type of sudiferous (sweat) gland.
8. What is the protein that fills the outermost dead cells of the epidermis?
A. granstein
B. dermin
C. melanin
D. keratin
Answer is D: Choice C is also a protein, but is deep to the outermost layer,
lying just superficial to the stratum germinativum.
9. What is the name given to the most superficial layer of the integument?
A. stratum corneum
B. papillary dermal layer
C. stratum lucidum
D. superficial fascia
Answer is A: The stratum is the horny (i.e. keratinised), dead covering to the
epidermis. Choice D is another name for the subcutaneous fat.
10. Which of the following statements is INCORRECT?
A. sudiferous glands secrete sebum
B. sebaceous glands secrete oil
C. apocrine glands secrete sweat
D. ceruminous glands secrete cerumen
Answer is A: Sudiferous glands secrete sweat. Sebum (or oil) is produced by
sebaceous glands.
11. To what in the skin does the term “nociceptors” refer?
A. sensors that detect movement of hair follicles
B. any lamellated sensory corpuscle
C. the sensory receptor that is associated with the Merkel cells of the
epidermis
D. free nerve endings with large receptive fields that detect pain
Answer is D: The prefix “noci” is derived from the Latin for
hurt.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
108 5 Integument

12. Choose the incorrect statement below.

A. Keratinocytes produce keratin
B. Merkel cells are associated with a sensory nerve ending.
C. Melanocytes produce melanin
D. Dendrocytes produce dendrocidin.
Answer is D: Dendrocytes are macrophages, “dendrocidin” is not produced.
13. Which layer of the integument contains rapidly dividing keratinocytes?
A. stratum lucidum
B. papillary dermal layer
C. stratum germinativum
D. reticular dermal layer
Answer is C: Stratum germinativum (= stratum basale) implies that germina-
tion is happening. In fact new cells are formed here by mitosis to replace
those lost from the stratum corneum.
14. Which of the following situations could produce life threatening fluid loss and
infection?
A. Stomach ulcers
B. Full thickness skin burn
C. Severe muscle tear
D. Displaced bone fracture
Answer is B: The water-proof outer layer of the epidermis is lost if skin is
burnt off, so evaporation from the wet tissues beneath proceeds rapidly.
15. What do sudiferous glands do?
A. Secrete sebum into a hair follicle
B. Secrete sweat through a duct to the skin
C. Secrete sweat through a duct to the skin or into a hair follicle
D. Secrete cerumen through a duct to the skin or into a hair follicle
Answer is C: Eccrine sweat gland secrete through a duct, apocrine sweat
glands secrete into a hair follicle.
16. Which cell type produces a pigment that affords the skin some protection
against ultraviolet radiation?
A. keratinocytes
B. melanocytes
C. dendrocytes
D. merkel cells
Answer is B: Melanin causes kin to darken (tan) which absorbs some of the
incoming UV radiation.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
5 Integument 109

17. Which layer of the integument is the most superficial layer?

A. the hypodermis
B. stratum granulosum
C. stratum corneum
D. reticular dermal layer
Answer is C: Stratum corneum is the outermost dead layer of the epidermis.
18. A drug that is applied to the skin and exerts its therapeutic effect systemically
is said to be administered:
A. transdermally
B. topically
C. intradermally
D. subcutaneously
Answer is A: The prefix “trans” implies crossing the skin to be absorbed into
the bloodstream, rather than affecting the skin onto which it is applied.
“Topically” is reserved for the latter type of administration.
19. Which is the most superficial layer of the integument that also has capillaries,
lymphatics and sensory neurons?
A. reticular dermal layer
B. papillary dermal layer
C. stratum granulosum
D. stratum lucidum
Answer is B: The papillary layer is superficial to the reticular layer. Both are
part of the dermis which is where the most superficial capillaries are.
20. Which skin layer is the most superficial?
A. stratum lucidum
B. stratum corneum
C. papillary dermal layer
D. reticular dermal layer
Answer is B: Stratum corneum is the outermost corny or horny layer made
largely of keratin.
21. Which glands secrete “oil” into a hair follicle?
A. apocrine
B. eccrine
C. ceruminous
D. sebaceous
Answer is D: Apocrine secrete sweat into hair follicles. Eccrine sudiferous
glands secrete to skin surface via a duct.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
110 5 Integument

22. What must be the case for a drug to be administered transdermally?

A. It must be water soluble
B. It must be lipid soluble
C. It must be injected subcutaneously
D. It must not irritate the skin’s chemo-receptors.
Answer is B: Integument is virtually waterproof. Lipid soluble drugs may
pen- etrate between the keratinised cells.
23. The skin participates in the production of vitamin D when which of the
follow- ing occurs? When
A. calcium is present
B. signalled to by the hormone PTH
C. exposed to ultraviolet radiation
D. the precursor molecule is produced by the liver
Answer is C:UV light converts cholecalciferol (= provitamin D3) into vitamin
D pre-cursor. The liver then adds a hydroxyl group.
24. The integument consists of which of the following layers?
A. epidermis and dermis
B. epidermis, dermis and hypodermis
C. stratum germinativum, stratum spinosum, stratum granulosum, stratum
lucidum and stratum corneum
D. stratum corneum, dermis and reticular dermal layer
Answer is A: Hypodermis is not part of the integument. Choice C excludes the
dermis.
25. One of the following is NOT a type of sweat gland. Which one?
A. eccrine gland
B. merocrine gland
C. endocrine gland
D. apocrine gland
Answer is C: Endocrine is a general term for glands that produce hormones.
Merocrine is another name for eccrine.
26. Three functions of the skin are to:
A. store fat, produce sweat, receive stimuli.
B. synthesise vitamin D, excrete bile, and provide a barrier to the entry of
bacteria.
C. produce keratin, assist in the immune response, and produce lymphocytes.
D. produce melanin, secrete sebum, minimise water loss.
Answer is D: Choice A is incorrect as fat is not stored. Choice B is incorrect
as bile is not excreted. Choice C is incorrect as lymphocytes are not produced.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
5 Integument 111

27. Which of the following is NOT a cell?

A. macrophage
B. chondroblast
C. lysosome
D. melanocyte
Answer is C:A lysosome is an organelle within a cell. –phage, -blast, -cyte are
all suffixes indicating a type of cell.
28. What purpose is vitamin D (calcitriol) used for?
A. required for several stages of haemostasis
B. required for uptake of calcium from the gut
C. required for erythropoiesis
D. required for uptake of intrinsic factor
Answer is B: Dietary calcium requires vitamin D for absorption
29. Which layer of the skin is the most superficial?
A. epidermis
B. dermis
C. papillary dermal layer
D. stratum germinativum
Answer is A: Epidermis refers to the outermost layer of the skin. While
stratum germinativum is part of the epidermis, it is the deepest part.
30. The skin begins the production of vitamin D in which of the following situa-
tions? When
A. exposed to ultraviolet radiation.
B. signalled to by the hormone PTH
C. calcium is present
D. it adds an hydroxyl group to a cholesterol molecule.
Answer is A: Choice D happens in the liver and in the kidney. PTH signals
the kidney to act on the modified pre-cursor, whereupon an hydroxyl group is
added.
31. What do the apocrine glands of the skin secrete?
A. apocrin
B. cerumin
C. milk
D. sweat
Answer is D: Apocrine glands are a type of sweat gland.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
112 5 Integument

32. Another name for oil glands in the skin is:

A. sebaceous glands
B. eccrine glands
C. merocrine glands
D. apocrine glands
Answer is A: The other three choices are all sweat glands.
33. What are three functions of the skin? To:
A. store fat, produce sebum, trap a layer of air beneath hair to insulate against
heat loss.
B. synthesise vitamin D, excrete bile, protect against abrasion.
C. produce melanin, regulate body temperature, minimise water loss.
D. produce keratin, assist in the immune response, produce dendrocytes.
Answer is C: Fat is not stored in the skin. Bile is not excreted. Dendrocytes
are not produced.
34. Which of the following lists layers of the integument in the order from most
superficial first, to deep?
A. epidermis, hypodermis, dermis
B. epidermis, papillary dermal layer, reticular dermal layer.
C. dermis, stratum germinativum, stratum corneum
D. stratum corneum, stratum germinativum, epidermis.
Answer is B: The integument consists of the epidermis and dermis. The
dermis consists of the papillary dermal layer and the reticular dermal layer,
which is deeper.
35. What is another name for sweat glands?
A. ceruminous glands
B. sebaceous glands
C. sudiferous glands
D. apocrine glands
Answer is C: Choice D does list a sweat gland, but not all of them.
36. Which statement about vitamin D is INCORRECT?
A. It is required for uptake of calcium from the gut
B. It is made in the skin, liver and kidneys.
C. It is an essential part of our diet.
D. It is a hormone
Answer is C: As our body can make “vitamin D” it is not an essential part of
our diet. As it circulates in the bloodstream, it is regarded as a type of steroid
hormone.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
5 Integument 113

37. If a drug is administered “transdermally”, which of the following applies?

A. it is absorbed through the skin and acts locally.
B. it is injected into the dermis
C. it is absorbed through the skin and acts systemically.
D. it is injected into the subcutaneous fat layer
Answer is C: Transdermally refers to the drug having to pass through the skin,
rather than bypass the skin as in hypodermic administration (choice D), or
intradermal injection (choice B).
38. The “stratum corneum” is part of the skin that:
A. contains the youngest, rapidly-dividing cells.
B. anchors the skin to muscle while allowing it to slide over muscle.
C. contains collagen, elastin and reticular fibres.
D. protects the body against heat, chemicals and bacteria.
Answer is D: The stratum corneum is “not alive” so forms the protective
barrier between the human internal environment and our surroundings.
39. A drug that is administered “transdermally” is one that:
A. acts at (or close to) the skin area to which it is administered.
B. is injected into the muscle
C. is applied to the epidermis
D. is inserted into the anus
Answer is C: Transdermal administration is applied to those drugs that can be
absorbed from an adhesive “patch” (say), through the skin and enter the blood
stream.
40. The hypodermis is which of the following?
A. the outer layer of the skin.
B. the inner layer of the skin.
C. the superficial fascia and not regarded as part of the skin.
D. not vascularised, getting its nutrients by diffusion.
Answer is C: Hypodermis is “below” the dermis. Although it has “dermis” in
its name, it is not part of the integument.
41. Sudiferous glands are also known as:
A. eccrine or apocrine glands.
B. sebaceous or oil glands.
C. ceruminous or apocrine glands.
D. mammary or eccrine glands.
Answer is A: Sudiferous gland are sweat glands, of which there are two types.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
114 5 Integument

42. Which is the outermost layer of the skin?

A. dermis
B. epidermis
C. stratum lucidum
D. reticular dermal layer
Answer is B: The epidermis is “on top of” (superficial to) the dermis.
43. One of the following is NOT part of the integumentary system. Which one?
A. the hypodermis
B. sebaceous glands
C. finger nails.
D. the stratum corneum.
Answer is A: The hypodermis is the superficial fascia, also known as the sub-
cutaneous fat layer.
44. People with full thickness burns to more than 20 % of their body are in a life-
threatening situation. This is due to which of the following?
A. The body’s inability to thermoregulate.
B. The loss of the ability to produce vitamin D.
C. The buildup of urea and uric acid which would otherwise have been
excreted by the skin.
D. The body’s inability to prevent water loss
Answer is D: Without a waterproof outer layer, the body would lose water
faster than it could be replaced.
45. Which one of the following cell types is responsible for forming the skin’s
abil- ity to tan on exposure to sunlight?
A. melanocytes.
B. keratinocytes.
C. dendrocytes.
D. lymphocytes.
Answer is A: Melanocytes produce melanin, the pigment responsible for tan-
ning and for protecting the cell nucleus from UV radiation.
46. Which list below contains functions that are NOT performed by the
integumen- tary system?
A. protection, secretion of sebum, role in immunity.
B. body temperature regulation, excretion, synthesis of vitamin D.
C. perception of stimuli, production of sweat, protection
D. body temperature regulation, synthesis of vitamin E, social function.
Answer is D: The skin does not produce vitamin E.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
5 Integument 115

47. Full thickness burns to more than 20 % of the body surface is life-threatening
because of the:
A. fluid loss and inability to produce vitamin D.
B. loss of ability to thermoregulate and infection.
C. inability to excrete lactic acid, urea and uric acid, loss of
thermoregulation.
D. fluid loss and loss of the barrier against infection
Answer is D: Removing the skin barrier means that bacteria can enter the
body and water can leave the body. This can be fatal.
48. Which one of the following cell types is responsible for forming the skin’s
stratum corneum?
A. melanocytes.
B. keratinocytes.
C. dendrocytes.
D. lymphocytes.
Answer is B: Keratinocytes secrete keratin which fills the dead cells of the
stratum corneum of the epidermis.
49. Which list of structures is NOT all part of the integumentary system?
A. sebaceous glands, hair, nails, mammary glands.
B. meissner’s corpuscles, hypodermis, eccrine sweat glands, oil glands.
C. apocrine sweat glands, sebaceous glands, merkel disc, hair follicles
D. melanocytes, keratinocytes, merkel cells, dendrocytes.
Answer is B: The hypodermis is not part of the integumentary system.
50. Which of the following is NOT a function of the skin?
A. fat storage
B. waterproofing the body
C. production of vitamin D
D. immunity
Answer is A: Fat is stored in the hypodermis, which is also known as the sub-
cutaneous layer and the superficial fascia.
51. What is one difference between the dermis and the epidermis? The
A. epidermis is composed of fibrous connective tissue while the dermis is
com- posed of epithelial cells.
B. dermis is the most exterior layer.
C. dermis is not part of the skin while the epidermis is.
D. dermis is vascularised while the epidermis is not.
Answer is D: The stratum germinativum of the epidermis and the more super-
ficial layers, being without blood capillaries receives their nutrition via diffu-
sion from capillaries in the dermis.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
116 5 Integument

52. What is the most common protein in the epidermis?

A. elastin
B. keratin
C. melanin
D. cholesterol
Answer is B: Most epidermal cells are keratinocytes that produce the fibrous
protein keratin.
53. What is the fibrous protein in our skin that protects it from abrasion?
A. melanin
B. keratin
C. sebum
D. elastin
Answer is B:the outermost layer of the epidermis (stratum corneum) is com-
posed of dead cells filled with keratin. This layer is harmlessly rubbed off
(abrades) as the body comes into contact with objects outside the body.
54. Which stratum of the epidermis protects the body against water loss and
abrasion?
A. stratum germinativum
B. stratum basale
C. stratum lucidum
D. stratum corneum
Answer is D: The stratum corneum is the outermost layer of the epidermis
and is composed of dead cells filled with keratin. This layer is harmlessly
rubbed off (abrades) as the body comes into contact with objects outside the
body.
55. On which part of the integument is most of the body’s normal flora located?
A. dermis
B. epidermis
C. microdermis
D. hypodermis
Answer is B: The normal flora (bacteria) is outside the body, residing on the
surface of the epidermis.
56. Which is the deepest layer of the integument?
A. the epidermis
B. the dermis
C. the stratum corneum
D. the papillary dermal layer
Answer is B: The dermis includes the papillary layer and the deeper reticular
layer

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
5 Integument 117

57. One of the following is NOT a gland found in the integument. Which one?
A. sudiferous gland
B. mammary gland
C. pineal gland
D. sebaceous gland
Answer is C: The pineal gland is in the brain.
58. All but one of the following are sensory receptors in the skin. Which one is
NOT?
A. Reticular dermal layer
B. Merkel discs
C. Nociceptors
D. Pacinian corpuscles
Answer is A: The reticular dermal layer is not a receptor, it is the deepest layer
of the dermis.
59. What is the secretion produced by sudiferous glands?
A. sweat
B. sebum
C. cerumin
D. merocrin
Answer is A: Sudiferous glands are sweat glands.
60. One of the following statements about the stratum corneum is correct. Which
one?
A. cells in this layer undergo cell division to replace the skin.
B. it consists of dead cells.
C. it contains collagen, elastin and reticular fibres.
D. the layer has sensory receptors known as Merkel discs, Meissner’s and
Pacinian corpuscles.
Answer is B: Stratum corneum is the outermost layer of the epidermis and is
subject physical abrasion. The now flattened, keratinised cells are not living.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
Chapter 6
Homeostasis

Homeostasis is the body’s automatic tendency to maintain a relatively constant

internal environment in terms of temperature, cardiac output, ion concentrations,
blood pH, hydration, dissolved CO2 concentration in blood, blood glucose concen-
tration, concentrations of wastes etc. The values of these (and other) variables
oscil- late within a narrow range. The body is able to monitor these variables and
uses negative feedback (almost exclusively) to raise the values if they get too low
and to lower the values if they get too high. “Negative” feedback means that the
body’s response opposes the stress. Thus the body is in a dynamic state of
equilibrium because its internal conditions change and vary (oscillate) within
relatively narrow limits.
Receptors monitor changes in these physiological variables, that is, they
receive a stimulus. This stimulus is transmitted via an afferent pathway to an
integrating centre (e.g. the brain or a gland). The integrating centre compares the
stimulus to the normal level of the variable – the “set point”. If a response is
required a message is sent via an efferent pathway to the effector organ. The
effector produces a response that moves the value of the variable back towards the
set point.
1. Choose one answer below that completes the sentence so that it makes a true
statement: Positive feedback:
A. is the way the body maintains homeostasis
B. is a response that opposes a stimulus
C. is a response that maintains a dynamic state of equilibrium
D. is a response that enhances a stimulus
Answer is D: “Positive” feedback will reinforce the stimulus, making it
greater or more insistent.
2. The hypothalamus and core thermoreceptors notice if body temp too low. The
hypothalamus signals smooth muscle in blood vessels to vasoconstrict and
skeletal muscle to shiver. This activity causes body temp to rise, which is
again noticed by hypothalamus & core thermoreceptors, so the hypothalamus
turns

© Springer Science+Business Media Singapore 2016 Physiology,

M. Caon, Examination Questions and Answers in Basic Anatomy and DOI
ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
10.1007/978-981-10-2332-3_6
119

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
120 6 Homeostasis

off these heat gain mechanisms. In this scenario, which of the following state-
ments is correct?
A. The scenario describes positive feedback in action.
B. The core thermoreceptors are the effector organs.
C. The hypothalamus is the control centre.
D. Skeletal muscle is the efferent pathway to the effector organ.
Answer is C: The hypothalamus interprets the sensory input and determines
the response. Choice A is wrong as this is negative feedback. The effector
organs are the skeletal muscles (which are not a “pathway”).
3. The human body’s ability to maintain a relatively constant internal
temperature is an example of what?
A. Respiratory heat loss
B. Homeostasis
C. Vasodilation and evaporative heat loss
D. Positive feedback
Answer is B: Homeostasis is derived from words that mean remaining similar
and standing still and refers to physiological conditions remaining more or
less the same.
4. Some of the body’s homeostatic responses rely on “negative feedback”.
Which of the following happens in negative feedback?
A. The body ignores changes in a physiological variable that are directed
towards the set point for that variable.
B. The body ignores changes in a physiological variable that are directed
away from the set point for that variable
C. The body’s response acts to oppose the change in the physiological
variable.
D. The body’s response acts to enhance the change in the physiological
variable
Answer is C: “Negative” refers to the response being in the opposite direction
to the stimulus. Thus if a variable is increasing, then the body’s response is to
produce a change that causes the variable to decrease. The body does not
“ignore” stimuli.
5. In homeostasis, what is it that produces the response that moves the
physiologi- cal variable back towards the middle of its healthy range?
A. the effector
B. the receptor
C. the integrating centre
D. the efferent pathway
Answer is A: The effector produces the effect that it is directed to by the inte-
grating centre. That direction is passed along the efferent (or outgoing)
pathway.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
6 Homeostasis 121

6. The “afferent pathway” in the description of a feedback loop in homeostasis,

refers to the:
A. circulating blood.
B. pathway from the integrating centre to the effector.
C. outgoing signal.
D. path taken by the signal produced by a stimulus.
Answer is D: The afferent signal is incoming from the receptor to the integrat-
ing centre. It may be via the blood, but may be via a nerve.
7. Homeostasis usually returns the body to a healthy state after stressful stimuli by
A. negative feedback
B. positive feedback
C. means of the immune system
D. means of the nervous system
Answer is A: Negative feedback is far more common in maintaining
homeosta- sis than is positive feedback.
8. What does the word “homeostasis” refer to?
A. the steps leading to repair of a blood vessel and the coagulation of blood
B. the maintenance of internal body conditions within narrow limits
C. the controlled response that opposes the influence that caused it.
D. the production of blood cells in active bone marrow
Answer is B: This is the best definition. Choice C refers to negative feedback
only.
9. How does homeostasis return the body to a healthy state after stressful
stimuli? By producing a
A. responses that oppose the stress
B. learned behaviour
C. reflex action
D. buffering mechanism
Answer is A: Refers to negative feedback. Positive feedback is also possible
(but rare), nevertheless choice A is the best answer.
10. What causes the body to maintain a relatively constant internal environment?
A. positive feedback
B. homeostasis
C. reflexes
D. pH buffers
Answer is B: Homeostasis matches the definition in the question.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
122 6 Homeostasis

11. Homeostasis relies on feedback to achieve its aims. “Negative” feedback

refers to which situation below? The body’s response:
A. travels from the effector to the integrating centre via the afferent pathway.
B. opposes the stressful stimulus.
C. is to decrease the set point.
D. enhances the stressful stimulus.
Answer is B: “Negative” refers to the opposing nature of the response.
12. The term “homeostasis” is described by which one of the following
statements? “The body’s ability to:
A. respond to a stimulus or stress in such a way as to enhance the stress.
B. maintain a relatively constant internal temperature.
C. respond to a stimulus or stress in such a way as to reduce the stress.
D. maintain a relatively constant internal environment.
Answer is D: Choice A refers to positive feedback. Choice C refers to negative
feedback. Choice B is an example of homeostasis.
13. Synthesis and release of most hormones is regulated by negative feedback.
Negative feedback means
A. A rise in hormone levels affects the target organ which acts to inhibit
further hormone release
B. A rise in hormone levels affects the target organ which acts to stimulate
further hormone release
C. The effect of hormones on target cells does not control further release of
hormone
D. Neural stimuli result in the release of oxytocin and antidiuretic hormone
from the hypothalamus
Answer is A: When the response opposes a change, it is negative feedback.
14. Which of the following is a correct definition of “positive feedback”?
A. The process by which the body maintains homeostasis.
B. A mechanism in which the body’s response to a stimulus, opposes the
stimulus.
C. A mechanism whereby the body responds to a stimulus by acting to
enhance the stimulus.
D. The dynamic equilibrium maintained by an integrating centre which
causes an effector to respond to the stimulus received by the receptor.
Answer is C: When the stimulus is enhanced, the feedback is termed
“positive”.
15. Which of the following is a correct definition of “negative feedback”?
A. The process by which the body maintains homeostasis.
B. A mechanism in which the body’s response opposes the stimulus.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
6 Homeostasis 123

C. A mechanism whereby the body responds to a stimulus by acting to

enhance the stimulus.
D. The dynamic equilibrium maintained by an integrating centre which
causes an effector to respond to the stimulus received by the receptor.
Answer is B: When an action is taken to cause the stimulus to be reduced, the
feedback is termed “negative”.
16. Homeostasis refers to maintaining :
A. a constant internal body environment through negative feedback.
B. body conditions relatively constant within a narrow range through
negative and positive feedback.
C. adequate concentrations of respiratory gases.
D. blood glucose level within the healthy range.
Answer is B: The maintenance of body conditions through feedback which is
usually negative but is positive in some rare situations.
17. What does the term “homeostasis” refer to?
A. the chemical processes that take place in the organelles of the cells.
B. the body’s tendency to maintain a relatively constant internal environment.
C. the body’s use of energy to produce chemical substances and parts for
growth.
D. any body response that opposes the stimulus that initiated the response.
Answer is B: This is the best definition of homeostasis. Choice D refers to
negative feedback.
18. The body returns to a healthy state after stressful stimuli thanks to which of
the following?
A. positive feedback
B. metabolism
C. anabolism
D. negative feedback
Answer is D: Negative feedback is more common than positive feedback.
19. Which of the following would be a negative feedback response by the body to
hyperthermia?
A. Shivering
B. Sweating
C. Vasoconstriction of blood vessels in the dermis
D. An increase in metabolic rate
Answer is B: Hyperthermia is an increase on body temperature above 38
°C. Negative feedback would be a response that opposed the temperature rise.
Allowing perspiration to evaporate from the skin would cool the skin and lead

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
124 6 Homeostasis

to a decrease in body temperature. The effect of the other choices would be to

increase body temperature.
20. How would the hypothalamus respond if its osmoreceptors noticed an
increase in plasma osmotic pressure? It would send a message to:
A. the posterior pituitary to release more ADH
B. the posterior pituitary to release less ADH
C. the adrenal cortex to release less aldosterone
D. the atria to release more ANP
Answer is A: The hypothalamus would respond in a way that opposed the rise
in osmotic pressure. Releasing more ADH would make the distal convoluted
tubules of the nephrons to become more permeable to water. This would
allow more water to be reclaimed from the filtrate which would act against
the osmotic pressure of the plasma from rising further. It would also stimulate
thirst.
21. During the delivery of a baby the baby’s head is pushing against the cervix
causing the cervix wall to stretch. This stretching causes nerve impulses to be
sent to the hypothalamus which directs the posterior pituitary to release oxyto-
cin in the blood. Oxytocin stimulates the uterus to contract which pushes the
baby’s head deeper into the cervix, stretching it further. This situation is a
description of which of the following?
A. negative feedback
B. positive feedback
C. homeostasis
D. an afferent pathway to an integrating centre
Answer is B: The stimulus (cervical stretching) causes the integrating centre
(the hypothalamus) to respond by enhancing the stimulus – releasing oxytocin
so that the uterus contracts. Enhancing the stimulus is an example of positive
feedback. The feedback stops when the cervix is no longer being stretched,
that is when the baby is delivered.
22. Which of the following statements about positive feedback and homeostasis is
correct?
A. They are regulation mechanisms that control most fluctuations in the inter-
nal environment of the body.
B. The response to the stimulus serves to exaggerate the feedback effect.
C. This type of feedback response only involves an effector not a specific
stim- ulus receptor site.
D. This feedback mechanism involves adjustments at the organ level but not
at the cellular level.
Answer is B: Positive feedback causes the stimulus to increase in magnitude
which in turn elicits a more exaggerated response.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
Chapter 7
Skeleton and Joints

There are 206 individual bones in the adult skeleton. Each one is an organ and you
should know the names of most of them. They are classified as part of either the
axial skeleton or the appendicular skeleton. Bone may be termed compact (dense)
or spongy (cancellous). Compact bone is found in the shaft (the diaphysis) of long
bones and is composed of microscopic cylindrical structures called osteons. These
are lamellar structures with osteocytes within lacunae that surround a central canal
that contains blood vessels. The central canal can exchange material with the lacu-
nae via little channels called canaliculi. Spongy bone is found in the ends (the
epiphyses) of long bones and is composed of bony trabeculae. Marrow is found in
the shaft of long bones and between the trabeculae of spongy bone. Active marrow
produces red and white blood cells by haemopoiesis. Yellow marrow is inactive.
Bone is a storage place for calcium and is continually being remodelled by osteo-
clasts (which remove bone) and osteoblasts (which deposit bone). In the process,
Ca is released or stored.
The surface of bones is marked by features that may rise above the surface
(pro- jections or roughenings) or be indented below the surface. The features mark
attach- ment points for tendons and ligaments; places where a bone articulates with
another; grooves where tendons may lie; or an opening for nerves and blood
vessels to pass through. These features are given names such as tuberosity,
condyle, foramen, tubercle etc.
A bone is connected to an adjacent bone at an articulation (a joint) and they are
bound to each other by ligaments. All the joints in the appendicular skeleton are
freely moveable (synovial) joints and stabilised by tendons and intracapsular
menisci. Their free movement is produced when the muscles attached to them con-
tract and is ensured by the smooth hyaline cartilage that covers the articulating
bone surfaces and the lubricating synovial fluid within the joint capsule.
1. Which of the following is NOT a bone of the axial skeleton?
A. deltoid
B. ethmoid

© Springer Science+Business Media Singapore 2016

125
M. Caon, Examination Questions and Answers in Basic Anatomy and
Physiology, DOI 10.1007/978-981-10-2332-3_7

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
126 7 Skeleton and Joints

C. sphenoid
D. hyoid
Answer is A: The “deltoid” does not exist. Choice D, the hyoid does not articu-
late with any bone, but being in the neck is considered part of the axial
skeleton.
2. Which of the following is a function of the skeletal system?
A. haemopoiesis
B. haemostasis
C. peristalsis
D. glycogenolysis
Answer is A: New red and white blood cells are made in the bone marrow
(hae- mopoiesis). Haemostasis refers to stopping bleeding.
3. In which of the following bone structures do osteocytes live?
A. osteons
B. canaliculi
C. lacunae
D. lamellae
Answer is C: Lacunae are the spaces within the lamellae of an osteon which
enclose a bone cell (osteocyte). These cells extend their processes into the
canaliculi.
4. Which bone is most superior?
A. manubrium
B. occipital bone
C. cervical vertebra #3
D. patella
Answer is B: The occipital bone forms the base of the skull so is above (supe-
rior) to all the others when the body is in the anatomical position.
5. What is a “trochanter”?
A. part of a femur
B. a feature of the pelvis
C. a projection that forms part of an articulation
D. a groove in which lies a tendon
Answer is A: the “greater” trochanter is a bone marking (a bump) that lies on
the lateral surface of the proximal femur, while the “lesser” trochanter lies on
the medial surface of the proximal femur.
6. One of the functions of bones is to make red blood cells. What is this process
known as?
A. Haemolysis
B. Haemopoiesis

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
7 Skeleton and Joints 127

C. Haematuria
D. Haemostasis
Answer is B: Haemopoiesis (or haematopoiesis) refers to making all of
cellular components of blood. The other (wrong) choices are respectively: the
rupturing (lysis) of rbc; blood in the urine; the process by which we cause
bleeding to stop.
7. Where do osteocytes reside?
A. In lamellae
B. In endosteum
C. In trabeculae
D. In lacunae
Answer is D: Lacunae are the spaces within the lamellae of an osteon which
are occupied by a bone cell (osteocyte).
8. Which of the following describes the movements known as pronation and
supination?
A. The flexing of the arm with respect to the forearm around the elbow.
B. The swivelling of the foot to the medial and lateral directions.
C. The twisting of the wrist while the elbow is held motionless.
D. The rotation at the shoulder that causes the arm to describe a cone shape.
Answer is C: Pronation occurs when the radius is moved from a position
paral- lel to the ulna to one where it crosses over the ulna and supination is
the return motion (may be thought of as the action we perform when turning
off a wall- mounted tap).
9. Which of the following is NOT a “long” bone?
A. the humerus
B. the tibia
C. a carpal
D. a metacarpal
Answer is C: A “long bone” has a length that is significantly longer than its
width. A carpal (a bone of the wrist) is a short bone.
10. Which one of the following is a bone that is embedded within a tendon?
A. sphenoid
B. hyoid
C. ethmoid
D. sesamoid
Answer is D: Sesamoid refers to like a sesame seed. Many are normal parts of
anatomy that ossify within tendons (patella, fabella, hallux sesamoid).

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
128 7 Skeleton and Joints

11. In which one of the following structures do osteocytes reside? In the

A. haversian canals
B. lacunae
C. trabeculae
D. endosteum
Answer is B: Lacuna refers to a hole, pit, “lake” or cavity within a bone.
12. Which bone of the head has a synovial joint?
A. The sphenoid
B. The maxilla
C. The mandible
D. The hyoid
Answer is C: The ramus of the mandible articulates with the temporal bone at
the mandibular fossa. The joint is freely moveable, allowing us to chew and
speak.
13. What are the bones of the fingers known as?
A. short bones
B. metacarpals
C. carpals
D. phalanges
Answer is D: Phalanges (singular phalanx) are the bones of the fingers or
toes. Metacarpals are the bones of the hand.
14. Which of the following comprise seven bones?
A. Cervical vertebrae
B. Carpals
C. Cranial bones
D. Lumbar vertebrae
Answer is A: C1 to C7. There are 8 carpals in each wrist. There are 8 cranial
bones. There are 5 lumbar vertebrae.
15. Which term below refers to a depression in a bone?
A. tuberosity
B. fossa
C. tubercle
D. condyle
Answer is B: Fossa is a depression reminiscent of a (small) dinner table plate.
A tuberosity is a roughening on a bone surface. The other two choices are
pro- jections above a bone surface.
16. What body part is able to perform pronation and supination?
A. the forearm
B. the foot

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
7 Skeleton and Joints 129

C. the thigh
D. the wrist
Answer is A: It is the radius and ulna bones whose movement relative to each
other produce pronation and supination.
17. Where are blood vessels in compact bone found?
A. in the canaliculi
B. in the periosteum
C. in the lacunae
D. in the central canal
Answer is D: the central canal (or haversian canal) of an osteon houses blood
vessels
18. Which of the following is NOT a depression or cavity on a bone?
A. tuberosity
B. facet
C. meatus
D. sinus
Answer is A: A tuberosity is a rough area on the surface of a bone to which a
muscle’s tendon attaches.
19. One of the following lists contains only bones in the appendicular skeleton.
Which one?
A. patella, ethmoid, femur, coccyx, tibia
B. clavicle, fibula, metatarsal, phalange, radius
C. humerus, scapula, occipital, metacarpal, sternum
D. ulna, radius, phalange, mandible, coxal
Answer is B: The coccyx, occipital, sternum, mandible are parts of the axial
skeleton.
20. A synovial joint is also known as one of the following, which one?
A. synarthrosis
B. immovable joint
C. slightly moveable joint
D. freely moveable joint
Answer is D: Synovial fluid is the lubricant that allows friction free joint
move- ment. A synarthrosis is an immovable joint.
21. What is contained within the medullary canal of a long bone?
A. trabeculae
B. lamellae
C. marrow
D. osteoblasts and osteoclasts
Answer is C: Red (and/or yellow) marrow fills the medullary canal (or cavity).

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
130 7 Skeleton and Joints

22. Where in the skeleton is the scapula located?

A. in the axial skeleton
B. in the appendicular skeleton
C. in the carpal region
D. in the shoulder girdle
Answer is D: The scapula (shoulder blade) is part of the shoulder girdle. It is
also part of the appendicular skeleton, but choice D is the more specific
answer.
23. Which of the following bone markings forms part of an articulation?
A. the deltoid tuberosity of the humerus
B. the lateral condyle of the femur
C. the greater trochanter of the femur
D. the greater tubercule of the humerus
Answer is B: The lateral condyle of the femur articulates with the lateral facet
of the superior articular surface of the tibia, in the knee joint.
24. Where is the epiphyseal plate of a long bone located?
A. in the diaphysis
B. between the diaphysis and the epiphysis
C. in the epiphysis
D. in the medullary canal
Answer is B: The “plate” is the hyaline cartilage between the shaft (diaphysis)
and end (epiphysis) of a long bone in children and adolescents. In adults it is
replaced by an ossified “epiphyseal line”.
25. In which structure are osteoclasts and osteoblasts found?
A. in the periosteum
B. in the haversian canals
C. in the lacunae of osteons
D. in the trabeculae of osteons
Answer is A: The membrane around bones houses the bone forming cells
(osteoblasts) and the bone reabsorbing cells (osteoclasts).
26. Which of the following is a NOT a projection from a bone surface?
A. trochanter
B. tubercle
C. trabeculum
D. tuberosity
Answer is C: A trabeculum (plural trabeculae) is the internal bony structure of
spongy (cancellous) bone.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
7 Skeleton and Joints 131

27. Which of the listed bones is superior to the rest?

A. manubrium
B. xiphoid process
C. coccyx
D. femur
Answer is A: The manubrium is the upper part of the sternum. The xiphoid
process is the lower part.
28. Choose the correct sentence. Compact bone contains
A. lamellae and osteocytes but no osteons.
B. trabeculae, canaliculi and osteons.
C. haversian systems and canaliculi but no osteons.
D. osteons and lamellae but no trabeculae.
Answer is D: Compact bone does contain osteons, but not trabeculae (which
occur in cancellous bone).
29. Which of the following bone markings is NOT a projection for muscle
attachment?
A. fossa
B. tuberosity
C. tubercle
D. trochanter
Answer is A: A fossa is a depression into which fits a projecting part of another
bone when the two bones form a joint.
30. Which of the list below is a cell that reabsorbs bone?
A. osteon
B. osteoblast
C. osteocyte
D. osteoclast
Answer is D: The suffix “-blast” refers to an immature cell. In this case it
devel- ops into an osteocyte after it has secreted bone matrix around itself.
31. The formula for the inorganic salts in bone is
A. NH6C3COOH
B. C6H12O6
C. Ca10(PO4)6OH2
D. CH3(CH2)7CH = CH(CH2)7COOH
Answer is C: This is hydroxyapatite. It is the only one with calcium and phos-
phorus. All the others are organic molecules.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
132 7 Skeleton and Joints

32. Freely moveable joints are also known as

A. fibrous joints
B. cartilaginous joints
C. amphiarthroses
D. synovial joints
Answer is D: Synovial joints have synovial fluid between the articulating
bones. Fibrous joints have fibre between the articulating bones. Cartilaginous
joints have cartilage between the bones. Amphiarthroses are “slightly move-
able” joints.
33. Which of the following is a projection from a bone surface?
A. fossa
B. fissure
C. foramen
D. facet
Answer is D: Facet is an articular surface that projects from a bone surface. A
fossa is a shallow basin-like depression in a bone, often serving as articular
surface.
34. Which of the listed bones is the most inferior?
A. ethmoid
B. sphenoid
C. femoid
D. hyoid
Answer is D: Hyoid is in the neck. Choice A & B are in the skull. Femoid is
not a bone.
35. Choose the correct sentence. Cancellous bone contains
A. lamellae and osteocytes but no trabeculae.
B. trabeculae, canaliculi and osteons.
C. haversian systems and canaliculi but no osteons.
D. trabeculae and lamellae but no osteons.
Answer is D: Cancellous (spongy) bone does not contain osteons, but does
contain the little beams known as trabeculae.
36. Which of the following bones is part of the cranium?
A. occipital
B. mandible
C. hyoid
D. carpal
Answer is A: the occipital bone forms the floor of the cranium.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
7 Skeleton and Joints 133

37. The appendicular skeleton includes all of the following EXCEPT one. Which
one?
A. the pectoral girdle
B. the thoracic cage
C. the phalanges
D. the lower limbs
Answer is B: The thoracic cage (the ribs) are part of the axial skeleton.
38. What is the name given to the central tunnel of an osteon that contains blood
vessels?
A. canaliculus
B. endosteum
C. haversian canal
D. medullary canal
Answer is C: Also known as the central canal. The medullary canal is a
macro- scopic structure within the diaphysis (shaft) of a long bone.
39. Which of the following is an example of a synovial joint? The joint between
the:
A. tibia and fibula
B. sternum and rib number 1
C. thoracic vertebrae 4 and 5
D. proximal ends of the radius and ulna
Answer is D: The radius and ulna are freely moving at the elbow joint.
40. Which list contains the bones of the pelvic and pectoral girdles?
A. coxal, scapulae, manubrium, ilium
B. clavicles, cervical, coccyx, innominate
C. clavicles, scapulae, coxal
D. clavicles, scapulae, sacrum, coxal
Answer is C: The manubrium, coccyx, sacrum are within the axial skeleton.
41. Synovial joints have all of the following features EXCEPT one. Which one?
A. are surrounded by an articular capsule.
B. have synovial fluid filling the space between articulating bones.
C. have synovial membrane covering the articulating bone surfaces.
D. are supported by reinforcing ligaments.
Answer is C: Articulating bone surfaces are covered by hyaline cartilage.
Synovial membranes covers all other internal joint surfaces.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
134 7 Skeleton and Joints

42. The manubrium and the xiphoid process are located on which part of the
skeleton?
A. the lower jaw
B. the sternum
C. the pelvis
D. the hand
Answer is B: The manubrium and xiphoid process (and the body) are all parts
of the sternum.
43. Carpals refers to
A. the points of attachment of ribs to vertebrae
B. bones of the wrist
C. bones that are embedded within a tendon
D. the thumbs
Answer is B: Wrist bones are carpals, hand bones are metacarpals (ankle
bones are tarsals).
44. Haemopoiesis refers to
A. blood cell formation in bone marrow
B. the process of blood clotting
C. the crenation of red blood cells in a hypotonic solution
D. an excessively large proportion of red blood cells to plasma.
Answer is A: While the prefix “Haemo” refers to blood, the “-poiesis” part
means making (or forming).
45. Articulating bones are joined by
A. aponeuroses
B. tendons
C. fasciculi
D. ligaments
Answer is D: ligaments join bone to bone. Tendons (and aponeuroses) join
muscle to bone.
46. On which bone is the greater trochanter found?
A. pelvic
B. femur
C. radius
D. humerus
Answer is B: Only the femur has a structure named “trochanter”.
47. What does “articulation” refer to?
A. the joining of a ligament to a bone.
B. the contact made between a tendon and a bone

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
7 Skeleton and Joints 135

C. the contact between two bones.

D. the connection between a muscle and a bone
Answer is C: Articulation means joint between
bones.
48. To which bones does the word phalanges apply? Those in the
A. fingers and toes
B. wrist and ankle
C. ankle and foot
D. fingers and hand
Answer is A: Choice B refers to carpals and tarsals. Choices C & D include
metacarpals and metatarsals.
49. The axial skeleton groups together which sets of bones?
A. the arms and hands, the legs and feet, shoulder girdle and pelvic girdle.
B. the head, shoulder girdle, arms and hands.
C. the thoracic cage, vertebral column, shoulder girdle, the pelvic girdle, the
skull and facial bones.
D. bones of the skull and face, thoracic cage and vertebral column.
Answer is D: Choice A describes the appendicular skeleton. Choices A & D are
complementary.
50. How do synovial joints differ from the other types of bone articulation?
A. they have a joint cavity.
B. the bones are joined by fibrous tissue.
C. the articulating bones are joined by cartilage.
D. the articulating bone surfaces are covered by tendons.
Answer is A: And the cavity is filled with synovial fluid. Choice D is
nonsense.
51. What are the cells that are found in the lacunae of compact bone called?
A. osteocytes.
B. osteons.
C. osteoblasts.
D. osteoclasts.
Answer is A: Osteocytes develop from osteoblasts.
52. The appendicular skeleton groups together which sets of bones?
A. the arms and hands, the legs and feet, shoulder girdle and pelvic girdle.
B. the head, shoulder girdle, arms and hands.
C. the thoracic cage, vertebral column, shoulder girdle, the pelvic girdle, the
skull and facial bones.
D. bones of the skull and face, thoracic cage and vertebral column.
Answer is A: The appendages (arms and legs) and the girdles form the appen-
dicular skeleton.
ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
136 7 Skeleton and Joints

53. Synovial joints differ from the other types of joint between bones in the body
because:
A. they are immovable joints.
B. they are slightly moveable
C. the bones are joined by cartilage.
D. the ends of the articulating bones are covered by hyaline cartilage.
Answer is D: Hyaline cartilage is very smooth which (along with synovial
fluid) makes the movement of the articulating bones almost friction free.
54. What does the term “haversian canal” refer to in bone?
A. the larger examples of foramina.
B. a groove that receives a muscle’s tendon.
C. the centre of an osteon that contains blood capillaries.
D. the space within a long bone that contains marrow.
Answer is C: Named after the English physician Clopton Havers. Also known
as the central canal.
55. What is the structure that attaches one bone to another?
A. ligament
B. cartilage
C. tendon
D. diaphysis
Answer is A: A ligament is the fibrous connective tissue that ties articulating
bones together.
56. Which of the following describes what an “epiphysis” is?
A. The shaft of a long bone.
B. The line that separates the shaft from the end of a long bone.
C. The membrane that surrounds a bone.
D. The end of a long bone.
Answer is D: The similar terms “epiphyseal plate” refers to the region
between the diaphysis and the epiphysis where growth of a long bone takes
place. The “epiphyseal line” replaces the plate in adults, when the long bone
has ceased to grow.
57. To what does the term “osteon” refer in bone?
A. the bone cells (osteocytes) in lacunae.
B. a small rounded projection on a bone.
C. concentric cylinders of calcified bone matrix.
D. the membrane covering the outside of a bone.
Answer is C: These concentric cylinders surround a central canal (Haversian
canal) and occur in compact bone.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
7 Skeleton and Joints 137

58. Blood cell formation (haemopoiesis) occurs in which of the following

structures?
A. red marrow
B. yellow marrow
C. medullary cavity
D. epiphyseal plate
Answer is A: Red marrow is “active” marrow, in that blood cells are being
formed there. Red marrow occurs in the medullary cavity as well as in the
can- cellous bone of the epiphyses.
59. Compact bone differs from spongy (cancellous) bone because compact bone:
A. does not contain osteons
B. is used to form short bones
C. contains marrow
D. has Haversian canals
Answer is D: Osteons are the structural units of compact bone and each one
surrounds a channel, called a Haversion canal, which contains blood vessels.
60. What is the role of hyaline cartilage in the body?
A. it attaches muscle to bone.
B. it reinforces joints by tying one bone to another.
C. it covers articulating bone surfaces.
D. it produces synovial fluid.
Answer is C: Hyaline cartilage is very smooth, and by covering the
articulating surfaces of bones, ensures that the joint moves without noticeable
friction.
61. What are bone forming cells called?
A. osteons
B. osteocytes
C. osteoclasts
D. osteoblasts
Answer is D: Osteoblasts secrete bone around themselves, eventually
isolating themselves within lacunae, whereupon they mature into osteocytes.
62. Where does the increase in the length of a long bone take place? At the :
A. diaphysis ossification centres
B. epiphyseal plates
C. cartilaginous plates
D. medullary canal
Answer is B: Bone is deposited on the side of the plate that is distal to the
epiphysis while bone is removed from the proximal side. In this way the
diaph- ysis increases in length (and is remodelled)

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
138 7 Skeleton and Joints

63. The human skeleton consists of which of the following?

A. pectoral girdle, the hip girdle and the bones of the limbs.
B. axial skeleton and the appendicular skeleton.
C. cranial bones, the thoracic cage, the two girdles and the limb bones.
D. appendicular skeleton, skull bones and the vertebral skeleton.
Answer is B: Choice A omits the axial skeleton. Choice C omits the facial
bones and lumbar vertebrae. Choice D omits the ribs.
64. The functions of bones may be stated as:
A. fat storage, movement, mineral storage, protection, blood cell formation.
B. mineral storage, haemopoiesis, movement, leverage, protection.
C. blood cell formation, hormone production, movement, support, protection.
D. support, storage, movement, haemopoiesis, protection
Answer is D: Each choice includes: protection, movement and blood cell for-
mation (haemopoiesis) so these terms cannot be used to choose the answer.
Bones do not produce hormones, so choice C is eliminated. Bones do provide
support to the body, hence only choice D is a complete list of functions.
65. What is true of synovial joints? They:
A. are also known as amphiarthroses
B. all have an articular disc to aid shock absorption.
C. have a fluid-filled space between the articulating bones.
D. have articulating bones held together by cartilage.
Answer is C: The fluid is synovial fluid. Amphiarthroses are “slightly move-
able” joints whereas synovial joints are freely moveable.
66. The tibia articulates distally with which one of the following?
A. tarsals
B. metatarsals
C. phalanges
D. femur
Answer is A: Distal refers to the end that is further away from the trunk.
Hence the ankle bones (tarsals) is the correct choice.
67. Which of the following is an amphiarthrotic joint?
A. symphysis pubis
B. suture in the skull
C. elbow
D. shoulder
Answer is A: Choice B is an immovable joint, while choices C & D are freely
moveable synovial (diarthrotic) joints.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
7 Skeleton and Joints 139

68. What is the term “osteon” used for?

A. a bone cell
B. an Haversian system in compact bone
C. the bony structure in spongy bone
D. the space in a bone where a bone cell lives.
Answer is B: Osteon and Haversian system are synonyms. A Haversian canal
(central canal) is at the centre of the Haversian system.
69. In a long bone, which of the following parts are involved in an articulation?
A. epiphysis
B. metaphysis
C. diaphysis
D. symphysis
Answer is A: Epiphysis refers to the end of a long bone. The ends articulate
with adjacent bones.
70. Hypochondriac refers to which of the following?
A. someone who complains chronically of ill health
B. the abdominal region inferior to your ribs
C. an abnormally low level of chondria in the body
D. that part of your head surrounding your chin.
Answer is B: “Hypo-”refers to below (or inferior to), chondra refers to carti-
lage – specifically the costal cartilages that join ribs 7 to 10 to the sternum.
The abdomen immediately inferior to the rib cage is being referred to.
Choices C & D are nonsense. While choice A is true in layman’s terms, we
are dealing with anatomical terminology here.
71. Where are the bones known as the humerus and radius located?
A. in the axial skeleton
B. in the arm
C. in the leg
D. in the arm and leg respectively
Answer is B: This is a better answer than the also true choice A.
72. Where does blood cell formation occur? In the
A. blood
B. endosteum
C. Haversian canal
D. red marrow
Answer is D: Red marrow is actively forming blood cells. Yellow marrow is
inactive.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
140 7 Skeleton and Joints

73. On what bone does the acetabulum occur?

A. occipital
B. humerus
C. pelvis
D. tibia
Answer is C: The acetabulum is the “socket” into which fits the ball of the
femur.
74. Where is the xiphoid process?
A. on the sternum
B. on the humerus
C. on the temporal bone
D. on the tibia
Answer is A: At the inferior end of the body of the sternum. The temporal
bone has a mastoid and a styloid process.
75. What is the metaphysis?
A. the shaft of a long bone.
B. the region that separates the narrow shaft of a long bone from its end.
C. the end of a long bone.
D. the canal inside a long bone that contains marrow.
Answer is B: The metaphysis is the bony component of the growth plate. The
cartilaginous remnant of the growth plate is the epiphyseal plate.
76. What is a distinguishing feature of synovial joints?
A. there is fluid between the articulating bones
B. they are immovable joints
C. the articulating bones are held together by tendons
D. they involve a “ball and socket” articulation
Answer is A: The fluid is synovial fluid. Ball & socket joints are synovial, but
are only one type of synovial joint.
77. What term is applied to moving the thigh laterally away from the midline of
the body?
A. extension
B. adduction
C. abduction
D. flexion
Answer is C: “Abduct” is to take away (from the midline).
78. Where is the hyoid bone?
A. in the sternum
B. in the wrist

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
7 Skeleton and Joints 141

C. in the knee
D. in the neck
Answer is D: It is just superior to the cricoid cartilage, inferior to the
mandible and superficial to the pharynx. Also known as the lingual (tongue)
bone.
79. What is the occipital bone?
A. it is one of the carpals
B. it is a bone of the cranium
C. it is one of the vertebrae
D. it is a facial bone
Answer is B: The Occipital bone forms the base of the cranium.
80. What is a “foramen”?
A. a basin-like depression serving as an articular surface.
B. a raised roughening which is a site for muscle attachment.
C. a hole through a bone for a nerve or blood vessel.
D. a sharp slender projection of bone.
Answer is C: Nerves and blood vessels penetrate through bone via these spaces.
81. Which statement correctly defines an osteon?
A. the arrangement of trabeculae and osteocytes that make up spongy bone.
B. the membrane that lines the medullary cavity.
C. concentric cylinders of calcified bone matrix.
D. the distal or proximal end of a long bone.
Answer is C: In two dimensions osteons appear as circles or ovals under the
microscope, while in three dimensions, they are cylindrical.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
Chapter 8
Muscles

Skeletal muscle is attached to the skeleton, is voluntarily controlled, has cells that
are very long “fibres” that are multinucleate and striated. Each skeletal muscle is
an organ and is named. The names may seem strange but they contain information
about the muscle. The name may indicate the location of the muscle in the body
(femoris, brachii), the shape of the muscle (deltoid, trapezius), its action (adductor,
pronator) or its relative size (maximus, longus) of the muscle. The names may
indi- cate the origin and insertion points (sternocleidomastoid) of the muscle, or
the num- ber of origins (biceps, quadriceps), or the direction (rectus, transversus)
in which the muscle fibres lie. Or they may be named whimsically (sartorius).
Skeletal muscle cells are distinctly different from cardiac and smooth muscle
cells. They are also distinct from other body cells. The cells are called fibres, their
plasma membrane is called sarcolemma, the cytoplasm is called sarcoplasm, the
endoplasmic reticulum is called sarcoplasmic reticulum and the contracting struc-
tures within a myofibril of a muscle cell are called sarcomeres. Within a sarcomere
are bundles of thick and thin myofilaments. The sarcolemma bundles many myofi-
brils together into a cell somewhat like a packet of spaghetti. Sarcomeres are
joined end to end to form a long strand called a myofibril. The thick myofilaments
are composed of the protein myosin. The thin myofilaments are composed of the
pro- tein actin, while the proteins, troponin and tropomyosin along with calcium
ions and ATP participate in the physiology of contraction of a sarcomere. Each
cell/fibre is surrounded by a membrane called the endomysium which overlies the
sarco- lemma. The endomysium contains nerve axons and capillaries. A bundle of
muscle fibres is called a fascicle and is surrounded by a connective tissue
membrane called the perimysium. A muscle is a bundle of fascicles and the
membrane surrounding a muscle is called the epimysium.
1. Which muscle naming criteria are used to name the quadriceps femoris?
A. muscle action and location
B. the origin and insertion

© Springer Science+Business Media Singapore 2016 143

M. Caon, Examination Questions and Answers in Basic Anatomy and
Physiology, DOI 10.1007/978-981-10-2332-3_8

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
144 8 Muscles

C. location and direction of muscle fibres

D. location and number of origins
Answer is D: Femoris refers to location on the femur, quadriceps refers to 4
origins.
2. By what name is the plasma membrane of a muscle cell known?
A. sarcoplasm
B. sarcomere
C. sarcoplasmic reticulum
D. sarcolemma
Answer is D: “Sarco-” refers to flesh (muscle), “lemma-” refers to sheath
(membrane) around the cell.
3. Of the events that lead to myofilaments sliding over each other, which of the
following happens first?
A. The myosin head engages with the binding site on actin
B. Troponin changes shape and pulls on tropomyosin
C. Calcium ions enter the cell cytoplasm
D. ATP is hydrolysed to ADP and inorganic phosphate
Answer is C: Ca must first enter the cytoplasm in order to bind with troponin.
Once the binding site is exposed, the myosin head may engage the site. Prior
to engagement, ATP must be hydrolysed to ADP.
4. Smooth muscle is different from skeletal muscle because smooth muscle
A. is found in the walls of arteries
B. can be voluntarily contracted
C. has many nuclei in a cell
D. has intercalated discs between cells
Answer is A: Smooth muscle occurs in the walls of tubes, whereas skeletal
muscle does not.
5. Which of the following muscles is named according to its origin and
insertion?
A. transversus abdominus
B. semimembranosus
C. sternocleidomastoid
D. deltoid
Answer is C: The origin is on the sternum and clavicle (sternocleido-), while
the insertion (on the “moving bone”) is to the mastoid process of the temporal
bone.
6. All of the following structures are part of a muscle cell except one. Which one?
A. sarcoma
B. sarcolemma

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
8 Muscles 145

C. sarcoplasm
D. sarcoplasmic reticulum
Answer is A: Sarcoma refers to a malignant tumour (a cancer) of connective
or other non-epithelial tissue (bones, muscles, tendons, cartilage, nerves, fat,
and blood vessels).
7. During muscle cell contraction, what happens because of Ca++ binding to
troponin?
A. The binding site on actin is uncovered.
B. Acetylcholine (ACh) is released.
C. The cross-bridge disengages from the thin filament.
D. ATP hydrolyses to ADP.
Answer is A: Troponin causes tropomyosin (which covers he binding site of
actin) to be shifted away.
8. Which of the following muscle cell structures is the longest?
A. A myofilament
B. A myofibril
C. A sarcomere
D. A troponin molecule
Answer is B: A muscle cell is a bundle of myofibrils. Myofibrils contain many
sarcomeres joined end to end. Within sarcomeres are found (the shorter) thick
and thin myofilaments.
9. Which of the muscles listed below is named according to its action?
A. adductor longus
B. temporalis
C. sternocleidomastoid
D. peroneus longus
Answer is A: Adduction is the action of bringing an abducted bone back
towards the body’s midline.
10. Which of the following is the smallest structure within a muscle fibre?
A. myosin
B. myofilament
C. myofibril
D. sarcomere
Answer is A: Myosin is a molecule that makes up a thick myofilament. Many
thick and thin myofilaments make up a sarcomere. Many sarcomeres joined
end to end form a myofibril.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
146 8 Muscles

11. Which of the events below is the FIRST to occur prior to a muscle cell
contracting?
A. ATP binds to myosin.
B. ADP detaches from myosin.
C. the active site on actin is exposed.
D. Ca++ is released from the sarcoplasmic reticulum.
Answer is D: The release of Ca from where it is stored (in the SR) is
necessary before the active binding site of actin can be exposed.
12. What is a “sarcomere”?
A. a cancer of connective tissue
B. the cytoplasm of a muscle cell
C. a section of a myofilament.
D. the plasma membrane of a muscle cell.
Answer is C: A myofilament is a long line of sarcomeres joined end to end.
So one section of a myofilament is a sarcomere.
13. Smooth muscle cells may be described by which of the following?
A. striated, voluntary, multinucleate
B. not striated, voluntary, multinucleate
C. striated, involuntary, uninucleate
D. not striated, involuntary, uninucleate
Answer is D: Smooth muscle is not-striated, and it is involuntary and has one
nucleus.
14. By which term is a muscle that opposes or reverses a particular movement
called?
A. agonist
B. synergist
C. antagonist
D. fixator
Answer is C: An agonist muscle performs the action, while the antagonist
must relax (be stretched) while the action is being performed (and can reverse
the action of the agonist).
15. Which term is given to the unit of a myofibril that contracts?
A. sarcoplasm
B. sarcomere
C. sarcolemma
D. sarcoplasmic reticulum
Answer is B: The contraction of a myofibril is due to the shortening of its
com- ponent sarcomeres.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
8 Muscles 147

16. Which is the largest of the structures in a muscle fibre?

A. myofibril
B. myofilament
C. myosin
D. myopic
Answer is A: A myofibril extends the length of a muscle cell. A myofilament
is shorter than a sarcomere, while myosin is a molecule in a thick
myofilament.
17. Where are the semimembranosus and semitendinosus muscles located? In the:
A. seminal vesicle
B. thigh
C. forearm
D. back
Answer is B: They are 2 of the 3 “hamstring” muscles on the dorsal thigh, the
other being the biceps femoris.
18. By what name is something that attaches a bone to another bone known?
A. aponeurosis
B. sarcomere
C. ligament
D. tendon
Answer is C: Ligament is the “ligature” that join articulating bones. A tendon
(or an aponeurosis) attaches a muscle to a bone.
19. Which protein(s) are found in thin myofilaments?
A. actin
B. actin and tropomyosin
C. actin, tropomyosin, and troponin
D. actin, myosin, tropomyosin and troponin
Answer is C: Actin is the major component of a thin filament. Tropomyosin
covers the biding site, while troponin provides the mechanism for removing
tropomyosin from the binding site.
20. Which statement below best describes the role of Ca++ in muscle contraction?
A. Ca++ binds to troponin, thereby changing its shape to expose the binding
site.
B. Ca++ causes ADP and inorganic phosphate to detach from the myosin
crossbridge.
C. Ca++ attaches to the myosin head, causing it to disengage from its binding
site.
D. Ca++ crosses the sarcolemma from the axon terminal which allows the
action potential to propagate along the sarcolemma.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
148 8 Muscles

Answer is A: Ca attaches to troponin causing a shape change which shifts the

attached tropomyosin away from binding sites of actin.
21. What characteristic of a smooth muscle cell distinguishes it from cardiac and
from skeletal muscle?
A. being branched
B. being under involuntary control
C. lack of striations
D. being uninucleate
Answer is C: Both cardiac and skeletal muscle show striations when viewed
under the microscope, but smooth muscle does not.
22. What information is contained in the muscle name “biceps brachii”?
A. the muscle location and the number of origins.
B. the number of origins and the muscle action.
C. the muscle size and location in the body.
D. the muscle’s shape and its action.
Answer is A: “Brachii” indicates location on the brachus (arm), while
“biceps” refers to the two origins (attachments) of the muscle.
23. Which of the following muscles is a common intra-muscular injection site?
A. deltoid
B. gluteus maximus
C. vastus medialis
D. latissimus dorsi
Answer is A: The upper arm at the shoulder is the location of the deltoid. It is
the gluteus medius (rather than the gluteus maximus) that is used for IM
injec- tions to avoid the sciatic nerve.
24. What causes the myosin binding site of an actin molecule to be exposed?
A. ATP attaching to the myosin cross-bridge
B. a nerve impulse reaching the motor end plate of a motor nerve.
C. calcium ions attaching to troponin
D. acetylcholine crossing the neuromuscular junction
Answer is C: Ca causes a change of shape to the troponin molecule when they
attach. This causes troponin to wrench tropomyosin away from its resting
posi- tion covering the binding site.
25. What is the source of the majority of the energy needed by muscles for
physical activity that continues for longer than 30 or 40 minutes?
A. ATP stored in muscle fibres.
B. glycolysis of glucose in the cell cytoplasm
C. ATP produced from creatine phosphate stored in muscle fibres
D. aerobic respiration of pyruvic acid in mitochondria

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
8 Muscles 149

Answer is D: Choice A lasts for a few seconds only. Choice B can provide
energy for a couple of minutes. Choice C can provide energy for vigorous
activity lasting about 15 seconds.
26. Which one of the following is NOT a characteristic of skeletal muscle?
A. excitability
B. autonomic innervation
C. contractility
D. extensibility
Answer is B: Skeletal muscle is voluntary so is innervated by the somatic ner-
vous system, not the autonomic system.
27. What is the gluteus maximus named for? Its
A. size.
B. shape.
C. action.
D. origin and insertion.
Answer is A: The gluteus maximus is larger than either the gluteus medius or
gluteus minimus.
28. Which of the following muscles is NOT named after its location in the body?
A. deltoid
B. extensor carpi ulnaris
C. rectus abdominus
D. biceps femoris
Answer is A: The deltoid is named after its shape, which is likened to the
capi- tal Greek letter delta (a triangle).
29. Skeletal muscle cells have all of the following characteristics EXCEPT one.
Which one?
A. a neuromuscular junction crossed by ACh (acetyl choline)
B. invaginations of sarcolemma called “T tubules”.
C. they are branched
D. they are striated
Answer is C: Skeletal muscle cells are not branched (but cardiac muscle cells
are).
30. What is the role of Ca++ in muscle contraction?
A. Ca causes an action potential to travel along the sarcolemma
B. Ca binds to troponin changing its shape.
C. Ca attaches to the binding site of myosin, energising it.
D. Ca engages with the binding site of actin causing the power stroke
Answer is B: the myosin head cannot attach to actin until its binding site is
exposed. Ca causes this to happen.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
150 8 Muscles

31. Which of the following muscle structures is the largest?

A. sarcomere
B. fascicle
C. myofibril
D. muscle fibre
Answer is B: A muscle fascicle is a bundle of muscle fibres (cells). Choice A
& B are smaller than a cell.
32. Which of the following muscles is NOT named after its location in the body?
A. biceps brachii
B. sternocleidomastoid
C. rectus abdominus
D. flexor carpi radialis
Answer is B: The sternocleidomastoid is named after its origins (on the ster-
num and clavicle) and insertion (the mastoid process).
33. Which feature is shared by cardiac muscle cells and skeletal muscle cells?
A. striations
B. intercalated discs
C. branching
D. involuntary nature
Answer is A: Both types of muscle cells are striated. Choices B, C & D are
characteristics of cardiac muscle cells only.
34. What structures attach a muscle to a bone?
A. a tendon
B. a fasciculus
C. a sarcomere
D. an internal intercostal
Answer is A: Tendons (thin rope-like structures) attach muscle to bone.
35. What is the substance that binds to troponin in order to cause muscle
contraction?
A. PO42−
B. H3O+
C. Ca++
D. Fe++
Answer is C: Calcium ions do the job.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
8 Muscles 151

36. Which of the following muscles is NOT named after its location in the body?
A. latissimus dorsi
B. adductor longus
C. rectus femoris
D. biceps brachii
Answer is B: “Adductor” refers to the action of adduction, while longus refers
to its size. Latissimus dorsi refers to the dorsal surface of the body.
37. Which of the following muscle structures is the smallest?
A. sarcomere
B. fasciculus
C. myofibril
D. muscle fibre
Answer is A: A sarcomere is a section of a myofibril. A muscle fibre (cell) is
a bundle of myofibrils, while a fasciculus is a bundle of muscle fibres.
38. A feature of skeletal muscle that is NOT shared with cardiac or smooth
muscle is:
A. striations
B. branched cells
C. intercalated discs
D. many nuclei
Answer is D: A skeletal muscle cell is a “syncytium” being derived from
many cells, so retains their many nuclei.
39. Which muscles extend the leg?
A. quadriceps
B. hamstrings
C. gluteus muscles
D. soleus, gastrocnemius & tibialis anterior
Answer is A: Anatomically “leg” refers the limb between the knee and ankle.
Extension of the leg is achieved by contacting the quadriceps (on the front of
the thigh).
40. What is the role of acetylcholine in muscle cell contraction?
A. it is a neurotransmitter
B. it binds to troponin causing it to change shape
C. it supplies the energy for contraction
D. it engages with the binding site on actin
Answer is A: ACh crosses the synaptic cleft to transmit a neural impulse to
the muscle sarcolemma.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
152 8 Muscles

41. What is a sarcomere?

A. it is the plasma membrane of a muscle cell
B. it is the cytoplasm of a muscle cell
C. it is a section of myofibril
D. it is a bundle of thick and thin myofilaments
Answer is C: While there are thick and thin myofibrils within a sarcomere,
choice C is the better answer.
42. Which of the following muscles IS named after its location in the body?
A. sartorius
B. triceps brachii
C. soleus
D. trapezius
Answer is B: “Brachii” refers to the location on the arm (brachus).
43. Which of the following is the smallest unit in a muscle?
A. muscle fibre
B. myosin
C. fasciculus
D. myofibril
Answer is B: Myosin is a molecule, many of which combine to make a thick
myofibril.
44. Skeletal muscle cells can be characterised as:
A. unstriated, involuntary, multinucleate
B. unstriated, voluntary, multinucleate
C. striated, voluntary, uninucleate
D. striated, voluntary, multinucleate
Answer is D: Being multinucleate (& voluntary) distinguishes skeletal muscle
cells from smooth, being voluntary distinguishes skeletal muscle from cardiac
muscle cells.
45. The muscles involved in mastication include which of the following?
A. sternocleidomastoid, scalene
B. sartorius, gracilis, soleus
C. temporalis, masseter, buccinator
D. orbicularis oculi, mentalis
Answer is C: The muscles in choice A move the neck and head, those in
choice B are in the thigh and leg, while the orbicularis oculi is a facial muscle
that encircles the eye.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
8 Muscles 153

46. What action does the flexor carpi ulnaris perform?

A. it flexes the lower arm
B. the same as the extensor carpi ulnaris.
C. it flexes the fingers
D. the same as the flexor carpi radialis
Answer is D: The flexor carpi ulnaris and the flexor carpi radialis perform the
same action – flexing the wrist – the former lies superficial to the ulna bone,
while the latter is adjacent and superficial to the radius bone.
47. Which one of the following is not made of skeletal muscle?
A. the diaphragm
B. pyloric sphincter
C. vastus lateralis
D. the tongue
Answer is B: We are able to exercise conscious control over the other three
muscles so they are skeletal muscle.
48. Which of the following muscles is named using the criterion of its size?
A. sternocleidomastoid
B. gluteus medius
C. flexor digitorum profundus
D. trapezius
Answer is B: “Medius” implies intermediate, in this case between the gluteus
maximus and the gluteus minimus.
49. What is the cytoplasm of a skeletal muscle cell called?
A. sarcolemma
B. sarcomere
C. sarcoplasm
D. fasciculus
Answer is C: The prefix “sarco” is commonly used to describe microscopic
muscle cell structures.
50. What does the term “origin” refer to in the musculoskeletal system?
A. The point of attachment of a muscle to the “moveable” bone.
B. The line that separates the shaft from the end of a long bone.
C. The point of attachment of a muscle to the “stationary” bone.
D. The end of a long bone.
Answer is C: Muscles are said to “originate” on the bone that does not move
when that muscle contracts, and to insert on the bone that does flex or extend
when the muscle contracts.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
154 8 Muscles

51. Which of the following muscles causes the wrist to bend?

A. extensor digitorum
B. extensor carpi ulnaris
C. flexor digitorum profundus
D. abductor pollicis longus
Answer is B: The term “carpi” refers to the carpal bone (the 8 bones of the
wrist), so this muscle extends the wrist.
52. Which of the following muscles increases the angle between the bones of the
fingers and hand?
A. extensor digitorum
B. extensor carpi ulnaris
C. flexor digitorum profundus
D. abductor pollicis longus
Answer is A: “Extensor” refers to the action of extension (increasing the
angle between the hand and fingers), while “digitorum” refers to the digits
(fingers).
53. What is the protein of thick myofilaments in a skeletal muscle cell?
A. tropomyosin
B. myosin
C. actin
D. acetylcholine
Answer is B: Choices A & C are both proteins of thin myofilaments. ACh is a
neurotransmitter.
54. What are the muscles known as triceps brachii, biceps femoris and quadriceps
femoris named according to? Their:
A. relative size and location of muscle’s origin
B. number of origins and location in the body
C. shape of muscle and direction of muscle fibres
D. number of insertions and location in the body
Answer is B: bi-, tri- and quad- refer to the number of origins, while the
second word refers to location (arm or femur)
55. A skeletal muscle fibre (cell) consists of many sections (units) which contract.
What is the name given to one of the units that contract?
A. sarcomere
B. sarcolemma
C. sarcoplasm
D. fasciculus
Answer is A: A muscle fibre consists of many sections (sarcomeres)
connected end to end that shorten (contract) as the thick and thin filaments
slide past each other.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
8 Muscles 155

56. The neurotransmitter that causes an action potential to occur in a muscle cell
membrane is called:
A. inorganic phosphate (HPO42−)
B. adenosine diphosphate (ADP)
C. calcium (Ca++)
D. acetylcholine (ACh)
Answer is D: Acetylcholine is the neurotransmitter. All somatic motor
neurons release ACh at their synapses with skeletal muscle fibres.
57. Which of these events is necessary for the contraction of a muscle cell?
A. the shortening of myofilaments.
B. the conversion of ADP & HPO42− to ATP in the cross-bridge.
C. Ca2+ binding to troponin causing it to change shape.
D. the movement of ACh from the sarcolemma to the axon terminal.
Answer is C: the binding of calcium is essential. (choice A is wrong as
myofila- ments don’t shorten – they slide past each other. Choices B & D are
the reverse of what actually happens).
58. Which statement about thick or thin myofilaments is CORRECT?
A. Thick myofilaments contain the three proteins myosin, tropomyosin and
troponin.
B. Thin myofilaments contain the three proteins actin, tropomyosin and
troponin.
C. Thick myofilaments contain about 300 myosin molecules each of which
has a binding site for a cross bridge.
D. Thin myofilaments contain about 300 myosin molecules each of which has
a cross bridge.
Answer is B: Thin myofilaments contain these three proteins. Choices C & D
are wrong as myosin has a cross-bridge rather than a binding site.
59. What is the role of calcium ions in muscle contraction? To
A. bind to troponin, thus changing its shape and pulling it away from the
actin molecule.
B. cause the myosin cross-bridge to detach from its binding site.
C. cause the action potential to propagate along the sarcolemma.
D. bind with ADP during aerobic respiration to produce ATP to provide energy.
Answer is A: Calcium binds to troponin. All other choices are wrong
statements.
60. The space between the ribs is filled with:
A. intercostal muscle
B. costal cartilage

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
156 8 Muscles

C. intercostal space
D. pleura
Answer is A: “costa” means rib. Intercostal means between the ribs.
61. Which of the following describes skeletal muscle?
A. striated, voluntary, multinucleate, individually named.
B. striated, branched, uninucleate, involuntary.
C. not striated, uninucleate, voluntary, individually named.
D. not striated, multinucleate, involuntary, with intercalated discs.
Answer is A: Skeletal muscle is striated and is not branched (cardiac muscle
cells are branched).
62. Which list is in the correct order of DECREASING size?
A. muscle fibre, sarcomere, myofilament, myofibril.
B. muscle, fasciculus, muscle fibre, myofibril.
C. sarcomere, fasciculus, myofibril, myofilament.
D. muscle, muscle fibre, myosin, myofibril.
Answer is BA myofibril consists of sarcomeres joined end to end; A myofibril
contains many myofilaments; A myofibril is larger than a molecule of myosin.
63. What are the muscles known as gluteus maximus, gluteus medius and gluteus
minimus named according to? Their:
A. size.
B. shape.
C. whimsy.
D. direction of their muscle fibres.
Answer is A: maximus > medius > minimus
64. Which of these events is necessary for the contraction of a muscle cell?
A. the shortening of myosin molecules.
B. the hydrolysis of ATP to ADP & HPO42− in the myosin cross-bridge.
C. Ca2+ binding to tropomyosin causing it to change shape.
D. the movement of Ca2+ from the sarcoplasm into the sarcoplasmic
reticulum.
Answer is B: The hydrolysis of ATP energises the cross-bridge. (myosin mol-
ecules do not get shorter; calcium binds to troponin, not tropomyosin; calcium
returns to the SR after contraction).
65. Select the one INCORRECT statement about skeletal muscles
A. An “agonist” opposes or reverses a particular movement
B. A muscle’s attachment point to a stationary bone is called its “origin”.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
8 Muscles 157

C. A skeletal muscle cell is a “syncytium”.

D. Muscles that immobilise a bone are called “fixators”.
Answer is A: An antagonist opposes a movement. All other statements are
correct.
66. Which of the following groupings of muscle type and their characteristics is
INCORRECT?
A. skeletal, striated, voluntary
B. smooth, visceral, involuntary
C. cardiac, striated, voluntary
D. skeletal, striated, syncytium
Answer is C: cardiac muscle is not voluntary.
67. Microscopically, muscle fibres contain parallel myofibrils. What are the units
joined end to end within a myofibril called? A:
A. myofilament
B. motor unit
C. myosin
D. sarcomere
Answer is D: sarcomeres joined end to end, like train carriages, form a
myofibril.
68. The part of a skeletal muscle cell that is able to contract is called
A. sarcoplasm
B. sarcolemma
C. sarcomere
D. sarcoplasmic reticulum
Answer is C: sarcomeres contain myofilaments that slide past each other as
the sarcomere contracts.
69. What is the role of Ca++ in the contraction of a muscle cell?
A. Ca++ binds to troponin to change its shape which reveals actin’s binding site.
B. Ca++ attaches to the binding site of actin
C. Ca++ detaches from ATP as it forms ADP
D. Ca++ causes the myosin head to detach from the binding site of actin
Answer is A: Actin’s binding site is covered until calcium causes it to be
exposed.
70. The energy for muscle contraction is derived from the mechanisms below
EXCEPT for one. Which one is NOT a method of producing ATP?
A. anaerobic glycolysis.
B. aerobic respiration.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
158 8 Muscles

C. direct phosphorylation of ADP by creatinine phosphate.

D. anaerobic digestion of lactic acid.
Answer is D: ATP is not produced from lactic acid – lactic acid is produced
from pyruvic acid after glucose is anaerobically lysed into ATP and pyruvic
acid.
71. With respect to the flexion of the forearm, which of the following statements
is correct?
A. the origin of the biceps brachii is on the radius and its insertion is on the
scapula
B. the origin of the biceps brachii is on the ulna and its insertion is on the
scapula
C. the agonist muscle is the biceps brachii and the antagonist is the triceps
brachii
D. the agonist muscle is the biceps brachii and the antagonist is the brachialis
Answer is C: Antagonist for flexion is the triceps brachii. (the origin, not the
insertion of the biceps brachii is on the scapula).
72. Patients confined to bed and those with plaster casts immobilising a bone frac-
ture suffer muscle wasting. What is the term used for this condition?
A. Disuse atrophy
B. Denervation atrophy
C. Muscle dystrophy
D. Muscle hypertrophy
Answer is A: Immobilising a bone will mean the attached muscles are not
used. Their nerve supply is intact, albeit nervous stimulation is reduced.
73. What is the source of the ATP used by muscles for vigorous activity that may
last for 10 to 15 seconds?
A. glycolysis of glucose in the cell cytoplasm forms ATP.
B. the ATP that is stored in muscle cells as ATP.
C. aerobic respiration in the mitochondria produces the ATP
D. creatinine phosphate in muscle and ADP react to form the required ATP.
Answer is D: Creatinine phosphate is used to “recharge” the ADP that forms
from ATP when the cross-bridge is energised.
74. Which muscle and bone listed below do NOT work together in combination?
A. humerus and biceps femoris
B. quadriceps and tibia
C. femur and gluteal muscles
D. radius and biceps brachii
Answer is A: The biceps femoris lies adjacent to the femur, not the humerus.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
8 Muscles 159

75. Which of the following muscles is named after its origin and insertion points?
A. tibialis anterior
B. extensor digitorum longus
C. rectus femoris
D. sternocleidomastoid
Answer is D: The sternocleidomastoid has its origin on the sternum and clavi-
cle, while it’s insertion is on the mastoid process of the temporal bone.
76. Which of the following is NOT a common intramuscular injection site?
A. gluteus medius
B. deltoid
C. gluteus maximus
D. vastus lateralis
Answer is C: The gluteus maximus is avoided so that the sciatic nerve is not
pierced by the needle.
77. What structure attaches a muscle to a bone?
A. a meniscus
B. a ligament
C. a cartilage
D. a tendon
Answer is D: A tendon is part of a muscle. Ligaments attach bones to each
other, while cartilage covers the articulating surfaces of bone.
78. What binds to troponin causing it to expose the binding site on actin to enable
muscle cell contraction?
A. Ca++ (calcium)
B. ACh (acetylcholine)
C. PO42− (phosphate)
D. ADP (adenosine diphosphate)
Answer is A: Troponin has a binding site for calcium.
79. The muscle known as the “transversus abdominus” is named according to
A. its size and number of origins
B. the direction of its muscle fibres and its action
C. its action and its location in the body
D. location in the body and direction of muscle fibres
Answer is D: Its location = abdominus, its muscle fibre direction =
transversus.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
160 8 Muscles

80. When a muscle contracts, exactly what structure gets shorter?

A. the fascicles of a muscle
B. the myosin molecules of a myofilament
C. the actin molecules of a myofilament
D. the sarcomeres of a myofibril
Answer is D: The length of the sarcomeres decreases.
81. What is the neurotransmitter that crosses the neuromuscular junction?
A. Acetylcholine (ACh)
B. Adrenalin (epinephrine)
C. Noradrenalin (norepinephrine)
D. Ca++
Answer is A: All somatic motor neurons release ACh at their synapses with
skeletal muscle fibres, that is, at the neuromuscular junction.
82. What does aerobic respiration refer to?
A. glycolysis in the cytoplasm in the absence of oxygen.
B. oxidative phosphorylation in the mitochondria in the presence of oxygen.
C. glycolysis in the liver in the presence of oxygen
D. gluconeogenesis in the liver in the absence of oxygen
Answer is B: Respiration occurs in the mitochondria of a cell. The term
aerobic refers to the presence of oxygen.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
Chapter 9
Gastro-Intestinal System

The contents of the gut are outside the body and are dangerous to the body. They
include acid, protein digesting enzymes and bacteria. We are protected from the
gut contents by its mucosal lining and the cells (macrophages, dendritic cells, B-
lymphocytes, and T-lymphocytes) in the lymphoid tissue known as Peyer’s
patches. The gut also contains ingested food molecules of protein, carbohydrate
and triglyceride. Digestion (hydrolysis) is the disassembling of large food
molecules and is necessary to reduce the very large polymer molecules in food to
particles small enough to pass into the cells lining the gut. The products of
hydrolysis of proteins are amino acids and di- and tripeptides. Carbohydrates are
hydrolysed into monosaccharides (glucose, fructose, galactose), while
triglycerides are hydrolysed into free fatty acids and monoglycerides. Nucleic
acids (DNA & RNA) are hydro- lysed by pancreatic nucleases into nucleotides
and then hydrolysed by brush border enzymes (nucleosidases & phosphatases)
into their free bases, pentose sugars and phosphate ions.
Ingested food passes through the oesophagus, stomach, small diameter intestine
(duodenum, jejunum, ileum), large diameter intestine (caecum, ascending colon,
transverse colon, descending colon, sigmoid colon rectum), before the residue is
eliminated. The movement is produced by peristalsis and is unidirectional, being
controlled by deglutition, the gastro-oesophageal and pyloric sphincters, the ilio-
caecal valve and the anal sphincters.
Hydrolysis is achieved by enzymes in saliva and from glands in the stomach
and duodenal mucosae and from the pancreas. The products of carbohydrate and
protein digestion are absorbed by active transport (for glucose and amino acids),
enter the blood capillaries and are transported to the liver by the hepatic portal
vein. The products of triglyceride digestion diffuse through the plasma membranes
of the cells lining the small intestine where they are reconstituted into
triglycerides. They then combine with phospholipids and cholesterol, are coated
with protein to form water-soluble chylomicrons. Chylomicrons enter the
lymphatic vessels (via lacte- als) and eventually the blood stream via the thoracic
duct.

© Springer Science+Business Media Singapore 2016 161

M. Caon, Examination Questions and Answers in Basic Anatomy and
Physiology, DOI 10.1007/978-981-10-2332-3_9
ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
162 9 Gastro-Intestinal System

1. Which of the following statements is WRONG? The end products of:

A. protein digestion are transported to the liver via the hepatic portal vein
B. triglyceride digestion are transported to the liver via the lymphatic
system
C. carbohydrate digestion are transported to the liver in the blood
D. triglyceride digestion are transported via the lymphatic system
Answer is B: The products of fat digestion are transported by the lymphatic
system but do not pass through the liver.
2. One of the following processes is NOT part of mechanical digestion. Which
One?
A. hydrolysis
B. peristalsis
C. segmentation
D. mastication
Answer is A: Hydrolysis is a chemical process that coverts large food mole-
cules into smaller ones (i.e. performs digestion)
3. Which type of cell produces hydrochloric acid?
A. Zymogenic cells
B. Parietal cells
C. Chief cells
D. Enteroendocrine cells
Answer is B: The parietal cells of gastric glands produce hydrochloric acid.
(Zymogenic cells are the same as Chief cells, they produce pepsinogen).
4. Which of the following glands are accessory organs of the digestive system?
A. adrenal glands
B. pancreatic islets
C. gastric glands
D. salivary glands
Answer is D: Salivary glands produce a secretion (saliva) hat empties into
the digestive tract via a tube. (Pancreatic islets are in the pancreas, but are
them- selves not a gland)
5. What is the role of gastrin in the digestive system?
A. to stimulate release of bile and pancreatic juice
B. to stimulate gastric secretion
C. to activate pepsinogen
D. to hydrolyse proteins to polypeptides

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
9 Gastro-Intestinal System 163

Answer is B: Gastrin is a hormone that stimulates gastric secretion (from the

stomach wall).
6. Which liver cells produce bile?
A. Kupffer cells
B. sinusoids
C. hepatocytes
D. the acini
Answer is C: Hepatocytes are liver cells. Kupffer cells are macrophages,
while sinusoids are blood capillaries.
7. What are the end products of carbohydrate digestion?
A. chylomicrons
B. amino acids
C. free fatty acids
D. monosaccharides
Answer is D: Monosaccharides or “simple” sugars.
8. What feature of the small intestine enhances its ability to absorb digested
food?
A. its large surface area
B. the gaps between adjacent epithelial cells
C. secretion of the hormone absorptin
D. its longer length compared to the large intestine
Answer is A: The large surface area allows the products of digestion ample
opportunity to make contact with the absorbing surface.
9. Which of the following gut structures are listed in the correct order that food
would pass through them, from input to exit?
A. pyloric sphincter, ileum, jejunum, transverse colon.
B. pancreas, jejunum, ascending colon, sigmoid colon.
C. ileum, duodenum, descending colon, ascending colon.
D. duodenum, ileum, caecum, transverse colon.
Answer is D: Jejunum is before the ileum; food does not pass through the
pancreas; duodenum is before the ileum.
10. Which statement about the layers of the alimentary canal is correct?
A. The serosa absorbs the products of digestion.
B. The mucosa protects against self-digestion.
C. The sub-mucosa is involved in segmentation and peristalsis
D. The muscularis externa is dense connective tissue.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
164 9 Gastro-Intestinal System

Answer is B: The mucosa (not serosa) absorbs the products of digestion; the
muscularis externa causes segmentation & peristalsis; the sub-mucosa (not
muscularis) is dense connective tissue.
11. Which of the following pairs of substances are NOT secreted by the stomach
as part of “gastric juice”?
A. hydrochloric acid and pepsinogen
B. hormones and intrinsic factor
C. nuclease and amylase
D. mucus and gastrin
Answer is C: Nuclease and amylase are enzymes secreted by the pancreas
12. What are some products of lipid digestion?
A. free bases and pentose sugars
B. fructose and glucose
C. amino acids and small peptides
D. free fatty acids and monoglycerols
Answer is D: Lipids are digested into free fatty acids and monoglycerols.
13. From which of the gut structures below is most digested food absorbed?
A. duodenum
B. stomach
C. ileum
D. ascending colon
Answer is C: The ileum is part of the small intestine distal to the duodenum
which has a structure suited to absorption.
14. Which of the following is an active enzyme?
A. procarboxypeptidase
B. pepsin
C. telophase
D. trypsinogen
Answer is B: The prefix “pro-” and suffix “-ogen” refer to inactive enzymes.
Telophase is a stage of cell division (not an enzyme).
15. Which of the following is a function of the liver?
A. Recycling of non-viable red blood cells
B. Conversion of pyruvic acid to lactic acid
C. Synthesis of plasma proteins
D. Production of renin
Answer is C: The liver produces many proteins. (spleen recycles rbc; liver
converts lactic acid back into pyruvic acid; kidney produces renin)

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
9 Gastro-Intestinal System 165

16. What is the term applied to the production of glucose from non-carbohydrate
molecules?
A. deamination
B. transamination
C. glycogenolysis
D. gluconeogenesis
Answer is D: gluco refers to glucose; neo = new; genesis = producing.
(glyco- genolysis is the production of glucose form glycogen – by lysis)
17. Which of the following terms is used to describe the changing of large food
molecules into smaller molecules?
A. mechanical digestion
B. deglutition
C. segmentation
D. hydrolysis
Answer is D: Hydrolysis refers to the splitting (lysis) of large molecules into
smaller ones using water (hydro).
18. What is the purpose of “intrinsic factor” in gastric juice?
A. to activate pepsinogen
B. to assist with the absorption of vitamin B12
C. to protect the stomach lining against hydrochloric acid
D. it stimulates the release of gastrin
Answer is B: vitamin B12 is a large molecule which cannot be absorbed
with- out forming a complex with intrinsic factor.
19. Which of the following does NOT contribute to increasing the surface area
of the small intestine?
A. the brush border
B. plicae circulars
C. intestinal crypts
D. villi
Answer is C: the crypts produce the secretion known as intestinal juice.
20. What are the end-products of carbohydrate digestion?
A. monosaccharides
B. disaccharides
C. glucose
D. trisaccharides
Answer is A: glucose is one example of a monosaccharide, but there are
others.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
166 9 Gastro-Intestinal System

21. Name the major cell type in a liver lobule.

A. Kupffer cells
B. hepatocytes
C. sinusoids
D. epithelial cells
Answer is B: Hepato- = liver. Kupffer cells also occur in the liver, but are
macrophages.
22. To what does the term “gluconeogenesis” refer?
A. the conversion of glycogen to glucose.
B. the removal of an amine group from an amino acid.
C. the production of glucose from non-carbohydrate molecules.
D. the conversion of disaccharides to monosaccharides.
Answer is C: “-neogenesis” refers to making glucose from something new
(that is not a carbohydrate).
23. Which of the following is TRUE of bile?
A. it converts inactive pancreatic enzymes to active form.
B. needed in the small intestine for the digestion of fats.
C. synthesised by the gall bladder.
D. needed in the small intestine for the emulsification of fats.
Answer is D: bile emulsifies (rather than digests) fat. It is stored (but not
syn- thesised) in the gall bladder.
24. Why are the blood capillaries in the liver lobules so permeable?
A. to allow the products of digestion to leave the blood for processing in the
liver.
B. to allow fatty acids to leave the liver cells to enter the blood.
C. to allow plasma proteins that are synthesised in the liver to enter the blood.
D. to allow red blood cells at the end of their life to leave the blood to be
recycled in the liver.
Answer is C: Plasma proteins are large molecules that otherwise would not
be able to enter (or leave) blood capillaries.
25. Which layer of the gastro-intestinal tract is in contact with the contents of the
gut?
A. Muscularis externa
B. Mucosa
C. Serosa
D. Sub-mucosa
Answer is B: It secretes mucus and absorbs the products of digestion.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
9 Gastro-Intestinal System 167

26. What is the name given to the process of moving the gut contents along the
tract in the right direction?
A. Peristalsis
B. Emesis
C. Segmentation
D. Deglutition
Answer is A: Segmentation is “to and fro” movement about the one spot.
27. Which of the following substances is NOT produced by the cells of the
gastric glands?
A. mucus
B. hydrochloric acid
C. gastrin
D. pepsin
Answer is A: mucus cells are in the epithelium, not in the gastric glands, and
produce mucus.
28. Which hormone stimulates the release of bile and pancreatic juice?
A. cholecystokinin
B. secretin
C. intestinal gastrin
D. pepsin
Answer is A: Duodenum produces and releases CCK when protein and fats
enter the duodenum.
29. What molecules are the products of protein hydrolysis?
A. Monoglycerols and free fatty acids
B. Monosaccharides and disaccharides
C. Amino acids
D. Amino acids and small peptides
Answer is D: Amino acids and small peptides (consisting of 2 or 3 amino
acids) are hydrolysis products of proteins.
30. What happens to the products of lipid digestion in the gut?
A. They are actively transported into the epithelial cells lining the gut.
B. They diffuse into epithelial cells and are reconstituted into triglycerides.
C. They are transported to the liver by the hepatic portal vein.
D. They diffuse through the plasma membrane of epithelial cells, then
diffuse into blood capillaries
Answer is B: Fats, being lipid soluble, diffuse into epithelial cells to be
recon- stituted into triglycerides.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
168 9 Gastro-Intestinal System

31. One of these processes is NOT part of carbohydrate metabolism in the liver.
Which one?
A. Production of ATP from glucose
B. Production of glucose from glycogen
C. Production of glucose from amino acids
D. Production of glycogen from glucose
Answer is A: ATP production occurs in the mitochondria of cells and is
called cellular respiration (rather than carbohydrate metabolism).
32. The liver contains “leaky capillaries” known as sinusoids. This enables what
liver product to enter the blood stream?
A. Angiotensinogen
B. Kupffer cells
C. Plasma proteins
D. Cholesterol
Answer is C: Plasma proteins are large molecules that otherwise would not
be able to enter (or leave) blood capillaries.
33. What is the function of bile salts?
A. To assist the absorption of digested lipids
B. To emulsify lipids
C. To hydrolyse lipids
D. To digest lipids
Answer is B: Emulsification produces small droplets of fat which increases
the surface area of fat that is available to lipases which may then hydrolyse
the fat.
34. Digestion of food molecules is necessary so that:
A. Indigestible food molecules are separated from digestible food molecules
B. Essential amino acids and fatty acids may be absorbed by the body
C. Excretion of waste products can occur via the bowel
D. Food may be converted into particles small enough to pass into the cells
of the gut wall
Answer is D: The production of molecules that are small enough to be
absorbed into epithelial cells is the purpose of digestion.
35. Where is the gastro-oesophageal sphincter?
A. between the stomach and the duodenum
B. between the stomach and the caecum
C. at the entrance to the stomach
D. before the external anal sphincter

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
9 Gastro-Intestinal System 169

Answer is C: It is where the oesophagus enters the stomach. It prevents the

stomach contents refluxing into the oesophagus.
36. What are the end products resulting from the digestion of carbohydrates?
A. monosaccharides
B. monoglycerols
C. pentose sugars
D. amino acids
Answer is A: Digestion results in carbohydrates (which are polysaccharides)
being converted to monosaccharides (which are small molecules).
37. Which sections of the gut perform the majority of the digestion of food and
absorption of the digested products?
A. stomach and duodenum
B. jejunum and ileum
C. ascending colon and transverse colon
D. duodenum and jejunum
Answer is D: While a small amount of digestion and absorption occurs in the
stomach, most occurs in the duodenum (which receives pancreatic enzymes
and bile) and the jejunum (which is adapted for absorption).
38. Which enzyme below digests proteins?
A. nuclease
B. maltase
C. carboxypeptidase
D. transaminase
Answer is C: The syllable “-peptid-” refers to proteins (which are
polypeptides).
39. To what does the term “gluconeogenesis” refer?
A. the conversion of non-carbohydrate molecules to glucose
B. the formation of non-essential amino acids from a keto-acid
C. the removal of an amine group from a molecule
D. the release of glucose from stored glycogen
Answer is A: “-neogenesis” refers to making something (glucose) from new
(a molecule that is not a carbohydrate).
40. A lobule of the liver contains several blood vessels. Which one carries
nutrient- rich blood from the small intestine?
A. hepatic artery proper
B. hepatic portal vein
C. central vein
D. bile ductule

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
170 9 Gastro-Intestinal System

Answer is B: “portal” refers to a vein that transports blood from one

capillary bed to another (rather than returning it to the heart).
41. Which of the following could NOT be used to describe pepsinogen?
A. it is a protein
B. it is a hormone
C. it is related to an enzyme
D. it is inactive
Answer is B: Pepsinogen is an inactive protein enzyme. But it is not a
hormone.
42. What is the function of the oesophagus in digestion?
A. It is a site of mechanical digestion.
B. It transfers food from the mouth to the stomach.
C. The oesophagus secretes amylase to begin carbohydrate digestion.
D. the oesophagus secretes hydrochloric acid.
Answer is B: It is merely a conduit to transfer food from the mouth to the
stomach while bypassing the thoracic structures.
43. What is the purpose of the mucosal barrier between the cells of the stomach
wall and the stomach contents?
A. It prevents the enzymes in the stomach contents from digesting the
stomach
B. It converts pepsinogen to its active form.
C. It prevents bacteria in the stomach from invading the stomach wall.
D. It prevents undigested food molecules from being absorbed by the stom-
ach lining.
Answer is A: The stomach contents include the enzyme pepsin and hydro-
chloric acid, both of which would damage the epithelial cells of the stomach
if in contact with them.
44. Which parts of the alimentary canal prepare food for chemical digestion?
A. the mouth, oesophagus and stomach.
B. the mouth, stomach and small intestine.
C. the mouth, stomach and duodenum.
D. the teeth, stomach and pancreas.
Answer is C: The mouth (mastication and mixing with saliva); the stomach
(churning); the duodenum (segmentation). Choice C is better than choice B
as digestion has occurred before food reaches the distal parts of the SI.
45. What food is digested by lipase?
A. nucleic acids
B. carbohydrates

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
9 Gastro-Intestinal System 171

C. polypeptides
D. triglycerides
Answer is D: Lipase digests lipids. Our dietary lipids are triglycerides.
46. What food is digested into monoglycerols?
A. protein
B. lipid
C. nucleic acid
D. starch
Answer is B: Dietary lipids are triglycerols which are digested into free fatty
acids and monoglycerols.
47. What is the function of bile?
A. bile hydrolyses polypeptides.
B. bile emulsifies fats and oils.
C. bile activates procarboxypeptidase.
D. bile stimulates the pancreas to secrete pancreatic juice.
Answer is B: emulsification of fats is the function of bile salts.
48. The liver is able to deaminate amino acids forming ammonia in the process.
What happens to the ammonia?
A. It is phagocytosed by Kupffer cells.
B. It is used in transamination to form non-essential amino acids.
C. It is converted to bile to be excreted via the gut.
D. It is converted to urea for excretion by the kidneys.
Answer is D: Urea is the molecule and vehicle for excretion of human
nitrog- enous waste.
49. What happens to the products of digestion of lipids? They are absorbed into a:
A. capillary and transported by the blood to the liver.
B. capillary and transported by the blood to the heart.
C. lacteal and transported by the lymph to the heart.
D. lacteal and transported by the lymph to the liver.
Answer is C: Digested fats absorbed from the gut are transported in lymph.
They re-enter the blood stream via the thoracic duct then travel to the heart.
50. If blood glucose is high, what does the liver do about it?
A. The liver converts glucose to glycogen or triglycerides.
B. The liver performs glycogenolysis.
C. The liver performs gluconeogenesis.
D. The liver transaminates glucose to produce amino acids.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
172 9 Gastro-Intestinal System

Answer is A: This process removes glucose from circulation. Choices B & C

would increase blood glucose. Transamination is done to amino acids to pro-
duce different amino acids.
51. Which is an enzyme secreted by the gastric glands?
A. pepsin
B. gastrin
C. Cholecystokinin
D. intrinsic factor
Answer is A. Pepsin (strictly pepsinogen) is the only enzyme on the list.
52. What are the products of protein digestion?
A. monoglycerols and fatty acids
B. dipeptides, tripeptides and amino acids
C. bases, pentose sugars and nitrate ions
D. monosaccharides and disaccharides
Answer is B: Peptides and amino acids are produced by the hydrolysis of
protein.
53. Which three sections does the small intestine consists of?
A. ileum duodenum, caecum
B. antrum, jejunum, duodenum
C. rectum, ileum, duodenum
D. ileum, duodenum, jejunum
Answer is D: Caecum is part of the LI; antrum is part of the stomach; rectum
is the last part of the colon.
54. What name is given to the movement of food material through the
gastrointes- tinal tract?
A. peristalsis
B. segmentation
C. deglutition
D. bowel movement
Answer is A: While segmentation is also movement, it is a to and fro move-
ment rather than unidirectional, so peristalsis is the best answer
55. Correctly complete the sentence: Pepsinogen is
A. converted to pepsin by hydrochloric acid
B. converted to pepsin by intrinsic factor
C. secreted by the pancreas
D. involved in production of carbohydrate digesting enzymes

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
9 Gastro-Intestinal System 173

Answer is A: Pepsinogen “gen”erates pepsin in the presence of hydrochloric

acid.
56. Emulsification is the name of the process carried out by:
A. lipase
B. bile
C. micelles
D. lacteals
Answer is B: Bile contains “surfactants” which congregate on the interface
between lipid and water and so prevent small droplets of fat from
aggregating into larger ones (=emulsification).
57. The pH of the stomach and the pH of the small intestine are BEST described
(respectively) as:
A. acidic and alkaline/basic
B. strongly acidic and weakly alkaline/basic
C. acidic and weakly alkaline/basic
D. strongly acidic and strongly alkaline/basic
Answer is B: The pH of the stomach contents is about 2 (strongly acidic),
while the pH of small intestine is about 8 (weakly alkaline). Thus B is the
best answer.
58. What feature do procarboxypeptidase, pepsinogen, fibrinogen, chymotryp-
sinogen have in common?
A. they are all enzymes.
B. they are all produced by the pancreas.
C. they are all inactive.
D. they all digest proteins.
Answer is C: The prefix and suffix “pro-” and “-ogen” refer to these mole-
cules needing modification to become enzymes. In their present form they
are inactive.
59. Which layer of the alimentary canal is responsible for absorbing the products
of digestion?
A. muscularis interna
B. mucosa
C. serosa
D. submucosa
Answer is B: The mucosal layer is in closest proximity to the contents of the
canal and digested material must pass through it.
60. Protein is digested to polypeptides by which of the following?
A. pepsinogen
B. intrinsic factor

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
174 9 Gastro-Intestinal System

C. hydrochloric acid
D. pepsin
Answer is D: Pepsinogen is inactive (otherwise it would digest the proteins
with the zymogenic/chief cells) until converted to pepsin by HCl.
61. What are the products of carbohydrate digestion?
A. monosaccharides
B. amino acids
C. monoglycerides
D. monogylcerols
Answer is A: Carbohydrates are digested into simple sugars known as mono-
saccharides (e.g. glucose, fructose, ribose)
62. What does bile do?
A. Bile stimulates the release of lipase
B. Bile emulsifies fat
C. Bile digests fat
D. Bile hydrolyses fat
Answer is B: Emulsification of fat is the role played by bile.
63. What is the function of the hepatic portal vein?
A. to return blood from the liver to the heart
B. to transport blood rich in amino acids, monosaccharides and free fatty
acids to the liver
C. to transport the products of protein and carbohydrate digestion from gut
to the liver
D. to allow the nutrients absorbed from the gut to bypass the liver.
Answer is C: The digestion products of protein and carbohydrate (but not of
triglycerides) are trans- port- ed to the liver by the portal vein.
64. Which of the following are the end products of protein hydrolysis?
A. monoglycerols
B. keto acids and non-essential amino acids
C. polypeptides
D. amino acids and di- and tripeptides
Answer is D: Amino acids are the smallest molecules resulting from protein
hydrolysis. Some two amino acid units (dipeptides) and three amino acid
units (tripeptides) can also be absorbed from the gut.
65. One of the following is NOT a function of the liver. Which one?
A. recycling of red blood cells
B. storage of fat soluble vitamins

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
9 Gastro-Intestinal System 175

C. removal and recycling of lactic acid

D. activation of vitamin D
Answer is A: Red blood cells are recycled in the spleen.
66. Which of the following is NOT a part of the gastrointestinal tract?
A. ileum
B. pancreas
C. rectum
D. caecum
Answer is B: Pancreas is an accessory gland outside of the GI tract, but
deliv- ering its secretion via a duct.
67. What converts pepsinogen to pepsin in the stomach?
A. hydrochloric acid
B. gastrin
C. intrinsic factor
D. pepsinase
Answer is A: HCl cleaves off 44 amino acids from pepsinogen to form
pepsin.
68. What the products of hydrolysis of lipids?
A. monosaccharides
B. chylomicrons
C. amino acids and small peptides
D. free fatty acids and monoglycerols
Answer is D: A triglyceride is hydrolysed into two free fatty acids plus a
monoglycerol. Chylomicrons are the structure within which, fats are trans-
ported in the lymph and blood.
69. Why are sinusoids the type of capillaries found within a liver lobule?
A. to allow for mixing of blood from the hepatic artery and the hepatic
portal vein.
B. so that liver synthesised plasma proteins may enter the blood
C. to allow worn out red blood cells to leave the blood stream.
D. in order for the products of digestion to be removed from the blood.
Answer is B: The epithelial cells that make up sinusoids have gaps between
them large enough for plasma proteins to fit through and to enter the blood.
70. Which of the following presents the structures through which chyme travels
in the correct sequence?
A. oesophagus, ileum, duodenum, ileo-cecal valve, transverse colon, rectum
B. stomach, duodenum, ileum, transverse colon, ileo-cecal valve, rectum

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
176 9 Gastro-Intestinal System

C. stomach, duodenum, transverse colon, ileum, rectum, ileo-cecal valve,

D. ileo-cecal valve, stomach, duodenum, transverse colon, ileum, rectum
Answer is B: Food is not referred to as “chyme” until after it is in the
stomach (excludes A). rectum s the last structure (excludes B). Stomach
should be before ileo-cecal valve (excludes D).
71. What is the function of bile salts?
A. to digest dietary fats through hydrolysis
B. to excrete the products haeme breakdown
C. to emulsify ingested fats and oils
D. to activate trypsinogen and chymotrypsinogen
Answer is C: Emulsification is the function of bile salts (not hydrolysis).
Some materials are excreted via the gut by incorporating the waste into bile,
but not as bile salts.
72. Which of the functions below is NOT performed by the liver?
A. production of glucagon
B. synthesis of lipoproteins to transport fatty acids
C. deamination of amino acids to form keto-acids
D. conversion of non-carbohydrate molecules to glucose
Answer is A: Glucagon is a hormone that is produced by the pancreas.
73. What is the function of gastrin?
A. to facilitate the absorption of vitamin B12 from the gut
B. to inhibit gastric secretion
C. to stimulate gastric secretion
D. to stimulate pancreatic secretion
Answer is C: Gastrin is a hormone that stimulate the cells lining the stomach
gastric pits to secrete.
74. Which list of sections of the intestine has them in correct order from nearest
to furthest from the mouth?
A. duodenum caecum, jejunum, ileum
B. caecum, sigmoid colon, transverse colon, rectum
C. duodenum, ileum, rectum, jejunum,
D. jejunum, ileum, caecum, ascending colon
Answer is D: Caecum is after the ileum; sigmoid colon is after the transverse
colon; jejunum is before the ileum
75. Forward movement of food material through the gastrointestinal tract is
achieved by which process?

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
9 Gastro-Intestinal System 177

A. peristalsis
B. emesis
C. deglutition
D. hydrolysis
Answer is A: Peristalsis is the name given to the smooth muscle movements
that propel the gut contents.
76. What are the cells in the pancreas that secrete “pancreatic juice” called?
A. hepatocytes
B. Peyer’s patches
C. the acini
D. islets of Langerhans
Answer is C: Hepatocytes are in the liver; Peyer’s patches are lymphoid
tissue in the gut wall; the islets produce insulin and glucagon.
77. The lowest pH is found in which of the listed body sites?
A. pancreas
B. stomach
C. duodenum
D. blood
Answer is B: The stomach has the lowest pH (is the most acidic), pH < 2.
78. Which of the following is a function of bile?
A. To attach to vitamin B12 to allow it to be absorbed.
B. To activate trypsinogen, chymotrypsinogen and procarboxypeptidase.
C. To digest fats.
D. To disperse large lipid globules into smaller
droplets. Answer is D: This is known as emulsification.
79. What is the process that splits carbohydrates in the gut into smaller
molecules called?
A. catalysis
B. hydrolysis
C. catabolism
D. glycogenolysis
Answer is B: Glycogenolysis also splits a carbohydrate (glycogen) into
smaller molecules (glucose), but this happens in the liver.
80. What is true about the “muscularis externa”?
A. It is muscle used for peristalsis.
B. It secretes mucus

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
178 9 Gastro-Intestinal System

C. It refers to superficial skeletal muscles

D. It is composed of connective tissue
Answer is A: Muscularis externa is a layer (a tunic) of the gut wall.
81. The surface area available for absorption in the small intestine is increased
by all of the following structures EXCEPT one. Which one?
A. villi
B. haustra
C. plicae circularis
D. microvilli
Answer is B: Haustra are pouches (or sacculations) in the large intestine that
do NOT occur in the small intestine.
82. The majority of dietary lipids are ingested in the form of
A. trisaccharides
B. tripeptides
C. cholesterol
D. triglycerides
Answer is D: Triglycerides (or triacylglycerols) are the major component of
human dietary lipids.
83. Emulsification is the process where
A. procarboxypeptidase and chymotrypsinogen become active enzymes
B. chyme is moved backwards and forwards across the surface of the small
intestine
C. fat droplets are dispersed into smaller droplets
D. dietary fat is digested by lipase
Answer is C: producing smaller droplets of fat increases the surface area
available for lipase and allows digestion to proceed faster.
84. Kupffer cells are macrophages. Where are they found?
A. In the lymphatics of the submucosa and devour bacteria that escape the gut
B. In the lumen of the large intestine and feed on our normal flora to
produce vitamin K
C. They are in the stomach wall as part of the mucosal barrier
D. They occur in liver sinusoids and engulf bacteria in blood coming from
the gut
Answer is D: They are in the liver sinusoids (capillaries).
85. One of the following statements is UNTRUE. Which one?
A. Glucose is produced during the manufacture of ATP
B. Glycogenolysis is the process of releasing glucose from glycogen

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
9 Gastro-Intestinal System 179

C. Gluconeogenesis is the conversion of amino acids to glucose

D. The monosaccharides galactose and fructose can be converted to glucose
Answer is A: In fact the reverse is true. Glucose is consumed during the pro-
duction of ATP.
86. Monosaccharides are the product of digestion of what substance?
A. proteins
B. carbohydrates
C. triglycerides
D. dipeptides
Answer is B: Carbohydrates are composed of many monosaccharide units.
87. One of the following is NOT a function of the large intestine. Which one?
A. absorption of electrolytes
B. synthesis of some vitamins
C. absorption of water
D. digestion of fats.
Answer is D: Digestion occurs and is completed in the small intestine.
88. How are the pH of the small intestine and the pH of the stomach
(respectively) best described?
A. alkaline (basic) and acidic
B. weakly alkaline (basic) and strongly acidic
C. pH of 4 and pH of 8
D. pH of 7 and pH of 1.5
Answer is B: The pH of the stomach contents is about 2 (strongly acidic),
while the pH of small intestine is about 8 (weakly alkaline). The numbers in
choices C & D are wrong. Thus B is the best answer.
89. Which of the following is an enzyme?
A. amylase
B. gastrin
C. intrinsic factor
D. pepsinogen
Answer is A: Amylase is the only enzyme. Pepsinogen is not an enzyme
until it is changed to pepsin.
90. Choose the list which has the selected structures of the alimentary canal in
the same order that chyme would pass through them.
A. larynx, jejunum, ileum, descending colon, transverse colon, sigmoid
colon.
B. mouth, pharynx, oesophagus, large intestine, small intestine, anus.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
180 9 Gastro-Intestinal System

C. oesophagus, stomach, duodenum, ascending colon, sigmoid colon,

rectum.
D. stomach, duodenum, ileum, descending colon, transverse colon, ascend-
ing colon.
Answer is C: Descending colon is after the transverse colon; small intestine
is before the large intestine.
91. What feature do procarboxypeptidase, pepsinogen, trypsinogen, chymotryp-
sinogen have in common?
A. they are all enzymes.
B. they are all produced by the pancreas.
C. they all digest proteins.
D. they are all inactive.
Answer is D: They are inactive so are not yet enzymes; when activated they
would digest proteins, but not in their present form.
92. The products of fat digestion are absorbed into the epithelial cells of the
intes- tinal wall differently from the way products of protein and
carbohydrate diges- tion are. The reason is:
A. the products of protein and carbohydrate digestion are smaller.
B. the products of fat digestion are actively transported across the plasma
membrane.
C. the products of fat digestion are smaller.
D. monoglycerides are soluble in the plasma membrane.
Answer is D: The products of fat digestion are fat (lipid) soluble so can pen-
etrate the plasma membrane which is made of lipid.
93. Which fluid within the body is likely to have the LOWEST pH?
A. the chyme in the ileum.
B. saliva.
C. the blood.
D. the chyme in the stomach.
Answer is D: The stomach contents are the most acidic, that is, has the
lowest pH.
94. What pancreatic enzyme digests lipids to free fatty acids and
monoglycerides?
A. lipase
B. bile
C. cholecystokinin
D. lingual lipase

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
9 Gastro-Intestinal System 181

Answer is A: The “lip-” part of lipase indicates that it digests lipids, while
the “-ase” part is indicative of an enzyme. Lingual lipase is produce by the
sali- vary glands, not the pancreas.
95. What is the product of carbohydrate digestion?
A. glucose
B. monosaccharides
C. glycogen
D. ATP
Answer is B: Glucose is a monosaccharide, but there are others, so choice B
is the better answer.
96. Which of the following structures produce bile?
A. the gall bladder
B. the liver
C. the pancreas
D. the duodenum
Answer is B: bile is a liver product that is stored in the gall bladder.
97. What is a function of the stomach?
A. absorb the products of digestion.
B. participate in deglutition.
C. participate in mechanical digestion.
D. release cholecystokinin.
Answer is C: The churning of chyme is part of mechanical digestion. While
some simple molecules (water, aspirin, glucose) can be absorbed from the
stomach, most absorption occurs after digestion in the small intestine.
98. Which of the following is NOT a function of the mucosa of the small
intestine?
A. Protection against infectious disease.
B. Secretion of digestive enzymes.
C. The absorption of end products of digestion.
D. Segmentation.
Answer is D: Segmentation is caused by the muscularis externa, not the
mucosa.
99. Which fluid within the body is likely to have the HIGHEST pH?
A. the contents of the ileum.
B. the contents of the start of the duodenum.
C. the blood.
D. the contents of the stomach.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
182 9 Gastro-Intestinal System

Answer is A: Highest pH means the most alkaline. Blood pH is about 7.4,

which is less than in the intestines. The proximal part of the duodenum will
receive acidic chyme from the stomach, so its pH will be lowered by that. A
is the best choice.
100. What stomach enzyme digests protein to polypeptides?
A. pepsin
B. hydrochloric acid
C. gastrin
D. intrinsic factor
Answer is A: Pepsin is the only enzyme in the list.
101. What are the products of protein digestion?
A. polypeptides
B. monosaccharides
C. amino acids
D. free fatty acids and monoglycerides
Answer is C: Polypeptides have not yet completed the digestion process
102. Which one of the following is a function of the liver?
A. lipase
B. digestive enzymes
C. insulin
D. plasma proteins
Answer is D: Plasma proteins (albumins, globulins & fibrinogen) are pro-
duced in the liver.
103. A function of the LARGE intestine is to:
A. absorb the products of digestion
B. absorb water
C. participate in mechanical digestion
D. release intestinal gastrin
Answer is B: The products of digestion have been absorbed before the
remain- ing contents reach the LI. It absorbs additional water to make faeces
a paste.
104. Which fluid within the body is likely to have the LOWEST pH?
A. the contents of the ilium.
B. the contents of the start of the duodenum.
C. urine in the bladder.
D. the contents of the stomach.
Answer is D: Lowest pH means most acidic. The stomach contents is most
acidic.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
9 Gastro-Intestinal System 183

105. Which of the following organs is an accessory organ rather than an organ of
the gastrointestinal tract?
A. duodenum
B. rectum
C. caecum
D. liver
Answer is D: The liver is not part of the digestive tract (chime dose not pass
thorough it), rather it contributes bile to the gut contents via the common bile
duct.
106. One of the following is NOT a function of the stomach. Which one?
A. digestion of fats
B. digestion of proteins
C. mechanical digestion
D. storage of food
Answer is A: The stomach produces pepsinogen which activates to pepsin
which begins the digestion of protein. Fat is not significantly digested in the
stomach (gastric lipase initiates the digestion of milk protein).
107. What is the name of the hormone that stimulates the stomach to secrete
hydro- chloric acid?
A. gastrin
B. intestinal gastrin
C. secretin
D. cholecystokinin
Answer is A: Gastrin is the best answer – where it comes from is not
pertinent.
108. Which of the following pancreatic juice enzymes aids in the digestion of
proteins?
A. amylase
B. lipase
C. nuclease
D. trypsin
Answer is D: Amylase digests carbohydrate; lipase digests lipids; nuclease
digests nucleic acids.
109. What role do the Kupffer cells of the liver perform?
A. they are sinusoids
B. they are hepatocytes
C. they are macrophages
D. they de-aminate amino acids

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
184 9 Gastro-Intestinal System

Answer is C: Kupffer cells engulf any bacteria that have travelled from the
gut in the blood.
110. What is the process in the digestion of food molecules that produces their
monomers called?
A. polymerisation
B. hydrolysis
C. isomerisation
D. deamination
Answer is B: Digestion is the process of making smaller molecules from
poly- mers by the addition of H or OH from water. It is called hydrolysis.
111. Fatty acids are transported around the body by the blood in structures known
as:
A. micelles
B. chylomicrons
C. triglycerols
D. low density lipoproteins
Answer is B: Chylomicrons transport fats via the lymph system to the blood.
Micelles exist in the lumen of the intestine.
112. In the digestion of food molecules, the process known as “hydrolysis”
involves an enzyme and what else?
A. splitting a molecule into two smaller molecules using a water molecule.
B. splitting a molecule into two smaller molecules using hydrogen.
C. the metabolism of glucose to produce water and energy.
D. splitting of triglycerols into molecules that are soluble in water.
Answer is A: hydro- refers to water; -lysis refers to splitting of a
molecule.
113. The wall of the alimentary canal is made up of the four layers (not in any
order): the muscularis externa, serosa, mucosa and sub-mucosa. Which layer
absorbs the end products of digestion?
A. sub-mucosa
B. muscularis externa
C. serosa
D. mucosa
Answer is D: The mucosa is the innermost layer so digested food must pass
through it to be absorbed.
114. The functions of the stomach are:
A. storage of meal, digestion of protein, mechanical digestion.
B. mechanical digestion, digestion of carbohydrate, food storage.
C. churning of chyme, digestion of fats, mechanical digestion.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
9 Gastro-Intestinal System 185

D. digestion of protein, absorption of glucose, storage, mechanical

digestion.
Answer is D: Choice A is not wrong, but D is better as it includes glucose,
which being a small molecule, can be absorbed through the stomach wall.
115. Which one of the following is NOT secreted in pancreatic juice?
A. amylase
B. trypsinogen
C. pepsinogen.
D. lipase
Answer is C: Pepsinogen is secreted by the Chief cells (zymogenic cells) in
the gastric pits of the stomach.
116. What is the pH of the duodenum?
A. highly acidic (pH between 1.5 and 3)
B. highly alkaline (pH of 10–12)
C. alkaline in the pH range 7.35–7.45
D. alkaline (pH in the range 7.1–8.2)
Answer is D: The duodenum is slightly alkaline.
117. The process of hydrolysis may be represented by which of the following?
A. H+Cl− + Na+OH− → Na+ + Cl− + H2O
B. C12H22O11 + H2O → 2C6H12O6
C. alanine + glycine → alanylglycine + H2O
D. glucose → glycogenesis → glycogen
Answer is B: Hydrolysis refers to using a water molecule to split a larger
mol- ecule in smaller ones. Here a disaccharide is being split into two
monosac- charide molecules.
118. In the stomach which cells secrete pepsinogen?
A. parietal cells
B. zymogenic cells
C. Kupffer cells
D. enteroendocrine cells
Answer is B: “zymogenic” means producing an enzyme – also known as
Chief cells.
119. Which part of the gastro-intestinal tract contains three distinct layers of
smooth muscle in its walls?
A. rectum
B. small intestine

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
186 9 Gastro-Intestinal System

C. stomach
D. oesophagus
Answer is C: The stomach uses its muscular wall to churn (mix) the contents
as part of mechanical digestion.
120. Which digestive enzyme in pancreatic juice digests proteins?
A. trypsin
B. lipase
C. pepsin
D. amylase
Answer is A: While pepsin also digests protein, it is produced in the
stomach, not the pancreas.
121. Which digestive enzyme in saliva breaks down starch?
A. trypsin
B. lipase
C. pepsin
D. amylase
Answer is D: Amylase is the salivary enzyme that begins digesting starch.
122. Which hormone is responsible for contraction of the gall bladder?
A. secretin
B. gastrin
C. cholecystokinin
D. intrinsic factor
Answer is C: One of the functions of CCK is to cause the gall bladder to
contract.
123. All of the following statements regarding the liver are true except one, which
one?
A. It can convert amino acids to glucose during periods of fasting
B. Blood from the hepatic artery and portal vein travels away from the
central vein of each lobule
C. It contains special phagocytic cells which remove worn-out blood cells
from the circulation
D. It converts ammonia to urea
Answer is B: Is not true. In fact blood from the hepatic artery and the hepatic
portal vein mix and flow towards the central vein of a lobule.
124. During which phase are our gastric secretions stimulated by the sight and
smell of food?
A. gastric
B. digestive

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
9 Gastro-Intestinal System 187

C. cephalic
D. intestinal
Answer is C: the cephalic phase refers to the thought and sight of food
stimu- lating our secretions in preparation for food entering our stomach.
125. Which statement best describes the process of Glycogenesis
A. The digestion of glycogen in the diet.
B. The conversion of fat into glycogen in muscle tissue
C. The conversion of glucose into glycogen in the liver
D. The conversion of glycogen into glucose in muscle tissue
Answer is C: The term glycogenesis refers to the making (-genesis) of glyco-
gen (glyco-) from glucose. This removes glucose from the blood circulation.
126. Which of the following is a function of the normal flora of the large
intestine?
A. To hydrolyse cellulose
B. To synthesise blood clotting proteins
C. To synthesise B vitamins and vitamin K
D. To secrete intrinsic factor
Answer is C: Humans are unable to hydrolyse cellulose; blood clotting pro-
teins are synthesised in the liver; intrinsic factor is secreted by the stomach.
127. Why is insulin not given as an oral drug?
A. It is too irritating to the gastro-intestinal mucosa
B. It is altered by passing through the liver
C. It is too big a molecule to be absorbed through the plasma membrane
D. It would be digested by enzymes in the stomach
Answer is D: Insulin is a protein so would be hydrolysed by protein
digesting enzymes in the stomach (and duodenum).
128. Which one of the listed molecule types are absorbed from the gut?
A. starch
B. monosaccharides
C. cellulose
D. polypeptides
Answer is B: All the other molecules are too large to be absorbed through the
gut wall.
129. What are the products of carbohydrate digestion?
A. free bases and pentose sugars
B. monosaccharides

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
188 9 Gastro-Intestinal System

C. cellulose and disaccharides

D. free fatty acids and monoglycerides
Answer is B: Carbohydrates are polymers of small units called monosaccha-
rides. Digestion (hydrolysis) frees the monosaccharides.
130. One of the functions of the liver is to produce:
A. blood cells
B. digestive enzymes
C. insulin and glucagon
D. glycogen from glucose
Answer is D: Blood cells are produced in bone marrow; digestive enzymes
are produced in the pancreas and gut wall; the hormones insulin & glucagon
are produced by the pancreas
131. What is a function of the SMALL intestine? To:
A. temporarily store ingested food
B. absorb the products of digestion
C. participate in mechanical digestion
D. secrete hydrochloric acid
Answer is B: The small intestine has a very large surface area which makes
it well suited to absorbing the products of digestion.
132. Which of the following organs is an accessory organ of the gastrointestinal
tract?
A. jejunum
B. appendix
C. caecum
D. pancreas
Answer is D: The other three are all part of the digestive tract itself.
133. What is the name of the hormone that inhibits the stomach from secreting
gastric juice?
A. gastrin
B. pepsin
C. enterogastrin
D. cholecystokinin
Answer is D: One of the effects of CCK is to inhibit gastric secretion
134. What role do the Kupffer cells of the liver perform?
A. they transport plasma proteins
B. they perform gluconeogenesis

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
9 Gastro-Intestinal System 189

C. they are macrophages

D. they produce bile
Answer is C: Kupffer cells are macrophages that engulf any bacteria in the
sinusoids of the liver lobules transported there by the hepatic portal blood
flow that may have originated from the gut.
135. Fatty acids are absorbed from the gut into structures known as:
A. triglycerides
B. sinusoids
C. capillaries
D. lacteals
Answer is D: Lacteals contain lymph in which digested fats are transported
to rejoin the blood stream in the vena cava via the thoracic duct.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
Chapter 10
Endocrine System

The organs of the endocrine system produce hormones. A hormone is a messenger

molecule, made in small quantities by endocrine cells/glands and released into the
blood circulation to coordinate cellular activities in distant tissues. Hormone mole-
cules elicit a response in the target cells by attaching to a receptor on the cell’s
plasma membrane (or inside the cell) that is specific for that molecule.
The hypothalamus is a region of the brain that controls the endocrine system
and integrates the activities of the nervous and endocrine systems in 3 ways. (1)
The hypothalamus produces and secretes regulatory hormones that control the
secretion of 6 or 7 hormones from the endocrine cells in the anterior pituitary
gland. In turn, the hormones released by the anterior pituitary, stimulate their
target endocrine organs to produce and release hormones which go onto to
influence the behaviour of the body cells which have receptors for these
hormones. (2) The hypothalamus produces ADH and oxytocin which are
transported to the posterior pituitary to be stored and released into the blood
following appropriate stimuli. (3) The hypothala- mus contains “autonomic
centres” that exert neural control over endocrine cells of the medullae of the
adrenal glands. When activated, the adrenal medullae release hormones into the
bloodstream.
Many organs participate in the production of hormones and you should know
(or know of) most of them. The hypothalamus and the anterior pituitary have
already been mentioned. The thyroid gland produces thyroxine and calcitonin. The
latter decreases the concentration of Ca ions in the blood. The four parathyroid
glands produce parathyroid hormone (PTH) which increases the concentration of
Ca ions in the blood. The adrenal glands produce many hormones. More than 24
corticoste- roid hormones are produced from cholesterol by the adrenal cortex.
These include “mineralocorticoids” (e.g. aldosterone), “glucocorticoids” (e.g.
cortisol, corticoste- rone) and “gonadocorticoids” (e.g. estrodiol and the weak
androgens androstenedi- one, dehydroepiandrosterone). The adrenal medullae
produce epinephrine and norepinephrine. The pancreas contains regions of cells
(called Islets of Langerhans) that produce insulin (the beta cells), and glucagon
(the alpha cells). The testes pro- duce testosterone and inhibin while the ovaries
produce estrogens, inhibin and

© Springer Science+Business Media Singapore 2016 Physiology,

M. Caon, Examination Questions and Answers in Basic Anatomy and DOI
ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
10.1007/978-981-10-2332-3_10 191

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
192 10 Endocrine System

progesterone. The pineal gland produces melatonin. The kidneys produce erythro-
poietin, calcitriol (“vitamin D3”) and the enzyme renin. The liver (not regarded as
an endocrine organ) produces the prohormone angiotensinogen which is converted
by renin and then by “angiotensin converting enzyme” to the hormone angiotensin
II. The atria of the heart produce atrial natriuretic hormone (ANP) which blocks
the secretion of renin.
1. Which statement below about hormones is true?
A. Hormones are enzymes that catalyse reactions
B. Hormones are released into the blood circulation
C. Hormones affect all cells of the body
D. Hormones are released by neurones at synapses
Answer is B: Hormones are circulating messengers that are transported in
blood. A particular hormone does not necessarily affect every cell in the body.
Some (but not all) hormones are released by neurones, for example in the
hypothalamus.
2. Which hormones are soluble in blood?
A. Steroid hormones
B. Hormones produced by the adrenal cortex
C. The sex hormones
D. Those released by the pituitary gland
Answer is D: The pituitary gland releases peptide hormones which are soluble
in blood. The other choices refer to steroid hormones which are insoluble in
blood. They require transport via plasma proteins.
3. Which statement about the hypothalamus is correct?
A. The hypothalamus is connected to the brain by the infundibulum
B. The hypothalamus is composed of glandular epithelial tissue
C. The hypothalamus secretes “releasing hormones”
D. The hypothalamus secretes epinephrine and norepinephrine
Answer is C: The hypothalamus is part of the brain so is composed of neural
tissue. Epinephrine and norepinephrine are released from the adrenal medulla.
4. What hormone does the thyroid produce?
A. thyroid stimulating hormone
B. calcitriol
C. thyroxine
D. parathyroid hormone
Answer is C: Thyroxine (or tetra-iodothyronine) is converted to tri-
iodothyronine in target tissues.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
10 Endocrine System 193

5. What hormone(s) does the adrenal medulla produce?

A. aldosterone
B. epinephrine and norepinephrine
C. corticosteroids
D. glucocorticoids
Answer is B: Epinephrine and norepinephrine are produced in the adrenal
medulla (the deep or inside part). Aldosterone is a mineralocorticoid, which
like corticosteroids & glucocorticoids, as the “cortico” in the name suggests,
are all produced in the adrenal cortex.
6. What is produced by the beta cells of the pancreas?
A. angiotensin converting enzyme
B. glucocorticoids
C. glucagon
D. insulin
Answer is D: Beta cells of the pancreatic islets produce insulin. The alpha
cells produce glucagon.
7. Which gland or organ releases erythropoietin?
A. The kidneys
B. The adrenal glands
C. The anterior pituitary
D. The pancreas
Answer is A: Kidneys produce erythropoietin (EPO) – which signals red bone
marrow to increase production of rbc.
8. What effect does parathyroid hormone have?
A. It increases plasma Ca2+ concentration
B. It decreases plasma Ca2+ concentration
C. It increases the rate of ATP formation
D. It stimulates the thyroid gland to produce thyroxine
Answer is A: PTH increases plasma Ca2+. (calcitonin aids in lowering blood
calcium).
9. Which one of the following is NOT part of the endocrine system?
A. the islets of Langerhans (pancreatic islets)
B. the thyroid gland
C. the acini cells of the pancreas
D. the parathyroid glands
Answer is C: The acini cells produce digestive enzymes.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
194 10 Endocrine System

10. What is the difference between an exocrine gland and an endocrine gland?
A. An endocrine gland secretes neurotransmitters (an exocrine gland does
not).
B. An endocrine gland secretes via a tube to the destination (an exocrine
gland does not).
C. An exocrine gland secretes into the blood (an endocrine gland does not).
D. An endocrine gland secretes into the blood (an exocrine gland does not).
Answer is D: Endocrine glands secrete “circulating” hormones, that is secrete
into the blood.
11. By what term are hormones derived from tyrosine also known?
A. amino acid derivatives
B. peptide hormones
C. steroid hormones
D. corticosteroids
Answer is A: Catecholamines (adrenaline, noradrenaline), dopamine and thy-
roid hormone are all derived from tyrosine.
12. Which hormones have their receptors inside their target cell?
A. amino acid based hormones
B. hormones with a membrane carrier mechanism or that are lipid soluble
C. steroid hormones and peptide hormones of less than 50 amino acids
D. lipid soluble hormones
Answer is B: Choice D is also correct but B is the better answer as thyroid
hor- mones cross membrane by a carrier mechanism.
13. Where in the body is the hypothalamus located?
A. On the inferior surface of the brain
B. In the cortex of the adrenal gland
C. In the anterior pituitary gland
D. On the dorsal surface of the thyroid gland
Answer is A: The hypothalamus is below the thalamus, more or less on the
“floor” of the brain, but above the pituitary gland.
14. From where are antidiuretic hormone and oxytocin released?
A. the anterior pituitary
B. the posterior pituitary
C. the adrenal cortex
D. the adrenal medulla
Answer is B: ADH & OT are produced in the hypothalamus and transported
to the posterior pituitary.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
10 Endocrine System 195

15. Which hormone has the element iodine as part of its molecule?
A. calcitonin
B. haemoglobin
C. thyroxine
D. parathyroid hormone
Answer is C: Thyroxine or thyroid hormone contains iodine.
16. What effect does aldosterone have?
A. It causes glucose to be absorbed from the blood
B. It cause Na+ to be absorbed in the kidneys
C. It causes Ca++ to be absorbed from the gut
D. It causes K+ to be absorbed from the filtrate.
Answer is B: Aldosterone cases reclamation of sodium ions from the filtrate,
and potassium to be secreted in exchange.
17. Which of the following is a part of the endocrine system?
A. the thalamus
B. the pancreatic islets (islets of Langerhans)
C. the renal glands
D. the salivary glands
Answer is B: The pancreatic islets secrete the hormones insulin and glucagon.
18. Which of the following is an amino acid derivative hormone?
A. epinephrine
B. tyrosine
C. testosterone
D. prostaglandin
Answer is A: Epinephrine is derived from the amino acid tyrosine (so tyrosine
is a wrong answer)
19. Which statement below is true of steroid hormones?
A. they do not have a specific receptor to bind with.
B. they are not lipid soluble do bind to receptor proteins on the cell
membrane.
C. they are lipid soluble so diffuse through the cell membrane.
D. they cross the cell membrane via a carrier mechanism.
Answer is C: Steroids are lipid soluble so diffuse through the plasma
membrane to bind to a receptor within the cell.
20. Which structure controls the endocrine system and integrates the activities of
the nervous and endocrine systems?
A. the infundibulum
B. the pituitary gland

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
196 10 Endocrine System

C. the thalamus
D. the hypothalamus
Answer is D: Hypothalamus secretes regulatory hormones that control endo-
crine cells in the ant.pit. gland; produces ADH & oxytocin; contains “auto-
nomic centres” that exert neural control over endocrine cells of the adrenal
medullae.
21. One of the statements below is true. Which one?
A. the anterior pituitary produces testosterone from cholesterol and releases it
when releasing hormones arrive from the hypothalamus.
B. the hypothalamus produces ADH and oxytocin which are stored in the
pos- terior pituitary.
C. the posterior pituitary contains autonomic centres that exert neural control
over the adrenal glands.
D. the thalamus produces ADH and oxytocin which are stored in the anterior
pituitary
Answer is B: Testosterone is not produced in the pituitary, nor does the
pituitary contain autonomic centres.
22. Iodine is an essential component of which hormone?
A. thyroid hormones
B. aldosterone
C. thyroid stimulating hormones
D. parathyroid hormone
Answer is A: Thyroid hormones T3 and T4 contain 3 & 4 iodine atoms
respectively.
23. Which hormone(s) increases the reabsorption of Ca++ from the filtrate in the
kidney tubule?
A. calcitonin
B. mineralocorticoids
C. parathyroid hormone
D. aldosterone
Answer is C: PTH causes increased calcium absorption and hence increases
blood calcium level.
24. What effect does aldosterone have? It causes:
A. angiotensin to be formed from angiotensinogen
B. Na+ to be absorbed from the filtrate
C. Na+ and Ca++ to be absorbed from the filtrate and K+ to be secreted into the
filtrate
D. Na+ to be absorbed from the filtrate and K+ to be secreted into the filtrate
Answer is D: Aldosterone promotes the absorption of sodium from the filtrate
while potassium (also a positively charged ion) is secreted to maintain
electrical neutrality.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
10 Endocrine System 197

25. Which of the following is NOT part of the endocrine system?

A. The thymus
B. The pineal gland
C. The acini cells of the pancreas
D. The posterior pituitary gland
Answer is C: The acini cells produce digestive enzymes.
26. Peptide hormones are produced (and/or released) by which structure?
A. The adrenal cortex
B. The gonads
C. The hypothalamus
D. The kidneys
Answer is C: The hypothalamus produces peptide hormones.
27. Which statement applies to steroid hormones?
A. They are transported dissolved in blood
B. They bind to receptor proteins on the outside of the plasma membrane
C. They cross the plasma membrane by using a protein carrier mechanism.
D. They bind to receptors in the cell cytoplasm or nucleus
Answer is D: As steroid hormones are lipid soluble, their receptors are inside
the cell as they can cross the plasma membrane.
28. Which endocrine organ produces “releasing hormones” and “inhibitory
hormones”?
A. thyroid
B. anterior pituitary
C. hypothalamus
D. thalamus
Answer is C: The hypothalamus controls the secretion of the anterior pituitary
by the use of “releasing hormones” and “inhibitory hormones”.
29. What hormone is produced by the parafollicular cells of the thyroid gland?
A. Parathyroid hormone
B. Calcitonin
C. Thyroid hormone
D. Thyroxine
Answer is B: Parafollicular (or “C”) cells of the thyroid produce calcitonin
which aids in lowering of blood calcium.
30. What hormones are produced by the adrenal medulla?
A. Epinephrine and norepinephrine
B. Insulin and glucagon

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
198 10 Endocrine System

C. Aldosterone and erythropoietin

D. Testosterone and estrogen
Answer is A: The medulla is the deeper part if the adrenal gland.
31. What is one mechanism of hormone action?
A. They act as second messengers in the cytoplasm
B. They act as enzymes for reactions
C. They act as receptor proteins
D. They activate genes in the nucleus
Answer is D: Some hormones (corticosteroids) determine which genes are
tran- scribed in the nucleus.
32. What is the effect of ADH (antidiuretic hormone)?
A. allows walls of collecting duct to become permeable to water
B. inhibits the reabsorption of Na+
C. causes an increase in the volume of urine produced
D. it promotes diuresis
Answer is A: ADH causes more aquaporins to be inserted into the collecting
duct walls which allow water molecules to pass through along the osmotic
gradient.
33. Which one of the following is NOT true of peptide hormones?
A. they are water soluble
B. they are derived from amino acids
C. their receptors are located in the cell cytoplasm
D. they are transported dissolved in blood
Answer is C: The receptors for peptide hormones are located on the plasma
membrane as they are unable to penetrate the plasma membrane.
34. Which hormones are produced by the adrenal medulla?
A. gonadocorticoids
B. steroid hormones
C. mineralocorticoids
D. catecholamines
Answer is D: Epinephrine and norepinephrine (=catecholamines) are
produced in the adrenal medulla.
35. How do steroid hormones differ from amino acid-based hormones?
A. steroid hormones are water soluble whereas amino acid based hormones
are not.
B. the receptors for steroid hormones are only in the cytoplasm or the nucleus
(and amino acid-based hormones are not)

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
10 Endocrine System 199

C. steroid hormones are made only in the adrenal glands, while amino acid-
based hormones are produced by a variety of glands.
D. steroid hormones activate a G-protein and exert their effect via “second
messengers”, but the action of amino acid-based hormones results directly
on binding to their receptor.
Answer is B: Steroid hormones are lipid soluble so can enter the cell to bind
to receptors located inside the cell. Amino acid-based hormones are not lipid
sol- uble so their receptors are located outside the cell on the plasma
membrane.
36. Which structure integrates the activities of the endocrine system and the ner-
vous system?
A. the hypothalamus
B. the thalamus
C. the posterior pituitary
D. the anterior pituitary
Answer is A: The hypothalamus is located in the brain and also produces
regu- latory hormones.
37. Which structure produces ADH and oxytocin?
A. the thalamus
B. the anterior pituitary
C. the hypothalamus
D. the posterior pituitary
Answer is C: ADH and OT are then transported to the posterior pituitary for
storage and release.
38. Which structure is composed of glandular epithelial tissue?
A. the thalamus
B. the anterior pituitary
C. the posterior pituitary
D. the hypothalamus
Answer is B: The anterior pituitary produces and releases 6 hormones.
39. Which hormone is the one made in greatest quantity by the thyroid gland?
A. calcitonin
B. thyroid stimulating hormone
C. tri-iodothyronine
D. thyroxine
Answer is D: thyroxine is about 90 % tetra-iodothyronine and 10 % tri-
iodothyronine
40. Which of the following organ(s) are NOT endocrine organs?
A. renal
B. adrenal

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
200 10 Endocrine System

C. thyroid
D. parathyroid
Answer is A: Renal gland is another name for the kidney.
41. To which group of hormones does aldosterone belong?
A. catecholamines
B. glucocorticoids
C. mineralocorticoids
D. gonadocorticoids
Answer is C: As aldosterone is concerned with the absorption of sodium ions,
a “mineral” and it is produced by the adrenal cort ex, it is termed a
mineralocorticoid.
42. Where are the receptors for almost all of the amino acid derived hormones
located?
A. on the mitochondria
B. in the nucleus
C. on the outside of the plasma membrane
D. on the inside of the plasma membrane
Answer is C: Amino acid-derived hormones cannot get through the plasma
membrane so they attach to receptors located on the outside of the membrane.
43. Which structure produces the hormones ADH and oxytocin?
A. the posterior pituitary
B. the anterior pituitary
C. the thalamus
D. the hypothalamus
Answer is D: ADH & OT are produced in the hypothalamus and are then
trans- ported to the posterior pituitary for release.
44. The hypothalamus produces “releasing hormones”. What do these releasing
hormones do?
A. They direct the posterior pituitary to release hormones.
B. They direct the anterior pituitary to release hormones.
C. They direct the gonads to release hormones.
D. They act as “second messengers” when hormones bind to their receptor site.
Answer is B: The anterior pituitary produces hormones that stimulate other
endocrine organs, but the ant pit dos not release hormones until directed to the
hypothalamus.
45. What is the role of glucagon and insulin?
A. glucagon raises blood glucose level and inhibits gluconeogenesis.
B. glucagon lowers blood glucose level and stimulates glycogenolysis.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
10 Endocrine System 201

C. insulin raises blood glucose level and stimulates gluconeogenesis

D. insulin lowers blood glucose level inhibits glycogenolysis.
Answer is D: Insulin promotes the uptake of glucose into cells from the blood.
Hence it lowers blood glucose. It also inhibits glycogenolysis so less glucose
is released from the glycogen store.
46. Which of the following hormones CANNOT cross the plasma membrane?
A. sex hormones
B. amino acid based hormones
C. thyroid hormones
D. steroids
Answer is B: amino acid-based hormones are water soluble but not lipid solu-
ble, so cannot cross the plasma membrane.
47. Which of the following “controls” the endocrine system?
A. the posterior pituitary
B. the thalamus
C. the anterior pituitary
D. the hypothalamus
Answer is D: The hypothalamus secretes releasing h. & inhibitory hormones
that stimulate the anterior pituitary gland to secrete hormones which in turn
control the activities of endocrine cells in the thyroid; cortex of adrenal
glands; & reproductive organs. The hypothalamus produces ADH & oxytocin
which are stored and released into blood from post.pit. The hypothalamus
exerts neu- ral control over the adrenal medullae.
48. Which part of the pituitary gland is comprised of neural tissue?
A. the posterior pituitary
B. the pars intermedia
C. the adenohypophysis
D. the anterior pituitary
Answer is A: The posterior pituitary is part of the brain.
49. Complete the sentence correctly. Parathyroid hormone:
A. is produced by the parafollicular cells of the thyroid gland
B. decreases the concentration of Ca++ in the blood
C. releases Ca++ from the sarcoplasmic reticulum
M increases the concentration of Ca++ in the blood.
Answer is D: When the level of calcium in the blood is lower than required,
PTH is released and causes the calcium concentration to increase.
50. The adrenal medulla produces which of the following?
A. weak androgens
B. mineralocorticoids

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
202 10 Endocrine System

C. testosterone and oestrogen

D. epinephrine and norepinephrine
Answer is D: The adrenal cortex produces weak androgens and
mineralocorticoids.
51. What effect does insulin have?
A. it increases metabolic rate
B. it causes the breakdown of glycogen to glucose
C. it lowers blood sugar level
D. it stimulates gluconeogenesis
Answer is C: Glucose stimulates enhanced membrane transport of glucose
into body cells, and inhibits glycogenolysis and gluconeogenesis. This lowers
blood glucose level.
52. Which of the following is a substantial difference between amino acid based
hormones and steroid hormones?
A. endocrine glands release steroid hormones while amino acid hormones are
released from exocrine glands.
B. amino acid hormones are circulating hormones while steroid hormones are
local hormones.
C. amino acid hormones are fat soluble while steroid hormones are not.
D. steroid hormones can pass through the plasma membrane while amino
acid hormones cannot.
Answer is D: Steroid hormones are fat soluble, AA-based hormones are water
soluble (& not fat soluble).
53. What type of molecule is cAMP, or what role does it play?
A. a second messenger
B. an amino acid based hormone
C. a catecholamine
D. a steroid hormone
Answer is A: Cyclic AMP is a second messenger. That is, it is released from
the inside of the plasma membrane when an AA-based hormone binds to its
receptor.
54. Which one is NOT a mode of action of hormones on their target cell?
A. a hormone may stimulate the synthesis of an enzyme in the target cell.
B. a hormone may activate an enzyme by altering its shape.
C. a hormone may deactivate an enzyme by altering its structure.
D. some hormones are enzymes that promote a chemical reaction in a cell.
Answer is D: Hormones are not enzymes (but may cause enzymes to be
formed).

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
10 Endocrine System 203

55. What may be correctly said about oxytocin and antidiuretic hormone?
A. they are made and released from the posterior pituitary
B. they are made in the hypothalamus and stored and released from the poste-
rior pituitary
C. they are made in the hypothalamus and stored and released from the ante-
rior pituitary
D. they are made and released from the anterior pituitary
Answer is B: The hypothalamus produces ADH & OT. The posterior pituitary
releases them.
56. Which hormones are produced by the adrenal medulla?
A. glucocorticoids
B. mineralocorticoids
C. adrenalin and noradrenalin
D. gonadocorticoids
Answer is C: Adrenalin and noradrenalin (also known as epinephrine and nor
epinephrine). The other three choices all have “cortico” in their name
indicating their adrenal cortex origin.
57. Which cells produce insulin?
A. the acini cells of the pancreas
B. parafollicular cells of the thymus
C. alpha cells of the islets of Langerhans
D. beta cells of the islets of Langerhans
Answer is D: Islets of Langerhans = pancreatic islets. Alpha cells produce
glucagon.
58. What are the two parts of the pituitary gland known as?
A. the thalamus and the hypothalamus
B. anterior and posterior
C. alpha and beta cells
D. cortex and medulla
Answer is B: Anterior pituitary (epithelial tissue) and posterior pituitary
(neural tissue)
59. Which of the following could be a definition of a hormone?
A. chemicals released to communicate between adjacent cells in contact.
B. a chemical messenger released into blood to coordinate activities in distant
tissues.
C. a chemical messenger released by a neurone at a synapse.
D. a chemical messenger in the extracellular fluid between cells of a single
tissue.
Answer is B: Hormones are also known as circulating hormones, meaning
they are transported in the blood.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
204 10 Endocrine System

60. One of the following groups of hormones has their receptor inside the cell.
Which one?
A. steroid hormones
B. catecholamines
C. adrenalin and noradrenalin
D. peptide hormones
Answer is A: steroids are lipids, hence are lipid soluble so can enter the cell.
61. Which two hormones are stored in the posterior pituitary prior to their release?
A. luteinising hormone and follicle stimulating hormone
B. adrenalin and noradrenalin
C. calcitonin and calcitriol
D. oxytocin and antidiuretic hormone
Answer is D: OT & ADH are produced in the hypothalamus before being
trans- ported to the posterior pituitary.
62. What is a function of calcitonin?
A. accelerating Ca2+ release from bone
B. stimulating Ca2+ excretion by the kidneys
C. reducing Ca2+ deposition in bone
D. stimulating the formation of calcitriol in the kidneys
Answer is B: Calcitonin decreases the blood calcium concentration. B is the
only choice compatible with this.
63. The hormones thyroxine and tri-iodothyronine contain which element?
A. cobalt
B. iron
C. iodine
D. manganese
Answer is C: These thyroid hormones require iodine in their molecule.
64. What is produced in the adrenal cortex?
A. cholesterol
B. catecholamines
C. adrenalin and noradrenalin
D. corticosteroids
Answer is D: “Cortico”steroids are made in the adrenal cortex. Choice B and
C are the same – these hormones are made in the adrenal medulla.
65. What is the function of insulin?
A. enhance the transport of glucose through the plasma membrane into the cell
B. promote glycogenolysis

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
10 Endocrine System 205

C. promote gluconeogenesis
D. to raise blood sugar level
Answer is A: Insulin lowers the level of glucose in the blood. The other three
choices are about increasing the blood glucose level.
66. Which of the following statements about endocrine hormones is always true?
A. They are secreted by neurones
B. They are derived from amino acids
C. They are produced by exocrine glands
D. They are released into the bloodstream
Answer is D: Endocrine hormones are also known as circulating (in blood)
hormones.
67. Which of the following statements about corticosteroids is true?
A. They may also act as neurotransmitters
B. They are transported dissolved in blood
C. They are produced by the adrenal gland
D. They are amino acid derivatives
Answer is C: They are produced by the adrenal cortex.
68. Which structure produces epinephrine and norepinephrine?
A. adrenal pelvis
B. the anterior pituitary
C. adrenal medulla
D. adrenal cortex
Answer is C: The medulla (interior) of the adrenal gland.
69. Which cells produce insulin?
A. the acini
B. the alpha cells
C. the beta cells
D. the islets of Langerhans
Answer is C: The beta cells of the islets of Langerhans.
70. What is the function of erythropoietin (EPO)?
A. stimulate bone marrow to produce red blood cells
B. decrease the plasma concentration of Ca++
C. increase the plasma concentration of Ca++
D. to raise blood sugar level
Answer is A: EPO is produced in the kidneys and stimulates active (red) mar-
row to produce blood cells.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
206 10 Endocrine System

71. Finish the sentence so that it is correct: A hormone may be defined as a

chemi- cal messenger that:
A. is released into circulation in small quantities.
B. facilitates communication between adjacent cells.
C. moves through extracellular fluid between cells of a single tissue
D. crosses the synaptic cleft and binds to a receptor.
Answer is A: Hormones travel through the blood to all parts of the body and
only small quantities are required.
72. Endocrine communication involves hormones of two types
A. first messengers and second messengers
B. steroid hormones and amino acid based hormones
C. amino acid derivatives and peptide hormones
D. peptide hormones and corticosteroids
Answer is B: Hormones are of two structural types and this determines
whether they are lipid soluble (can pass through the plasma membrane) or not.
73. Which of the following statements is FALSE?
A. peptide hormones are not able to penetrate the cell membrane
B. thyroid hormone can cross the membrane
C. steroid hormones bind to receptors on the outside of the cell membrane
D. catecholamines are not lipid soluble
Answer is C: Steroid hormones are lipid soluble so their receptors are inside
the cell as they can pass through the plasma membrane.
74. The posterior pituitary does which one of the following?
A. produces growth hormone, prolactin and tropic hormones
B. secretes regulatory hormones that control endocrine cells in the anterior
pituitary
C. exerts neural control over other endocrine glands
D. stores and releases oxytocin and antidiuretic hormone
Answer is D: OT & ADH are made in hypothalamus and passed along
neurones to the posterior pituitary.
75. What does insulin do?
A. it lowers blood sugar level
B. it causes the breakdown of glycogen to glucose
C. it increases metabolic rate
D. it hydrolyses glucose into ATP
Answer is A: Insulin stimulates the uptake of glucose into cells from the blood.
76. An amino acid based hormone binds to its receptor. This has the effect of:
A. activating an enzyme to produce cAMP
B. causing it to diffuse through the cell to trigger a cascade of reactions

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
10 Endocrine System 207

C. activate a G-protein
D. allowing it to move along the membrane
Answer is C: After a hormone binds to its receptor, a G (for guanine) protein
is activated as the first effect. The G-protein then moves along the membrane
to activate an enzyme that produces – for example – cAMP, which is a
“second messenger”.
77. The structure that secretes regulatory hormones that control the pituitary
gland is known as the:
A. hypothalamus
B. hypophysis
C. hypothyroid
D. hypothymus
Answer is A: Hypothalamus is structure. Hypophysis is another name for the
pituitary gland.
78. Why are the receptors for amino acid-based hormones on the outside surface
of the cell membrane?
A. cells can respond faster when the hormone does not need to enter the cell.
B. amino acid-based hormones cannot penetrate cell membranes.
C. lysosomes in the intracellular fluid digest amino acid-based hormones.
D. amino acid-based hormones have no role in activating genes in the
nucleus. Answer is B: Amino acid-based hormones are not lipid soluble.
79. What is the difference between endocrine glands and exocrine glands?
A. endocrine glands produce hormones whereas exocrine glands do not.
B. exocrine glands secrete into the blood stream whereas endocrine glands do
not.
C. endocrine glands are controlled by the autonomic nervous system whereas
exocrine glands are not.
D. exocrine glands secrete steroid hormones whereas endocrine glands
secrete amino acid-based hormones.
Answer is A: By definition endocrine glands are part of the endocrine system
and they produce hormones.
80. The pituitary gland has an anterior portion and a posterior portion. One differ-
ence between the two is:
A. the anterior portion releases hormones following a nervous stimulus while
the posterior portion releases hormones following a hormonal stimulus.
B. the posterior portion is able to produce hormones while the anterior
portion merely stores hormones made elsewhere.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
208 10 Endocrine System

C. the anterior portion releases antidiuretic hormone (ADH) while the poste-
rior portion does not.
D. the posterior portion is neural tissue while the anterior portion is glandular
tissue.
Answer is D: Choices A, B & C are the reverse of the true situation.
81. By what other name is adrenaline also known?
A. noradrenaline
B. epinephrine
C. androgen
D. ANP
Answer is B: Perhaps to diminish the perception that the adrenal gland only
produces adrenaline.
82. Which hormones does the pancreas produce?
A. epinephrine and norepinephrine.
B. oxytocin and antidiuretic hormone.
C. glucagon and insulin.
D. glucocorticoids and aldosterone
Answer is C: The pancreatic islets produce these hormones which manage the
concentration of glucose in the blood.
83. Which statement is NOT CORRECT about hormones:
A. They are chemical substances that alter cell activity
B. They regulate metabolic function of other cells in the body
C. Steroid hormones are amino acid-based and are synthesized from
cholesterol
D. They are produced in glands and transported via the blood stream
Answer is C: Steroid hormones are not based on amino acids. They are lipids.
84. What does the anterior lobe of the pituitary gland synthesise and release?
A. Growth hormone-releasing hormone
B. Corticotropin-releasing hormone
C. Thyroid-stimulating hormone
D. Gonadotropin-releasing hormone
Answer is C: All the releasing hormones are produced in the hypothalamus.
85. How do calcitonin or parathyroid hormone control blood calcium levels?
A. Calcitonin acts to increase blood calcium levels
B. Parathyroid hormone release is inhibited by increased calcium levels
C. Parathyroid hormone stimulates bone resorbing cells to take up calcium
D. Calcitonin inhibits parathyroid hormone

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
10 Endocrine System 209

Answer is B: PTH acts to increase blood calcium levels. Hence less is

required when blood calcium level is high.
86. What controls the blood glucose level?
A. The action of insulin
B. The action of glucagon
C. The action of insulin and glucagon
D. The action of insulin, glucagon and glycogen
Answer is C: Insulin increases blood glucose, while glucagon decreases blood
glucose. Glycogen is not a hormone, so it does not affect the level of glucose
in the blood.
87. Complete the following sentence correctly: The hypothalamus:
A. Is the major link between the nervous and the endocrine systems.
B. Is situated in the brain superior to the thalamus.
C. Produces a hormone that stimulates the thyroid gland.
D. Does not produce anti-diuretic hormone (ADH).
Answer is A: The hypothalamus integrates the nervous and endocrine systems
of body control.
88. Which of the following secretes growth hormone?
A. the adrenal glands
B. The thyroid gland
C. The posterior lobe of the pituitary gland
D. The anterior lobe of the pituitary gland
Answer is D: The anterior lobe produces and releases GH.
89. Blood calcium levels are controlled by hormones from which structures?
A. The parathyroid glands and the thyroid gland
B. The anterior lobe of the pituitary gland and the thyroid gland
C. The parathyroid glands and the anterior lobe of the pituitary gland
D. The adrenal cortex and the hypothalamus.
Answer is A: Parathyroid glands secrete parathyroid hormone (to increase
blood Ca level) while the parafollicular cells of the thyroid produce calcitonin
which aids in lowering blood Ca.
90. Which statement is NOT CORRECT?
A. Males and females produce testosterone and oestrogen respectively in
their gonads.
B. Both male and females produce follicle stimulating hormone and luteiniz-
ing hormone.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
210 10 Endocrine System

C. Oxytocin is produced and released from the anterior lobe of the pituitary
gland.
D. Production of testosterone and oestrogen inhibits the release of gonadotro-
phin releasing hormone from the hypothalamus.
Answer is C: Oxytocin is produced in the hypothalamus and released from the
posterior lobe of the pituitary gland.
91. The hormones known as “catecholamines” (adrenaline, noradrenaline and
dopamine) are not lipid soluble. Therefore their receptor sites are:
A. On the inside of the plasma membrane.
B. On the outside of the plasma membrane.
C. In the cell cytoplasm.
D. In the cell nucleus.
Answer is B: With the receptors on the outside of the membrane, catechol-
amines do not need to be able to penetrate the membrane.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
Chapter 11
Renal System

The kidneys are the major excretory organs of the body. They excrete the organic
wastes urea, uric acid and creatinine. They regulate the volume of blood (and
hence blood pressure) by increasing or decreasing the volume of urine produced to
match the body’s requirement for water. They help regulate blood pH by excreting
hydro- nium ions and by reabsorbing and producing bicarbonate ions. They
maintain blood osmolarity at ~290 mosml/L and individual ions (electrolytes) at
their healthy con- centrations. The kidneys produce the enzyme renin, the hormone
erythropoietin and the “vitamin” calcitriol. In turn the physiological functions of
the kidney are influ- enced by ADH, aldosterone, parathyroid hormone, ANP, BNP
and angiotensin II.
The nephron is the blood processing functional unit of kidney. The nephron
con- sists of a glomerulus and a renal tubule. The glomerulus is a spherical
capillary bed that is supplied with blood via the afferent arteriole and is drained by
the efferent arteriole. The renal tubule consists of the “Bowman’s” capsule (which
surrounds the glomerulus and receives the fluid filtered from the glomerulus) and
the proximal convoluted tubule, the descending and ascending limbs of the loop of
Henle, and the distal convoluted tubule. A collecting duct receives filtrate from
several nephrons and delivers it to a calyx.
Macroscopically the kidney consists of a superficial cortex (where all of the
glomeruli are located) and the deeper medulla. The medulla consists of renal
“pyra- mids” separated by renal “columns”. The renal tubules extend into the
pyramids and the collecting ducts pass through them to deliver urine from their
apex (the papilla) into a tube called a minor calyx. Minor calyces join to from
major calyces which then expand into the renal pelvis. The pelvis is drained by a
ureter that delivers urine to the storage bladder. The efferent arteriole feeds into
the peritubular capillary bed which surrounds the PCT and the DCT of the
nephron, and is located in the cortex. A small percentage of the blood from the
efferent arteriole also flows into another capillary bed known as the vasa recta
which surrounds the loop of Henle and extends into the pyramids of the medulla.
The interlobar arteries are located in the renal columns and deliver blood from the
renal artery to the arcuate arteries, which lie

© Springer Science+Business Media Singapore 2016 Physiology,

M. Caon, Examination Questions and Answers in Basic Anatomy and DOI
ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
10.1007/978-981-10-2332-3_11
211

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
212 11 Renal System

superficial to the bases of the pyramids, and then to the cortical radiate arteries
which in turn supply the afferent arterioles which enter the glomeruli.
To understand the physiology of the kidney you must also understand how the
juxtaglomerular apparatus (made up of the macula densa and the juxtaglomerular
cells) works and how the vasa recta and the loop of Henle operate within the
osmotic gradient of the medulla. In addition it is useful to know how the cells of
the renal tubules absorb or secrete Na+, K+, H3O+, Cl−, Ca++, NH4+ and HCO3− ions.
However these processes will not be described here.
1. What is the name for the entry point to the kidney for nerves, blood vessels,
ureters and lymphatics?
A. calyx
B. hilus
C. pelvis
D. pyramid
Answer is B: Hilum is the name of the point of attachment between an organ
and its supply services.
2. Where are all of the glomeruli of the kidney located?
A. in the medulla
B. in the columns
C. in the pyramids
D. in the cortex
Answer is D: The tubules and collecting ducts extend into the medulla, but all
glomeruli are in the cortex.
3. What structure does the blood from the afferent arteriole enter?
A. the peritubular capillaries
B. the vasa recta
C. the glomerulus
D. Bowman’s capsule
Answer is C: Afferent (incoming) arteriole enters the glomerulus, the
efferent arteriole leaves the glomerulus.
4. Which part of the nephron is impermeable to water?
A. Proximal convoluted tubule
B. Distal convoluted tubule in the presence of ADH
C. Ascending limb of the loop of Henle
D. Descending limb of the loop of Henle
Answer is C: The ascending limb. Hence volume of filtrate does not change
as it passes through the ascending limb.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
11 Renal System 213

5. Solutes move from the blood in the glomerular capillaries into the
Bowman’s capsule due to which of the following influences?
A. osmotic pressure difference
B. diffusion down the concentration gradient
C. by active transport
D. hydrostatic pressure difference
Answer is D: The efferent (outgoing) arteriole has a smaller diameter than
the afferent arteriole, hence the glomerulus is a high pressure area. This aids
the movement of dissolved substances through the filtration membrane.
6. Which material is actively reabsorbed from the filtrate in the kidney tubule?
A. Na+
B. HCO3−
C. Cl−
D. H2O
Answer is A: All other substances are passively reabsorbed.
7. Which material is secreted into the filtrate in the kidney tubule?
A. H2O
B. urea
C. Na+
D. albumin
Answer is B: Urea (a waste product) is lipid soluble so can passively move
out of the filtrate into the tubule cells. It is secreted back into the filtrate to
effect its excretion.
8. Which of the following happens as we descend deeper into the kidney
medulla?
A. the concentration of the interstitial fluid doesn’t change
B. the concentration of the interstitial fluid increases
C. the concentration of the filtrate within the tubule increases
D. the concentration of the interstitial fluid decreases
Answer is B: Concentration of the interstitial fluid increases. Choice C is not
correct as the nephron tubule does not necessarily descend into the medulla.
9. What molecule catalyses the formation of angiotensin I?
A. carbonic anhydrase
B. calcitriol
C. erythropoietin
D. renin
Answer is D: Renin is an enzyme that catalyses the reaction that forms
angio- tensin I from angiotensinogen.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
214 11 Renal System

10. How are cortical nephrons different from juxtamedullary nephrons?

A. cortical nephrons lie almost entirely outside the renal medulla.
B. cortical nephrons have an associated vasa recta.
C. cortical nephrons have a longer tubule.
D. there are fewer cortical nephrons.
Answer is A: Cortical nephrons are situated almost entirely within the cortex,
while the far less numerous juxtamedullary nephrons have their glomeruli
adjacent to the medulla and extend their loop of Henle into the medulla.
11. Which part of the renal tubule is impermeable to water?
A. the ascending limb of the loop of Henle
B. the collecting duct
C. the proximal convoluted tubule
D. the thin portion of the loop of Henle
Answer is A: Water does not pass through the ascending limb. However sol-
utes (Na & Cl) do pass through
12. In the glomerulus, what is the method by which solutes are transferred from
the blood to the Bowman’s capsule?
A. diffusion
B. active transport
C. secretion
D. filtration
Answer is D: Filtration due to the pressure difference between the capillary
blood and fluid in the Bowman’s capsule.
13. How does the juxtaglomerular apparatus respond when systemic blood pres-
sure is too high?
A. the juxtaglomerular cells send a message to the afferent arteriole to dilate.
B. The macula densa sends a message to the efferent arteriole to constrict.
C. The macula densa sends a message to the afferent arteriole to constrict.
D. The granular cells release renin which causes systemic arterioles to
constrict.
Answer is C: Constricting the afferent arteriole will decrease the volume of
blood entering the glomerulus and hence the blood pressure in it. All other
choices will result in an increase in pressure within the glomerulus.
14. What is the body’s response to a rise in blood plasma osmotic pressure?
A. The anterior pituitary releases ADH which makes the renal tubule perme-
able to water.
B. The posterior pituitary releases ADH which makes the renal tubule
perme- able to water.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
11 Renal System 215

C. The juxtaglomerular apparatus releases renin which promotes diuresis

D. The glomerular filtration rate increases so more urine is produced.
Answer is B: ADH, from the posterior pituitary, would allow more water to
be reclaimed from the filtrate so that plasma osmotic pressure does not
increase further. Renin and its effects does not promote diuresis.
15. What is the kidney tubule’s response to a rise in blood pH?
A. Bicarbonate ions are created from carbonic acid and absorbed into the
blood.
B. Hydronium ions are secreted into the filtrate, where they are buffered by
bicarbonate ions in the filtrate.
C. Bicarbonate ions are secreted into the filtrate, while hydronium ions are
absorbed from the filtrate into the blood.
D. Hydronium ions are secreted into the filtrate, while bicarbonate ions are
absorbed from the filtrate into the blood.
Answer is C: A rise in blood pH means it is getting more alkaline. That is
there is too much bicarbonate in the blood. To counter this some bicarbonate
ions are secreted into the filtrate, while some hydronium ions are absorbed
from the filtrate into the tubule cells.
16. How does the composition of the filtrate change as it travels through the loop
of Henle?
A. In the ascending limb, the volume decreases and in the descending limb,
the concentration increases.
B. In the descending limb, the volume decreases and in the ascending limb,
the concentration decreases.
C. In the descending limb, the volume decreases and in the ascending limb,
the concentration increases.
D. In the ascending limb, the volume decreases and in the descending limb,
the concentration decreases.
Answer is B: The descending limb is permeable to water so water flows out
of the tubule decreasing filtrate volume. The ascending limb is impermeable
to water, so its volume does not change, however sodium, potassium and
chlo- ride ions are reabsorbed which decreases the concentration of the
filtrate.
17. What is the entry point to the kidney for the renal artery, renal vein, lymphat-
ics and nerves called?
A. renal pyramid
B. renal hilus
C. renal capsule
D. renal column
Answer is B: Hilus is a general term referring to the entry point (e.g. hilus of
the lung)

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
216 11 Renal System

18. In what part of the kidney are the glomeruli located?

A. In the cortex
B. In the medulla
C. In the hilus
D. In the minor calyces
Answer is A: Only the cortex contains glomeruli.
19. Four sections of the vasculature of the kidney tubule are listed below. Which
one lists them in correct order of blood flow from left to right?
A. efferent arteriole, glomerulus, afferent arteriole, peritubular capillaries.
B. afferent arteriole, glomerulus, efferent arteriole, peritubular capillaries.
C. peritubular capillaries, afferent arteriole, glomerulus, efferent arteriole.
D. glomerulus, afferent arteriole, peritubular capillaries, efferent venule.
Answer is B: The afferent arteriole carries blood into the glomerulus so must
be first.
20. What method does the glomerulus of the kidney nephron use to remove the
dissolved substances from the blood to the filtrate?
A. active transport
B. diffusion along the concentration gradient
C. high hydrostatic pressure
D. osmosis
Answer is C: The larger diameter of the afferent arteriole along with the
smaller diameter of the efferent arteriole creates a high pressure in the glom-
erulus which facilitates filtration of dissolved material into the Bowman’s
capsule.
21. If the glomerular filtration rate is too high, the macula densa sends a
message to the afferent arteriole. What is the effect of this message?
A. granular cells of arteriole walls release renin
B. afferent arteriole dilates
C. it inhibits the action of ATP and adenosine on the afferent arteriole
D. afferent arteriole constricts
Answer is D: Constricting the afferent arteriole will decrease the rate of flow
of blood into the glomerulus. This will decrease the GFR.
22. What is the effect of antidiuretic hormone on the kidney tubules?
A. It causes Na+ to be absorbed from the filtrate into the tubular cells.
B. It causes the concentration of urine to decrease.
C. It causes the filtrate volume to increase.
D. It causes the walls of the collecting duct to become permeable to water.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
11 Renal System 217

Answer is D: ADH causes more water channels (aquaporins) to be inserted

in the wall of the collecting duct. Hence the duct is more permeable to water.
23. The descending limb of the Loop of Henle is permeable to water so water
dif- fuses out of the descending limb into the interstitial fluid. What happens to
this water?
A. it flows through the renal papillae into the minor calyces to become urine.
B. it diffuses into the ascending limb of the Loop of Henle.
C. it diffuses into the peritubular capillaries and ascending vasa recta for
return to the blood.
D. it diffuses into the filtrate for elimination from the body.
Answer is C: Water (and solutes) that are reabsorbed from the filtrate return
to the blood stream via the peritubular capillaries and the vasa recta.
24. The concentration of blood is 280 to 300 mosmol/L, but may rise to 1200
mosmol/L in which situation?
A. In the vasa recta of the kidney
B. In severe dehydration
C. In the peritubular capillaries of the kidney
D. In severe over-hydration
Answer is A: Juxtamedullary nephrons have a capillary bed known as the
vasa recta which descends into the kidney medulla. As it does so the
concentration of he contained blood increases to 1200 mosmol/L.
25. Which one of the following is NOT produced by the kidneys?
A. Aldosterone
B. Renin
C. Erythropoietin
D. Calcitriol
Answer is A: Aldosterone is produced in the adrenal cortex (not the
kidneys). The kidneys, along with the skin and liver contribute to producing
calcitriol.
26. What is the collective term applied to the proximal and distal convoluted
tubules, the loop of Henle (i.e. the nephron loop) and the glomerular
capsule?
A. The renal corpuscle
B. The renal tubule
C. The nephron
D. The renal capsule
Answer is B: The nephron includes the glomerulus whereas the tubule does
not.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
218 11 Renal System

27. Which list of structures is presented in the correct order in which urine
passes through them on the way to the bladder?
A. Ureter, minor calyx, major calyx, renal pelvis, papilla
B. Renal pelvis, major calyx, minor calyx, papilla, ureter
C. Papilla, minor calyx, major calyx, renal pelvis, ureter
D. Minor calyx, major calyx, papilla, renal pelvis, ureter
Answer is C: Collecting ducts empty into the papilla, so the papilla must be
first.
28. When systemic blood pressure increases, how does the kidney respond to
maintain glomerular filtration rate?
A. The afferent arteriole dilates
B. The efferent arteriole constricts
C. The efferent arteriole dilates
D. The afferent arteriole constricts
Answer is D: An increase in BP stretches the walls of the efferent arteriole
which respond by constricting. The resulting decrease in diameter decreases
glomerular blood flow which keeps GFR within normal limits.
29. What may correctly be said of the juxtaglomerular apparatus (or complex)?
A. The juxtaglomerular cells are chemoreceptors
B. The granular cells are chemoreceptors
C. The macula densa cells are chemoreceptors
D. The macula densa cells are mechanoreceptors
Answer is C: The macula densa cells are chemoreceptors that respond to
changes in Na+ & Cl− ions. The granular cells are mechanoreceptors.
30. What part of the nephron performs the majority of the reabsorption of
materi- als from the filtrate?
A. The Bowman’s capsule and glomerulus
B. The loop of Henle (the nephron loop)
C. The distal convoluted tubule and collecting duct
D. The proximal convoluted tubule
Answer is D: The proximal convoluted tubule (the first part or the renal
tubule) absorbs most of the required material.
31. Which of the following mechanisms operates in the nephron to maintain pH
balance in the body?
A. Bicarbonate ions from the tubule cells are secreted into the filtrate, then H+
+ HCO3− → H2 CO3 → CO 2 + H 2O
B. In tubule cells CO2 + H2O → H2CO3 → H+ + HCO 3− then hydrogen ions
are secreted into the filtrate

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
11 Renal System 219

C. In tubule cells CO2 + H2O → H2CO3 → H+ + HCO 3− then hydrogen ions

are transported into the peritubular capillaries
D. In tubule cells CO2 + H2O → H2CO3 → H+ + HCO 3− then bicarbonate ions
are secreted into the filtrate
Answer is B: Carbon dioxide and water form hydronium and bicarbonate
ions, the hydronium ions being secreted into the filtrate for excretion in
urine.
32. What is the name of the tube that connects the bladder to the kidney?
A. renal tubule
B. ureter
C. urethra
D. collecting duct
Answer is B: Not to be confused with the urethra through which urine exits
the body.
33. Which of the following may be said of the renal medulla?
A. it is the more superficial part of the kidney.
B. it contains all of the glomeruli.
C. it produces adrenaline and noradrenaline.
D. it contains the pyramids and columns.
Answer is D: The medulla is deep to the cortex. In this region are many
blood vessel (in the columns) and the collecting ducts (in the pyramids)
34. What influences and structures facilitate blood filtration in the renal
corpuscle?
A. high osmotic pressure in the capillaries and sinusoidal capillaries
B. high hydrostatic pressure in the capillaries and fenestrated capillaries
C. high osmotic pressure in the capillaries and fenestrated capillaries
D. high hydrostatic pressure in the capillaries and sinusoidal capillaries
Answer is B: High hydrostatic pressure facilitates filtration and pores in the
capillary walls (fenestre) allow easy passage.
35. In which part of the nephron does most of the reabsorption of water and sol-
utes occur?
A. the collecting duct
B. the nephron loop (loop of Henle)
C. the vasa recta
D. the proximal convoluted tubule
Answer is D: The PCT absorbs the bulk of the water and solutes.
36. Which statement about kidney anatomy is correct?
A. The cortex is superficial to the medulla and contains all of the glomeruli.
B. The cortex is deep to the medulla and contains the collecting tubules.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
220 11 Renal System

C. The pyramids are in the cortex and contain the collecting tubules.
D. The pyramids are in the medulla and contain all of the glomeruli.
Answer is A: The cortex is superficial to the medulla. All glomeruli are in
the cortex. The medulla has the collecting ducts.
37. The renal tubule of the nephron includes which of the following structures?
A. Proximal convoluted tubule, vasa recta, Bowman’s capsule, collecting
duct.
B. Distal convoluted tubule, ascending limb of Loop of Henle, Bowman’s
capsule, proximal convoluted tubule.
C. Descending limb of Loop of Henle, collecting duct, distal convoluted
tubule, ascending limb of Loop of Henle.
D. Glomerulus, proximal convoluted tubule, distal convoluted tubule,
Bowman’s capsule.
Answer is B: Glomerulus, collecting duct and vasa recta are not part of the
tubule. The loop of Henle has both and ascending arm and a descending arm.
38. How does the descending limb of the loop of Henle differ from the
ascending limb?
A. the descending limb is impermeable to water but permeable to sodium
chloride.
B. the ascending limb is permeable to water but impermeable to sodium
chloride.
C. the descending limb is permeable to water but impermeable to sodium
chloride.
D. the ascending limb is permeable to both water and to sodium chloride.
Answer is C: The descending limb is permeable to water (the ascending limb
is not). The descending limb is impermeable to solutes except urea.
39. What effect is achieved by having an arteriole that supplies blood and
another that drains blood from the glomerulus?
A. oxygen rich blood can be supplied to the nephron after blood leaves the
glomerulus
B. the blood pressure within the glomerulus can be manipulated.
C. reabsorption of water and nutrients from the filtrate is facilitated.
D. the concentration gradient within the kidney’s medulla can be
maintained.
Answer is B: Arterioles have smooth muscle in their wall which allows them
to constrict and dilate, hence adjusting the flow through them and conse-
quently the blood pressure within them.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
11 Renal System 221

40. What is the resulting effect of renin being released by the kidney?
A. Angiotensin II is formed
B. aldosterone is released
C. macula densa sends paracrine message to afferent arterioles.
D. efferent arterioles are constricted
Answer is A: Renin catalyses the formation of angiotensin I from angioten-
sinogen. ACE then converts angiotensin I to angiotensin II. Aldosterone is
released from the adrenal cortex due to angiotensin II. Angiotensin II also
promotes systemic vasoconstriction (not just in efferent arteriole).
41. What is the effect on the kidney caused by increasing the release of ADH?
A. the collecting duct becomes more permeable to water
B. the ascending limb of the loop of Henle becomes impermeable to water
C. the descending limb of the loop of Henle becomes permeable to water
D. the collecting duct becomes impermeable to water.
Answer is A: Antidiuretic hormone prevents diuresis (decreases urine forma-
tion) by causing more water to be reabsorbed from the filtrate as it passes
through the collecting duct.
42. The kidneys produce all of the following EXCEPT one. Which one?
A. erythropoietin
B. angiotensinogen
C. hydronium ions
D. bicarbonate ions
Answer is B: Angiotensinogen is produced in the liver. Renin (produced in
the kidneys) converts it to angiotensin I.
43. Which one of the following is part of the renal tubule?
A. glomerulus
B. vasa recta
C. collecting duct
D. macula densa
Answer is D: The macula densa consists of cells in the wall of the distal con-
voluted tubule at the juxtaglomerular apparatus.
44. From which part of the nephron is the greatest proportion of Na+ absorbed
from the filtrate?
A. the Bowman’s capsule (i.e. renal capsule)
B. the proximal convoluted tubule
C. the ascending limb of the loop of Henle
D. the distal convoluted tubule
Answer is B: The PCT absorbs about 65 % of the sodium from the filtrate.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
222 11 Renal System

45. Complete the following sentence correctly. Angiotensin II

A. stimulates the adrenal glands to release aldosterone
B. increases potassium reabsorption from the filtrate
C. increases sodium (Na+) excretion at the kidneys.
D. reduces our thirst
Answer is A: Aldosterone is produced by the adrenal cortex in response to
angiotensin II. A II also stimulates thirst.
46. What part of the renal tubule is NOT able to reabsorb water?
A. the descending limb of the loop of Henle
B. the proximal convoluted tubule
C. the ascending limb of the loop of Henle
D. the distal convoluted tubule
Answer is C: The ascending limb is impermeable to water.
47. The influence (or influences) that drives blood filtration in the kidney is
A. difference in osmolarity between blood in the glomerulus and filtrate in
the Bowman’s capsule
B. fluid pressure difference between blood in the glomerulus and filtrate in
the Bowman’s capsule
C. the osmotic pressure difference between blood in the glomerulus and fil-
trate in the Bowman’s capsule
D. diffusion along the concentration gradient between blood and filtrate, and
active transport
Answer is B: Filtration occurs because of a pressure difference. Osmotic
pres- sure does not drive the process.
48. What does the renal system consists of?
A. 2 kidneys, 2 urethra, bladder, 1 ureter.
B. 2 adrenal glands, 2 kidneys, 1 ureter, 2 urethra, bladder.
C. 2 adrenal glands, 2 kidneys, 2 ureters, 2 urethra, bladder.
D. 2 kidneys, 1 urethra, bladder, 2 ureters.
Answer is D: There are 2 ureters (from kidney to bladder) and one urethra
(from bladder to outside).
49. Which of the statements about the capillaries of the glomerulus is NOT true?
A. glomerular capillaries are fenestrated (i.e. porous).
B. blood enters and leaves the glomerulus via arterioles.
C. the blood pressure in glomerular capillaries is higher (55 mmHg) than in
the capillaries in the rest of the body.
D. glomerular capillaries have smooth muscle in their walls.
Answer is D: Capillary walls are made of endothelial cells, there is no
smooth muscle.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
11 Renal System 223

50. Which hormone causes an increase in permeability to water in the collecting

ducts of the kidney?
A. antidiuretic hormone
B. aldosterone
C. angiotensin II
D. atrial natriuretic hormone
Answer is A: ADH. If the collecting ducts are permeable to water, more
water will be reclaimed from the filtrate. This will decrease its volume and
there will be less diuresis. Hence anti-diuretic hormone.
51. Which hormone causes increased sodium reabsorption in the kidney?
A. angiotensin I
B. antidiuretic hormone
C. vasopressin
D. aldosterone
Answer is D: Aldosterone stimulates the active absorption of sodium (and the
secretion of potassium) from the filtrate.
52. Which type of anti-hypertensive drug aims to prevent vasoconstriction?
A. beta blockers
B. diuretics
C. ACE inhibitors
D. calcium channel blockers
Answer is D: The contraction of smooth muscle causes vasoconstriction.
Calcium is necessary for muscle contraction. A Ca channel blocker prevents
Ca entering the cytoplasm and so prevents vasoconstriction.
53. The kidney produces all but one of the following. Which one?
A. calcitriol
B. atrial natriuretic peptide
C. renin
D. bicarbonate ions
Answer is B: ANP is produced by the walls of the heart’s atria. It inhibits the
absorption of sodium from the filtrate.
54. The filtrate that is formed in the kidney contains all of the following except
one. Which one?
A. metabolic wastes
B. electrolytes
C. plasma proteins
D. nutrients
Answer is C: Plasma proteins are too large to pass through the filtration slits
of the glomerular capillaries.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
224 11 Renal System

55. From which arteriole does blood enter the peritubular capillaries of the
nephron?
A. arcuate
B. efferent
C. afferent
D. renal
Answer is B: Efferent arteriole leaves the glomerulus and enters the
peritubu- lar capillaries.
56. What is the term applied to the first process in urine formation, where some
components of blood pass into the Bowman’s capsule?
A. filtration
B. active transport
C. dialysis
D. osmosis
Answer is A: Filtration is the first process driven by a fluid pressure gradient.
57. To what does the “juxtaglomerular apparatus” refer?
A. to those nephrons whose loop of Henle penetrate deep into the medulla
B. to the lamina densa and podocytes that form filtration slits around the
cap- illaries of the glomerulus
C. to the capillaries that surround the loop of Henle of juxtamedullary
nephrons
D. to certain cells of the distal convoluted tubule where it touches the
afferent arteriole.
Answer is D: The juxtaglomerular = macula densa cells (of the DCT wall)
and granular cells (of the afferent arteriole wall).
58. In what part (or parts) of the renal tubule reabsorb the least material from the
filtrate?
A. the distal convoluted tubule
B. the loop of Henle
C. the proximal convoluted tubule
D. the distal convoluted tubule and the collecting duct together
Answer is D: By the time the filtrate has passed through the PCT, loop of
Henle the majority of the reabsorption that is going to happen has happened.
Nevertheless, the DCT & collecting duct do reabsorb some electrolytes and
water.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
11 Renal System 225

59. By what name is the condition where nitrogenous wastes accumulate in the
blood known?
A. anuria
B. uremia
C. polyuria
D. oliguriacv
Answer is B: Uremia. The other terms describe the volume of urine
produced. Anuria = no urine; polyuria = far more than normal; oliguria, less
than normal.
60. Which statement about kidney anatomy is correct? Renal pyramids are in the:
A. medulla and end in a papilla that empties into a minor calyx
B. medulla and end in a column that empties into a major calyx
C. cortex and end in a papilla that empties into a minor calyx
D. cortex and end in a column that empties into a minor calyx
Answer is A: Pyramids for the medulla. They contain collecting ducts that
deliver urine a minor calyx via a papilla.
61. The kidneys produce all of the following except one. Which one?
A. the enzyme renin
B. the hormone erythropoietin
C. antidiuretic hormone
D. the vitamin calcitriol
Answer is C: ADH is produced in the hypothalamus and released from the
posterior pituitary.
62. In the nephron, if the afferent arteriole dilates and the efferent arteriole con-
stricts, which of the following would be true?
A. The glomerular filtration rate would decrease.
B. The pressure in the glomerulus will decrease.
C. The absorption of sodium and chloride ions form the filtrate would
increase.
D. Before these events, the granular cells would have released renin.
Answer is D: The granular cells of the afferent arteriole respond to low blood
pressure by releasing renin. As a result, angiotensin II would form which
causes systemic vasoconstriction, which increases blood pressure, which
dilates the afferent arteriole and increases glomerular filtration rate.
63. The majority of material reabsorbed from the filtrate is reabsorbed from the
renal tubule:
A. after the Loop of Henle
B. in the descending limb of the Loop of Henle

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
226 11 Renal System

C. before the Loop of Henle

D. in the ascending limb of the Loop of Henle
Answer is C: The majority of reabsorption occurs in the proximal convoluted
tubule which is before the loop of Henle.
64. What effect does aldosterone have?
A. increases the absorption of Na+ from the kidney tubules.
B. makes the kidney tubules more permeable to water.
C. catalyses the formation of angiotensin I.
D. blocks the release of ADH
Answer is A: Aldosterone stimulates the active absorption of sodium from
the filtrate (and the secretion of potassium).
65. The kidneys produce all of the following EXCEPT one. Which one?
A. erythropoietin
B. aldosterone
C. renin
D. active vitamin D
Answer is B: Aldosterone is produced in the adrenal cortex.
66. Which statement about the descending limb of the Loop of Henle is true?
A. it is freely permeable to water
B. it is impermeable to water
C. it is impermeable to water when ANP is present
D. it is permeable to water when ADH is present
Answer is A: The ascending limb is impermeable to water. ADH and ANP
have no effect on the loop of Henle.
67. In which structure does blood filtration in the kidney occur? The:
A. macula densa
B. renal corpuscle
C. major calyx
D. vasa recta
Answer is B: Solutes are filtered out of the blood in the glomerular
capillaries into the Bowman’s capsule. Together the two structures form the
renal corpuscle.
68. From which part of the nephron is the greatest proportion of Na+ absorbed
from the filtrate?
A. the proximal convoluted tubule
B. the ascending limb of the loop of Henle

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
11 Renal System 227

C. the distal convoluted tubule

D. the collecting duct in the presence of aldosterone
Answer is A: The PCT absorbs the greatest proportion of all things that are
reabsorbed from the filtrate. It is the first part of the renal tube that filtrate
passes through.
69. What is the purpose of ANP in urine production?
A. stimulate the reabsorption of Na+
B. stimulate the reabsorption of Ca++
C. inhibit the reabsorption of Na+
D. stimulate the reabsorption of water
Answer is C: ANP triggers the dilation of the afferent arterioles and constric-
tion of efferent arterioles which increases GFR. It also decreases sodium
reab- sorption from the filtrate. Hence urine volume increases (and blood
volume and pressure decreases).
70. What is the term used to describe the production of an insufficient volume of
urine?
A. polyuria
B. uremia
C. anuria
D. oliguria
Answer is D: Oliguria is the production of about 50–500 ml urine per day.
Anuria is producing less than 50 ml per day.
71. By what process(es) do water and solutes move from blood in the
glomerulus into the Bowman’s capsule?
A. diffusion
B. osmosis and diffusion
C. filtration
D. dialysis
Answer is C: Filtration which is driven by the hydrostatic pressure difference
between blood (at high pressure) in the glomerular capillaries and the filtrate
(at lower pressure) in the Bowman’s capsule.
72. Complete the following sentence correctly. Antidiuretic hormone
A. stimulates our thirst
B. causes the wall of the collecting duct of the nephron to increase in
perme- ability to water.
C. increases sodium (Na+) excretion at the kidneys.
D. stimulates the adrenal glands to release aldosterone

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
228 11 Renal System

Answer is B: Increased permeability of the collecting duct means that more

water will be reclaimed from the filtrate. Angiotensin II stimulates thirst. ANP
diminishes thirst and increases sodium secretion at the kidneys.
73. Complete the following sentence correctly. Angiotensin II
A. stimulates the adrenal glands to release aldosterone
B. causes the wall of the collecting duct of the nephron to increase in
perme- ability to water
C. increases sodium (Na+) excretion at the kidneys.
D. reduces our thirst
Answer is A: ADH increases the permeability of the collecting duct to water.
ANP diminishes thirst and increases sodium secretion at the kidneys.
74. Complete the following sentence correctly. Atrial natriuretic peptide
A. causes the wall of the collecting duct of the nephron to increase in
perme- ability to water
B. increases sodium (Na+) excretion at the kidneys.
C. causes peripheral vasoconstriction
D. stimulates the adrenal glands to release aldosterone
Answer is B: ADH increases the permeability of the collecting duct to water.
Angiotensin II stimulates the adrenal glands to release aldosterone and pro-
motes peripheral vasoconstriction.
75. What is the place where the arteries, veins, lymphatics and nerves enter or
leave the kidney called?
A. The carina
B. The reno-atrio notch
C. The renal pelvis
D. The hilus
Answer is D: Carina is in the trachea; renal pelvis refers to the ureter; reno-
atrio notch does not exist.
76. The nephrons of the kidney consist of
A. Bowman’s capsule, a loop of Henle, a collecting duct and a renal tubule
B. a juxtaglomerular apparatus and collecting duct
C. a glomerulus and a juxtaglomerular apparatus
D. a glomerulus, a proximal convoluted tubule, loop of Henle, and a distal
convoluted tubule
Answer is D: The nephron includes the glomerulus and renal tubule. The
later includes the Bowman’s capsule. Choice D is best even though
Bowman’s cap- sule is not listed.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
11 Renal System 229

77. Which list has the blood vessels of the nephron in the correct order of blood
flow?
A. afferent arteriole, glomerulus, efferent arteriole, peritubular capillaries,
vasa recta
B. efferent arteriole, glomerulus, afferent arteriole, peritubular capillaries,
vasa recta
C. afferent arteriole, vasa recta, efferent arteriole, peritubular capillaries,
glomerulus
D. afferent arteriole, peritubular capillaries, efferent arteriole, glomerulus,
vasa recta
Answer is A: Afferent arteriole bring blood into the glomerulus, then glo-
merular capillaries are next.
78. What part of the renal tubule does NOT reabsorb water?
A. the juxtaglomerular apparatus
B. the ureter
C. the ascending limb of the loop of Henle
D. the collecting duct
Answer is C: The ascending limb is the only listed structure that is part of the
renal tubule.
79. The influence(s) that drives blood filtration in the kidney is
A. dialysis through a semi-permeable membrane due to the different
osmolar- ity of blood and filtrate
B. fluid pressure difference between blood and filtrate
C. osmotic pressure difference between blood and filtrate
D. diffusion along a concentration gradient between blood and filtrate, and
active transport
Answer is B: The term “filtration” refers to a process that is driven by a pres-
sure difference.
80. What does the presence of aldosterone in the blood cause?
A. calcium to be absorbed from the DCT
B. the collecting duct to become permeable to water
C. more bicarbonate to be formed in the tubule cells
D. more sodium to be reabsorbed from the DCT
Answer is D: Sodium ions are reabsorbed from the filtrate, Aldosterone pro-
motes greater reclamation of sodium from the DCT.
81. What does the term “oliguria” refer to?
A. a daily urine production of much more than 2 litres
B. a daily urine production of less than 500 ml

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
230 11 Renal System

C. production of less than 50 ml of urine in a day

D. the condition of excessive concentration of urea in the blood
Answer is B: Oliguria refers to a less than normal daily volume of urine
being produced. Normal is about two litres per day.
82. Glomerular filtration rate can be altered by all of the following EXCEPT
one. Which one?
A. constriction of renal tubule by macula densa
B. vasoconstriction of afferent arteriole
C. decrease in concentration of plasma proteins
D. vasoconstriction of efferent arteriole
Answer is A: Macula densa does not constrict the tubule. A decrease in
plasma protein would increase the osmotic pressure opposing glomerular
filtration.
83. Filtrate passes through each of the structures of the renal tubule listed below.
Which list has the structures in the correct order?
A. proximal convoluted tubule, descending limb, ascending limb, distal con-
voluted tubule, collecting duct.
B. Bowman’s capsule, proximal convoluted tubule, ascending limb, distal
convoluted tubule, descending limb.
C. collecting duct, proximal convoluted tubule, descending limb, ascending
limb, distal convoluted tubule.
D. proximal convoluted tubule, distal convoluted tubule, descending limb,
ascending limb, collecting duct.
Answer is A: The descending and ascending limbs should be between
the PCT and DCT, while the collecting duct is last.
84. What is the role of aldosterone?
A. to convert angiotensinogen into angiotensin I.
B. to inhibit the absorption of Na+.
C. to promote the absorption of Na+.
D. to promote the absorption of Ca++.
Answer is C: Sodium ions are always reabsorbed from the filtrate, Aldosterone
promotes greater reclamation of sodium from the DCT.
85. Which one of the statements about the collecting ducts is true? The
collecting duct absorbs:
A. calcium if parathyroid hormone is present.
B. water if antidiuretic hormone is present.
C. sodium if atrial natriuretic hormone is NOT present.
D. urea.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
11 Renal System 231

Answer is B: ADH cause aquaporins (water channels) to be inserted into the

collecting duct walls. The collecting duct is impermeable to the other
substances.
86. One way to increase the glomerular filtration rate is to dilate:
A. the afferent arteriole and to constrict the efferent arteriole.
B. the efferent arteriole and to constrict the afferent arteriole.
C. both the afferent arteriole and the efferent arteriole.
D. the efferent arteriole and to increase the permeability of the capillary
endothelium.
Answer is A: Dilating the afferent arteriole increases the volume of blood
flowing into the glomerulus, while constricting the efferent arteriole
decreases the volume of blood leaving the glomerulus. This means water and
solutes must leave the glomerulus and enter the Bowman’s capsule, that is
GFR increases.
87. The nephron of the kidney consists of which of the following structures?
A. glomerulus, renal tubule and collecting duct.
B. bowman’s capsule, proximal convoluted tubule, loop of Henle, and distal
convoluted tubule.
C. glomerulus and renal tubule
D. renal tubule and collecting duct.
Answer is C: The glomerulus and renal tubule together constitute the
nephron.
88. What name is given to the blood vessel that drains blood from the
glomerulus after filtration?
A. vasa recta
B. afferent arteriole
C. efferent arteriole
D. efferent vein
Answer is C: Efferent means outgoing.
89. Through which structure must the filtrate move to enter the Bowman’s
capsule from the glomerulus?
A. The capillary endothelial cell walls
B. The capillary endothelial wall and basement membrane
C. The capillary endothelial wall, basement membrane and podocytes
D. The capillary endothelial wall, basement membrane, podocytes and the
vasa recta
Answer is C: Together these three structures form the filtration membrane

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
232 11 Renal System

90. What is the function of angiotensin II?

A. causes constriction of systemic arteries.
B. causes the collecting ducts to become permeable to water.
C. causes the formation of atrial natriuretic hormone.
D. causes constriction of the efferent arterioles.
Answer is A: Angiotensin II promotes general vasoconstriction (which raises
blood pressure), and stimulates the adrenal cortex to release aldosterone.
91. What is the term meaning the production of urine?
A. oliguria
B. diuresis
C. hypouria
D. anuria
Answer is B: A drug that promotes urine production is a diuretic, while one
that does the reverse is an antidiuretic.
92. The renal tubule reabsorbs all of the following ions except one. Which one?
A. Na+
B. HCO3−
C. Cl−
D. NH4+
Answer is D: Ammonium ions are a waste product so are not reabsorbed.
93. Which section of the renal tubule is permeable to urea?
A. descending limb of the loop of Henle.
B. ascending limb of the loop of Henle.
C. collecting duct in the presence of aldosterone.
D. proximal convoluted tubule.
Answer is D: PCT is permeable to urea, so as volume of filtrate in PCT
decreases due to absorption of water, urea concentration in filtrate increases.
This promotes passive reabsorption of urea along its concentration gradient.
94. What name is given to the blood vessel that connects the capillaries of the
glomerulus to the vasa recta?
A. macula densa
B. afferent arteriole
C. efferent arteriole
D. afferent vein
Answer is C: The efferent arteriole transports blood from the glomerulus to
the peritubular capillaries and vasa recta.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
11 Renal System 233

95. The gradient in osmotic concentration of the interstitial fluid in the medulla
of the kidney is caused by:
A. blood flowing through the vasa recta.
B. Na+ and Cl− pumped out of the ascending limb of the loop of Henle and
urea.
C. Na+ and Cl− pumped out of the descending limb of the loop of Henle and
urea.
D. water diffusing out of the descending limb of the loop of Henle and
aldosterone.
Answer is B: Sodium and chloride leave from the ascending limb not the
descending limb.
96. Which of the following chemicals is produced by the kidney?
A. angiotensinogen
B. bicarbonate ions
C. sodium ions
D. vitamin C
Answer is B: carbon dioxide and water react to form carbonic acid which
dis- sociates into hydronium ions and bicarbonate ions. The bicarbonate ions
are transported to the blood while the hydronium is excreted in acidic urine.
97. What could be concluded of a person who (during the previous three hours)
has produced a total of 100 ml of urine that is bright yellow and has a strong
(but not unpleasant) odour?
A. They are well hydrated.
B. Their urine will have a high specific gravity.
C. They are an uncontrolled diabetic.
D. They have more than the usual concentration of bilirubin in their urine.
Answer is B: 100 ml/3 h is a low rate of urine production, indicating
dehydra- tion. Hence the urine will be concentrated as the body is conserving
water and its SG will be high.
98. In which section of the renal tubule is most water reabsorbed?
A. descending limb of the loop of Henle.
B. ascending limb of the loop of Henle.
C. collecting duct.
D. proximal convoluted tubule.
Answer is D: About 2/3 of water in the filtrate is absorbed from the PCT.
99. Under what conditions will the kidney produce concentrated urine? If:
A. glomerular filtration rate is low.
B. glomerular filtration rate is high.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
234 11 Renal System

C. atrial natriuretic peptide and aldosterone are present in blood.

D. antidiuretic hormone and aldosterone are present in the blood.
Answer is D: Aldosterone causes sodium to be absorbed from the filtrate at the
DCT and collecting duct. This sets up an osmotic gradient. ADH makes the
tubule more permeable to water. Hence water can move from the filtrate into
the tubule cells along the osmotic gradient.
100. Which one of the following is a function of the renal system?
A. produce bile
B. produce the enzyme renin
C. produce the hormone aldosterone
D. produce vitamin K
Answer is B: Renin is produced in the kidney.
101. The functional unit of the kidney that filters blood and produces urine is
called the:
A. medulla
B. glomerulus
C. neurone
D. nephron
Answer is D: the nephron performs all of the kidney functions.
102. In the kidney, the filtrate passes through several structures on its way to
becoming urine. Which of the following lists presents these structures in the
correct order?
A. collecting duct, glomerulus, proximal convoluted tubule, distal
convoluted tubule, loop of Henle.
B. proximal convoluted tubule, collecting duct, glomerulus, loop of Henle,
distal convoluted tubule.
C. glomerulus, proximal convoluted tubule, loop of Henle, distal convoluted
tubule, collecting duct.
D. glomerulus, collecting duct, proximal convoluted tubule, distal
convoluted tubule, loop of Henle.
Answer is C: Glomerulus must precede the collecting duct. Collecting duct
must be after the DCT.
103. Which of the following statements about the structures in the loop of Henle
is correct?
A. its ascending limb is permeable to water
B. its descending limb is impermeable to urea
C. its descending limb is impermeable to water
D. its ascending limb is impermeable to solutes
Answer is B: The thin descending limb is impermeable to urea.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
11 Renal System 235

104. If aldosterone is present in the blood, what happens in the distal convoluted
tubule?
A. sodium ions are reabsorbed from the filtrate.
B. calcium ions are reabsorbed from the filtrate.
C. sodium ions are secreted into the filtrate.
D. bicarbonate ions are reabsorbed from the filtrate.
Answer is A: Aldosterone promotes the absorption of sodium from the
filtrate.
105. What is renin?
A. an enzyme released by the juxtaglomerular cells of the kidney when arte-
rial pressure falls.
B. it catalyses the formation of angiotensin II in the lungs.
C. it is a rapid acting, intense vasoconstrictor of arterioles.
D. a protein that stimulates the adrenal glands to release aldosterone.
Answer is A: The JG cells produce renin which leads to angiotensin II being
formed which will cause blood pressure to rise.
106. The density of water is 1.00 g/ml and it has a specific gravity of 1.000.
Which of the following is most likely to be the specific gravity of a urine
sample?
A. 1.000
B. 1.015
C. 0.980
D. 1.020 g/ml
Answer is B: SG has no unit so choice D is wrong. Choice C cannot be
correct as the density is less than that of water.
107. Which of the following are organic wastes produced by the body?
A. Uric acid and ammonium ions
B. Amino acids and potassium ions
C. Albumin and globulin
D. Urea and sodium ions
Answer is A: Ammonium ions are produced when amino acids are deami-
nated. Sodium is not organic.
108. What is indicated if the specific gravity of a patient’s urine is high?
A. the patient has kidney disease
B. the urine’s concentration is high
C. the patient is well hydrated
D. the urine density is low
Answer is B: High urine concentration correspond to a high SG.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
236 11 Renal System

109. Which ion does aldosterone stimulate the kidneys to reabsorb?

A. calcium
B. sodium
C. potassium
D. bicarbonate
Answer is B: Sodium absorption is what aldosterone promotes.
110. If a urine specific gravity was measured to be 1.03, an interpretation would
be that:
A. the person was dehydrated
B. the person was well hydrated
C. the urine sample had a density less than water
D. the urine was dilute
Answer is A: 1.03 is at the upper limit of urine SG, indicating that the kidney
is conserving water so the person is dehydrated.
111. If a urine specific gravity was measured to be 1.003, an interpretation would
be that:
A. the person was dehydrated
B. the person was well hydrated
C. the urine sample had a density less than water
D. the urine was concentrated
Answer is B: 1.003 is close to the lower limit of urine SG, indicating that the
kidney is not conserving water so the person is well hydrated.
112. Which of the following statements about urine specific gravity is WRONG?
A. if urine specific gravity is 1.003, the urine is dilute.
B. a urine specific gravity value of 1.015 = 1015 mmol/L.
C. if urine specific gravity is 1.030, the person is dehydrated.
D. a specific gravity value of 1.010 is equal to a urine density of 1.010 g/ml.
Answer is B: Urine SG is the same value as urine density in g/ml, but
without the units.
113. Given that the specific gravity of a urine sample is 1.009, which of the
follow- ing statements is correct?
A. the patient is dehydrated
B. the sample contains 1.009 mmol/L of dissolved particles
C. the sample contains 1.009 millimole of dissolved solutes
D. the urine has a density of 1.009 g/ml
Answer is D: SG is a measure of urine density (or concentration). It is the
ratio of urine density to water density, so has no units.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
Chapter 12
Cardiovascular System

12.1 Blood

Humans have between 4 and 7 litres of blood. Fifty five percent of this volume is
plasma which is an aqueous solution of proteins, blood clotting factors, dissolved
ions, wastes, dissolved gases, glucose and cholesterol. Blood also contains red
blood cells (erythrocytes), platelets and 5 types of white blood cells (leucocytes).
They are: neutrophils, lymphocytes, monocytes, eosinophils and basophils. In
addi- tion blood has three buffer systems: the phosphate; the carbonic
acid/bicarbonate system and the protein buffer which maintains blood pH between
7.35 and 7.45.
Blood transports: O2 from the lungs to the body’s cells by binding O 2 to haemo-
globin; CO2 from cells to the lungs; nitrogenous waste from cells to kidneys and
sweat glands; absorbed nutrients from the small intestine to the liver and to cells;
and hormones from endocrine system to target cells. Blood also transfers heat
around the body. Blood is able to coagulate to minimise blood loss when a vessel
is damaged and contains antibodies and complement proteins to defend against
bacteria.
Blood cells are made in the active (red) bone marrow from stem cells called
hae- moctyoblasts by the process known as haemopoiesis. The sequence of events
that lead to of blood clotting is known as haemostasis, while bleeding is known as
a haemorrhage. Oxygen is transported attached to haemoglobin within the rbc– do
you see a pattern yet in the words that refer to blood?
Blood coagulation occurs when a clot of insoluble fibrin is formed from
fibrino- gen. The transformation of fibrinogen is produced by the enzyme
thrombin. However thrombin is present in blood as the inactive prothrombin
(factor II). Prothrombin is converted to thrombin by prothrombinase. However this
enzyme is not present in blood either until activated by factor X. Factor X is
unable to active prothrombin until it unites with molecules that are produced either
by the “intrinsic pathway”’ or the “extrinsic pathway” following damage to a
blood vessel. This complicated arrangement ensures that all of the factors required
to coagulate blood

Physiology,
© Springer Science+Business Media Singapore 2016 DOI
M. Caon, Examination Questions and Answers in Basic Anatomy and 10.1007/978-
ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
981-10-2332-3_12
237

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
238 12 Cardiovascular System

are ready to go, but don’t start the coagulation process until a blood vessel has
been damaged.
Blood is such a complex liquid that it is easier to transfuse type-matched
donated blood into a patient rather than to attempt to synthesise it. Eight different
blood types are recognised within the ABO and Rh(D) system based on the
antigens that occur on the plasma membrane of the rbc: A antigen present, or B
antigen present or both or neither. Then, whether the D antigen of the Rh system is
present (posi- tive) or not (negative), doubles the four ABO types. If the donated
blood is not matched to the recipient’s type, the antibodies in the recipient’s blood
plasma will attack the antigens on the donated rbc causing them to agglutinate
(clump together).
1. To which of the following would the term “white cell” NOT be applied?
A. erythrocyte
B. leucocyte
C. lymphocyte
D. monocyte
Answer is A: An erythrocyte is a red blood cell
2. In the haemostasis process, what forms as a result of the extrinsic and intrinsic
pathways?
A. fibrin
B. thrombin
C. a platelet plug
D. prothrombinase
Answer is D: The extrinsic and intrinsic pathways form “prothrombinase”
(also called prothrombin activator) from factor X.
3. The blood group known as the ABO system is based on the presence of what
proteins on blood cells?
A. antibodies
B. antigens
C. agglutinins
D. immunoglobulins
Answer is B: Antigens are on the membrane of the rbc. The other three terms
all describe the same thing, antibodies that are circulating in the plasma.
4. What is found in blood serum that is also in blood plasma?
A. blood cells
B. platelets
C. plasma proteins
D. clotting factors
Answer is C: Plasma proteins (except fibrinogen) are in plasma and in serum.
Serum = plasma minus the clotting factors. Blood cells and platelets are not in
plasma.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.1 Blood 239

5. What is the term “formed elements” used to mean in a description of blood?

A. white blood cells, red blood cells and platelets
B. blood plasma
C. blood serum
D. the clotting factors in blood
Answer is A: Formed elements are the non-liquid or solute parts of the blood.
6. What is the SECOND step in the three phases of haemostasis listed below?
A. The vascular phase
B. The intrinsic pathway
C. The extrinsic pathway
D. The platelet phase
Answer is D: The three phases are: vascular phase, platelet phase, coagulation
phase (which, in turn has 3 steps).
7. What type of blood may a patient with blood type “B+” be infused with? Any
blood that is
A. positive for rhesus antigen D
B. negative for rhesus antigen D
C. negative for antigen B
D. negative for antigen A
Answer is D: A patient that is B + may receive B+, B−, O+ or O− blood because
those types do not have antigen A in the plasma.
8. What is the first process that occurs after a blood vessel is damaged?
A. coagulation
B. platelet plug formation
C. vasoconstriction
D. haemolysis
Answer is C: Almost immediately (within 2 secs) after a blood vessel is cut
the vessel walls contract in a spasm to slow the flow of blood (vessel diameter
decreases).
9. Which blood cells are involved in protecting the body from pathogens and
for- eign cells?
A. erythrocytes
B. leucocytes
C. platelets
D. haemoglobin
Answer is B: Leucocytes (white blood cells) include NK (natural killer), T &
B lymphocytes & macrophages & microphages.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
240 12 Cardiovascular System

10. Which individuals can receive any type of blood and are considered universal
recipients?
A. A+
B. O−
C. AB+
D. B−
Answer is C: People with AB + blood do not have agglutinins (antibodies)
against A, B, or D in their plasma. Hence can receive any blood without
causing the rbc in the donated blood to clump.
11. Which is the most abundant plasma protein?
A. alpha- and beta- globulins
B. albumin
C. mitochondria
D. haemoglobin
Answer is B: About 58 % of plasma proteins are albumins. Haemoglobin is a
protein but it is contained within the rbc.
12. Which characteristic of blood refers to the concentration of solutes?
A. salinity
B. pH
C. osmolality
D. viscosity
Answer is C: Osmolality is the number of osmoles (osmol) of solute per kilo-
gram of solvent. (osmolarity (with an “r”) is defined as the number of osmoles
of solute per litre of solution).
13. Which type of white blood cell is responsible for engulfing pathogens during
phagocytosis?
A. thrombocyte
B. neutrophil
C. erythrocyte
D. basophil
Answer is B: Neutrophils are microphages – phagocytes of bacteria.
Thrombocytes and erythrocytes are not wbc.
14. What does “Rhesus positive” refer to?
A. The presence of antigen D on the surface of red blood cells
B. The final factor involved in blood clotting
C. The presence of the rhesus antibody/agglutinin in the blood
D. A deficiency of Factor VIII that results in haemophilia
Answer is A: Rh factor, Rh positive and Rh negative refer to the D antigen
only. If the antigen is present on your rbc, you are called Rh-positive (you
have the Rh factor).

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.1 Blood 241

15. What are red blood cells primarily composed of?

A. alpha- and beta- globulins
B. albumin
C. mitochondria
D. haemoglobin
Answer is D: About one third of the mass of a rbc is haemoglobin. Choices A
& B are plasma proteins and are not in rbc.
16. Which is the LEAST common type of white blood cell?
A. lymphocyte
B. basophil
C. thrombocyte
D. neutrophil
Answer is B: Less than 1 % of wbc are basophils. Neutrophils are the most
common. Thrombocytes are not wbc, or even cells.
17. In the process of haemostasis, which phase involves the intrinsic and extrinsic
pathways?
A. the platelet phase
B. the clot lysis phase
C. the vascular phase
D. the coagulation phase
Answer is D: The clotting (coagulation phase) has these two pathways.
18. In haemostasis, which molecule polymerises to become the insoluble blood
clot?
A. factor X
B. thrombin
C. fibrin
D. plasmin
Answer is C: Fibrin is a monomer that polymerises to form a “soft clot”, then
crosslinking between fibrin produces a stable, web-like “hard clot”.
19. Which enzyme converts fibrinogen to fibrin?
A. serotonin
B. thrombin
C. renin
D. secretin
Answer is B: Thrombin is the enzyme. It is not present until prothrombinase
converts prothrombin to thrombin.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
242 12 Cardiovascular System

20. Which of the following is NOT a macrophage?

A. Kupffer cell
B. Monocyte
C. Dendrocyte
D. Megakaryocyte
Answer is D: A megakaryocyte is the cell that produces the membrane
covered cell fragments known as platelets. It is not a macrophage. A
dendrocyte is also known as a Langerhans cell or a granstein cell.
21. What can be said about a person who has the “A” antigen on their red blood
cells?
A. their blood contains anti-B agglutinins
B. their blood contains anti-A agglutinins
C. their blood contains anti-A and anti-B agglutinins
D. their blood contains neither anti-A nor anti-B agglutinins
Answer is A: Their blood contains anti-B agglutinins. If you have the A
antigen on your rbc, you cannot have the anti-A agglutinin in your plasma or
you would agglutinate your own blood.
22. Which one of the following is NOT a plasma protein?
A. keratin
B. albumin
C. ferritin
D. globulin
Answer is A: Keratin is the protein that the stratum corneum of the skin, and
that hair and nails are made of.
23. What substance is produced by the first step in the blood clotting
(coagulation) process?
A. thrombin
B. prothrombin
C. factor X
D. prothrombinase
Answer is D: Prothrombinase is made from factor X. It then acts on prothrom-
bin to form thrombin.
24. Which statement about neutrophils is correct?
A. they have no nucleus
B. they contain haemoglobin
C. they function as a body defence mechanism
D. eosinophils are one type of neutrophil
Answer is C: Neutrophils do have a nucleus but don’t have haemoglobin.
Eosinophils are a type of wbc as are neutrophils but they are not the same.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.1 Blood 243

25. What are red blood cells also known as?

A. erythrocytes
B. thrombocytes
C. monocytes
D. eosinophils
Answer is A: rbc = erythrocytes (erythroid means red)
26. In blood clotting, what activates “factor X”
A. prothrombinase
B. thrombin
C. the extrinsic pathway
D. tissue plasminogen activator
Answer is C: Factor X is a plasma protein produced by the liver. In the
extrinsic pathway, factor III combines with factor VII to form an “enzyme
complex” that activates Factor X.
27. A person’s blood group is determined by:
A. the agglutinogens circulating in their plasma
B. the antigens on the surface of their red blood cells
C. the antibodies on the surface of their red blood cells
D. the agglutinins circulating in their plasma
Answer is B: Antigens are on the surface of rbc. Antibodies (=agglutinins)
cir- culate in the blood stream and react with (agglutinate) their appropriate
antigen.
28. If a blood sample is taken for DNA testing, which of the following would be
examined?
A. leucocytes
B. erythrocytes
C. thrombocytes
D. plasma proteins
Answer is A: Only leucocytes (wbc) possess a nucleus from which DNA may
be sampled. Erythrocytes are anucleate.
29. What is the major task of red blood cells?
A. to transport carbon dioxide
B. to ensure haemostasis
C. to provide immunity
D. to transport oxygen
Answer is D: Red blood cells contain much haemoglobin which binds to oxy-
gen to it transport to the tissues.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
244 12 Cardiovascular System

30. Careful blood matching is performed prior to transfusing blood in order to

avoid which scenario?
A. newborn haemolytic disease
B. the recipient’s antigens attacking the red blood cells in the transfusion
C. the recipient’s antibodies attacking the red blood cells in the transfusion
D. the antigens on the recipient’s red blood cells reacting with the antibodies
in the transfused blood
Answer is C: If the recipient’s antibodies attack the donated rbc, agglutination
will occur. The reverse (choice D) is not a problem.
31. Which cell in the list below is the MOST common white blood cell?
A. basophils
B. lymphocytes
C. monocytes
D. neutrophils
Answer is D: Neutrophils (also called polymorphonuclear leucocytes) consti-
tute between 50 and 70 % of wbc.
32. What substance is the product of the second step in the blood clotting
process?
A. thrombin
B. prothrombin
C. prothrombin activator
D. fibrin
Answer is A: The second step is the formation of thrombin from prothrombin
(first step is formation of prothrombinase (=prothrombin activator)).
33. A person whose blood group is “B positive” has which of the following?
A. the rhesus D antigen and the B antigen on their rbc, and the anti-A
agglutinin.
B. the rhesus D antigen and the B antigen on their rbc, and the anti-B
agglutinin.
C. the rhesus D antigen and the A antigen on their rbc, and the anti-B
agglutinin
D. no rhesus D antigen and the B antigen on their rbc, and the anti-A
agglutinin
Answer is A: “B+”, means having the B antigen on rbc and being positive (i.e.
having) the D antigen on the rbc as well.
34. The role of platelets in blood clotting includes all of the following EXCEPT
one. Which one?
A. to form a plug in the hole of the damaged blood vessel
B. to convert prothrombin to thrombin

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.1 Blood 245

C. to release chemicals to attract other platelets

D. to adhere to exposed collagen fibres in damaged blood vessels
Answer is B: Prothombinase is the enzyme that converts prothrombin to
throm- bin (it does not come from platelets).
35. If someone’s ABO blood group is “type A”, this means that
A. they have the type A antigen on their red blood cells
B. their blood contains anti-A agglutinins
C. they can receive blood from a type B donor
D. they may donate blood to a type B recipient
Answer is A: Type A means having the A antigen on the rbc (and having anti-
B agglutinins in the plasma).
36. Which statement below about vitamin K is true?
A. It is water soluble.
B. It is essential for prothrombin production by the liver.
C. It is part of the “extrinsic pathway” of formation of prothrombin activator.
D. It destroys fibrin so allowing a clot to gradually dissolve.
Answer is B: Vit K is needed for the liver to produce prothrombin (inactive
thrombin). Plasmin destroys fibrin.
37. What is the function of the plasma proteins in blood?
A. to transport oxygen.
B. to regulate electrolyte balance
C. to exert osmotic pressure and so help maintain blood volume.
D. to function as a non-specific body defence mechanism.
Answer is C: Plasma proteins exist in the plasma but not in the interstitial
fluid. Hence their osmotic influence draws water into the blood. Haemoglobin
which is not a “plasma protein” transports oxygen.
38. The term “formed elements” used in relation to the blood include which of the
following?
A. fibrinogen.
B. white blood cells.
C. electrolytes.
D. plasma proteins.
Answer is B: White blood cells are one of the formed elements (that is, sub-
stances that are not dissolved in plasma)
39. Which blood cell fits the following description: multi-lobed nucleus, incon-
spicuous cytoplasmic granules, most common type of blood cell except for
red blood cells?
A. neutrophil
B. eosinophil

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
246 12 Cardiovascular System

C. basophil
D. lymphocyte
Answer is A: Neutrophils are the most common wbc and have a large multi-
lobed nucleus.
40. What constitutes blood plasma?
A. whole blood without the formed elements.
B. blood without the red blood cells.
C. whole blood without blood cells and clotting factors.
D. blood minus blood cells and proteins.
Answer is A: Plasma is blood without the “formed elements”, that is, cells.
Choice C refers to serum.
41. Which of the following statements about a person with blood group “A” is
true? They have the:
A. A antigen on their red blood cells.
B. anti-A antibodies in their plasma.
C. anti-A agglutinogen on their red blood cells.
D. A antibody on their red blood cells.
Answer is A: Blood group A is named for having the A antigen on the rbc.
42. Which of the following statements concerning intracellular and extracellular
fluids is FALSE?
A. The concentration of sodium is higher in extracellular fluid than in
intracel- lular fluid.
B. The concentration of potassium is lower in extracellular fluid than in intra-
cellular fluid.
C. Blood plasma is an example of intracellular fluid.
D. The volume of intracellular fluid is greater than that of extracellular
fluid. Answer is C: Blood plasma is external to cells hence is an
extracellular fluid.
43. Which of the following is not a type of white blood cell?
A. leucocyte
B. eosinophil
C. erythrocyte
D. neutrophil
Answer is C: Erythrocytes are red blood cells.
44. Which of the following formed elements of the blood is important in the
forma- tion of clots?
A. erythrocytes
B. lymphocytes

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.1 Blood 247

C. monocytes
D. thrombocytes
Answer is D: Thrombocytes (platelets) are attracted by chemicals released by
damaged endothelial cells and in turn release substances which cause other
platelets to aggregate to form a platelet plug to cover the hole.
45. With which blood types can a person with blood type B be safely transfused?
A. A or AB
B. B or O
C. A or O
D. B or AB
Answer is B: A person with blood type B has anti-A agglutinins in their
plasma so cannot receive cells with the A antigen on the rbc. Hence the blood
types in choices A, C & D are not suitable.
46. Leucocytes may be correctly described as what?
A. cells with nuclei that do not contain haemoglobin.
B. cells without nuclei, that contain haemoglobin.
C. white blood cells with granules in their cytoplasm.
D. neutrophilic.
Answer is A: All leucocytes have a nucleus and do not contain haemoglobin.
47. What are lymphocytes? Blood cells that:
A. mature and proliferate in the bone marrow.
B. contain haemoglobin.
C. are involved in the body’s immune response
D. mature into macrophages.
Answer is C: Lymphocytes (NK, T & B types) are part of the body’s specific
defence mechanism.
48. Which of the following statements about platelets is INCORRECT? They:
A. adhere to collagen fibres of damaged tissue
B. release phospholipids which combine with “clotting factors” to produce
prothrombin activator.
C. are cell fragments derived from megakayoblasts
D. are part of the “extrinsic pathway” for the formation of prothrombin
activator.
Answer is B: Platelets do not release phospholipids.
49. Finish the sentence correctly. Plasma proteins:
A. help maintain blood volume due to colloid osmotic pressure.
B. are regarded as formed elements of the blood.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
248 12 Cardiovascular System

C. are low molecular weight proteins.

D. are part of the blood serum.
Answer is A: Plasma proteins are responsible for colloid osmotic pressure.
Serum does not include clotting factors – since fibrinogen is a clotting factor
and a plasma protein, choice D is incorrect.
50. The colloid osmotic pressure of blood is due to which of the following?
A. proteins in the blood
B. proteins in the interstitial fluid
C. sodium and chloride ions dissolved in blood
D. the water component of the blood
Answer is A: Plasma proteins (also called “colloids”) produce colloid osmotic
pressure. There should be no proteins in the interstitial fluid.
51. Which one of the following terms refers to an abnormally low number of
white blood cells?
A. thrombocytosis
B. haemostasis
C. leukopenia
D. cytokinesis
Answer is C: “Leuko-” refers to wbc; “-penia” refers to abnormally low, or
lack of.
52. Which of the following three proteins are known as “plasma proteins”?
A. albumin, globulin, haemoglobin
B. insulin, glucagon, haemoglobin
C. fibrin, globulin, albumin
D. albumin, fibrinogen, globulin
Answer is D: Haemoglobin is not a plasma protein. Fibrinogen, not fibrin
exists in blood.
53. Which are the two most common types of white blood cells?
A. neutrophils and lymphocytes
B. erythrocytes and neutrophils
C. neutrophils and eosinophils
D. monocytes and lymphocytes
Answer is A: 50–70 % of wbc are neutrophils and another 25 % are
lymphocytes.
54. Blood plasma contains “plasma proteins”. Which of the following lists the
plasma proteins?
A. insulin, kaolin, bilirubin
B. cholesterol, urea, glucagon

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.1 Blood 249

C. Na+, K+, Ca2+, Mg2+

D. albumins, fibrinogen, globulins
Answer is D: None of the other choices list any plasma proteins.
55. What causes the blood’s osmotic pressure to be greater than the osmotic pres-
sure of the surrounding interstitial fluid that is outside of the capillaries?
A. there is a higher concentration of sodium and chloride ions in the blood
than the interstitial fluid.
B. there is a higher concentration of water in the blood than in the interstitial
fluid.
C. the plasma proteins in blood.
D. the hydrostatic pressure produced by the heart’s contractions.
Answer is C: Plasma proteins exist in blood but not in the interstitial fluid.
56. What does the term “neutrophil” refer to?
A. An affinity for neutrons.
B. An abnormally low number of cells.
C. A type of white blood cell.
D. An immature cell that will become a neutrocyte.
Answer is C: Neutrophils are a white blood cell (whose nucleus stains with
dyes of neutral pH).
57. One of the following cells does NOT occur in blood. Which one?
A. erythrocytes
B. basophils
C. leucocytes
D. osteocytes
Answer is D: Osteocytes are bone cells.
58. What would a person with type A blood also have?
A. antibody A
B. antigen A
C. agglutinin A
D. agglutinogen B
Answer is B: Type A blood means that the A antigen is on the red blood cells.
They also have antibody B (= agglutinin B) in their plasma. An agglutinogen
is an antigen that stimulates production of agglutinin, hence antigen A is also
known as agglutinogen A.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
250 12 Cardiovascular System

12.2 Heart

About 60 or 70 times a minute, the left ventricle of the heart contracts to pump
blood through the aortic valve into the aorta from where it flows throughout the
systemic circulation. Simultaneously, the right ventricle pumps the same volume
of blood through the pulmonary valve into the pulmonary trunk from where it
flows into the lungs. As the combined length of the blood vessels in the rest of the
body is much greater than the combined length of the blood vessels in the lungs,
the left ventricle has to contract with greater force than does the right ventricle.
Consequently the muscle of the LV is much stronger (thicker) than that of the RV.
As the ventricles begin to contract, the mitral (bicuspid) valve closes to prevent
blood “regurgitating” from the LV into the left atrium. Simultaneously the
tricuspid valve on the right, closes to prevent retrograde blood flow from the RV
into the right atrium. The stu- dent should be able to name the eight blood vessels
that enter or leave the heart, the four chambers of the heart, the four valves the
blood passes through and the order of in which it passes through them.
The myocardium is a tireless muscle in that it performs its cycle of contraction
(systole) and relaxation (diastole) ceaselessly for the duration of a human lifespan.
To perform this feat it must be well supplied with energy and oxygen. Twenty five
percent of the volume of a cardiac muscle cell may be taken up by mitochondria
which produce the required ATP. In turn the coronary arteries supply the cells
with the oxygen that the mitochondria need to produce ATP. The left and right
coronary arteries arise from the aortic sinus, just on the aorta side of the aortic
valve. A block- age in some part of these arteries will produce the infamous “heart
attack”. Precisely where the blockage exists may be found by imaging the heart
with a magnetic reso- nance scanner or by investigating the difference between the
affected heart’s elec- trocardiogram and the expected normal.
1. Blood flow through the heart follows which of the sequences listed below?
A. from left atrium, then mitral valve, right ventricle, aorta, left ventricle
B. from right atrium, then mitral valve, right ventricle, pulmonary trunk, left
ventricle.
C. from pulmonary trunk, then tricuspid valve, left atrium, aortic valve, aorta
D. from vena cava, then right ventricle, pulmonary trunk, left ventricle, aorta.
Answer is D: The mitral valve (bicuspid valve) comes after the right ventricle;
the tricuspid valve comes before the pulmonary trunk.
2. What feature does cardiac muscle possess that is missing in skeletal muscle?
A. striations
B. multiple nuclei
C. voluntary control
D. intercalated discs
Answer is D: Intercalated discs join the membrane of one cardiac cell with its
neighbour and promote rapid conduction of depolarisation between cells.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.2 Heart 251

3. What is the name of the valve between the left atrium and the left ventricle?
A. mitral valve
B. tricuspid valve
C. semi-lunar valve
D. aortic valve
Answer is A: Also known as the bicuspid valve. The aortic valve is also a
semi- lunar valve.
4. What is meant by a diastolic blood pressure of 100 mm Hg?
A. the maximum pressure at the start of the aorta during ventricular
contraction.
B. the minimum pressure at the start of the aorta before the start of a
ventricu- lar contraction.
C. the maximum pressure at the start of the aorta and pulmonary trunk during
ventricular contraction.
D. The minimum blood pressure measured when resting.
Answer is B: Diastolic pressure refers to the lowest blood pressure measure-
ment and this occurs just before the start of ventricular contraction.
5. What is the main function of mitral valve?
A. to increase the pressure inside the left atrium during systole
B. to prevent a drop in pressure in the aorta during diastole
C. to prevent backflow from left ventricle to left atrium during systole
D. to add additional blood from left atrium to left ventricle during atrial
systole
Answer is C: During ventricular systole, blood should flow through the aortic
valve into the aorta and not back into the left atrium. The mitral valve
prevents blood going back into the left atrium.
6. The Frank-Starling law of the heart describes the proportional relationship
between which of the following pairs?
A. Stroke volume and cardiac output
B. Stroke volume and end-diastolic volume
C. The blood volume in the ventricles and stroke volume
D. Systemic vascular resistance and stroke volume
Answer is C: States that the stroke volume of the heart increases in response
to an increase in the volume of blood filling the heart. That is, stroke volume
increases so that all the blood that enters the heart is pumped out.
7. If Sarah has a stroke volume of 70 ml and a cardiac output of 5950 ml/min,
which of the following is her heart rate (in beats/min)?
A. 70
B. 75

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
252 12 Cardiovascular System

C. 80
D. 85
Answer is D: 5950 ml/min divided by 70 ml/beat = 85 bpm
8. What will cause the sinoatrial (SA) node to depolarize more frequently?
A. Acetylcholine
B. Norepinephrine
C. Parasympathetic stimulation
D. Vagus nerve
Answer is B: Norepinephrine (released by the sympathetic nervous system)
acting on the SA node increases heart rate and blood pressure.
Parasympathetic stimulation along the vagus nerve decreases heart activity.
9. How are cardiac cells mechanically attached to each other? By their:
A. mitochondria
B. intercalated discs
C. gap junctions
D. sarcolemma
Answer is B: Intercalated discs attach adjacent cardiac cells to each other.
10. Starting at the APEX of the heart and moving superiorly, what is the correct
order in which you would encounter the four anatomical structures below?
A. valves, chordae tendonae, papillary muscle, ventricle
B. ventricle, papillary muscle, chordae tendonae, valves
C. papillary muscle, chordae tendonae, ventricle, valves
D. chordae tendonae, valves, ventricle, papillary muscle
Answer is B: The apex is the pointy end of the heart (the inferior end). So
ven- tricles are first, then papillary muscle to which are attached the chordae
tendo- nae, superior to which are the atrio-ventricular valves.
11. Which period of the heart cycle is completely occupied by the ventricles
relaxing?
A. atrial systole
B. atrial diastole
C. ventricular systole
D. ventricular diastole
Answer is D: Diastole is the period of cardiac muscle relaxation.
12. Through which valve does blood flow when it moves from the right atrium
into the right ventricle?
A. the tricuspid valve
B. the mitral valve

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.2 Heart 253

C. the pulmonary valve

D. the bicuspid valve
Answer is A: The tricuspid valve is on the right side of the heart between the
atrium and ventricle. Bicuspid is on the left.
13. How is the fibrous pericardium attached to the surrounding structures?
A. laterally to the pleural surfaces of the lungs.
B. posteriorly to the sternum.
C. anteriorly to trachea, main-stem bronchi and oesophagus.
D. inferiorly to the clavicles.
Answer is A: The only sensible answer when anatomical position terminology
is used. The lungs are lateral to the heart. The sternum is not posterior to the
heart the trachea and oesophagus are. The heart is not attached to the
clavicles.
14. A drug, such as cocaine, which stimulates the heart but does directly inhibit
the heart’s ability to relax, would be considered a:
A. Sympatholytic
B. Sympathomimetic
C. Parasympatholytic
D. Parasympathomimetic
Answer is B: Sympathomimetic drugs are stimulant compounds which mimic
the effects of agonists of the sympathetic nervous system such as epinephrine
(adrenaline) and norepinephrine (noradrenaline) that is, they cause the heat to
best faster. A sympatholytic (or sympathoplegic) drug is a medication which
inhibits the functioning of the sympathetic nervous system. The choices C &
D refer to slowing down the heart.
15. Why is the myocardium of the right ventricle (RV) thinner than that of the left
ventricle (LV)?
A. the RV pumps into the pulmonary circuit which has less resistance than
the systemic circuit.
B. the RV pumps a smaller volume of blood than the LV.
C. the RV pumps blood out with a slower exit speed than the RV.
D. the RV chamber has a smaller volume than the LV.
Answer is A: The RV pumps against a lesser resistance, it does not need to be
as muscular as the LV.
16. Through which valve does blood flow when it moves from the left atrium into
the left ventricle?
A. the semilunar valve
B. the mitral valve
C. the tricuspid valve

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
254 12 Cardiovascular System

D. the bicuspid valve

Answer is B: The right atrio-ventricular valve is also known as the tricuspid
valve.
17. Which period of the heart cycle is completely occupied by the ventricles
contracting?
A. atrial systole
B. atrial diastole
C. ventricular systole
D. ventricular diastole
Answer is C: Systole is the term applied to contraction of the cardiac muscle.
18. Which statement below describes blood flow through the mitral valve?
A. blood flows from the right atrium into the right ventricle
B. blood flows from the right ventricle into the pulmonary artery
C. blood flows from the left ventricle into the aorta
D. blood flows from the left atrium into the left ventricle
Answer is D: The mitral valve is between the left atrium and left ventricle.
19. Which structure has the thickest wall?
A. the aorta
B. the inter-atrial septum
C. the left ventricle
D. the right ventricle
Answer is C: The LV has the thickest muscle wall.
20. Which tissue is supplied with blood via the coronary arteries?
A. the lungs
B. the myocardium
C. the corona
D. the aorta
Answer is B: The heart (myocardium) is supplied by the coronary circulation.
21. What is the innermost layer of the heart wall known as?
A. epicardium
B. pericardium
C. visceral pericardium
D. endocardium
Answer is D: “endo-” means on the inside. Epicardium is also known as the
visceral pericardium, is on the outside of the heart.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.2 Heart 255

22. Which of the following is a difference between cardiac muscle and skeletal
muscle?
A. cardiac muscle is not striated (and skeletal muscle is).
B. cardiac muscle fibres are branched (and skeletal muscle fibres are not).
C. skeletal muscle is involuntary and is uni-nucleate (and cardiac muscle is
neither).
D. skeletal muscle has intercalated discs (and cardiac muscle doesn’t).
Answer is B: Cardiac muscle cells have branches, but skeletal muscle cells
are single fibres.
23. Where is the mitral valve of the heart located? Between the
A. left atrium and left ventricle
B. left ventricle and the aorta
C. right ventricle and the pulmonary trunk
D. right atrium and right ventricle
Answer is A: The mitral valve is the left atrio-ventricular valve.
24. Choose the structure known as the pacemaker of the heart from the following.
A. atrio-ventricular node
B. sino-atrial node
C. atrio-ventricular bundle
D. the bundle of His
Answer is B: The SA node, in the right atrial wall sets the pace of the heart rate.
25. Where is the aortic valve located?
A. between the right atrium and right ventricle
B. between the right ventricle and the pulmonary trunk
C. between the left ventricle and the aorta
D. between the left atrium and left ventricle
Answer is C: The aortic valve is at the start of the aorta. It prevents blood in
the aorta flowing back into the left ventricle.
26. By what name is the heart muscle known?
A. epicardium
B. myocardium
C. pericardium
D. endocardium
Answer is B: “Myo-“is the prefix that refers to muscle.
27. The heart receives its own oxygenated blood supply via the
A. coronary arteries
B. the pulmonary veins

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
256 12 Cardiovascular System

C. the coronary sinus

D. the foramen ovale
Answer is A: The coronary arteries supply oxygenated blood to the
myocardium.
28. Which name is NOT applied to the valve between the left ventricle and the
left atrium?
A. atrioventricular valve
B. semilunar valve
C. the bicuspid valve
D. the mitral valve
Answer is B: The left atrio-ventricular valve is not a semilunar valve.
29. Where does the pulmonary trunk deliver its blood to?
A. the left atrium
B. the right ventricle
C. the lungs
D. the left ventricle
Answer is C: Pulmonary refers to the lungs.
30. The heart can be made to beat faster by which of the following?
A. sympathetic stimulation of the SA node
B. sympathetic stimulation of the AV node
C. parasympathetic stimulation of the SA node
D. parasympathetic stimulation of the AV node
Answer is A: The sympathetic nervous system stimulates the heart, while the
parasympathetic NS inhibits the heart.
31. What is the outermost layer of the heart wall known as?
A. epicardium
B. pericardium
C. parietal membrane
D. endocardium
Answer is A: “Epi-” refers to “on top of”. It is the visceral part of the
pericardium.
32. The valve between the atrium and the ventricle that pumps oxygenated blood
is called:
A. the right atrioventricular valve
B. the semilunar valve
C. the mitral valve
D. the tricuspid valve
Answer is C: The left side of the heart pumps oxygenated blood, the mitral
valve is the one.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.2 Heart 257

33. What is the name given to the remnant of the opening in the foetal heart that
allowed the foetal lungs to be bypassed?
A. coronary sinus
B. foramen ovale
C. interatrial septum
D. fossa ovalis
Answer is D: The fossa ovalis is the slight depression that remains when the
foramen ovale closes.
34. The mitral valve of the heart is located between the
A. right atrium and right ventricle
B. left ventricle and the aorta
C. right ventricle and the pulmonary trunk
D. left atrium and left ventricle
Answer is D: The mitral valve is the usual term used for the left atrio-
ventricular valve
35. Complete the sentence correctly. The left ventricle pumps:
A. more blood than the right ventricle
B. blood at a lower pressure than the right ventricle
C. less blood than the right ventricle
D. blood at a higher pressure than the right ventricle
Answer is D: The LV produces a higher pressure than the right in order to
over- come the greater resistance to flow that exists in the systemic circuit.
36. What is ventricular systole? It
A. refers to contraction of the ventricles
B. occurs at the same time as contraction of the atria
C. occurs while the bicuspid valve is open
D. refers to relaxation of the ventricles
Answer is A: Ventricular systole refers to contraction of the ventricles. The
other statements are wrong.
37. Which is correct? In its passage through the heart, blood is pumped into the
pulmonary trunk:
A. after leaving the left ventricle
B. after leaving the left atrium
C. after passing through the right AV valve
D. after passing through the left AV valve
Answer is C: Blood passes through the left AV valve in order to enter the right
ventricle from where it is pumped into the pulmonary trunk.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
258 12 Cardiovascular System

38. Cardiac muscle cells differ from skeletal muscle cells in that:
A. skeletal muscle cells are voluntary but cardiac muscle cells are not.
B. skeletal muscle cells are branched but cardiac muscle cells are not.
C. cardiac muscle cells are multinucleate but skeletal muscle cells are not.
D. cardiac muscle cells are a syncytium while skeletal muscle does not.
Answer is A: Skeletal muscle is voluntary, while cardiac muscle is not under
our conscious control. A skeletal muscle cell is a syncytium (composed from
the amalgamation of many small cells (myoblasts) while the myocardium
behaves as a functional syncytium – the cells contract in unison.
39. Which chamber of the heart has the thickest myocardium?
A. left ventricle
B. right ventricle
C. left atrium
D. right atrium
Answer is A: The left ventricle has the thickest myocardium (muscle) as it
needs to contract with the greatest force.
40. Why is the myocardium of the left ventricle thicker than that of the right
ventricle?
A. The left ventricle has to pump a greater volume of blood than the right
ventricle.
B. The resistance of the systemic circulation is greater than that of the pulmo-
nary circulation.
C. The left ventricle has to pump blood to the brain against gravity.
D. The right ventricle is assisted by the “respiratory pump”.
Answer is B: The length of the blood vessels that make up the systemic circuit
is much greater than the length of vessels in the pulmonary circulation. This
greater length presents a greater resistance to the flow of blood. So the LV must
be stronger – made of thicker muscle – to exert sufficient pressure on the
blood to overcome the resistance.
41. What supplies blood to the myocardium?
A. the coronary circulation.
B. the vena cavae.
C. the vasa recta.
D. the pulmonary circulation.
Answer is A: The left and right coronary arteries supply the myocardium.
42. Which of the following heart structures are listed in the correct sequence of
blood flow through them?
A. right atrium, bicuspid valve, pulmonary valve, left ventricle.
B. tricuspid valve, right ventricle, left atrium, mitral valve.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.2 Heart 259

C. pulmonary valve, left atrium, tricuspid valve, left ventricle.

D. right ventricle, left atrium, aortic valve, left ventricle.
Answer is B: Blood enters the RV via the tricuspid valve, it leaves the LA via
the mitral valve.
43. The tricuspid valve separates which two structures?
A. right ventricle and pulmonary trunk
B. right ventricle and right atrium
C. left ventricle and aorta
D. left ventricle and left atrium
Answer is B: The tricuspid valve is also known as the right atrio-ventricular
valve, so it lies between the right atrium and right ventricle.
44. Why is the myocardium of the right ventricle thinner than that of the left
ventricle?
A. the left ventricle has to pump a greater volume of blood than the right
ventricle.
B. it results from left ventricular hypertrophy due to increased peripheral
resistance.
C. it pumps blood into the low resistance pulmonary circulation.
D. it pumps blood into the high resistance systemic circulation.
Answer is C: The RV delivers blood to the lungs which has a relatively low
resistance to blood flow. Hence a small pressure will suffice.
45. Which of the following events occur during late ventricular diastole?
A. the atria are relaxed, the ventricles are filling passively, the
atrioventricular valves are open
B. the ventricles are starting to contract, the atrioventricular valves are
closed, the semilunar valves are open
C. the atria contract, the ventricles are relaxed, the atrioventricular valves are
open
D. the atria are relaxed, the ventricles are starting to relax, the atrioventricular
valves are closed, the semilunar valves are closed.
Answer is C: Choice A describes early diastole. Towards the end of diastole,
the atria contract to push any blood they contain into the ventricles.
46. What feature distinguishes pacemaker cardiac cells from other cardiac cells?
Pacemaker cardiac cells:
A. require a stimulus from the vagus nerve in order to reach threshold; other
cardiac cells do not.
B. reach threshold with much weaker stimuli than other cardiac cells

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
260 12 Cardiovascular System

C. have gap junctions, while other cardiac cells do not

D. do not require an external stimulus to reach threshold, while other cardiac
cells do.
Answer is D: Pacemaker cardiac cells are self-rhythmic. They will contract in
the absence of stimulation from the nervous system. External stimulation will
make them contract at a faster (or slower) rate.
47. In a normal ECG trace, what does a QRS wave indicate?
A. depolarisation of the atria
B. repolarisation of the atria
C. depolarisation of the ventricles
D. repolarisation of the ventricles
Answer is C: QRS is produced when the cells of the ventricles depolarise.
48. What would be a possible consequence of the SA node failing to depolarise?
A. the entire heart would not contract
B. the heart rate will decrease
C. the ventricles would not contract
D. the heart rate will increase
Answer is B: The SA node contains cells that will depolarise at a faster rate
than others in the heart. If it fails, these other places will depolarise, but their
rate will be slower than that of the SA node.
49. By what means does an electrical signal travel from the atria to the ventricles?
Via:
A. gap junctions
B. Purkinje fibres
C. intercalated discs
D. atrioventricular bundle
Answer is D: The conduction system of the heart passes the electrical signal
via the AV node to the AV bundle (also known as the bundle of His) in the
interven- tricular septum.
50. Which one of the following descriptions or statements about an electrocardio-
gram (ECG) is NOT correct?
A. It is a record of the voltage changes (as measured at the body surface) due
to the depolarisation of the muscle cells of the heart as it beats.
B. The potentials measured by the ECG electrodes are combined in various
ways to give 12 different ECGs.
C. The ECG consists of the electrical events that follow the depolarisation of
ventricles (PQR section), the depolarisation of atria (the S section) and the
repolarisation of the ventricles (the T section).

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.2 Heart 261

D. The value of the potential difference called “limb lead II” varies with time
to produce the familiar ECG trace – a graph of voltage vs time.
Answer is C: The ECG also displays the depolarisation of the atria (the P
wave), the depolarisation of the ventricles results in the QRS wave – not the
PQR wave.
51. Which of the following does limb lead II of a typical electrocardiogram
represent?
A. A graph of the variation of voltage produced by the heart against time.
B. The voltage at right arm (RA) plus the voltage at left leg (LL).
C. The electrical events that precede the contraction of the ventricles.
D. The projection of the electric dipole vector of the heart on the line from
left arm (LA) to right arm (RA).
Answer is A: This is the best answer. “Lead II” is the voltage measured at the
RA position minus the voltage measured at the LL position. “Lead II” is also
the projection of the electric dipole vector of the heart on the line R II (in
Einthoven’s triangle) from right arm to the left leg.
52. Which of the following events occur during early ventricular systole?
A. the atria are relaxed, the ventricles are filling passively, the
atrioventricular valves are open
B. the ventricles are starting to contract, the atrioventricular valves are
closed, the semilunar valves are closed
C. the atria contract, the ventricles are relaxed, the atrioventricular valves are
open
D. the atria are relaxed, the ventricles are starting to relax, the atrioventricular
valves are opening, the semilunar valves are closing.
Answer is B: In early systole, the pressure in the ventricles may not have been
raised sufficiently to push open the semilunar valves yet. Choice D describes
late systole.
53. When listening to the “lub-dup” sound of the heart with a stethoscope, what is
the cause of the “dup” sound?
A. The blood flowing through the open semilunar valves
B. The blood flowing through the open atrioventricular valves
C. The turbulent blood flow through closing atrioventricular valves
D. The turbulent blood flow through closing semilunar valves
Answer is D: Turbulent blood flow generates audible sound that can be heard
with a stethoscope placed on the skin above the heart. Such turbulent flow is
produced when blood flow out of the heart is impeded by the cusps of the
semi- lunar valves as they close.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
262 12 Cardiovascular System

54. What feature distinguishes pacemaker cardiac cells from other myocardial
cells? Pacemaker cells:
A. require a stimulus from the vagus nerve in order to reach threshold,
myocar- dial cells do not.
B. reach threshold with much weaker stimuli than myocardial cells.
C. have gap junctions, while myocardial cells do not.
D. spontaneously generate action potentials, while myocardial cells do not.
Answer is D: Pacemaker cells (generally in the SA node) generate action
poten- tials 80–100 times per minute even without neural input. Neural input
will slow or increase this rate. Myocardial cells are not autorhythmic.
55. What structure in the heart prevents backflow of blood into the right atrium?
A. The tricuspid valve
B. The bicuspid valve
C. The mitral valve.
D. The foramen ovale
Answer is A: The tricuspid valve lies between the right ventricle and right
atrium and closes when the ventricle contracts.

12.3 Blood Vessels

Blood vessels that carry blood away from the heart are called arteries. The largest
is the aorta with a diameter of 2–3 cm. Additional arteries arise as the branches of
the arterial tree divide and divide again to reach every part of the body. Eventually
their diameter is small enough for the vessels to be called arterioles and they direct
blood into a capillary bed. Artery walls are elastic and expand in diameter when
the heart pumps blood into them and recoil to a smaller diameter during diastole as
blood continues its flow towards the capillaries. This expansion and contraction
may be felt as the “pulse” by palpating a superficial artery.
Blood vessels that carry blood towards the heart are called veins and have
thinner walls but larger diameters than arteries. Venules drain blood away from
capillary beds and join with each other to form larger veins and eventually become
the infe- rior vena cava, if from that part of the body inferior to the diaphragm, or
the superior vena cava if coming from the head, neck, arms and chest. Veins have
valves (every few centimetres in the legs) which allow blood to flow towards the
heart but not away from the heart. Furthermore, veins are compressed when the
skeletal muscles that they pass by contract and this compression propels the
contained blood through the valves. By this means, blood is lifted towards the
heart against gravity when a human is not lying down. Both veins and arteries
have smooth muscle within their

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.3 Blood Vessels 263

vessel walls whose contraction produces vasoconstriction and whose relaxation

produces vasodilation. In this way blood may be directed away from or towards a
tissue as its requirements change.
Capillaries are the place at which nutrients and oxygen enter the blood (from
the gut and lungs). They are also the destination for the contents of blood.
Capillaries in the muscles and other organs are the place to which oxygen, water,
nutrients and electrolytes are delivered. From here they make their way by
diffusion to the cells. From here also, wastes from the cells are collected to be in
turn delivered to the capillaries of the lungs, liver and kidneys. Consequently the
structure of capillaries, be they continuous, fenestrated or sinusoidal capillaries,
facilitates exchanges between their lumen and the interstitial fluid.
1. Why does the lumen of a large vein have a larger diameter than the lumen of a
large artery?
A. They need to withstand higher pressure than arteries.
B. Veins contain the majority of the blood volume.
C. This allows blood to return to the heart rapidly.
D. So that vasoconstriction can produce a greater change in diameter than for
arteries.
Answer is B: Veins contain about 60 % of the blood volume (and because
they have thinner walls, they are also more distensible than arteries).
2. Different types of capillaries are distinguished by their structure. Which of the
following is NOT a structural difference between capillaries?
A. The endothelial cells of some capillaries are joined by tight junctions
while for others there are gaps between the cells.
B. Some capillaries have pores that allow movement between the plasma and
interstitial fluid.
C. Some capillaries have an arterial end and a venous end, while others begin
in the tissues and drain into a venule.
D. Some capillaries are surrounded by a basement membrane while others are
not.
Answer is C: No capillaries “start” in the tissues. Continuous capillaries are
joined by tight junctions; fenestrated capillaries have pores; sinusoid
capillaries may have no basement membrane.
3. The “systemic circulation” refers to which of the following?
A. The movement of blood from the pulmonary trunk, through capillaries
into the pulmonary veins.
B. The movement of blood into the coronary arteries, through capillaries into
the coronary sinus.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
264 12 Cardiovascular System

C. The flow of blood into the right atrium and eventually out of the left
ventricle.
D. The movement of blood from the aorta, through capillaries, then
eventually into the vena cavae.
Answer is D: The “system” is supplied with blood from the aorta. Choice A
refers to the pulmonary circulation; B to the coronary circulation; C to the
flow of blood through the heart.
4. What causes venous blood to return to the heart?
A. The pumping action of the heart.
B. The squashing action of muscles, and valves in the veins.
C. Rhythmic vasoconstriction and valves in the veins.
D. Gravity, valves and the negative pressure generated by the atria emptying.
Answer is B: Valves prevent blood in veins from flowing away from the
heart, while contracting skeletal muscle compresses the veins and this pushes
blood through them towards the heart (as the valves prevent blood form being
pushed in the other direction.
5. When cardiac ejection ceases during diastole, what is the most important
factor maintaining blood flow in arteries of the body?
A. Contraction of skeletal muscle
B. Closing the venous valves
C. Elastic recoil of the arteries close to heart
D. Contraction of the atria
Answer is C: Arteries store elastic potential energy in their distended elastic
walls, so that when ventricular contraction ceases, the elastic artery walls
recoil, forcing blood to continue moving away from the heart.
6. In which organs would be found continuous, fenestrated, and sinusoid
capillar- ies, respectively?
A. Brain, small intestine, liver
B. Bone marrow, brain, spleen
C. Liver, bone marrow, brain
D. Small intestine, liver, brain
Answer is A: The blood supply to the brain has continuous capillaries (in the
blood-brain barrier), the SI has fenestrated capillaries (to facilitate absorption
of digestion products), the liver has sinusoids.
7. What is the advantage of having a wide lumen in veins?
A. It provides less resistance to the blood on its way to heart
B. It controls the opening and closing of the valves
C. It produces high pressure on the blood on its way to heart
D. It helps the pre-capillary sphincters to stay open for a longer time

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.3 Blood Vessels 265

Answer is A: The larger is the vessel diameter, the less will be the resistance
to blood flow. The other choices are nonsense.
8. Given that we have the following blood pressures at the arterial end of a capil-
lary: Blood pressure: 28 mmHg, and Osmotic pressure: 20 mmHg; what is the
net filtration pressure at this end?
A. 0.71 mmHg
B. 1.4 mmHg
C. 8 mmHg
D. 48 mmHg
Answer is C: BP promotes the outflow of liquid and solutes from the arterial
end, while the blood’s osmotic pressure promotes the inflow of water. That is,
these two influences are opposing. Hence 28–20 = 8 mmHg.
9. What is the pulse that we feel at the anterior medial part of the elbow (when in
anatomical position) called?
A. Radial pulse
B. Ulnar pulse
C. Carotid pulse
D. Brachial pulse
Answer is D: Because at this position, we are palpating the brachial artery.
10. Which capillaries allow cells and plasma proteins to enter or leave their lumen?
A. Continuous
B. Fenestrated
C. Sinusoidal
D. Anastomatic
Answer is C: Sinusoidal capillaries have some gaps between the adjacent
endo- thelial cells (and a thin or absent basement membrane). The gaps are
large enough for plasma proteins and some cells to pass through.
11. Which of the following does NOT assist in returning the blood to the heart
through the veins?
A. valves in the veins
B. the “respiratory pump”
C. the effect of gravity
D. the pumping action of the heart
Answer is D: The heart’s contractions do not affect blood movement after
blood passes through the capillaries. The contraction of the diaphragm,
increases pressure in the abdomen and this creates a pressure gradient that
pushes blood towards the heart against gravity. Gravity assists blood to return
from the head and neck.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
266 12 Cardiovascular System

12. Which of the following materials is found in the walls of capillaries?

A. endothelium
B. elastic fibres
C. collagen fibres
D. smooth muscle
Answer is A: Only endothelium (endothelial cells and the basement
membrane) compose the walls of capillaries.
13. Which of the following arteries do NOT arise from the ascending aorta?
A. Brachiocephalic trunk
B. Left Brachiocephalic
C. Left Common Carotid
D. Left Subclavian
Answer is B: There is no left brachiocephalic. The left arm is supplied with
blood via the left subclavian.
14. What is the pulse we feel in the anterior lateral wrist (in anatomical position –
the normal wrist pulse) called?
A. Radial pulse
B. Ulnar pulse
C. Dorsalis pedis pulse
D. Brachial pulse
Answer is A: Radial pulse because we are palpating the radial artery at that
position.
15. Which type of capillary is required to allow the liver to perform its function of
producing plasma proteins?
A. Continuous
B. Fenestrated
C. Sinusoidal
D. Anastomatic
Answer is C: Plasma proteins are very large molecules, which are too big to
pass out of (or into) capillaries. Sinusoidal capillaries have gaps between the
endothelial cells of their walls which are large enough to allow proteins to
enter the blood.
16. What is it called when plaque dislodges from a lesion in a blood vessel wall
and then moves “downstream” to lodge in the capillary bed feeding the
digestive tract? We call this a:
A. Myocardial infarction
B. Stroke

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.3 Blood Vessels 267

C. Pulmonary embolism
D. Mesenteric embolism
Answer is D: Mesenteric because the membrane surrounding the gut is the
mesentery. An embolism is a dislodged blood clot that eventually gets trapped
in a capillary.
17. Which of the following is found in the walls of capillaries?
A. endothelial cells and basement membrane
B. tunica externa
C. tunica media
D. smooth muscle
Answer is A: Capillary walls are very thin to facilitate passage of water and
solutes. They have only a tunica intima, that is, endothelial cells and a
basement membrane.
18. In which of the four lists below are the types of capillaries listed in order of
permeability with the first being the least permeable and the last being the
most permeable type of capillary?
A. blood brain barrier capillaries, continuous capillaries, fenestrated capillar-
ies, sinusoids.
B. continuous capillaries, blood brain barrier capillaries, fenestrated capillar-
ies, glomerular capillaries.
C. fenestrated capillaries, blood brain barrier capillaries, continuous capillar-
ies, sinusoids.
D. liver sinusoids, blood brain barrier capillaries, continuous capillaries,
fenes- trated capillaries.
Answer is A: The capillaries of the BBB are least permeable (they form a
“bar- rier”) while sinusoids are the most permeable.
19. Which of the following assists in returning the blood to the heart through the
veins?
A. valves in the veins, the effect of breathing, gravity.
B. valves in the veins, the effect of breathing, squashing action of muscles,
gravity.
C. the effect of gravity, the pumping action of the heart.
D. the effect of breathing, squashing action of muscles, the right ventricle.
Answer is B: Each of the four assist in some way. Choice A omits the action
of muscular movement. The heart has no role in vascular return.
20. Why do arteries have more elastic and muscular tissue than veins?
A. arteries need to expand and contract as blood flows through them.
B. arteries need carry a greater volume of blood than do veins.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
268 12 Cardiovascular System

C. to ensure that blood flows only in the direction away from the heart.
D. in order to support the larger diameter of arteries compared to veins.
Answer is A: Arteries distend to accept the volume of blood pumped into
them, then elastically recoil to assist blood flow during diastole. The ability to
con- tract enables arteries to direct blood away from tissues that require less
blood. Arteries contain less volume than veins; the heart ensures forward
flow; veins have a larger diameter than arteries.
21. Which capillaries have walls that allow the easiest passage of materials
through them?
A. fenestrated capillaries
B. capillaries of the blood-brain barrier
C. sinusoids
D. continuous capillaries
Answer is C: Sinusoids have spaces between endothelial cells and may have
an absent basement membrane. This allows for the easiest movement of
material.
22. Which factor below does NOT assist venous return of blood?
A. breathing
B. gravity
C. smooth muscle contraction
D. skeletal muscle contraction
Answer is C: While contraction of smooth muscle can decrease the volume of
veins and so shift more blood to the arterial side (and increase blood
pressure), This is not the same as assisting the continuous return of blood to
the right atrium. Breathing (the respiratory pump) assists the return of blood
from the abdomen; skeletal muscle contraction (and valves) assist return from
the limbs; and gravity assists return from the head.
23. The usefulness of having elastic arteries is in:
A. their ability to regulate blood pressure.
B. their ability to expand as the heart pumps blood into them
C. the assistance they give to venous return.
D. their ability to produce vasoconstriction and vasodilation
Answer is B: The expansion of arteries as blood is pumped into them limits
resistance to flow and blood pressure. Smooth muscle in the wall produces
vasoconstriction and vasodilation.
24. What are capillaries that have endothelial cells joined by “tight junctions” and
have “intercellular clefts” between cells called?
A. the blood-brain barrier
B. continuous capillaries

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.3 Blood Vessels 269

C. fenestrated capillaries
D. sinusoids
Answer is B: An intercellular cleft is the space between adjacent cells. A tight
junction is where the lipid portions of the membranes of adjacent cells are
bound together preventing water and solutes rom passing between the cells.
25. Vasoconstriction and vasodilation of blood vessels is facilitated by the
A. elastic fibres in vessel walls
B. parasympathetic division of the nervous system
C. smooth muscle in vessel walls
D. tunica intima of the blood vessel
Answer is C: Contraction and relaxation of smooth muscle produces constric-
tion and dilation of blood vessels. This is under the control of the sympathetic
nervous system.
26. One of the following does NOT help blood to move through arteries. Which
one?
A. the influence of gravity.
B. the action of breathing and the movement of the diaphragm.
C. the elastic recoil of artery walls.
D. the pumping action of the heart.
Answer is B: Movement of the diaphragm during breathing assist venous
return but not movement of blood through arteries.
27. Veins in the limbs have which one of the following characteristics?
A. thin walls composed of epithelium.
B. vessel walls with a thick layer of smooth muscle
C. pulsatile flow
D. valves
Answer is D: Veins have valves but not pulsatile flow or a thick layer of
smooth muscle.
28. Exchange between the blood and the interstitial fluid occurs most readily
through which type of capillary?
A. venules
B. fenestrated capillaries
C. sinusoids
D. arterioles
Answer is C: Sinusoids have the largest gaps (intercellular clefts) between
cells.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
270 12 Cardiovascular System

29. What is meant by the “pulmonary circulation”? The flow of blood:

A. out the aorta and back through the vena cavae.
B. from the heart through the lungs and back to the heart.
C. into the coronary arteries and back through the coronary sinus.
D. into the vena cavae and out to the pulmonary trunk via the right ventricle.
Answer is B: The pulmonary circulation refers to the flow of blood from the
heart (via the pulmonary trunk) through the lungs and back to the heart.
30. What is a small artery called?
A. an anastomosis
B. an arteriole
C. an efferent artery
D. a distributing artery
Answer is B: A small artery or arteriole may be 30 μm (0.03 mm) in diameter.
31. How do arteries differ from veins?
A. arteries have a larger diameter than veins.
B. arteries have more elastic tissue than veins.
C. there is a greater volume of blood in the arteries than in the veins.
D. arteries have valves but veins do not.
Answer is B: The walls of arteries have more elastic tissue than veins
allowing them to expand as blood is pumped into them and then to passively
recoil.
32. The wall of a capillary consists of one layer (or coat). What is it called?
A. tunica intima
B. tunica externa
C. lamina propria
D. tunica media
Answer is A: Tunica means “coat” while “intima” means inner most. In the
case of capillaries this is the only tunica.
33. Which part(s) of the cardiovascular system has/have a single layer of endothe-
lial cells as the innermost layer of the structure(s)?
A. arteries, capillaries and veins
B. arteries and veins
C. heart, arteries, veins and capillaries
D. capillaries
Answer is C: Heart, arteries, capillaries and veins all have an endothelium – a
single layer of endothelial cells as their most internal layer, in contact with the
blood they contain.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.3 Blood Vessels 271

34. Which of the following parts of the cardiovascular system contain the greatest
volume of blood?
A. heart
B. systemic arteries
C. pulmonary circulation
D. systemic veins
Answer is D: Systemic veins contain about 64 % of the blood volume, while
systemic arteries contain about 13 %.
35. Which of the following describes an artery? An artery is a blood vessel that
A. has a thinner wall than a vein of comparable size
B. carries blood away from the heart
C. when located in the limbs, has valves
D. carries oxygenated blood
Answer is B: Arteries carry blood away from the heart. In the case of the pul-
monary arteries, they carry de-oxygenated blood.
36. Some capillaries allow plasma proteins and phagocytes to enter and leave the
blood. Which type?
A. sinusoids
B. fenestrated capillaries
C. continuous capillaries with intercellular clefts
D. lacteals
Answer is A: Sinusoids are capillaries that have gaps between their
endothelial cells that are large enough to allow the passage of cells.
37. Arteries may be characterized as:
A. elastic tubes that carry oxygenated blood.
B. elastic tubes that carry blood away from the heart.
C. muscular tubes that have valves.
D. muscular tubes with a larger diameter than veins.
Answer is B: Arteries are both elastic, and carry blood away from the heart.
They do not have valves and they are smaller in diameter than veins.
38. Some capillaries are called “sinusoids”. These are capillaries that:
A. are fenestrated.
B. have endothelium without gaps between cells.
C. have endothelium with gaps between adjacent cells.
D. have pores in the endothlial cell walls.
Answer is C: Sinusoids have incomplete walls around them, so large
molecules and phagocytes can enter and leave the lumen.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
272 12 Cardiovascular System

39. Which of the following definitions best describes veins?

A. a vessel that carries blood towards the heart.
B. a vessel that carries oxygenated blood.
C. vessels that carry blood away from the heart.
D. vessels whose walls are composed of three
tunics. Answer is A: Veins carry blood towards the
heart.
40. What can be said about the endothelium of fenestrated capillaries?
A. the endothelial cells have pores (windows) to allow rapid movement of
sol- utes and water.
B. gaps between adjacent endothelial cells allow free exchange between
blood and interstitial fluid.
C. their tunica intima is composed of a complete lining of endothelial cells.
D. They do not have an endothelium.
Answer is A: Fenestrated capillaries have pores (windows/fenestre) which
pen- etrate the endothelial lining which facilitates the passage of material
through them.
41. Which of the following definitions best describes veins?
A. a vessel that carries de-oxygenated blood.
B. a vessel that carries blood towards the heart.
C. vessels that contain valves.
D. vessels through which blood flows under the influence of pressure
produced by the heart.
Answer is B: Veins carry blood towards the heart. In the case of the
pulmonary veins only, the blood is oxygenated.
42. Fenestrated capillaries permit the exchange of nutrients and wastes between
cells and the blood because of which feature of their structure?
A. gaps between adjacent endothelial cells allow free exchange between
blood and interstitial fluid.
B. they are in close proximity to most cells.
C. their tunica intima is composed of a single layer of endothelial cells.
D. their endothelium has pores (windows) to allow the rapid movement of
water and solutes.
Answer is D: The pores (holes) in the endothelium allows passage of material
through the capillary wall.
43. Which of the following is a difference between arteries and veins?
A. artery walls have more elastic tissue and smooth muscle than veins.
B. veins have three distinct “tunics” in their walls whereas arteries have only
two.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.3 Blood Vessels 273

C. blood flow in veins is pulsatile while that is arteries is continuous.

D. the walls of veins have more elastic tissue and smooth muscle than in
arteries.
Answer is A: The walls of arteries are thicker than the walls of veins due to
arteries having more smooth muscle and elastic tissue.
44. Capillaries permit the exchange of nutrients and wastes between cells and the
blood because of which feature of their structure?
A. adjacent endothelial cells are separated by gaps which allow free exchange
between blood and interstitial fluid.
B. they are in close proximity to most cells.
C. they have a single layer, the tunica intima, consisting of a single layer of
endothelial cells in their walls.
D. their endothelial cells have pores (windows) to allow the rapid movement
of water and solutes.
Answer is C: the walls of capillaries are very thin and have only one tunic, not
three in their wall.
45. People with occupations that involve standing all day are at risk of varicose
veins. Why should this be true?
A. Veins have a larger lumen than arteries so hold more blood which distends
them.
B. Veins have only two tunics so their walls are more easily stretched into
varicosity.
C. Gravity acting on blood in the legs puts stress on the vessel walls
increasing the likelihood that they will stretch and distort.
D. When standing still, the valves stay open and blood accumulates in the leg
veins.
Answer is C: Gravity acting on the blood in the legs of a standing person
increases the strain on the walls of a vein. A weakness will lead to the walls
becoming distended and the valve not operating correctly.
46. Which statement is INCORRECT? Colloid osmotic pressure:
A. is the difference in solution concentration between plasma and interstitial
fluid.
B. refers to the greater solution concentration of plasma, compared to intersti-
tial fluid, due to the plasma proteins.
C. causes water to be drawn into blood from the interstitial fluid.
D. is the pressure exerted on capillary walls due to the collision of the plasma
proteins.
Answer is D: Although colloid osmotic pressure has the word “pressure” this
does not mean that a physical pressure is exerted on capillary walls due to the
colloids (the plasma proteins).

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
274 12 Cardiovascular System

47. Which tunic(s) are ABSENT from the walls of blood capillaries?
A. tunica intima
B. tunics externa and intima
C. tunics media and externa
D. tunics interna and media
Answer is C: Capillaries are thin-walled vessels that only have the tunica
intima (= interna) in their walls. Hence the tunica media and tunica externa
are absent.

12.4 Pressure: The Physics of Pressure

The concept of pressure may be applied to solids resting on a surface, liquids held
in a container, or to gases. The pressure exerted by a solid is determined by
dividing the weight of the solid (weight = mass × 9.8) by the area of the solid that
is in con- tact with the surface upon which it rests. Thus pressure has the SI units
“newton per square metre” and the “pascal” (1 N/m 2 = 1 Pa). Pressure in liquids
may be deter- mined by the depth below the liquid’s surface at which the pressure
measurement is made. This depth, being in units of length, gives rise to some of
the units used to measure pressure within liquids: the “mm Hg” and “cm H 2O”.
Gases, like liquids, are fluids and so the pressure exerted by the atmosphere may
also be expressed as mm Hg. Thus at sea level, “normal” atmospheric pressure is
760 mmHg (or 1 atmo- sphere, or 14.7psi, or 1016 millibar, or 1016 hectopascals).
If the pressure within an enclosed gas is less than the surrounding atmospheric
pressure it is called a “nega- tive pressure” (or suction). If it is greater than the
atmospheric pressure it is called a positive pressure – both are medically and
physiologically useful. Fluids flow because of a pressure difference. That is, fluids
flow away from regions of higher pressure towards regions of lower pressure. The
body, by creating a region of high (or low) pressure can induce the blood to flow
through the blood vessels and air to flow into and out of the lungs.
When fluids are flowing their behaviour is complex but reasonably predictable.
The rules or “laws” that allow us to predict such behaviour are Boyle’s law,
Henry’s law, Poiseuille’s law, Pascal’s principle, Bernoulli’s theorem, Fick’s law
of diffu- sion, the law of partial pressures, and the ideal gas equation. Fluid flow in
the body is complicated by the dilation and constriction of the airways and blood
vessels; the ability of constituents in the gas or blood to move out of and into the
tubes and ves- sels; and by the body altering the pressure differences generated by
the muscular efforts of the heart and respiratory muscles, or by changing its
posture.
1. How much pressure in units of centimetres of water pressure is equivalent
to10 mmHg pressure?
A. 1.36 cm of water
B. 10 cm of water

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.4 Pressure: The Physics of Pressure 275

C. 13.6 cm of water
D. 136 cm of water
Answer is C: 1 mmHg ~ = 1.36 cmH 2O, so 10 mmHg ~ = 13.6 cmH 2O. Even
without knowing the conversion factor between cmH2O and mmHg, you
should know that mercury is much denser than water. Hence choices A, C are
not correct.
2. The pressure inside a working suction bottle is most likely to be;
A. 740 mmHg
B. 760 mmHg
C. 780 mmHg
D. 800 mmHg
Answer is A: Given that atmospheric pressure is about 760 mmHg, for
suction to occur, the pressure in the suction bottle must be a “negative”
pressure. That is, less than 760.
3. The volume of gas trapped within a space will increase as pressure decreases,
the physics law that refers to this is:
A. Henry’s law
B. Poiseuille’s law
C. Hugh’s law
D. Boyle’s law
Answer is D: Boyle’s law relates gas pressure and gas volume.
4. Increasing the number of red cells per millilitre of blood will:
A. increase the viscosity and increase the rate of flow of the blood
B. decrease the viscosity and increase the rate of flow of the blood.
C. increase the viscosity and decrease the rate of flow of the blood.
D. decrease the viscosity and decrease the rate of flow of the blood.
Answer is C: Increasing the number of rbc would increase blood viscosity and
if viscosity increases, then rate of flow would decrease (Poiseuille’s law).
5. A scuba diver swimming at a depth of 10 m will experience a pressure of how
many atmospheres?
A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 1.5
Answer is B: A head of water of 10 m will produce an atmosphere of
pressure, which when added to the one atmosphere of pressure due to the air
of the atmo- sphere gives 2 atm pressure.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
276 12 Cardiovascular System

6. What law is being “obeyed” by a gas bubble as it expands inside a person’s

colon as the aeroplane ascends to cruising height?
A. Dolphin’s law
B. Henry’s Law
C. Boyle’s Law
D. Aames’s law
Answer is C: Boyle’s law relates P and V: the volume of an enclosed gas
expands as pressure decreases. The air pressure in an aeroplane cabin is
allowed to decrease to the equivalent of the air pressure at about 2700 m
above sea level.
7. 100 mmHg pressure equates to how many cm of
water? A. 134
B. 13.4
C. 760
D. 76
Answer is A: 1 mmHg ~ = 1.34 cmH2O, so 100 mmHg ~ 134 cmH2O.
8. According to Boyle’s law, what will happen in a fixed amount of gas if its
vol- ume decreases?
A. the pressure of the gas will decrease
B. the pressure of the gas will increase
C. the temperature of the gas will decrease
D. the temperature of the gas will increase
Answer is B: Pressure is inversely proportional to the volume, so if volume
DEcreases, the pressure will INcrease. Boyle’s law applies to gas at a constant
temperature.
9. Consider Boyle’s law. If the pressure being exerted on an enclosed volume of
gas (at a constant temperature) is increased by 20 %, by what percentage
would its volume change?
A. volume would increase by 20 %
B. volume would increase by 44 %
C. volume would decrease by 44 %
D. volume would decrease by 20 %
Answer is D: Pressure and volume are inversely proportional. So if P
increases by 20 %, V will decrease by 20 %.
10. A suction pump when used to clear an obstructed airway, expands the volume
in its chamber to
A. produce a negative pressure and obstructing liquid is pushed out by air
pres- sure in the lungs
B. produce a positive pressure and obstructing liquid is pushed out by air
pres- sure in the lungs

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.4 Pressure: The Physics of Pressure 277

C. produce a negative pressure and obstructing liquid is sucked up into the

chamber
D. produce a positive pressure and obstructing liquid is sucked by
atmospheric pressure into the chamber
Answer is A: A suction pump produces a “negative” pressure (one that is less
than atmospheric pressure). Hence air in the lungs will flow out into the
suction pump, hopefully pushing the obstructing liquid out too.
11. A walker carried a balloon filled with 10 L of air, from sea level (where the
atmospheric pressure was 101 kPa), up a mountain to a height of 3000 m
(where the atmospheric pressure was 70 kPa). What would be the approximate
volume of the balloon at 3000 m?
A. 7L
B. 10 L
C. 14 L
D. 30 L
Answer is C: Boyle’s law states that volume must increase if pressure
decreases, so choices A & B are wrong. If pressure decreases by 70/101, then
volume must increase by 101/70 = 1.4. so 10 L × 1.4 = 14 L.
12. What formula, or law or principle refers to the partial pressure of a gas?
A. Boyle’s law
B. Henry’s law
C. Pascal’s principle
D. Poiseuille’s law
Answer is B: Only Henry’s law: the amount of dissolved gas is proportional
to its partial pressure; refers to gas partial pressure.
13. Approximately how much pressure does a science lecturer who has a mass of
70 kg and is standing on one foot (which has an area of 0.0165 m2), exert on
the ground? (acceleration due to gravity is 10 m/s2)
A. 4.2 kPa
B. 42 kPa
C. 420 kPa
D. 2.4 × 10−5 Pa
Answer is B: Pressure = force divided by area (and force is mass times accel-
eration due to gravity). P = (70 ×10) ÷ 0.0165 = 42, 424Pa ~= 42kPa .
14. Which of the following is a statement of Boyle’s law?
A. If the pressure applied to an enclosed fluid is doubled, then that same pres-
sure is transmitted to all parts of the fluid.
B. If the pressure gradient between two places in an artery is doubled, then
the rate of blood flow will double.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
278 12 Cardiovascular System

C. If the pressure of a fixed amount of gas is doubled, then its volume will be
halved.
D. If the pressure of the gas above a liquid is doubled, then twice as much gas
will dissolve.
Answer is C: Boyle’s law relates pressure in a gas to its volume.
15. In which of the following situations would the greatest pressure be produced?
A. A force of 500 N acts on an area of 0.1 m2.
B. A force of 800 N acts on an area of 0.1 m2.
C. A force of 300 N acts on an area of 0.2 m2.
D. A force of 500 N acts on an area of 0.2 m2.
Answer is B: Pressure = force ÷ area. The higher the force acting on an area
(or the smaller the area that a force acts upon), the greater will be the
pressure. The pressure in choice A is greater than in choice D.
16. Using “suction” to drain fluid is described correctly by which choice below?
Creating a:
A. positive pressure so that it can suck the fluid in the direction of the
positive pressure.
B. negative pressure so that it can push the fluid towards the positive
pressure.
C. negative pressure so that atmospheric pressure will push the fluid towards
the negative pressure.
D. positive pressure so that atmospheric pressure will push the fluid towards
the positive pressure.
Answer is C: Fluids will flow towards the lower pressure, so creating a
pressure below atmospheric pressure will cause fluid to be pushed by
atmospheric pres- sure towards the negative pressure.
17. Pressure is a quantity derived from force and the area in contact with the
force. What is it that pressure measures?
A. the force being exerted on an area.
B. the force divided by the area.
C. the force multiplied by the area.
D. the force divided by the area squared.
Answer is B: Pressure is force divided by area and is measured in N/m2 (=
pas- cal). Choice A is wrong as pressure is not a force.
18. Which of the following is NOT used as a unit of pressure?
A. pascals
B. newtons per square metre

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.4 Pressure: The Physics of Pressure 279

C. millimetres of mercury
D. millilitres of water
Answer is D: Millilitres of water is a volume and is not a form of pressure unit.
19. When performing cardio-pulmonary resuscitation (CPR) why do you use the
“heel” of the hand rather than the whole palm and fingers?
A. A greater force can be exerted by the “heel” of the hand which results in a
greater pressure being exerted.
B. Using the “heel” places a smaller area of the hand in contact with the ster-
num, hence allows a greater force to be exerted.
C. The same force can be applied to a smaller area of the sternum which is
less able to resist the greater downward pressure.
D. The resuscitator’s wrist is less likely to be damaged by applying CPR in
this way.
Answer is C: Maximum force during CPR is determined by the strength of the
resuscitator. Maximum pressure in addition depends on minimising the area
upon which the force is being applied. The heel of the hand allows a small
area to be used.
20. Which choice correctly completes the sentence? Pressure is a:
A. force and is measured in newtons (N).
B. force multiplied by an area and is measured in newton-square metres
(N.m2).
C. force per unit area and is measured in newtons per square metre (N/m2).
D. length and is measured in millimetres of mercury (mm Hg).
Answer is C: Pressure is a unit derived from dividing force by
area.
21. If a blood pressure is stated as 120 over 80 (in units of mm Hg) this means:
A. pulse pressure is 120 mmHg.
B. diastolic pressure is 80 mmHg below atmospheric pressure.
C. systolic pressure is 80 mmHg above atmospheric pressure
D. systolic pressure is 120 mmHg above atmospheric pressure
Answer is D: The larger value (120) is the systolic pressure (i.e. at end of ven-
tricular contraction) and states by how much the blood pressure is above
atmo- spheric pressure.
22. The pressure, P, exerted by an intravenous infusion of saline at the level of the
cannula must be great enough to overcome the venous blood pressure in the
vein. It’s magnitude is given by: P = 10 × 1000 kg/m 3 × head of liquid (in m),
where 1000 kg/m3 is the density of saline. If the venous pressure is 5 kPa,
what is the smallest head of liquid required for the infusion to flow into the
vein?
A. 25 cm
B. 35 cm

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
280 12 Cardiovascular System

C. 45 cm
D. 55 cm
Answer is D: Convert cm to m and kPa to Pa. The pressure at the cannula
must be greater than 5 kPa (5000 Pa). Use the value in choice A: P = 10 ×
1000 kg/m3 × 0.25 m = 2500 Pa = 2.5 kPa. The answer is only half of the
pressure required (5 kPa), hence a head of at least twice 25 cm is required.
Choice D is the only one that will do.
23. Which of these statements about pressure in static liquids is NOT true?
Pressure at a point in a liquid
A. depends on the height of liquid above it.
B. acts equally in all directions.
C. depends on the depth it is below the surface.
D. depends on the volume of liquid above it.
Answer is D: Volume (and even mass) of liquid above a point does not affect
the pressure felt at that point. It is the length of the column of liquid above the
point, and the effect of gravity that determines the pressure in the liquid.
24. Which of the following statements about stationary liquids is FALSE?
A. At the liquid surface, pressure equals atmospheric pressure.
B. The volume of liquid in an enclosed space can be compressed.
C. Pressure increases with depth.
D. Pressure due to weight of liquid is called ‘head of pressure’.
Answer is B: Liquids are incompressible
25. Which of the following is closest to a statement of Poiseuille’s law?
A. Volume flow rate is proportional to the fourth power of the radius of the
tube.
B. The pressure in flowing fluids is lowest where the speed of flow is
greatest.
C. The amount of gas that will dissolve in a liquid is proportional to its
partial pressure.
D. When the flow of fluid is producing sound, then turbulent flow is present.
Answer is A: This is one of the factors in Poiseuille’s law upon which volume
flow rate depends: V ∝ R4
26. The symbols in Poiseuille’s law have the following meanings: V represents
the volume flow rate; ΔP the pressure drop; R the radius of the tube; η the
viscosity of the liquid; l the length of the tube. Which of the following
relationships from Poiseuille’s law is NOT correct?
A. V ∝ R4
B. V ∝ l

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.4 Pressure: The Physics of Pressure 281

C. V ∝ 1/η
D. V ∝ ∆P
Answer is B: Volume flow rate decrease with length of tube as greater length
means greater resistance to flow. It should be V ∝ 1/ l
27. The quantity called ‘pressure’ is defined as the
A. mass per unit area.
B. force per unit area.
C. height of mercury supported by the atmosphere.
D. newton per square metre.
Answer is B: Pressure = force ÷ area. Force and mass are different. Newton
per square metre is the unit but not a definition of pressure.
28. The unit of pressure called the ‘pascal’ (symbol Pa) is the name given to
which of the following combination of units?
A. newton per metre (N/m).
B. newton per square metre (N/m2).
C. millimetres of mercury (mm Hg).
D. force per area (F/A).
Answer is B: Pressure units are derived from force and area units. Choices C
& D are not combinations of units.
29. The millimetre of mercury (mm Hg) is one of the non-SI units used in the
mea- surement of pressure. It is used because:
A. mercury is much denser than water so a much shorter tube can be used
than if cm H2O was the unit.
B. one of the factors that determine pressure is the length of the object
supply- ing the force.
C. a manometer that utilises mercury does not require an electrical power
supply.
D. historically the first measurement of air pressure was made using a glass
tube containing mercury.
Answer is D: The best answer is the historical use of liquid mercury
(hydrogy- rum) to measure pressure. The reason that Hg was used is as stated
in choice A.
30. Which of the following statements about pressure is true?
A. As boxes are stacked on top of each other, the pressure that they exert on
the floor decreases.
B. Very small forces will exert small pressures.
C. By standing on wide flat boards, the pressure exerted on the floor by your
body is decreased.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
282 12 Cardiovascular System

D. Objects of large mass will produce large pressures.

Answer is C: Increasing the area of contact between a mass and the floor will
decrease the pressure being exerted.
31. When an 80 kg person is seated on a stool so that the area of contact is 400
cm2, the pressure on the stool due to the person’s weight is very nearly
A. 2 kPa
B. 20 kPa
C. 200 kPa
D. 2000 kPa
Answer is B: Remember to multiply the mass by 10 (the acceleration due to
gravity).

P = (80 ×10)N ÷ 0.04 m2 = 20 000 Pa = 20 kPa

32. A bed-ridden patient (whose mass is 60 kg) is lying on a firm mattress so that
the area of contact between the mattress and the patient’s bony prominences
(shoulders, buttocks and heels) is 600 cm2. Given that pressure is force
divided by area, and that the acceleration due to gravity is 10 m/s2, what is the
pressure (in kPa) that would be experienced by the bony prominences?
A. 1 kPa
B. 10 kPa
C. 100 kPa
D. 60 kPa
Answer is B: P = (60 ×10)N ÷ 0.06m2 = 10 000Pa = 10kPa
33. The measurement of cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) pressure is made while the
patient is lying down rather than sitting up. The horizontal posture prevents a
false high reading due to
A. the weight of the ‘head’ of CSF in the spinal cord.
B. possible movement of the patient while sitting up.
C. pressure on the lumbar vertebrae when the back is vertical.
D. the greater muscle tone needed to maintain a sitting position.
Answer is A: In the sitting position the CSF pressure as measured by tapping
into the lumbar region would be increased by the head of pressure of about
40 cm of water.
34. A patient lying on a mattress of enclosed air is less likely to develop decubitis
ulcers because the:
A. mass of the patient is decreased.
B. force exerted by the patient is decreased.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.4 Pressure: The Physics of Pressure 283

C. patient’s surface area in contact with the mattress is increased.

D. pressure exerted by the patient on the mattress is increased.
Answer is C: An air mattress flexes around a patient’s body so that it conforms
more closely to their curved shape. Consequently, the area of contact between
the patient and the supporting surface is increased. This increased area means
that the pressure will be decreased. This lower pressure is less likely to com-
press the blood vessels that supply the skin and so circulation will not be cut
off. Hence ulcers will be avoided.
35. A bedridden patient is less likely to develop bed sores while lying on a water
bed. This is because:
A. the force applied to their bony projections is acting over a tiny area.
B. the flexibility of the bed assists the blood circulation.
C. the weight of the patient is being supported by parts of the body that are
adapted for weight-bearing.
D. the patient experiences a uniform pressure over most of the lower surface
of their body.
Answer is D: A water bag mattress flexes around a patient’s body so that it
conforms more closely to their curved shape. Consequently, the area of
contact between the patient and the supporting surface is increased. This
increased area means that the pressure will be decreased. This lower pressure
is less likely to compress the blood vessels that supply the skin and so
circulation will not be cut off. Hence bed sores (ulcers) will be avoided.
36. Pascal’s principle (‘pressure applied to an enclosed fluid at rest is transmitted
to every portion of the fluid and to the walls of the containing vessel’) may be
used to understand which of the following phenomena?
A. An air mattress minimises the pressure applied to a bed-ridden patient’s
body.
B. A worker can walk on wet concrete without sinking by standing on wide
boards.
C. That a pulse can be felt as blood flows through a superficial artery.
D. The collapsing of a plastic intravenous bag as the liquid runs out.
Answer is C: The blood may be considered an enclosed fluid. As the left ven-
tricle exerts pressure on the blood, the pressure can be felt throughout the
arte- rial system. So this pressure can be detected by palpating a pulse point.
37. The consideration of pressure in gases differs from pressure in liquids because
A. pressure at any point in a gas acts differently in different directions.
B. in a gas mixture, the pressure exerted by each different gas must be
considered.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
284 12 Cardiovascular System

C. the pressure in a liquid increases with depth but does not for a gas.
D. liquids are virtually incompressible whereas gases are compressible.
Answer is D: There is a lot of space between the particles in a gas so the
volume of an enclosed can be decreased. Boyle’s law.
38. Boyle’s law states: ‘when the volume (V) of a fixed amount of gas decreases,
its pressure (P) will increase, and vice versa (provided that the temperature
(T) doesn’t change)’. In symbols, this law is:
A. P∝V
B. P∝T
C. P∝1÷V
D. P∝V×T
Answer is C: Pressure is inversely proportional to volume. So as volume
decreases, pressure does the opposite – it increases.
39. Which of the following statements from kinetic molecular theory can be used
to explain why a region of low pressure will result in gas particles rushing into
that region?
A. Particles of a gas are widely separated, consequently can be easily
compressed.
B. Gas particles are moving at very high speed in random directions.
C. There are a great many sub-microscopic particles per unit volume.
D. Gas particles will exert a force on colliding with the walls of their
container.
Answer is B: As particles of a gas are moving at high speed (hundreds of
metres per second) and in random directions, every direction will have some
particles moving in that direction. Hence a region with fewer particles (i.e. at
a lower pressure) will have more particles moving into it than are moving
away from it. This will tend to eliminate volumes with different pressures.
40. The kinetic molecular theory of gases provides us with some valuable insights
into the behaviour of gases. One correct prediction of the theory is: That gas
pressure is:
A. due to the force exerted by gas molecules as they collide with the walls of
their container.
B. due to the forces of attraction between gas particles.
C. inversely proportional to the gas temperature.
D. proportional to the partial pressures of the different gases that make up the
gas.
Answer is A: Gas molecules exert a force on walls as they bounce off. Gas
pres- sure may be understood as the cumulative effect of the force exerted by
mil- lions of particles, divided by the area of the walls.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.4 Pressure: The Physics of Pressure 285

41. Given that 20 % of the air at the normal pressure of 100 kPa is oxygen, then
what is the partial pressure of oxygen?
A. 0.2 kPa
B. 2.0 kPa
C. 20 kPa
D. 80 kPa
Answer is C: The partial pressure of oxygen is proportional to its percent con-
centration in the mixture of gases. 20 % of 100 kPa = 20 kPa.
42. What will be the partial pressure of oxygen in a hyperbaric chamber where the
atmosphere contains 30 % oxygen and is at a pressure of three atmospheres
(300 kPa)?
A. 20 kPa.
B. 30 kPa.
C. 60 kPa.
D. 90 kPa.
Answer is D: The partial pressure of oxygen is proportional to its percent con-
centration in the mixture of gases. 30 % of 300 kPa = 90 kPa.
43. Which of the following is a statement of Henry’s law?
A. The partial pressure of a gas, in a mixture of gases, is the contribution it
makes to the total pressure of the mixture.
B. In a mixture of gases, the total pressure is the sum of the pressures exerted
by each of the gases alone.
C. Pressure applied to any point in a gas is transmitted equally and undimin-
ished to all parts of the gas and to the walls of the container.
D. The quantity of gas that will dissolve in a liquid at a given temperature is
proportional to the partial pressure of the gas and to its solubility
coefficient.
Answer is D: Henry’s law relates the amount of gas that will dissolve in a
liquid to its partial pressure (or pressure).
44. Which of the following sentences best represents a statement of the Bernoulli
effect? Pressure in a…
A. flowing fluid is greatest where its speed is greatest.
B. fluid acts equally in all directions.
C. flowing fluid is lowest where its speed is lowest.
D. flowing fluid is lowest where its speed is greatest.
Answer is D: Faster speeds of flow indicate that pressure in the liquid at that
point is low.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
286 12 Cardiovascular System

45. An ophthalmologist using a tonometer measures the pressure in an eyeball to

be 10 mmHg. What does this mean?
A. gauge pressure is atmospheric pressure plus 10 mmHg.
B. actual pressure is atmospheric pressure plus 10 mmHg.
C. actual pressure is atmospheric pressure minus 10 mmHg.
D. 10 mmHg is a negative pressure.
Answer is B: At sea-level on Earth, atmospheric pressure is about 760 mmHg.
This value is taken to be “zero” and is often ignored by pressure measuring
devices. When such devices show the pressure to be 10 mmHg on their gauge,
this means that the actual pressure is 10 mmHg above atmospheric pressure.
Hence total pressure is 760 + 10 mmHg.
46. A statement of Boyle’s law could be:
A. as pressure of a gas increases, its solubility increases
B. as volume of a gas increases, its pressure decreases.
C. as volume of a gas decreases, its pressure decreases.
D. as pressure of a gas increases, its solubility decreases.
Answer is B: Boyle’s law relates gas volume to its pressure. The relationship
is an inverse one, so choice B is correct.
47. If the composition of air is 20 percent oxygen with an atmospheric pressure of
700 mmHg, what would the partial pressure of oxygen be?
A. 14 mmHg.
B. 20 mmHg.
C. 140 mmHg.
D. 700 mmHg.
Answer is C: 10 % of 700 mmHg is 70, so 20 % is 140 mmHg

12.5 Pressure Applied to the Cardiovascular System

Blood moves from the heart to the capillaries due to the pressure exerted by the
heart muscle (and by gravity). The ventricles contract to force blood into the aorta
and the pulmonary trunk and relax to allow blood from the vena cavae and pulmo-
nary veins to enter them via the atria. The number of cycles per minute is called
the heart rate. Aortic blood pressure oscillates between the systolic pressure (the
maxi- mum value) of about 120 mmHg – for a male at rest – and the diastolic
value (the minimum value) of about 80 mmHg. These values increase as the level
of physical activity increases and return to their resting values after exercise. This
constantly oscillating blood pressure causes the arteries to bulge and recoil and
can be felt as “the pulse” in superficial arteries.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.5 Pressure Applied to the Cardiovascular System 287

Hypertension is the diagnosis if resting systolic and diastolic blood pressures

are greater than 140 mmHg and 90 mmHg (respectively). This indicates that the
arteries are presenting a greater than expected resistance to the flow of blood and
that the heart is working harder to move blood to the capillaries. The extra
resistance may be due to the arteries being unable to expand as blood is pumped
into them (they have lost elasticity) or because the lumen of the artery has been
narrowed due to a plaque growing in the wall. This hypertension is a cause of
medical concern.
Blood moves from the capillaries to the heart due to gravity (for blood
returning from anatomy superior to the heart) and when contracting muscles
squash against veins which forces the contained blood through the venous valves
in the arms and leg veins. The valves ensure that blood can only flow towards the
heart. The act of inhalation increases pressure in the abdomen and this also helps
to push blood in the inferior vena cava towards the heart.
1. When a person is standing upright, what can be said about the arterial blood
pressure in their feet?
A. It will be greater than arterial pressure in the aorta.
B. It will be less than the arterial pressure in the aorta.
C. It will be the same as the arterial pressure in the aorta.
D. It will be the same as the venous blood pressure in the feet.
Answer is A: Due to the head of liquid above the feet contributing hydrostatic
to the arterial pressure produced by the heart, arterial blood pressure in the
feet will be greater than in the aorta.
2. A plaque in a coronary vessel wall will result in a decrease in the lumen diam-
eter of a coronary artery and in less oxygen being delivered to the heart
muscle. Why is this?
A. A protruding plaque increases the distance blood needs to travel and this
increases resistance to flow.
B. A narrow artery restricts blood flow by increasing blood’s viscosity.
C. The constricted artery causes the pressure gradient to decrease which
results in lower blood flow.
D. The decrease in artery radius will cause blood volume flow rate to decrease.
Answer is D: Poiseuille’s law states that volume flow rate is proportional to
radius the 4th power so a decrease in radius results in a decrease in flow rate
and hence less oxygen being delivered to the myocardium.
3. When the AV valve between the left atrium and left ventricle is open, the
blood pressure in both chambers is zero. When the left ventricle contracts the
AV valve shuts and blood pressure in the left ventricle rises while blood
pressure in the left atrium reaches and stays at ~5 mmHg. Blood pressure in
the aorta is ~80 mmHg at the end of diastole. Which of the following will
happen next?
A. When blood pressure in the left ventricle reaches 6 mmHg, blood will
flow into the left atrium.
B. When blood pressure in the left ventricle reaches 80 mmHg, blood will
flow into the aorta.
ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
288 12 Cardiovascular System

C. When blood pressure in the left ventricle reaches 81 mmHg, blood will
flow into the aorta.
D. Blood volume in the left ventricle will decrease as pressure increases until
there is sufficient pressure to push blood into the aorta.
Answer is C: Pressure in the LV will rise as the myocardium contracts until
pressure in the LV is greater than the pressure in the aorta. When this
happens, the aortic valve will be forced open and blood will move from the
LV into the aorta through the aortic valve.
4. What units is a blood pressure of 120/80 is expressed in?
A. Millimetres of mercury
B. Centimetres of blood
C. Centimetres of mercury
D. Pascals
Answer is A: Despite the mmHg not being an SI unit, blood pressure is still
commonly reported in this unit.
5. What effect will increasing the concentration of red cells in blood have? It will:
A. decrease blood viscosity and increase aortic pressure
B. increase blood viscosity and decrease aortic pressure
C. increase blood viscosity and increase aortic pressure
D. decrease blood viscosity and decrease aortic pressure
Answer is C: Viscosity will increase as the number of rbc increases. This will
also increase the resistance to flow so BP in the aorta will increase a bit.
6. By which means will the sympathetic response raise blood pressure?
A. Vasoconstriction due to stimulation of alpha receptors
B. Vasoconstriction due to stimulation of beta receptors
C. Increase cardiac output due to stimulation of alpha receptors
D. Increased stroke volume due to stimulation of alpha receptors
Answer is A: The neurotransmitter epinephrine will attach to the alpha
receptor sites of smooth muscle in blood vessels and cause vasoconstriction
(except for blood vessel in skeletal muscle). Choices C and D are wrong as
beta, not alpha receptors increase CO. Choice A is wrong as alpha (not beta)
produce vasoconstriction.
7. What is a normal pressure in the venous system returning blood to the heart?
A. 35 mmHg
B. 35 cm water
C. 80 mmHg
D. 10 cm water
Answer is D: 35 mmHg is BP at arterial end of capillary, so C is also wrong.
17 mmHg is BP at venous end of capillary, 35 cmH 2O is ~26 mmHg so
choice B is too high.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.5 Pressure Applied to the Cardiovascular System 289

8. The intravenous cannula that will give the largest flow rate is:
A. 0.7 mm diameter 32 mm length
B. 0.7 mm diameter 19 mm length
C. 1.8 mm diameter 32 mm length
D. 1.8 mm diameter 19 mm length
Answer is D: The largest diameter gives the largest flow rate and the shortest
length provides the lesser resistance to flow.
9. Consider Pascal’s principle. If the heart exerts a pressure of 120 mmHg on the
blood in the aorta, where else in the body will the blood pressure be 120 mm
Hg?
A. in the brachial artery of a seated person
B. in the superior vena cava of a standing person.
C. in the capillaries of the feet of a supine person
D. in the anterior tibial artery of a person who is standing
Answer is A: Resting BP is usually measured while the subject is seated. In
this posture, the brachial artery is at the level of the heart. Hence gravity will
not affect the BP in the brachial artery. In a standing person, gravity would
increase the BP in the legs. BP in the capillaries and vena cava is not
comparable to BP in the aorta.
10. If an atheroma reduces the diameter of an artery from 2 mm to 1 mm, what
effect would this have on the blood flow through the artery? (According to
Poiseuille’s law, volume flow rate through a blood vessel is proportional to its
radius to the fourth power i.e. V ∝ R4).
A. blood flow would decrease to half (1/2) the value for an artery with
diameter 2 mm.
B. blood flow would decrease to a quarter (1/4) of the value for an artery
with diameter 2 mm.
C. blood flow would decrease to an eighth (1/8) of the value for an artery
with diameter 2 mm.
D. blood flow would decrease to one sixteenth (1/16) of the value for an
artery with diameter 2 mm.
Answer is D: As volume flow rate is proportional to radius to the fourth power,
if radius decreases by half, volume flow rate decreases by ½ × ½ × ½ × ½ = 1 /
16.
11. If the radius of a blood vessel is halved, the blood flow through it drops to one
sixteenth its previous value. This statement could be describing which of the
following?
A. a decrease in pressure gradient
B. atherosclerosis
C. vasoconstriction
D. Poiseuille’s law

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
290 12 Cardiovascular System

Answer is D: The statement also describes vasoconstriction, but the reference

to a quantity means the Poiseuille’s law is the best answer.
12. A man who is standing has a resting systolic blood pressure of 120 mmHg at
the start of his aorta. What will be the pressure in the arteries of his feet?
A. about 40 mmHg, as arterial blood pressure decreases with distance from
the heart.
B. about 120 mmHg as arterial blood pressure does not fall appreciably until
just before blood enters the capillaries.
C. about 200 mmHg as the “head” of liquid increases the blood pressure in
the feet.
D. about 80 mmHg as blood pressure will drop in the absence of venous
return when the “skeletal muscle pump” is not operating.
Answer is C: When standing, the BP in the feet results from the pumping of
the heart (120 mmHg) as well as the hydrostatic effect of the head of liquid –
another 80 mmHg or more.
13. To what does the term “cardiac output” refer?
A. the speed of blood flow through the aorta.
B. the volume of blood flowing through the aorta per minute.
C. the volume of blood pumped by the heart with each beat.
D. the number of heart beats per minute.
Answer is B: CO is the volume flow rate. The volume of blood pumped per
minute. Choice C is the stroke volume. Choice D is the heart rate.
14. A resting blood pressure stated as 120/80 (in units of mmHg) refers to
A. maximum pressure in the aorta/minimum pressure in the aorta
B. maximum pressure in the aorta/maximum pressure in the vena cavae
C. diastolic pressure/systolic pressure
D. left ventricular systolic/right ventricular systolic
Answer is A: Arterial blood pressure cycles between a maximum value and a
minimum value in time with the heartbeat. It is recorded as the maximum
value adjacent to the minimum value.
15. Which of the following does NOT influence the resistance to blood flow?
A. diameter of the arterioles
B. temperature of the blood
C. haematocrit
D. radius of the veins
Answer is D: Resistance to blood flow is of interest on the arterial side of the
circulation. Radius of veins is much greater than radius of arteries.
Temperature does affect blood flow for example in the situation of
extremities with “frostbite”.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.5 Pressure Applied to the Cardiovascular System 291

16. Colloid osmotic pressure

A. is due to all of the dissolved particles in blood
B. is the difference in pressure between the arterial end and the venous end of
a capillary
C. is the difference in pressure between the inside of a capillary and the inter-
stitial fluid
D. is due to the plasma proteins in the blood
Answer is D: Plasma proteins (also known as colloids) are responsible for the
colloid osmotic pressure of blood.
17. If a person has an arterial blood pressure measurement of 16 kPa (120
mmHg), this equates to which of the following pressures in newtons per
square centimetre?
A. 16,000
B. 160
C. 1.6
D. 1600
Answer is A: The “newton per square metre” is renamed the pascal. 1 N/m2 =
1 Pa. 16,000 N/m2 = 16,000 Pa = 16 kPa.
18. An intravenous (IV) infusion flows into a vein because of hydrostatic
pressure. This depends LEAST on which of the following?
A. gravity
B. the density of the IV solution
C. the volume of liquid in the IV bag
D. the “head” of liquid
Answer is C: Gravity acting on the head of liquid provides the pressure that
forces an IV solution into a vein. As long as the head of liquid is maintained,
the volume contained in the IV bag has little influence.
19. Due to an atheromatous plaque, a man’s coronary artery has narrowed to one
third of its healthy diameter, all other things being equal, his blood flow rate
(ml/min) in that artery would
A. be one third of the unobstructed value
B. be one eighty-first of its healthy value
C. be one ninth of its healthy value
D. be one twenty-seventh of its healthy value
Answer is B: Poiseuille’s law states that volume flow rate is proportional to
radius to the fourth power, so blood flow rate would be 13 × 13 × 13 × 13 = 1 / 81
20. According to Poiseuille’s law, volume flow rate through a blood vessel is pro-
portional to its radius to the fourth power (V ∝ R4). If an atheroma reduces the

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
292 12 Cardiovascular System

radius of an artery from 4 mm to 2 mm, what effect would this have on the
blood flow through the artery?
A. blood flow would decrease to half (1/2) the value for an artery with radius
4 mm.
B. blood flow would decrease to a quarter (1/4) of the value for an artery
with radius 4 mm.
C. blood flow would decrease to an eighth (1/8) of the value for an artery
with radius 4 mm.
D. blood flow would decrease to one sixteenth (1/16) of the value for an
artery with radius 4 mm.
Answer is D: 2 mm is half of 4 mm and according to Poiseuille’s law:
V ∝ (‰)4 = 1 / 16
21. Say a diastolic blood pressure reading was 80 mm Hg. This is consistent with
which one of the following statements?
A. the diastolic reading is 80 mm Hg greater than atmospheric pressure.
B. pressure is measured in length units.
C. the diastolic reading is 80 mm Hg less than atmospheric pressure.
D. this is the maximum pressure produced by contraction of the myocardium.
Answer is A: Because atmospheric pressure (about 760 mmHg) is always
pres- ent, it is taken to be a “relative zero” and other pressures are stated as an
amount greater than atmospheric pressure. We say 80 implying 80 more than
760, rather than stating 840 mmHg (760 + 80).
22. If mean arterial pressure is kept constant while a small artery changes its
radius from 1 mm to 2 mm, what will happen?
A. blood volume flow rate through the artery will double.
B. blood volume flow rate through the artery will increase to four times its
previous value.
C. blood volume flow rate through the artery will be sixteen times the
original value.
D. blood speed will halve so there will be no change in volume flow rate.
Answer is C: If an artery dilates to twice its previous value, sixteen times (2 4)
as much blood will flow per minute.
23. Complete the following sentence. When standing, the arterial blood pressure
in the feet is:
A. less than the arterial blood pressure of the hands.
B. reduced due to the action of valves in supporting the blood in the veins of
the legs.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.5 Pressure Applied to the Cardiovascular System 293

C. increased by the hydrostatic pressure due to the “head of blood” in the

vessels.
D. less than the venous blood pressure in the feet.
Answer is C: Because of gravity, the position of the body in space affects
blood pressure. When standing, hydrostatic pressure increases the BP in the
blood vessels of the feet.
24. When “colloid osmotic pressure” is used in relation to the blood. What is
being referred to?
A. the movement of water molecules across the membrane of a red blood cell.
B. the filtration pressure in the glomeruli of the kidneys.
C. the osmotic pressure forcing water and solute out of capillaries.
D. the osmotic pressure due to the plasma proteins.
Answer is D: Plasma proteins are known as colloids. They are present in
blood but not in the interstitial fluid. That part of the osmotic pressure of
blood that they produce is known as colloid osmotic pressure.
25. According to Poiseuille’s law of fluid flow, the volume flow rate, V, is
propor- tional to radius to the fourth power. What would happen to the volume
flow rate of blood if the diameter of an artery decreased to 20 % (1/5) of its
original diameter? V would:
A. be one fifth (0.2) of its original value.
B. be one twenty-fifth (0.04) its original value.
C. be 1/625 (0.0016) of its original value.
D. five times its original value.
Answer is C: (1 / 5)4 = (0.2)4 = 0.0016 . Narrowing of arteries has dire conse-
quences for blood flow.
26. If the blood pressure at the arterial end of a blood capillary is 4000 Pa (30
mmHg) and at the venule end of the capillary is 2000 Pa (15 mmHg), and the
capillary has a length of 1 mm, what will the pressure gradient in the capillary
be?
A. 4000 Pa/mm
B. 2000 Pa/mm
C. 15 mmHg
D. 45 mmHg
Answer is B: Pressure gradient = (pressure difference) / length = (4000 − 2000)/ 1 = 2000Pa / mm .
Choice C states the pressure difference but not the gradient!
27. If a blood pressure is stated as 16 over 10.6 (in units of kilopascals) this means:
A. pulse pressure is 16 kPa.
B. diastolic pressure is 10.6 kPa below atmospheric pressure.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
294 12 Cardiovascular System

C. systolic pressure is 5.4 kPa above atmospheric pressure

D. systolic pressure is 16 kPa above atmospheric pressure
Answer is D: The larger value (16) is the systolic pressure (i.e. maximum
blood pressure at end of ventricular contraction) and states by how much the
blood pressure is above atmospheric pressure.
28. As a result of the pumping action of the heart, we are able to feel pulsations in
our superficial arteries (e.g. the radial pulse). This effect is an example of
which of the following?
A. Pascal’s principle.
B. Torricelli’s law.
C. The Bernoulli effect.
D. Starling’s law of the heart.
Answer is A: Pascal’s states that pressure applied to an enclosed fluid is trans-
mitted undiminished throughout the fluid. The LV pushes blood into the aorta
at pressure. This pressure distends the artery walls of the brachial artery –
even though it is 70 cm away from the heart – and we can feel the pulsations
as pres- sure rises and falls.
29. Suppose that a person who is standing still, has a mean arterial pressure in the
aorta of 13 kPa (98 mmHg). The blood pressure at the start of the arterioles of
the feet will be:
A. about the same since healthy arteries present very little resistance to blood
flow.
B. less because blood pressure decreases along arteries as distance from the
heart increases.
C. more because of the hydrostatic pressure exerted by the column of blood
in the arteries.
D. less because of the decreased venous return which results from the
person’s inactivity.
Answer is C: When standing, the vertical column of blood in the arteries
exerts pressure on the blood in the arterioles in the feet due to the head of
liquid. Hence mean arterial BP in the feet will be considerably greater than 13
kPa.
30. A systolic blood pressure which is stated as 16 kPa (120 mmHg) means that
the pressure in the arterial blood is:
A. negative 16 kPa.
B. 16 kPa above zero kilopascals.
C. 16 kPa greater than atmospheric pressure.
D. 16 kPa less than atmospheric pressure.
Answer is C: The pressure exerted by the atmosphere is disregarded when
read- ing the pressure on the gauge. 16 kPa actually means that blood is
actually at a pressure of 16 + 101 kPa.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.5 Pressure Applied to the Cardiovascular System 295

31. Given that a healthy resting blood pressure may be stated as 16/10.6 (in units
of kPa). What would the reading on the pressure gauge of a
sphygmomanometer that was measuring blood pressure in the posterior tibial
artery of a standing patient be closest to?
A. 6 kPa, the average blood pressure at the arterial end of the capillaries.
B. 12 kPa, the hydrostatic pressure due to head of blood.
C. 28 kPa, the hydrostatic pressure plus average aortic pressure.
D. 107 kPa, atmospheric pressure plus average pressure at the start of the
capillaries.
Answer is C: Both pressure due to the head of liquid between the heart and
the feet (about 11 kPa) and pressure due to the pumping action of the heart
(16 kPa) must be added to arrive at BP in the feet when standing.
Alternatively, the value in choice D is too high, and choices A and B are
values that are too low and do not take into account the two components that
are operating in a standing person.
32. Consider an arteriole that is 50 cm distant from the aorta. If blood pressure in
the aorta is 130 mmHg and in the arteriole is 30 mmHg, what is the pressure
GRADIENT between the two?
A. 2 mmHg/cm
B. 30 mmHg/cm
C. 100 mmHg/cm
D. 130 mmHg/cm
Answer is A: pressure gradient = pressure drop ÷ distance = (130 − 30) ÷ 50 = 2 mmHg / cm

33. In a resting heart pumping 5 litres of blood per minute, the average aortic
blood pressure is 13.3 kPa. Suppose arterial blood pressure falls to 3.3 kPa at
the start of a capillary that is 50 cm from the heart. What is the pressure
gradient along the path from heart to capillary?
A. 5 l/min.
B. 200 Pa/cm.
C. 2000 Pa/m.
D. 10,000 Pa.
Answer is B: pressure gradient = pressure drop ÷ distance = (13, 300 − 3, 300) ÷ 50 = 200 Pa / cm .
Choices A and D are not gradients.
34. If a stenosis reduces the size of a blood vessel to half of the original diameter,
the volume flow rate through the vessel will be reduced. Which relationship
below determines the extent of the decrease in flow?
A. Poiseuille’s law.
B. Bernoulli’s theorem.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
296 12 Cardiovascular System

C. Dalton’s law.
D. Pascal’s principle.
Answer is A: Poiseuille’s law relates diameter (radius) of blood vessel to vol-
ume flow rate.
35. During an auscultatory blood pressure determination, the Korotkoff sounds
that are listened for are produced because
A. the partial pressure of the blood has been increased.
B. the blood flow is turbulent.
C. of the viscosity of the blood.
D. the volume flow rate has decreased.
Answer is B: Turbulent blood flow produces sound that is audible with a
stetho- scope. Auscultatory systolic BP measurement requires the artery to be
squashed flat. At the point just before blood flow is stopped the blood squirts
through the squashed artery in a turbulent fashion and this noisy squirting
blood produces a sound audible with a stethoscope.
36. Consider a capillary where the blood hydrostatic pressure is 3300 Pa at the
arte- rial end and 2000 Pa at the venous end. If the difference between the
osmotic pressures inside and outside the capillary is 2900 Pa, what would be
the net pressure difference between the surrounding tissue and blood in the
venous end of the capillary?
A. 400 Pa.
B. 900 Pa.
C. 1300 Pa.
D. 4900 Pa.
Answer is B: Blood hydrostatic pressure tends to move water and solutes out
of the capillary, while osmotic pressure tends to move water into the capillary.
Taking the outward direction as positive: net pressure at the venous end is =
2000 − 2900 = −900 Pa and so is directed into the capillary.
37. When taking a subject’s blood pressure you are actually measuring the differ-
ence between total pressure and which other pressure?
A. gauge pressure
B. blood pressure
C. atmospheric pressure
D. standard atmospheric pressure
Answer is C: The pressure on the gauge used to measure blood pressure dis-
plays the difference between atmospheric pressure and blood pressure. That
is, total pressure is atmospheric pressure plus the reading on the gauge.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.6 Blood Pressure and Its Control 297

12.6 Blood Pressure and Its Control

The heart produces the pressure difference that is required to lift blood (with its
contained oxygen) to the top of the head against gravity and to move blood
through the other arteries despite blood’s viscosity and the friction provided by the
vessel walls. The body’s need for oxygen changes as the level of bodily activity
changes, so the movement of blood must change to match these requirements.
That is, car- diac output must be sufficient to ensure that the demand for oxygen
by the tissues is met. Cardiac output will increase if the heart rate increases and if
the volume pumped by each stroke increases. These rates are set by the sino-atrial
node (the heart’s pacemaker) in the wall of the right atrium and may be increased
or decreased by stimulation from the “cardio-vascular centre” of the medulla
oblongata via the autonomic nervous system.
Blood experiences resistance to its flow which is overcome by the body’s
ability to adjust cardiac output, to dilate and constrict its blood vessels, and to
some extent, to alter its blood volume. A further complication is that the body’s
posture as it changes from supine to sitting to standing will affect the movement of
blood. Baroreceptors (pressure receptors) are located in the walls of the carotid
sinus, the aortic arch and wall of most large arteries in neck and thorax. Over the
short term, if BP falls, baroreceptor reflexes increase heart rate and force of
contraction and promote vasoconstriction. The reverse happens if BP rises.
Chemoreceptors are located in the two carotid bodies and several aortic bodies,
close to the barorecep- tors. They respond to an increase of CO 2, and to the
decreased pH of blood that occurs as arterial pressure falls. They transmit signals
to the vasomotor centre which excites it to produce vasoconstriction. This
increases blood pressure. They also sig- nal the cardioaccelerator centre which
increases cardiac output. Hence more blood moves through the lungs and this
allows the excretion of CO2 and the intake of O2 to increase.
Long term control of blood pressure is achieved by the kidneys as they alter the
amount of water that is filtered from blood and excreted in urine. Water loss in
urine decreases the volume of blood and this in turn decreases blood pressure.
Four hor- mones (angiotensin II, ADH, aldosterone, ANP) are associated with or
act on the kidney to regulate urine volume and hence blood volume and BP.
1. When arterial blood pressure is stated as 120/80, what do the numbers refer to?
A. 120 ÷ 80 = 1.5 = mean arterial pressure
B. pulse pressure/mean arterial pressure
C. systolic pressure/diastolic pressure
D. arterial pressure/venous pressure
Answer is C: Writing BP as 120/80 is an abbreviated way of writing systolic
pressure of 120 mmHg and diastolic BP of 80 mmHg.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
298 12 Cardiovascular System

2. An increase in which of the following would NOT produce an increase in car-

diac output?
A. heart stroke volume
B. heart rate
C. peripheral resistance
D. venous return
Answer is C: Increasing peripheral resistance would not increase CO unless
there was a compensating increase in BP.
3. Which of the following would increase arterial blood pressure?
A. a decrease in sympathetic impulses along the cardio-accelerator nerves
B. an increase in parasympathetic impulses along the vagus nerve
C. a decrease in sympathetic impulses along vasomotor nerves
D. an increase in sympathetic impulses along vasomotor nerves
Answer is D: Increase the rate of sympathetic impulses along vasomotor
nerves would result in vasoconstriction which would increase BP. An increase
in para- sympathetic impulses would slow the heart rate, which would
decrease BP.
4. Which of the following chemicals would cause blood pressure to decrease
when they appear in blood?
A. anti-diuretic hormone
B. angiotensin II
C. aldosterone
D. atrial natriuretic peptide
Answer is D: ANP acts to reduce blood volume by: Increasing Na+ excretion
at kidneys (blocking release aldosterone); Increasing volume of urine
produced; Reducing thirst; Blocking release of ADH. ANP acts to reduce
blood pressure by blocking release of the vasoconstrictors adrenaline &
noradrenaline and stimulating peripheral vasodilation.
5. Which of the following statements about resting blood pressure is correct?
According to the Australian Heart Foundation Classifications:
A. High blood pressure is considered greater than 180/110 mmHg
B. A systolic reading alone of greater than 140 mmHg is classed as high
blood pressure
C. If the pulse pressure remains around 1/3 of the systolic reading, then BP is
considered normal regardless of the systolic & diastolic readings
D. Blood pressure is classed as high if it is greater than 140/90 mmHg
Answer is D: If resting systolic BP is above 140 mmHg and diastolic BP is
above 90 mmHg, then a diagnosis of hypertension may be made. Choice A is
very high BP.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.6 Blood Pressure and Its Control 299

6. Which statement regarding the regulation of blood pressure by the endocrine

system is correct?
A. In comparison to other physiological regulatory processes, it is slow.
B. Aldosterone is responsible for the conversion of angiotensin I into
angioten- sin II
C. In response to a drop in blood pressure, the renin-angiotensin aldosterone
system leads to parasympathetic stimulation
D. Angiotensin converting enzyme (ACE) is responsible for converting
angio- tensinogen into angiotensin I
Answer is A: Hormone control mechanisms are slower than those controlled
by the nervous system. ACE converts angiotensin I to angiotensin
II. Parasympathetic stimulation decreases CO and hence BP.
7. Blood flow is largely regulated at a tissue level. Which of the following could
be said regarding this process?
A. A rise in the blood level of O2 will result in vasodilation
B. A raised CO2 level results in vasodilation
C. Acidaemia directly increases vasopressin (ADH) release
D. A raised CO2 blood level will result in an increased serum alkalinity
Answer is B: A high level of CO2 in the tissues will promote vasodilation to
remove it, and to provide more O2. ADH produces vasoconstriction which is
the opposite of what is required to correct acidaemia. Normally (in the
absence of ventilation problems) the blood buffers prevent any change in
blood pH so choice D is wrong.
8. Which of the following statements regarding antihypertensive medication is
correct?
A. Calcium channel blockers are a class of drug used to reverse a decrease in
blood volume.
B. Diuretic medication principally affects peripheral resistance.
C. Beta blockers target cardiac sympathetic innervation.
D. ACE inhibitors promote the effects of the renin-angiotensin aldosterone
system.
Answer is C: The neurotransmitters epinephrine & norepinephrine attach to
the beta-1 receptor sites of the heart and cause HR & contractility to increase.
This sympathetic stimulation promotes an increase in CO (and hence BP).
Blocking (preventing the binding of E and NE) their effect prevents
sympathetic stimulation.
9. Which of the following is a class of antihypertensive medication which
specifi- cally target a reduction in blood volume?
A. Beta blockers
B. Calcium Channel Blockers

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
300 12 Cardiovascular System

C. Diuretics
D. Anticoagulants
Answer is C: Diuretics promote the production of urine – which is filtered
from blood. Hence blood volume decreases as more urine is produced.
10. Which of the following events would you expect to observe in response to a
drop in a patients’ blood pressure?
A. Renin is converted to Angiotensinogen
B. Angiotensin 2 is converted into Aldosterone
C. ADH (Anti Diuretic Hormone) will be released by the posterior pituitary
gland
D. Baroreceptors signal the SA node to slow
Answer is C: ADH causes more water to be reclaimed from the urine filtrate.
This return of water to the blood volume prevents it from decreasing.
Maintain blood volume is a way of preventing BP from falling further.
11. Which of the following responses best describes term “pulse pressure”
A. A mean measurement of the systolic and diastolic readings
B. A measurement calculated from 1/3 of the diastolic added to the systolic
value
C. The lowest audible Korotkoff sound when recording blood pressure
D. A measurement of the difference in pressure between systolic and
diastolic readings
Answer is D: Pulse pressure is defined as the difference between the
maximum and minimum BP values.
12. Which of the following readings (in mm Hg) would be considered within a
healthy resting blood pressure range?
A. 115/70
B. 120/30
C. 100/90
D. 145/90
Answer is A: A reading above 140/90 is considered hypertensive. A diastolic
reading of 30 is too low; a systolic reading of 100 is low-ish; a systolic
reading of 145 is too high.
13. What does measuring a patient’s blood pressure using the auscultatory
method do?
A. It offers valuable information related to cardiac preload
B. It involves the reporting of audible venous turbulence created by an
inflated arm cuff
C. It relates to a systolic relaxation of the ventricles
D. It reports the Korotkoff sounds heard from a partially compressed artery

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.6 Blood Pressure and Its Control 301

Answer is D: Korotkoff sounds are made as blood flows turbulently through a

compressed artery. They cease when the artery is completely squashed and no
blood flows (this is taken to be the systolic pressure) and also when the artery
is not compressed at all. In this case the air pressure in the cuff is equal to or
less than the diastolic pressure.
14. What may correctly be said about baroreceptors?
A. They are located in the walls of the aortic arch and the inferior vena cava
B. A drop in blood pressure triggers the baroreceptor reflex which causes
vaso- dilation and an increased heart rate
C. They promote vasoconstriction and an increased force of myocardial con-
traction in the hypotensive patient
D. They respond directly to alterations in circulating oxygen levels
Answer is C: Vasoconstriction and increased contractility promotes an
increase in BP. Baroreceptors are located in the walls of the carotid sinus and
aortic sinus, among other places. Choices B & D are wrong.
15. What does Angiotensin II do?
A. It is a weak vasoconstrictor and requires activation by Angiotensinogen
B. It acts via several mechanisms that cause blood pressure to increase
C. It reduces blood pressure through decreasing vascular smooth muscle tone
D. It causes an increase in urine output by triggering ADH release
Answer is B: Angiotensin II is a vasoconstrictor. It also stimulates thirst, the
secretion of ADH and the adrenal glands to secrete aldosterone. All of which
cause BP to increase (provided that we do drink).
16. What does administering Beta-Blocking medication do?
A. It targets adrenergic neurotransmission to Beta receptors
B. It targets cholinergic neurotransmission to decrease blood pressure
C. It acts principally upon Beta 2 and Alpha 1 receptors
D. It exposes the Beta 1 receptors to enhance neurotransmission
Answer is A: “Beta-blockers” block beta-1 receptors. These receptors are
“adrenergic” as they bind adrenaline (& noradrenaline). Blocking them dimin-
ishes neurotransmission.
17. Cardiac output does NOT depend on one of the following, which one?
A. the rate of venous return to the heart
B. the blood viscosity
C. the volume flow rate through the circulatory system
D. the pressure drop (between start of aorta and start of capillaries)
Answer is C: This is the required answer as CO is the same thing as volume
flow rate.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
302 12 Cardiovascular System

18. Which of the following is most unlikely to increase blood viscosity?

A. leucocytosis
B. dehydration
C. hypothermia
D. an infusion of packed red blood cells
Answer is A: Leucocytosis is an increase in the number of wbc above the nor-
mal range. Such a rise would have a minimal effect on viscosity as viscosity
is due largely to the number of the much more numerous rbc in normal blood.
19. Which of the following would cause blood pressure to DECREASE?
A. an increase in heart rate
B. an increase in total peripheral resistance
C. an increase in heart stroke volume
D. an increase in parasympathetic impulses along the vagus nerve
Answer is D: Parasympathetic activity decreases heart rate and decreases
force of myocardial contraction, hence CO and BP would decrease.
20. Which of the following is the best definition of hypertension?
A. a systolic pressure of more than 140 mmHg and a diastolic pressure of
more than 90 mmHg
B. a diastolic pressure of more than 140 mmHg and a systolic pressure of
more than 90 mmHg
C. a blood pressure of more than 140/90 mmHg measured after 5 minutes of
inactivity
D. a blood pressure of less than 110/70 mmHg measured after 5 minutes of
inactivity
Answer is C: Hypertension refers to a resting BP of more than 140/90. Choice
A is correct except that there is no reference to being “at rest”.
21. In which part of the brain is the cardiovascular control centre located?
A. the neurohypophysis
B. the cerebrum
C. the hypothalamus
D. the medulla oblongata
Answer is D: The CVC is in the brain stem, specifically in the medulla
oblongata.
22. When blood pressure drops, which of the following responses would happen?
A. atrial natriuretic peptide is released from the heart
B. the kidneys release renin which catalyses the formation of angiotensin I
C. the rate of sodium excretion by the kidneys increases
D. the secretion of anti-diuretic hormone is inhibited

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.6 Blood Pressure and Its Control 303

Answer is B: Renin acts on angiotensinogen and eventually angiotensin II

would be formed. Angiotensin has four effects that will cause BP to rise.
23. Which of the following are two of the factors that influence arterial blood
pressure?
A. peripheral resistance and gravity.
B. cardiac output and the partial pressure of oxygen dissolved in blood.
C. blood volume and blood osmotic pressure
D. cardiac output and peripheral resistance
Answer is D: Mean arterial blood pressure, MAP = CO × TPR(TPR = total peripheral resistance)

24. What would be the effect produced if the cardiovascular centre increased the
rate of parasympathetic impulses it sends out?
A. heart rate would increase
B. heart rate would decrease
C. vasoconstriction of blood vessels would increase
D. vasodilation of blood vessels would increase
Answer is B: Increased parasympathetic causes a decreased heart rate.
Vasoconstriction and vasodilation are controlled by the sympathetic division
not the parasympathetic.
25. Too much salt (sodium chloride) in the diet increases blood osmolarity and
can cause increased arterial blood pressure. Which of the following is NOT a
way that salt affects blood pressure?
A. Salt causes peripheral vasoconstriction.
B. Salt stimulates thirst.
C. Salt stimulates ADH secretion.
D. Salt causes fluid shift from the intracellular fluid to the extracellular
fluid. Answer is A: Sodium chloride does not cause peripheral
vasoconstriction.
26. 120/80 is recorded as a blood pressure measurement. What does this mean?
A. systolic pressure is 120 and diastolic pressure is 80.
B. left ventricular systolic pressure is 120 and left ventricular diastolic pres-
sure is 80.
C. the average of the left and right ventricular systolic pressure is 120 and the
average of the left and right ventricular diastolic pressure is 80.
D. left ventricular diastolic pressure is 120 and left ventricular systolic pres-
sure is 80.
Answer is B: Although not always specifically stated, a blood pressure of
120/80 refers to the BP in the aorta, that is, caused by the left ventricle. Hence
choice A is not as good an answer as choice B.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
304 12 Cardiovascular System

27. Which of the following does NOT influence the resistance to blood flow?
A. diameter of the arterioles
B. temperature of the blood
C. haematocrit
D. diameter of the veins
Answer is D: The arterial side of the circulation contributes to resistance to
blood flow. Hence the veins do not contribute to resistance.
28. Which will produce a decrease in arterial blood pressure?
A. vasoconstriction.
B. increased parasympathetic stimulation.
C. increased blood osmolarity.
D. increased cardiac output.
Answer is B: Increased parasympathetic stimulation will decrease heart rate
and myocardial contractility. This will cause CO and hence BP to decline.
29. What achieves short term control of blood pressure?
A. hormonal mechanisms
B. the kidneys
C. changes in concentration of chemicals such as O2, CO2, H+, K+.
D. neural mechanisms
Answer is D: In the short term, it is the cardio-vascular centre (of the brain). It
receives input from higher brain centres (hypothalamus & cerebrum), barore-
ceptors & chemoreceptors.
30. What is the class of anti-hypertensive drug that prevents smooth muscle con-
traction, and hence promotes vasodilation called?
A. ACE inhibitors.
B. beta blockers.
C. diuretics
D. calcium channel blockers
Answer is D: In order for muscle to contract, calcium is released from the sar-
coplasmic reticulum and binds to troponin, which changes its shape and pulls
tropomyosin away which exposes actin’s binding site. A blocker prevents the
release of Ca++ into the muscle cell sarcoplasm.
31. What does the term “systolic pressure” refer to?
A. the value, in mmHg, that appears in the denominator of a blood pressure
measurement
B. the peak pressure in the blood due to the contraction of the left ventricle.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.6 Blood Pressure and Its Control 305

C. the minimum pressure in the aorta prior to left ventricular contraction

D. the difference between maximum and minimum arterial blood pressures.
Answer is B: It is the maximum pressure produced by the LV during contrac-
tion (while the body is at rest).
32. What are the receptors that are sensitive to blood pressure called?
A. pacinian corpuscles
B. nociceptors
C. baroreceptors
D. chemoreceptors
Answer is C: The prefix “baro”receptors refers to a barometer (an air pressure
measuring device) where the unit one bar is the pressure of one standard
atmosphere.
33. Which situation below would make the heart beat faster?
A. an increase in sympathetic impulses along the cardioaccelerator nerves
B. an increase in parasympathetic impulses along the cardioaccelerator nerves
C. an increase in sympathetic impulses along the vagus nerves
D. an increase in parasympathetic impulses along the vagus nerves
Answer is A: Increased sympathetic stimulation cause an increase in heart
rate. The vagus nerve carries only parasympathetic impulses.
34. Which of the following will NOT increase cardiac output?
A. increasing strength of contraction
B. increasing stroke volume
C. increasing heart rate
D. increasing total peripheral resistance
Answer is D: If peripheral resistance increases, all else being unchanged, CO
will fall.
35. Which of the following will increase cardiac output?
A. an increase in sympathetic impulses
B. an increase in parasympathetic impulses
C. a faster stream of impulses from the baroreceptors
D. an increase in vasodilation
Answer is A: Sympathetic impulses will increase CO. Increased baroreceptor
activity would decrease CO.
36. Angiotensin II does all of the following except one. Which one?
A. stimulates thirst
B. causes the release of aldosterone

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
306 12 Cardiovascular System

C. causes the release of ADH

D. stimulates peripheral vasodilation
Answer is D: Angiotensin II promotes an increase in blood volume and vaso-
constriction, but not vasodilation.
37. What is the consequence when ADH is released?
A. blood osmolarity increases
B. the permeability of the collecting ducts to water is increased
C. peripheral vasodilation increases
D. blood pressure decreases
Answer is B: Anti-diuretic hormone decreases the volume of urine formed by
causing water to be reclaimed from the DCT and collecting duct. Hence blood
osmolarity will not increase and BP will not decrease.
38. If dietary salt intake is excessive, which of the following will NOT occur?
A. Less ADH will be secreted
B. The osmolarity of extracellular fluids will increase
C. The thirst centre will be stimulated
D. The extracellular fluid volume increases
Answer is A: If a greater than recommended amount of salt is in the diet,
more ADH will be secreted so that additional water is reclaimed from the
nephron filtrate. This will tend to decrease blood osmolarity. Hence it will not
occur that “less ADH will be secreted”.
39. The antihypertensive drugs known as “ACE inhibitors” function by doing
which of the following?
A. preventing the release of ADH
B. blocking the formation of angiotensin II
C. blocking the release of renin
D. preventing the entry of Ca++ to vascular smooth muscle.
Answer is B: Angiotensin converting enzyme is known as “ACE”. An ACE
inhibitor will prevent this enzyme from converting angiotensin I into
angioten- sin II. Hence the blood pressure raising effects of angiotensin
II will be prevented.
40. Which hormone produces a decrease in arterial blood pressure?
A. vasopressin
B. ANP
C. ADH
D. angiotensin II
Answer is B: Atrial natriuretic enzyme (ANP) exerts effects that result in a
decrease in BP.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.6 Blood Pressure and Its Control 307

41. What will be the result of an increase in sympathetic impulses along the vaso-
motor nerves?
A. increased heart rate and force of contraction
B. decreased heart rate and force of contraction
C. generalised vasoconstriction
D. generalised vasodilation
Answer is C: Vasomotor nerves should give the clue that vessels will be set in
motion. An increase in impulses will result in vasoconstriction.
42. Given that a heart pumps out 70 ml of blood with each stroke and beats 70
times per minute, what is the cardiac output?
A. 70 ml/min
B. 490 ml/min
C. 700 ml/min
D. 4900 ml/min
Answer is D: Cardiac output, CO = SV × HR = 70 ml / beat × 70 beat / min = 4900 ml / min

43. Which completed statement is NOT true? Peripheral resistance:

A. increases if diameter of blood vessels increases
B. is greater if the total length of blood vessels is greater
C. increases if viscosity of blood increases
D. is greater than pulmonary resistance
Answer is A: If the diameter of blood vessels increases, there will be less fric-
tion with the vessel wall and peripheral resistance will decrease.
44. Complete the following sentence correctly for a person at rest. Hypertension
A. occurs when blood volume is too low
B. refers to the increased blood pressure in the legs while standing
C. indicates that resistance to blood flow is low
D. is when systolic blood pressure is more than 140 mmHg
Answer is D: Hypertension means a resting BP that is too high. The value
beyond which hypertension is identified is 140 mmHg for the systolic
reading.
45. An increase in parasympathetic impulses along the vagus nerve causes
A. dilation of the arterioles
B. a decrease in blood pressure
C. an increase in vasoconstriction
D. increases the force of myocardial contraction
Answer is B: Parasympathetic stimulation causes a decrease in BP as heart
rate and force of contraction are decreased. Dilation and constriction of blood
ves- sels are controlled by the sympathetic nervous system.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
308 12 Cardiovascular System

46. Which of the following would cause a rise in mean arterial blood pressure?
A. sympathetic impulses along the cardio-accelerator nerves.
B. changing from a standing position to a supine position.
C. generalized vasodilation of blood vessels.
D. a severe haemorrhage.
Answer is A: Sympathetic stimulation increases heart rate and contractility
which increases cardiac output which increases BP. The term cardio-
accelerator nerve should provide a clue.
47. What is the role of angiotensin II? To:
A. decrease blood pressure by promoting vasodilation of veins.
B. increase blood pressure by promoting vasoconstriction of arterioles
C. decrease blood pressure by promoting excretion of water in urine.
D. increases blood pressure by promoting absorption of Na+.
Answer is B: Angiotensin II promotes vasoconstriction which increases
periph- eral resistance which increases BP. It also stimulates the adrenal
glands to pro- duce aldosterone. It is aldosterone that causes an increase in
Na+ absorption, hence choice B is a better answer than D.
48. One of the following is a vasodilator. Which one?
A. atrial natriuretic peptide (ANP).
B. angiotensin II.
C. epinephrine (adrenaline).
D. an increase in sympathetic impulses.
Answer is A: ANP causes a decrease in BP and vasodilation is one of the
ways by which this is achieved.
49. To what does the term ventricular systole refer?
A. relaxation of the ventricles.
B. relaxation of the atria.
C. contraction of the myocardium.
D. contraction of the ventricles
Answer is D: ventricular systole is contraction of the ventricles, which does
not coincide with relaxation of the atria.
50. Which of the following is NOT true about turbulent blood flow?
A. turbulent flows exists when blood is flowing in smooth streamlines.
B. it may occur when blood passes through a constriction or stenosis.
C. it occurs if blood speed is high.
D. turbulent flow is noisy.
Answer is A: When blood flows in smooth streamlines parallel to the vessel
walls, it is known as streamline flow. In turbulent flow the liquid moves in
eddies and will not always be parallel to the vessel walls.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.6 Blood Pressure and Its Control 309

51. What is the pressure gradient produced by the left ventricle equal to?
A. the mean arterial pressure.
B. the difference between mean arterial pressure and pressure at the start of
the capillaries.
C. the difference between mean arterial pressure and pressure at the start of
the capillaries, divided by the distance between the start of the aorta and
capillaries.
D. the mean arterial pressure divided by the distance between the start of the
aorta and capillaries.
Answer is C: Pressure gradient between two points is the pressure difference
between two points, divided by their distance apart.
52. What is one of the determinants of the resistance to blood flow?
A. blood viscosity.
B. cardiac output.
C. heart rate.
D. the blood osmolarity.
Answer is A: Blood viscosity, largely determined by the concentration of rbc
(the haematocrit) affects blood’s resistance to flow.
53. Which one of the following will make blood pressure fall?
A. increased cardiac output
B. increased heart rate
C. increased vasodilation
D. increased peripheral resistance
Answer is C: Vasodilation decreases resistance to blood flow, which means the
same CO can be maintained by a lower BP.
54. Hypertension in adults may be defined as:
A. Excessive decrease in blood pressure.
B. Mean arterial pressure greater than 110 mm Hg.
C. Systolic blood pressure less than 100 mm Hg when resting
D. Systolic blood pressure persistently greater than 140 mm Hg when resting
Answer is D: Choice B would also be correct if reference was made to “rest-
ing”. The hypertensive value for children is less.
55. Which of the following statements about the cardiovascular control centre of
the brain is FALSE?
A. increased impulses along parasympathetic fibres causes vasoconstriction.
B. increased output along the sympathetic fibres INcrease heart rate.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
310 12 Cardiovascular System

C. output along of the parasympathetic fibres DEcreases heart rate.

D. decreased output along the sympathetic fibres causes dilation of arterioles.
Answer is A: The parasympathetic system does not have a role in
vasoconstric- tion or vasodilation.
56. Which of the following does Angiotensin II cause to happen?
A. Atrial natriuretic peptide to be released.
B. The collecting ducts in the kidney to become permeable to water.
C. The release of antidiuretic hormone to be supressed.
D. Aldosterone to be released.
Answer is D: Angiotensin II stimulates the adrenal glands to release
aldosterone.
57. The definition of mean arterial pressure (MAP) may be written as:
A. MAP = stroke volume × heart rate
B. MAP = (diastolic pressure + systolic pressure) ÷ 2
C. MAP = cardiac output × peripheral resistance
D. MAP = diastolic pressure + pulse pressure
Answer is C: Mean arterial pressure, MAP = CO × TPR. MAP also is
diastolic pressure +1/3× pulse pressure.
58. One of the following does NOT contribute to peripheral resistance. Which one?
A. heart rate.
B. blood viscosity.
C. diameter of blood vessels.
D. length of blood vessels
Answer is A: Heart rate contributes to cardiac output but not peripheral
resistance.
59. Which of the following statements about the cardiovascular control centre of
the brain is TRUE?
A. increased impulses along parasympathetic fibres causes vasoconstriction.
B. output along the sympathetic fibres INcrease heart rate.
C. output along the parasympathetic fibres INcrease heart rate.
D. output along the sympathetic fibres DEcrease heart rate.
Answer is B: Impulses travelling in the sympathetic fibres increases heart rate
(in preparation for increased physical activity).
60. Which three hormones have a role in regulating blood pressure?
A. angiotensin II, ADH and ANP
B. renin, angiotensin II and ADH
C. vasopressin, ADH and ANP
D. angiotensin II, ACE and ADH

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.6 Blood Pressure and Its Control 311

Answer is A: Renin is an enzyme that coverts angiotensinogen into

angiotensin I, while ACE is an enzyme that converts angiotensin I into
angiotensin
II. Vasopressin and ADH are the same hormone.
61. Which of the following statements about the cardiovascular centre of the brain
is FALSE?
A. it consists of the cardiac centre and the vasomotor centre.
B. output along fibres of the sympathetic nervous system DEcrease heart rate.
C. output along fibres of the parasympathetic nervous system DEcrease heart
rate.
D. output along fibres of the sympathetic nervous system INcrease heart rate.
Answer is B: Output along fibres of the sympathetic nervous system actually
increases heart rate. So choice B is FALSE and answers the question that was
asked.
62. Which statement about cardiac output is correct?
A. cardiac output is peripheral resistance multiplied by stroke volume.
B. mean arterial pressure multiplied by peripheral resistance is cardiac
output.
C. cardiac output is heart rate multiplied by stroke volume.
D. cardiac output is blood volume multiplied by heart rate.
Answer is C: Cardiac output (in ml per minute) = stroke volume (in ml per
beat) times heart rate (in beta per minute).
63. Which of the following would produce a DECREASE in heart rate?
A. sympathetic impulses along the cardioaccelerator nerves.
B. increased sympathetic impulses along the vasomotor nerves
C. decreased sympathetic impulses along the vasomotor nerves.
D. parasympathetic impulses along the vagus nerve.
Answer is D: Parasympathetic stimulation (which almost always utilises the
vagus nerve) causes a decrease in heart rate.
64. A rise in arterial blood pressure stretches the vessel walls which contain baro-
receptors. Which of the following responses does this produce? The
barorecep- tors send a:
A. slower stream of impulses to the vasomotor centre which inhibits it.
B. faster stream of impulses to the vasomotor centre which inhibits it.
C. slower stream of impulses to the vasomotor centre which stimulates it.
D. faster stream of impulses to the vasomotor centre which stimulates it.
Answer is B: When a blood vessel wall is stretched it stimulates baroreceptors
to increase their stream of impulses to the vasomotor centre which inhibits it.
This means the smooth muscle in blood vessel walls will relax and the vessel
diameter will increase and so BP is reduced.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
312 12 Cardiovascular System

65. Why is the blood pressure in the pulmonary arteries less than in the aorta?
A. the expansion and contraction of the lungs pumps blood through its blood
vessels.
B. blood flowing to the lungs does not need to overcome gravity.
C. pulmonary resistance is greater than the peripheral resistance.
D. pulmonary resistance is less than peripheral resistance
Answer is D: As pulmonary resistance is much lower than systemic resistance,
the BP required to overcome it is much less too. Hence heh right ventricle
does not need to produce the high pressure of the left ventricle to move blood
through the pulmonary circuit.
66. When blood pressure is measured in the brachial artery by the auscultatory
method, why should the arm be at the same level as the heart?
A. if the arm is lower than the heart, brachial artery pressure will be lower as
blood flow is assisted by gravity.
B. if the arm is higher than the heart, brachial artery pressure will be higher
as more force is required to pump blood up hill.
C. to avoid any hydrostatic pressure effects on the brachial artery pressure.
D. there is no reason for it, the practice is part of “nursing ritual”.
Answer is C: If the arm is higher, the pressure in the brachial artery will be
lower than aortic pressure (and vice versa).
67. Why is blood pressure stated in units of “mm Hg”? Because…
A. the first barometers operated with mercury.
B. standard International (SI) units are not required in human biology.
C. the haemoglobin molecule contains an atom of mercury.
D. blood pressure is a length.
Answer is A: Mercury (also known as hydrogyrum) was the liquid used in
manometers (pressure measuring devices) because of its very high density
compared with water.
68. Blood may flow in the aorta with a speed of 30 cm/s and in the capillaries
with a speed of only 0.1 m/s. Why is there such a large difference in speed?
A. the capillaries are much further from the heart than the aorta.
B. the very narrow capillaries present a large resistance to blood flow com-
pared to the large diameter aorta.
C. the total cross-sectional area of the lumens of the capillaries is much
greater than the cross-sectional area of the aorta.
D. the length of the aorta is short compared to the length of a capillary.
Answer is C: The “equation of continuity” may be stated: volume flow rate =
cross-sectional area × speed of flow. Hence if the total cross-sectional area of
capillaries is very large (as it is), the speed of flow can be very slow while
still allowing the required volume flow rate.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
12.6 Blood Pressure and Its Control 313

69. Which statement about cardiac output is correct? Cardiac output is:
A. the sum of volume of blood pumped by left and right ventricles per
minute.
B. the mean arterial pressure divided by total peripheral resistance
C. the mean arterial pressure multiplied by stroke volume.
D. the blood volume multiplied by heart rate.
Answer is B: MAP = CO× TPR, so CO = MAP ÷ TPR
70. In which of the following situations would blood pressure be increased?
A. antidiuretic hormone (ADH) secretion is inhibited.
B. the kidneys absorb less water before it is excreted as urine.
C. the extracellular fluid volume decreases.
D. the extracellular fluid volume increases.
Answer is D: Extracellular volume includes the blood. If its volume increases,
that means blood volume increases and this will increase BP.
71. In the circulatory system, why does an increase in cardiac output cause an
increase in volume flow rate (of blood)? Because:
A. an increased cardiac output causes vasoconstriction.
B. as cardiac output increases so blood viscosity increases.
C. as cardiac output increases, the resistance of the systemic circulation to
blood flow decreases.
D. cardiac output and volume flow rate are the same thing
Answer is D: The number of millilitres of blood per minute is volume flow
rate and cardiac output. They are the same thing.
72. The Korotkoff sounds that are listened for during a blood pressure measure-
ment by the auscultatory method are caused by:
A. turbulent blood flow in the aorta
B. the difference between systolic pressure and cuff pressure.
C. turbulent flow in the collapsed brachial artery
D. the opening and closing of the heart valves
Answer is C: Squashing the brachial artery will cause blood flow to be turbu-
lent as it passes through the constriction. This turbulence creates sound that
can be detected with a stethoscope.
73. What is “systolic pressure”?
A. The peak pressure in the blood due to contraction of the left ventricle
B. The minimum pressure in the blood prior to contraction of the left
ventricle

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
314 12 Cardiovascular System

C. It may be obtained by multiplying cardiac output by total peripheral

resistance.
D. It is also known as mean arterial pressure
Answer is A: Systole means “contraction” in Greek. So systolic pressure is the
pressure produced by the contraction of the left ventricle. Choice C refers to
mean arterial pressure, which is less than systolic pressure.
74. What is “autoregulation”? It is the adjustment of blood flow to each tissue due
to:
A. hormonal control
B. neural control
C. systemic factors
D. local factors
Answer is D: Autoregulation refers to the tissue regulating its own blood flow
depending on the concentration of chemicals (oxygen, carbon dioxide,
metabo- lites) within the tissue.
75. Which three factors affect blood pressure?
A. heart rate, stroke volume and total peripheral resistance.
B. cardiac output, heart rate and pulse pressure.
C. total peripheral resistance, cardiac output and blood volume.
D. diastolic pressure, systolic pressure and pulse pressure.
Answer is C: Blood pressure rises and falls as blood volume rises and falls. If
volume does not change, then just cardiac output and total peripheral
resistance determine BP. Choice A is correct for a constant blood volume.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
Chapter 13
Respiratory System

13.1 Anatomy and Physiology

Respiration is a term that is variously applied to: the acts of inhalation and exhala-
tion; to the movement of gas molecules in the lungs between alveolar air and
blood in the alveolar capillaries; to the exchange of dissolved gases in the tissue
between the systemic capillaries and the surrounding interstitial fluid; and to the
process conducted within the mitochondria of cells that results in the production of
ATP (and CO2) from small organic molecules by using O2. The respiratory system
is a set of tubes that increase in number and decrease in size, within an elastic
structure that is moved by muscles. The lungs and chest wall together act like a
bellows to move air into and out of the alveoli. The walls of the alveoli are part of
the respiratory membrane that separates the air in the alveoli from the blood in the
alveolar capil- laries. The capillary walls are also part of the respiratory
membrane.
Air passes through the nostrils, the meatus of the nasal cavity, the pharynx, the
larynx, the glottis, the trachea, the bronchi, then into the secondary and tertiary
(and smaller) bronchi eventually into the bronchioles, then into smaller airways to
finally reach the alveoli. Here oxygen diffuses through the membrane from the
alveoli to the blood and carbon dioxide diffuses from the blood to the alveoli.
Bronchi are held open by the cartilage in their walls, while bronchioles are without
cartilage but may dilate and constrict as the smooth muscle in their wall relaxes or
contracts.
At the end of an inhalation, the volume of air that is within the respiratory tree
but that has not reached the alveoli, is not in contact with the respiratory
membrane and so does not participate in gas exchange. This volume of “fresh” air
is called the anatomical dead space and is then exhaled. At the end of an
exhalation, there is a volume of “stale” air within the bronchial tree that has yet to
pass out of the body. Instead this stale air re-enters the alveoli, pushed in by the
fresh air of the next inha- lation. Carbon dioxide produced in the tissues dissolves
in water to form carbonic
acid (CO2 + H2O ⇌ H2CO3). This reaction is catalysed within the rbc. Then the
carbonic acid molecule disassociates to form the hydronium and bicarbonate ions

M. Caon,
© Springer Science+Business Media Singapore 2016 Examination
ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
Questions and Answers in Basic Anatomy and Physiology, DOI
10.1007/978-981-10-2332-3_13 315

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
316 13 Respiratory System

(H2CO3 ⇌ HCO3 − + H+). The hydronium ions are buffered by haemoglobin in the
rbc while the bicarbonate ions move into the blood plasma. When blood reaches
the lungs, carbon dioxide moves from the blood to the alveoli and the two
previous
equations proceed from right to left. Hence, breathing out carbon dioxide causes
acid (hydronium ions) to be converted to water. If the ability to breathe out is
impaired, then acid is not excreted, so blood pH will fall and the body may be in
respiratory acidosis.
1. Which of the following statements could be applied to “external respiration”?
A. Exchange of gases between alveolar air and the blood in pulmonary
capillaries.
B. Exchange of dissolved gases between blood in tissue capillaries and the
body tissues.
C. The production of CO2 from organic molecules in the cells by using O2.
D. The inhalation of atmospheric air into the lungs followed by exhalation.
Answer is: A External respiration refers to the movement of oxygen from the
alveoli into the capillary blood and carbon dioxide from the capillary blood
into the alveoli. Choice B is “internal respiration” and choice C is “cellular
respiration”.
2. Which anatomical structures does the “conducting zone” of the lower respira-
tory tract contain?
A. Eustachian tube, larynx and trachea.
B. Primary, secondary and tertiary bronchi and bronchioles.
C. Nares, conchae, olfactory mucosa and sinuses.
D. Nasopharynx and larynx.
Answer is B: The conducting zone is distal to the trachea and before the
alveoli.
3. What is the function of the cilia on the cells that line the bronchial tree?
A. They help mix the inhaled fresh air with the residual air contained in the
bronchial tree.
B. They slow the movement of air to allow for efficient exchange of gases.
C. They move the mucus on the cell surface up out of the bronchial tree.
D. They filter particles from inhaled air.
Answer is C: The beating of the cilia moves mucus lying on the surface of the
epithelium of the conducting zone, and any contained dust, up out of the bron-
chial tree.
4. One of the following statements is correct. Which one?
A. The visceral pleura is attached to the chest wall and the parietal pleura is
attached to the lung.
B. The two lungs and their associated structures are known as the
pneumothorax.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
13.1 Anatomy and Physiology 317

C. The hilum is a serous membrane that surrounds each lung separately.

D. A negative pressure is maintained between the two lung pleura.
Answer is D: The parietal pleura (attached to the chest wall) and the visceral
pleura (attached to the lung) are in very close contact but “separated” by
pleural fluid within which there is a pressure that is less than atmospheric
pressure (i.e. negative). This means that the lungs are stuck to the chest wall
and expand when it does.
5. What term is applied to the volume of air that moves into the lungs while
breathing at rest?
A. anatomical dead space
B. inspiratory reserve capacity
C. tidal volume
D. residual volume
Answer is C: Tidal volume moves into the lungs (and out) with each
completed inhalation/exhalation at rest.
6. Severing the nerves that innervate the breathing muscles may lead rapidly to
death. Will a spinal cord break between the level of cervical vertebrae 6 and 7
leave the victim able to breathe? Choose the answer with the correct reason.
A. No. The breathing muscles are innervated by spinal nerves that leave the
spinal cord at the level of each thoracic vertebra.
B. Yes. The diaphragm will work as it is innervated by nerves arising from
C3 to C5.
C. No. The breathing muscles are innervated by autonomic impulses from the
respiratory centre which is located in the brain stem.
D. Yes. The muscles of breathing are innervated by the sympathetic nervous
system which is unaffected by damage to the somatic nervous system.
Answer is B: The diaphragm, but not the intercostal muscle will still receive
innervation as the diaphragmatic nerves leave the spinal cord superior to the
break at C6–C7.
7. Which molecule or ion dissolved in blood is able to stimulate the central che-
moreceptors of the brain’s respiratory centre?
A. CO2
B. H3O+
C. O2
D. Ca++
Answer is A: Blood borne hydronium cannot cross the blood-brain barrier.
However carbon dioxide can and it produces hydronium ions when it is on the
brain side of the BBB. As there is no buffer in the CSF, these hydronium ions
stimulate the central chemoreceptors of the respiratory centre.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
318 13 Respiratory System

8. What term is applied to the exchange of dissolved gases between capillary

blood and body tissues?
A. Internal respiration
B. External respiration
C. Ventilation
D. Cellular respiration
Answer is A: Internal respiration refers to the movement of oxygen from the
capillary blood into the tissues and carbon dioxide from the tissues into capil-
lary blood. Choice B occurs between the alveoli and pulmonary capillaries
and choice C occurs within the mitochondria.
9. Between which two anatomical structures does the Larynx lie?
A. The nares and the choanae
B. The epiglottis and the trachea
C. The choanae and the glottis
D. The glottis and the epiglottis
Answer is B: The larynx is the tube that surrounds the vocal apparatus. It con-
sists of the epiglottis, thyroid cartilage and cricoid cartilage and is located at
the top of the trachea.
10. What is the function of the ciliated cells of the respiratory epithelium?
A. to trap inhaled particles not removed by the nasal cavity
B. to secrete a mucus layer onto the epithelium
C. to move mucus and trapped particles up the bronchial tree
D. to secrete surfactant that decreases water surface tension
Answer is C: Ciliated cells have cilia that beat rhythmically to move inhaled
dust particles that have been caught by the mucus out of the respiratory tract.
11. Why is it that bronchioles can constrict and so reduce their diameter while
sec- ondary bronchi and respiratory bronchioles cannot constrict?
A. Bronchioles have smooth muscle but no cartilage in their walls while sec-
ondary bronchi are supported by cartilage.
B. Bronchioles have smooth muscle but no cartilage in their walls while
respi- ratory bronchioles are supported by cartilage.
C. Bronchioles have cartilage but no smooth muscle in their walls while sec-
ondary bronchi are supported by cartilage.
D. Bronchioles have cartilage but no smooth muscle in their walls while
respi- ratory bronchioles only have smooth muscle in their walls.
Answer is A: Because bronchioles have no cartilage in their walls they are
able to dilate and constrict to alter the amount of air that enters alveoli.
Respiratory bronchioles that feed into alveolar ducts have little smooth muscle
and no cartilage.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
13.1 Anatomy and Physiology 319

12. A person with severe trauma to the cervical region has damage to the spinal
cord. If the spinal cord is severed between C3 and C4, what is the likely
outcome?
A. The person will be able to breathe but will have paralysis of the lower limbs.
B. The person will be able to breathe but will have paralysis of the upper and
lower limbs.
C. The person will be able to breathe with the intercostal muscles, but will
lose the use of the diaphragm have paralysis of the upper and lower limbs.
D. The person will be unable to breathe and will have paralysis of the upper
and lower limbs.
Answer is D: The diaphragm is innervated by the phrenic nerves which arise
from the C3–C5 vertebrae. Hence the person will be unable to use their dia-
phragm (much). The upper limbs are innervated by spinal nerves that leave
the spinal cord between C5 and T2, so those nerves will have been interrupted
as well.
13. The goal of respiration is to control the concentration of which substances dis-
solved in the blood?
A. oxygen
B. oxygen and carbon dioxide
C. oxygen, carbon dioxide and hydrogen ions
D. oxygen, carbon dioxide, hydrogen ions and ATP
Answer is C: Respiratory activity responds to changes in the dissolved
concen- tration of these 3 substances in blood.
14. The walls of the following structures are all supported by cartilage except for
one of them. Which one?
A. bronchioles
B. trachea
C. bronchi
D. larynx
Answer is A: Bronchioles have smooth muscle but no cartilage in their walls.
15. What constitutes the respiratory membrane?
A. the parietal and visceral pleurae and enclosed pleural fluid
B. capillary and alveolar epithelial cells, their basement membranes and adja-
cent fluid
C. the alveolar surface fluid and epithelial cells
D. alveolar epithelial and septal cells, ciliated cells, macrophages and
surfactant.
Answer is B: The cells lining the alveoli and the capillaries and their fused
basement membrane, along with the fluid (surfactant) lining the alveoli
together are the membrane. Pleurae, ciliated cells and macrophages are not.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
320 13 Respiratory System

16. What is the “cribriform plate”?

A. That part of the nose with three folds of tissue called conchae.
B. The structure that separates the nose from the nasopharynx.
C. Part of the ethmoid bone through which olfactory nerves pass.
D. The nose structure through which air is warmed and humidified as it passes.
Answer is C: The cribriform plate of the ethmoid bone has many foramina
through which pass olfactory nerves that transmit sensory information from
inhaled air to the olfactory bulbs.
17. What is a good definition of “internal respiration”?
A. A.The exchange of gases between body tissues and capillary blood.
B. B.Ventilation of the lungs.
C. C.The production of ATP and CO2 from small molecules using O2.
D. D.The exchange of gases between the alveoli and pulmonary capillaries.
Answer is A: Choice C refers to cellular respiration, Choice D to external
respiration.
18. Which statement may be used to define a bronchiole?
A. They are the airways that branch from the left and right primary bronchi.
B. They are kept open by “C” shaped rings of cartilage.
C. Their walls have supporting cartilage between smooth muscle.
D. Their walls contain smooth muscle but no cartilage.
Answer is D: Bronchioles differ from all the larger airways in having no sup-
porting cartilage. They do have smooth muscle.
19. One statement below about the larynx is correct. Which one?
A. It has walls lined with ciliated cells
B. It has walls made of cartilage
C. It has walls made of bone
D. It has walls made of muscle
Answer is B: The larynx is a cartilaginous tube that surrounds the glottis and
consists of the thyroid and cricoid cartilages.
20. How is the diaphragm innervated?
A. By the parasympathetic division arising from the sacral region
B. By the spinal nerves arising from T5 to T10
C. By the phrenic nerves arising from C5 to C7
D. By the phrenic nerves arising from C3 to C5
Answer is D: The two phrenic nerves innervate the diaphragm and they arise
from spinal nerves that leave the spinal cord between vertebrae C3 and C5.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
13.1 Anatomy and Physiology 321

21. The respiratory centre of the brain controls the respiratory muscles. Which of
the following does NOT happen?
A. An increase in carbon dioxide blood concentration stimulates peripheral
chemoreceptors to signal the respiratory centre.
B. A decrease in blood pH stimulates peripheral chemoreceptors to signal the
respiratory centre.
C. Hydronium ions cross the blood-brain barrier to directly stimulate the cen-
tral chemoreceptors of the respiratory centre.
D. A decrease in oxygen blood concentration stimulates peripheral chemore-
ceptors to signal the respiratory centre.
Answer is C: Hydronium ions cannot cross the BBB. Carbon dioxide does and
forms hydronium ions which go on to stimulate the central chemoreceptors as
the CSF has no buffer to remove them.
22. To what does the term “external respiration” refer?
A. ventilation of the lungs (breathing)
B. exchange of gases between alveolar air and lung capillaries
C. the production by cells of ATP from small molecules and oxygen
D. exchange of dissolved gases between capillary blood and body tissues
Answer is B: When gas moves from the alveoli (“outside”) to the blood in
pul- monary capillaries (“inside”), this is known as external respiration
23. What distinguishes bronchioles from the larger bronchi?
A. bronchioles have no cartilage in their walls
B. bronchioles have smooth muscle in their walls
C. bronchioles collapse between exhalation and inhalation
D. the alveoli open onto these air passages
Answer is A: Bronchioles have no cartilage so may constrict and dilate. They
do not collapse. Terminal bronchiole and respiratory bronchioles lie between
the bronchioles and the alveoli.
24. Which structures are included in the respiratory membrane?
A. alveolar fluid and surfactant
B. alveolar fluid, surfactant and epithelial cells of alveoli
C. alveolar fluid, surfactant, epithelial cells of alveoli and basement
membrane of epithelial cell
D. alveolar fluid, surfactant, epithelial cells of alveoli, basement membrane
of epithelial cell and endothelial cell of capillary
Answer is D: All these structures form the thin (0.5 um) respiratory
membrane.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
322 13 Respiratory System

25. How is the diaphragm innervated?

A. from the respiratory centre in concert with chemoreceptors that detect
blood oxygen level
B. by the spinal nerves arising from thoracic vertebrae at the same level
C. by the phrenic nerve arising from vertebrae C3 to C5
D. by the vagus nerve arising from the medulla oblongata
Answer is C: The phrenic nerve (not thoracic spinal nerves) innervates the
diaphragm.
26. What mechanism transports the largest portion of oxygen around the body?
A. oxygen is carried bound to plasma proteins
B. oxygen is transported in solution dissolved in blood plasma
C. oxygen is bound to haemoglobin within red blood cells
D. oxygen is transported as bicarbonate after reacting with water to form car-
bonic acid
Answer is C: Haemoglobin within rbc is the protein that binds to oxygen
enabling its transport.
27. Which structures constitute the “upper respiratory tract”?
A. nose, pharynx and larynx
B. larynx, epiglottis and bronchi
C. trachea, bronchi and bronchioles
D. terminal bronchioles, alveoli and pleurae
Answer is A: The upper respiratory tract includes the larynx and superior
structures.
28. The lists below include of four respiratory tract structures. Which list has
them in the order that inhaled air would pass through them on the way to the
lungs?
A. glottis, pharynx, conchae, trachea
B. nares, pharynx, larynx, conchae
C. conchae, pharynx, larynx, trachea
D. pharynx, conchae, trachea, glottis
Answer is C: The conchae are adjacent to the external nares; the pharynx is
superior to the larynx and the larynx is at the entrance to the trachea.
29. What passes through the foramina of the cribriform plate of the ethmoid bone?
A. inhaled air on its way through the nose.
B. tubes that drain the sinuses of the facial bones.
C. nerve fibres associated with the sense of smell.
D. blood vessels that supply the nasal mucosa.
Answer is C: The olfactory bulbs rest upon the cribriform plate and nerves
from the bulbs descend through it to the top of the nasal cavity.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
13.1 Anatomy and Physiology 323

30. What function is served by the goblet/mucus cells of the bronchial “tree”?
A. they trap small inhaled particles.
B. they secrete mucus onto the surface of the airways
C. they increase the surface area available for gas exchange.
D. they move mucus up the bronchial tree.
Answer is B: Goblet cells produce mucus to trap any inhaled particles before
they reach the alveoli.
31. The central chemoreceptors in the brain stem increase breathing rate in
response to which stimulus?
A. an increase in CO2 concentration in the CSF
B. an increase in CO2 and H+ concentration in the CSF
C. a decrease in O2 concentration in the CSF
D. a decrease in O2 concentration in the blood
Answer is B: Carbon dioxide that enters the CSF will react with water to form
hydronium ions and these ions stimulate the central chemoreceptors.
32. In what form is the majority of carbon dioxide that is generated by cellular
respiration, transported to the lungs?
A. as dissolved carbon dioxide in the blood plasma.
B. bound to haemoglobin in red blood cells.
C. as carbonic acid inside red blood cells.
D. as bicarbonate ions in the blood plasma.
Answer is D: CO2 leaves cell as dissolved gas. About 7 % is transported in
solu- tion in plasma, 23 % bound to haemoglobin (HbCO2) in rbc, while 70 %
reacts with water to form carbonic acid, which forms bicarbonate ions.
33. A bronchiole differs from tertiary (and smaller) bronchi in that it:
A. has cartilage in its wall (& bronchi do not)
B. does not have cartilage in its wall (& bronchi do)
C. has smooth muscle in its wall (& bronchi do not)
D. does not have smooth muscle in its wall (& bronchi do)
Answer is B: While bronchi are held rigidly open by their cartilage,
bronchioles do not have cartilage in their wall.
34. The term “cellular respiration” is applied to:
A. exchange of gases in the lungs
B. ventilation of the lungs (breathing)
C. exchange of gases in the body tissues
D. the production of ATP in the cells
Answer is D: Cellular respiration is applied to the use of oxygen in mitochon-
dria to metabolise glucose into ATP and carbon dioxide.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
324 13 Respiratory System

35. The respiratory centre in the brain is sensitive to

A. an increase in H+ concentration in the CSF.
B. a decrease in O2 concentration in the blood.
C. an increase in H+ concentration in the blood.
D. a decrease in O2 concentration in the CSF.
Answer is A: The CSF is not buffered so is very sensitive to changes in hydro-
nium ion concentration.
36. Trauma that severs the spinal cord between C6 and C7 will
A. mean that the phrenic nerve has been severed
B. mean that artificial ventilation will be required to sustain life
C. cause the diaphragm to lose innervation but allow the intercostal muscles
to operate
D. cause the intercostal muscles to lose innervation but allow the diaphragm
to operate
Answer is D: The phrenic nerve that stimulates the diaphragm will not be sev-
ered as the spinal nerves that form it leave the spinal cord above C6. The
inter- costal muscles will be paralysed.
37. What happens when carbon dioxide levels in the blood decrease to below
normal?
A. pH of the blood decreases.
B. the blood becomes more acidic.
C. the concentration of hydrogen ions in the blood decreases.
D. pH does not change.
Answer is C: Carbon dioxide reacts with water to form carbonic acid and
thence hydronium ions. So a decrease in CO2 will decrease the concentration
of hydro- nium ions (and pH will increase).
38. In a healthy person, which of these lung volumes should be the largest?
A. tidal volume
B. vital capacity
C. expiratory reserve volume
D. residual volume
Answer is B: Vital capacity = expiratory reserve volume + tidal volume +
inspi- ratory reserve capacity. So VC is the largest (RV is ~1.2 L).
39. What term refers to the exchange of gases between alveolar air and blood in
the pulmonary capillaries?
A. inhalation
B. internal respiration

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
13.1 Anatomy and Physiology 325

C. ventilation
D. external respiration
Answer is D: This is external respiration as it is an exchange that occurs with
the atmosphere outside the body.
40. What is a cavity in a skull bone that is lined with mucus membrane?
A. sinus
B. bronchiole
C. glottis
D. larynx
Answer is A: The frontal sinus, sphenoid and maxillary sinuses are in bones
that surround the nasal cavity.
41. What is the function of ciliated cells in the lungs?
A. they form part of the respiratory membrane
B. to move mucus out of the bronchial tree
C. to secrete surfactant onto the lining of the alveoli
D. to phagocytose inhaled bacteria
Answer is B: Ciliated cells have cilia which beat in a co-ordinated fashion to
move mucus out of the airways.
42. What ensures that the lungs expand as the chest wall expands?
A. secreted surfactant
B. negative pressure between the pleura
C. serous liquid secreted by the pleura
D. the elastic recoil of the alveolar tissue
Answer is B: Negative pressure (suction) causes the visceral pleura to remain
in contact with the parietal pleura, so that when the chest wall & parietal
pleura moves, the parietal pleura takes the visceral pleura and lungs with it.
43. Which of the following is responsible for increasing respiratory activity under
normal conditions?
A. decreased CO2 level in blood
B. decreased O2 level in blood
C. increased CO2 level in blood
D. increased blood pH
Answer is C: If blood CO2 is high, then more will cross the BBB into the
CSF. This will decrease the pH of the CSF (because CO2 will produce
carbonic acid). This decreased pH will cause breathing rate to increase.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
326 13 Respiratory System

44. To what does “internal respiration” refer?

A. inhalation
B. exchange of gases between alveolar air and blood in the pulmonary
capillaries.
C. exchange of gases between capillary blood and interstitial fluid.
D. the production of ATP from organic molecules using oxygen.
Answer is C: Internal respiration refers to the movement of oxygen from the
blood into the interstitial fluid and CO 2 from interstitial fluid to blood. It also
refers to the diffusion of these gases through the interstitial fluid to and from
the cells.
45. Which structures are called bronchioles?
A. respiratory passageways that have cartilage in their walls
B. the tubes that open from the left and right primary bronchi.
C. the tubes that enter a lobule
D. the tubes that enter an alveolar sac.
Answer is C: Terminal bronchioles supply air to a lobule. Respiratory
bronchi- oles supply air to an alveolar sac. Secondary bronchi diverge from
primary bronchi.
46. Which of the following is NOT part of the respiratory membrane?
A. the basement membrane of alveolar epithelial cells
B. the plasma membrane of red blood cells
C. capillary endothelial cells
D. alveolar fluid and surfactant
Answer is B: The plasma membrane of rbc can only be reached by dissolved
gases after they have crossed the respiratory membrane into the capillary
blood.
47. How is the diaphragm innervated?
A. by the phrenic nerves arising from C3 to C5
B. by the vagus nerves from the respiratory centre
C. by cranial nerves arising from C5 to C7
D. by nerves arising from the spinal cord from T5 to T9.
Answer is A: Unusually the diaphragm is not innervated by spinal nerves from
between vertebrae adjacent to the diaphragm, but from spinal nerves arising
from C3 to C5.
48. Which molecule has the greatest effect in controlling lung ventilation?
A. oxygen in the blood
B. hydrogen ions in the blood
C. carbon dioxide in the blood
D. oxygen in the cerebrospinal fluid
Answer is C: It is carbon dioxide and not oxygen that stimulates lung
ventilation. Respiratory centre of the brain responds to incoming signals

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
from peripheral

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
13.1 Anatomy and Physiology 327

chemical receptors (when CO2 ↑), by sending signals to respiratory muscles

via nerves.
49. Which is the incorrect statement among the four below?
A. more oxygen is carried bound to haemoglobin than dissolved in plasma.
B. more carbon dioxide is carried bound to haemoglobin than dissolved in
plasma.
C. haemoglobin buffers hydrogen ions derived from carbon dioxide.
D. carbonic anhydrase is the enzyme that binds oxygen to haemoglobin.
Answer is D: Oxygen does not need an enzyme to become bound to
haemoglo- bin. About 23 % of carbon dioxide is bound to haemoglobin while
only about 7
% is transported in solution in plasma.
50. Which structures comprise the lower respiratory tract?
A. pharynx, larynx, trachea
B. larynx, trachea, bronchi
C. nose, pharynx, larynx
D. trachea, bronchi, lungs
Answer is D: The lower respiratory tract begins below the pharynx.
51. A bronchiole differs from a bronchus in that it is:
A. unable to change its diameter (& a bronchus can)
B. able to change its diameter (& a bronchus cannot)
C. a smaller diameter tube than is a bronchus
D. a larger diameter tube than is a bronchus
Answer is B: Bronchiole can constrict and dilate while bronchi cannot (they
are held open by cartilage). Bronchioles are more distal than bronchi in the
respira- tory “tree”.
52. With regard to lung ventilation, what does “dead space” refer to?
A. air in the conducting zone of the bronchial tree
B. air remaining in the alveoli after an exhalation at maximal effort.
C. air between the parietal and visceral pleura
D. the difference between the volume of a maximum inhalation and the tidal
volume.
Answer is A: Dead space refers to air that is inhaled into the airways but does
not reach the alveoli, hence is exhaled again without participating in gas
exchange.
53. If the spinal cord is severed below C4, what will be the effect on breathing?
A. paraplegia will result, but breathing will not be affected.
B. the intercostal muscles are able to effect ventilation, but the diaphragm
will not work

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
328 13 Respiratory System

C. the diaphragm is able to effect ventilation, but the intercostal muscles will
not work
D. independent breathing will not be possible.
Answer is C: The diaphragm is innervated by spinal nerves that leave the
spinal cord between C3 and C5, so a break below C4 will leave some the
nerves above C4 intact and some diaphragm movement is possible.
54. When is the respiratory centre of the brain stimulated to increase ventilation?
When
A. plasma CO2 concentration increases
B. plasma pH increases
C. plasma O2 concentration decreases
D. plasma HCO3− decreases
Answer is A: Concentration of carbon dioxide in plasma stimulates
ventilation. The presence of more carbon dioxide would tend to decrease pH
were it not for the buffers in blood.
55. In which form is the majority of CO2 transported in the blood?
A. as a dissolved solute
B. bound to plasma proteins
C. as carbonic acid molecules
D. as bicarbonate (HCO3−) ions
Answer is D: CO2 leaves the cell as dissolved gas. About 7 % is transported in
solution in plasma, 23 % bound to haemoglobin (HbCO 2) in rbc, while 70 %
reacts with water to form carbonic acid, which disassociates to form bicarbon-
ate ions.
56. Which of the following lists the components of the respiratory membrane?
A. alveolar epithelial cells, capillary endothelial cells and their basement
membranes
B. fluid and surfactant alveolar epithelial cells, capillary endothelial cells and
their basement membranes
C. visceral pleura, parietal pleura and serous fluid.
D. ciliated epithelial cells, mucus cells and secreted mucus
Answer is B: The epithelium of the alveoli and capillary (including the base-
ment membrane), and the fluid covering the alveolar surface (which includes
surfactant) together form the respiratory membrane through which gases must
pass.
57. To which of the following does the term “respiration” NOT apply?
A. The conversion of carbon dioxide to bicarbonate ions for transport to the
lungs
B. The exchange of gases between alveolar air and capillary blood

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
13.1 Anatomy and Physiology 329

C. The derivation of energy from organic molecules in the cells

D. The exchange of gases between capillary blood and body tissues
Answer is A: Carbon dioxide reacts with water to form carbonic acid which
disassociates to form bicarbonate ions. But this is not referred to a respiration.
58. The “lower respiratory tract” includes all those structures below which of the
following?
A. the internal nares
B. larynx
C. trachea
D. conducting zone
Answer is B: Below the larynx. That is, the LRT includes the trachea, the con-
ducting airways and the alveoli.
59. What are the cells that produce surfactant called?
A. mucus cells
B. ciliated cells
C. alveolar macrophages
D. type II pneumocytes
Answer is D: Type II pneumocytes produce the surface active agent
(surfactant) that reduce the surface tension of the water that lines the alveoli.
60. In red blood cells, carbonic anhydrase catalyses the formation of carbonic acid
which then disassociates into bicarbonate ions and hydrogen ions. What hap-
pens next?
A. bicarbonate ions bind to haemoglobin
B. hydrogen ions move into the plasma to be buffered by bicarbonate ions
C. hydrogen ions are buffered by haemoglobin
D. chloride ions enter the rbc to form hydrochloric acid (HCl)
Answer is C: Haemoglobin is a protein so can act as a buffer, thus removing
the hydrogen ions from solution. The bicarbonate ions move out of the rbc
into the plasma in exchange for chloride ions.
61. Which of the following statements is correct?
A. tidal volume is maximum volume that can be inhaled and exhaled
B. FEV1 is the maximum volume of air that can be forcefully exhaled in 1
second
C. expiratory reserve volume is the maximum volume of air that can be
exhaled after a deep inhalation
D. vital capacity is the expiratory reserve volume added to the inspiratory
reserve volume
Answer is B: Forced expiratory volume in one second is a measure of the
degree of pulmonary obstruction. Choice C refers to vital capacity. VC = ERV
+ TV + IRV

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
330 13 Respiratory System

62. What happens when carbon dioxide levels in the blood increase?
A. pH of the blood increases.
B. the blood becomes more alkaline.
C. the number of hydrogen ions in the blood decreases.
D. the blood becomes more acidic.
Answer is D: Choice D is the best answer (the other three are wrong).
However, the buffer systems in the blood would prevent all but a slight
change in pH.
63. Chemoreceptors in the medulla oblongata are sensitive to
A. increases in blood oxygen content.
B. increases in blood carbon dioxide.
C. increases in blood pH.
D. both choices A. and B.
Answer is D: Peripheral chemical receptors send signals to respiratory centres
of the brain located in medulla oblongata when blood carbon dioxide rises or
blood oxygen concentration falls below 60 mmHg.
64. What does sympathetic nervous system stimulation to the smooth muscle lay-
ers in the bronchioles cause?
A. bronchoconstriction
B. bronchodilation
C. an increase in tidal volume
D. increase in activity of the cilia
Answer is B: Bronchodilation is stimulated by sympathetic nerve impulses,
adrenalin & noradrenalin. Bronchoconstriction triggered by parasympathetic
nerve impulses.
65. Patients with diabetes mellitus who neglect insulin therapy rapidly metabolize
lipids, and there may be an accumulation of the acidic by-products of lipid
metabolism in the blood. What effect would this have on respiration?
A. increase in respiratory rate
B. decrease in respiratory rate
C. decrease in respiratory rate if oxygen is reduced
D. no influence on respiratory rate
Answer is A: Respiratory rate increases if blood pH decreases in order to
breathe out carbon dioxide (and hence reduce acid). In uncontrolled diabetics
this is known a Kussmaul breathing.
66. Which of these structures has no cartilage in it?
A. Epiglottis
B. Trachea
C. Bronchi
D. Alveoli

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
13.1 Anatomy and Physiology 331

Answer is D: Alveoli are formed by a single layer of squamous epithelium.

There is no cartilage.
67. Where does the actual gas exchange between inspired air and the blood in the
capillaries occur? In the:
A. bronchi
B. bronchioles
C. alveolar ducts and alveoli
D. respiratory bronchioles.
Answer is C: Gas exchange occurs across the respiratory membrane of the
alve- oli and ducts.
68. Which of these statements concerning ventilation is NOT correct?
A. During inspiration, the pressure in the alveoli is less than atmospheric
pressure.
B. Contraction of the neck muscles decreases the volume of the thoracic
cavity.
C. When the diaphragm contracts, thoracic cavity volume increases.
D. During quiet breathing, passive recoil of the lung and thoracic wall cause
expiration.
Answer is B: Deep inspiration is helped by contracting the neck muscles (sca-
lene, sternocleidomastoid), but this increases, not decreases lung volume.
69. With regard to the respiratory centre, which of the following is TRUE?
A. Blood oxygen concentration affects the respiratory centre.
B. Anaesthetics don’t affect respiration.
C. Raised intracranial pressure increases ventilation.
D. Narcotic drugs may depress ventilation
Answer is D: Anaesthesia or narcotics (e.g. morphine) can depress respiratory
centres (which decreases ventilation). As can raised intracranial pressure. It is
CO2 concentration rather than O2 concentration that affects the respiratory
cen- tre of the brain.
70. With respect to adrenaline and noradrenaline, which of the following is true?
They:
A. Relax smooth muscle resulting in dilation of the airways
B. Contract smooth muscle resulting in constriction of the airways
C. Relax smooth muscle resulting in constriction of the airways
D. Have no effect on the bronchioles
Answer is A: Adrenaline & noradrenaline cause bronchioles to dilate which
allows for greater ventilation.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
332 13 Respiratory System

71. In the control of respiration, which of the following is NOT TRUE?

A. Peripheral chemoreceptors respond to changes in oxygen and carbon diox-
ide concentration in the blood
B. Chemoreceptors in the central nervous system respond to changes in
carbon dioxide concentration in the blood
C. Respiration responds to smaller changes in the blood concentration of
oxy- gen than carbon dioxide
D. Central chemoreceptors are sensitive to changes in the pH of the cerebro-
spinal fluid
Answer is B: Chemoreceptors in the central nervous system respond to
changes in pH as there is no buffer in CSF. The presence of carbon dioxide in
CSF gen- erates hydronium ions which affect the central chemoreceptors.
72. Gas exchange takes place in the:
A. larynx
B. bronchioles
C. alveoli
D. pleura
Answer is C: The alveoli are part of the respiratory membrane.
73. The walls of the trachea are held open by which of the following?
A. nerve impulses
B. rings of cartilage
C. fine bones
D. smooth muscle contractions
Answer is B: Bands of cartilage shaped like a “C” keep the trachea rigid and
open.
74. Oxygen and carbon dioxide cross the respiratory membrane by the process of:
A. counter-current exchange
B. diffusion
C. active transport
D. oxygen – carbon dioxide pump
Answer is B: The gases move by diffusion along their concentration gradients.
75. Which of the following is NOT TRUE?
A. Raised intracranial pressure may depress respiration
B. Anaesthetics never affect respiration
C. Receptors in the airways trigger sneezing
D. Narcotic drugs may suppress respiration
Answer is B: In fact anaesthetics do affect respiration and that is why artificial
ventilation is necessary during a surgical procedure under general anaesthetic.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
13.1 Anatomy and Physiology 333

76. The greatest amount of air which can be moved in and out of the respiratory
system is the:
A. tidal volume
B. vital capacity
C. ventilatory volume
D. pulmonary capacity
Answer is B: Vital capacity includes inspiratory reserve volume, tidal volume
and expiratory reserve volume. All can be measured separately by our con-
scious effort.
77. Normal expiration in a person at rest is due to
A. elastic tissue in the lung
B. contraction of abdominal muscles
C. contraction of the expiratory muscles
D. diffusion
Answer is A: Expiration is accomplished by passive elastic recoil of the
expanded lung.
78. A molecule that is important in maintaining normal lung structure is:
A. immunoglobulin
B. haemoglobin
C. peroxidase
D. surfactant
Answer is D: By reducing the surface tension of water, surfactant allows the
alveoli to be expanded more easily and prevents their collapse.
79. The volume of air which moves in and out of the lungs during a normal quiet
respiratory cycle is called the:
A. tidal volume
B. vital capacity
C. ventilatory volume
D. pulmonary capacity
Answer is A: Tidal volume is the volume of air that is inhaled and exhaled
while “at rest”.
80. What are the main muscles involved in normal inspiration?
A. muscles of the neck
B. abdominal muscles
C. intercostal muscles
D. intercostals and the diaphragm
Answer is D: Normal inspiration is achieved by contraction of the external
intercostal muscles and the diaphragm. The neck and abdominal muscles are
used for deep inspiration and forced exhalation respectively.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
334 13 Respiratory System

81. What is the number of breaths per minute called? The:

A. respiratory rate
B. respiratory speed
C. pulmonary index
D. respiratory volume
Answer is A: Respiratory rate is stated in breaths per minute.
82. A man runs up a flight of stairs. His respiratory rate rose from 18 breaths per
minute (resting) to 36 bpm (at the top of stairs). The increase was probably a
result of:
A. increased blood pH
B. increased concentration of CO2 in the blood
C. decreased concentration of O2 in the blood
D. decreased concentration of CO2 in the blood
Answer is B: Muscular activity would have increased the rate of oxygen con-
sumption and carbon dioxide production by cells. A higher breathing rate is
required to take in the needed oxygen and to excrete the produced carbon
diox- ide. It is increased CO2 rather than decreased O2 that stimulates
respiratory rate.
83. Why is oxygen therapy – allowing a patient to breathe in an atmosphere in
which the proportion of oxygen is greater than 20 % – beneficial? Because the
A. partial pressure of CO2 in the inhaled air is decreased making it easier to
clear CO2 from the lungs.
B. partial pressure of oxygen in the lungs is increased allowing more oxygen
to dissolve in the alveolar fluid.
C. oxygen molecule is smaller than the nitrogen molecule so a greater
number of moles of air can be drawn into the lungs with each breath.
D. patient is required to inhale less frequently and this reduces the strain on
the respiratory system.
Answer is B: Breathing an atmosphere where oxygen is at greater than 20 %
concentration (by volume) will mean more oxygen will cross the respiratory
membrane to dissolve in plasma. In many cases this will be of benefit to the
patient.
84. What are the membranes that surround each lung called? The
A. parietal and visceral membranes.
B. parietal and visceral meninges
C. pleura
D. peritoneum
Answer is C: The pleura surround each lung. There is an outer (parietal) layer
and an inner layer, the visceral pleura.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
13.2 Pressure Applied to the Respiratory System 335

85. Which membrane surrounds the lungs?

A. the pericardium
B. the pleura
C. the mediastinum
D. the diaphragm
Answer is B: The pleura surround each lung. There is an outer (parietal) layer
and an inner layer, the visceral pleura.
86. Which of the following buffer systems of the body is affected by the action of
the lungs?
A. protein
B. monohydrogen-phosphate/dihydrogen-phosphate
C. ammonia/ammonium
D. carbonic acid/bicarbonate
Answer is D: Exhaled CO2 comes from the disassociation of the carbonic acid
molecule which in turn forms when a hydronium ion (acid) combines with a
bicarbonate ion. Hence, exhaling CO2 reduces the amount of acid in the blood.

13.2 Pressure Applied to the Respiratory System

A decreasing pressure is created within the lungs as the diaphragm contracts (and
moves caudally) and the chest wall moves outwards (see Boyle’s law). This
pressure difference allows atmospheric pressure to push air into the lungs. Since
(by using the ideal gas law) air molecules are travelling at more than 500 m/s (at
28 °C), this doesn’t take long. When the diaphragm and external intercostal
muscles relax, the chest and lungs recoil to a smaller volume which increases the
pressure of the air within the alveoli (see Boyle’s law). This provides the pressure
gradient to push the now CO2 rich and O2 poor air out of the lungs.
At the end of an inhalation, the air pressure in the alveoli is about 101 kPa (that
is, equal to atmospheric pressure). This is made up of about 75 kPa N2, 14 kPa O2,
5.3 kPa CO2, 6.2 kPa H2O. These values add to 101 kPa and each one is called the
partial pressure of that gas. The concentration of dissolved gases in the alveolar
fluid is characterised by these same numbers (and units). The solution concentration
of these same gases in venous blood entering the alveolar capillaries is about 75
kPa N2, 5.3 kPa O2, 6.1 kPa CO2, 6.2 kPa H2O (adding to ~93 kPa). Hence O2 will
diffuse down its concentration gradient from alveolar fluid (where oxygen is at
partial pres- sure 14 kPa) across the respiratory membrane into the capillary blood
(6.1 kPa). Similarly, CO2, will diffuse down its concentration gradient from the
venous blood through the respiratory membrane into the alveoli. Note that 1 kPa =
7.52 mmHg.
Each lung is surrounded and enclosed by a two-layer membrane called the
pleura. The parietal pleura is attached to the inside of the chest wall, while the
visceral

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
336 13 Respiratory System

pleura is attached to the surface of the lungs. The “space” between the two layers
of the pleura is occupied by a few millilitres of lubricating pleural fluid which is at
a negative pressure (i.e. a pressure less than atmospheric pressure) which is always
less than the pressure within the alveoli. This ensures that as the chest expands
dur- ing inhalation, the lungs are pushed outwards by the air pressure within them
and inflate. In effect the two layers of pleura are pressed together.
1. If the partial pressure of oxygen in alveolar air is 100 mmHg and the
concentra- tion of dissolved oxygen in capillary blood arriving at the alveoli is
40 mmHg, what will be the concentration of dissolved oxygen in blood
leaving the alveoli?
A. 140 mmHg
B. 100 mmHg
C. 70 mmHg
D. 60 mmHg
Answer is B: Oxygen in alveolar air will diffuse down its concentration gradi-
ent into capillary blood until blood in the capillary is also at 100 mmHg. After
this there is no concentration gradient to effect a net diffusion.
2. What does it mean if oxygenated blood leaving the alveolar capillaries has an
oxygen partial pressure of 100 mmHg?
A. oxygen will have diffused from the blood into the alveoli.
B. the partial pressure of oxygen in the alveoli was 100 mmHg
C. the partial pressure of oxygen in the alveoli was less than 100 mmHg
D. the partial pressure of oxygen in the alveoli was more than 100 mmHg
Answer is B: A pp of 100 mmHg is a way of expressing the concentration of
oxygen that is dissolved in blood. Oxygen will continue to move into blood
from the alveoli as long as the oxygen concentration in blood is less than that
in the alveoli. If ppO2 in the alveoli is 100 mmHg, then the ppO2 in the blood
will continue to increase until it is equal to that in the alveoli.
3. Consider Henry’s law. If a patient is given air with 30 % oxygen to breathe
(that is, at one and a half times normal oxygen partial pressure), by how much
would the amount of dissolved oxygen in the blood change?
A. it would increase by 150 %
B. it would increase by 50 %
C. it would increase by 30 %
D. it would increase by 10 %
Answer is B: Henry’s law states that the amount of gas that will dissolve in
water is proportional to its partial pressure. If its pp increases by 50 % (i.e. by
1.5 times), then 50 % more gas will dissolve.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
13.2 Pressure Applied to the Respiratory System 337

4. When the diaphragm contracts which of the following will happen in the lungs?
A. air pressure will increase, volume will decrease and exhalation will occur.
B. air pressure will decrease, volume will increase and exhalation will occur.
C. air pressure will decrease, volume will increase and inhalation will occur.
D. air pressure will increase, volume will increase and inhalation will occur.
Answer is C: Contracting the diaphragm will increase the volume of the lungs,
which will decrease the pressure of the contained air. Consequently air from
the room will be pushed into the lungs (inhalation occurs).
5. What does it mean when the concentration of dissolved oxygen in blood is
100 mmHg?
A. the oxygen dissolved in blood exerts a pressure of 100 mmHg over and
above the blood pressure generated by the heart.
B. 100 mmHg of the blood pressure, is due to the dissolved oxygen within it.
C. the blood had been exposed to air in the lungs that contained oxygen at a
partial pressure of 100 mmHg.
D. the dissolved oxygen exerts an osmotic pressure of 100 mmHg.
Answer is C: The concentration of a gas dissolved in water is expressed in
terms of the partial pressure of that gas in the mixture of gases that were in
contact with the water. Gas will continue to dissolve until the water is
saturated. At this point we say that the concentration of dissolved gas is the
same as the partial pressure of that gas in the atmosphere in contact with the
water. The same units, mmHg are used.
6. A pump used to clear an airway of obstructing liquid expands the volume in
its chamber to produce a:
A. negative pressure and liquid is pushed by atmospheric pressure into the
chamber.
B. positive pressure and liquid is pushed by atmospheric pressure into the
chamber.
C. negative pressure and liquid is sucked up into the chamber.
D. positive pressure and liquid is sucked by atmospheric pressure into the
chamber.
Answer is A: Once a negative pressure is established by expanding the volume
within the pump, atmospheric pressure acting on the patient’s body will force
air in their lungs out through the airway, along with the obstructing liquid.
7. According to Boyle’s law, the pressure in a fixed amount of gas will increase
as its volume decreases. Which one of the statements that follow is consistent
with Boyle’s law?
A. when the diaphragm contracts, pressure in the lungs increases.
B. when the chest recoils during exhalation, the air in the lungs is at a
negative pressure.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
338 13 Respiratory System

C. when the chest recoils during exhalation, the air in the lungs increases in
volume.
D. when the diaphragm contracts, pressure in the lungs decreases.
Answer is D: The diaphragm moves inferiorly as it contracts. This expands
the volume of the lungs.
8. Deoxygenated blood entering the alveoli has dissolved oxygen with partial
pressure of 40 mmHg, while alveolar air has oxygen present at a partial pres-
sure of 90 mmHg. What will be the partial pressure of dissolved oxygen in
blood that leaves the lungs?
A. 40 mmHg
B. 65 mmHg
C. 90 mmHg
D. 100 mmHg
Answer is C: Oxygen will continue to move from the alveoli into the blood
while a pressure gradient (a concentration gradient) exists.
9. Boyle’s law may be stated as: “when the volume of an enclosed gas expands,
its pressure decreases”. Thus the pressure in our lungs will:
A. increase as our diaphragm contracts.
B. be negative as we breathe out.
C. be negative as our rib cage moves up and out.
D. be positive as our rib cage moves up and out
Answer is C: The volume of our chest increases as the ribcage moves
outwards. Hence the air pressure within the lungs will decrease below
atmospheric pres- sure (=negative pressure).
10. Boyle’s law may be stated: Provided that the temperature does not change, the
volume of a fixed amount of gas decreases as its pressure increases (and vice
versa). Which statement concerning the pressure of the air in the lungs is con-
sistent with Boyle’s law?
A. It will decrease as the chest expands.
B. It decreases as we breathe out.
C. It increases when we contract our diaphragm.
D. It decreases as our intercostal muscles relax.
Answer is A: As the chest expands, its volume will increase. This means that
the pressure of the contained air will decrease in line with Boyle’s law.
11. A statement of Boyle’s law is ‘the volume of a fixed amount of gas is
inversely proportional to the pressure of the gas, as long as temperature does
not change’. This means that
A. A balloon would expand to a larger volume in a hyperbaric chamber.
B. The air pressure in the lungs would decrease if the diaphragm is
contracted.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
13.2 Pressure Applied to the Respiratory System 339

C. The pressure inside a gas cylinder remains constant while some gas is let
out, because the volume of the cylinder has not changed.
D. If the lungs could expand to twice their volume, they would contain air at
twice the pressure.
Answer is B: Contracting the diaphragm will increase the volume of the chest
and lungs above the diaphragm. As volume has increased, the pressure will
decrease. Choice C is wrong as the amount of gas has changed (it is not
fixed).
12. Boyle’s law states that pressure multiplied by volume is a constant value.
Hence which of the following statements is correct?
A. The amount of air in the lungs will increase when the pressure inside them
increases.
B. A positive pressure is produced in the lungs when the chest expands
C. A negative pressure is produced in the lungs when the chest expands.
D. The amount of air in the lungs will decrease when the pressure in them
decreases.
Answer is C: Boyle’s states: P × V = constant. This means that as one of P or
V increases, the other decreases enough for their product to be unchanged.
Hence as V increases with chest expansion, P decreases to below atmospheric
pressure (a negative pressure).
13. If the partial pressure of oxygen in the atmosphere was halved, what effect
would this have on the amount of oxygen that would now dissolve in the
alveo- lar fluid? It would
A. decrease to one quarter its former value.
B. decrease to one half its former value.
C. be about the same as before.
D. increase to one and a half times its former value.
Answer is B: The amount of gas that will dissolve in water is proportional to
its partial pressure (Henry’s law). Hence if the partial pressure in the
atmosphere halves, the partial pressure in the alveoli will be approximately
half, so the amount that will dissolve will also approximately halve.
14. At a height of 3000 m above sea level atmospheric pressure is 30 kPa less
than at sea level. A consequence of this lower pressure is that less oxygen will
dis- solve in the alveolar fluid. The reason for this is that:
A. the solubility coefficient of oxygen is lower.
B. the partial pressure of oxygen in the atmosphere is lower.
C. water vapour evaporating from the lung will exert a greater partial
pressure.
D. there will be more carbon dioxide leaving the blood and entering the
alveoli.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
340 13 Respiratory System

Answer is B: At 3000 m, atmospheric pressure is 70 kPa, the oxygen partial

pressure is 20 % of this (about 14 kPa). 14 kPa is less than 20 kPa (oxygen’s
partial pressure at sea level), so less oxygen will dissolve in the alveolar fluid
at 3000 m than at sea level.
15. If the partial pressure of oxygen in the air contained in the alveoli of the lungs
is 14 kPa, then the partial pressure of oxygen dissolved in the alveolar fluid
will be:
A. Very close to 14 kPa
B. Significantly greater than 14 kPa
C. Significantly less than 14 kPa.
D. Unable to be determined without the solubility coefficient of oxygen and
the temperature of the alveolar fluid.
Answer is A: The amount of a gas that will dissolve in a liquid that is in
contact with the gas is determined by the partial pressure of that gas. If pp of
O is 14 kPa, then the concentration of O that is dissolved in the alveolar fluid
is also 14 kPa.
16. Suppose that the partial pressure of oxygen in the alveoli is doubled from its
normal value of 14 kPa. What would then be the partial pressure of oxygen
dis- solved in the blood leaving the alveoli?
A. 7 kPa
B. 14 kPa
C. 21 kPa.
D. 28 kPa.
Answer is D: The amount of a gas that will dissolve in a liquid that is in
contact with the gas is determined by the partial pressure of that gas. If pp of
O is 14 kPa × 2, then the concentration of O that is dissolved in blood in the
alveolar capillaries is also 28 kPa.
17. One of the reasons that the mixture of gases in the air contained in the alveoli
of the lungs, differs from atmospheric air is that alveolar air is:
A. saturated with water vapour whereas atmospheric air is not.
B. at a higher temperature than atmospheric air.
C. at a higher pressure than atmospheric air.
D. enriched with nitrogen as it diffuses into the alveoli from the blood.
Answer is A: Alveolar air is saturated with water vapour and this has a partial
pressure greater than the PP of water in atmospheric air. Alveolar air and
atmo- spheric air are at the same pressure except when inhalation and
exhalation is occurring, so if water is in greater proportion within the alveoli
(than in the atmosphere), then the other gases must be in lesser proportion.
18. If the pressure between the visceral pleura of the lungs and the parietal pleura
of the thoracic cage is −6 mmHg, then

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
13.2 Pressure Applied to the Respiratory System 341

A. the lung will collapse.

B. exhalation is occurring.
C. the pressure is above atmospheric pressure.
D. the lungs will fill with air.
Answer is D: The intra-pleural pressure must be negative (=below
atmospheric pressure) if the lungs are to expand as the chest wall expands.
It oscillates
between about −2 mmHg (−270 Pa) when inhalation is about to begin, and
about −6 mmHg (−800 Pa) when inhalation has ended and exhalation is
about to occur. Hence a value of ~6 mmHg indicates that inhalation is
occurring.
19. Boyle’s law states that the pressure in an enclosed gas is inversely related to
its volume. Which of the following descriptions is compatible with Boyle’s
law and with respiratory physiology?
A. As the sternum and ribs move outward, the volume of the chest increases.
This causes an increase in the enclosed air pressure. Hence air is exhaled
along the pressure gradient.
B. Bronchodilation expands the volume enclosed by the bronchioles. This
decreases the air pressure within them and so atmospheric air moves into
the lungs along the pressure gradient.
C. Diffusion of oxygen from alveolar air into the blood decreases the partial
pressure of oxygen in the lungs. This decreased pressure allows
atmospheric air to enter the lungs along the pressure gradient.
D. As the diaphragm moves down, the chest volume expands which
decreases the pressure in that volume. Consequently atmospheric air is
forced into the lungs along the pressure gradient.
Answer is D: As the chest volume expands, we inhale. The downward move-
ment of the diaphragm expands the lung volume and by Boyle’s law the air
pressure within decreases. This creates a pressure gradient between the alveoli
and the outside air, so air will move into the lungs.
20. Given that de-oxygenated blood entering the alveolar capillaries has an
oxygen partial pressure of 42 mmHg and a carbon dioxide partial pressure of
47 mmHg, while the partial pressures of O2 and CO2 in the alveolar air are
103 mmHg and 40 mmHg respectively; which of the following gas
movements will occur?
A. Both CO2 and O2 move from alveolar air to the capillaries.
B. CO2 moves from alveolar air to capillaries and O2 moves from capillaries
to the alveolar air.
C. Both CO2 and O2 move from capillaries to alveolar air.
D. CO2 moves from capillaries to alveolar air and O2 moves from alveolar air
to the capillaries.
Answer is D: Dissolved substances will diffuse from where they are in high
con- centration to where they are at lower concentration. So O2 moves from
alveolar

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
342 13 Respiratory System

air (where it is at 103 mmHg) to the capillaries (at 42 mmHg), while CO2
moves from capillaries (47 mmHg) to alveolar air (40 mmHg).
21. What are the conditions under which O2 diffuses from the blood plasma into
red blood cells and attaches to haemoglobin? When partial pressure of oxygen
dis- solved in plasma is
A. 40 mmHg in the systemic capillaries.
B. 100 mmHg in the alveolar capillaries.
C. 40 mmHg in the alveolar capillaries.
D. 100 mmHg in the systemic capillaries.
Answer is B: Movement of oxygen from the plasma into rbc occurs in the
alve- olar capillaries. The higher number (100 mmHg) should be chosen to
ensure that a concentration gradient exists.
22. After an inhalation, the partial pressure of O2 in the alveoli is 104 mmHg and
of CO2 is 40 mmHg. What will be the concentration of these gases dissolved
in blood in the capillaries leaving the alveoli?
A. O2 = 40 mm CO2 = 104 mmHg
B. O2 = 40 mmHg, CO2 = 46 mmHg
C. O2 = 90 mmHg, CO2 = 35 mmHg
D. O2 = 100 mmHg, CO2 = 40 mmHg
Answer is D: Oxygen will diffuse into the plasma from the alveoli, and carbon
dioxide will diffuse the other way while a concentration gradient exists. The
gradient will exist until the plasma concentrations of both gases equal the con-
centrations in the alveoli.
23. Some partial pressures for oxygen (in mmHg) in different parts of the respira-
tory system are given below. Given that atmospheric air has O 2 at 160 mmHg,
which ones are reasonable values?
A. Capillary blood entering the alveoli has 40 mmHg, the alveolar air has 160
mmHg, capillary blood leaving the alveoli has 100 mmHg.
B. Capillary blood entering the alveoli has 40 mmHg, the alveolar air has 104
mmHg, capillary blood leaving the alveoli has 100 mmHg.
C. Capillary blood entering the alveoli has 40 mmHg, the alveolar air has 104
mmHg, capillary blood leaving the alveoli has 40 mmHg.
D. Capillary blood entering the alveoli has 104 mmHg, the alveolar air has
100 mmHg, capillary blood leaving the alveoli has 40 mmHg.
Answer is B: Choice A is wrong as alveolar air will have a lower PP than
atmo- spheric air. Choice C & D are wrong as capillary blood leaving the
alveoli should have oxygen PP nearly the same as that in the alveoli.
24. Blood entering the capillaries of the alveoli has dissolved CO2 at 46 mmHg
and is separated from air in the alveoli, which contains CO2 at a partial
pressure of

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
13.2 Pressure Applied to the Respiratory System 343

40 mmHg, by the respiratory membrane. What will be the concentration of

dis- solved CO2 of the blood capillaries leaving the alveoli?
A. 40 mmHg
B. 43 mmHg
C. 46 mmHg
D. 86 mmHg
Answer is A: Carbon dioxide will continue to diffuse from blood across the
respiratory membrane into the alveoli while the concentration gradient exists.
The gradient will exist until the dissolved CO 2 in the blood in the capillaries
falls to 40 mmHg.
25. If arterial blood entering the lung has pCO 2 = 46 mmHg & alveolar air has
pCO2 = 40 mmHg then
A. CO2 will move out of blood into the alveoli
B. CO2 will move out of alveoli into the blood
C. blood leaving the alveoli will have pCO2 = 43 mmHg
D. there will be an increase in the concentration of carbonic acid in the blood
Answer is A: Carbon dioxide will diffuse in the direction of its concentration
gradient. From high concentration in blood (46 mmHg) to alveoli (40 mmHg).
26. If the partial pressure of oxygen in the alveolar air is 104 mmHg,
approximately what will be the concentration of dissolved oxygen in the
blood leaving the pulmonary capillaries?
A. 21 mmHg
B. 40 mmHg
C. 100 mmHg
D. 160 mmHg
Answer is C: Oxygen will continue to diffuse from the alveoli across the
respi- ratory membrane into the blood while the concentration gradient exists.
The gradient will exist until the plasma concentration reaches 104 mmHg. In
reality blood travelling away from the alveoli will be at slightly less than 104
mmHg as some oxygen will have been used by the lung tissue.
27. Recall Boyle’s law applied to the lungs. Which of the following would occur
as air pressure in the lungs increases?
A. volume increases
B. volume decreases
C. the lungs expand
D. the diaphragm contracts
Answer is B: As the diaphragm contracts, the lungs expand and their volume
increases. All these things are inconsistent with increased air pressure in the
lungs.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
344 13 Respiratory System

28. If the pO2 of oxygen in the alveoli is 104 mmHg and in the blood in alveolar
capillaries is 40 mmHg, while the pCO 2 in the alveoli 40 mmHg and in the
blood is 46 mmHg, which of the following will happen?
A. carbon dioxide will diffuse from the alveoli to the blood.
B. oxygen will diffuse from the blood to the alveoli.
C. oxygen will diffuse from the red blood cells to the plasma.
D. carbon dioxide will diffuse from the blood into the alveoli.
Answer is D: Dissolved gases will diffuse from where they are in high
concen- tration to where they are in low concentration. Hence CO 2 can go
from 46 mmHg to 40 mmHg and pO2 can move from where it is at 104 mmHg
to where it is at 40 mmHg. D is the only choice consistent with this.
29. Inhalation of air into the lungs is correctly described by which of the
following?
A. the action of the diaphragm and the ribs create a positive pressure in the
thoracic cavity which causes air to move into the lungs.
B. the volume of the thoracic cavity is increased as muscles relax, thus
increas- ing the pressure and air is forced into the lungs.
C. the thoracic cavity decreases in volume as muscles relax and pressure
decreases so external air is forced into the lungs.
D. the lungs expand as muscles contract, this creates a negative pressure so
air is forced into the lungs.
Answer is D: Inhalation is an active process that requires muscles to contract.
Their contraction increases lung volume which produces a pressure in the
lungs that is lower than atmospheric pressure (a negative pressure).
30. The act of breathing in (inhalation) involves expanding the thoracic cage.
What does this cause the lung volume to do?
A. increase, the pressure of the air in the lungs to decrease and atmospheric
air to move into the lungs.
B. decrease, the pressure of the air in the lungs to decrease and atmospheric
air to move into the lungs.
C. increase, the pressure of the air in the lungs to increase and atmospheric
air to move into the lungs.
D. decrease, the pressure of the air in the lungs to decrease and atmospheric
air to move out of the lungs.
Answer is A: Expanding the thoracic cage increases lung volume which (by
Boyle’s law) decreases the air pressure in the lungs.
31. Henry’s law relates the amount of gas that will dissolve in a liquid to the
partial pressure of the gas in contact with the liquid. In which situation would
the greatest amount of oxygen dissolve in the liquid lining the alveoli?

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
13.2 Pressure Applied to the Respiratory System 345

A. Breathing in an atmosphere at normal pressure but enriched to 30 %

oxygen.
B. Resting in a mountain range at a height of 3000 m above sea level.
C. Seated inside a hyperbaric chamber at a pressure of 3 atmospheres.
D. Scuba diving at a depth of 10 m underwater.
Answer is C: The pp of oxygen in the situations described by choices B, A, D
& C are 0.7X, 1.5X, 2X & 3X respectively, the pp of oxygen at one
atmosphere pressure. Hence choice C would result is the greatest amount of
oxygen dis- solving in liquid.
32. Air flows from a region of high pressure to a region of lower pressure. To
explain the process of inhalation and exhalation, you need this fact and which
other?
A. Boyle’s law
B. Dalton’s law
C. Henry’s law
D. Charles’ law
Answer is A: Boyle’ s law states that the pressure within an enclosed gas
decreases as its volume increases. So by increasing the volume of your lungs,
a low pressure is created which allows air to move into this region of lower
pres- sure. And vice versa.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
Chapter 14
Nervous System

14.1 Cells and Action Potential

Nerve cells are able to conduct an electrical impulse and are called neurons. They
may be interneurons, or anaxonic, unipolar, bipolar or multipolar neurons. All
neu- rons (except for anaxonic ones) have an axon that carries an impulse away
from the cell body and one, two or many dendrites that carry an impulse towards
the cell body. Other cells, collectively called neuroglia are support cells for
neurons, but do not carry impulses. Within the CNS they are ependymal cells,
astrocytes, microglia and oligodendrocytes, while in the PNS they are satellite
cells and Schwann cells. Oligodendrocytes and Schwann cells form the myelin
sheath around axons.
Within the neuron, the concentration of Na+ ions is much less than their
concen- tration in the interstitial fluid, while the concentration of K+ ions is the
reverse. The great difference in the distribution of these ions (and of other ions)
results in the electrical potential (measured in volts) on the inside of the neuron’s
membrane being negative with respect to the electrical potential on the outside of
the plasma membrane. When an appropriate stimulus is received by a neuron,
sodium channels open and Na+ ions rush into the neuron (down their concentration
gradient). This changes the potential at that spot from negative to positive. Almost
immediately, potassium channels open so that K+ ions can rush out. This again
changes the poten- tial at that spot back to negative from positive. This inflow of
Na+ ions followed by the outflow of K+ ions is termed the “action potential” and
propagates along the axon as the nerve impulse.
A nerve impulse will travel to the end of the axon where it reaches the axon ter-
minals. These terminals will in turn stimulate the cell to which they are attached.
This attachment is called a synapse. If the axon stimulates a muscle fibre, the
meet- ing place is also called the neuro-muscular junction. The gap between the
axon terminal and the adjoining cell is called the synaptic cleft and is crossed by a
chemi- cal (a neurotransmitter) released from the axon terminal. The
neurotransmitter

Physiology,
© Springer Science+Business Media Singapore 2016 DOI
M. Caon, Examination Questions and Answers in Basic Anatomy and 10.1007/978-
ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
981-10-2332-3_14
347

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
348 14 Nervous System

molecule binds to a receptor protein on the plasma membrane of the adjoining

cell. In this way, the neurotransmitter passes on the action potential to the next
cell.
1. Which word correctly completes the statement: “All motor neurons are…”
A. interneurons
B. multipolar
C. bipolar
D. unipolar
Answer is B: Motor neurones (that innervate muscles) are multipolar.
2. In the peripheral nervous system, which cells form the myelin sheath?
A. Ependymal cells
B. Schwann cells
C. Astrocytes
D. Oligodendrocytes
Answer is B: Schwann cells surround the axon to form the myelin sheath in
peripheral neurones. Oligodendrocytes perform a similar function for
neurones in the CNS.
3. A difference in the amount and type of ions between the two sides of a plasma
membrane or a charge difference that occurs when ions move along a mem-
brane is called an “electrical potential”. What does the term “action potential”
refer to?
A. The distribution of ions that results in the inside of the cell being at about
−70 mV compared to outside the cell.
B. A movement of sodium ions into the cell following a stimulus and the ions
spreading out along the inside of the cell membrane.
C. The rapid movement of sodium ions into the cell followed by potassium
ions moving out of the cell, with the movement being repeated along the
length of the neuron.
D. Sodium ions being pumped out of the cell, while potassium ions are
moved into the cell.
Answer is C: The influx of sodium ions followed by the efflux of potassium
ions describes the action potential. Choice A describes the “resting potential”.
4. What is the gap between the plasma membranes of a neuron that conducts an
incoming signal and the cell that is going to receive the signal called?
A. neuromuscular junction
B. intercellular cleft
C. synaptic cleft
D. intercalated disc
Answer is C: The gap between cells at a synapse is called a synaptic cleft. A
neuromuscular junction is one type of synapse.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.1 Cells and Action Potential 349

5. Which of the following substances CANNOT pass through the “blood-brain

barrier”?
A. steroid hormones
B. O2 molecules
C. alcohol
D. potassium ions
Answer is D: Fat soluble molecules can pass the BBB, but most charged parti-
cles cannot.
6. What name is given to the cells in the nervous system that produce nerve
impulses?
A. neurotransmitters
B. nerves
C. neurons
D. neuroglia
Answer is C: Neurons produce nerve impulses, Nerves are bundles of
neurones. Neuroglia are cells that support and protect neurones.
7. Which structure carries incoming impulses towards the nerve cell body?
A. axon hillock
B. axon
C. dendrite
D. synaptic knobs
Answer is C: Dendrites receive stimuli for nerve cells and transmit them
towards the cell body. An axon transmits a nerve impulse away from the neu-
rone cell body.
8. Which neurons are unipolar?
A. neurons in the central nervous system
B. neurons in the retina
C. sensory neurons
D. motor neurons
Answer is C: Most sensory neurones are unipolar, that is the axon and
dendrites are not separated by the cell body but are the one strand (are fused),
with the cell body attached to it by a single process.
9. Which glial cells are responsible for forming the myelin sheath around periph-
eral nerve cells?
A. Astrocytes
B. Schwann cells
C. Satellite cells
D. Oligodendrocytes

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
350 14 Nervous System

Answer is B: The oligodendrocytes perform a similar function for neurones

within the CNS.
10. Inactive muscle and nerve cells maintain a resting membrane potential. This
potential results in:
A. the outside of the cell being negative
B. the inside of the cell being positive
C. the inside and outside of the cell having the same charge
D. the inside of the cell being negative
Answer is D: The resting potential has the inside of the cell at about −70 mV
compared to the outside.
11. When an action potential arrives at a synapse, what happens first?
A. a neurotransmitter is released into the synaptic cleft
B. extracellular Na+ crosses the post-synaptic membrane
C. Choline in the synaptic cleft enters the nerve cell and is converted to
acetyl choline
D. extracellular Ca++ enters the nerve cell
Answer is D: As the axon terminal depolarises when the action potential
arrives, calcium channels open and extracellular calcium enters the axon
terminal. This stimulates the release of a neurotransmitter (e.g. ACh) into the
synaptic cleft.
12. What is the last part of a nerve cell that is involved when a nerve impulse
passes to another cell?
A. synaptic knob
B. axon hillock
C. dendrite
D. axon
Answer is A: Synaptic knobs are at the distal end of an axon. The axon
hillock is at the proximal end.
13. Which of the following statements is true of neuroglia?
A. they are the cells that link motor neurons to sensory neurons
B. it is the non-cellular material that lies between neurons
C. they have only one dendrite and one axon
D. they produce the myelin sheath
Answer is D: Neuroglia refers to several types of cells of the nervous system
that are not neurones. Some of them form the myelin sheath.
14. What can correctly be said about somatic motor neurons?
A. they are unipolar neurons
B. their cell bodies are in the dorsal root ganglia
C. their cell bodies are located in the central nervous system
D. they are bipolar neurons

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.1 Cells and Action Potential 351

Answer is C: Somatic motor neurons are multipolar. Their cell bodies are
located in the CNS – within the spinal cord.
15. What is the effect of the movement of Na+ into a nerve cell followed very
soon by the movement of K+ out of the nerve cell?
A. this establishes the resting membrane potential
B. these movements are known as depolarisation and repolarisation
C. these movements repolarise the cell
D. it changes the membrane potential from about −70 mV to about −50 mV
Answer is B: When Na+ moves into a nerve cell the cell depolarises (from
−70 mV to about +30 mV) when soon afterwards K+ moves out of the nerve
cell, it repolarises (from +30 mV back to −70 mV).
16. There is a space between a neuron and the cell it stimulates, that is crossed by
a neurotransmitter. What is it called?
A. synaptic cleft
B. voltage-gated channel
C. synapse
D. post-synaptic membrane
Answer is A: The synaptic cleft lies between the pre-synaptic membrane of
the neuron and the post-synaptic membrane of the cell about to be stimulated.
17. Which of the following CAN cross the blood-brain barrier to enter the brain?
A. K+
B. O2
C. proteins
D. most pharmaceuticals
Answer is B: All cells require oxygen, so of course it can cross the BBB. Most
pharmaceuticals cannot.
18. What name is used for a nerve cell?
A. neuron
B. neuroglia
C. ganglion
D. astrocyte
Answer is A: Neurons (or neurones) are nerve cells. Neuroglia are cells in the
nervous system but they do not produce nerve impulses.
19. What is the name of the nerve cell structure that carries incoming impulses
towards the cell?
A. dendrite
B. axon

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
352 14 Nervous System

C. cell body
D. ganglion
Answer is A: Dendrites receive incoming (efferent or stimulating) impulses.
20. Which is the major type of nerve cell in the CNS?
A. Anaxonic
B. Unipolar
C. Bipolar
D. Multipolar
Answer is D: Multipolar are most common in the CNS. Motor neurons, whose
cell bodies lie within the spinal cord, are multipolar.
21. What is the purpose of the myelin sheath around an axon?
A. To control the chemical environment around the nerve cell.
B. To phagocytose microbes
C. To prevent movement of ions through the nerve cell membrane
D. To form the blood-brain barrier.
Answer is C: The myelin sheath insulates the axon. That is, it prevents ions
from crossing the plasma membrane except at the nodes of Ranvier, where the
sheath is absent.
22. Which nerve cells carry impulses from the brain to the muscles?
A. Sensory
B. Motor
C. Afferent
D. Association
Answer is B: Motor (or efferent) nerves carry impulses away from the CNS to
the muscles.
23. Which of the following describes an “action potential”?
A. The high concentration of Na+ and Cl− outside the cell, and of K+ inside
the cell.
B. The voltage change that moves along the cell membrane until it reaches
the axon hillock.
C. The movement of a neurotransmitter from the pre-synaptic membrane to
the post-synaptic membrane.
D. The movement of Na+ across the cell membrane into the cell, followed by
the movement of K+ out of the cell.
Answer is D: Choice B describes a graded potential. Choice C describes
synap- tic transmission. Choice A describes the distribution of those ions that
contrib- ute to the resting potential.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.1 Cells and Action Potential 353

24. What part of the neurone carries the “action potential”?

A. the cell body
B. the dendrites
C. the synaptic knobs
D. the axon
Answer is D: The action potential travels along the axon, away from the cell
body.
25. What type of neurones are motor neurones?
A. Anaxonic
B. Multipolar
C. Bipolar
D. Unipolar
Answer is B: All motor neurones are multipolar.
26. What event during the action potential causes the resting membrane potential
to change from about −70 mV to about +30 mV?
A. K+ ions moving into the cell
B. K+ ions moving out of the cell
C. Na+ ions moving into the cell
D. Na+ ions moving out of the cell
Answer is C: It takes positive ions moving INTO the cell to change the resting
potential from −70 to +30 mV. The ions are sodium.
27. Where are the cell bodies of somatic motor neurones found?
A. in the peripheral nervous system
B. in the central nervous system
C. in the dorsal root ganglia
D. in the spinal cord
Answer is D: They are found in the spinal cord (in the ventral gray horns).
Choice B is also correct, but choice D is more specific. The dorsal root
ganglia contain cell bodies of sensory neurons).
28. What is an “action potential”? It is:
A. when the resting potential changes from −70 mV to +30 mV and then
back again.
B. the name given to the difference in electrical charge between the inside
and outside of the plasma membrane of a neurone.
C. the name given to the stimulus that changes the resting potential from −70
to −50 mV.
D. the voltage produced by a stimulus which causes a nerve impulse to be
generated.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
354 14 Nervous System

Answer is A: The action potential is the name given to the change in voltage
of the inside of the cell from −70 to +30 and back to −70 mV again. This
voltage change propagates along the axon.
29. What does the term “synapse” refer to?
A. the plasma membrane of the axon terminal of a nerve cell.
B. that part of the plasma membrane of the cell being stimulated, that is
oppo- site the axon terminal.
C. the gap between the stimulating nerve cell and the receiving cell.
D. the place where signal transmission between a nerve cell and the cell it is
stimulating occurs.
Answer is D: The impulse carried by a nerve cell is transferred by neurotrans-
mitter to the stimulated cell by this structure at the point of contact. Choice C
describes the synaptic cleft.
30. Which statement is true of a multi-polar neuron?
A. has many axons attached to the cell body
B. is the major type of neuron in the peripheral nervous system
C. all sensory neurons are multi-polar
D. has many dendrites attached to the cell body
Answer is D: The many dendrites give the “multi-” part of the name of this
type of neuron. Sensory neurones are unipolar.
31. Which of the following is a true statement about an “action potential”?
A. It refers to the movement of a neuro-transmitter along an axon.
B. It travels away from the cell body along the axon.
C. It causes K+ to rush into the cell.
D. It travels between the dendrite and the axon hillock.
Answer is B: An action potential is an efferent impulse that travels along the
axon away from the cell body.
32. Complete the sentence. Neuroglia
A. are bundles of axons
B. contain cell bodies outside the central nervous system
C. are a type of neuron
D. include ependymal cells, astrocytes and satellite cells
Answer is D: Neuroglia are nervous system cells that are not neurons. Choice
D gives three types of these cells.
33. Which of the three structures listed below constitute a nerve cell?
A. dendrites, ganglion, myelin sheath
B. dendrites, cell body, axon

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.1 Cells and Action Potential 355

C. neuron, neuroglia, synaptic process

D. cell body, synaptic knobs, efferent fibre
Answer is B: Neuroglia and ganglion are not part of a neuron. Efferent fibre is
an ambiguous term that may refer to an axon or to a motor neuron.
34. What are the major type of nerve cells in the CNS?
A. multipolar
B. sensory
C. interneurons
D. unipolar
Answer is A: Multipolar are most common in the CNS. Motor neurons, whose
cell bodies lie within the spinal cord, are multipolar.
35. Which sequence of ion movements describes the action potential?
A. Na+ move out of cell then K+ move in
B. K+ move in to cell then Na+ move out
C. K+ move out of cell then Na+ move in
D. Na+ move into cell then K+ move out
Answer is D: Sodium ions are in high concentration outside the cell (and in low
concentration inside the cell). The correct sequence is Na in followed by K out.
36. What is the space between a neuron and the following neuron, muscle or
gland that it stimulates called?
A. Synaptic vesicle
B. Ion channel
C. Synaptic cleft
D. Receptor
Answer is C: The synaptic cleft is the space over which an incoming nerve
impulse is transmitted by a molecule called a neurotransmitter.
37. What feature do the dendrites of a nerve cell have?
A. they transmit an action potential
B. they contain the cell nucleus and organelles
C. they carry incoming impulses to the cell body
D. they are connected to the cell body by the axon hillock
Answer is C: Dendrites are the afferent pathway by which a stimulus is
brought to a cell body.
38. Most sensory neurones may be described as which of the following?
A. multipolar
B. bipolar
C. having cell bodies within the CNS
D. unipolar

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
356 14 Nervous System

Answer is D: Sensory neurons are unipolar. And their cell bodies are outside
the CNS in the dorsal root ganglia.
39. What is the type of neuroglia that forms the myelin sheath on neurons outside
of the CNS?
A. Oligodendrocytes
B. Satellite cells
C. Schwann cells
D. Microglia
Answer is C: Schwann cells surround the axon to form the myelin sheath in
peripheral neurones. Oligodendrocytes perform a similar function for
neurones in the CNS.
40. The action potential occurs when one of the following events occurs. Which
one?
A. Na+ rushes into the cell followed by Cl−
B. Na+ rushes out of the cell followed by PO43− rushing in
C. K+ rushes into the cell followed by Na+ rushing out
D. Na+ rushes into the cell followed by K+ rushing out
Answer is D: Sodium rushing in following by potassium rushing out produces
the action potential.
41. A multipolar neuron has more than one what?
A. dendrite attached to the cell body
B. axon attached to the cell body
C. synaptic terminal attached to the axon
D. cell body
Answer is A: Many dendrites are attached to the cell body of multipolar
neurones.
42. What is the depolarisation and repolarisation of a nerve cell membrane called?
A. graded potential
B. action potential
C. threshold potential
D. resting membrane potential
Answer is B: Depolarisation of the resting membrane potential leads to an
action potential.
43. Which best describes a nerve?
A. dendrites, cell bodies, axons, Schwann cells
B. dendrites, cell bodies, axon hillock, axon terminals, vesicles
C. dendrites, cell bodies, axon hillock, axon terminals, Schwann cells,
neurotransmitters
D. axons, blood vessels, connective tissue, Schwann cells

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.1 Cells and Action Potential 357

Answer is D: A nerve is a bundle of axons of individual neurons. Hence does

not contain nerve cell bodies. A nerve does include the Schwann cells around
axons, BV and CT.
44. Which of the following would conduct an action potential with the greatest
speed?
A. myelinated, large diameter fibres
B. myelinated, small diameter fibres
C. unmyelinated, large diameter fibres
D. unmyelinated, small diameter fibres
Answer is A: Myelinated fibres allow for faster conduction speed as does
greater diameter of axon.
45. Which of the following is a characteristic of an action potential?
A. The signal is graded
B. It results due to an influx of potassium ions
C. it is an all or none response
D. It results from an initial outflow of sodium ions
Answer is C: When a graded potential exceeds the threshold for producing an
action potential, the AP happens regardless of the strength of the graded
poten- tial. This is an all or none event. (Choice D is wrong as sodium ions
should be moving IN).
46. What is meant by an absolute refractory period?
A. at least 5 ms must elapse from the time of the first action potential before a
second can be initiated
B. an action potential cannot be initiated during this period regardless of the
strength of the stimulus
C. an action potential can be initiated if the strength of the stimulus is higher
than normal (>70 mV)
D. an action potential can be initiated if the strength of the stimulus is lower
than normal (<70 mV)
Answer is B: During the ~0.5 ms period of the action potential in which
sodium ions are rushing into a nerve cell, the nerve cannot respond to any
stimulus not matter how strong the stimulus. Because of the impossibility of
response, this period is called “absolutely” refractive. (refractory = resisting
ordinary methods).
47. What is meant by the “absolute refractory period” of a nerve cell membrane?
The time during which:
A. a larger than normal stimulus is required to cause an action potential.
B. a smaller than normal stimulus will produce an action potential.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
358 14 Nervous System

C. no stimulus will produce an action potential.

D. two stimuli in quick succession are required to add to an above threshold
stimulus.
Answer is C: During the ~0.5 ms period of the action potential in which
sodium ions are rushing into a nerve cell, the nerve cannot respond to any
stimulus not matter how strong the stimulus. Because of the impossibility of
response, this period is called “absolutely” refractive. (refractory = resisting
ordinary methods).
48. What would happen if a neuron lost its myelin sheath?
A. Na+ would leak out of the axon leaving too few ions to stimulate the Na
channels at the next node to open.
B. The neuron would die.
C. More Na+ channels would be exposed allowing freer entry so conduction
speed would increase.
D. More K+ channels would be exposed allowing freer exit so the cell would
hyperpolarise.
Answer is A: The myelin sheath prevents sodium ions from leaking back into
the intracellular fluid hence they can travel with minimum diminution to the
next node to trigger the opening of abundant voltage-gated sodium channels.
49. Some cells in the body can maintain an electric potential across their cell
mem- brane. How do they do this?
A. By using the sodium-potassium pump to continually eject positive sodium
and potassium ions from the cell.
B. By allowing negative chloride ions to enter the cell along their concentra-
tion gradient.
C. By trapping large cations inside the cell membrane.
D. By keeping unequal concentrations of various ions on each side of the cell
membrane.
Answer is D: It is the distribution of ions of different charge on either side of
the membrane that determines the membrane potential.
50. In nerve fibres with myelin sheaths, which of the following is true about the
electrical conduction?
A. It is ‘saltatory’, so propagates at higher speed
B. It requires more energy to send an impulse
C. The conduction between adjacent axons is enhanced (‘cross talk’ is
increased)
D. It is slower due to the separation between the ‘nodes of Ranvier’
Answer is A: The myelin sheath increases the speed of conduction along an
axon as the action potential is regenerated when migrating Na ions reach the
next node. It “jumps” (saltates) from one node to the next.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.1 Cells and Action Potential 359

51. When we say that the cell membrane is polarised we mean that
A. the outside of the cell is negative with respect to the inside
B. the inside of the cell is negative with respect to the outside
C. there are more Na+ ions and less K+ ions inside the cell than outside.
D. Na+ ions have moved out of the cell and K+ ions have moved in.
Answer is B: Polarised means that the charge is different on the two sides of
the membrane, with the inside being negative with respect to the outside.
52. Depolarisation of the cell membrane involves:
A. sodium channels opening to allow Na+ to flow in.
B. potassium channels opening to allow K+ to flow in.
C. chloride pumps quickly pumping large amounts of Cl− outside.
D. electrical attraction between K+ inside and Cl− outside.
Answer is A: The influx of positive Na ions changes the polarisation of the
cell from negative inside to positive inside at that location on the membrane.
This reversal is called depolarisation.
53. Which of the following statements about the action potential is FALSE?
A. The action potential lasts about four milliseconds.
B. It is triggered by anions crossing the cell membrane.
C. The sequence: ‘Na ions moving in, K ions moving out’ constitutes the
action potential.
D. Repolarisation follows depolarisation of the cell membrane.
Answer is B: Anions (+ve ions) crossing the membrane is the first part of the
action potential, but this movement is triggered by a graded potential that is
above threshold arriving at the start of the axon (the axon hillock). So choice
D is false.
54. When is an action potential initiated? When
A. the resting membrane potential changes from −70 mV to +30 mV.
B. a nerve impulse has caused some muscle action to be produced.
C. the potassium ‘gates’ in the cell membrane open and potassium ions flood
into the cell.
D. a stimulus, which is above the threshold level, is applied to a receptor.
Answer is D: A stimulus which exceeds the threshold level is required to
gener- ate an action potential.
55. The sequence of events that constitute an action potential is correctly
described by which of the following? Resting potential of…..
A. +35 mV, stimulus above the threshold, Na+ move into cell, depolarisation to
−70 mV, K+ move out of cell, repolarisation to +35 mV.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
360 14 Nervous System

B. −70 mV, stimulus above the threshold, K+ move into cell, depolarisation to
−35 mV, Na+ move out of cell, repolarisation to −70 mV.
C. +35 mV, stimulus above the threshold, K+ move into cell, depolarisation to
−70 mV, Na+ move out of cell, repolarisation to +35 mV.
D. −70 mV, stimulus above the threshold, Na+ move into cell, depolarisation to
+35 mV, K+ move out of cell, repolarisation to −70 mV.
Answer is D: The resting potential is negative, and the first ion movement is
sodium ions into of the cell.

56. What term refers to the sudden movement of potassium ions across the cell
membrane to the outside of a nerve cell?
A. Repolarisation
B. Depolarisation
C. The action potential
D. The potassium pump
Answer is A: When Na+ ions move into the axon it is called depolarisation as
the resting potential changes from −70 mV to + 30 mV. Movement out by K +
ions is called repolarisation as the potential returns to −70 mV. One followed
by the other is the action potential.

14.2 Brain and Spinal Cord Anatomy

The brain and spinal cord are enclosed by membranes called meninges: the dura
mater, the arachnoid mater and the pia mater. Together the brain and spinal cord
are the “central nervous system” (CNS). The peripheral nervous system includes
motor nerves that leave the CNS from the brain or the spinal cord and sensory
nerves that bring information to the CNS. Sensory nerves are “afferent”. That is,
carry informa- tion from sensory organs to the brain – often via the spinal cord.
Motor nerves are “efferent”. That is, they carry commands from the brain
(usually) to the muscles (usually). Motor and sensory nerve fibres attached to the
brain are called cranial nerves and those attached to the spinal cord are called
spinal nerves.
The brain consists of the cerebrum, diencephalon, brainstem and cerebellum
while cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) rather than blood circulates through the four ven-
tricles within the brain, through the central canal of the spinal cord and between
the arachnoid and pia maters. CSF is formed from blood at the choroid plexuses
and returns to the blood in the superior sagittal sinus. The surface of the cerebrum
is folded into gyri (ridges) and sulci (valleys) and divided into “lobes”: frontal,
two parietal, occipital, two temporal and two insula. The central sulcus separates
the frontal lobe from the parietal lobes while the precentral gyrus (of the frontal
lobe) is noteworthy for being the primary motor area, and the post-central
gyrus (of the

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.2 Brain and Spinal Cord Anatomy 361

parietal lobe) for being the primary somatosensory area (search for the cortical
“homunculus”). A section through the brain displays gray-coloured matter
contain- ing cell bodies and white-coloured matter. The whiteness arises from the
myelin that wraps around axons as, being a fat, myelin is white in appearance. The
dien- cephalon includes the thalamus, the hypothalamus, and the pituitary and
pineal glands. The brainstem comprises the midbrain, the pons, and the medulla
oblongata.
In cross-section, the spinal cord displays its characteristic butterfly-shaped cen-
tral gray matter region surrounded by the white matter of myelinated nerves. This
white matter is either ascending tracts (carrying sensory information to the brain)
or descending tracts (carrying motor instructions to muscles and glands). The
axons of sensory neurons within a spinal nerve enter the spinal cord from the
dorsal side, while the axons of motor neurons within a spinal nerve exit the spinal
cord from the ventral side. This “dorsal root” and the “ventral root” meet and join
to form the spinal nerve that then passes through the vertebral foramina
1. Which of the lists of structures include all of the central nervous system?
A. cerebellum, cerebrum, spinal cord, diencephalon, brainstem
B. midbrain, spinal cord, autonomic nerves, pons, diencephalon
C. midbrain, cerebellum, special sense organs, medulla oblongata
D. cerebrum, sensory neurons, motor neurons, cerebellum
Answer is A: There are five distinct structures in the CNS. Autonomic nerves,
motor and sensory neurones and special sense organs are not part of the CNS.
2. What are the three meninges and two named “spaces” that surround the brain,
in order from superficial to deep (outermost to innermost)?
A. pia, arachnoid, sub-arachnoid, dura, septa
B. sub-arachnoid, epidural, dura, pia, arachnoid
C. arachnoid, sun-arachnoid, pia, epidural, dura
D. epidural, dura, arachnoid, sub-arachnoid, pia
Answer is D: The dura mater, arachnoid mater and pia mater are the three
meninges in order.
3. Which of the following is NOT composed of “gray matter”?
A. spinothalamic tract
B. cerebral cortex
C. basal nuclei
D. post-central gyrus
Answer is A: Gray matter refers to cell bodies of neurons while white matter
is aggregations of myelinated axons. The spinothalamic “tract” is a bundle of
nerves (axons) carrying information to the brain.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
362 14 Nervous System

4. Where in the brain is the “primary motor area”?

A. Midbrain
B. Thalamus
C. Basal nuclei
D. Pre-central gyrus
Answer is D: The pre-central gyrus of the frontal lobe is the primary motor
area of the brain and is separated from the primary sensory area (the post-
central gyrus), by the central sulcus.
5. The hypothalamus does ALL of the following EXCEPT one. Which one?
A. It is the autonomic control centre.
B. It directs lower CNS centres to perform actions.
C. It produces the rigidly programmed, automatic behaviours necessary for
survival
D. It performs many homeostatic roles.
Answer is C: Rigidly programmed automatic behaviours are controlled by the
brainstem (midbrain, pons, medulla oblongata) not the hypothalamus.
6. Which of the following structures together make up the brainstem?
A. medulla oblongata, pons, midbrain, cerebellum
B. medulla oblongata, pons, midbrain
C. medulla oblongata, pons, midbrain, thalamus
D. medulla oblongata, pons, midbrain, pineal gland
Answer is B: The cerebellum, thalamus and pineal gland are not part of the
brainstem.
7. In which of the following places would you NOT find cerebrospinal fluid?
A. the sub-arachnoid space
B. the third ventricle of the brain
C. the epidural space
D. the central canal of the spinal cord
Answer is C: The epidural space surrounds the dura mater of the spinal cord
and so is outside of the meninges and of the CNS. “Epi-” means on top of the
dura.
8. What is the name of the lobe of the brain that is immediately superior to the
cerebellum?
A. dorsal
B. occipital
C. posterior
D. parietal
Answer is B: The cerebellum nestles into the cerebrum immediately inferior
to the occipital lobe.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.2 Brain and Spinal Cord Anatomy 363

9. Which of the following statements about the blood-brain barrier (BBB) is

correct?
A. The BBB prevents fluctuations of hormone and ion concentrations in
blood from affecting the brain.
B. It is formed by Schwann cells wrapping around capillaries.
C. The brain is supported by (it floats in) the BBB.
D. The BBB is formed by the choroid plexus.
Answer is A: Hormones and ions cannot pass through the BBB. (It is astro-
cytes, not Schwann cells that from part of the BBB; the brain floats on CSF;
CSF is formed by the choroid plexus).
10. In which part of the brain is the thalamus found?
A. diencephalon
B. cerebrum
C. cerebellum
D. brainstem
Answer is A: The thalamus, along with the hypothalamus, pituitary gland &
pineal gland, form the diencephalon.
11. Where is the autonomic control centre for most of body homeostasis located?
A. In the limbic system
B. In the brainstem
C. In the hypothalamus
D. In the cerebellum
Answer is C: Hypothalamus is the autonomic centre which is the main
visceral control centre of body homeostasis.
12. Which four structures together make up the brain?
A. cerebrum, diencephalon, brainstem and cerebellum
B. cerebrum, thalamus, brainstem and cerebellum
C. cerebrum, diencephalon, meninges and cerebellum
D. spinal cord, diencephalon, brainstem and medulla oblongata
Answer is A: The brainstem is at the end of the spinal cord, just inferior to the
diencephalon which is surrounded by the cerebrum. The cerebellum is dorsal
to the brainstem and inferior to the cerebrum.
13. Which of the following are NOT part of the cerebral cortex?
A. motor areas, sensory areas and association areas
B. pre-central gyrus and post-central gyrus
C. white matter and basal nuclei
D. the lateral ventricles and the thalamus

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
364 14 Nervous System

Answer is D: The thalamus is part of the diencephalon, not the cerebral cortex
(cerebrum)
14. Which part of the brain allows us to control skilled voluntary muscle
movements?
A. basal nuclei
B. cerebellum
C. pre-central gyrus
D. thalamus
Answer is C: The pre-central gyrus of the frontal lobe is the primary motor
area. It controls voluntary movements of skeletal muscle.
15. Which of the following roles is NOT performed by the hypothalamus?
A. autonomic control of heat activity and blood pressure
B. relaying visual and auditory information to the cerebral cortex
C. production of hormones for the posterior pituitary
D. body temperature regulation
Answer is B: The thalamus relays visual and auditory information, not the
hypothalamus.
16. Cortico-spinal pathways cross-over from one side of the brain to the other
side. Where does this cross-over occur?
A. In the medulla oblongata
B. In the cerebellum
C. In the hypothalamus
D. In the reticular formation
Answer is A: In the medulla oblongata at the “decussation of pyramids”.
17. Which layer of membrane around the brain is the most superficial?
A. Dura mater
B. Meningeal mater
C. Arachnoid mater
D. Pia mater
Answer is A: The dura mater is in contact with the skull.
18. Which of the following substances is prevented from entering the brain by the
blood-brain barrier?
A. glucose
B. nicotine
C. pharmaceuticals
D. alcohol
Answer is C: Many pharmaceuticals are unable to cross the BBB.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.2 Brain and Spinal Cord Anatomy 365

19. What part of the brain contains the motor areas and the sensory areas?
A. cerebrum
B. diencephalon
C. brainstem
D. cerebellum
Answer is A: The central sulcus of the cerebrum separates the gyri containing
the primary motor area in the frontal lobe and the primary sensory areas in the
parietal lobes.
20. What part of the brain contains the main visceral control centre of body
homeostasis?
A. cerebrum
B. diencephalon
C. brainstem
D. cerebellum
Answer is B: The hypothalamus of the diencephalon
21. What part of the brain subconsciously provides precise timing for the move-
ments of learned skeletal muscle contraction?
A. cerebrum
B. diencephalon
C. brainstem
D. cerebellum
Answer is D: Cerebellum subconsciously provides precise timing and appro-
priate patterns of learned skilled skeletal muscle contraction for smooth coor-
dinated movements, posture & agility.
22. Where does the spinal cord start and finish?
A. It extends from the foramen magnum to L1 – L2
B. It extends from the foramen magnum to the sacrum
C. It starts at the superior part of the medulla oblongata and extends to the
inferior part of the cauda equina.
D. It extends from C7 to L5
Answer is A: The foramen magnum is the hole in the occipital bone. Beyond
L2, spinal nerves descend within the arachnoid mater but are not enclosed
within the pia mater that covers the spinal cord.
23. Where is the cerebral spinal fluid found?
A. Between the pia mater and the brain
B. Between the dura mater and the arachnoid mater
C. Between the dura mater and the pia mater
D. Between the arachnoid mater and the brain
Answer is D: CSF is located in the sub-arachnoid space and within the brain.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
366 14 Nervous System

24. Which of the following substances CANNOT cross the blood-brain barrier?
A. metabolic wastes, toxins, K+
B. O2, CO2 and H2O
C. fats, fatty acids, fat soluble substances
D. alcohol, nicotine, anaesthetics
Answer is A: The BBB protects the brain from these substances. The sub-
stances in the other choices can all cross the BBB.
25. What part of the brain contains the midbrain, the pons and the medulla
oblongata?
A. the diencephalon
B. the cerebrum
C. the cerebellum
D. the brainstem
Answer is D: The brainstem consists of the midbrain, the pons and the medulla
oblongata
26. Which of the following statements is INCORRECT?
A. The pituitary gland dangles from the hypothalamus by the infundibulum
B. The post-central gyrus houses the primary motor cortex
C. The thalamus surrounds the third ventricle
D. White matter consists of myelinated axons of neurons
Answer is B: The post-central gyrus houses the primary sensory cortex (not
motor)
27. What is true about the spino-thalamic tract?
A. it is a descending pathway that carries sensory information
B. it is a descending pathway that carries motor instructions
C. it is an ascending pathway that carries sensory information
D. it is an ascending pathway that carries motor instructions
Answer is C: It is ascending – going from spine to thalamus – and ascending
tracts carry sensory information to the brain.
28. What is linked to the posterior gray horn of the spinal cord?
A. the dorsal root of the spinal nerve that carries motor fibres
B. the dorsal root of the spinal nerve that carries sensory fibres
C. the ventral root of the spinal nerve that carries sensory fibres
D. the ventral root of the spinal nerve that carries motor fibres
Answer is B: Posterior means dorsal. The dorsal root carries axons of sensory
neurons.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.2 Brain and Spinal Cord Anatomy 367

29. What is the blood-brain barrier?

A. It is the inner two meninges that surround the brain.
B. It is formed by the capillaries of choroid plexus and ependymal cells.
C. It is the endothelial cells of capillaries that supply the brain, and their
astrocytes.
D. It is the cerebrospinal fluid that bathes the brain.
Answer is C: The BBB is the endothelial cells of the capillaries (which are
joined by tight junctions), their basement membrane and the enveloping astro-
cytic feet of the astrocytes (one of the cell types called neuroglia).
30. What part of the brain is known as the cerebrum?
A. it is that part of the diencephalon that surrounds the third ventricle.
B. it makes up the majority of the brain stem
C. the superficial part consisting of sulci and gyri
D. the dorsal inferior part adjacent to the occipital bone
Answer is C: The cerebrum is the cortex (the outer part) of the brain made up
of folds called gyri and sulci.
31. What and where is the pre-central gyrus?
A. It is the site of sensory function and is in the frontal lobe.
B. It is the site of sensory function and is in the parietal lobe.
C. It is the site of motor function and is in the frontal lobe.
D. It is the site of motor function and is in the parietal lobe.
Answer is C: The pre-central gyrus of the frontal lobe is the primary motor
area.
32. What part of the brain receives sensory input before passing it on to another
part of the brain for interpretation or action?
A. pons
B. hypothalamus
C. post-central gyrus
D. thalamus
Answer is D: The thalamus relays visual & auditory information
33. What part of the brain contains the autonomic control centre whose orders
reg- ulate food intake, water balance and body temperature?
A. hypothalamus
B. thalamus
C. medulla oblongata
D. cerebellum
Answer is A: These homeostatic roles are performed by the hypothalamus.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
368 14 Nervous System

34. What are the “ascending tracts” of the spinal cord and what do they do?
A. They are white matter and they transmit sensory information to the brain.
B. They are gray matter and they transmit sensory information to the brain.
C. They are white matter and they transmit motor information to the brain.
D. They are gray matter and they transmit motor information to the brain.
Answer is A: Tracts means white matter as axons are myelinated which
makes them look white. Ascending means that the nerve impulses are going
from body to brain, that is they are carrying sensory input to the brain.
35. In what part of the brain is the “decussation of the pyramids” found
A. pons
B. medulla oblongata
C. midbrain
D. hypothalamus
Answer is B: The medulla oblongata is where the pyramidal tracts crossover
(decussate).
36. What is the likely result of an injury that severs the spinal cord between C5
and C6?
A. respiratory failure and death.
B. paraplegia
C. hemiplegia
D. quadriplegia
Answer is D: Spinal nerves below the break cannot pass on impulses from the
brain. So quadriplegia results because the spinal nerves that innervate the
limbs leave the spinal cord below the level of the spinal cord break (except for
some brachial nerves that leave at C5). Fortunately, the phrenic nerve, which
inner- vates the diaphragm, leaves the spinal cord at C3, C4 and C5 so will
still carry impulses from the brain. So breathing will continue.
37. To what does the “blood-brain barrier” refer?
A. the three meninges that surround the brain and spinal cord.
B. the tight junctions between endothelial cells of the capillaries that serve
the brain.
C. the structures that prevent fat-soluble molecules from entering the brain
from the blood.
D. the structure that produces cerebrospinal fluid from blood.
Answer is B: This answer is not a complete description of the BBB as it does
not include astrocytes, but it is the best of the four choices.
38. What functions are controlled from the pre-central gyrus of the frontal lobe?
A. automatic visceral functions
B. conscious perception of many sensory inputs

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.2 Brain and Spinal Cord Anatomy 369

C. subconscious timing and co-ordination of skeletal muscle.

D. voluntary control of skeletal muscle
Answer is D: The pre-central gyrus is the primary motor area of the brain.
39. What is the primary function of the cerebellum?
A. it regulates such things as body temperature, water balance and emotional
responses
B. it refines/adjusts learned motor movements so that they are performed
smoothly.
C. it controls our automatic functions such as breathing, digestion and cardio-
vascular functions
D. it is the origin of our conscious thoughts and intellectual functions
Answer is B: Cerebellum subconsciously provides precise timing and
appropri- ate patterns of learned skilled skeletal muscle contraction for
smooth coordi- nated movements, posture & agility.
40. What do the descending tracts of the spinal cord contain?
A. white matter and transmit sensory information
B. white matter and transmit motor commands
C. gray matter and transmit sensory information
D. gray matter and transmit motor commands
Answer is B: Tracts refers to axons which are encased in myelin which makes
them look white. Descending refers to impulses that carry information from
the brain to the body (motor commands) usually to muscle.
41. Which of the following lists all of the main sections of the brain?
A. cerebrum, brainstem, midbrain, medulla oblongata
B. cerebrum, cerebral cortex, cerebellum, mesencephalon
C. cerebellum, diencephalon, brainstem, cerebrum
D. cerebral cortex, midbrain, diencephalon, cerebellum
Answer is C: Apart from the two “cere” (cerebrum & cerebellum), diencepha-
lon and brainstem must be included.
42. One of the following is not a meninge. Which one?
A. Pia mater
B. Alma mater
C. Arachnoid mater
D. Dura mater
Answer is B: Alma mater is the university that you attended.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
370 14 Nervous System

43. Where is that part of the brain that allows us to consciously control voluntary
muscle movements located?
A. post-central gyrus of parietal lobe
B. pre-motor cortex of frontal lobe
C. pre-central gyrus of the frontal lobe
D. arbour vitae of the cerebellum
Answer is C: The “pre-motor cortex” in fact lies just anterior to the pre-
central gyrus, which is the primary motor area. Your premotor cortex allows
you make choices about which movement is appropriate.
44. What part of the brain subconsciously provides the appropriate pattern of
smooth co-ordinated skeletal muscle contraction for movements that we have
learned?
A. the cerebellum
B. the brainstem
C. the cerebrum
D. the diencephalon
Answer is A: Subconscious coordination of learned (and practised)
movements is done by the cerebellum.
45. In what respect does “gray matter” differ from “white matter”
A. gray matter refers to the CNS while white matter refers to the PNS.
B. white matter makes up the autonomic nervous system, gray matter does not.
C. gray matter is found in the cerebrum, while white matter occurs in the cer-
ebellum and the diencephalon.
D. gray matter contains the cell bodies of nerve cells white matter contains
axons.
Answer is D: The myelin that surrounds the axons of neurons gives them a
white appearance.
46. Which of the following is NOT a meninge?
A. cerebra mater
B. pia mater
C. dura mater
D. arachnoid mater
Answer is A: This choice is nonsense.
47. What is the most superficial part of the brain called?
A. diencephalon
B. cerebral cortex
C. cerebellum
D. mesencephalon

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.2 Brain and Spinal Cord Anatomy 371

Answer is B: Each hemisphere has a superficial layer of “gray matter” called

the cerebral cortex, lying over “white matter”.
48. What do neurones in the pre-central gyrus do?
A. they receive information from general sense receptors in muscle and skin
B. they communicate with motor, sensory and multi-modal association areas
C. they allow conscious control of skilled voluntary muscle movements
D. they process and relay auditory and visual input
Answer is C: The pre-central gyrus is the primary motor area. It allows con-
scious control over skeletal muscle movement.
49. What is the role of the hypothalamus?
A. it receives sensory input and relays it to the cerebral cortex
B. it is the autonomic control centre which directs the function of the lower
CNS
C. it uses past experience to analyse and act on sensory input
D. it integrates sensory information from association areas and performs
abstract intellectual functions
Answer is B: Hypothalamus is the main visceral control centre of body
homeo- stasis. It is the autonomic control centre from which orders flow to
lower CNS centres for execution.
50. With respect to the spinal cord, where is the epidural space?
A. external to the dura mater
B. between the arachnoid and pia maters
C. between the arachnoid and dura maters
D. between the two layers of the dura
Answer is A: The epidural space is above or on top of the dura and external to
the spinal cord. It is between the spinal cord and the surrounding vertebrae.
51. Which part of the brain controls breathing, heart function, vasoconstriction
and swallowing?
A. mesencephalon
B. cerebellum
C. diencephalon
D. brainstem
Answer is D: Centres in brainstem produce the rigidly programmed,
automatic behaviours necessary for survival e.g. respiratory centre (breathing
rhythm), cardiovascular centre (force & rate of heart contraction,
vasoconstriction), vomiting, coughing, hiccoughing, swallowing). The
mesencephalon is part of the brainstem.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
372 14 Nervous System

52. An image of the cross-section of a spinal cord would show “anterior (or
ventral) horns”. What is in that region?
A. spinal nerves
B. ascending tracts
C. cell bodies of motor neurons
D. white matter
Answer is C: the “horns” contain gray matter which is the cell bodies of
motor neurons. The dorsal horns contain sensory nuclei (cell bodies of
neurons)
53. The blood brain barrier functions to protect the brain from
A. lipid soluble drugs, alcohol and nicotine
B. fluctuations in oxygen and carbon dioxide concentrations
C. neurotransmitters, bacteria and neurotoxins
D. dehydration and fluctuating blood glucose level
Answer is C: These substances would alter the function of, or damage the
brain. Glucose, oxygen, carbon dioxide, ethyl alcohol and nicotine can cross
the BBB easily.
54. The precentral gyrus is the area of brain which houses
A. the primary motor cortex
B. our association areas
C. the primary somatosensory area
D. our higher intellectual functions
Answer is A: This gyrus (outfold) is immediately anterior to the central sulcus
(infold).
55. In the spinal cord, the ascending tracts contain
A. white matter and transmit sensory information
B. white matter and transmit motor commands
C. gray matter and transmit sensory information
D. gray matter and transmit motor commands
Answer is A: The term “ascending” means travelling upwards to the brain.
Hence this must be sensory information from the body. The tracts are white as
they are myelinated which gives the nerves a white appearance.
56. What is found between the arachnoid and pia mater?
A. adipose tissue
B. venous sinuses
C. choroid plexus
D. cerebrospinal fluid
Answer is D: Between the arachnoid and pia mater is the sub-arachnoid space
and this is filled with cerebrospinal fluid.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.2 Brain and Spinal Cord Anatomy 373

57. What is found in the epidural space?

A. adipose tissue
B. venous sinuses
C. choroid plexus
D. cerebrospinal fluid
Answer is A: The epidural space is on top of (or outside of) the dura mater. It
is the space between the spinal cord and the vertebrae. It contains adipose
tissue.
58. One of the functions of the prefrontal cortex is:
A. making conscious decisions
B. controlling motor functions
C. detecting and integrating sensory information
D. enabling word recognition
Answer is A: The pre-frontal cortex (of frontal lobe) performs abstract intel-
lectual functions such as predicting the consequences of actions or events.
Hence it helps us make conscious decisions.
59. What does the term ‘decussation’ mean and where does it occur?
A. decussation = span. It occurs between the superior part of the brain and the
inferior
B. decussation = cross. It occurs between the anterior part of the brain and
the posterior
C. decussation = cross over. It occurs between the pons and the spinal cord
D. decussation = associate. It occurs between the sensory area and the
sensory association area
Answer is C: A decussation is a crossing over. Nerves from the left side of the
brain cross over to the right side of the spinal cord to innervate the right hand
side of the body (and vice versa)
60. The central sulcus separates gyri involved with which two major functions?
A. vision and taste
B. vision and hearing
C. motor and sensory
D. emotion and memory
Answer is C: Motor function resides in the pre-central gyrus, while sensory
function resides in the post-central gyrus.
61. What type of nerves are found in the dorsal root?
A. only afferent nerves
B. only efferent nerves

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
374 14 Nervous System

C. both afferent and efferent nerves

D. only ganglionic nerves
Answer is A: Afferent (or sensory) nerves/neurons are in the dorsal root of the
spinal nerves.
62. In a cross-section view of the spinal cord, there is a butterfly-shaped structure.
What would the posterior gray horn of this structure primarily consist of?
A. the axons of motor neurons
B. the cell bodies of interneurons
C. the cell bodies of motor neurons
D. the cell bodies of sensory neurons
Answer is B: .The posterior (or dorsal) gray horn contains interneurons that
receive stimuli from sensory axons (whose cell bodies reside in the dorsal root
ganglion).
63. An epidural block involves injecting anaesthetic into the epidural space. What
is the main reason for this?
A. Anaesthetic in this space only affects spinal nerves in the immediate vicin-
ity of the injection.
B. The anaesthetic will be readily distributed along the spinal cord by the
cere- bral spinal fluid from this space.
C. There is less chance of damaging the spinal cord when inserting the needle
into this space.
D. The epidural space is highly vascularised and so will the anaesthetic will
be quickly absorbed.
Answer is A: The epidural space contains adipose tissue and spinal nerves
pass through this space. Injecting anaesthetic into this space anaesthetises
(blocks), the nearby spinal nerves.
64. The central sulcus of the brain lies between which two lobes?
A. parietal and occipital
B. temporal and occipital
C. frontal and temporal
D. frontal and parietal
Answer is D: The central sulcus separates the frontal lobe from the left and
right parietal lobes.
65. If a person suffers a stroke and damage occurs to the occipital lobe of the
brain which function is the most likely to be affected?
A. the ability to write
B. speech
C. hearing
D. vision

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.2 Brain and Spinal Cord Anatomy 375

Answer is D: The occipital lobe contains the visual cortex (processes visual
information) and the visual association area (interpretation of images). Hence
damage to the occipital lobe would affect vision.
66. If a person had a pre-frontal lobotomy what would be the physiological
consequences?
A. Movement would be impaired
B. Sensory function would be impaired
C. The ability to assess the consequence of actions would be impaired
D. Speech would be impaired
Answer is C: If the connection between the pre-frontal cortex and the brain is
severed, the person would not have anxiety, tension or frustration, or tact and
decorum. They would be unaware of the consequences of their actions.
67. What is the function of the thalamus?
A. connects two cerebral hemispheres
B. connects cerebellum to midbrain
C. connects areas within same hemisphere
D. it is a relay centre
Answer is D: The thalamus is about 13 “nuclei” that receive then distribute
(that is, relays) sensory information from the body to the cerebral cortex and
basal nuclei.
68. What is the function of the corpus callosum?
A. connects two cerebral hemispheres
B. connects cerebellum to midbrain
C. connects areas within same hemisphere
D. it is a relay centre
Answer is A: Commissural fibres pass through the corpus callosum that con-
nect corresponding areas in the 2 hemispheres
69. Which one of the following is NOT a function of the cerebral spinal fluid?
A. to produce hormones
B. to transport nutrients around the brain
C. to protect the spinal cord
D. to cushion the brain
Answer is A: The CSF does not produce hormones.
70. Which best describes the function of the association area of the temporal lobe?
A. It perceives of movement
B. It interprets the meaning of sound patterns
C. It recognises of geometric shapes and faces
D. It perceives meaningful information from different senses

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
376 14 Nervous System

Answer is B: The temporal lobe contains the auditory cortex. It interprets

sound from the hearing mechanism in the adjacent ears.
71. What is the blood-brain barrier? An adaptation of the capillaries serving the
brain that:
A. prevents fat-soluble molecules from entering the brain.
B. inhibits all substances from passing from the blood stream into the brain
C. selectively inhibits many substances from passing from the blood stream
into the brain
D. operates from birth to prevent foreign molecules entering the brain.
Answer is C: The BBB is a selectively permeable barrier to many water
soluble particles that is incomplete at birth.
72. What is the purpose of inserting a needle into the epidural space? It:
A. Allows access to the cerebro-spinal fluid
B. Enables the cerebro-spinal fluid pressure to be measured
C. Enables permanent drainage of cerebro-spinal fluid to treat hydrocephalus
D. Allows access to administer analgesia and anaesthesia
Answer is D: The epidural space is on the outside of the spinal cord, hence
does not contain CSF. It is into this space that the analgesia for a spinal block
is injected.
73. Which of the following statements about the blood-brain barrier is TRUE? It
A. consists of the meninges which surround the brain
B. is a protective mechanism which limits entry of alcohol into the brain
C. is poorly developed in the newborn who are therefore less sensitive to
drugs which act on the brain
D. is unable to prevent entry of lipid-soluble toxins into the brain
Answer is D: The BBB does not prevent lipid-soluble toxins, such as alcohol
and nicotine, from entering the brain.
74. Spinal nerves are formed from a dorsal root and a ventral root. What is true of
the ventral root?
A. they contain sensory neurons carrying afferent impulses
B. they contain sensory neurons carrying efferent impulses
C. they contain motor neurons carrying afferent impulses
D. they contain motor neurons carrying efferent impulses
Answer is D: The ventral root contains axons of motor neurons. That is, they
carry motor information from the brain to the body – this is efferent
(outgoing) information.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.3 Autonomic System, Neurotransmitters, Reflexes 377

14.3 Autonomic System, Neurotransmitters, Reflexes

The autonomic nervous system is not under our conscious control. It stimulates
cardiac muscle, smooth muscle, the diaphragm and both exocrine and endocrine
glands. Hence it controls heart rate, vasodilation, blood pressure, body
temperature, respiration rate, digestive motility, and aspects of urinary function,
reproductive function and endocrine function. The ANS has two divisions: the
“sympathetic” division (SD) which mobilises body during exercise, excitement,
and emergency situations; and the “parasympathetic” division (PSD) which
maintains body activi- ties e.g. digestion, defecation, diuresis and conserves
energy. Some organs are innervated by both divisions.
SD nerve fibres emerge from the spinal cord at the thoracic and lumbar
vertebrae, hence the SD is known as a “thoraco-lumbar” system. PSD fibres
emerge from the brain and sacral spinal cord, hence the PSD is known as a
“cranio-sacral” system. The vagus nerve (cranial nerve X) carries 90 % of PSD
impulses. Acetylcholine is a neurotransmitter released by the axon terminals of all
PSD neurons. It binds to five types of receptors: one nicotinic and four muscarinic
(M1, M2, M3, M4). Norepinephrine is a neurotransmitter released by the axon
terminals of most SD post-ganglionic fibres (find out what this means). It binds to
five types of receptor:
α1, α2, β1, β2, β3. It is the type of receptor (not the neurotransmitter molecule) that
determines whether the post-synaptic cell responds by being stimulated or being
inhibited.
Reflexes are also not under our conscious control despite skeletal muscles
being the source of many of the movements. This is because (for spinal reflexes)
the sen- sory neuron carrying the afferent impulse synapses directly with a motor
neuron(s) in the spinal cord that carries the efferent impulse to the responding
muscles. An interpretation by the brain is not involved.
1. Which of the following sends sensory information to the brain?
A. The afferent division of the peripheral nervous system.
B. The efferent division of the peripheral nervous system.
C. The somatic nervous system.
D. The autonomic nervous system.
Answer is A: Afferent means “incoming”. Incoming information travels from
the body’s sensors to the brain carrying sensory information.
2. What part of the nervous system prepares the body for action during extreme
situations?
A. the limbic system
B. the sympathetic division
C. the efferent system
D. the parasympathetic division

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
378 14 Nervous System

Answer is B: The sympathetic division (of the autonomic nervous system)

“stirs you up”. It prepares for action, those body organs that will be required
for rapid and vigorous activity.
3. To what does the following description apply? “An unlearned and involuntary
but predictable motor response to a stimulus, that is rapid and does not
involve any processing by the brain.”
A. spinal reflex
B. autonomic reflex
C. cranial reflex
D. learned reflex
Answer is A: Spinal reflexes happen without the involvement of conscious or
unconscious decision-making by the brain.
4. Which statement about the sympathetic and/or parasympathetic divisions is
correct?
A. All sympathetic neurons release ACh as a neurotransmitter.
B. Sympathetic division fibres emerge from brain & sacral spinal cord.
C. Parasympathetic division stimulates adrenal gland to release norepineph-
rine & epinephrine.
D. Some organs are innervated by both sympathetic division and parasympa-
thetic division.
Answer is D: Indeed, some organs (e.g. heart) are innervated by both
divisions. In choices A, B, replace “sympathetic” with parasympathetic, and
in choice C replace “parasympathetic” with sympathetic, to get a true
statement.
5. Which one of the following parts of the nervous system carries impulses
towards the brain?
A. peripheral nervous system
B. somatic nervous system
C. autonomic nervous system
D. parasympathetic division
Answer is A: The peripheral NS delivers sensory information to CNS as well
as carrying motor commands from CNS to peripheral tissues. The somatic NS
is part of the efferent division (carrying impulses away from the brain) of the
peripheral NS. The autonomic (and parasympathetic division) carry efferent
impulses.
6. Which statement about efferent impulses in the spinal cord is correct?
A. They travel along the spino-thalamic and spino-cerebellar tracts.
B. They pass along tracts that are located in the gray matter of the spinal cord.
C. The nerve cells that they travel through have their cell bodies located in
the dorsal root ganglia.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.3 Autonomic System, Neurotransmitters, Reflexes 379

D. The axons carrying these impulses pass through the ventral root of the spi-
nal nerves.
Answer is D: Efferent impulses are motor impulses so leave the spinal cord
via the ventral roots. “Spino-thalamic” means from spine to thalamus, i.e.
ascend- ing or sensory. Tracts are white matter not gray. Sensory neurons
have their cell bodies in the dorsal root ganglia.
7. What statement is true about spinal reflexes?
A. They cannot be inhibited or reinforced by the brain.
B. They do not involve processing by the brain.
C. They involve processing by the brainstem.
D. They are all simple monosynaptic pathways.
Answer is B: A spinal reflex does not involve processing by the brain.
However they can be inhibited or reinforced by the brain. Some are
polysynaptic.
8. One of the statements below about the autonomic nervous system is correct.
Which one?
A. The sympathetic division of the autonomic nervous system is part of the
somatic nervous system.
B. The parasympathetic division contains the neurons responsible for spinal
reflexes.
C. The sympathetic division prepares the body for vigorous exercise, or
emer- gency situations.
D. The parasympathetic division uses nerves that emerge from the spinal cord
between the T1 and L2 vertebrae.
Answer is C: The sympathetic division “stirs you up”. The ANS and somatic
NS are distinct parts of the efferent section of the peripheral nervous system.
The parasympathetic division is “cranio-sacral” not “thoraco-lumbar”.
9. The nervous system is divided into two divisions. What are they called?
A. somatic and autonomic
B. central and peripheral
C. afferent and efferent
D. sympathetic and parasympathetic
Answer is B: The central nervous system and the peripheral nervous system
are the two divisions.
10. What do “sympathetic” and “parasympathetic” divisions refer to?
A. the central nervous system
B. the efferent neurons of the peripheral nervous system
C. the autonomic nervous system
D. the somatic nervous system

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
380 14 Nervous System

Answer is C: The autonomic NS, which in turn is one part (the somatic NS is
the other part) of the efferent division of the peripheral NS.
11. Which of the following neural pathways or tracts carry sensory information?
A. cortico-bulbar tracts
B. spino-thalamic tracts
C. cortico-spinal tracts
D. reticulo-spinal tracts
Answer is B: The first part of the name tells you from where the pathway
com- mences: “spino-”, the second part tells you where the information is
going: “thalamic”. If information is going from spinal cord to thalamus (in the
brain) it MUST be carrying sensory information.
12. Nerve impulses carried by the parasympathetic division travel along which
nerve fibres?
A. cranial nerves I and II
B. the spino-cerebellar pathway
C. the spinal nerves
D. the vagus nerves
Answer is D: 90 % of parasympathetic impulses are carried by the vagus
nerves (cranial nerve X)
13. A motor pathway in the autonomic nervous system consists of two neurons.
Where does the second neuron start and finish?
A. starts in the CNS and runs to the effector organ
B. starts in a ganglion and runs to the CNS
C. starts in a ganglion and runs to the effector organ
D. starts in the CNS and runs to a ganglion
Answer is C: The second neuron runs from ganglion to effector. The first neu-
ron runs from the CNS to a ganglion, then synapses with the cell body of neu-
ron #2.
14. Which of the following is true of parasympathetic neurons?
A. they emerge from the thoracic and lumbar vertebrae
B. they all release ACh as a neurotransmitter
C. they all release NE as a neurotransmitter
D. they have short pre-ganglionic fibres and long post-ganglionic fibres
Answer is B: All parasympathetic neurons release ACh as a neurotransmitter.
Choices A & D are true of the sympathetic division.
15. Adrenergic receptors are so named because they:
A. are located in the adrenal glands
B. bind epinephrine and norepinephrine

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.3 Autonomic System, Neurotransmitters, Reflexes 381

C. are located in the kidneys

D. bind acetylcholine
Answer is B: Adrenergic receptors bind adrenalin (& noradrenalin) which is
another name for epinephrine (& norepinephrine).
16. What is the purpose of a neurotransmitter?
A. To pass a nerve impulse along a nerve cell axon
B. To pass a nerve impulse onto another cell
C. To pass a nerve impulse onto a muscle cell
D. To pass a nerve impulse onto another nerve cell
Answer is B: Choices C & D are also correct, but B is the more general answer.
17. What innervates the diaphragm?
A. The spinal nerves from T6 to T12
B. The vagus nerve
C. The phrenic nerve
D. The sciatic nerve
Answer is C: The phrenic nerve, which originates from spinal nerves leaving
the spinal cord at C3, C4 and C5.
18. Consider the following pairs of terms. Which pair has a term that refers to a
part of the nervous system that carries sensory information to the brain, and a
term that refers to a part that carries motor commands to the peripheral
tissues?
A. parasympathetic division; sympathetic division
B. somatic nervous system; autonomic nervous system
C. afferent division; efferent division
D. central nervous system; peripheral nervous system
Answer is C: Afferent division carries sensory info to the brain, while efferent
refers to motor info leaving the brain.
19. Which statement about the neurotransmitter acetylcholine (ACh) is NOT
correct?
A. ACh is released by all autonomic nervous system pre-ganglionic fibres.
B. ACh is released by all sympathetic division post-ganglionic fibres.
C. ACh is released by all parasympathetic division post-ganglionic fibres.
D. ACh is released by all somatic division motor nerve fibres.
Answer is B: In fact norepinephrine (not ACh) is released by most ANS-SD
post-ganglionic fibres i.e. at 2nd synapse. Choices A, C & D are true.
20. Which organisational entity of the brain is divided into an afferent and an
effer- ent division?
A. the central nervous system
B. the peripheral nervous system

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
382 14 Nervous System

C. the somatic nervous system

D. the autonomic nervous system
Answer is B: The peripheral nervous system has afferent neurons that carry
sensory information to the brain and efferent neurons that carry motor
informa- tion from the brain to the body.
21. Which neurotransmitter do all motor neurons release at their synapses with
skeletal muscle cells?
A. ACh
B. ATP
C. GABA
D. norepinephrine
Answer is A: Motor neurons release acetylcholine.
22. Which muscle(s) are NOT controlled by the autonomic nervous system?
A. cardiac muscle
B. the diaphragm
C. skeletal muscle
D. smooth muscle
Answer is C: Skeletal muscle is under our conscious control and innervated
by the somatic nervous system, which is one part of the efferent division of
the peripheral nervous system.
23. Which type of receptor always produces stimulation of the post-synaptic cell
when bound by a neurotransmitter?
A. nicotinic
B. muscarinic
C. alpha adrenergic
D. beta adrenergic
Answer is A: Nicotinic receptors when bound by ACh are always stimulatory.
Muscarinic receptors may be stimulatory or inhibitory.
24. What is one effect that the sympathetic division of the autonomic nervous sys-
tem have?
A. increases gut motility and digestive secretions
B. causes bronchioles to constrict
C. decreases heart rate
D. stimulates sweating from sweat glands
Answer is D: The sympathetic division “stirs you up” to get ready for action.
The only choice consistent with vigorous activity is D.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.3 Autonomic System, Neurotransmitters, Reflexes 383

25. To what part of the nervous system does the somatic nervous system belong?
A. efferent, central nervous system
B. efferent, peripheral nervous system
C. afferent, peripheral nervous system
D. afferent, central nervous system
Answer is B: The somatic nervous system carries commands from the brain
(efferent impulses) to the muscles and glands – which are in the peripheries of
the body.
26. What is the parasympathetic division of the autonomic nervous system
respon- sible for?
A. rapid predictable motor responses without processing by the brain
B. conserving energy and maintaining body activities without conscious
brain control.
C. preparing the body for energetic activity without conscious brain control.
D. gathering sensory information from the viscera that is not interpreted by
the brain.
Answer is B: The parasympathetic division prepares body for “rest & repose”:
conserves energy and promotes non-emergency function.
27. The following receptors for neurotransmitters may be stimulatory or
inhibitory EXCEPT for one of them. Which One?
A. nicotinic receptors
B. muscarinic receptors
C. adrenergic alpha receptors
D. adrenergic beta receptors
Answer is A: Nicotinic acetylcholine receptors bind ACh and are always
stimulatory.
28. What do “sympathetic” and “parasympathetic” refer to? Divisions of:
A. the central nervous system
B. the efferent neurons of the peripheral nervous system
C. the autonomic nervous system
D. the somatic nervous system
Answer is C: The autonomic nervous system is comprised of the sympathetic
and the parasympathetic divisions.
29. What structure(s) does a neurotransmitter molecule cross?
A. synaptic cleft
B. synaptic cleft and the post-synaptic membrane
C. pre-synaptic membrane and the synaptic cleft
D. post-synaptic membrane

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
384 14 Nervous System

Answer is C: A neurotransmitter is released the synaptic knob of the pre-

synaptic neuron, so must get out of the neuron by crossing its plasma mem-
brane, the synaptic cleft, before lodging in the receptor on the post-synaptic
membrane.
30. What is a spinal reflex?
A. it involves rapid processing by the brain and a predictable response
B. it involves stimulation of a motor neurone by a sensory neurone without a
synapse
C. it is a rapid, predictable, learned and involuntary motor response
D. it is a predictable, unlearned and involuntary motor response
Answer is D: Brain processing is not involved but a synapse is. The response
is not learned.
31. A “post-ganglionic cholinergic fibre” refers to a neuron that
A. runs from CNS to a ganglion and releases noradrenaline
B. synapses with an effector cell and whose neurotransmitter stimulates alpha
and beta receptors.
C. runs from a ganglion to an effector cell and releases norepinephrine
D. synapses with an effector cell and releases acetylcholine (ACh)
Answer is D: A “post-ganglionic cholinergic fibre” runs from a ganglion to an
effector organ (so choice A is wrong) and releases ACh (so choice C is
wrong). Alpha and beta receptors are both adrenergic – that is bind with
epinephrine & norepinephrine (=adrenalin & noradrenalin), so choice B is
wrong.
32. Which part of the nervous system prepares you for vigorous activity (“to fight
or flee”)?
A. sympathetic
B. parasympathetic
C. somatic
D. autonomic
Answer is A: The sympathetic NS “stirs you up” for vigorous activity.
33. What is that part of the nervous system that carries commands to the skeletal
muscles called?
A. somatic nervous system
B. autonomic nervous system
C. central nervous system
D. sympathetic division
Answer is A: The somatic NS carries motor commands to the skeletal muscles
(our soma).

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.3 Autonomic System, Neurotransmitters, Reflexes 385

34. Which neurotransmitter do all motor neurons release at their synapses?

A. acetylcholine
B. norepinephrine
C. dopamine
D. adenosine triphosphate
Answer is A: All somatic motor neurons release acetylcholine at their
synapses with skeletal muscle fibres.
35. Which neurotransmitter is released by all parasympathetic neurons?
A. norepinephrine
B. acetylcholine
C. nicotine
D. muscarine
Answer is B: All parasympathetic neurons release ACh as a neurotransmitter.
Nicotine and muscarine are not produced by the body.
36. Which choice correctly ends the following sentence? The parasympathetic
divi- sion is part of the:
A. autonomic nervous system
B. somatic nervous system
C. afferent division of the peripheral nervous system
D. central nervous system
Answer is A: The parasympathetic division is part of the autonomic nervous
system.
37. What may accurately be said of the post-synaptic membrane?
A. It is attached to the transmitting axon
B. It has receptors for a neurotransmitter
C. It is before the synaptic cleft
D. It is part of a neurone
Answer is B: The post-synaptic membrane is stimulated by a
neurotransmitter, after it crosses the synaptic cleft, so has receptors for it. The
post-synaptic membrane may be part of a muscle cell.
38. Which statement about the vagus nerve is true?
A. it lies within the cerebrospinal tract
B. it arises from the pons
C. it has a sensory function in vision and olfaction
D. it carries parasympathetic motor impulses
Answer is D: The vagus nerve carries 90 % of parasympathetic motor
impulses. It arises mainly from the medulla oblongata.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
386 14 Nervous System

39. One thing that could NOT be correctly said of the sympathetic division is that:
A. it stimulates the adrenal gland to release adrenaline and noradrenaline
B. its fibres emerge from the spinal cord at the thoracic and lumbar vertebrae
C. it promotes the conservation of the body’s energy
D. it supplies the smooth muscle of blood vessels
Answer is C: The sympathetic division “stirs you up” rather than promoting
the conservation of energy.
40. Choose the true statement.
A. a spinal reflex does not involve processing in the brain
B. spinal reflexes are rapid predictable learned responses to stimuli
C. spinal reflexes are used to diagnose brain death
D. spinal reflexes are voluntary but unlearned
Answer is A: Spinal reflexes are not learned, nor used to diagnose brain death.
Spinal reflexes are not under voluntary control.
41. If the term “cholinergic” is applied, to a synapse what does it mean?
A. the target organs are innervated by the sympathetic nervous system
B. the receptors are nicotinic
C. the result is always stimulatory
D. acetylcholine is released at the synapse
Answer is D: Cholinergic (or adrenergic) refer to the neurotransmitter acetyl-
choline (or adrenaline/noradrenalin = epinephrine/norepinephrine) that is
released at the synapse
42. What determines the response of the post-synaptic cell to autonomic impulses?
A. the neurotransmitter that binds to the cell
B. the type of receptor on the cell
C. whether the innervation is sympathetic or parasympathetic
D. whether the fibre is pre-ganglionic or post-ganglionic
Answer is B: It is the type of receptor on the post-synaptic membrane (not the
neurotransmitter molecule) that determines how the post-synaptic cell
responds.
43. What is the nerve that that carries most of the parasympathetic signals?
A. phrenic
B. vagus
C. sciatic
D. trigeminal
Answer is B: the vagus nerves carry 90 % of the parasympathetic signals.
44. Which is an example of a cholinergic receptor?
A. nicotinic receptor
B. adrenergic receptor

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.3 Autonomic System, Neurotransmitters, Reflexes 387

C. alpha receptor
D. beta receptor
Answer is A: A nicotinic receptor binds acetylcholine so is called a “choliner-
gic” receptor
45. Which statement about neurotransmitters and/or receptors is correct?
A. all somatic motor neurons release ACh at their synapse.
B. noradrenalin is the major neurotransmitter of the parasympathetic division
C. nicotinic receptors when bound by ACh are always inhibitory
D. noradrenalin binds to nicotinic and muscarinic receptors
Answer is A: ACh is the major neurotransmitter of the PSD; nicotinic
receptors are always stimulatory; ACh binds to nicotinic and muscarinic
receptors.
46. The peripheral nervous system is divided into
A. sympathetic division and parasympathetic division
B. brain and spinal cord
C. somatic system and autonomic system
D. motor division and sensory division
Answer is D: The PNS comprises neurons that can transmit efferent motor
impulses and neurons that transmit afferent sensory impulses.
47. A neurotransmitter is a molecule that crosses the
A. synaptic cleft
B. synaptic cleft and the post-synaptic membrane
C. presynaptic membrane and the synaptic cleft
D. post-synaptic membrane
Answer is C: A neurotransmitter is released from within one neuron, crosses
the cleft to bind with the receptor in the membrane of the next cell.
48. What characterises a spinal reflex?
A. It involves rapid processing by the brain and a predictable response.
B. It is a predictable, unlearned and involuntary motor response.
C. It is a rapid, predictable, learned and involuntary motor response.
D. It involves stimulation of a motor neurone by a sensory neurone that origi-
nates within the CNS.
Answer is B: Peripheral stimulation produces an involuntary, unlearned pre-
dictable response that is not initiated from the brain.
49. When their neurotransmitter binds to them, which of the following receptors
is always stimulatory?
A. muscarinic
B. cholinergic

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
388 14 Nervous System

C. nicotinic
D. adrenergic
Answer is C: Nicotinic receptors when bound by ACh are always stimulatory.
50. Two ways that cells can communicate within the body are by synaptic
commu- nication or by endocrine communication. A difference between the
two is:
A. endocrine communication involves a chemical messenger whereas
synaptic communication does not.
B. the action caused by synaptic communication may persist for several
hours whereas that caused by endocrine communication persists for
several minutes.
C. endocrine communication controls cellular activities in distant tissues
whereas synaptic communication affects the adjacent cell.
D. synaptic communication occurs between adjacent cells whereas endocrine
communication occurs between cells of the same tissue.
Answer is C: A synapse is a communication between one cell and another
adja- cent cell, separated only by the synaptic cleft.
51. Which of the following is NOT indicative of the stimulation of the
parasympa- thetic system?
A. constriction of skeletal muscle blood vessels and vasodilation of renal
blood vessels
B. excitation of the blood flow to the kidneys and smooth muscles of the GI
tract
C. inhibition of heart rate and smooth muscles of the urinary bladder
D. excitation of the smooth muscles of the urinary bladder and GI tract
Answer is A: The parasympathetic division is not involved in vasoconstriction
or dilation of skeletal muscle blood vessels.
52. Sensory receptors convert stimuli into what?
A. neurotransmitters
B. action potentials
C. graded potentials
D. voltage-gated channels
Answer is C: When a neuron is stimulated by a sensory stimulus, a graded
potential is produced
53. What is the function of a spinal nerve?
A. transmit sensory information
B. transmit both sensory and motor information
C. connect sensory and motor neurons
D. transmit autonomic nervous system information

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.4 Special Senses (Eye & Ear) 389

Answer is B: Spinal nerves arise from the combination of a dorsal root that
car- ries sensory information, and a ventral root that carries motor
information.
54. Sensory receptors convert stimuli that are above threshold into what?
A. graded potentials
B. neurotransmitters
C. action potentials
D. motor activity in muscles
Answer is C: Graded potentials that are above the threshold, stimulate an
action potential.
55. What is the function of an efferent neuron?
A. transmit sensory information
B. transmit motor information
C. connect sensory and motor neurons
D. transmit both sensory and motor information
Answer is B: Efferent means “outgoing”. Outgoing information travels from
the brain to the body carrying motor information to an effector – a muscle or
gland.

14.4 Special Senses (Eye & Ear)

14.4.1 Eye

Light that strikes the cone cells of the fovea centralis of the macula lutea (of the
retina), first passes through the cornea, then the aqueous humor (in the anterior
chamber of the eye), the pupil (the central opening in the iris), the lens and
through the vitreous humor (in the posterior chamber). Both the cornea and the
lens refract (bend) the light that passes through them. However it is the elasticity
of the lens which allows its focal length to be changed, that brings light from any
viewed object, regardless of its distance from the eye, to a focus on the retina. This
focus- sing process is called accommodation. It is achieved by the donut shaped
ciliary muscle surrounding the lens and attached to it by the ciliary fibres. By
relaxing into a larger diameter hole the ciliary muscle pulls the ciliary fibres tight,
which stretches the biconvex lens to a thinner shape. This thinner shape has a
longer focal length which is suited to viewing objects that are distant from the eye.
With age, the lens loses elasticity and so does not ooze back to a more rounded
biconvex shape when the ciliary muscle contracts to form a smaller diameter hole,
so loosening the ciliary fibres. The more rounded shape is necessary to bring light
from nearby objects to focus on the retina. This means that people over about 50
years of age require reading glasses to be able to focus on nearby objects. That is,
to

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
390 14 Nervous System

read. The loss of lens elasticity and subsequent inability to focus on close objects
is called presbyopia.
Away from the fovea centralis, light striking the rod or cone cells of the retina
must first pass through the layer of ganglion cells and bipolar cells that transmit
the impulses generated by the rods and cones to the optic nerve. The axons of the
gan- glion and bipolar cells, as well as blood vessels gather together as the optic
nerve (cranial nerve II) to pass out of the eyeball at the optic disc. This area (the
blind spot) is insensitive to light as there are no rods or cones there. There are
three types of cone cells that are maximally sensitive to one of either red, green or
blue light (they are sensitive also to other wavelengths, just less so). Their
combined effect allows us to perceive colour. Rod cells are useful for seeing in
conditions where the intensity of light is low such as at night (scotopic
conditions), but are unable to distinguish colour.
1. Choose the correct statement about the eye:
A. Bipolar and ganglion cells occur in the retina except at the fovea.
B. Rod and cone cells occur in the retina except at the fovea.
C. Bipolar and ganglion cells occur in the choroid except at the optic disc
D. Rod and cone cells occur in the choroid except at the optic disc.
Answer is A: At the fovea the bipolar and ganglion cells don’t cover the cone
cells so light can strike the cones directly. Bipolar, ganglion, rod and cone
cells occur in the retina, not the choroid.
2. Which part of the retina has the greatest sensitivity to light?
A. the optic disc
B. macula lutea
C. the choroid
D. fovea centralis
Answer is D: The fovea centralis is at the centre of the macula lutea. The
optic disc is insensitive to light.
3. The deterioration of sight with age is known by which term?
A. protanopia
B. presbyopia
C. hyperopia
D. scotopia
Answer is B: “Presbys” means old (or elder): presbyopia = old age vision;
presbycusis = old age hearing.
4. What is the place where the blood vessels and nerve fibres come together and
leave the posterior chamber of the eye called?
A. macula lutea
B. optic disc

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.4 Special Senses (Eye & Ear) 391

C. fovea centralis
D. choroid
Answer is B: Optic disc is where no rods or cones exists as the nerves and
blood vessels pass out through the choroid and sclera here.
5. Accommodation refers to the eye’s ability to focus light from objects
whatever their distance from the eye. How is this achieved?
A. by altering the distance between the cornea and the eye’s lens
B. by altering the distance between the lens and the retina
C. by altering the shape of the eye’s lens
D. by altering the shape of the cornea
Answer is C: The eye lens is flexible. If stretched by the zonules, it adopts a
flattened and thin bi-convex shape, if it is allowed to recoil into its relaxed
more spherical shape, it can focus on objects very close to the eye (such as a
page of writing).
6. What does the ciliary muscle do when accommodation (focussing) in the eye
occurs?
A. It contracts and the tension on the ciliary fibres increases making the eye
lens less convex.
B. It relaxes and the tension on the ciliary fibres decreases allowing the eye
lens to become more convex.
C. It contracts and the pull of the ciliary fibres decreases allowing the lens to
become more convex.
D. It relaxes and the pull of the ciliary fibres increases to make the lens less
convex.
Answer is C: The ciliary muscle is doughnut-shaped with the lens in the
“hole” and attached to the muscle by ciliary fibres (zonules). When the ciliary
muscle contracts it moves towards the lens which allows the ciliary fibres to
reduce their tension so that the lens is stretched less. Hence it oozes to a more
rounded shape.
7. Which cells of the retina are responsible for detecting light in scotopic (i.e.
low light) conditions?
A. bipolar cells
B. rod cells
C. ganglion cells
D. cone cells
Answer is B: Rods and cones are the light sensitive cells. Rods are used for
viewing in low light (dim) or night-time conditions.
8. Accommodation refers to our ability to bring objects at any distance into
sharp visual focus by altering which of the following?

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
392 14 Nervous System

A. the distance between our eye and the object to be viewed

B. the curvature of our cornea
C. the curvature of the eye’s lens
D. the distance between the lens and retina
Answer is C: The eye’s lens is convex and flexible. So its degree of curvature
(convexity) and hence its “focal length” can be altered so that light from
objects at almost any distance can be made to come to a focus on the retina.
9. What is the purpose of the optic chiasma?
A. to allow images from each eye to cross over to the other side of the brain
prior to crossing back at the decussation of pyramids.
B. to allow fibres from the medial aspect of one eye to join fibres from the
lateral aspect of the other eye to form an optic tract.
C. to allow the fibres from the lateral aspect of each eye to come together as
an optic tract.
D. to allow light entering the left eye to be interpreted by the right hand side
of the occipital lobe (and vice versa).
Answer is B: The optic chiasma (crossing) allows the stimulation produced by
light striking the rods and cones on the medial aspect of one eye to cross over
to the other side of the brain to travel with the stimulation produced in the lat-
eral aspect of the other eye. Hence some information from each eye is inter-
preted together in each side of the occipital lobe. In this way, binocular vision
and the perception of distance is achieved.
10. What is presbyopia (old-age vision) due to?
A. the loss of elasticity of the lens of the eye
B. the change in the curvature of the cornea
C. the gradual loss of cone cells from the retina
D. the deviation from a spherical eye-ball shape with aging.
Answer is A: Presbyopia refers the progressive loss of the ability to focus on
nearby objects (e.g. books) after about age 45–50. It is due to the lens
becoming stiffer so being less able to ooze into the highly convex shape
required to bring light from nearby objects to focus on the retina.
11. In which region of the eye does the most detailed vision occur? The
A. fovea centralis
B. optic disc
C. macula lutea
D. ciliary body
Answer is A: The fovea centralis is at the centre of the macula lutea. The
optic disc is insensitive to light.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.4 Special Senses (Eye & Ear) 393

12. How does accommodation in the eye occur? When our ciliary muscle
A. contracts and the tension on the ciliary fibres increases allowing a rounder
lens
B. relaxes and the tension on the ciliary fibres decreases allowing a rounder
lens
C. relaxes and the pull of our ciliary fibres flattens the lens
D. contracts and the pull of our ciliary fibres flattens the lens
Answer is C: The ciliary muscle is doughnut-shaped with the lens in the
“hole” and attached to the muscle by ciliary fibres (zonules). When the ciliary
muscle relaxes it moves away from the lens (the diameter of the hole
increases) which causes the ciliary fibres to pull on the lens. This tension in
the fibres stretches and flattens the lens into a less convex shape.
13. What is the name of the structure that allows nerve fibres from the medial
aspect of each retina to join fibres from the lateral aspect of the retina of the
other eye?
A. optic chiasma
B. optic nerve
C. optic radiation
D. lateral geniculate body
Answer is A: The optic chiasma is where the fibres crossover.
14. What is the light sensitive cell in the retina that responds to colour called?
A. macula
B. macula lutea
C. cone
D. rod
Answer is C: Remember “c” for cone and “c” for colour. Rods are used for
conditions where the intensity of light is low (the conditions are “scotopic”,
for example at night).
15. People over 45 years of age eventually require reading glasses. This condition
(known as presbyopia) is the result of which of the following conditions?
A. the loss of elasticity in the lens
B. the development of cataracts in the lens
C. the decrease in the refractive index of the cornea
D. the degeneration of the cone cells of the retina.
Answer is A: The elastic lens loses some of its elasticity with age so is not
able to focus light from nearby objects such as books. Hence “reading”
glasses – which have convex lenses – become necessary.
16. Which of the following statements about the structure of the eye is
INCORRECT?
A. The retina converts light energy into electrical nerve impulses that are sent
to the brain.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
394 14 Nervous System

B. All detailed vision occurs in a very small area called the fovea centralis.
C. At the blind spot, nerve fibres of the ganglion cells come together and
leave the eye as the optic nerve.
D. The black pupil is a sphincter muscle under parasympathetic nerve
control.
Answer is D: The black pupil is the central hole in the pupillary muscles of
the iris through which light passes to strike the retina. It appears black as
normally no light exits the pupil.
17. What is meant by the term “accommodation” when referring to our vision? It
refers to the ability of our eye to:
A. alter the thickness of the lens to focus on objects whatever their distance
from us.
B. alter the amount of refraction occurring in the cornea.
C. alter the diameter of the pupil to cope with situations of different light
intensity.
D. use either rods or cones for vision depending on whether we are viewing
during daylight or at night.
Answer is A: Accommodation refers to the ability of our eye’s lens to alter its
shape – its thickness, or roundness or convexity – to enable it to bring light
from objects at any distance to a focus on the retina.
18. Choose the answer that correctly completes the sentence. The “lens” of the
human eye
A. is a biconcave lens.
B. produces more refraction than the cornea.
C. can have its focal length altered.
D. consists of rods and cones.
Answer is C: The lens, by having its degree of convexity altered, can have its
focal length changed. It is in fact biconvex.
19. Which statement about refraction of light in the human eye is correct?
A. Most of it occurs in the lens.
B. Its extent is governed by the size of the iris opening to the eye.
C. Most of it occurs as light enters the cornea from air.
D. The angle of incidence is equal to the angle of refraction.
Answer is C: The cornea is also a lens, hence light is refracted as it enters the
cornea from air. As the difference between air and corneal tissue is greater
than the difference between aqueous humor and the lens, more refraction
occurs in the cornea than in the “lens”.
20. The process of adjusting the eye’s lens to view objects at different distances
from the eye is called:

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.4 Special Senses (Eye & Ear) 395

A. accommodation.
B. presbyopia.
C. refraction.
D. hyperopia.
Answer is A: The eye can accommodate its lens to clearly see objects at any
distance from the eye.
21. Glaucoma is an eye disease which affects vision. It is caused by:
A. blockage of the flow of aqueous humor through the canal of Schlemm and
loss of intraocular pressure in the vitreous humor.
B. detachment of the retina and subsequent loss of vision in this part of the eye.
C. cataracts that form in the eye’s lens which prevent light from reaching the
retina.
D. increased intraocular pressure which collapses the blood capillaries that
perfuse the retina so part of it dies.
Answer is D: Glaucoma results from higher than healthy intraocular pressure
in the eyeball.
22. Which one of the following statements is INCORRECT?
A. A convex lens causes light rays to converge.
B. The fluid between the cornea and the eye’s lens is a lens.
C. The cornea is a lens.
D. The eye’s lens is a convex lens.
Answer is B: the fluid (aqueous humor) in the anterior chamber is not a lens.
23. In the human eye where does the greatest refraction occur?
A. in the lens of the eye.
B. at the retina.
C. as light passes from air into the cornea.
D. as light passes from the lens into the vitreous humor.
Answer is C: Most refraction occurs as light enters the cornea because the dif-
ference between the refractive index of air and that of the cornea is large.
24. In order to focus on objects that are very close to the eye, what must happen
to the human lens? It must:
A. increase its focal length
B. increase the amount of refraction it causes
C. be stretched to a thinner shape
D. decrease its dioptre value
Answer is B: Increasing the refraction of light will cause light rays from
nearby objects to deviate more from their original path and so become
focussed on the retina.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
396 14 Nervous System

25. When the human eye is accommodated to make the image of a distant object
focus on the retina, which of the following is true? The ciliary muscles are:
A. relaxed, the ciliary fibres are taut and the lens is nearly spherical.
B. contracted, the ciliary fibres are slack and the lens is nearly spherical
C. contracted, the ciliary fibres are slack and the lens is thin.
D. relaxed, the ciliary fibres are taut and the lens is thin.
Answer is D: To focus on a distant object the lens must be pulled into a thin
profile by the ciliary fibres being taut. This occurs when the ciliary muscles
recedes from the lens as it relaxes.
26. Myopia may be corrected with a lens that is
A. bifocal.
B. concave.
C. cylindrical.
D. convex.
Answer is B: In myopia (near-sightedness) close objects are in focus but
distant ones are not. It may be corrected by using a concave (diverging) lens.
27. The change in vision that occurs with ageing is called
A. protanopia.
B. hyperopia.
C. deuteranopia.
D. presbyopia.
Answer is D: “Presby-” means elderly or old. Choices A & C refer to forms of
“colour blindness”.
28. As part of the normal ageing process, our eyes deteriorate because
A. the ciliary muscles gradually lose their tone.
B. the lens loses its flexibility.
C. parts of the retina detach from the underlying blood vessels.
D. the distance between the lens and the retina gradually changes.
Answer is B: The lens needs to be elastic in order to become thin (to view dis-
tant objects) and to become thick (to view objects that are within one metre).
29. In which colour ranges do the three pigments in the retina have their major
sensitivities?
A. red, green and blue.
B. red, blue and yellow.
C. green, yellow and red.
D. green, yellow and blue.
Answer is A: Red cones are most sensitive to light with wavelength 560 nm,
green cones at 530 nm and blue cones at 420 nm.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.4 Special Senses (Eye & Ear) 397

30. the human eye is able to alter its focal length in a process called accommoda-
tion. Choose the best description of accommodation from the ones below.
When the ciliary muscle:
A. relaxes, the ciliary fibres are loosened and the eye lens is stretched into a
long focal length.
B. contracts, the ciliary fibres are pulled taut and the eye lens is stretched into
a long focal length.
C. relaxes, the ciliary fibres are pulled taut and the eye lens oozes into a short
focal length.
D. contracts, the ciliary fibres are loosened and the eye lens oozes into a long
focal length.
Answer is D: When the ciliary muscle contracts it forms a smaller diameter
circle around the lens causing the fibres that connect it to the lens to slacken,
which allows the elastic lens to recoil (ooze) intro a rounder shape. This has a
shorter focal length.

14.4.2 Ear

Adults can hear sounds with frequencies between about 60 Hz and 15,000 Hz.
However teenagers and children can hear frequencies beyond these values. Sound
is directed into the ear canal by the pinna (ear lobe) where the air pressure
variations cause the tympanic membrane to bow in and out. As the malleus rests
on the tym- panic membrane, this movement is passed onto the three connected
ossicles (mal- leus incus and stapes) that are contained in the middle ear. They
behave like a system of levers whose movement causes the stapes to vibrate
against part of the cochlea called the “oval window”. In this way, variations in air
pressure (i.e. sound waves) are transformed into vibrations of the liquid
(perilymph) with the cochlea. A physi- cist would say that the outer and inner ear
is an impedance matching device between air and endolymph. Without this
mechanism, sound waves would reflect from, rather than enter through, the oval
window.
The middle ear contains air whose pressure returns to atmospheric pressure
whenever the Eustachian tube is opened. This 3–4 cm long tube connecting the
mouth to the inner ear is usually squashed flat but is opened by yawning or
swallow- ing (etc.).
The inner ear contains the snail shaped organ called the cochlea – imagine a
long thin cylinder that has been coiled into a helix whose radius decreases. The
cylinder is divided into three longitudinal chambers (scalae) by the basilar
membrane and the vestibular membrane. Formed between these membranes is the
cochlear duct (or scala media) containing endolymph and the organ of Corti that
rests along the length of the basilar membrane. Above the scala media is the scala
vestibuli and below is the scala tympani. Both of these contain perilymph. When
the stapes pushes against the oval window, a wave of pressure moves through the
perilymph. This causes the

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
398 14 Nervous System

basilar membrane and organ of Corti to “rise and fall” which in turn causes the
hair cells of the organ of Corti to rub against the tectorial membrane that is located
just overhead. The hair cells are stimulated by this contact and pass on the
stimulus to a branch of the auditory nerve (cranial nerve VIII).
One decibel (dB) is a tenth of a bel. It is a unit of “level” and is the logarithm of
the ratio of two sounds – one being the reference sound, which for the case of
sound level measurement is “silence” (=0 dB). Silence does not mean that sound
energy is absent, rather it means that the human ear cannot hear it.
1. By which of the following pathways does sound entering the ear reach the
organ of Corti?
A. basilar membrane, middle ear, oval window, endolymph,
B. tympanic membrane, ossicles, oval window, cochlear fluid
C. tectorial membrane, Eustachian tube, ossicles, cochlear fluid
D. oval window, ear canal, auditory tube, endolymph
Answer is B: Sound impinges on the tympanic membrane first. The
Eustachian tube and the auditory tube are the same thing and do not conduct
sound – they connect the middle ear to the mouth.
2. Which part of the ear contains the apparatus that we use to distinguish
between different frequencies of sound?
A. The cochlea
B. The Eustachian (or auditory) tube
C. The tensor tympani
D. The auditory meatus
Answer is A: The cochlea contains the organ of Corti (the spiral organ) and its
basilar membrane.
3. What is the range of frequencies that the human ear is most sensitive to?
A. 50 Hz to 500 Hz
B. 12,000 Hz to 20,000 Hz
C. 500 Hz to 6000 Hz
D. 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz
Answer is C: “Most sensitive” means sounds loudest to us. Some people can
hear sound with frequency as low as 20 Hz or as high as 20,000 Hz, but the
sound will be very faint. Sounds with frequency between 500 and 6000 Hz
seem to be loudest to the human ear.
4. Which one of the following statements is WRONG?
A. the middle ear lies between the tympanic membrane and the oval and
round windows
B. the outer ear is vented by the Eustachian (or auditory) tube

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.4 Special Senses (Eye & Ear) 399

C. the stapes is located in the middle ear

D. the tectorial membrane and the basilar membrane are located in the inner
ear
Answer is B: The middle (not outer) ear is filled with air and is vented to the
mouth via the Eustachian tube.
5. The ossicles of the ear pass on sound vibrations to the fluid in the inner ear. In
what structure is this fluid located?
A. the organ of Corti
B. the cochlea
C. the Eustachian tube
D. the saccule and utricle
Answer is B: The cochlea contains the scala vestibuli and the scala tympani,
both of which are filled with perilymph. It also contains the cochlear duct
filled with endolymph.
6. Sound produces vibrations in the cochlear fluid of the inner ear. The
movement of the fluid then produces motion in which of the following?
A. tectorial membrane
B. basilar membrane
C. otolithic membrane
D. crista ampullaris
Answer is B: When the cochlear fluid moves it displaces the basilar
membrane which pushes the hair cells within the organ of Corti against the
tectorial membrane.
7. What is the function of the middle ear ossicles?
A. To protect the cochlea from excessively loud noises.
B. To increase the sound intensity by resonating for sounds of frequencies
near 3000 Hz
C. To amplify the sound intensity that reaches the tympanic membrane.
D. To cause the sound energy of waves in air to be transmitted into the
cochlear fluid
Answer is D: The ossicles are a mechanical lever system that are attached to
the tympanic membrane at one end and to the oval window at the other. They
trans- mit the movements in the tympanic membrane across the middle ear
and to the perilymph behind the oval “window”.
8. Sound waves are conducted from the air outside the ear to the inner ear by the
processes of:
A. absorption, transmission and refraction.
B. reflection, transmission and scattering.
C. resonance, leverage and amplification.
D. resonance, diffraction and refraction.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
400 14 Nervous System

Answer is C: The air in the external ear canal resonates (at about 3000 Hz),
the ossicles are a lever system that amplifies the movement of the tympanic
mem- brane, the oval window, being about one twentieth the size of the
tympanic membrane also amplifies the pressure applied to the cochlear fluid
compared to that applied to the tympanic membrane.
9. Sound level (measured in decibels, dB) is a subjective measure of the
loudness of a sound. A sound of 90 dB
A. will produce hearing damage if the ear is subjected to it chronically.
B. is beyond the normal audible frequency range of human hearing.
C. cannot be heard by the human ear even though it carries energy.
D. will be perceived to be the same loudness at all audible frequencies.
Answer is A: This sound pressure level (or perhaps even 85 dB) will produce
hearing damage with long term exposure. The decibel is not a statement about
frequency. 0 dB is the threshold of human hearing. Different frequencies if all
played at 90 dB would be perceived as different in loudness.
10. Of the following lists of four anatomical features, which one has them in the
correct order of the path taken by sound energy as it is transmitted through the
ear?
A. tectorial membrane, malleus, oval window, cochlear fluid.
B. tectorial membrane, incus, round window, organ of Corti.
C. tympanic membrane, malleus, oval window, cochlear fluid.
D. tympanic membrane, stapes, round window, organ of Corti.
Answer is C: The tympanic membrane (ear drum) is the first structure. The
ossicles pass on the vibrations to the oval (not round) window of the cochlea.
11. Which of the following is NOT a small bone involved in hearing?
A. Meatus
B. Malleus
C. Stapes
D. Incus
Answer is A: Meatus is a canal like tube. For example external acoustic
meatus (of the temporal bone), urethral meatus (of the penis), the nasal
meatus.
12. Which one of the following lists of anatomical features is in the correct order
of the path taken by sound energy as it is transmitted through the ear?
A. Tympanic membrane, malleus, oval window, cochlear fluid.
B. Basilar membrane, incus, round window, fluid of Corti.
C. Tympanic membrane, stapedius, round window, fluid of Corti.
D. Basilar membrane, malleus, oval window, cochlear fluid.
Answer is A: Tympanic membrane comes first. Then any of the ossicles, then
the oval window and cochlear fluid.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.4 Special Senses (Eye & Ear) 401

13. What is the function of the tensor tympani and stapedius muscles in the
middle ear?
A. To protect the tympanic membrane and ossicles from excessively loud
noises.
B. To increase sound intensity by resonating for sounds with frequencies near
3000 Hz.
C. To amplify the sound intensity that reaches the oval window.
D. To cause the sound energy of waves in air to be transmitted into the
cochlear fluid.
Answer is A: The tensor tympani limits the amount of movement in the tym-
panic membrane. The stapedius reduces the movement of the stapes against
the oval window.
14. The loudness of a sound wave as perceived by the human ear, depends on
which of the following pairs of wave properties?
A. speed and frequency.
B. intensity and frequency.
C. amplitude and phase.
D. speed and intensity.
Answer is B: Intensity and amplitude are related. Our ear perceives some fre-
quencies to be louder than others.
15. If the frequency of a sound wave is increased from 50 Hz to 3000 Hz, its
loud- ness also increases. This occurs because:
A. the ear is more sensitive to 3000 Hz than to 50 Hz.
B. sounds of higher frequency carry higher energy.
C. as frequency increases the sound intensity also increases.
D. loudness is proportional to frequency.
Answer is A: The ear as a hearing mechanism is able to better able to respond
(detect) frequencies near 3000 Hz, whereas frequencies near 50 Hz are almost
inaudible.
16. Our ears are most sensitive to sounds with frequencies that lie between about
3000 Hz and 3500 Hz. The reason for this is that
A. sounds with these frequencies have the largest decibel rating
B. the majority of human speech sounds are composed of frequencies that lie
in this range
C. the external ear canal has dimensions that allow it to resonate with a fre-
quency that is in this range
D. the largest part of the basilar membrane is receptive to this range of
frequencies

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
402 14 Nervous System

Answer is C: The ear canal is about 2.7 cm long and a tube of this length,
closed at one end, resonates at about 3000 Hz. (resonates means that a
“standing wave” is set up.)
17. What can be said about noise-induced hearing loss?
A. It affects sound frequencies near 4000 Hz most.
B. It is also called presbycusis.
C. It is likely to be caused by sounds above 65 dB.
D. It is due to otosclerosis.
Answer is A: The “notch” in someone’s measured audiogram at about 4000
Hz is characteristic of all noise-induced hearing loss.
18. For which condition is a hearing aid most successful at treating?
A. conductive hearing loss.
B. perceptive deafness.
C. nerve deafness.
D. sensorineural hearing loss.
Answer is A: Conductive loss is used to describe the situation where sound is
not conducted well to the inner ear, which is otherwise healthy. The other
three choices are different names for the same thing which is damage to the
cochlea or auditory nerve.
19. What is the purpose of the diaphragm on the bell of a stethoscope? To:
A. prevent external sounds from interfering with auscultation.
B. eliminate any air gap between the skin and stethoscope.
C. resonate with the sound being listened to.
D. transmit the body sounds to the earpieces.
Answer is C: The bell matches the impedance of the air and the skin by
resonat- ing with the sounds coming from the body.
20. Which structure lies on the boundary between the middle and inner ear and
has the stapes bound to it?
A. Ampulla
B. Oval window
C. Round window
D. Tympanic membrane
Answer is B: The stapes presses onto the oval window to transmit the
vibration of the tympanic membrane to the cochlear fluid.
21. Which membrane lies over the hair cells found in the organ of Corti?
A. Basilar
B. Tectorial

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
14.4 Special Senses (Eye & Ear) 403

C. Vestibular
D. Cochlear
Answer is B: The tectorial membrane lies over the hair cells of the organ of
Corti (which sits on the basilar membrane).
22. The inner ear (or internal ear) maybe described as a series of tubes. What are
the tubes filled with?
A. air
B. perilymph
C. endolymph
D. perilymph and endolymph
Answer is D: Both perilymph and endolymph are contained in the scalae of
the cochlea and the semicircular canals of the labyrinth. The middle ear
contains air
23. What are the cells found in the maculae of the utricle and saccule that are
responsible for our sense of equilibrium?
A. Supporting cells
B. Otoliths
C. Hair cells
D. Epithelial cells
Answer is C: The hairs (stereocilia) of the hair cells are stimulated when our
head tilts. Hair cells are embedded within the supporting cells. Otoliths are
not cells.
24. Which of the following auditory structures are filled with fluid?
A. The inner ear
B. The middle ear
C. The external meatus
D. the Eustachian tube
Answer is A: the cochlea and the three semi-circular canals of the inner ear
are filled with fluid.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
Chapter 15
Reproductive System

The purpose of sexual reproduction is to produce genetic variability in individuals.

That is, babies that will develop to be different from their mother and father and
from their siblings. This is achieved through the processes of gamete production
(meiosis) and the fusion of a sperm with an ovum. Males result when fertilisation
produces a zygote with an X and a Y chromosome, while a female results from a
zygote with two X chromosomes. The organs of the reproductive tract that are
pres- ent at birth are called the primary sex characteristics, and you should know
them. The physical features that develop after puberty are known as the secondary
sex characteristics.
In females, the hypothalamus releases GnRH, which causes the anterior
pituitary to release FSH (and LH). FSH acts on an ovary to stimulate
development of some primordial follicles. They produce estrogens which cause
the rate of production of GnRH to increase which in turn causes the anterior
pituitary to release LH. LH promotes the development of one follicle and causes
its ovum to be ovulated. This releases the ovum into the abdominal cavity from
where it enters the Fallopian tube in which it may be fertilised. The remnant
granulosa cells of the follicle develop into the corpus luteum which produces and
releases progesterone. Progesterone pre- pares the uterus (its endometrium
thickens) to receive a fertilised egg. The proges- terone also decreases the rate of
GnRH and FSH release so that additional primordial follicles aren’t stimulated to
continue their development. If pregnancy does not occur, the corpus luteum
deteriorates and estrogen and progesterone levels drop. This drop allows the rate
of GnRH release to increase and so the next cycle begins.
In males, the hypothalamus releases GnRH, which causes the anterior pituitary
to release FSH (and LH). LH stimulates the interstitial (Leydig) cells of testes to
produce testosterone. FSH stimulates the nurse (sustentacular / Sertoli) cells in tes-
tes which, in the presence of testosterone, promotes spermiogenesis. Sperm are
con- tinually produced in the seminiferous tubules and stored in the epididymis.
The vas (ductus) deferens transports sperm by peristaltic contractions to the
ejaculatory ducts. Here the sperm mix with semen from the seminal vesicles
(which capacitates them) and prostate fluid before being ejaculated through the
urethra.

© Springer Science+Business Media Singapore 2016 Physiology,

M. Caon, Examination Questions and Answers in Basic Anatomy and DOI
ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
10.1007/978-981-10-2332-3_15
405

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
406 15 Reproductive System

1. Where are the male ejaculatory ducts?

A. In the testicles before the epididymis.
B. In the penis.
C. Between the bulbourethral glands and the urethra.
D. At the end of the vas deferens (ductus deferens).
Answer is D: The ejaculatory ducts commence where the ducts of the seminal
glands join the vas deferens and end where the vas deferens join with the
urethra.
2. What is the function of luteinising hormone?
A. It stimulates the interstitial (Leydig) cells to produce testosterone.
B. It stimulates sustentacular (Sertoli) cells to produce sperm.
C. It stimulates the anterior pituitary to release follicle stimulating hormone.
D. It stimulates the ovary to develop follicles.
Answer is A: Luteinising hormone targets the interstitial cells of the testes
inducing them to secrete testosterone. (In women a surge in LH triggers the
completion of meiosis I, ovulation, and the formation of corpus luteum)
3. Which statement is true?
A. Males have two “X” chromosomes
B. Females do not produce any primordial follicles after they are born.
C. Females have one “X” chromosome
D. Fertilisation occurs in the pelvic cavity before the start of the fallopian tube.
Answer is B: Female babies are born with all of their primordial follicles
(about 2 million) paused at the prophase stage of meiosis I. Males are XY,
females are XX, not the reverse.
4. In which of the following lists are the structures of the male reproductive tract
listed in correct order from testes to urethra?
A. ejaculatory ducts, seminiferous tubules, epididymis, vas deferens.
B. seminiferous tubules, epididymis, vas deferens, ejaculatory ducts.
C. epididymis, ejaculatory ducts, seminiferous tubules, vas deferens.
D. vas deferens, seminiferous tubules, epididymis, ejaculatory ducts.
Answer is B: Seminiferous tubules are in the testes so should be before the
epididymis and vas deferens; ejaculatory ducts must be after the vas deferens.
5. One of the following is NOT a secondary sex characteristic. Which one?
A. the adult male body shape
B. the thicker vocal cords of a male
C. pubic hair
D. the penis
Answer is D: Secondary sex characteristics are those that develop after
puberty. That is, are not present at birth.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
15 Reproductive System 407

6. What does gonadotropin releasing hormone (GnRH) do?

A. stimulates the anterior pituitary to release LH.
B. stimulates the anterior pituitary to release both LH and FSH.
C. stimulates the anterior pituitary to release FSH.
D. stimulates the corpus luteum to release progesterone.
Answer is B: GnRH stimulates the ant pit to release both LH and FSH, which
are two gonadotropins. They act on the gonads and control gamete and sex
hormone production.
7. Where should fertilisation of the egg by a sperm occur?
A. in the cervix
B. in the uterus
C. in the Fallopian tube
D. in the abdominal cavity between ovary and Fallopian tube.
Answer is C: Fluid from the “peg” cells of Fallopian tube assist in the
capacita- tion of sperm allowing them to fertilise the egg.
8. Which of the following is/are NOT associated with the male reproductive
system?
A. estrogens
B. androgens
C. FSH and LH
D. the tunica vaginalis
Answer is A: Estrogens are female sex hormones. BTW, the tunica vaginalis is
the serous membrane around the scrotal cavity.
9. Which of the listed structures does the male reproductive tract pass through?
A. the prostate
B. the bulbourethral gland
C. the seminiferous vesicles
D. the bladder
Answer is A: The ducts from the seminal glands join with the vas deferens to
become the ejaculatory ducts and enter the prostate. There they both join the
urethra which then exits the prostate.
10. Where is the hormone progesterone produced?
A. by the thecal cells that surround the follicle
B. in the anterior pituitary
C. in the corpus luteum
D. by the developing follicle
Answer is C: The corpus luteum (which develops from the follicle after
ovula- tion) produces progesterone.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
408 15 Reproductive System

11. Below is a list of structures and (in brackets) a hormone that they might pro-
duce. Which list is correct?
A. hypothalamus (FSH); anterior pituitary (GnRH); follicle (estrogens); cor-
pus luteum (LH)
B. hypothalamus (GnRH); anterior pituitary (estradiol); follicle (LH); corpus
luteum (progesterone)
C. hypothalamus (estrogens); anterior pituitary (FSH); follicle
(progesterone); corpus luteum (estrogens)
D. hypothalamus (GnRH); anterior pituitary (FSH & LH); follicle
(estrogens); corpus luteum (progesterone)
Answer is D: The anterior pituitary produces and releases FSH & LH.
12. What is the name of the tube that carries sperm from the testes to the prostate
gland?
A. vas deferens
B. ejaculatory duct
C. seminiferous tubule
D. urethra
Answer is A: The vas deferens (=ductus deferens) begins at the epididymis
and ends at the ejaculatory duct in the prostate.
13. What effect does luteinising hormone have?
A. it stimulates the growth of a few follicles each month
B. stimulates ovulation and maintains the corpus luteum
C. it prepares the uterus for pregnancy
D. it establishes and maintains the secondary sex characteristics
Answer is B: Luteinising hormone stimulates ovulation and the formation of
the corpus luteum
14. How many chromosomes does a human gamete have?
A. 46
B. 46 pairs
C. 23
D. 23 pairs
Answer is C: A gamete (a sperm or egg) has 23 chromosomes, so the when
they fuse to form the fertilised egg, there is a total of 46 (=23 pairs)
15. Which of the following do the testes produce?
A. capacitated spermatozoa
B. about 60 % of the ejaculate
C. slightly acidic fluid.
D. physically mature spermatozoa
Answer is D: The sperm are physically mature when they enter the
epididymis, but need to be capacitated by fluid from the seminal glands and
the Fallopian

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
15 Reproductive System 409

tube’s peg cells. Most of the volume of the ejaculate comes from the seminal
glands.
16. What do the thecal cells that surround the follicle produce?
A. mucus
B. luteinising hormone
C. androgens
D. estrogens
Answer is C: The thecal cells produce androgens (androstenedione) which
dif- fuse to the granulosa cells which convert androgens to estrogens.
17. In the sequence of events known as the ovarian cycle, which of the following
does NOT occur?
A. the anterior pituitary releases FSH and LH
B. FSH stimulates a follicle to develop
C. the hypothalamus releases GnRH
D. the developing follicle produces progesterone
Answer is D: The corpus luteum (not the follicle) produces progesterone.
18. How do sperm cells differ from other cells in the male body?
A. they contain 23 chromosomes
B. they all contain an X chromosome
C. they all contain a Y chromosome
D. they undergo mitosis
Answer is A: Somatic cells contain 46 chromosomes, whereas a sperm cell has
23. It has either an X or a Y chromosome.
19. Where are the ejaculatory ducts?
A. in the testes
B. between the testes and the prostate
C. within the prostate
D. between the prostate and the external urethral meatus
Answer is C: Each ejaculatory duct is formed by the union of the vas deferens
with the duct of the seminal vesicle. They pass through the prostate, and open
into the urethra.
20. Where does fertilisation of the ovum normally occur?
A. in the cervical canal
B. in the ovary
C. in the uterus
D. in the Fallopian tube
Answer is D: The sperm meet the ovum in the ampulla of the Fallopian tube
(=uterine tube) where fertilisation takes place, facilitated by the secretions of
the peg cells.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
410 15 Reproductive System

21. What hormone is released by the corpus luteum in the greatest quantity?
A. progesterone
B. estrogens
C. luteinising hormone
D. follicle stimulating hormone
Answer is A: The corpus luteum releases progesterone which prepares the
uterus for pregnancy (and causes the number of peg cells to increase).
22. Which list of structures in the male reproductive tract has them in correct
sequence?
A. seminiferous tubules, epididymis, vas deferens, urethra, ejaculatory duct
B. epididymis, seminiferous tubules, vas deferens, ejaculatory duct, urethra
C. seminiferous tubules, epididymis, vas deferens, ejaculatory duct, urethra
D. epididymis, seminiferous tubules, vas deferens, urethra, ejaculatory duct
Answer is C: Seminiferous tubules must precede the epididymis; and the
ejacu- latory duct must precede the urethra.
23. Choose the correct statement about LH or FSH.
A. LH targets Leydig cells of the testes which produce testosterone
B. LH targets Sertoli cells of the testes which promotes spermiogenesis
C. FSH targets Leydig cells of the testes which promotes spermiogenesis
D. FSH targets Sertoli cells of the testes which produce testosterone
Answer is A: LH targets Leydig (interstitial) cells to produce testosterone.
(FSH targets Sertoli (nurse/sustentacular) cells which (in the presence of
testos- terone) promote spermiogenesis).
24. Which cells produce the majority of estrogens?
A. the cells of the corpus luteum
B. the cells of anterior pituitary
C. endometrial cells
D. granulosa cells of the follicle
Answer is D: The thecal cells of the follicles produce androstenedione which
is absorbed by the granulosa cells and used to produce estrogens. (The corpus
luteum does secrete some estrogens too).
25. What is the function of progesterone?
A. to stimulate the development of follicles
B. to maintain the corpus luteum
C. prepare and maintain the uterus for pregnancy
D. to stimulate ovulation
Answer is C: Progesterone which prepares the uterus lining for pregnancy
(and causes the number of peg cells in the Fallopian tube to increase).

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
15 Reproductive System 411

26. If a cell is said to be “haploid”, what is meant?

A. it has 23 chromosomes
B. it has chromosomes that all consist of one chromatid
C. it has the “2n” number of chromosomes
D. it is NOT a gamete (or sex cell)
Answer is A: Haploid is the term used when a cell has half the usual number
of chromosomes. Diploid means the cell has “2n” chromosomes, that is, two
of each chromosome.
27. Which of the following could be accurately said of oogenesis and
spermiogenesis?
A. they both occur after puberty
B. they both cease after menopause
C. the former occurs before birth while the latter continues from puberty to
death
D. the former is promoted by FSH while the latter is promoted by LH
Answer is C: Oogenesis occurs before birth while spermiogenesis continues
from puberty to death. Both are promoted by FSH.
28. Male sterilisation (vasectomy) involves the cutting of which tube?
A. ejaculatory duct
B. epididymis
C. urethra
D. ductus deferens
Answer is D: Vasectomy involves removing a piece of the ductus deferens
(vas deferens) from a site within the scrotum.
29. Which cells develop into the corpus luteum?
A. granulosa cells
B. interstitial cells
C. cells of the antrum
D. thecal cells
Answer is A: Granulosa cells invade the ruptured antrum and proliferate to
become the CC.
30. What is the function of the hormone progesterone?
A. to maintain secondary sex characteristics
B. to pause meiosis until the ovum is fertilised
C. to stimulate estrogen production
D. to prepare the uterus for pregnancy
Answer is D: Progesterone causes the lining of the uterus to thicken in
prepara- tion for implantation.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
412 15 Reproductive System

31. Which of the following statements is correct?

A. ova all contain a Y chromosome
B. half of the ova carry an X chromosome and half carry a Y chromosome
C. half of the sperm cells carry an X chromosome and half carry a Y
chromosome
D. sperm all carry an X chromosome
Answer is C: The somatic cells of the male each carry an X and a Y chromo-
some. When sperm are produced, they have 23 chromosomes (rather than 46),
thus they have equal chance of having an X or a Y chromosome. All ova have
an X chromosome.
32. From which source does the majority of the volume of a male ejaculation come?
A. epididymis
B. seminiferous tubules
C. seminal vesicles
D. prostate gland
Answer is C: The seminal vesicles provide about 60 % of ejaculate volume.
33. What is a fertilised egg known as?
A. ovum
B. zygote
C. embryo
D. blastocyst
Answer is B: The fertilised egg, before it begins to divide, is known as a zygote.
34. What term is applied to the second two weeks of the menstrual (uterine) cycle
A. menses
B. secretory phase
C. luteal phase
D. proliferation
Answer is B: The secretory phase begins at ovulation & continues while
corpus luteum is intact. The endometrial glands of the uterus secrete glycogen
– a nutrition source for embryo. (The second phase of the ovarian cycle is
called the luteal phase.)
35. What is the section of the male reproductive tract within which sperm are pro-
duced called?
A. the urethra
B. the epididymis
C. the vas deferens
D. the seminiferous tubules
Answer is D: The seminiferous tubules of the testes produce sperm.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
15 Reproductive System 413

36. Both testosterone and FSH contribute to which of the following effects in the
male?
A. the stimulation of spermiogenesis
B. metabolic rate stimulation
C. they establish & maintain the secondary sex characteristics
D. the stimulation of muscle and bone growth
Answer is A: FSH in the presence of testosterone stimulates spermiogenesis.
37. What is the role of progesterone?
A. to stimulate follicle development
B. to stimulate the maturation of the uterine lining
C. to stimulate the oocyte to complete meiosis I
D. to stimulate the release of FSH
Answer is B: Progesterone stimulates the maturation of the uterine lining, and
the secretions of the uterine glands.
38. Which statement about the “granulosa cells” is NOT correct?
A. they produce estrogens and inhibin
B. they form a single layer around the primary follicle
C. they form the corpus luteum
D. one of them will develop into the ovum
Answer is D: Granulosa cells surround the ovum that was formed before birth.
39. In the male reproductive tract, where are sperm produced? In the:
A. seminiferous tubules.
B. epididymis.
C. Sertoli cells of the testes.
D. Leydig cells of the testes.
Answer is A: In the seminiferous tubules, stem cells called spermatogonia
undergo meiosis to become sperm cells.
40. What is the “external urethral meatus” is another name for?
A. the shaft of the penis.
B. the opening of the tube at the end of the penis.
C. the prostate gland.
D. the scrotum.
Answer is B: The external urethral meatus, also known as the external
urethral orifice, is the opening or meatus of the urethra. It is the point where
urine exits the urethra in males.
41. What is the role of luteinising hormone (LH) in the female?
A. it causes release of FSH from the anterior pituitary.
B. it maintains the secondary sex characteristics.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
414 15 Reproductive System

C. it allows the frequency of pulses of GnRH to increase.

D. it causes ovulation.
Answer is D: A surge of LH release from the anterior pituitary gland causes
the mature follicle to release its ovum. GnRh stimulates the release of FSH,
while the secondary sex characteristics are maintained by estrogens.
42. What is the chromosome complement of a sperm?
A. 46 chromosomes (23 pairs including a pair of Y chromosomes).
B. 46 chromosomes (22 pairs plus one X chromosome and one Y).
C. 23 chromosomes including one X chromosome OR one Y.
D. 23 chromosomes including one X chromosome AND one Y
Answer is C: Sperm are haploid (have 23 chromosomes) so that when they
fuse with the egg (also with 23 chromosomes), the zygote has 46
chromosomes. The X or Y chromosome of the sperm, in conjunction the X of
the egg, then deter- mine the sex of the baby.
43. Which one of the following statements is INcorrect?
A. corpus luteum releases progesterone.
B. hypothalamus releases GnRH.
C. anterior pituitary releases FSH.
D. granulosa cells produce androgens.
Answer is D: Granulosa cells produce estrogens –female sex hormones.
Androgens are male sex hormones.
44. Which one of the following is true about the secretory phase of the menstrual
cycle?
A. It occurs as the uterine epithelium regrows under the stimulation of
estrogens.
B. It begins at ovulation and continues while the corpus luteum is intact.
C. It refers to the release of progesterone by the corpus luteum.
D. During this phase the follicle develops prior to ovulation.
Answer is B: The secretion alluded to is glycogen secreted by endometrial
glands of the uterus. It begins at ovulation and continues while the corpus
luteum is active.
45. What is the function of the epididymis?
A. Production of sperm.
B. Stores sperm and facilitates their maturation.
C. Stores sperm and produces seminal fluid.
D. Carries semen out through the penis.
Answer is B: The epididymis store sperm for 2–3 months during which time
they mature.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
15 Reproductive System 415

46. In males, what is the function of luteinising hormone (LH)?

A. It stimulates interstitial cells in the testes to produce testosterone.
B. It stimulates sustentacular cells in the testes to produce sperm.
C. It promotes the maturation of spermatozoa.
D. It stimulates the anterior pituitary to release FSH.
Answer is A: LH targets interstitial (Leydig) cells to produce testosterone.
GnRH stimulates the ant pit to secrete FSH and LH.
47. One of the following is NOT a function of testosterone, which one?
A. Stimulates spermiogenesis.
B. Maintains secondary sex characteristics.
C. Maintains glands of the reproductive tract.
D. Stimulates anterior pituitary to release FSH and LH.
Answer is D: GnRH stimulates the ant pit to secrete FSH and LH.
48. After ejaculation, sperm travel through the structures of the female reproduc-
tive tract in which order?
A. Vagina, uterus, fallopian tube, ovary.
B. Cervix, vagina, uterus, fallopian tube.
C. Vagina, cervix, uterus, fallopian tube.
D. Cervix, urethra, uterus, fallopian tube.
Answer is C: Sperm eventually reach the fallopian tube after gaining entry to
the uterus via the cervix. The urethra is not part of the female reproductive
tract.
49. What is the name given to a young woman’s first menstrual period?
A. Menarche.
B. Menses.
C. Eclampsia
D. Amenorrhea.
Answer is A: Menarche is the first menstrual cycle, or first menstrual bleeding,
in female humans.
50. The hormone progesterone is released by which structure?
A. Anterior pituitary.
B. Corpus luteum.
C. Hypothalamus.
D. The adrenal glands.
Answer is B: If progesterone was produced by any of the other structures,
then men would have it too.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
416 15 Reproductive System

51. What is the function of follicle stimulating hormone functions in the male? To
stimulate the:
A. production of sperm
B. release of testosterone
C. release of gonadotropin releasing hormone
D. release of luteinising hormone
Answer is A: FSH stimulates the production or maturation of gametes. In the
male, the production of sperm.
52. What is the result of meiosis in males? The production of:
A. One spermatid and three polar bodies
B. One spermatid and two polar bodies
C. Two primary spermatocytes
D. Four spermatids
Answer is D: Meiosis results in four haploid cells being produced. Sperm in
the male.
53. Sperm gain motility as they pass through which structure? The
A. Lumen of the seminiferous tubule
B. Prostatic part of the urethra
C. Ductus deferens
D. Epididymis
Answer is B: In the prostate, sperm are mixed with seminal fluid from the
semi- nal vesicles. This fluid mobilises the flagellum of a sperm cell.
54. Which of the following lists the structures of the female perineal area the cor-
rect order?
A. Clitoris, vaginal opening, urethral opening, anus
B. Clitoris, urethral opening, vaginal opening, anus
C. Urethral opening, clitoris, vagina, cervix
D. Anus, clitoris, urethral opening, vaginal opening.
Answer is B: Clitoris is the most ventral structure, while the anus is the most
dorsal. The urethra is between the clitoris and vagina.
55. What are the phases of the ovarian cycle?
A. Menarche, menstrual cycle, menopause
B. Luteal phase, menses and proliferative phase
C. Follicular phase and the luteal phase
D. Menses, proliferative phase and secretory phase
Answer is C: The ovarian cycle is separated into follicular phase and luteal
phase by ovulation.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
15 Reproductive System 417

56. Which of the following is NOT a function of estrogens?

A. stimulating bone and muscle growth
B. maintain female secondary sex characteristics
C. maintaining the corpus luteum
D. initiating growth and repair of the endometrium
Answer is C: The corpus luteum is maintained by luteinising hormone
57. Which statement is NOT correct?
A. The ova in the ovary are continually forming from mitosis
B. The ovarian follicles are embedded in the ovary cortex
C. Ovulation is the ejection of an oocyte from the ovary
D. The corpus luteum develops from the ruptured
follicle Answer is A: Ova are formed before birth in baby
girls.
58. Which statement is NOT correct?
A. Testosterone is required to maintain the adult male secondary sex
characteristics
B. Testosterone increases the sex drive in both sexes
C. Testosterone inhibits the closure of the epiphyseal plate in the long bones
D. Testosterone stimulates the growth and maturation of the male genitalia
Answer is C: In fact, the closure of the epiphyseal plate is caused by testoster-
one. While testosterone does increase libido in females, estrogen normally
per- forms this function.
59. What does gonadotrophin-releasing hormone stimulate?
A. The hypothalamus
B. The anterior lobe of pituitary gland
C. Spermatogenesis or oogenesis
D. The production of testosterone or oestrogen
Answer is B: GnRH stimulates the ant pit to release FSH and LH.
60. Select one INCORRECT statement from the following:
A. Meiosis results in the reduction of chromosome numbers in cells from 2n
to n.
B. The primordial follicle cells are present in females at birth.
C. Spermatogenesis and oogenesis result in the production of either 4 sperm
or 4 ova.
D. Puberty is the time of life when the reproductive organs begin to mature.
Answer is C: Spermatogenesis results in the production of 4 sperm, but
oogen- esis results in the production of one ovum.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
418 15 Reproductive System

61. Which of the following produces male sex hormones?

A. The interstitial cells
B. Corpus luteum
C. Anterior lobe of the pituitary gland
D. Seminal vesicles
Answer is A: The interstitial or Leydig cells of eth testes produce
testosterone.
62. The menstrual cycle can be divided into 3 phases. Starting from day one of
menstruation, which of the following orders are the phases in?
A. Menstrual, secretory, proliferative
B. Proliferative, secretory, menstrual
C. Menstrual, proliferative, secretory
D. Secretory, proliferative, menstrual
Answer is C: Starts with menstruation, and ends with secretory when the
endo- metrium is mature.
63. Which organ does NOT add a secretion to semen?
A. Testes
B. Prostate gland
C. Penis
D. Seminal vesicles
Answer is C: There is no addition to the semen as it passes through the penis.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
Chapter 16
Waves, Light Waves, Sound Waves,
Ultrasound (The Physics Of)

16.1 Waves

Mechanical waves (sound waves, waves on water) are a mechanism for

transferring energy through a medium (the air or water) without transferring
matter. Another definition is: A periodic disturbance in some property of the
medium, the medium itself remaining relatively at rest. Waves have the following
measurable properties:
1. Wavelength (symbol λ), is the distance between two successive crests (in
metres, m). A typical value is ~500 nm for light, and ~20 cm for sound.
2. Frequency (f), is the number of λ that pass by in 1 s (in hertz, Hz). Typical
values are 500 THz for light, 500 Hz for sound. Frequency is related to pitch
(for sound) and colour (for visible light).
3. Period (T) is the time it takes for one λ to pass by (in seconds, s).
4. Speed (v), is how fast a wave is moving in the direction of propagation (in
metres per second, m/s). The speed of light travelling through air is 3 × 10 8 m/s,
while for sound, speed in air is about 330 m/s. In tissue, sound moves faster, at
about 1560 m/s.
5. Amplitude (A) is the maximum displacement from the mean (or rest) position.
For example the vertical distance between a trough and a crest of a wave in
water is two times the amplitude. Amplitude (or intensity) is related to loudness
of sound and brightness of light and to the amount of energy being carried by
the wave.
6. Phase refers to how far out of step the oscillation of one part of a wave is when
compared with another part. A phase of 0° or 360° means that the two parts are
in step, while a phase difference of 180° means that the two points are com-
pletely out of step. Differences in phase between the sounds entering each ear
allow us to localise the source of a sound.
Some of these quantities are related to each other by the following formulae:
v = f λ, f = 1 / T, E = h × f .

© Springer Science+Business Media Singapore 2016 419

M. Caon, Examination Questions and Answers in Basic Anatomy and
Physiology, DOI 10.1007/978-981-10-2332-3_16
ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
420 16 Waves, Light Waves, Sound Waves, Ultrasound (The Physics Of)

Electromagnetic waves include (in increasing order of frequency), microwaves,

infra-red waves, visible red light, visible blue light, ultraviolet, x-rays and gamma
rays. (Low frequency) electromagnetic waves do not require a medium to travel
through, but are able to travel through transparent media. They can also travel
through “empty” space. They are not mechanical waves, they are oscillations in
the magnitude and direction of electric and magnetic fields. They do not cause the
medium to vibrate. They cause the electrons in the atoms of the medium to vibrate
in step with the electric field. They include microwaves, radio, TV and radar.
Our ears can detect audible sound, while infra-sound and ultrasound are both
inaudible. Our eye can see visible light, while infra-red and ultraviolet are both
invisible.
1. The amplitude of a wave is related to which of the following?
A. the distance between two successive crests.
B. the number of wavelengths that pass by per second.
C. the speed of the wave’s travel.
D. the amount of energy it carries.
Answer is D: The greater the amplitude, the greater the energy carried.
2. Which is the BEST definition of a wave?
A. The method by which the energy carried by visible light is propagated.
B. Travelling oscillations in the magnitude and direction of electric and mag-
netic fields that do not require a material medium.
C. A periodic disturbance in some property of the medium, the medium itself
remains (relatively) at rest.
D. A mechanism for the transfer of energy without the transfer of matter.
Answer is D: The other choices also describe a wave but not in the most
general terms.
3. What does the term “wavelength” mean when applied to a wave?
A. The number of complete cycles that pass by in one second.
B. The distance between two successive crests (or compressions).
C. The time it takes for one wavelength to pass by.
D. How fast a wave is moving in its direction of propagation.
Answer is B: Wavelength is the shortest distance between two points that are
displaying the same displacement.
4. The wave equation may be written in symbols as v = fλ where f stands for fre-
quency, v stands for velocity and λ stands for wavelength. If a wave has a
speed of 3 × 108 m/s what is its frequency and wavelength?
A. f = 10 000 Hz and λ = 0.0003 m.
B. f = 5 × 1014 Hz and λ = 6 × 10−7 m.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
16.1 Waves 421

C. f = 6 × 104 Hz and λ = 0.5 × 10−4 m.

D. f = 2 MHz and λ = 3 × 105 m.
Answer is B: Which combination of frequency and wavelength will give the
speed 3 × 108 m/s?

v = f λ = 5×1014 Hz × 6 ×10−7 m = 30 ×1014−7 = 30 ×107 = 3×108

5. The wave equation may be written in symbols as v = fλ where f stands for fre-
quency, v stands for velocity and λ stands for wavelength. If a wave has a
speed of 2 × 108 m/s what is its frequency and wavelength?
A. f = 4 × 104 Hz and λ = 0.5 × 10−4 m.
B. f = 5 × 1014 Hz and λ = 4 × 10−7 m.
C. f = 10 000 Hz and λ = 0.0002 m.
D. f = 2 MHz and λ = 1 × 105 m.
Answer is B: Which combination of frequency and wavelength will give the
speed 2 × 108 m/s?

v = f λ = 5×1014 Hz × 4 ×10−7 m = 20 ×1014−7 = 20 ×107 = 2 ×108

6. What name is given to the change in the observed frequency of a wave (or its
reflection) because of the motion of the source (or the reflecting object) or of
the observer?
A. the beat frequency
B. the red shift
C. phase inversion
D. the Doppler effect
Answer is D: The change in frequency when the source of the (say) sound is
in motion relative to the observer is called the Doppler effect. (The red shift in
astronomy is due to the Doppler effect).
7. Which of the statements about sound and light is INCORRECT?
A. Sound is a mechanical wave while light does not require a medium to
travel in.
B. Light is a transverse wave phenomenon while sound is a longitudinal
wave phenomenon.
C. The speed of light is much greater than the speed of sound.
D. Ultrasound and ultraviolet light have frequencies less than infrasound and
infrared light.
Answer is D: In fact both ultrasound and ultraviolet light have frequencies
GREATER than infrasound and infrared light respectively.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
422 16 Waves, Light Waves, Sound Waves, Ultrasound (The Physics Of)

8. A wave may be defined as which of the following?

A. The oscillation of a particle of the medium.
B. A series of crests and compressions that propagate through space.
C. A mechanism for the transfer of energy without transferring matter.
D. The transport of the medium due to the oscillation of its particles.
Answer is C: Essentially, a wave transfers energy without any matter moving
away from its location.
9. Which of the following definitions of a wave is the best?
A. A wave is an event or disturbance that is localised at a particular location.
B. A mechanical wave is a periodic disturbance in a material medium.
C. Waves are a means of transferring energy without transferring matter.
D. Waves are a phenomenon characterised by their wavelength and their dis-
placement of the medium from the mean position.
Answer is C: this is the classic definition of a wave. Choices B and D are also
true statements.
10. Which quantity most closely describes the amount of energy that is
transported by a wave?
A. Frequency.
B. Amplitude.
C. Wavelength.
D. Velocity.
Answer is B: Energy and amplitude are directly related.
11. What is the amplitude of a wave?
A. the maximum displacement from the rest position.
B. the distance between adjacent troughs.
C. the energy carried by the wave.
D. the frequency multiplied by the wavelength.
Answer is A: As a wave passes through a medium, the particles of the
medium are shifted (displaced) from the position occupied before they were
disturbed by the wave. The amplitude of the wave is the maximum
displacement.
12. Waves have properties (such as wavelength, frequency, period, speed, ampli-
tude, intensity, direction and phase) which can be measured. Some of these
properties are related. That is, if one of a pair of related properties is known,
then the other can be worked out. Which of the following lists contain proper-
ties that are all Unrelated to each other?
A. Amplitude, period, intensity, phase
B. Frequency, amplitude, period, wavelength

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
16.1 Waves 423

C. direction, speed, amplitude, phase

D. Phase, wavelength, speed, frequency
Answer is C: Frequency and wavelength are related, as are amplitude and
intensity
13. The wave equation for electromagnetic radiation may be stated (in words) as
“the product of wavelength and frequency is a constant called the speed of
light”. The speed of light is 3 × 10 8 m/s. Use this information to determine the
frequency of an electromagnetic radiation with a wavelength of 600
nanometres.
A. 5 × 1014 Hz
B. 2 × 10−17 Hz.
C. 1.8 × 1014 Hz.
D. 1.8 × 1011 Hz.
Answer is C: v = f λ so f = v / λ = 3×108 m / s ÷ 600 nm = 3×108 m / s
÷ 600 ×10−9 m = 1800 ×108−−9 = 1800 ×1017 = 1.8 ×1014 Hz
14. Given the formulae: speed = frequency × wavelength (v = fλ) and frequency is
one over the period (f = 1/T), what is the wavelength of a light wave (speed =
3
× 108 m/s) whose period is 2 × 10−15 seconds?
A. 1.5 × 10−7 m
B. 6 × 10−7 m
C. 1.67 × 106 m
D. 1.5 × 1023 m
Answer is B: first determine the frequency:
(
f = 1 / T = 1 / 2 ×10−15
)= 0.5×10 15
Hz
Then rearrange the wave equation for wavelength : v = f λ so λ = v / f
Thensubstitutethenumbers: λ = v / f = 3×108 m / s ÷ 0.5×1015 Hz = 6 ×10−7 m
15. What is the quantity that is most characteristic of an electromagnetic wave?
A. amplitude.
B. wavelength.
C. frequency.
D. velocity.
Answer is C: Frequency of an em wave does not change as it travels through
different media, while the other three quantities do.
16. In a wave, what is the distance between two adjacent troughs called?
A. The period
B. The displacement

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
424 16 Waves, Light Waves, Sound Waves, Ultrasound (The Physics Of)

C. The amplitude
D. The wavelength
Answer is D: The length of a wave is the distance between the two nearest
points that are undergoing the same movement. This is happening at two adja-
cent troughs (or two adjacent crests too).
17. The wave equation for electromagnetic radiation may be stated as “the
product of wavelength and frequency is a constant called the speed of light”.
The speed of light is 3 × 108 m/s. Use this information to determine the
frequency of an electromagnetic radiation with a wavelength of 600 nm.
A. 6 × 1014 Hz
B. 1.5 × 1014 Hz.
C. 1.67 × 10−15 Hz.
D. 0.6 × 1010 Hz.
Answer is B: v = f λ so f = v / λ = 3×108 m / s ÷ 500 nm = 3×108 m / s
÷ 500 ×10−9 m = 1500 ×108−−9 = 1500 ×1017 = 1.5×1014 Hz

16.2 Light Waves

Electromagnetic radiation that stimulates the sensation of vision in our eyes is

called visible light. This radiation is also “non-ionising” in that the energy it
carries is insufficient to produce ions in the medium through which it passes. Light
that passes through the curved surfaces of our cornea and the eye’s lens has its
direction of travel changed. That is, the light ray is bent or refracted. In this way
our eye can focus the light coming from an object at any distance away. Light or
“visible” light has a range of frequencies from red light (3.9 × 1014 Hz) to blue (7.5
× 1014 Hz). Our eye is able to distinguish between the different frequencies and
perceives them as different colours. Our eye can see visible light, while infra-red
and ultraviolet are both invisible.
A LASER is a source of light that is medically useful because the light it pro-
duces is monochromatic (all of one wavelength), “coherent” (is oscillating in
phase) and the beam is very parallel. This means the energy in the beam can be
focussed to a tiny spot so that it is intense enough to vaporise the tissue at that
spot. Hence a laser may be used as a surgical tool to cut through tissue.
1. Visible light waves are examples of
A. electromagnetic waves.
B. mechanical waves.
C. longitudinal waves.
D. compressional waves.
Answer is A: visible light are electromagnetic waves that are detectable by the
human eye.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
16.2 Light Waves 425

2. Which phrase would best describe waves of dim violet light?

A. High frequency and high amplitude.
B. Low frequency and high amplitude.
C. High frequency and low amplitude.
D. Low frequency and low amplitude.
Answer is C: The violet end of the spectrum has waves of higher frequency
than the red end; dim light refers to low amplitude light.
3. The phenomenon of refraction is due to
A. light rays bending when they enter a different medium
B. the decrease in speed when a ray enters a less dense medium
C. the difference in refractive indices of two media
D. the different speeds with which different frequencies of light travel
through media.
Answer is C: In choice D, the different speeds with which different
frequencies of light travel through media are due to the different refractive
indices of the different frequencies.
4. Consider the situation where a light wave travelling in air strikes a glass
surface with an angle of incidence of 20o. Which of the following statements
is true?
A. The angle formed by the incident ray and the normal will be 20°.
B. The angle of refraction will be greater than 20°.
C. The angle formed by the incident ray and the glass surface is 20°.
D. There will be no refracted ray. That is, total internal reflection will occur.
Answer is A: The “angle of incidence” is defined as angle formed by the inci-
dent ray and a line perpendicular with the surface (i.e. the “normal”). Total
internal reflection may occur when light passes from glass to air, not air to
glass.
5. The term ‘refraction’ may be applied to which of the following?
A. The effect on light rays as they enter the cornea of the eye.
B. Light rays from an object meeting at a point to form a sharp image.
C. A light ray travelling away from a surface at the same angle that the light
ray approached the surface.
D. A light ray travelling through glass with a faster speed than it would have
in air.
Answer is A: the cornea bends (refracts) light that enters the eye.
6. What is a convex lens? One that
A. can accommodate to different focal lengths.
B. will cause light rays to diverge.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
426 16 Waves, Light Waves, Sound Waves, Ultrasound (The Physics Of)

C. is thicker in the middle than at the edge.

D. will correct for myopia (short sightedness).
Answer is C: A convex or converging lens is “fat” in the middle.
7. In the electromagnetic spectrum, the frequencies that we call visible light have
values that lie above
A. the ultraviolet and below the infrared
B. the infrared and below microwaves
C. microwaves but below ultraviolet
D. the infrared but below the radio range
Answer is C: Microwaves are low frequency em radiation while UV radiation
is relatively high. The frequencies of visible light are between the two.
8. In which of the following sequences are the types of electromagnetic radiation
listed in correct order of energy with lowest energy first and highest energy
last?
A. visible, ultraviolet C, ultraviolet A, x-rays.
B. microwaves, infrared, ultraviolet, gamma rays.
C. x-rays, ultraviolet, visible, microwaves.
D. infrared, microwaves, x-rays, gamma rays.
Answer is B: Choice C is in reverse order; In choice A, UVC has higher fre-
quency than UVA; it is possible for an x-ray frequency (e.g. from a hospital
linear accelerator) to be higher than a particular gamma ray (e.g. from
radioac- tive technetium).
9. The energy carried by a photon of electromagnetic radiation is proportional to
its
A. frequency
B. speed
C. wavelength
D. amplitude
Answer is A: When referring to the energy in a photon (a packet) of radiation,
the equation E = h × f relates the energy E, of a photon to its frequency, f.
10. Ultraviolet radiation is damaging to the eye because
A. the heat produced as it is absorbed distorts the cornea.
B. it causes an increase in the pressure in the eyeball which results in
glaucoma.
C. the energy of the radiation destroys the cones in the fovea.
D. The energy of ultraviolet radiation is mainly absorbed in the lens which
harms the cells.
Answer is D: UV radiation is absorbed by the eye lens and the energy of the
absorbed photons can break the bonds between atoms.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
16.2 Light Waves 427

11. Which of the following types of electromagnetic radiation is most likely to be

responsible for the incidence of skin cancers?
A. infrared
B. ultraviolet-A (UVA)
C. ultraviolet-B (UVB)
D. ultraviolet-C (UVC)
Answer is C: While UVC has higher energy than UVB, and therefore is
poten- tially more damaging, however, UVC does not reach the ground as it
does not penetrate the Earth’s atmosphere.
12. To what radiation does the term ‘non-ionising radiation’ refer? To radiation
that consists of photons with energy that is:
A. not high enough to knock electrons out of atoms but is high enough to pro-
duce ions.
B. sufficient to generate ions in the material that the photons enter.
C. not sufficient to generate ions in the material that the photons enter.
D. high enough to knock electrons out of atoms but not high enough to
produce ions.
Answer is C: The term “non-ionising” implies that ions are not produced. Ions
are produced when one or more electrons are removed from an atom.
13. An oscillating magnetic field will be produced by:
A. an electric field of constant magnitude.
B. a permanent magnet moving at constant speed.
C. the direct current that powers portable radios.
D. the alternating current in household electrical appliances.
Answer is D: An alternating current (one whose direction reverses direction
frequently in a second) will produce a changing (oscillating) magnetic field.
Whereas a steady current will produce a steady magnetic field.
14. What can be said about the collimated beam of electromagnetic energy pro-
duced by an Nd-YAG laser?
A. It has a higher frequency than visible light energy.
B. It stimulates the production of light as it passes through air.
C. It is produced when electrons change energy levels.
D. It consists of waves of two or more frequencies.
Answer is C: The em energy produced by a laser occurs when electron drop to
a lower energy level from their “excited” state. An Nd-YAG laser produces
one frequency of near infra-red light (which is of lower frequency than visible
light).

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
428 16 Waves, Light Waves, Sound Waves, Ultrasound (The Physics Of)

15. Material that is unsuitable for use in a LASER lacks which of the following
properties?
A. A metastable excited state.
B. A short-lived ground state.
C. The ability to spontaneously emit radiation.
D. A long-lived ground state.
Answer is A: A metastable excited state – that is, one that persists for longer
than an excited state normally exists, is required for lasing action.
16. Consider an electron that is in its ground state in an atom. When this electron
moves to another state in the atom it is said to have
A. gained energy and to be in an excited state
B. gained energy and to be in a metastable state
C. lost energy and undergone stimulated emission
D. lost energy and to be part of a population inversion
Answer is A: “Ground state” is the state of lowest energy, hence it can only
move to a higher energy state. In this case it is said to be excited.
17. What property of a LASER makes it suitable for surgical procedures? A LASER:
A. beam’s energy can be focussed onto a very small spot to vaporise tissue.
B. can be passed down an optical fibre in an endoscope.
C. beam produces monochromatic (all of one wavelength) photons.
D. emits photons which all have the same energy.
Answer is A: The ability to vaporise tissue means a laser can “cut” through
tis- sue at the point of vaporisation.
18. What is a concave lens? One that
A. can accommodate to different focal lengths.
B. will cause light rays to converge.
C. is thicker in the middle than at the edge.
D. will correct for myopia (short sightedness).
Answer is D: Concave lens will cause light rays to diverge. So can be used to
correct for short-sightedness as they shift the focal point further away from the
eye’s lens.
19. Which of the following conditions may be corrected by a diverging (concave
lens)?
A. Hyperopia
B. Myopia
C. Presbyopia
D. Red minus dichroma
Answer is B: In myopia, the image forms ventral (in front of) the retina. A
diverging lens will extend the focal length of a myopic eye so that the image
falls onto the retina.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
16.3 Sound 429

16.3 Sound

Sound waves require a solid, liquid or gas (the medium) to travel through. They
are mechanical waves. They cause particles (atoms and molecules) of the medium
to move (vibrate). The young healthy ear has an audible range of ~20 Hz to
~20,000 Hz. However, sounds of different frequencies stimulate our hearing by
different amounts. Our ear is most “sensitive” between 500–6000 Hz. It is not very
sensitive below 200 Hz or above 12,000 Hz. A sound’s intensity (in watts per
square metre, W/m2) is the objectively measurable amount of sound energy carried
by a sound. A value as low as 10−12 W/m2 is at our threshold of hearing and may be
called silence. The human perception of the loudness of a sound is called “sound
level” and is expressed in decibels (dB). A sound level of 0 dB is perceived as
silence. This does not mean that the amount of sound energy is zero, just that we
can’t hear it! We can also hear a sound energy of 1 W/m2 as a painful (and ear
damaging) sound level of 120 dB.
Two sounds that differ by 0.1 dB can barely be perceived as different in
loudness while a sound that is 3 dB louder than another, sounds twice as loud.
Continuous noise at 90 dB will, over time, produce hearing damage without
causing pain.
1. Which of the following statements about sound and light is INCORRECT?
A. they both extend over a range of frequencies
B. sound is a longitudinal wave and light is a transverse wave
C. the speed of travel of light is fast while sound travels relatively slowly
D. sound will travel through a vacuum while light requires a transparent medium.
Answer is D: Sound cannot travel through a vacuum, but all em radiation
including light, can.
2. What is the measure known as “sound level”?
A. a subjective measure of the perceived loudness of a sound (in dB).
B. a graph of the levels of sound of different frequencies that we perceive as
equal in loudness (in phon).
C. the frequency of the sound that produces the loudest response in a healthy
hearing mechanism (in Hz).
D. the objectively measured amount of sound energy carried by a sound wave
(in W/m2).
Answer is A: Sound level is subjective, in that it is perceived by the hearer
and depends on the frequency/ies of the sound. The unit is the decibel.
3. What is the speed of sound in water at 20 °C?
A. 330 m/s
B. 1480 m/s
C. 1740 m/s
D. 3400 m/s
Answer is B: If you have an idea of the approximate value of the speed of
sound in air (330m/s), choices A, C & D can be easily rejected.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
430 16 Waves, Light Waves, Sound Waves, Ultrasound (The Physics Of)

4. How may sound waves be characterised? As:

A. Longitudinal waves because the oscillations that they cause are along a
line at right angles to the direction of propagation.
B. Mechanical waves because they can only travel through a material medium.
C. Waves because they allow for the oscillation of a medium without the
trans- fer of energy.
D. Compressions and rarefactions because the nature of the oscillation of
their electric and magnetic fields.
Answer is B: Sound waves require a medium. Longitudinal waves oscillate
parallel to their direction of propagation. Electric & magnetic fields are not
involved. Choice C is correct but not specific enough.
5. If the frequency of a sound is 1000 Hz, what will its period will be?
A. 1 second
B. 0.1 second
C. 0.001 second
D. 0.0001 second
Answer is C: Period = 1/frequency, hence = 1/1000 = 0.001 s
6. A sound wave of frequency 1000 Hz is travelling through air with a speed of
330 m/s. What is its wavelength?
A. 33 cm.
B. 330 cm
C. 33 m.
D. 330 m.
Answer is A: Rearrange the wave equation for wavelength:
v = f λ so λ = v / f
Then substitute: l = 330m / s ÷1000Hz = 0.33m = 33cm
7. As the frequency of a sound in air is made to decrease, which of the following
will happen?
A. The period will increase.
B. The wavelength will decrease.
C. The amplitude will decrease.
D. The velocity will decrease.
Answer is A: Frequency and period are inversely related, so as frequency
decreases the period of the wave will increase.
8. What is the unit called the decibel (dB) used in the measurement of?
A. sound frequency (pitch).
B. sound intensity (energy).

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
16.3 Sound 431

C. sound pressure.
D. sound level (loudness).
Answer is D: Sound level uses the unit dB. Frequency uses hertz, Intensity
uses watts per square metre, pressure uses pascal.
9. An increase in sound level of 20 dB represents an increase in intensity (W/m2)
of: A. 10 000.
B. 1000.
C. 200.
D. 100.
Answer is D: If the sound level difference I  between two sounds whose intensi-
ties are I 1 and I 2 is 20 dB, 20 = 10 × log 2
I , so a sound level of 20 dB means
1
that the log term must be 2. Now the log(100) = 2, hence I2/I1 = 100. Thus one
sound is 100 times the intensity of the other.
10. When a sound with a particular frequency is played at a loudness of 60 dB,
and compared to the same sound played at 10 dB, what can be said about the
inten- sity (in W/m2) of the 60 dB sound? It is:
A. 50 times more intense than the 10 dB sound.
B. 5000 times more intense than the 10 dB sound.
C. 50,000 times more intense than the 10 dB sound.
D. 100,000 times more intense than the 10 dB sound.
Answer is D: If a sound is 10 times more intense (10 × more W/m2) than
another sound of the same frequency, then it is 10 decibel (1 bel) louder. If it
is 100 times more intense, it sounds 20 decibel louder. Hence, remembering
the loga- rithmic nature of the loudness scale, a sound that is 50 dB (5 bel)
louder than another, is also 100,000 times (105) more intense.
11. How much louder does a sound of 30 dB sound when compared to the same
sound played at 10 dB?
A. two times louder
B. 4 times louder
C. 20 times louder
D. 100 times louder
Answer is D: 1bel = 10 dB. Each time sound intensity increases by a factor of
10, sound level increases by one bel. Thus if a sound is 2 bel (20 dB) louder it
is 10 × 10 = 100 times louder.
12. Which of the following sound levels, if prolonged, will damage the hearing
mechanism of the ear without being perceived as painful?
A. 50 dB
B. 70 dB

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
432 16 Waves, Light Waves, Sound Waves, Ultrasound (The Physics Of)

C. 90 dB
D. 120 dB
Answer is C: Prolonged exposure to 90 dB will result in hearing loss. So will
120 dB but that will be noticeably painful.

16.4 Ultrasound

Ultrasound is inaudible sound above 20,000 Hz in frequency. Medical ultrasound

is high frequency longitudinal waves of frequency 2 MHz or 4 MHz or
thereabouts. Ultrasound is a mechanical wave that must travel in a medium. It is
not an electro- magnetic radiation so is non-ionising. It is fundamentally different
from electro- magnetic radiation. Ultrasound is produced in the transducer (a
piezoelectric crystal that can vibrate very rapidly when electrified with high
frequency AC voltage). The transducer is coupled to the skin with acoustic gel.
This excludes air which would cause ultrasound to reflect from it.
Diagnostic imaging with ultrasound projects ultrasound into the body and
detects the ultrasound that is reflected from the boundaries between organs that
differ in their density and elasticity. Ultrasound travels at about 1540 m/s in tissue
and is reflected at (i.e. echoes from) the interface between one tissue and the next
as long as their impedance differs (impedance = density × speed of sound). Echoes
are “loudest” from bone-tissue interface. From the time taken for the reflections to
return and the intensity of the echo, an ultrasound image is reconstructed from the
boundaries that produced the reflections. That is, from the boundaries between
organs or tissues.
Ultrasound is not used to image lung (or bowel with gas) as the very different
densities of gas and tissue causes all the ultrasound to be reflected. Ultrasound can
be made to deliver energy to tissues deep to the skin, that is, to warm tissues. That
is, ultrasound can be used in physiotherapy as well as for medical imaging. The
amount of energy delivered is not sufficient to ionise atoms or molecules so ultra-
sound is non-ionising radiation.
If ultrasound reflects from a moving object such as the beating walls of the
heart or the red blood cells flowing in a blood vessel, the ultrasound is reflected
with a changed frequency. This phenomenon is known as the Doppler effect so the
exami- nation modality is known as Doppler ultrasound. Quantitative
measurements such as speed of blood flow, rate of heart beat, volume of blood
remaining in a ventricle after systole, can be made with this modality.
1. What frequencies are attributed to the inaudible sound known as Ultrasound?
A. greater than 2 kHz.
B. greater than 2 MHz.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
16.4 Ultrasound 433

C. greater than 20,000 Hz or less than 20 Hz.

D. less than 20 Hz.
Answer is B: Frequencies less than 20Hz are call infrasound. Frequencies
greater than 2 kHz (2000Hz) are still audible. The best answer is 2 MHz.
While this is frequency typical of medical ultrasound, any frequency greater
than 20,000 Hz is inaudible and called ultrasound.
2. Prior to an imaging examination using ultrasound, the skin surface is coated
with a gel substance known as a “coupling agent”. What is the purpose of
the gel?
A. To reduce the friction between the skin and the ultrasound transducer.
B. To eliminate air, which would reflect the ultrasound, from between the
skin and transducer.
C. Since ultrasound travels faster through denser materials, the time delay
caused by travelling through air is avoided by using gel.
D. To avoid an unpleasantly cold sensation that would otherwise be produced
by the ultrasound transducer.
Answer is B: The impedance difference between air and skin is large, so most
of the ultrasound would reflect from the skin, rather than enter the body.
Using gel avoids the ultrasound passing through air.
3. Which statement about a Doppler ultrasound stethoscope is true?
A. They amplify the echo produced when ultrasound strikes a boundary
between two tissues of different impedance.
B. Their operation depends on the reflected ultrasound being at a different
fre- quency to the emitted ultrasound.
C. They emit ionising radiation.
D. The depth of penetration of ultrasound into tissue increases as the
frequency of ultrasound increases.
Answer is B: A Doppler “stethoscope” produces ultrasound and detects the
reflected ultrasound from moving red blood cells (or the moving heart wall).
The motion of the object reflecting the ultrasound causes the reflected ultra-
sound to be shifted in frequency. Its depth of penetration in human tissue
DEcreases as it frequency increases.
4. Which of the following is considered to be the diagnostic ultrasound
frequency range?
A. 1 mHz to 15 mHz
B. 10 Hz to 20 Hz
C. 20 Hz to 20 kHz
D. 1 MHz to 20 MHz
Answer is D: Ultrasound has frequencies greater than 20 kHz. In medical
appli- cations, the frequencies used are greater than 1 MHz.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
434 16 Waves, Light Waves, Sound Waves, Ultrasound (The Physics Of)

5. What will cause a large percentage of the ultrasound energy to be reflected

from the interface between two media? This will happen if:
A. The acoustic impedance of each medium is the same.
B. The speed of ultrasound in the two media differs greatly.
C. The acoustic impedance of each medium is very different.
D. The densities of the media are different.
Answer is C: A large difference in acoustic impedance will cause a large
reflec- tion. Impedance depends on both speed of sound in the medium and
the density of the medium.
6. Ultrasound radiation may be characterised as which one of the following?
A. ionising radiation
B. audible radiation
C. longitudinal waves
D. electromagnetic waves
Answer is C: Ultrasound, and audible sound, is a longitudinal wave. It is
neither ionising nor electromagnetic.
7. What is Ultrasound?
A. frequencies less than 50 Hz and more than 20 000 Hz.
B. a mechanical wave (it requires a medium).
C. a form of ionising radiation.
D. more penetrating (in human tissues) as its frequency increases.
Answer is B: Ultrasound is a mechanical wave. Its depth of penetration in
human tissue DEcreases as it frequency increases.
8. What will a sound of frequency 250,000 Hz be?
A. audible.
B. painful to listen to.
C. ultrasonic.
D. close to the threshold of hearing.
Answer is C: 250 kHz is way above the upper limit of human hearing so is
ultrasound.
9. What is ultrasound least useful for examining?
A. heart.
B. lungs.
C. kidneys.
D. uterus.
Answer is B: The lungs contain air which reflect all of the ultrasound
reaching it, making the lungs opaque to ultrasound.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
16.4 Ultrasound 435

10 The change in pitch (frequency) of a sound when there is relative motion

between the sound source and the human observer is known as the:
A. resonance effect.
B. interference effect.
C. diffraction effect.
D. Doppler effect.
Answer is D: This change of frequency effect is apparent when listening to
the sound of a motor vehicle engine as it approaches you and then as it
continues past you.
11. Basically, what does a Doppler ultrasound examination for peripheral vascular
disease involve?
A. the measurement of blood speed.
B. listening to the reflected ultrasound frequencies.
C. using ultrasound to produce an image on a screen.
D. increasing blood flow by warming the deep tissues.
Answer is A: The faster the red blood cells are moving, the greater will be the
difference in frequency between the incoming and reflected ultrasound fre-
quency. Rbc move faster as they pass through a narrowing in a blood vessel.
Ultrasound is inaudible, so you can’t hear the reflected ultrasound.
12. A Doppler ultrasound device produces ultrasound of frequency 5 MHz and
the echo from red blood cells has a frequency of 5,002,500 Hz. The beat
frequency produced will be:
A. inaudible.
B. 250 Hz.
C. 2500 Hz.
D. 0.25 MHz.
Answer is C: Beat frequency is the difference between the two frequencies.
5,000,000 − 5,002,500 = 2500 Hz. The frequency of the beats is within the
audible range so we can hear them.
13. When ultrasound strikes the boundary between two different body tissues, the
amount of reflection that will occur is proportional to the difference in what?
A. the speed of sound in the tissues.
B. the density of the two tissues.
C. elasticity in the tissues.
D. impedance between the two tissues.
Answer is D: The impedance depends on the speed and density. Speed
depends on the elasticity of the medium. So impedance is the more complete
answer.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
Chapter 17
Ionising Radiation

17.1 Medical Imaging with X-Radiation

X-ray photons directed at a patient do one of three things:

1. pass straight through the patient (who is mostly empty space) without deviating
from their trajectory, to strike the detector and form the medical image.
2. are stopped within the patient by ionising some of the patient’s atoms, leaving
their energy in the patient’s tissues. This absorbed energy contributes to the
patient’s “absorbed dose” of radiation.
3. or are deflected from their path so do not reach the detector. These “scattered”
photons don’t contribute to the image. They may increase the radiation dose to
the patient, and will irradiate people nearby. Hence radiographers wear protec-
tive “lead” aprons which absorb this (relatively low energy) scattered x-
radiation.
A diagnostic procedure uses the x-rays that pass, undeflected, through the body
to be detected by a device on which is produced a “shadow picture” of internal
structure. Bones, being dense tissue (containing Ca – element number 20, and
phos- phorus P – element number 15), absorb most of the x-rays that fall on them
so cast a shadow on the detector. Soft tissue is easily penetrated by x-rays so they
strike the measuring surface. Soft tissue contains mostly hydrogen, carbon and
oxygen atoms which are less dense than Ca & P. The higher is the energy of the x-
ray photon the more penetrating it is. Low energy photons (less than 20 keV) will
be stopped – even by soft tissue – before they get out of the body. These photons
will never influ- ence the radiograph so should not be allowed into the patient in
the first place. They are filtered out of the x-ray beam by passing the beam
through a sheet of aluminium or copper before the x-rays enter the patient.
X-radiation is a form of electromagnetic radiation that is produced by an
electri- cal machine. That is, when the machine is switched off no radiation is
present. X-ray photons have enough energy to remove electrons from their atoms,
that is, to

© Springer Science+Business Media Singapore 2016

437
M. Caon, Examination Questions and Answers in Basic Anatomy and
Physiology, DOI 10.1007/978-981-10-2332-3_17
ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
438 17 Ionising Radiation

create ions. Some x-rays have sufficient energy to break the chemical bonds
within molecules. This breaks the molecule into fragments that may undergo
unintended chemical reactions. This ability to deposit energy within a living cell
can cause harm to that cell. On the other hand, because atoms are mostly empty
space, the majority of x-ray photons pass through human tissue without colliding
with any- thing. The ability of most x-rays to pass through tissue and on emerging,
to be detected by some device, while some x-rays are absorbed within the tissue, is
the basis for the medical imaging modalities known as mammography, x-ray
pictures (radiographs) and CT scanning. Mammography uses x-rays below about
of 30 keV of energy, while CT scanning uses x-rays with energies up to 140 keV.
While ionis- ing radiation has the potential to cause damage to living cells, cells
have mecha- nisms to repair the damage. The radiation dose that is received by
someone undergoing an imaging procedure with x-rays (less than 10 mSv for CT)
is medi- cally acceptable considering the diagnostic information it provides and
the benefit of this for the patient.
The ability of x-radiation to damage living cells is utilised when a hospital
linear accelerator is used to produce the very high energy x-rays (4 MeV to 20
MeV) that are used to kill cancerous cells. These high energy x-rays are more
penetrating than those with lower energy, so can be used to target tumors deep
within the body.
1. Which statement about the differences between medical imaging using x-rays
and a nuclear medicine scan using gamma rays is correct?
A. an x-ray procedure leaves the patient with residual radioactivity while
nuclear medicine does not.
B. a gamma ray source can be switched off after which no gamma radiation
is produced while an x-ray source will continue to produce radiation until
the source decays.
C. x-rays produce an image of internal anatomy while a nuclear medicine
scan provides information about the functioning of an organ or tissue.
D. a beam of gamma rays is fired at the patient and detected on the other side,
while x-rays are produced by the nucleus of a radionuclide incorporated in
the patient’s body.
Answer is C: X-rays that pass through the body without being absorbed by the
body are used to produce an image of internal structure. In nuclear medicine,
a radioactive material is incorporated into the body, travels to certain organs
from where a gamma ray is emitted. If physiology is altered sufficiently to
affect the way the radioactive material moves about the body, the resulting
image pro- vides information about how much alteration there has been.
2. Conventional radiography – such as a chest x-ray (CXR) – differs from com-
puted tomography (CT) in what respect?
A. CT produces an image of all internal anatomy while in CXR, overlying
anatomical structures obscure the view of underlying structures.
B. in CT the patient is left with some residual radioactivity, but not with CXR.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
17.1 Medical Imaging with X-Radiation 439

C. CT produces a lower absorbed dose of radiation to the patient than does a

CXR
D. CT involves the use of ultrasound while a CXR results from x-rays.
Answer is A: CT mages are unobstructed by the “shadow” of overlying
structures.
3. Which of the following imaging modalities does NOT involve the use of
“ion- ising radiation”?
A. mammography
B. ultrasound
C. a scintigram using technetium
D. a chest x-ray
Answer is B: Ultrasound produces an oscillation in the particles of the body,
but does not use ionising electromagnetic radiation.
4. When inspecting an x-ray image, the order of densities from blackest to
whitest is:
A. Bone, water, fat, air
B. Air, fat, water, bone
C. Air, water, fat, bone
D. Bone, air, water, fat
Answer is B: The blackest part on an x-ray image is air, while the whitest is
bone.
5. Which of the following imaging modalities uses x-rays?
A. computed tomography (CT).
B. single photon emission computed tomography (SPECT).
C. positron emission tomography (PET).
D. nuclear medicine scan (scintigram).
Answer is A: CT machines generate x-rays. The others are all nuclear
medicine procedures.
6. Radiation which is “ionising” includes which of the following?
A. x-rays and gamma rays
B. infra-red radiation
C. radiation emitted by mobile phones
D. microwaves
Answer is A: The other three choices, while also being forms of electromag-
netic radiation, do not utilise energies that are sufficient to remove electrons
from their atoms.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
440 17 Ionising Radiation

7. The lead aprons that are used for protection of staff in diagnostic radiography
procedures do not provide protection against the ionising radiation used in
nuclear medicine or radiotherapy. Why is this? Because
A. charged particles are much easier to stop (are less penetrating) than
photons are.
B. gamma rays are more penetrating than x-rays even if both have the same
energy.
C. such aprons do not cover the arms, feet, head and neck.
D. the shielding provided by the aprons is not sufficient to stop photons with
energies above about 100 keV.
Answer is D: Diagnostic radiography uses x-rays with an average energy of
70 keV or less, which can be stopped by relatively thin amounts of lead (or
lead- like) material. In order to stop the gamma rays used in nuclear medicine
imag- ing, the thickness of the “aprons” would make them prohibitively heavy
to wear.
8. When compared to visible light, which is not very penetrating, why can radia-
tion such as x-rays and gamma rays pass right through the human body?
Because:
A. the density of the human body is relatively low.
B. they have no mass and no charge.
C. atoms in the body are mostly empty space.
D. they have very high energy.
Answer is D: X and gamma rays are high energy radiation, which means high
frequency, which means short wavelength, which means that many of the
pho- tons will pass through the body without interacting with any atoms. The
other three choices do not distinguish between different types of radiation.
9. Which of the following is true?
A. A patient exposed to diagnostic x-rays will emit x-rays for a short time
after the procedure.
B. A cancer patient treated with a megavoltage beam of x-rays will emit x-
rays for a short time after the treatment.
C. For a short time after having a bone scan using the radionuclide
technetium 99 m, the patient will emit gamma rays.
D. The human body does not contain any radioactive material unless it has
been exposed to man-made radioactive material.
Answer is C: A bone scan (any nuclear medicine scan) involves taking some
radio- active material into the body which then emits gamma rays to be
detected outside the body. The body takes some time to excrete the material
(and much of it decays) so until that happens, the body is more radioactive
than is usually the case.
10. What does the term Ionising radiation refer to?
A. the radiation that is emitted by ionised atoms.
B. that part of the electromagnetic spectrum with wavelengths less than 300
nm which has enough energy to produce ions.
ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
17.1 Medical Imaging with X-Radiation 441

C. alpha, beta and gamma rays spontaneously emitted from radionuclides.

D. radiation with enough energy to produce ionisation in the material which
absorbs it.
Answer is D: If the radiation produces ions when it interacts with any sub-
stance, then it is ionising radiation. Choice B is true but does not include par-
ticulate radiation. Choice C is true but does not include x-rays or cosmic rays.
11. Which of the following is a correct use of the unit known as the “electron
volt” (eV)?
A. One electron volt is the amount of radioactivity that results in one disinte-
gration per second.
B. Radiopharmaceuticals contain gamma photon emitting radionuclides
whose energy is usually in the range 100–250 keV
C. One electron volt is equal to 1.9 × 1016 joules of energy.
D. A photon of visible light has energy of about 1.5 MeV.
Answer is B: The eV is a unit of energy (not radioactivity). It is equal to 1.9 ×
10−16 joules of energy. Visible photons have energy of 1.5 eV or less.
12. Which one of the statements about the penetrating ability of radiation is true?
A. 750 keV gamma rays are more penetrating than 750 keV x-rays.
B. 140 keV gamma rays are more penetrating than 60 keV x-rays.
C. 2 MeV beta-rays (electrons) are more penetrating than 1 MeV gamma rays
D. 1 MeV gamma rays are more penetrating than 2 MeV x-rays.
Answer is B: gamma rays and x-rays are indistinguishable, once they have
travelled away from their site of production. So a 140 keV gamma or x-ray is
more penetrating than a lower energy one.
13. What may the term “ionising radiation” be applied to?
A. all electromagnetic radiation
B. radiation that produces ions when it interacts with matter
C. infra-red radiation
D. radiation that is emitted by ions
Answer is B: The production of ions (i.e. removal of electrons from an atom),
is the sign of ionising radiation. Such a change in the medium through which
radiation passes is significant.
14. What does it mean when an x-ray tube is operated at an accelerating voltage
of 120 kV?
A. the maximum energy that an x-ray photon can have will be 120 keV
B. the characteristic x-rays will have energy 120 keV

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
442 17 Ionising Radiation

C. all of the x-ray photons will have an energy of 120 keV

D. the x-ray beam will contain photons with every energy from 0 keV up to
120 keV
Answer is A: X-rays are emitted from the tube with a range of energies (a
spec- trum) which will range from mid-teens to low twenties of keV
(depending on the amount of “filtration” that the photons pass through) up to
the maximum value which will equal the accelerating voltage.
15. Why do some x-ray photons will pass through the human body without
deflec- tion? Because:
A. carbon, hydrogen and oxygen atoms are transparent to x-rays.
B. the energy of diagnostic x-rays is too low to produce interactions
C. the wavelength of x-rays is too long to interact with an object with the
dimensions of the human body.
D. the interior of atoms is mostly empty space
Answer is D: Apart from the positions where electrons and the nuclei are
located, the rest of the body is empty space through which photons can travel
unimpeded. They will interact only if they “hit” these sub-atomic particles.
The other answers contain errors.
16. How will increasing the filtration of an x-ray beam reduce the intensity of the
x-ray spectrum?
A. equally at all frequencies
B. more at lower frequencies than at higher frequencies
C. more at higher frequencies than at lower frequencies
D. only at lower frequencies
Answer is B: Lower frequency radiation is less penetrating than higher fre-
quency radiation, so the low frequency are preferentially absorbed compared
to high frequency radiation.
17. What is a difference between x-rays and gamma rays?
A. x-rays are ionising radiation and gamma rays are not
B. gamma rays have higher energies than x-rays
C. gamma rays can be turned off by switching the power supply off.
D. x-rays are produced in an electrical machine whereas gamma rays emerge
from an atomic nucleus.
Answer is D: Apart from the difference in how they are produced, x-rays and
gamma rays are the same phenomenon.
18. To what energy can an x-ray tube that is operated at 110 kV accelerate
electrons?
A. 110 eV
B. 110 keV

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
17.1 Medical Imaging with X-Radiation 443

C. 110 joules
D. 110,000 keV
Answer is B: An electron volt is the amount of energy gained by an electron
when it is accelerated by a potential difference of 1 volt. 110 keV is the
amount of energy gained by an electron when it is accelerated by a potential
difference of 110 kilovolt.
19. What is the purpose of adding filtration to an x-ray beam? To:
A. Prevent high energy photons entering the patient
B. Increase the mean energy of the beam.
C. Decrease the scattered radiation
D. Increase the ratio of low energy photons to high energy photons.
Answer is B: X-rays are produced in an x-ray tube with a range of energies.
Filtration will absorb the lowest energy photons more than higher energy
ones. This will result in the average energy of the remaining spectrum
increasing.
20. Consider the “inverse square law”. Compared to being 1 m from a point x-ray
source, what will be the photon flux at a distance of 4 m from the source?
A. 16 times as great
B. 8 times as great
C. one eighth as great
D. one sixteenth as great
Answer is D: “Inverse square” means at double the distance, the flux will be
one half squared of the original flux (½)2 = 1/4. At 4x the distance, the flux will
be (¼)2 = 1/16
21. What is the purpose of an intensifying screen?
A. It converts a small number of x-ray photons into a large number of visible
light photons.
B. It converts low energy x-ray photons into high energy visible light
photons.
C. It improves the absorption efficiency of x-rays.
D. It protects the radiologist’s eyes from the damage that would be caused by
x-rays.
Answer is A: it converts x-rays (which have high energies but are invisible)
into visible light photons. Because visible light photons have low energy, an
x-ray photon can be made to produce lots of them.
22. One difference between the x-radiation in the primary beam and the scattered
radiation is that:
A. Photons in the primary beam degrade contrast in radiographic images.
B. Scattered radiation is more penetrating than the primary beam.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
444 17 Ionising Radiation

C. Scattered radiation may be absorbed in the imager.

D. Scattered radiation is travelling at an angle to the main beam.
Answer is D: “Scattered” radiation has interacted with an atom in the medium
so is diverted from the direction of the primary beam.
23. The advantage of Computed Tomography (CT) over conventional
radiography is:
A. CT delivers lower doses than conventional radiography.
B. CT images are faster to acquire than conventional radiographs.
C. CT produces a cross-sectional image that is not obscured by overlying
ana- tomical structures.
D. CT projects a 3D structure onto a 2D image.
Answer is C: It is the ability to image internal structures without having them
partially obscured by the tissue on either side as is the case for “conventional”
radiography, that makes CT such a useful diagnostic tool. (Also there is no
need to cut the person open to see what is inside!)
24. The contrast of a CT image displayed on a monitor may be increased by
A. increasing the window width
B. increasing the window level
C. decreasing the window width
D. decreasing the window level
Answer is C: Decreasing the width of the “window” means restricting the
range of gray scale displayed on the monitor screen (0 to 255), to a more
limited range of the available Hounsfield numbers (−1000 for air, to 3000 for
dense bone). A lung window may be −1250 to +250; a soft tissue window
may be
−160 to +240; a bone window may be −650 to +1350.
25. Which one of the following beams is the most penetrating?
A. 2 MeV gamma rays
B. 2 MeV x-rays
C. 4 MeV x-rays
D. 8 MeV x-rays
Answer is D: Penetrating ability of electromagnetic radiation increases as
energy does.
26. Exposing a foetus or young baby to x-rays should be avoided. What is the
cause of the danger most likely to be due to?
A. Denaturing of cells due to the increase in temperature in cells absorbing
radiation.
B. Damage to a cell’s DNA.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
17.2 Radioactivity, Radiotherapy, Nuclear Medicine, Radiation Safety 445

C. The baby becoming radioactive.

D. The formation of a blood clot.
Answer is B: X-rays are ionising radiation. This means that ions may be
formed from the atoms that make up DNA. In this case, the chemical bonds
between atoms will be broken and the molecule will be changed.

17.2 Radioactivity, Radiotherapy, Nuclear

Medicine, Radiation Safety

Radioactive atoms spontaneously emit some form of ionising radiation. In doing

so, they become an atom of a different element (if they emit α or β particles) or
they lose energy without changing to a different element (if they emit a Ɣ photon).
The radioactivity of a sample of material is characterised by the unit becquerel
(Bq), where 1 Bq = 1 emission per second.
Radioactive atoms that emit low energy (100–200 keV) gamma radiation can
be attached to special molecules that are given intravenously to a patient. These
carrier molecules are designed so that they transport the radioactive atoms through
the blood stream to aggregate in the tissues of interest. Large concentrations of
radioac- tivity show up as a hot spot while anatomical regions that fail to
accumulate radio- activity (perhaps because their function is impaired) are “cold”.
The gamma radiation emitted from particular tissues can be detected as it emerges
from the body to provide an image of the tissue and of how it is working. The
image is a “scinti- gram” and is acquired by a nuclear medicine procedure. Such a
patient is “radioac- tive” until most of the radioactive atoms have decayed. The
most commonly used isotope is technetium 99m which has a half-life of about 6
hours and emits gamma radiation as photons of energy 140 keV. This means that
after 6 hrs, half of the radioactive atoms have decayed and that after 12 hours, only
one quarter of the radioactive technetium atoms remain.
Radiotherapy can utilise high energy x-radiation from a linac, or the radiation
emitted from radioactive atoms to kill the cancerous cells in a tumor. In the case of
the latter, radioactive sources are placed within an applicator and the applicator is
inserted into or adjacent to the tumor to be treated. This is called brachytherapy.
The amount of energy used to treat a tumor is about 60 Gy (gray), where 1 Gy = 1
joule of energy deposited per 1 kg of tissue.
Patients who undergo a nuclear medicine procedure will receive a dose of
radia- tion which is less than 10 mSv. Such a dose is regarded as “small” and is
considered to be medically justified given the diagnostic information produced
and the benefit of this for the patient. For the period that a patient is significantly
radioactive, they are cautioned to minimise the time that they spend close to
another person. This is because if you halve the time spent near someone, they
will receive half as much dose. Furthermore if they double their distance from the
other person, the other person will receive one quarter the dose.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
446 17 Ionising Radiation

1. Which of the following statements about radioactivity is NOT correct?

A. some of the atoms in our body are radioactive.
B. radioactivity occurs naturally in the environment.
C. radioactivity is associated with the nucleus of an atom.
D. radioactivity is involved in diagnostic x-rays.
Answer is D: Diagnostic x-rays are not associated with radioactivity.
2. If a patient who has been administered a radiopharmaceutical containing tech-
netium 99m (halflife = 6 hours), is allowed to go home 36 hours after the
administration, what fraction of the original radioactivity is left in the patient
(ignoring excretion from the body)?
A. 1/216
B. 1/64
C. 1/36
D. 1/6
Answer is B: After every 6 hours, the amount of technetium 99m that remains
is one half of the amount that was present 6 hours ago. 36/6 = 6, so six half-
lives will elapse over 36 hours, thus the amount remaining is: ½ × ½ × ½ × ½
×½×
½ = (½)6 = 1/64
3. In radiotherapy, why is the patient’s irradiation treatment “fractionated”, that
is, consist of (say) 20 sessions and spread over (say) 4 weeks – rather than
given all at 1 session?
A. Fractionation allows time for the normal healthy tissue that is also irradi-
ated, to recover in between irradiations.
B. Extremely high energy electrons bombard the target of a linear
accelerator, fractionation is necessary to allow the x-ray target to cool.
C. In order to irradiate the tumor over a period of time that it is growing.
D. Irradiating in a single session takes too long, people cannot remain immo-
bile for the time it would require.
Answer is A: Radiotherapy also damages the healthy tissue through which it
passes. By choosing a different path for the radiotherapy beam through the
body for the next “fraction”, whilst at the same time ensuring that the tumor is
always in the beam, allows the healthy tissue time to recover.
4. Which of the following statements about radioactivity is correct?
A. X-rays can be produced by radioactivity.
B. The spontaneous emission of microwaves from the nucleus of an atom is
one form of radioactivity.
C. Radioactivity is the spontaneous emission of particles or photons from the
nucleus of an atom.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
17.2 Radioactivity, Radiotherapy, Nuclear Medicine, Radiation Safety 447

D. Radioactivity is involved in the FM radio frequency band but not the AM

radio band.
Answer is C: Radioactivity involves the nucleus of an atom. Microwaves are
not produced by radioactivity. While radiation from a nucleus could remove
an inner shell electron from another atom, and when this electron is replaced
by another “falling” into its place while emitting an x-ray photon, this is not
classed as radioactivity.
5. Given that a radiopharmaceutical containing the radionuclide technetium 99m
(4399mTc) has an activity of 4 MBq immediately prior to injection into a patient.
About 12 hours later the patient is measured to have an activity of about 1
MBq. How long is the half-life of technetium 99m?
A. 6 hours
B. 12 hours
C. 24 hours
D. 48 hours
Answer is A: After one half life, half of the radioactive atoms have decayed,
so only half remain. One quarter (= ½ × ½) remains after 4 hours, so two half-
lives have elapsed in the 12 hour period. 12/2 = 6 hours.
6. Why are radioisotopes that emit low energy (100–250 keV) gamma rays pre-
ferred for the diagnostic procedures of nuclear medicine? Because:
A. high energy gamma rays are too easily stopped by body tissue.
B. radioisotopes that emit gammas within this energy range have a half-life
that is ideal for diagnostic procedures.
C. photons of this energy are sufficiently penetrating to escape from the body
but are able to be detected.
D. charged particles are too difficult to shield against.
Answer is C: There is a trade off where the photons should be penetrating
enough so that they are not stopped within the body, but not so penetrating
that too few are stopped by the detector placed next to the body. This energy
range satisfies both needs.
7. Given the statement: “Your exposure to radiation varies inversely with the
square of your distance from the source of radiation”, what is the correct way
to finish the sentence? “If you increased the distance between you and a
patient with a radioactive implant, from 1 to 3 m, your exposure would”:
A. increase by a factor of nine.
B. decrease by a factor of one ninth.
C. decrease by a factor of one third.
D. increase by a factor of three.
Answer is B: If you triple your distance, your exposure would" be one third of
a third of your exposure while closer. (1/3)2 = 1/9

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
448 17 Ionising Radiation

8. Why is radiotherapy using high energy x-rays, an effective way of treating

some cancer? Because
A. if enough energy is deposited in tumor cells, they can be killed.
B. most of the x-rays pass through the body without harming healthy tissue.
C. the dose to the skin surface is lower than with low energy x-rays.
D. high energy x-rays do not kill healthy cells.
Answer is A: The ability of x-rays to be switched off and on and to deposit
enough energy within a cell to kill it, makes it suitable for treatment of cancer
tumors.
9. Which of the following pairs of nuclides are isotopes?
60
A. 27 Co and 2860Ni
99 98
B. 43 Tc and 42 Mo
40 19
C. 19 K and 40 K
40 39
D. 19 K and 19 K

Answer is D: Isotopes are two forms of the same element that have different
numbers of neutrons in the nucleus. This means same symbol, and same
atomic number (subscript), but different mass number (superscript).
10. What may the term “radioactive” be correctly used to describe?
A. a diagnostic x-ray machine used to produce radiographs.
B. a linear accelerator used to produce x-rays for radiotherapy.
C. a patient undergoing a nuclear medicine scan.
D. a patient undergoing a CT (computed tomography) examination.
Answer is C: A patient who has been prepared for a NM scan has had a radio-
isotope incorporated into their body, so are themselves (temporarily)
radioactive.
11. What may the term radioactivity correctly used to refer to?
A. The spontaneous emission of electromagnetic radiation from the nucleus
of an atom.
B. The particles or photons emitted from an unstable nucleus.
C. The emission of particulate radiation from a radionuclide.
D. The alpha, beta or X-radiation which emanates from some atomic nuclei.
Answer is B: Unstable nucleus = radioactive. Choices A & C also describe
radioactivity but not in as general terms as choice B.
12. What does the physical half-life of a pure sample of radioactive material refer
to?
A. the amount of time taken for half of the radioactive atoms to decay.
B. half of the time that it would take for all of the radioactive atoms to decay.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
17.2 Radioactivity, Radiotherapy, Nuclear Medicine, Radiation Safety 449

C. the average time taken for any particular radioactive atom to decay.
D. the time it takes for half of a sample of ingested radioisotope to be cleared
from the body.
Answer is A: The half-life of a particular radionuclide is the time it takes for
half of the remaining atoms of that particular radionuclide to decay. Choice B
is not the same thing.
13. The radionuclide technetium 99m (4399mTc) is often incorporated into
radiophar- maceuticals. When it decays by gamma emission the daughter
nucleus may be represented as 4399X (X is not the real chemical symbol
for the daughter nucleus!). Which of the following statements is correct?
A. The daughter nucleus displays chemical behaviour identical to 4399mTc.
B. X is the symbol of a chemical element different from technetium.
C. The daughter nucleus detaches from the radiopharmaceutical and is
excreted.
D. The daughter nuclide is not radioactive.
Answer is A: “X” is still technetium as the atomic number (43) has not
changed. Consequently, the chemical behaviour of the two nuclides is the
same. A daugh- ter nucleus may or may not be radioactive (In this case it is).
14. If the halflife of technetium 99 m is 6 hours. After five half-lives what
fraction of the original amount of technetium would remain?
1
A.
5
1
B.
10
1
C.
30
1
D.
32
Answer is D: The half-life of a particular radionuclide is the time it takes for
half of the remaining atoms of that particular radionuclide to decay. (½)5 =
1/32
15. Why is increasing the distance between yourself and a source of radiation is
an effective way of reducing your exposure? Because:
A. the amount of exposure to radiation is inversely proportional to distance.
B. the intensity of radiation decreases as the square of the distance.
C. the intensity of radiation decreases exponentially with distance.
D. an expanse of air is an effective shield for gamma and x radiation.
Answer is B: As radiation leaves a point source it diverges and spreads equally
in all directions over an ever expanding spherical surface. A spherical surface
area is proportional to the radius squared, so exposure to radiation diminishes
as it spreads more thinly in space.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
450 17 Ionising Radiation

16. If the half-life of technetium 99m is 6 hours. After seven half-lives what frac-
tion of the original amount of technetium would remain?
1
A.
7
1
B.
14
1
C.
42
1
D.
128
Answer is D: The half-life of a particular radionuclide is the time it takes for
half of the remaining atoms of that particular radionuclide to decay. (½) 7 =
1/128. This means that after 7 half-lives, more than 99.2 % of the radionuclide
has decayed.
17. Which statement about the atom and its nucleus is correct?
A. The nucleus contains neutrons with a positive charge and protons with no
charge.
B. Most of the volume of the atom is occupied by the nucleus.
C. The majority of the atom’s mass is due to the electrons
D. The nucleus is one ten thousandth times the diameter of the atom.
Answer is D: The nucleus is tiny compared to the atomic diameter. Choice A
is wrong as protons have the positive charge and neutrons have no charge.
18. The term ‘radioactive’ when applied to the nucleus of an atom refers to which
one of the following phenomena?
A. The spontaneous emission of a particle or of electromagnetic radiation.
B. The emission of x-rays, gamma rays, alpha particles or beta particles.
C. The formation of a daughter nucleus by the decay of a parent nucleus.
D. The spontaneous emission from a nucleus which has the optimum ratio of
neutrons to protons.
Answer is A: Choice B is wrong as x-rays don’t come from a nucleus. Choice
C is wrong as sometimes a nucleus is in an “excited” state and returns to
ground state by emitting a gamma ray while the nuclear structure is
unchanged. Choice D is wrong as a nucleus which has the optimum ratio of
neutrons to protons is not unstable.
19. Which statement is correct? Radioactivity is the emission from the nucleus of
an atom of:
A. electrons or beta particles or gamma rays.
B. alpha or beta particles or X rays.
C. electrons or beta particles or X rays.
D. alpha or beta particles or gamma rays.
Answer is D: X-rays are not involved in radioactivity. Electrons are beta
particles.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
17.2 Radioactivity, Radiotherapy, Nuclear Medicine, Radiation Safety 451

20. What are isotopes? Atoms of the one element whose nuclei:
A. contain the same number of protons and neutrons.
B. have different numbers of protons.
C. have different numbers of neutrons.
D. do not have the optimum neutron to proton ratio.
Answer is C: The number of neutrons does not affect the nature of the
element.
21. Which one of the following statements best describes what ‘ionising radiation’
is?
A. High frequency electromagnetic radiation.
B. Charged particles that are emitted from radionuclides.
C. Radiation that is emitted from a radioactive nucleus.
D. Radiation that can remove electrons from matter.
Answer is D: To produce an ion, one or more electrons must be removed from
an atom.
22. Which of the following is not a form of ionising radiation?
A. beta particles
B. gamma rays
C. infra-red rays
D. x-rays
Answer is C: Every object emits infra-red rays in proportion to its
temperature. IR rays have too little energy to ionise the medium that they
strike.
23. Alpha and beta rays share several properties. Which of the following is one?
That they
A. are electrically charged.
B. both contain protons.
C. are forms of electromagnetic radiation.
D. have the same mass.
Answer is A: Alpha particles are He++ nuclei, while beta particles are electrons
(negative charge) or positrons (positive charge).
24. Which of the statements about the following three-step radioactive decay
series is TRUE?
molybdenum 99 → β + technetium 99m
technetium 99m → γ + technetium 99
technetium 99 → β + ruthenium 99
A. technetium 99 m is the parent of ruthenium 99
B. molybdenum 99 is the parent of technetium 99

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
452 17 Ionising Radiation

C. ruthenium 99 is the daughter of molybdenum 99

D. technetium 99 is the grand-daughter of molybdenum 99
Answer is D: Technetium 99 results after two steps, from molybdenum 99.
But “grand-daughter” may not be true technical terminology.
25. In the following nuclear reaction, 238U → X + 4He , one of the products ( 4He)
92 2 2
is an alpha particle. What is the other product (X)?
234
A. 90 Th
234
B. 91 Pa
236
C. 21 Pa
236
D. 90 Th
Answer is A: Consider the mass numbers: 238 − 4 = 234. Then the atomic
numbers: 92 − 2 = 90. Hence the nuclide X must be Thorium 234.
26. Which nuclide does the symbol X in the nuclear reaction 99mTc → X + 0γ refer
43 0
to?
99m
A. 43 Tc
99
B. 43 Tc
99
C. 44 Ru
99
D. 42 Mo
Answer is B: As a gamma photon has been emitted, nuclide X must have the
same atomic and mass numbers as technetium 99m. What has happened is
that the metastable (hence “m” in the symbol) state of technetium has de-
excited to technetium.
27. In the nuclear reaction: 60Co → 0γ + X , what does the symbol ‘X’ represent?
27 0

60
A. 28 Co
59
B. 27 Co
60
C. 27 Co
60
D. 26 Co
Answer is C: As a gamma photon has been emitted, nuclide X must have the
same atomic and mass numbers as cobalt 60. Choice A & B are incorrect as
cobalt has an atomic number of 27.
28. Which of the following is the principal unit used when measuring the energy
of ionising radiation?
A. joule
B. electron-volt
C. gray
D. sievert
Answer is B: the electron volt, or keV or MeV is preferred to the joule as the
energy of a photon is a tiny fraction of one joule.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
17.2 Radioactivity, Radiotherapy, Nuclear Medicine, Radiation Safety 453

29. What time does the half-life of a radioactive sample refer to? The time for the
A. activity to halve.
B. count rate to double
C. parent nuclei to decay
D. number of nuclei to halve
Answer is A: This is the best answer, although the daughter nuclei may them-
selves also be radioactive and so contribute to the radioactivity of the sample.
When a nucleus decays, it (or the daughter nucleus) is still there, so choice D
is wrong.
30. ‘Half-life’ when applied to atoms of a radioactive isotope refers to the:
A. midpoint of the time span for which the isotope will emit its radiation
B. effective time for which the isotope is considered to be dangerous.
C. length of time taken for half of the isotope to emit its radiation.
D. time after which the radioactivity of the sample is half of its original value.
Answer is C: This is the best answer. Half-life refers to the atoms of an
isotope of the one element. The daughter nuclei may themselves also be
radioactive and so contribute to the radioactivity of the sample now
containing a mixture of original isotope atoms and daughter atoms.
31. In an experiment to determine the half-life of a particular radionuclide, mea-
surements of the mass of that nuclide are made. If masses of 8 micrograms
and 2 micrograms are recorded at intervals 8 days apart, what is the half-life
of the nuclide?
A. 8 days
B. 6 days
C. 4 days
D. 2 days
Answer is C: If we start with 8 μg of a radionuclide and when it decays it
becomes another nuclide, then after one half-life there will be 4 μg remaining
and after another half-life, there will be 2 μg. Hence two half-lives have
elapsed during the 8 day period. This means one half life is 8 ÷ 2 = 4 days.
32. A particular radionuclide has a half-life of six hours. When first measured, its
activity is 10,000 Bq. Twelve hours later, what will its activity be?
A. 0 Bq
B. 1250 Bq
C. 2500 Bq
D. 5000 Bq
Answer is C: After one half-life the starting activity of 10,00 Bq will be
halved to 5000 Bq. After another half-life the activity will be halved again
from 5000 to 2500 Bq.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
454 17 Ionising Radiation

33. What is a radionuclide with a short half-life (say 5 hours) said to be?
A. highly radioactive.
B. weakly radioactive.
C. of high penetrating ability.
D. of low penetrating ability.
Answer is A: A radionuclide with a short half-life must be emitting a lot of
radiation in that time as half of the nuclei present will have emitted their
radia- tion. Hence it may be termed “highly radioactive”, albeit for a short
time.
34. Which of the following does NOT contribute to the background radiation?
A. cosmic rays
B. fluorescent lights
C. radon gas
D. uranium
Answer is B: Fluorescent lights contain mercury vapour at low pressure
which emits ultraviolet light when excited by the passage of electrons through
the tube. The UV photons are absorbed by the phosphor that coats the inside
of the tube which re-emits the energy as visible light. No ionising radiation is
emitted.
35. Which one of the following sources contributes to the background radiation?
A. medical x-rays of bones.
B. potassium 40 and carbon 14 in our bodies.
C. ultraviolet B radiation from the sun.
D. microwave radiation.
Answer is B: Background radiation is that radiation that is impossible to avoid
as it is part of our natural environment. Potassium 40 and carbon 14 are two
naturally occurring radionuclides that form part of the background radiation.
36. Which one of the following radiations, all of 1 MeV energy, is the least
penetrating?
A. alpha rays
B. beta rays
C. gamma rays
D. x-rays
Answer is A: Alpha rays are doubly ionised helium nuclei, which, because of
their large mass and double charge interact strongly with any matter through
which they pass. They are able to travel a mere few centimetres in air and a
fraction of a millimetre in solid matter.
37. Which is the most penetrating nuclear radiation?
A. alpha particles of energy 7 MeV.
B. beta particles of 0.5 MeV energy.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
17.2 Radioactivity, Radiotherapy, Nuclear Medicine, Radiation Safety 455

C. x-rays with energy of 5 MeV.

D. gamma rays with 140 keV of energy.
Answer is C: X-rays are photons so have no mass or charge. Hence they
interact only weakly with the matter through which they pass. In addition, 5
MeV are very energetic x-rays so are more penetrating than gamma ray photons
with less energy.
38. Suppose a gamma source is placed 10 cm from a radiation detector and in suc-
cession, a 1 cm thick slab of each of the following materials is used to shield
the source. For which one would the count rate be lowest?
A. lead
B. wood
C. aluminium
D. cardboard
Answer is A: Shielding material with the highest density is able to absorb the
greatest amount of gamma photons. Lead has the highest density so would
reduce the count rate the most.
39. Why is a shield made of lead effective in reducing the exposure to gamma
rays? Because the
A. lead shield absorbs all of the gamma rays.
B. number of gamma rays absorbed increases exponentially with the
thickness of the shield.
C. number of gamma rays absorbed increases in an inverse square fashion
with thickness.
D. lead shield reflects all the gamma rays.
Answer is B: The number of gamma photons that can pass through a medium
is described by an exponential relationship. Their number decreases exponen-
tially as the thickness increases.
40. Why are gamma rays are able to penetrate “solid” walls but alpha or beta rays
cannot? Because
A. the speed of gamma rays (3 × 108 m/s) is very much faster than either
alpha or beta radiation.
B. gamma rays do not have an electric charge whereas alpha is charged +2
and beta -1.
C. to a gamma ray, the atoms of the wall appear to be mostly empty space.
D. gamma rays possess much more energy than either alpha or beta rays.
Answer is B: It is the absence of an electrical charge that allows photons to
pass by electrons and atomic nuclei with being attracted or repelled by them.
This means that photons are undeflected unless they suffer a direct hit.
41. What does the unit the sievert describe?
A. radioactivity
B. absorbed radiation dose

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
456 17 Ionising Radiation

C. absorbed radiation equivalent dose

D. energy of radiation
Answer is C: Absorbed radiation dose is measured in “gray” (=joule/kg).
When the different types of radiation are weighted by their biological effect
(so that a gamma ray is “equivalent” to an alpha particle say), the gray
becomes the sievert.
42. Why is keeping one’s distance from a source of radiation effective in
minimis- ing exposure? Because
A. exposure is inversely proportional to distance
B. exposure decreases as the inverse square of distance
C. exposure decreases exponentially with distance
D. electromagnetic radiation is absorbed by air
Answer is B: If you multiply your distance from the source by “r”, then your
exposure is multiplied by 1/r2 (that is, decreased).
43. Why is an absorbed radiation dose of 10 grays, absorbed over 1 day (i.e.
acutely) more damaging to living tissue than the same dose received as 1000
exposures of 0.01 grays over 10 years (i.e. chronically)?
A. 0.01 grays is below the threshold dose that is known to damage cells.
B. Rapidly dividing cells are more susceptible to damage from acute doses of
radiation.
C. Healthy cells can recover from low levels of radiation if the whole body is
not exposed.
D. Cells can repair radiation damage if given time between exposures to do so.
Answer is D: There are repair mechanisms within a cell that can repair radia-
tion damage, given time and damage that is not too severe.
44. A radiopharmaceutical is comprised of two components. These are
A. a gamma emitter and a beta emitter.
B. technetium 99 and a non-radioactive carrier.
C. a non-radioactive carrier and a radionuclide.
D. a radionuclide and a radioactive carrier.
Answer is C: A radiopharmaceutical requires a gamma emitting nuclide and a
non-radioactive carrier to transport the radionuclide to the organ(s) of interest.
Most often Tc99m (not Tc99) is used
45. Which one of the following statements about the radionuclide selected for
inclusion in radiopharmaceuticals is NOT correct?
A. it should have a short half life
B. it should emit alpha or beta rays
C. it should emit gamma rays in the range 100–250 keV
D. all the atoms should be radioactive
Answer is B: Particulate radiation (alpha and beta rays) is not penetrating
enough to pass out of the body so cannot be used in radiopharmaceuticals.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
17.2 Radioactivity, Radiotherapy, Nuclear Medicine, Radiation Safety 457

46. Which of the statements about radionuclides selected for inclusion in radio-
pharmaceuticals used in medical imaging is correct? They should:
A. have a long half-life.
B. emit alpha or beta particles.
C. be insoluble in water.
D. emit low energy gamma rays.
Answer is D: Low energy gamma rays are sufficiently penetrating so that
most will pass out of the body and be available for detection. But not so
penetrating that they will pass through a “gamma camera” without being
detected.
47. In the nuclear reaction 99Mo → X + 99mTc , what does the symbol X represent?
42 43

A. an electron.
B. a positron.
C. an x-ray.
D. a gamma ray.
Answer is A: Mass number must be conserved, hence 99 = s + 99 this means s
= 0. Atomic number must be conserved, hence 42 = a + 43 this means a = −1.
The particle X with zero mass and charge of negative one is an electron (a
beta negative particle).
48. Why are radionuclides that emit low energy gamma radiation preferred to
other radionuclides for in vivo diagnosis using a nuclear medicine technique?
Because
A. other forms of radiation are emitted with too much energy.
B. high energy gamma radiation is not penetrating enough.
C. most of the radiation will emerge from the patient’s body.
D. sources of x-rays require more extensive technical support than gamma
sources.
Answer is C: If most gamma photons emerge from the body, the maximum
amount of information will be available and the minimum amount of radiation
dose will be deposited in the patient.
49. Why is a radionuclide with a short half-life and which emits low energy
gamma radiation preferred for in vivo diagnosis? Because they
A. have a low activity.
B. are highly penetrating.
C. emit their radiation in a short time span.
D. are very damaging to cancerous tissue.
Answer is C: Having a short half-life means that lot of radiation is emitted in
a short time period. If the radiation was emitted over a long time, the patient
would be required to lie motionless for that long time while the image (the
scintigram) was produced.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
458 17 Ionising Radiation

50. Why is a 150 keV gamma emitter more useful for nuclear medicine than an
800 keV gamma emitter? Because
A. more 150 keV photons are stopped in the detecting crystal of the gamma
camera.
B. 800 keV photons cannot penetrate the body in sufficient quantities to pro-
duce an image.
C. a 150 keV photon results in a lower dose to the patient than an 800 keV
photon.
D. 800 keV photons require more shielding for the staff.
Answer is A: 800 keV gamma photons are more penetrating than 150 keV
pho- tons, so fewer of them will be detected by the “camera”. Hence longer
expo- sure, or a greater dose of radiopharmaceutical would be required to
produce an image.
51. Why are radioactive isotopes of the stable elements that occur normally in the
body useful for tracing metabolic pathways? Because
A. such isotopes undergo chemical reactions that are identical to those of sta-
ble isotopes.
B. radioisotopes are indistinguishable from non-radioactive isotopes of the
same element.
C. nuclear radiation can be detected outside the body and be used to produce
an image of internal structures.
D. radioactive forms of elements that exist naturally in the body do not pro-
duce toxic effects when used as a radiopharmaceutical.
Answer is A: Radioactive forms of elements that occur naturally in the body
will be handled by the body in exactly the same way as the non-radioactive
isotope. Hence their location within the body can be traced by the gamma
radi- ation they emit.
52. X rays for radiation therapy are produced by
A. a linear accelerator
B. cobalt 60
C. an afterloading brachytherapy device
D. technetium 99 m
Answer is A: A compact medical linear accelerator is used to produce high
energy x-rays for radiotherapy. The other choices all involve gamma ray pro-
ducing radionuclides.
53. What advantage does brachytherapy as a form of radiation therapy have over
external beam therapy (also called teletherapy)?
A. In brachytherapy, the radiation does not have to pass through healthy
tissue to reach the tumour.
B. In brachytherapy, there is the choice of using electrons as well as gamma rays.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
17.2 Radioactivity, Radiotherapy, Nuclear Medicine, Radiation Safety 459

C. In teletherapy the energy of the radiation is limited to the energies

available from the radionuclide.
D. In teletherapy the total radiation dose must be given all at the one session.
Answer is A: In brachytherapy, the radioactive isotope is placed adjacent to or
within the structure to be irradiated, so healthy tissue receives less dose.
54. In a radiotherapy treatment plan for a deep tumour, which of the following is
part of the treatment plan?
A. Saturating the healthy tissue with oxygen to minimise its sensitivity to
radiation.
B. Using a single large dose to destroy all the tumour cells quickly.
C. Using low energy alpha particles in order to minimise dose to healthy
tissue.
D. Splitting of the total dose into a number of smaller doses given daily.
Answer is D: “Fractionation” of the dose allows the healthy tissue some time
to recover between irradiations. It also allows the tumor to be targeted from
another direction by passing the beam through a different part of the body.
55. Why is it possible to trace metabolic pathways in the body using radioactive
isotopes of the naturally occurring elements in the body? Because, radioactive
isotopes
A. are used in such small quantities that they produce no toxic effects.
B. have a very short half-life so soon decay to safe levels.
C. are chemically identical to non-radioactive isotopes of the same element.
D. are physically identical to non-radioactive isotopes of the same element.
Answer is C: Radioactive forms of elements that occur naturally in the body
will be chemically handled by the body in exactly the same way as the non-
radioactive isotope. Hence their location within the body can be traced by the
gamma radiation they emit.
56. How has remote-controlled after-loading reduced the dose to staff involved in
brachytherapy?
A. Patient exposure to radiation is reduced.
B. The radionuclides are only in place in an operating theatre.
C. Staff members are never exposed to radiation during the treatment.
D. Only one staff member at a time is required in the brachytherapy room.
Answer is C: The radioactive sources are loaded into their applicators
automati- cally and remotely when staff have left the room. They are
automatically retrieved and returned to a shielded safe when staff enter the
room.
57. What does the ‘maximum permissible dose’ of radiation (100 mSv/5 yr
period) refer to?
A. The average dose for the general population as a whole.
B. The dose for an individual not exposed to radiation through their work.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
460 17 Ionising Radiation

C. The dose allowed to people exposed to radiation through their work.

D. The dose above which radiation is likely to cause harm to humans.
Answer is C: 100 mSv/5 yr is the permitted dose to workers who because they
are employed derive the benefits of employment which outweighs the small
theoretical detriment they suffer due to their exposure.
58. What does the ‘relative biological effectiveness’ (RBE) of radiation depends
on?
A. The recommended maximum permissible dose of radiation.
B. The amount of radiation absorbed by the whole body.
C. The dose of radiation that is actually absorbed in the tissue.
D. The energy deposited in the tissue per millimetre of distance travelled
through the tissue.
Answer is D: If radiation deposits energy of 1 MeV along its path of 1 mm,
more damage would be produced (the radiation would be more “effective”)
than if the 1 MeV of energy deposited was spread out along a path length of
10 cm.
59. Which of the following body parts is the least sensitive to radiation?
A. lens of the eye
B. red bone marrow
C. gonads
D. hands
Answer is D: The other three body parts are all named by the ICRP and have
been assigned a “radiation weighting factor” determined by their known
sensi- tivity to radiation.
60. The intensity of gamma radiation decreases as the inverse square of the dis-
tance. What does this statement mean? If the distance doubles, then the
intensity
A. doubles.
B. is halved.
C. is four times as great.
D. is one quarter as great.
Answer is D: If the distance doubles, the inverse is ½. The square of the
inverse is (½)2 = 1/4
61. At a distance of one metre, exposure to a particular radionuclide is found to
result in an absorbed dose of 12 mGy. If the time of exposure remains
constant what will the absorbed dose be at a distance of two metres?
A. 3 mGy
B. 6 mGy

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
17.2 Radioactivity, Radiotherapy, Nuclear Medicine, Radiation Safety 461

C. 12 mGy
D. 24 mGy
Answer is A: If the distance doubles, the dose would be expected to decrease
according to the inverse square of distance: (½)2 = ¼. One quarter of 12 is 3.
62. Which of the following absorbed radiation dose equivalents would cause the
most harm to your body?
A. 0.05 sievert per year to the whole body for the human lifespan (75 years) =
3.75 Sv.
B. 1 sievert (acutely) to the gonads only.
C. 40 sievert (acutely) to the heart only.
D. 7 sievert (acutely) to the whole body.
Answer is D: This dose given acutely to the entire body will probably be
lethal. Higher doses can be withstood if only a limited part of the body is
exposed, or if the dose is accumulated over a long time.
63. Of the following, which one would be considered the lowest level for a fatal
whole body dose of radiation if received as an acute dose?
A. 100 R
B. 10 Sv
C. 100 mSv
D. 10 mSv
Answer is B: Ten Sievert acutely is a lethal dose. 100 R is close to 1 Sv dose
to soft tissue. Both 10 mSv and probably also 100 mSv would produce no
notice- able effect on the body.
64. A caesium 137 source produces an absorbed radiation dose of 400 milligray/
hour at a distance of 1 metre. What would be the dose received at a distance
of 5 metres in two and a half hours? (consider the effect of distance first)
A. 16 mGy.
B. 20 mGy.
C. 40 mGy.
D. 100 mGy.
Answer is C: At a distance of 5 m, the dose would be (1/5) 2 = 1/25 of that at a
distance of 1 m. Hence dose would be 400/25 = 16 mGy/hr. If exposed for 2½
hours, dose would be 2½ × 16 = 40 mGy
65. If a thickness of 7.35 mm of lead can absorb half of the 1 MeV gamma
photons that enter the lead, then what fraction of gamma rays will be absorbed
by twice this thickness (i.e. 14.7 mm)?
A. Three quarters
B. Seven eighths

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
462 17 Ionising Radiation

C. Fifteen sixteenths
D. Sixteen sixteenths
Answer is A: Since half of the gamma photons are absorbed by 7.35 mm Pb,
then that is the “half value layer”. A second half value layer placed after the first
one would again absorb half of the photons that emerge from the first slab of
lead. This would leave half of a half, that is, one quarter emerging from the
second half value layer. Hence ¾ have been absorbed.
66. The ‘half value layer’ for gamma rays of 0.5 MeV is 0.42 cm of lead. What
percentage of the original ray would penetrate four half value layers?
A. 50 %
B. 25 %
C. 12.5 %
D. 6.25 %
Answer is D: Four half value layers would absorb all but ½ × ½ × ½ × ½ =
1/16 (6.25 %) of the photons.
67. Given that the half-value layer of lead for a gamma photon of energy 0.5 MeV
is 0.42 cm, which of the situations listed below would result in the LEAST
exposure to radiation? Staying in the same room as the gamma source for
A. 5 minutes at a distance of 1 m from the source with 0.42 cm of lead
shielding.
B. 10 minutes at 0.5 m with 0.84 cm of lead as shielding.
C. 15 minutes at 2 m from the source using no shielding.
D. 40 minutes at a distance of 1 m using 0.84 cm of lead as shielding.
Answer is A: Choice B would result in 2 × the dose (due to doubling the
time), multiplied by 4 × the dose (due to halving the distance) multiplied by ½
× the dose due to the extra half value layer = 4× the dose of choice A.
Choice C would result in 3 × the dose multiplied by 1/4 × multiplied by 2 ×
the dose = 1½ × the dose of choice A.
Choice D would result in 8× the dose multiplied by 1× multiplied by ½ × the
dose = 4 × the dose of choice A.
68. Which of the following is NOT a principle used to set radiation safety
standards?
A. There is no completely safe dose.
B. Any dose given must show a positive net benefit.
C. Any dose received should be as low as reasonably achievable.
D. Any dose received should not exceed that due to natural background
radiation.
Answer is D: This is often not achievable.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
17.2 Radioactivity, Radiotherapy, Nuclear Medicine, Radiation Safety 463

69. Why should the use of staff of child-bearing age to nurse patients with
implanted radioactive sources be avoided?
A. Because such sources are highly radioactive.
B. Because there is a risk of damage to the gametes of the staff.
C. Because younger people are more at risk of developing radiation induced
cancers.
D. Because implanted sources cannot be adequately shielded.
Answer is B: If it is possible to reduce risk to staff by assigning them to other
duties, then it should be done.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
Chapter 18
Electricity

Electrical devices perform the tasks that they are designed for thanks to the energy
supplied to them by “electricity”. AC generators at a power station provide the
elec- tromotive force that causes electrons to oscillate within conductors. The
energy of oscillating electrons is transformed into useful work within the electrical
device. The human body, inside the skin, can also conduct electricity because its
solutions contain many dissolved ions (electrolytes). If due to a fault, electric
current flows through the skin into a person from a domestic electrical device,
operating on a 50 Hz, 240 V circuit capable of delivering 5A (say), the energy so
deposited in the person will cause harm and perhaps death. This is called macro-
electrocution as the current required to produce a significant shock is greater than
about 5 mA. There are safety precautions in place to prevent this from happening.
In a hospital situation, a patient may be connected to intravenous fluids, to a
cardiac pacemaker, to indwelling catheters etc. That is, they are connected to elec-
trical conductors and electrical devices which penetrate the skin and make contact
with the electrically conducting solutions within the body. The skin, being “dead”
and dry, usually presents a relatively high resistance to the flow of electric current.
If the skin is penetrated then this natural protection is by-passed and a much
smaller current can cause significant damage. This is called micro-electrocution as
the cur-
rent likely to cause death is probably less than 100 μA. There are special safety
precautions in place to prevent this from happening.
The body is a generator of electricity. The distribution of ions within the body
and their movement from one side of the cell plasma membrane to the other pro-
duces local electrical currents. This polarisation and depolarisation of membranes
then produces contraction of muscle fibres and the generation of nerve impulses.
These endogenously generated electric currents can be measured for the heart (the
measurement is called the ECG) for skeletal muscle (called EMG) and for the
brain (called EEG).

© Springer Science+Business Media Singapore 2016

465
M. Caon, Examination Questions and Answers in Basic Anatomy and
Physiology, DOI 10.1007/978-981-10-2332-3_18
ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
466 18 Electricity

1. Which is the correct statement about the behaviour of electrical charges?

A. an electron and a proton will repel each other.
B. two like charges would repel each other.
C. like charges would attract each other.
D. unlike charges repel each other.
Answer is B: Two positive charges would repel each other. Two negative
charges will repel each other. So “like” charge repel.
2. In an Australian domestic AC electrical circuit, what is the potential
difference (voltage) in the three wires?
A. active wire oscillates between +240 V and −240 V, while neutral and
earth are both at 0 V.
B. neutral wire at –240 V, active at +240 V, earth at 0 V.
C. active wire at +240 V, while neutral and earth are both at 0 V.
D. neutral wire and active wire both at +240 V, earth at −240 V.
Answer is A: In a domestic supply, the potential of the active wire oscillates
(alternates) from about +270 V through 0 V to -270 V (the rms values are
+/−240 V), while the neutral wire is at 0 V. The earth wire is for safety purposes,
kept at 0 V to provide a low resistance path to the ground in the case of a fault.
3. When can electrical microshock occur? When:
A. contact between the skin and the 240 V domestic supply results in a
current greater than 100 milliamps.
B. a conductor carrying a current greater than 1 microamp enters the body
through the skin.
C. a conductor carrying a current greater than 100 microamps enters the body
through the skin.
D. a current of 2 to 4 amps passes through the heart forcing it to clamp shut.
Answer is C: Microshock refers to electrocution by a current above about 100
μA if delivered by a conductor that has penetrated the skin. Currents less than
this are probably not fatal. If the current greater than 100 mA is applied to the
exterior of the skin, it is called microshock. Choice D is referring to external
defibrillation.
4. How much current (I) will flow through someone who touches a 240 V active
wire with one hand and the ground with the other, given that their hand to
hand resistance (R) is 2400 ohms?
(use the equation V = I × R)
A. 100 microamps
B. 10 milliamps
C. 100 milliamps
D. 10 amps
Answer is C: V = I × R, so I = V ÷ R putting the numbers in gives:
I = 240 ÷ 2400 = 0.1A = 100 mA

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
18 Electricity 467

5. The effects on a human that result from an electric shock depend upon all of
the following EXCEPT one. Which one?
A. Amount of current flowing.
B. Whether current is AC or DC.
C. The path through the body taken by the current.
D. Time for which current flows.
Answer is B: Both AC and DC can electrocute a human, with DC requiring
higher current, probably more than 300 mA.
6. Inside a typical household electrical appliance that has a three prong plug,
what is the earth wire connected to?
A. The fuse.
B. The neutral wire.
C. The metal casing
D. The on/off switch.
Answer is C: The earth wire in an appliance with a metal case, is connected to
the inside of the case so that if a fault occurs that causes the metal case to be
“live”, current can flow down the earth wire, rather than into your hand.
7. How much current (I) will flow through someone who touches a 240 V active
wire with one hand and ground with the other, given that their hand to hand
resistance (R) is 24,000 ohms? (V = I × R)
A. 100 microamps
B. 10 milliamps
C. 100 milliamps
D. 10 amps
Answer is B: V = I × R, so I = V ÷ R putting the numbers in gives:
I = 240 ÷ 24,000 = 0.01A = 10 mA
8. Choose the alternative which correctly completes the following sentence:
‘There are two types of electric charge called…
A. protons and electrons and they attract each other.’
B. positive and negative and they attract each other.’
C. anions and cations and they repel each other.’
D. electrons and ions and they repel each other.’
Answer is B: The two types of charges are positive and negative which may
exist on a variety of particles such as those named in the other choices.
9. If an ion has a positive charge then what do we know about it? That it
A. will attract another ion with a positive charge.
B. has gained some protons.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
468 18 Electricity

C. has lost some electrons.

D. has more electrons than protons.
Answer is C: An ion will have a positive charge when it has lost one or more
elec- trons. Hence it will have more protons in its nucleus than electrons in the
orbitals.
10. The unit of potential difference is the volt. What does the number of volts tell us?
A. How much energy one coulomb of electrons loses as it moves through the
potential difference.
B. How much difficulty one coulomb of electrons has in moving through a
circuit.
C. How many coulombs of electrons are moving per second.
D. How much energy per second electrons lose as they move through the
circuit.
Answer is A: Choice B refers to electrical resistance. Choice C refers to the
current in amperes (1A =1C/s). Choice D refers to power (P = A/s).
11. Which three electrical quantities does Ohm’s law relate to each other?
A. current, resistance and potential difference
B. potential difference, current and voltage
C. resistance, charge and ohms
D. charge, current and potential difference
Answer is A: Voltage is the unit of potential difference and ohms is the unit
of resistance.
12. Given Ohm’s law i.e. potential difference (V) is the product of current (I) and
resistance (R), which of the following statements is true? If potential
difference is fixed (at say, 240 V):
A. a high resistance means that a low current will flow.
B. a high resistance means that a high current will flow.
C. a low resistance means that a low current will flow.
D. current will be fixed whatever the resistance.
Answer is A: As 240 = I × R, if the value of R is large, then the value of I
must be small enough so that their product is 240.
13. A household light globe with a power rating of 60 W operates at a potential
difference of 240 V and has a resistance of 960 . Using this information and
Ohm’s law, the current (I) may be calculated to be:
A. I = V ÷ R = 240 ÷ 960 = 0.25 A
B. I = R ÷ V = 960 ÷ 240 = 4 A
C. I = P ÷ V = 60 ÷ 240 = 0.25 A
D. I = V ÷ P = 240 ÷ 60 = 4 A
Answer is A: Ohm’s law: V = I × R, so I = V ÷ R. Choice C also produces
the correct answer for current, but does not use Ohm’s law.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
18 Electricity 469

14. A person, holding to the edge of the bath, steps out onto an exposed wire in a
frayed electrical cord attached to a domestic (240 V) radiant heater on the floor.
Consequently a fatal current of 100 mA flows between their hand and foot.
What must be the electrical resistance between these two points?
A. 240 × 100 = 2.4 ohms
B. 240 × 0.1 = 24 ohms
C. 240 × 0.1 = 2400 ohms
D. 240 × 100 = 24,000 ohms
Answer is C: Using Ohm’s law: V = I × R, so R = V ÷ I and realising that 100
mA = 0.1A, putting in the numbers gives: R = 240 × 0.1 = 2400 ohms
15. Ohm’s law may be stated in the form: ‘the current flowing in a circuit is the
potential difference divided by the electrical resistance in the circuit’. If a per-
son whose hand to hand resistance is 80,000  touches a live wire (attached
to 240 V mains supply) and a wall at the same time, what is the magnitude of
the current that will flow through the chest?
A. 3 mA.
B. 30 mA.
C. 300 mA.
D. 3000 mA.
Answer is A: Ohm’s law as stated is: I = V ÷ R putting in the numbers
gives: I = V ÷ R = 240 ÷ 80,000 = 0.003A = 3 mA.
16. What is one difference between static electricity and current electricity?
A. Static electricity flows in the human body, while current electricity flows
in electrical appliances.
B. No useful purpose has been found for static electricity.
C. In current electricity, charges are moving whereas in static electricity,
charges do not move.
D. Direct current involves static electricity, while alternating current involves
current electricity.
Answer is C: The word “current” means flowing while “static” means not
moving.
17. What is one difference between direct current (DC) and alternating current
(AC)?
A. DC can produce a fatal shock, whereas AC cannot.
B. AC can supply power to portable devices, but DC cannot.
C. AC can be transmitted over long distances more cheaply than but DC.
D. DC can be easily transformed to a different voltage, but AC cannot.
Answer is C: (I may be picking a fight here) Transformers (which change
volt- age of electrical power) and circuit breakers are dramatically less
expensive for AC than for DC.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
470 18 Electricity

18. Which one of the following statements is true?

A. An electric current exists when electrons are moving through insulators.
B. Electrical resistance is a measure of the difficulty with which electrons
move through a conductor.
C. Electrons are the carriers of electrical charge within our bodies.
D. Static electricity results from a build up of charge on conductors.
Answer is B: The higher is the resistance of a conductor, the smaller will be
the current that flows in it (for a given potential difference).
19. In order for the ‘on-off’ switch and the fuse to operate as intended in AC cir-
cuits, which wires must they be placed on?
A. switch on active wire, fuse on earth wire.
B. switch on earth wire, fuse on neutral wire.
C. both switch and fuse on active wire.
D. both switch and fuse on earth wire.
Answer is C: The active wire is connected to the electricity grid and to the
elec- trical device. So the on switch must be able to interrupt this supply. The
fuse also is on the active wire so that it “melts” if the current passing through
it is above its set value.
20. The purpose of a fuse (or circuit breaker) is to prevent any flow of current.
How is this done?
A. By connecting the active wire to earth.
B. By connecting the earth wire to the supply cables.
C. By disconnecting the neutral wire from the supply cables.
D. By disconnecting the active wire from the supply cables.
Answer is D: The fuse is on the active wire so when it “blows” the wire has a
gap in it.
21. When electrical equipment becomes faulty, the casing (if made of metal) may
become live. In this case what is the function of the earth wire on the
equipment?
A. To provide a path to ground that has high electrical resistance.
B. To provide a path to ground that has low electrical resistance.
C. To provide a path to ground for excess heat to flow through.
D. To melt and thus break the circuit so that current can no longer flow.
Answer is B: The earth wire allows current to flow to earth rather than
through a person touching the case. In addition, the fuse should melt almost
immediately.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
18 Electricity 471

22. What are the three wires connected to household ‘three pin plugs’ on
electrical cords called?
A. earth, active and fuse
B. live, return and fuse
C. active, neutral and earth
D. active, neutral and live
Answer is C: Active (or live), neutral (or return) and earth.
23. Suppose that while crawling around inside the roof space of your house, you
touch a bare wire with your bare hand while touching the brick wall with the
other bare hand. Which of the following wires would be most likely to deliver
a fatal shock?
A. The neutral wire.
B. The active wire.
C. The telephone wire.
D. The earth wire.
Answer is B: The active wire is live in the roof space between your power
board (fuse box) and the power points in the walls. The telephone wire is live
too, but is at low voltage.
24. In an electrical device, a correctly installed earth wire provides protection
against what?
A. The electrical device receiving too high a current.
B. It protects the fuse or circuit breaker from too much current.
C. Electrocution of a person touching the faulty electrical device.
D. It protects against stray currents that may exist in the ground (the soil).
Answer is C: The earth wire will only carry current if the electrical device is
faulty and the metal casing becomes live. It prevents a shock being received
by anyone touching the device.
25. The electrical resistance of the body, measured from hand to hand, will be dif-
ferent on different occasions. Why is this? Because the resistance of the skin:
A. Increases as the skin gets drier.
B. Increases as the skin gets damper.
C. Decreases as the skin gets drier.
D. Decreases as the hands are brought closer together.
Answer is A: Dry human skin presents greater resistance to current flow than
damp skin.
26. What could be a correct definition of macro-electrocution? ‘That phenomenon
which results from a prolonged macro-shock produced by:
A. an electric current flowing directly to the heart without having to cross the skin.’
B. the contact of bare skin to alternating voltages of over 100,000 V.’

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
472 18 Electricity

C. a fatal current in direct contact with unprotected skin.’

D. switching on a faulty device that was earthed and had a fuse on the active
wire.’
Answer is C: Macro-electrocution refers to electrocution by a relatively large
current that is applied to the skin surface.
27. Choose the correct alternative to make the following sentence correct. “If a
person is in contact with the active wire of a domestic 240 volt electricity
supply, a macroshock will occur if the current that flows is “above/below”
one milliamp and there is a second connection between the person and the
“active/ ground”.
A. below……… active wire
B. below……… ground
C. above……… active wire
D. above……… ground
Answer is D: A macroshock will be noticed if the current is above 1 mA and
the person is electrically connected simultaneously to the active wire and to
the ground.
28. In the fluids of the human body, what are the carriers of charge that move
through fluids called?
A. cations
B. ions
C. anions
D. electrons
Answer is B: The charge carriers are ions (sometimes called electrolytes) they
may have a positive or a negative charge.
29. Complete the sentence: ‘Defibrillation’ is the process where for a few millisec-
onds, a direct current of about:
A. 6 A is applied directly to the heart through a conducting path that bypasses
the skin
B. 100 mA is applied to the chest wall through two ‘paddles’
C. 6 A is applied the chest wall through two ‘paddles’
D. 100 mA is applied directly to the heart through a conducting path that
bypasses the skin
Answer is C: The current is large and is applied to the outside of body to bare
skin.
30. What are the letters ECG short for? Electro-
A. encephalogram.
B. colonogram.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
18 Electricity 473

C. cardiogram.
D. cryogram.
Answer is C: An electrocardiogram is the diagram (the graph) of voltage
against time that is produced by a machine called an “electrocardiograph”
31. The potential differences generated by the heart muscle as it contracts and
relaxes can be measured by placing electrodes on the surface of the body.
What is the record of these electrical events correctly called?
A. An electrocardiogram
B. limb lead II
C. An electrocardiograph
D. An EEG
Answer is A: An electrocardiogram (ECG) is produced by an electrocardio-
graph machine.
32. What are the deflections seen on an electrocardiogram trace due to?
A. pressure differences created by ventricular contraction.
B. the closing and opening of heart valves.
C. the de- and repolarisation of the cells of the myocardium.
D. variation in the electrical properties of oxygenated blood and
deoxygenated blood as it moves through the heart.
Answer is C: the P wave is due to the depolarisation of the atria, the QRS to
the depolarisation of the ventricles, the T due to the repolarisation of the
ventricles.
33. The electrocardiogram chart is a graph. What is plotted against the vertical
axis?
A. The voltage produced by the myocardial cells.
B. The elapsed time.
C. The rate of contraction of the myocardium.
D. The current flowing in the conduction system of the heart.
Answer is A: The ECG records the voltage produced by the heart muscle
mea- sured at the body surface.
34. Consider a cardiac monitor whose time-base control is set so that the ECG
trace moves horizontally at 25 mm/sec. If the patient’s heart rate is 75 beats
per min- ute, how far apart would the peaks of the ECG trace be?
A. 15 mm
B. 18 mm

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
474 18 Electricity

C. 20 mm
D. 25 mm
Answer is C: 75 bpm means 75 beats take 60 seconds. Hence each beat must
take less than one second. Divide by 75 to get length of one beat: 60/75 s =
0.8 s The ECG trace travels at 25 mm per second, so in 0.8 s would
1
travel
25 mm/s = 20 mm 5

35. The ECG trace on the screen of a cardiac monitor is measured to be 3 cm

high. If the sensitivity control was set at 2 cm/mV, what is the value of the
voltage being measured?
A. 1.0 mV
B. 1.5 mV
C. 2.0 mV
D. 2.5 mV
Answer is B: 3 cm ÷ 2 cm/mV = 1.5 mV
36. Why does a correctly installed Earth wire provides protection against
electrocu- tion by a faulty electrical device? Because:
A. it is made of thick copper wire so presents almost zero resistance
B. a fuse is located on eh Earth wire which will “blow” if excessive current
flows.
C. The Earth wire is connected to ground and to the metal case of the
appliance.
D. The on/off switch is on the Earth wire so that power can be turned off.
Answer is C: A faulty appliance (with a metal case) may become “live”. If it
does, a large current may flow through the earth wire, rather than through a
person touching the case. The large current will blow the fuse which is
located on the active wire (as is the on/off switch).

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
Chapter 19
Biomechanics

The study of mechanics involves the appreciation of the mass of a body and its
inertia and of the interaction of mass and gravity to produce the object’s weight.
Newton’s laws describe forces and their interaction with masses to alter their
motion. Examples of un-balanced forces (those that will change an object’s
motion) are gravity, friction and the contraction of skeletal muscle.
The bones of the skeleton may be thought of as levers that turn around the
syno- vial joints (the fulcra) when skeletal muscles provide the effort force. The
load force is the weight of the limb being moved along with whatever is being
held by or being made to move by the limb. Many configurations of bone, muscle
and joint that occur in the body can be described as third class lever systems, and
hence as “inefficient”. That is, the effort force produced by contracting muscles is
greater than the load force to be shifted.
Correct and safe patient handling procedures (manual handling), involves mini-
mising the amount of lifting by asking the patient to move themselves – and
instruct- ing them how to. If the carer is required to shift a patient, manual
handling also involves minimising the use of weak muscles and bones, such as
those of the back. Instead, the strong muscles of the legs are used; the length of the
load arms are mini- mised (by getting your centre of gravity close to the load), and
friction is minimised by using a slide sheet or board. Furthermore correct
technique requires that stability is maintained (by keeping your centre of gravity
over your base of support), and that the help of gravity is enlisted.
1. Choose the INCORRECT statement from the four below.
A. mass is the amount of matter contained in an object.
B. gravity is the name of the force that acts between any objects with mass.
C. weight is the pressure with which earth’s gravity acts on an object.
D. for a standing person, base of support is the area bounded by their feet.
Answer is C: Weight is a force while pressure is a force divided by the area
upon which it is acting.

© Springer Science+Business Media Singapore 2016 475

M. Caon, Examination Questions and Answers in Basic Anatomy and
Physiology, DOI 10.1007/978-981-10-2332-3_19

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
476 19 Biomechanics

2. Which of the following is correct?

A. Fixed traction employs a moveable pulley to provide mechanical
advantage.
B. In suspended traction the traction force is equal to the tension in the cord.
C. In suspended traction, counter-traction is provided by the friction between
the patient and the bed.
D. The traction force must be equal in magnitude to but opposite in direction
to the counter-traction force.
Answer is D: This a statement of Newton’s third law. Fixed traction does not
employ a moveable pulley. In suspended traction, the traction force is greater
that the tension in the cord. Counter traction is supplied by gravity as well as
friction.
3. If a traction hanging mass is 3 kg, use Newton’s second law (or otherwise) to
determine the gravitational force acting on the mass.
A. 0.3 newtons
B. 3 newtons
C. 30 newtons
D. 3 kilograms
Answer is C: Newton’s second law: F =m´a putting in the numbers gives:
F = 3´10 = 30 N (a = 9.8 ms−2 but 10 is close enough)
4. Consider the action of moving from having both feet flat on the ground to
standing on “tip toes”. Which of the following correctly identifies the fulcrum,
the load force, the effort force and the lever?
A. Fulcrum is the heel, load is the body’s weight, effort is the pull of the
ham- strings, lever is the tarsal bones of the foot.
B. Fulcrum is the ball of the foot, load is the body’s weight, effort is the pull
of the calf muscles, lever is the tarsal and metatarsal bones of the foot.
C. Fulcrum is the ankle, load is the weight of the foot, effort is the pull of the
hamstrings, lever is the tibia & fibula bones.
D. Fulcrum is the knee, load is the weight of the foot, effort is the pull of the
calf muscles, lever is the tibia & fibula bones.
Answer is B: fulcrum has to be the “ball” of the foot (the rounded area
superfi- cial to the joint between metatarsaI and proximal phalanx of the
hallux) and load must be the weight of the body.
5. A person whose mass is 65 kg would have a weight closest to:
A. 65 kg because mass and weight are directly proportional to each other (on
Earth).
B. 650 kg because weight = mass´10 (approximately)

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
19 Biomechanics 477

C. 65 N because F1=- F2 (Newton’s 3rd law)

D. 650 N because F =m ´ a (Newton’s 2nd law)
Answer is D: Choice B is almost correct, but the unit of force is the newton
while the kilogram is the unit of mass.
6. Which statement is consistent with “good lifting technique”?
A. Keep your centre of gravity and that of the object being lifted as close as
possible.
B. Maximise the length of the effort arms of the body levers you use to lift
the load.
C. Use the relatively strong back muscles rather than the relatively weak
thigh muscles.
D. Minimise your base of support and bend your legs at the knees before you
lean over.
Answer is A: This strategy will keep the load arms of the levers, as short as
possible. In addition adopt a wide base of support, bend your knees and use
your leg muscles to lift.
7. When two forces of magnitude 6 N and 10 N are added vectorially, what
value could the resulting vector NOT have?
A. 4N
B. 6N
C. 10 N
D. 18 N
Answer is D: The maximum value that can be obtained by adding two vectors
of length 6 and 10 N is 16 N when the vectors are in the same direction.
8. In a Hamilton-Russell traction system, a moveable pulley provides a mechani-
cal advantage. What does this mean? That the
A. weight of the hanging mass is greater than the traction force.
B. weight of the hanging mass is equal to the traction force.
C. traction force is greater than the weight of the hanging mass.
D. traction force is greater than the counter-traction force
Answer is C: When the effort force is less than the load force there is a
mechan- ical advantage. Traction and counter traction force must be equal.
9. In straight leg traction (Buck’s extension) the force of counter traction is sup-
plied by friction (between the patient and the bed) and also by:
A. the component of the patient’s weight that is perpendicular to the bed.
B. the component of the patient’s weight that is parallel to the bed.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
478 19 Biomechanics

C. gravity acting on the hanging mass.

D. using cords to attach the patient to the head of the bed.
Answer is B: The bed is tilted head down so that patient is tending to side
away from the traction mass.
10. A person whose mass is 50 kg would have a weight closest to:
A. 50 kg because mass and weight are directly proportional to each other (on
Earth).
B. 50 N because F1=- F2 (Newton’s 3rd law)
C. 500 kg because weight = mass ´ 10 (approximately)
D. 500 N because F =m ´ a (Newton’s 2nd law)
Answer is D: Choice C is almost correct, but the unit of force is the Newton
while the kilogram is the unit of mass.
11. When two forces of magnitude 8 N and 12 N are added vectorially, what
value could the resulting vector NOT have?
A. 4N
B. 10 N
C. 20 N
D. 25 N
Answer is D: The maximum value that can be obtained by adding two vectors
of length 8 and 12 N is 20 N when the vectors are in the same direction.
Hence Choices A, B and C are all possible.
12. A person who is standing on both of their feet is “stable” when:
A. their base of support is as wide as is comfortably possible.
B. their centre of gravity is above their base of support.
C. their centre of gravity is close to their base of support.
D. the position of their centre of gravity and base of support coincide.
Answer is B: When the imaginary line joining the Earth’s centre with the per-
son’s centre of gravity passes through the area of a person’s base of support
they are stable. They is, they won’t overbalance and tip over.
13. Use the equation P = F ¸ A to determine the pressure on the knee joint (area
= 100 cm2) when a 70 kg person is standing on one leg (assume that 70 kg is
the body mass above the knee). Hint: convert cm2 to m2
A. 7 kPa
B. 70 kPa
C. 700 kPa
D. 7000 kPa
Answer is C: using P = F ¸ A and remembering that the weight, F of a
person with mass 70 kg is 70 × 10 and converting 100 cm 2 to 0.001 m2,
putting in the numbers gives:
P = 70 ´ 10 ¸ 0.001= 700 000 Pa = 700kPa

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
19 Biomechanics 479

14. In which of the following situations is an unbalanced force acting on a

patient’s body? When the patient is:
A. lying stationary and supine on the bed.
B. lying stationary and supine on the bed while the bed is being pushed a
con- stant speed along a straight corridor.
C. being assisted to sit still and upright on the edge of the bed.
D. lying stationary and supine on the bed while the bed is being pushed
around a corner in a corridor.
Answer is D: Changing the direction of motion by turning a corner (even if
the speed does not change) requires an unbalanced force. Being still or
moving at constant speed indicates that there are no unbalanced forces acting.
15. Which statement concerning friction is INCORRECT?
A. Friction within liquids is greater than that between dry solids.
B. Within the human body friction is reduced by fluids such as saliva, serous
fluid, mucus etc.
C. Friction exists whenever two surfaces are in contact.
D. Sliding friction is less than static friction.
Answer is A: Frictional forces within liquids are lower than within solids.
Sliding friction IS less than static friction.
16. One of the following statements is WRONG. Which one?
A. A patient’s inertia may be decreased by using several people to assist in
their transfer.
B. The position of a person’s centre of gravity may be altered by altering the
position of their arms and legs.
C. Base of support may be increased by adopting a wide stance with your feet.
D. Friction between a patient and the bed may be reduced by using a slide
sheet.
Answer is A: Inertia is a fixed attribute of an object that cannot be changed
without changing its mass.
17. Which one of the following is a nurse affecting, by positioning her body close
to that of the patient while executing a patient handling procedure?
A. the mass of the patient to be shifted
B. the maximum effort that her muscles are able to produce
C. the distance between the position of muscle insertion and the fulcra of her
limbs
D. the distance between the centre of gravity of the patient and that of the nurse
Answer is D: Minimising the separation between the centres of gravity also
minimises the load arms of the levers involved. This will decrease the
muscular effort required.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
480 19 Biomechanics

18. What does a nurse attempt to minimise during a patient manual handling
procedure?
A. the patient’s centre of gravity
B. friction between patient and bed
C. the patient’s inertia
D. the nurse’s base of support
Answer is B: Minimising friction will both minimise the muscular effort
(force) required and also the shearing force on the patient’s skin.
19. What is a nurse attempting to minimise by getting close to a patient during a
manual handling procedure?
A. the load arm
B. the size of the fulcrum
C. the effort arm
D. the patient’s weight
Answer is A: The shorter is the load arm, the smaller is the muscular effort
that is required to move the lever and load,
20. Good manual handling technique on an unconscious patient involves which of
the following?
A. using the muscles of the arms
B. instructing the patient on how to shift themself.
C. using the muscles of the legs
D. using the muscles of the back
Answer is C: The leg muscles are the largest (and therefore the strongest) in
the body. An unconscious patient cannot take instruction.
21. Most of our bones that articulate at freely movable joints can be described as
third class levers. What does this mean?
A. they are “efficient” levers
B. the “effort arm” is longer than the “load arm”
C. the muscle’s tendon is inserted between the load and the joint
D. the muscle’s tendon is inserted close to the joint
Answer is C: In third class levers, the muscle force (effort) is between the load
and the fulcrum (the joint). Choice D can be satisfied by first and third class
levers.
22. Good manual handling technique generally requires extensive use of which
muscles?
A. biceps brachii and triceps brachii
B. erector spinae and abdominal muscles
C. gluteus maximus and rectus abdominus
D. quadriceps and hamstrings
Answer is D: The muscles of the thighs are the strongest and should be used
in manual handling tasks.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
19 Biomechanics 481

23. What is the purpose of using of a slide sheet in patient manual handling?
A. to extend the patient’s base of support
B. to facilitate raising the patient’s centre of gravity
C. to minimise friction between the patient and the bed
D. to minimise the patient’s inertia
Answer is C: A slide sheet reduces friction, making it easier to slide the
patient. It also provides comfortable hand holds and prevents fragile skin
being torn as it slides along the bed.
24. What is the purpose of “counter-balancing” in manual handling? To
A. ensure that your large leg muscles are used to shift a patient
B. ensure a firm grip on the slide sheet
C. increase the size of your base of support
D. use gravity, acting on your weight, to shift a patient
Answer is D: Counter balancing involves placing the centre of gravity to one
side of the base of support so that the gravitational pull on your body assists
in moving the patient.
25. Most manual handling manoeuvres require bending at the knees. This is so that
A. the strong thigh muscles are used.
B. a wide base of support can be adopted.
C. a stable body position is achieved.
D. the back can be used as a third class lever.
Answer is A: Bending the legs at the knees (and hips) allows the strong thigh
muscles to be used to extend the legs while rising to a standing position with
the load.
26. Which of the following is NOT a reason for using a slide sheet?
A. To provide the handler with convenient hand holds while shifting the
patient.
B. To increase the patient’s base of support.
C. To reduce the friction between the patient and their bed.
D. To reduce the risk of damaging fragile skin.
Answer is B: The patient’s base of support (their area of contact with the bed)
is not changed by a slide sheet.
27. Which of the following statements is characteristic of “third-class levers”?
A. the fulcrum lies between the effort and the load.
B. the muscular effort involved in shifting them exceeds the load that is shifted.
C. they are efficient levers.
D. the effort and the load are equally distant from the fulcrum.
Answer is B: third class levers are “inefficient” in the sense that the muscular
force that needs to be exerted will exceed the load force to be shifted.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
482 19 Biomechanics

Nevertheless human muscles are able to generate the forces required for
human activities, and we have the benefit of a very large range of movement
for our limbs.
28. Levers are acted upon by forces known as the load, effort, and fulcrum.
“Third class” levers are characterised by having the:
A. effort located between the other two forces
B. load located between the other two forces
C. fulcrum located between the other two forces
D. resistance located between the other two forces
Answer is A: The effort, that is the insertion of the muscle tendon, is close to
the fulcrum (the joint), but between the joint and the load (i.e. the rest of the
limb) being moved. The load and resistance are the same force.
29. Levers are acted upon by forces known as the effort, load/resistance and ful-
crum. “Third class” levers are characterised by having the:
A. effort located between the other forces
B. load located between the other forces
C. fulcrum located between the other forces
D. resistance located between the other forces
Answer is A: The effort, that is the insertion of the muscle tendon, is close to
the fulcrum (the joint), but between the joint and the load (i.e. the rest of the
limb) being moved. The load and resistance are the same force.
30. Levers are acted upon by forces known as the load, effort, and fulcrum. “First
class” levers are characterised by having the:
A. effort located between the other two forces
B. load located between the other two forces
C. fulcrum located between the other two forces
D. the effort and the load on opposite sides of the fulcrum
Answer is C: For example the atlas vertebra is the fulcrum for the lever action
of nodding yes. The sternocleidomastoid and the trapezius muscles provide
the effort forces.
31. What is the reason that a 3rd class lever is inefficient?
A. the muscle’s effort force is applied closer to the fulcrum than the load force.
B. the load force is applied closer to the fulcrum than the muscle’s effort force
C. the fulcrum separates the effort from the load
D. the load force is greater than the muscle’s effort force
Answer is A: Consider flexing the forearm using the biceps brachii. Its tendon
is inserted on the radius bone very close to the elbow joint, while the load (the
forearm is further away). Such an arrangement allows a short contraction of
the biceps brachii to be converted to a large sweep of motion of the hand.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
19 Biomechanics 483

32. Third class lever systems are always inefficient for which one of the following
reasons?
A. the effort arm is longer than the load arm.
B. the effort force required is less than the load force.
C. the fulcrum lies between the effort and the load.
D. the load arm is longer than the effort arm.
Answer is D: By definition of third class levers, the load arm is always longer
than the effort arm. A spanner tightening a nut has a long effort arm and is a
mixture of first and second class lever.
33. What is the weight of a nurse if her mass is 65 kg? (use acceleration due to
gravity of 10 m.s−2)
A. 65 kg
B. 650 kg
C. 65 N
D. 650 N
Answer is D: Weight is the force with which gravity attracts you to the Earth.
Use Newton’s second law:
Weight, F = m ´ a = 70 ´ 10 = 700 N . The unit of force is the Newton, N.
34. Choose the one correct statement.
J. The unit of weight is the kilogram.
K. The unit of mass is the Newton.
L. Weight is a force.
M. Inertia is mass multiplied by 9.8.
Answer is C: Weight is the force with which gravity attracts you to the Earth.
Your weight would be different on the moon (say), but your mass would be
the same.
35. Which of the following is not an example of a force?
A. Tension.
B. Friction.
C. Inertia.
D. Weight.
Answer is C: Inertia is not a force, it is a measure of mass. A measure of
inertia of an object is the difficulty of setting the object in motion.
36. If the imaginary line joining a person’s centre of gravity to the centre of the
Earth passes through the person’s base of support, what can we say about that
person? They are:
A. unstable.
B. balanced.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
484 19 Biomechanics

C. using their back as a lever.

D. not doing any work.
Answer is B: They are balanced or stable. That is, they will not need to shift
their feet to prevent them from “overbalancing”.
37. A person (assumed to be healthy, awake and on their feet) is stable – that is,
will not overbalance and fall – as long as
A. they have a large base of support
B. their centre of gravity is close to the ground
C. their centre of gravity remains within their body
D. their centre of gravity is above their base of support
Answer is D: As long as the centre of gravity is above the base of support,
there will be no unbalanced force tending to tip you over. Try standing with
you back against the wall, then bend over to touch your toes
38. What does the term ‘friction’ refer to?
A. The tension force generated when a muscle contracts.
B. A force that acts in the opposite direction to a motion.
C. The resistance force that is overcome by an effort force.
D. The force of gravity that causes an object to fall.
Answer is B: Friction is a force that causes a moving object to slow in speed.
That is, it produces a negative acceleration – one in the opposite direction to
the object’s velocity.
39. Which one of the following describes what could happen to an object when a
balanced force is acting on it? The object
A. starts to move.
B. changes its direction but not its speed.
C. object changes its shape.
D. nothing happens.
Answer is D: As the force is balanced, there is no net force acting in any
direc- tion, so there is no change in motion.
40. Which one describes when an unbalanced force is acting?
A. an object’s centre of gravity is above its base of support.
B. a moving object maintains a constant speed and direction.
C. a muscle contracts and causes a limb to move.
D. a soldier is standing rigidly to attention.
Answer is C: An unbalanced force will result in some movement. The move-
ment of the limb indicates that an unbalanced (muscle) force was acting.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
19 Biomechanics 485

41. Which of the following pairs of quantities does NOT contain a scalar quantity
and a vector quantity?
A. mass and weight
B. traction and counter-traction
C. speed and velocity
D. distance and displacement
Answer is B: Traction and counter-traction are both forces so are both vector
quantities.
42. In cars, the aim of safety features such as seatbelts, padding on the dashboard,
collapsible steering columns, airbags and body panels that crumple
progressively, is to minimise the unbalanced force on occupants during a
crash. Bearing Newton’s second law in mind. How do such features achieve?
They
A. minimise the occupant’s deceleration.
B. maximise the occupant’s deceleration.
C. prevent whiplash injuries.
D. convert an unbalanced force into a net force.
Answer is A: Say the occupant has a mass of “m”. Newton’s second law
states: F = m × a. to make the unbalanced force F as small as possible, then
the accel- eration “a”, must be made small. Acceleration may be positive or
negative, the latter is often called a “deceleration”.
43. Which of the following is NOT consistent with Newton’s second law?
A. Weight = mass × 9.8
B. Acceleration = weight ¸ mass
C. Mass = acceleration ¸ weight
D. Force =mass ´ acceleration
Answer is C: Newton 2 states: F =m ´ a . This may be rearranged to m = F ¸ a
or in words: mass = weight ¸ acceleration .
44. What is the best definition of the WEIGHT of an object? Weight is the:
A. force of attraction between the Earth and the object.
B. tendency of a body to maintain its state of motion.
C. amount of matter contained in the body.
D. mass of the object multiplied by its acceleration.
Answer is A: Weight is a force. It is the attractive force between the Earth’s
mass and the object’s mass.
45. What is the meaning of ‘work’ in the scientific sense?
A. An artist’s completed painting.
B. The amount of energy transferred between objects.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
486 19 Biomechanics

C. The functions performed during the course of paid employment.

D. Sustained physical or mental activity.
Answer is B: The amount of work done on an object is the amount of energy
transferred to that object.
46. In which of the following cases is the greatest amount of work being done on
the object that is experiencing the force?
A. 10,000 N is exerted on a wall for 30 s.
B. 2000 N is used to raise an object by a height of 10 m.
C. 5000 N is used to push an object a distance of 4 m.
D. 1000 N is used to pull an object over 50 m.
Answer is D: work = force ´ distance , so 1000 N × 50 m=50,000 Nm is
the greatest amount.
47. What may be said about the measurable quantities which are referred to as
vectors?
A. They are arrow-headed line segments.
B. They include time, mass, pressure and energy.
C. They need a magnitude to be completely defined.
D. They include force, velocity, acceleration and electric field strength.
Answer is D: These four quantities are all vectors. Vectors need a direction as
well as a magnitude. Mass is not a vector
48. In the schematic diagram of an arm being a lever, rod 1 represents the
humerus and rod 2 the radius and ulna. M is a block being supported by the
‘hand’. What are located at the positions indicated by p, q, r and s?
A. Effort (p), centre of mass of the radius and ulna (q), fulcrum (r) and load (s).
B. Fulcrum (p), effort (q), centre of mass of radius and ulna (r) and load (s).
C. Centre of mass of radius and ulna (p), effort (q), load (r) and fulcrum (s).
D. Fulcrum (p), centre of mass of radius and ulna (q), effort (r) and load (s)

1 2
M

p q r s
Answer is B: p is the fulcrum (the elbow joint); q is the effort (the insertion
point of the biceps brachii tendon); r is halfway along the rod 2, so is the
centre of mass of the radius/ulna.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
19 Biomechanics 487

49. When the biceps brachii muscle flexes the forearm, what is the forearm an
example of?
A. A first class lever.
B. A second class lever.
C. A third class lever.
D. An efficient lever.
Answer is C: Third class levers have the effort force between the fulcrum and
the load.
50. Why are the third class lever systems of the human musculoskeletal system
inefficient? Because
A. third-class lever systems are the least efficient.
B. the muscle insertion is closer to the joint than the load is.
C. muscles can contract only by about twenty per cent of their relaxed length.
D. the force of muscle tension is less than the weight of the load.
Answer is B: When the muscle insertion is closer to the joint than is the load,
the effort arm is short. This means that the effort force must be large to
provide the same torque exerted by the load acting on its longer load arm.
51 Many of the muscle-bone combinations in the body behave as third-class
levers. Why do these require a muscle tension (the effort force) much greater
than the load’s force?
A. Because the effort force is applied further from fulcrum than is the load
force
B. Because the effort force is applied closer to the fulcrum than is the load
force
C. Because the fulcrum lies between the load and the effort
D. Because the fulcrum is further from the effort force than is the load force
Answer is B: The closer is the effort to the fulcrum, the greater is the effort it
must exert to shift the load.
52. What is the aim of ‘correct lifting technique’? To
A. maintain balance by keeping the centre of gravity over the base of support.
B. avoid working with heavy loads that are on the ground.
C. use the bones and muscles of the leg.
D. keep the back straight while using it as a lever.
Answer is C: The leg bones and muscles are the strongest in the body so are
most suited to coping with large forces.
53. Which of the following is NOT considered part of good lifting technique?
A. Keeping the feet close together.
B. Keeping the back virtually straight.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
488 19 Biomechanics

C. Standing close to the object to be lifted.

D. Bending the knees.
Answer is A: It is best to keep the feet separated to widen the base of support.
A wide stance also makes it easier to get close to the object to be lifted.
54. A requirement in traction is that the traction force is equal in magnitude but in
the opposite direction to the counter traction force. This requirement is really
a statement of:
A. Ohm’s law.
B. Pascal’s principle.
C. Newton’s first law.
D. Newton’s third law.
Answer is D: Newton 3: F = -F When an object (the hanging mass) exerts a
1 2
force on another object (the patient in traction), the second object exerts an
equal but opposite force on the first object.
55. Traction forces may be represented by vectors. In Hamilton-Russell traction,
which of the following vectors is equal in magnitude to the traction force?
A. The component of the patient’s weight that is perpendicular to the bed.
B. The component of the patient’s weight that is parallel to the bed.
C. The vector in A. subtracted from the patient’s weight.
D. The resulting vector when the vectors in A. and B. are added.
Answer is B: By elevating the foot of the bed, the patient tends to slide
towards the head of the bed which is opposite to the direction of traction pull.
56. Fixed traction may be applied by a device such as a ‘Thomas splint’. In this
case, the counter-traction force is supplied by
A. the push of the appliance on a fixed point on the body (such as the ischial
tuberosity).
B. an adhesive bandage wrapped around the lower leg.
C. the pull of a wire that is made taut by turning a wingnut attached to the
patient’s foot.
D. the weight of the patient’s leg and the friction between the patient and the
bed.
Answer is A: Fixed traction does not involve cords and hanging masses. The
Thomas splint involves “stretching” the leg between the foot and the pelvis.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
19 Biomechanics 489

57. The counter-traction force on a patient’s leg is often increased by tilting the
bed so that the patient’s head is lower than their feet. Why is this done?
Because tilting the bed increases the
A. component of the patient’s weight that is parallel to the bed.
B. traction force that is exerted by the hanging masses.
C. force of gravity that is acting on the patient’s body.
D. component of the patient’s weight that is perpendicular to the bed.
Answer is A: Unless the bed is tilted, there is no component of the patient’s
weight that is parallel to the bed. The force of gravity and the force exerted by
the hanging masses does not change.
58. The magnitude of the traction force in a Hamilton-Russell traction is deter-
mined by
A. The vector addition of the forces in the cords
B. The hanging mass multiplied by 9.8.
C. The component of the patient’s weight that is perpendicular to the bed.
D. The number of pulleys in the system.
Answer is A: The moveable pulley allows the one cord to exert more than one
force on the leg. So the magnitude of the force is determined by adding the
forces vectorially.
59. In a Hamilton-Russell traction system, the traction force is greater than the
weight of the hanging mass because:
A. three cords are attached to the patient’s leg.
B. there is a moveable pulley attached to the patients foot
C. four pulleys are in the system.
D. the traction force is parallel to the femur.
Answer is B: The moveable pulley provides a mechanical advantage. A fixed
pulley merely redirects the direction of traction without altering its
magnitude.
60. The figure below whose corners are labelled ABCD could represent the vector
diagram for a Hamilton-Russell traction system if the lines were the correct
length and an arrow pointing in the correct direction was drawn on them.
Which of the following modifications to the diagram would make it more
closely resemble the correct diagram?
A. The three lines D to C, C to B and B to A should be the same length and
an arrow pointing from D to A should be drawn on the fourth line.
B. Arrows should be drawn so that their directions describe an anticlockwise
circuit and the line A to D should be the longest.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
490 19 Biomechanics

C. The resultant traction force is represented by the vector from C to B and

should be longer than the other three lines.
D. All four lines should be the same length and the vector directions are from
D to C, from C to B, from B to A, and from A to D.
B

A C

Answer is A: The three lines between D-C, C-B, B-A should be the same
length as they are all the same force in three cords. They add to form the
resultant (traction) vector from D to A.
61. Which of the following statements about the pulleys used in traction systems
is correct?
A. A moveable pulley changes the direction of the traction force.
B. A moveable pulley changes the direction of the traction force and provides
a mechanical advantage.
C. A fixed pulley changes the direction of the traction and provides a
mechani- cal advantage.
D. A fixed pulley is one that is attached to the limb undergoing traction.
Answer is B: The provision of a mechanical advantage is the important
feature of a moveable pulley. Traction direction is also changed.
62. What is one of the roles of the pulley in a traction system?
A. To supply the counter traction.
B. To enable the vector addition of forces.
C. To change the direction of the traction force
D. To prevent the hanging masses from resting on the floor.
Answer is C: Pulleys do change the direction of the traction force so that the
downward pull of the hanging mass can be redirected to a direction parallel
(say) to a leg.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
19 Biomechanics 491

63. What are the two purposes served by pulleys used in traction systems? These
are to:
A. reduce friction and provide support for the limbs in traction.
B. supply a mechanical advantage and attachment points to the bed frame.
C. allow the hanging masses to exert a traction force greater than their
weight, and redirect the direction of the effort force.
D. change the direction of the cords and suspend the limb from the bed.
Answer is C: Pulleys change the direction of the force provided by the
hanging masses, and (if the pulley is a moveable one) provide a mechanical
advantage.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
Chapter 20
Energy and Heat

Energy has the units of joules, or kJ for food energy values. When energy is trans-
ferred from one object to another we say “work has been done”. How fast the
energy is transferred (the rate of change of energy) is known as the power which
has units of watts. Heat is the name given to the energy that is transferred from
one object to another object that is at a lower temperature. The temperature of an
object is a mea- sure of the kinetic energy of its particles – roughly speaking, how
fast they are mov- ing. The units of temperature are degrees celcius (or more
correctly kelvin, where celcius degrees = kelvin + 273).
Humans maintain their internal body temperature at 37 °C. A temperature
above 38 °C is hyperthermia, while temperatures below 35 °C are hypothermic.
Humans can gain or lose heat by the physical processes of convection, conduction
and radia- tion. The physiological process of sweating will cool the body, while
physical activ- ity increases the metabolic rate which will warm the body. In
addition vasoconstriction and vasodilation will redistribute heat as the blood is
redistributed. Furthermore ingesting hot or cold food and liquid will alter the
body’s heat content as will elimi- nating and urinating.
Mitochondria liberate the energy stored in the chemical bonds of the small
organic molecules (e.g. glucose) which result from the hydrolysis (within the
diges- tive tract) of the large molecules ingested as food. This liberated energy is
stored in the chemical bonds of a different molecule – the third phosphate bond of
ATP. If we ingest energy that is additional to that required to support our physical
and meta- bolic activities, it is stored as fat in adipocytes and our body mass
increases.
1. When a particular energy value is ascribed to a food what type of energy is
being referred to? Its
A. translational kinetic energy.
B. gravitational potential energy

© Springer Science+Business Media Singapore 2016

493
M. Caon, Examination Questions and Answers in Basic Anatomy and
Physiology, DOI 10.1007/978-981-10-2332-3_20
ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
494 20 Energy and Heat

C. chemical potential energy

D. average kinetic energy per molecule
Answer is C: The energy value of food is stored in the chemical bonds within
the food molecules.
2. Energy may be defined from the concepts of
A. force and heat.
B. heat and joules.
C. force and work.
D. work and temperature.
Answer is C: When a force causes an object to move, work (in joules) has
been done to the object. The work done changes the amount of energy (in
joules) stored in an object.
3. Which of the following statements about work is NOT correct?
A. More work occurs when a force acts over a small distance (W = F ÷ s)
B. Simple machines allow us to perform work more easily.
C. Work (done on an object) is the amount of energy that transfers to that object.
D. It takes energy to perform work.
Answer is A: The reverse is true as: W = F × s
4. Work is done when an object is moved by a force. What is energy?
A. the capacity to do work.
B. the rate at which work is done.
C. a force that results in no movement.
D. the transformation of work from one form to another.
Answer is A: Choice B refers to power. Choice C refers to a balanced force.
5. The Système International (Standard International) unit of power is the watt.
This unit is the same as which one of the following?
A. electronvolt
B. joule
C. joule per second
D. kilojoule
Answer is C: Power is the rate of doing work or of converting energy from
one form to another. The unit of power = A/s is renamed the watt in honour of
James Watt. All the other choices are units of energy.
6. Which one of the following statements best describes what is meant by the
“principle of conservation of energy”?
A. Internal energy is the sum of kinetic energy, thermal energy and potential
energy.
B. Energy may be transformed from one form into another, but it cannot be
created or destroyed.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
20 Energy and Heat 495

C. Kinetic energy is gradually transformed into potential energy and vice

versa.
D. The Earth has a finite amount of energy and modern society must learn to
use less of it and to use it more efficiently.
Answer is B: Energy is noticed when it is transformed from one form to
another. However the total amount when all of its forms are accounted for,
does not change.
7 A ball initially with 20 J of potential energy has rolled halfway down a slope
and is still moving. Which of the following values of kinetic energy (KE) and
gravitational potential energy (PE) is it likely to have?
A. 36.0 J of KE and 0 J of PE.
B. 37.0 J of KE and 10 J of PE.
C. 38.10 J of KE and 10 J of PE.
D. 39.10 J of KE and 0 J of PE.
Answer is C: the total amount of PE + KE must still be 20 J. As the ball has
rolled halfway down the slope, half of its gravitational potential energy has
been transformed into kinetic energy.
8. Which one of the following statements does NOT accurately describe energy?
A. Energy can be created but not destroyed.
B. The total amount of all types of energy remains constant.
C. The energy gained by an object is the amount of work done on the object.
D. Energy is the heat given out when oxidation occurs.
Answer is A: Energy can be neither created nor
destroyed.
9. What is a person’s metabolic rate defined as? The rate
A. of energy utilisation by their body.
B. of energy utilisation by their body during ‘absolute rest’.
C. at which they consume oxygen.
D. at which they produce heat.
Answer is A: Choice B refers to basal metabolic rate, which may be measured
by oxygen consumption while at rest.
10. Consider a person whose diet provides a daily energy intake of 10,500 kJ and
whose daily activities result in their body consuming 9500 kJ of energy daily.
If this situation continues for several months the possible outcome would be:
A. a gradual rise in basal metabolic rate.
B. The person increases their mass by several kilograms of fat tissue
C. The energy requirements of daily activities will rise to consume 10,500 kJ
D. An increase in radiation from the body to dissipate excess energy
Answer is B: If energy intake is greater than energy expenditure, the person
will store the excess energy as fat, so will get fatter.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
496 20 Energy and Heat

11. When the label on a packaged food item states that 100 g contains 650 kJ of
energy, it means that
A. the human body is able to extract 650 kJ of heat and useful work by
digest- ing the food.
B. 650 kJ of energy was consumed in growing or producing or making the
food.
C. 650 kJ of heat energy is released when 100 g of the food is burned in an
atmosphere of pure oxygen.
D. ultimately your body will be able to perform 650 kJ of work for every 100
g of the food that you eat.
Answer is C: Food energy values are determined by burning a sample of the
food in a calorimeter and measuring the heat produced. If the body was 100 %
efficient, choice A would be true.
12. In order to lose body fat, diet and exercise must be organized so that the
energy value of the food intake is
A. less than the energy used daily.
B. more than the energy used daily.
C. equal to the daily energy use.
D. greater than the daily exercise.
Answer is A: If more energy is expended than is taken in as food, the body
will use some of its energy stored as fat, to make up the difference. Hence the
per- centage of body mass that is fat will decrease.
13. A block of wood (a poor conductor of heat) whose temperature is 15 °C is
placed in contact with a block of steel (a good conductor of heat) of the same
size but whose temperature is 20 °C. Both are touched with a hand whose skin
temperature is 28 °C. Which of the following is true?
A. The steel block will feel colder than the wood.
B. The wood block will withdraw more heat from the hand than will the steel
block.
C. Heat will flow from the steel block to the wood block.
D. Heat will flow from the steel block to the hand.
Answer is A: “Feeling colder” is somewhat subjective. Placing a warm hand
against a steel block at a lower temperature will make the hand feel cold as
heat flows from the hand to all parts the steel block. Wood does not produce
this feeling as it conducts heat poorly so the hand will soon warm up the
wood in contact with it. Choice C will happen only slightly as the wood block
is a poor conductor of heat.
14. What is heat? It is a
A. measure of the temperature of an object.
B. transfer of energy by convection currents.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
20 Energy and Heat 497

C. measure of the average translational kinetic energy of the particles.

D. form of energy transfer along a temperature gradient.
Answer is D: Heat is the energy that is transferred between 2 objects due to
their difference in temperature. Choice C refers to the temperature of an
object.
15. Which of the statements about heat is true? Heat is
A. one of the forms of infra-red radiation.
B. transmitted through a solid object by convection currents.
C. a measure of the temperature of an object.
D. the flow of energy from one body to another at a lower temperature.
Answer is D: Heat is the energy that is transferred between 2 objects due to
their difference in temperature. Infra-red radiation is one form of heat (but not
the reverse).
16. What does kinetic theory allows us to understand that the temperature of an
object measures? The
A. heat that it contains.
B. average kinetic energy of its particles.
C. hotness or coldness of it.
D. number of degrees kelvin it is.
Answer is B: All particles of an object move or vibrate. Temperature is the
aver- age kinetic energy of the particles of an object.
17. What may the ‘thermal energy’ of the particles in an object be defined as?
A. the amount of heat that is contained in the object.
B. sum of the random translational, rotational and vibrational kinetic
energies.
C. sum of the random translational, rotational and vibrational kinetic energies
and the work done to overcome the intermolecular forces.
D. average random kinetic energy of the particles.
Answer is B: In gases, thermal energy is energy stored as kinetic energy, rota-
tional motion, vibrational motion and associated potential energies In other
substances, in cases where some of the thermal energy is stored in atomic
vibra- tion or by increased separation of particles having mutual forces of
attraction, the thermal energy is partitioned between potential energy and
kinetic energy.
18. Which of the following factors contributes LEAST to the human sensation of
‘hot’ or ‘cold’ when an object is touched?
A. The amount of heat in the object.
B. The temperature of the object being touched.
C. The thermal conductivity of the object.
D. The local skin temperature.
Answer is A: The amount of heat in an object depends on the size of the
object. The sensation of hot or cold depends on the other three things.
ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
498 20 Energy and Heat

19. Two identical beakers hold 100 ml and 200 ml of water at 20 °C. They are
heated for one minute each using the same Bunsen burner flame and their
tem- perature is measured. What will their temperatures be?
A. the same but the heat transferred to them will be different.
B. the same and so will be the heat transferred to them.
C. different but the heat transferred to them will be the same
D. different and so will be the heat transferred to them.
Answer is C: The heat transferred to them will be the same as the Bunsen
burner flame was the same as was the time of heating. Their temperatures will
be different as the greater volume of 200 ml of water requires more heat to
reach the same temperature as the smaller volume.
20. How does a clinical (or fever) thermometer differ from a standard
thermometer?
A. It contains mercury.
B. It is a maximum reading thermometer.
C. It measures temperature in kelvins.
D. It contains a capillary tube.
Answer is B: A clinical thermometer should maintain its reading (be
maximum reading) so that the value does not change when it is removed from
the measur- ing site.
21. To convert 30 °C into degrees kelvin what must be done?
A. add 212.
B. subtract 212.
C. add 273.
D. subtract 273.
Answer is C: degrees kelvin = degrees Celsius + 273
22. The thermodynamic temperature scale has an ‘absolute zero’ at −273 °C. In
what sense is the zero is absolute?
A. it is 0 kelvin.
B. it is exactly 0.00000000… etc.
C. particle motion has ceased at this temperature.
D. it is impossible to reach this temperature.
Answer is C: As temperature is a measure of the kinetic energy of particles,
when all particle motion has stopped, temperature is at its lowest point and
can- not decrease further.
23. On a normal winter day, by what means does the human body lose most of its
heat?
A. convection.
B. conduction.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
20 Energy and Heat 499

C. radiation.
D. evaporation.
Answer is C: Heat loss through radiation (of infra-red radiation) occurs con-
tinuously and despite being clothed. Heat loss by conduction is low as clothes
are insulators and also decrease convection losses. Sweating will be low on a
cool winter day so evaporation will not be a major heat loss avenue.
24. What factor does NOT affect the amount of heat lost from the human body by
radiation?
A. The area of skin facing the external environment.
B. The temperature difference between the skin and the surroundings.
C. The surface area of the body.
D. The mass of the body.
Answer is D: Body mass produces heat, but radiative losses are affected by
the other three factors.
25. By what means does a person sitting in the shade of a tree on a very hot dry
summer day lose most of their heat? By
A. radiation.
B. conduction.
C. convection.
D. evaporation.
Answer is D: On a hot day sweating will be occurring and its evaporation into
a dry atmosphere would produce cooling. As the surroundings and air are hot,
not much heat will be lost by radiation, convection or conduction.
26. Why is heat loss from a hot object prevented when a material that is a poor
conductor of heat, is wrapped around a hot object? Because
A. the particles of the poor conductor easily transfer the kinetic energy of
their vibrations to their neighbors.
B. water vapour is prevented from escaping to the air.
C. it reflects radiated heat back into the hot object.
D. air trapped within the poor conductor prevents convection currents from
occurring.
Answer is D: In this case, “clothing” the object in an insulator, will prevent
air convection from carrying away the warm air in contact with the hot object.
Hence cool air is prevented from replacing the heated air.
27. Why does the evaporation of perspiration from our bodies cool our skin?
Because the evaporated water carries with it the
A. latent heat of vaporisation.
B. heat lost by radiation.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
500 20 Energy and Heat

C. latent heat of fusion.

D. heat lost by convection.
Answer is A: Radiation and convection are not involved. Latent heat of fusion
refers to the heat required to melt a solid, latent heat of vaporization refers to
the heat that leaves the body with the evaporated sweat.
28. What is the reason that the temperature of a substance does not rise while it is
in the act of melting, even if heat is added to it?
A. Melting will not occur until the latent heat of vaporisation has been sup-
plied, this prevents a rise in temperature until all the solid has melted.
B. The added heat energy is used to increase the vibrational and rotational
kinetic energies rather than the temperature (i.e. translational kinetic
energy) of the particles
C. The presence of colder unmelted particles alongside particles that are in
liquid form causes their temperature to remain low.
D. Any energy added to the substance is used to break the bonds that hold the
particles into the solid form so does not contribute to a temperature rise.
Answer is D: Once the bonds between the adjacent particles of a solid have
been broken, they are free to move about and the particles can increase their
kinetic energy, that is, rise in temperature.
29. Which of the following forms of heat therapy relies mainly on conduction?
A. heat lamp.
B. microwave diathermy.
C. hot water bottle.
D. ultrasound waves.
Answer is C: A hot water bottle will transfer heat to objects in contact with it.
The other three rely on a form of radiation.
30. What is the most effective way to deposit heat in bones and joints?
A. ultrasound.
B. infrared radiation.
C. conductive heating (heat packs).
D. diathermy.
Answer is A: Ultrasound is the most effective form of diathermy as bones
absorb ultrasound more effectively than soft tissue.
31. Which of the following is a biological mechanism of preventing heat loss?
A. the production and evaporation of sweat
B. increasing muscular activity
C. vasoconstriction of superficial blood vessels
D. seeking a warm environment
Answer is C: Vasoconstricting blood vessel close to the body surface will
with- draw blood from the surface and allow the skin temperature to cool.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
20 Energy and Heat 501

32. Which of the following would be the main mechanism of heat loss for a
student sitting in a lecture theatre while attending a lecture?
A. conduction
B. radiation
C. convection
D. evaporation of perspiration
Answer is B: Heat loss through radiation (of infra-red radiation) occurs con-
tinuously and despite being clothed. Heat loss by conduction is low as clothes
are insulators and also decrease convection losses. Sweating will be absent in
an air-conditioned lecture theatre.
33. Which of the following statements is correct? As a means of losing heat from
the body, evaporation of sweat works:
A. provided that the surrounding air is not saturated with water vapour.
B. provided that the surrounding environment is at a lower temperature that
the body.
C. because sweat is at a lower temperature than blood.
D. because a film of sweat acts as an absorber of infra-red radiation from the
surroundings.
Answer is A: Sweat will evaporate and cooling will be achieved as long as the
air is not already saturated with water vapour.
34. When the vibrating atoms of an object (at a temperature of 40 °C) pass on
energy to the more slowly vibrating atoms in an adjacent object with which it
is in contact (and which is at a lower temperature), what is this energy transfer
known as?
A. insulation
B. convection
C. radiation
D. conduction
Answer is D: Conduction is the transfer of heat between contacting objects at
different temperatures.
35. How does the body attempt to cope with hyperthermia?
A. by increasing muscular activity
B. with peripheral vasodilation and sweating
C. with peripheral vasoconstriction and shivering
D. by reducing heat loss by radiation and convection
Answer is B: Hyperthermia is a body temperature that is too high. Hence the
body must lose heat by evaporating sweat. Vasodilation brings more blood
closer to the surface allowing radiation loss to increase.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
502 20 Energy and Heat

36. What does “hypothermia” refer to?

A. a body temperature below 41 °C
B. a body temperature below 38 °C
C. a body temperature below 35 °C
D. a body temperature above 38 °C
Answer is C: Hypothermia is a body temperature that is below the healthy
range. That is, below 35 °C
37. In what situation will the ability to lose heat by evaporation of sweat be
diminished?
A. When the body is dehydrated.
B. When the ambient temperature of the surrounding environment is signifi-
cantly higher than body temperature.
C. When the relative humidity of the surrounding air is very low.
D. When very little bare skin is exposed.
Answer is A: If the body is dehydrated, its ability to secrete sweat is dimin-
ished. The amount of bare skin does not affect sweating.
38. The amount of heat lost as radiation depends on the following things except
one. Which one?
Answer is A: Radiation will occur whether the skin is covered by clothing or
not.
39. What is a definition of the temperature of an object?
A. Temperature is a measure of the average kinetic energy of the particles of
the object
B. Temperature is the amount of heat energy contained within the object.
C. Temperature is the amount of energy that flows from the object being
mea- sured, to the thermometer
D. Temperature is a measure of the hotness (or coldness) of the object.
Answer is A: The faster the particles of an object are vibrating, the higher is
its temperature. Temperature is the average kinetic energy of its particles.
40. Which of the listed factors does NOT affect the amount of heat that the
human body loses by radiation?
A. the temperature difference between the skin and the surroundings
B. an individual’s behaviour
C. being wrapped in a “space blanket” with a silver foil lining.
D. the area of uncovered skin
Answer is D: Heat will be lost by radiation even through clothing. A person
may seek a cool environment to maximize their heat loss to the environment,
so their behavior may influence heat loss. A silver foil lining will reflect infra-
red radiation back towards the body.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
20 Energy and Heat 503

41. In which situation will the evaporation of sweat from the skin be ineffective
as a heat loss method?
A. the air temperature is greater than human body temperature.
B. the air temperature is less than human body temperature.
C. the surrounding air is saturated with water vapor.
D. the human body is immersed in the water of a swimming pool.
Answer is C: Sweat will evaporate only if the surrounding air is not already
saturated with water vapor. High humidity decreases the effectiveness of
sweat- ing as a heat loss mechanism.
42. Which mechanism of heat loss from the human body is minimised by wearing
clothes?
A. convection of air
B. radiation to the environment
C. warming of inhaled air to body temperature before exhaling
D. evaporation of sweat
Answer is A: Clothes trap a layer of air close to the skin. This air is warmed
to skin temperature and is prevented from blowing away by being contained
within the clothing.
43. Evaporation of sweat cools our body because the evaporating water molecules
A. have a high heat capacity.
B. transfer kinetic energy away from us.
C. radiate heat away from us.
D. remove heat by conduction.
Answer is B: The water molecules in sweat that have the highest kinetic
energy are the ones that evaporate first. This leaves the slower moving
molecules behind and they have a lower temperature. These slower molecules
will gain energy from the body heat and eventually have enough kinetic
energy to evapo- rate, again cooling the body as more kinetic energy is
transferred away from the body.
44. Human body core temperature is usually maintained within which of the fol-
lowing ranges?
A. 35.0 to 37.5 °C
B. 36.5 to 38.5 °C
C. 36.5 to 37.5 °C
D. 35.0 to 38.5 °C
Answer is C: This is considered the usual healthy range. Above 38 is a fever
(except if as a result of vigorous exercise), while below 35 is hypothermia.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
504 20 Energy and Heat

45. What causes the cooling effect that we experience when sweating?
A. the emission of infra-red radiation
B. conduction of heat to the surrounding air then convection
C. dripping off of warm sweat from our skin
D. evaporating water molecules taking their kinetic energy with them
Answer is D: Evaporating water molecules take with them more kinetic
energy than the average amount. This decreases the average kinetic energy of
the remaining water molecules, hence leaving them at a lower temperature.
46. Hyperthermia is a core body temperature greater than which of the following
temperatures?
A. 36 °C
B. 37 °C
C. 38 °C
D. 39 °C
Answer is C: 38 is the lower limit of what is considered to be a fever in a
resting adult.
47. How does the evaporation of sweat work as a heat loss mechanism?
A. sweat is produced at a lower temperature than skin so cools the body by
conduction.
B. sweat promotes vasodilation which promotes heat loss by infra-red
radiation.
C. the water molecules with the greatest energy evaporate, leaving the
remain- ing ones at a lower temperature.
D. sweat flows across the skin surface so promotes heat loss by convection.
Answer is C: If the most energetic water molecules depart, the remainder will
have a lower average energy than before the fastest ones evaporated. This
means that the temperature of the remaining sweat will be lower.
48. What is the temperature (in °C) below which the body is said to be
hypothermic?
A. 38
B. 37
C. 36
D. 35
Answer is D: 35 is the upper limit of what is considered to be hypothermia in
an adult.
49. Which heat loss avenues are reduced by wearing clothes?
A. radiation and evaporation.
B. conduction and convection.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
20 Energy and Heat 505

C. evaporation and convection.

D. radiation and conduction.
Answer is B: Clothes trap air between the clothes and skin, minimising
convec- tion. Clothes lying between skin and a contacting surface insulate
against con- ducting losses. Radiation is not prevented by clothing.
50. What may be said about the amount of energy in the form of infra-red electro-
magnetic waves that is radiated from our bodies?
A. It depends on our body’s temperature.
B. It would be greater if our layer of subcutaneous fat was thicker.
C. It may be increased by contact between the body and an object with tem-
perature lower than the body’s temperature
D. It may be increased by exposing more bare skin.
Answer is A: The amount of energy radiated as infra-red depends on the body
temperature. (E ∝ T4)
51. Except for one situation described below, water molecules changing state
from liquid to gas are involved in the cooling effect. Which one?
A. a cold wind blowing against your skin
B. drying off after a swim.
C. the evaporation of sweat
D. the exhalation of breath from the lungs
Answer is A: A cold wind cools us by convection. It continually removes the
air that has been warmed by contact with the skin.
52. What is the healthy human core body temperature?
A. Below 38 °C except during fever
B. It lies between 36.5 and 37.5 °C
C. It lies between 36 and 37 °C
D. It lies between 37 and 38 °C
Answer is B: Healthy human body temperature is close to 37. It can be
elevated to 38 (and more) by vigorous activity.
53. How does subcutaneous adipose tissue assist the body to regulate its
temperature?
A. It conducts heat more readily than lean tissue so promotes heat loss.
B. It stores heat energy so acts like a “heat sink”.
C. It produces sweat for secretion via sweat glands.
D. It conducts heat less readily than lean tissue so insulates the body.
Answer is D: Adipose tissue (fat) conducts heat less readily than does lean tis-
sue. Hence a layer of fat insulates the body against heat loss.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
506 20 Energy and Heat

54. When is radiation an effective form of heat loss from the body?
A. When we expose a greater amount of bare skin.
B. When our body temperature is greater than that of our surroundings.
C. When blood vessels close to the body surface are vasoconstricted.
D. When our body temperature is less than that of our surroundings.
Answer is B: All objects radiate IR rays. If our body temp is greater than that
of our surroundings, we will radiate more than we absorb from the surround-
ings. It is body surface area, not amount of bare skin, that determines the
amount of energy radiated.
55. Which choice explains how the evaporation of sweat “cools” our body?
A. Evaporating water molecules carry with them more than the average
amount of kinetic energy which leaves the remaining molecules with a
lower aver- age kinetic energy.
B. The body loses more heat through the infrared radiation emitted by sweat
than it gains from the infrared radiation emitted by the surroundings.
C. Sweat is at a lower temperature than our core body temperature so sweat
on our skin cools us by conduction.
D. The water molecules in sweat are at a higher temperature than our core
body temperature so losing sweat leaves us cooler due to the mass of
water lost.
Answer is A: Water molecules have a range of KE. The water molecules with
the most KE are those that vaporise first. Sweat will be at the same
temperature as the skin it sits on.
56. Why does an ice pack applied to a bruise reduce swelling?
A. Less fluid leaks from the bruise due to the diminished nerve impulses.
B. It causes vasoconstriction.
C. It reduces the metabolic rate at the local site.
D. It increases the viscosity of blood below the ice pack.
Answer is B: If blood vessels constrict, less blood can flow out of them. Choices
C and D are true statements but are beside the point.
57. The skin is usually at a lower temperature than the body’s core temperature (37
°C). What is the reason for this?
A. The layer of adipose tissue in the hypodermis insulates the skin from the
core temperature.
B. The sweating mechanism is able to lower the skin’s temperature.
C. Vasoconstriction restricts the amount of blood that is brought close to the
skin surface.
D. Heat loss through conduction, convection and radiation keeps the skin at a
lower temperature.
Answer is C: Vasoconstriction limits the amount of blood (at 37) that flows near
the skin which allows the skin temperature to approach that of the
surroundings.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
20 Energy and Heat 507

58. A person lightly dressed in shorts, shoes and a shirt is sitting on a cushioned
chair in their shady backyard where the air temperature is 12 °C. There is no
wind yet they feel uncomfortably cool. What is their major avenue of heat
loss?
A. conduction
B. evaporation of sweat
C. radiation
D. convection
Answer is C: The lack of wind minimises convective loss, while the light
cloth- ing prevents conductive loss to the chair and ground. The low
temperature means that sweating is not occurring. Radiative loss will occur as
the body temperature is greater than that of the surroundings.
59. Why will the metal bell of a stethoscope that is at the room’s air temperature,
produce the sensation of cold when placed on the patient’s skin?
A. The skin is at a lower temperature than the bell.
B. The stethoscope bell is a good conductor of heat.
C. The stethoscope bell is a poor conductor of heat.
D. Sweat evaporating from under the bell cools the skin.
Answer is B: Being a good conductor of heat, the metal bell will gain heat
from the skin until all its mass reaches skin temperature. A non-conductor
would only gain heat until the surface in contact reached skin temperature.
60. Why does perspiring cause heat energy to be lost from the body? Because:
A. being at a lower temperature than the skin, sweat cools skin by
conduction.
B. evaporating water molecules remove heat in the form of their own kinetic
energy.
C. the presence of sweat on the skin prevents infra-red radiation being
absorbed.
D. sweat on the skin allows heat to be lost to the air by conduction.
Answer is B: Vaporising water molecules carry away mare than the average
kinetic energy. Temperature of an object is the average kinetic energy of its
particles. The skin surface is left at a lower temperature.
61. In which situation will the skin lose heat by conduction to an object that is in
contact with it? When the
A. object is a good conductor of heat.
B. skin is not covered by clothing.
C. object is a poor conductor of heat.
D. object is at a lower temperature than the skin
Answer is D: For the skin to lose (rather than gain) heat, the object in contact
must be at a lower temperature than the skin, regardless of whether it is a
good or poor conductor.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
508 20 Energy and Heat

62. Which of the following is the most acceptable definition of the term “power”?
A. the rate of doing work.
B. that which is stored and can be fully recovered and converted to kinetic
energy.
C. the concept applied to that which gives an object the ability to do work.
D. the sum of an object’s potential and kinetic energies.
Answer is A: Power refers to how fast work is done. That is, the time taken
for the energy in joules to be used. The unit of power is the “watt” which is
the same as joules per second.
63. Which of the following correctly states the principle of conservation of energy
in terms of the human body? (assume no foodstuffs are consumed and no
urine or faeces are excreted).
A. Q = s × m × ΔT (Q = energy, s = specific heat of tissue, m = body mass,
T = body temperature)
B. The energy stored in the human body is equal to the energy lost from the
body plus the work done by the body.
C. The energy value of the food we eat must exceed the energy value of the
muscular activity we perform.
D. The change in the energy stored in the body is equal to the heat lost from
the body plus the work done by the body.
Answer is D: Energy that leaves the body (without mass) must be in the form
of heat loss or work done by body movements. The formula in A may be used
to determine the energy value of a food burned in a calorimeter.
64. Which of the statements is a description of basal metabolic rate in a human?
A. The sum total of the energy released per minute by all of the chemical
reac- tions that occur in the body.
B. the rate of energy utilisation during “absolute rest”.
C. The power generated by the body’s activities.
D. The oxygen consumption (in l/min) of an individual.
Answer is B: “Basal” metabolic rate refers to the minimum amount. This
occurs when there is no movement (apart from breathing and cardiovascular
move- ments) and little mental activity.
65. Which explanation of the cooling effect produced by an ice-pack when
applied to the skin is the best one?
A. Cold applied to the skin causes vasodilation thus allowing more blood to
pass through the tissue adjacent to the ice pack and be cooled.
B. Heat withdrawn from the body is used to provide the ice with the latent
heat of vaporisation it requires to melt, until melting is complete, the
tempera- ture of the icepack remains constant.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ
20 Energy and Heat 509

C. Cold transfers along its temperature gradient – from ice pack to skin – the
melting ice & water mixture ensures good contact with the skin.
D. Heat withdrawn from the body (at 37 °C) is used to provide the ice (at 0
°C) with the latent heat of fusion it requires to melt, until melting is
complete, the temperature of the icepack doesn’t rise appreciably.
Answer is D: Cold cause vasoconstriction no vasodilation. Body heat
provides the icepack with latent heat of fusion (melting) not vaporisation.
Heat transfers, not “cold”.
66. Which is the correct distinction between temperature and heat?
A. Temperature is a measure of the amount of heat in an object and heat is
the energy that flows between objects which have different temperatures.
B. Heat is a measure of the energy contained within an object and
temperature is the objective measurement of heat.
C. Temperature is a measure of the average kinetic energy of particles and
heat is the energy that flows between objects as a result of a
temperature difference.
D. Heat is the energy that flows from a cold object to a hotter object and tem-
perature measures the average random kinetic energy of the particles.
Answer is C: Heat flows from the object at higher temperature to the object at
lower temperature. Choices A and B have nonsense as their reference to
temperature.
67. A cold pack, applied to reduce swelling, is more effective if it contains
melting ice at 0 °C rather than water at 0 °C. Why is this?
A. Because ice cools by conduction whereas water cools by convection.
B. Because initially the melting ice is colder than the cold water.
C. Because ice has a higher latent heat of vaporisation than water.
D. Because melting ice remains at 0 °C until it has all melted.
Answer is D: The heat that transfers from the bruised part is used to break the
bonds between adjacent water molecules to melt the ice, rather than to
increase the kinetic energy of the molecules. Temp measures the average
kinetic energy of the molecules. Hence temperature does not rise until all the
ice has melted.

ERRNVPHGLFRV RUJ